babbitt_attic_ionic_greek.epub. Quelltext gemeinfrei (Public Domain).A Grammar of Attic and Ionic Greek
by Frank Cole Babbitt
American Book Company, New York / Cincinnati / Chicago, 1902 — Public Domain.
Digital text (typeset, no OCR): azbyka.ru
Frederick DeForest Allen
On August 4, 1897, occurred the sudden death of Frederick DeForest Allen, Ph.D., Professor of Classical Philology in Harvard University. Of the loss which classical scholarship has suffered by his death I need not speak here. His thoroughness and accuracy, his intrepid regard for the truth, and his keen, unbiased judgment are well known both to his former pupils and to the larger world which has read his published writings.
Shortly before his death he invited me to join with him in compiling a small Greek Grammar. During the two weeks immediately preceding his death we had worked together as far as the third declension, and had discussed somewhat the general plan of the book. After his death the publishers expressed a desire that I should complete the work which had been thus, begun a desire with which I could not refuse to comply. The task has been one of sadness and of joy: of sadness, because at every turn I missed the strong counsel of a consummate scholar; of joy, at the thought that I might thus, even in some slight measure, help to perpetuate the memory of a man whose name will always stand for what is highest and best in scholarship.
To the memory of Frederick DeForest Allen this book is affectionately inscribed.
Copyright, 1902, by
FRANK COLE BABBITT.
At. And ion. Greek.
W. P. I.
Preface
This grammar has for its purpose to state the essential facts and principles of the Greek language in concise form, with only so much discussion as may reasonably be demanded for a clear understanding of the subject.
While in recent years the ability to read a language has rightly come to be regarded as the proper test of a real knowledge of it, this point of view, so far from belittling the study of formal grammar, more than ever insists that a thorough knowledge of the essentials of the grammar is the most important part of the equipment of him who would read a language with ease. By essentials is meant no antiquated lore about the vocative of θεός or of ἀδελφός, but the recurrent facts of inflection and syntax, nominative χώρα, genitive χώρᾱς, and so forth, with such side lights as can be brought to bear to make these facts easier of acquisition and comprehension. A considerable experience in elementary teaching has convinced me that explanations are extremely useful, even to very young pupils; and I am persuaded that an occasional appeal to the reason rather than to the sheer memory of the pupil will not always prove futile.
The work was begun in collaboration with the late Professor Frederick de Forest Allen, and, in justice to his memory, it is proper to state that pages 13–36 and 40–46 stand practically as they were composed by Professor Allen and myself working together. For the remainder I am solely responsible.
It was the intention at the beginning to prepare a grammar for use in the secondary schools. As the work progressed, however, I found that, with but a slight increase of bulk, it would be possible to include also as much grammatical information as is usually required by students in college. With these additions, this work meets the needs of secondary schools, and at the same time is sufficient for all ordinary demands of the college course.
The book incorporates the results of the more recent philological studies. The doctrine of the Ablaut is stated untechnically, and it is given proper prominence in inflection and word formation.
Due regard is paid to the fact that analogy plays an important part in language, and that the context is not to be neglected in determining the exact significance of mode and tense.
Ionic forms are given in footnotes instead of being combined with Attic forms, and this arrangement is followed also in the Syntax and the verb list ; the reason for so doing is apparent to anybody who has ever taught Greek prose composition.
Contract forms are given in the contracted form followed by the uncontracted form (which is often purely theoretical) in parentheses, and it is hoped that pupils will realize that the Attic Greeks said ποιῶ, and not ποιέω.
In the examples under Inflection and Word Formation the letter or syllable to which attention is directed is made prominent by full-faced type; in the Syntax the same result is accomplished by spacing the word. The paradigms have been written to conform to our present knowledge, although some matter has been retained solely because it has become so engrafted in current texts that it could not be omitted.
So, also, in the matter of Homeric forms, I have, I trust, given due consideration to the vulgate. A few things I have omitted entirely; others I have recorded for the reason given in the preceding paragraph. Yet I am convinced that if our schools should adopt a fairly conservative text of the Homeric poems like that of Cauer, from which assimilated verbs and forms like Αἰόλου, σπῆι, and the like, have been banished, it would lighten the task of instruction, and the time given to explaining unnecessary forms could be better devoted to other purposes.
In selecting examples to illustrate the chapter on Syntax, I have given preference to those from authors and works commonly read at the earlier stages of the pupil's progress. By printing the examples in the same type as the rest of the matter, the number of pages in the chapter on Syntax has been considerably increased, but the gain in clearness, and in the prominence of the examples, more than offsets the apparent increase in bulk.
In the treatment of Syntax I have been conservative, although I have allowed myself some license in changing the conventional arrangement of the material. In addition to the books mentioned on pages 6 and 7, I have found helpful also the two well-known grammars of this country, as well as those of Sonnenschein, Kaegi, Lattmann-Muller, and Hahnés Grieehische Syntax.
Space does not permit me to enumerate all the friends who by advice or suggestion have given me help, but I desire in particular to express my gratitude to Professor George Edwin Howes of the University of Vermont, who has read at least twice every portion of the proofs. To his scholarship and sound common sense I am indebted for many helpful suggestions and corrections. Likewise to Professor Clifford H. Moore and Mr. William Fenwick Harris of Harvard University, who have also read the proofs, I am indebted for numerous corrections and helpful suggestions. Others whom I should like to mention also by name I am obliged to include in a general acknowledgment.
I shall be grateful for corrections and suggestions from any source.
podpisFRANK COLE BABBITTpodpis
podpisHartford, Connecticut,
podpisMarch 1901.
* * *
No conscientious teacher will find answered in this book all of the many perplexing questions which will arise in his mind. The following list contains the titles of the most important modern works on Greek Grammar, in which such questions are fully discussed (and sometimes answered):
KUHNER, R. Ausfiihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache. 3te Auflage in neuer Bearbeitung besorgt von Friedrich Blass. Hannover, 1890–1898. 8vo.
Teil I. 1, 2. Elementar- und Formenlehre. S. xxiii + 645, xi + 652. Teil II. 1. Satzlehre. In neuer Bearbeitung besorgt von Bernhard Gerth. S. ix + 666.
(The most comprehensive work on Greek grammar. A model of careful and accurate scholarship. Thoroughly conservative.)
MEYER, GUSTAV. Griechische Grammatik. 3te Auflage. S. xviii + 715. Leipzig, 1896. 8vo. (Bibliothek indogermanischer Grain- matiken. Bd. III.)
(Deals with the sounds and inflections only, from the point of view .of Comparative Grammar. Full, accurate, and moderately conservative.)
BRUGMANN, KARL. Griechische Grammatik. (Lautlehre, Stammbildungs- und Flexionslehre und Syntax.) 3te Auflage. S. xix + 632. Miinchen, 1900. 8vo. (In Miiller, I. von. Handbuch der Klassischen Altertums-Wissenschaft. Bd. II. Abt. 1.)
(Written from the point of view of Comparative Grammar. Briefer than Meyer, and more radical.)
MEISTERHANS, K. Grammatik der attischen Inschriften. 3te Auflage. S. XIV. + 288. Berlin, 1900. 8vo.
(Deals with inscriptions only. Most of the results are embodied in Kiihner-Blass.)
GILDERSLEEVE, B. L. Syntax of Classical Greek from Homer to Demosthenes. Pt. I. N. Y., 1900. 8vo.
(Clear and accurate in statement, and remarkable for the excellent collection and arrangement of examples.)
GOODWIN, WM. WATSON. Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. Rewritten and enlarged, pp. xxxii + 464 + 8. Boston, U.S.A., 1890. 8vo.
(Deals fully and thoroughly with the syntax of the verb.)
BLASS, FRIEDRICH. Pronunciation of Ancient Greek. Tr. from the 3d German ed. by W. J. Purton. Cambridge, Eng., 1890. 8vo.
(A careful collection and consideration of the evidence relating to the pronunciation of ancient Greek.)
SMYTH, HERBERT WEIR. The Sounds and Inflections of the Greek Dialects. Ionic, pp. xxviii + 668. Oxford, 1894. 8vo.
(Thoroughly accurate and reliable. Contains a full treatment of the dialect of Herodotus.)
VAN LEEUWEN, J. Enchiridium Dictionis Epicae. pp. Ixxii + 606. Lugd. Batavorum, 1892–1894. 8vo.
(Entirely radical, but invaluable for the very full collection of material which it contains.)
MONRO, D. B. A Grammar of the Homeric Dialect. 2d ed. pp. xxiv + 436. Oxford, 1891. 8vo.
(Deals more particularly with Homeric syntax. Accurate, reliable, but very conservative).
List of abbreviations
| ace. = accusative. | i.e. = that is. | pass. = passive. |
| act. = active, actively. | impf. = imperfect. | pers. = person. |
| adj. = adjective. | impv. = imperative. | perf., pf. = perfect. |
| advb. = adverb. | indic. = indicative. | plur., pl. = plural. |
| aor. = aorist. | infin. = infinitive. | plupf. = pluperfect. |
| cf. = compare. | κτλ. = καὶ τὰ λοιπά (and the rest). | pres. = present. |
| D = dual. | lit. = literal, literally. | q.v. = which see. |
| dat. = dative. | masc. = masculine. | sc. = scilicet. |
| decl. = declension. | mid. = middle. | S., sing. = singular. |
| e.g. = for example. | Mss. = manuscripts. | subj. = subjunctive. |
| encl. = enclitic. | neut. = neuter. | viz. = namely. |
| etc. = and so forth. | nom. = nominative. | voc. = vocative. |
| f., ff. = following. | opt. = optative. | §, §§ = section, sections. |
| fern. = feminine. | P. = plural. | |
| fut. = future. | partic. = participle. | |
| gen. = genitive. |
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN CITING EXAMPLES FROM GREEK AUTHORS
| Aesch. = Aeschylus. | E. = Euripides. | Menex. = Menexenus. |
| Ag. = Agamemnon. | Alc. = Alcestis. | Phaed. = Phaedo. |
| Pr. Prometheus. | And. = Andromache. | Phaedr. = Phaedrus. |
| Aeschin. = Aeschines. | El. = Electra. | Hep. = Republic. |
| Ar. = Aristophanes. | Hec. = Hecuba. | S. = Sophocles. |
| Ach. = Acharnenses. | Hel. = Helena. | Aj. = Ajax. |
| Eq. = Equites. | H. F.=Hercules Furens. | Ant. = Antigone. |
| Nub. = Nubes. | Hipp. = Hippolytus. | El. = Electra. |
| Ran. = Ranae. | I. T. = Iphigenia Taurica. | O.T. = Oedipus Tyrannus. |
| V. = Vespae. | Med. = Medea. | Th. = Thucydides. |
| Hm. = Homer; A, B, Г, etc. are | Supp. = Supplices. | Xn. = Xenophon. |
| used in referring to the books | Tro. = Troades. | A. = Anabasis. |
| of the Iliad, and α, β, γ, etc. in | Isoc. = Isocrates. | Ages. = Agesilaus. |
| referring to the books of the | Lys. = Lysias. | Cy. = Cyropaedia. |
| Odyssey. | PI. = Plato. | Hell. = Hellenica. |
| Ap. = Apology. | Hier. = Hiero. | |
| Hdt. = Herodotus. | Crit. = Crito. | Mem. = Memorabilia. |
| Hes. = Hesiod. | Go. = Gorgias. | Oec. = Oeconomicus. |
| O. D. = Opera et Dies. | Leg. = Leges. | Symp. = Symposium. |
Introduction. The Greek Language
Greek is the language of a people inhabiting not only the mainland of Greece, but also the islands of the Aegean Sea and the adjacent shores, together with a small part of Italy. The Greeks called themselves Hellenes (Ἕλληνες), but the Romans called them Graeci, and hence the English word Greek.
The Greek language belongs to the Indo-European group of languages, and is related to Sanskrit, Latin, Persian, Slavonic, Celtic, and Germanic. Hence comes the relation which exists between many English and Greek words. A greater number of English words, however, are derived directly from Greek words. For example, English know is the same as Greek γι-γνώ-σκω, but the English words gnomic and arithmetic are derived from the Greek γνωμικός and ἀριθμητική.
For over twenty-five hundred years Greek has been spoken and written, with such changes as are inevitable in the growth and development of any language, but the masterpieces of Greek literature were written some centuries before the Christian era. In the neighborhood of 400 b.c. Greek may be said to have reached its highest development, and it is customary to take the language of that time as a sort of standard.
In ancient times the Greek people did not all speak their language just alike, but each little country had its own dialect, which often differed considerably from the dialect of a neighboring country only a few miles away. All the dialects may be roughly divided into three different groups; namely, Aeolic, Doric, and Ionic. To the Ionic group belongs the Ionic dialect proper, together with the dialect of Attica, which is known as Attic.
In the Ionic dialect were written, among other things, the poems of Homer and Hesiod, and the history of Herodotus. In the Attic dialect were written nearly all the other great works of Greek literature which have come down to us, and which, either directly, or through the medium of their Latin imitations, have influenced to such a vast extent the literature of the world. The dramatic poets Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and Aristophanes, the historians Thucydides and Xenophon, the orators Lysias and Demosthenes, and the philosopher, Plato, all wrote in the Attic dialect.
Attic, the most elegant and refined of all the Greek dialects, finally superseded the others in literary use. At the same time it began to lose some of its earlier purity and refinements, and after about 330 b.c. it is known as the κοινή or Common Greek. From this Common Greek there was evolved in the long course of years, with a considerable admixture of foreign elements, the present language of the Greek people, Romaic or Modern Greek.
Modern Greek differs so considerably from Ancient Greek, that, although a knowledge of it is helpful, yet one can soonest learn to comprehend the great works of Greek literature by studying directly the language of Ancient Greece.
This grammar deals only with the Attic and Ionic dialects of Ancient Greek.
Writing and sound
V · Alphabet
1. Greek is written with the following twenty-four letters:
| Form | Name | Latin Equivalent | |
| Α α | ἄλφα | alpha | a |
| Β β | βῆτα | beta | b |
| Γ γ | γάμμα | gamma | g |
| Δ δ | δέλτα | delta | d |
| Ε ε | εἶ (ἔψῑλόν) | ei (epsilon) | ĕ |
| Ζ ζ | ξῆτα | zeta | z |
| Η η | ἦτα | eta | ē |
| Θ θ ϑ | θῆτα | theta | th |
| Ι ι | ἰῶτα | iota | i |
| Κ κ | κάππα | kappa | c, k |
| Λ λ | λάβδα (λάμβδα) | labda (lamda) | l |
| Μ μ | μῡ | mü | m |
| Ν ν | νῡ | nü | n |
| Ξ ξ | ξεῑ (ξῑ) | xei (xi) | x |
| Ο ο | οὖ (ὂμικρóν) | ou (όmicron) | ŏ |
| Π π | πεῑ (πῑ) | pei (pi) | p |
| Ρ ρ | ῥῶ | rho | r |
| Σ σ ς | σίγμα | sigma | s |
| Τ τ | ταῡ | tau | t |
| Υ υ | ὖ (ὖψῑλóν) | ü (üpsilon) | y |
| Φ φ | φεῑ (φῑ) | phei (phi) | ph |
| Χ χ | χεῑ (χῑ) | chei (chi) | ch |
| Ψ ψ | ψεῑ (ψῑ) | psei (psi) | ps |
| Ω ω | ὦ (ὦμέγα) | ō (ómega) | ō |
1. The names in parentheses came into use in the Middle Ages, but are now commonly employed.
Sigma at the end of a word has the form ς; in any other place the form σ. Thus, στάσις faction.
2. The letter F, ϝ, called vau or digamma, early ceased to be used in Attic and Ionic Greek. It had the sound of English w, and stood in the alphabet between ε and ζ. For other obsolete letters see § 1561.
V · Vowels
3. The vowels ε and ο are always short, η and ω are always long. The vowels α, ι, υ, are short in some words and long in others. In this grammar they are marked ᾱ, ῑ, ῡ, when long. The unmarked α, ι, υ, are, therefore, understood to be short. The mark of length is omitted over circumnexed vowels (§ 58).
4. The Attic sounds of the vowels, at about 400 b.c., are believed to have been nearly as follows:
| Long Vowels | Short Vowels |
| ᾱ as a in par. | a as a in papa |
| η as ệ in French fệte. | ε as e in pet. |
| ῑ as i in machine. | ι as i in pit. |
| ω as ο in prone. | ο as o in obey. |
| ῡ as ȗ in French sȗr. | υ as u in French butte |
1. The sounds of ῡ and υ are midway between English oo and ee. They are exemplified also in the German ü, as in Füsse, Brücke.
V · Diphthongs
52. A diphthong is a combination of two vowels in one syllable. The latter vowel is always ι or υ. The diphthongs are:
| αι, ει, οι, υι, | αυ, ευ, ου |
| ᾷ, ῃ, ῳ, | ηυ |
1. In the diphthongs ᾷ, ῃ, ῳ, the ι is written below the first vowel, and is called iota subscript. When, however, the first vowel is written as a capital letter, ι stands on the line: thus, Ἅιδης Hades. The ancients always wrote i in these diphthongs on the line.
6. The sounds of the principal diphthongs, at about 400 b.c., were very nearly as follows:
| αι like ai in aisle. | αυ like ou in our. |
| ει like ei in rein. | ευ like eu in feud. |
| οι like oi in toil. | ου like ou in you. |
| ου like ui in quit. | |
1. In ᾷ, ῃ, ῳ, the ι was originally sounded. But later (about 100 b.c.) it became silent, and these diphthongs have since been pronounced like simple ᾱ, η, ω.
2. The sound of ηυ cannot be exemplified from English, but may be represented as ēh-oo, pronounced quickly together.
3. In the earliest times, the diphthongs ει and ου had, in some words at least, actual double sounds, such as their composition would indicate, and differed in pronunciation from the apparent diphthongs ει and ου, which arise from contraction of ε-ε, ο-ο, ο-ε, or ε-ο (see § 18, 3 and 5) or from compensative lengthening (see § 16). Thus, ει in γένει is made up of ε+ι (see § 18,1 and § 106), but in θεἰς for ⃰θεντς (see § 16,1) ει is merely lengthened from ε. In early inscriptions the real diphthongs ει and ου were written ΕΙ and ΟΓ, while the apparent diphthongs were written with simple Ε and Ο. Later (soon after 400 b.c.) both kinds of diphthongs came to be pronounced and written alike.
Diaeresis
7. The mark of diaeresis (΅) is sometimes written over an ι or υ, to show that it does not combine with the preceding vowel to form a diphthong: thus, βοϊ, pronounced in two syllables, bo-ί.
V · Breathings
83. A vowel at the beginning of a word always has a breathing, either rough or smooth.
The rough breathing (‛) shows that the vowel was pronounced with the sound of h preceding. Thus, ἑπτά seven is pronounced heptά.
The smooth breathing (’) shows that the vowel was pronounced with no sound of h. Thus, ἀπό from is pronounced αρό.
1. The mark of breathing is written over small letters and in front of capitals: thus, ἀληθής true, Ἀρκάς Arcadian.
2. In a diphthong, however, the breathing is written over the second vowel: thus, Αἰνείᾱς Aeneas, αὐτός self.
Note. – But in the diphthongs ᾷ, ῃ, ῳ, the breathing never stands over the ι, even when this is written on the line: thus, Ἅιδης Hades, ᾠδή song.
9. The consonant ρ at the beginning of a word always has the rough breathing (ῥ) : thus, ῥήτωρ orator (Lat. rhetor).
10. It happens also that all words beginning with the letter υ have the rough breathing.
V · Consonants
11. The consonants were thus, pronounced:
| β like b in bad | θ like th in hothouse, later like th in thin. |
| γ “ g in go ( see also § 11,1). | λ “ l in lip. |
| δ “ d in dο | μ “ m in mix. |
| π “ p in pi | ν “ n in now |
| κ “ k in keg | ρ “ r in red (see also § 11,2). |
| τ “ t in top. | σ “ s in see. |
| φ “ ph in uphill, later like ph in graphic. | ζ “ English zd, later like English z. |
| χ “ kh in inkhorn, later like ch in German machen. | ξ “ x in mix; |
| ψ “ ps in gypsum. | |
1. Gamma (γ) before κ, γ, χ, ξ, represented the sound of n in ink, and is called gamma nasal: thus, ἀγκών (pronounced ankṓn) elbow, ἄγγελος (pronounced άngelos) messenger.
2. Rho (ρ) at the beginning of a word had a sound somewhat like hr (compare § 9).
Note. In Greek, every consonant was sounded. Thus, κτίσις a founding, φθίσις decay, ψεῠδος falsehood, were pronounced respectively ktisis, phthisis, pseudos.
12. The consonants may be divided into three classes, Semivowels, Mutes, and Double Consonants.
1. The semivowels are, λ, μ, ν, ρ, σ, and γ-nasal (§ 11, 1). Of these:
σ is called a Sibilant,
λ, μ, ν and ρ are called Liquids,
μ, ν and γ-nasal (§ 11, 1) are called Nasals.
2. The mutes may be classified as follows:
| Smooth | Middle | Rough | |
| Labial | π | β | φ |
| Lingual | τ | δ | θ |
| Palatal | κ | γ | χ |
Those in the same horizontal line are said to be Cognate, because they are produced by the same organ of speech (lips, tongue, or palate). Those in the same perpendicular line are said to be Co-ordinate, because they have the same degree of aspiration (or vocalization).
3. The double consonants are ζ, ξ, ψ. Of these, ξ is written for κσ, γσ, χσ, and ψ for πσ, βσ, or φσ.
V · Interchange of vowels
134. In the inflection and formation of words, short and long vowels of similar sound often interchange: thus, δί-δο-μεν we give, δί-δω-μι I give; λιμήν harbor, λιμέν of a harbor.
Note. The long vowel corresponding to α is often η (see § 15).
1. The corresponding short and long forms may be seen from the following table:
| Short | α | ε | ι | ο | υ |
| Long | ᾱ or η | η | ῑ | ω | ῡ |
14. The same root or suffix often appears with a different short vowel, as, for example, λέγ-ω speak, λόγ-ος speech; λύ-ο-μεν we loose, λύ-ε-τε you loose. Three different forms of this appearance are recognized, but the same root or suffix does not always present all three forms.
These forms are, (1) with ο, (2) with ε (3) with no vowel. Thus, ποτ-ᾱνός able to fly, πέτ-ομαι fly, ἐ-π τ-όμην fleiw.
1. But in case the third form (without the vowel) brings together a combination of consonants hard to pronounce, there is developed from the adjacent consonants in pronunciation a vowel sound, a. Thus, instead of *ἐ-τρ φ-ην, we have ἐτράφην was nourished, so that the series (of § 14) becomes (1) ο, (2) ε, (3) α: thus, τέ-τροφ-α have nourished, τρέφ-ω nourish, ἐ-τραφ-ην was nourished. (Compare English sing, sang, sung, and German sterben, starb, gestorben.*)
Note. An sometimes appears as the vowel-equivalent of ν: thus, παθος (for *πνθος) experience, suffering.
2. In combination with ι or υ the vowels e and ο, of course, make the corresponding diphthongs, so that we seem to have, on the one hand, an interchange of (1) οι, (2) ει, and (3) ι, and on the other, an interchange of (1) ου (rare), (2) ευ, and (3) υ ; but it will be seen at once that this apparent «interchange» is really the same phenomenon which has been described above (§ 14): thus,
| λέ-λοιπ-α have left | λείπ-ω leave | ἔ-λιπ-ον left |
| σπουδ-ή haste | σπεύδω hasten | |
| φεύγ-ω flee | ἔ-φυγ-ον fled |
3. The following table and examples may serve to make this principle clearer:
| 1. | 2. | 3. |
| ο | ε | – |
| ο | ε | (α) |
| οι | ει | – ι |
| ου | ευ | – υ |
| φόρ-ος tribute | bear | δί-φ ρος chariot |
| τρόπ-ος turning | turn | ἐ-τραπ-όμην turned |
| πέ-ποιθ-α trust | persuade | π ιθ-ανός persuasive |
| *χο(υ)-ή (§ 21) a pouring | ἔ-χε (υ)-α (§ 21) poured | ἐ-χ ύ-θην was poured |
155. In Attic, original ᾱ becomes η unless it is preceded by ε, ι, or ρ. Thus, original (Doric) φᾱ́μᾱ report becomes φήμη; but γενεᾱ́ generation, σοφίᾱ wisdom, πρâγμα deed retain α.
1. But a arising from contraction (§ 18) or compensative lengthening (§ 16) remains unchanged.
Compensative lengthening
16. A short vowel is sometimes lengthened, to make up for the loss of a following consonant. Thus, for *θεντ-ς we have μέλᾱ-ς black.
1. In this process, ε becomes ει (not η), and ο becomes ου (not ω). Thus, *θεντ-ς gives θεις, having placed, *δοντ-ς gives δούς having given.
Interchange of quantity
17. The combinations ᾱο and ηο often change to εω and ηα to εᾱ. Thus, νᾱός temple becomes νεώς, βασιλῆα king becomes βασιλέᾱ.
V · Contraction of vowels
186. Contraction unites into one long vowel or diphthong vowels which stand next each other in different syllables. The following are the most important rules for contraction. (Many of them admit occasional exceptions, § 715).
1. A vowel υ or ι unites with the preceding vowel to form a diphthong. Thus, γένε-ϊ gives γένει, πειθο-ϊ gives πειθοȋ, πρω-ϊ gives πρῲ.
2. Two like vowels unite in the common long. Thus, γέρα-α gives γέρᾱ, φιλέ-ητε gives φιλῆτε.
3. But ε–ε gives ει, and ο-ο gives ου (§ 6, 3). Thus, φίλε-ε gives φίλει, πλό-ος gives πλοῡς.
4. An o sound absorbs α, ε, or η, and becomes ω. Thus, ὀρά-ομεν gives ὁρῶμεν, φιλέ-ωσι gives φιλῶσι, δηλό-ητε gives δηλῶτε.
5. But ε-ο and ο-ε both give ου (§ 6, 3). Thus, γένε-ος gives γένους, δήλο-ε gives δήλου.
6. When α and ε or η come together, the first in order absorbs the second, and becomes long. Thus, γένε-α gives γένη, ὁρά-ητε gives ὁρȃτε.
19. A vowel standing before a diphthong is often contracted with the first vowel of the diphthong. The last vowel of the diphthong is regularly retained in the contracted form, but the apparent diphthongs ει and ου (§ 6, 3) are contracted, like simple ε and ο. Thus, τῑμά-ει gives τῑμᾷ (cf. § 5, 1), φιλέ-ει gives φιλεῑ, τῑμά-οιμι gives τῑμῲμι, λῡ́η–αι gives λῡ́ῃ, but τῑμά-ειν gives τῑμȃν, τῑμά-ον gives τῑμῶ (since ει and ου here are not real diphthongs; see § 6, 3).
Note 1. When three successive vowels are contracted, the last two are first contracted, and with the resulting diphthong the first vowel is then contracted. Thus, έτῑμάεο (for *ετῑμαε-ο-ο) you were being honored contracts first into ἐτῑμάου, and this in turn contracts into ἐτῑμῶ.
Note 2. Synizesis. Sometimes in poetry two vowels, without being regularly contracted, were so far united in pronunciation as to form one syllable. Thus, πόλεως might be pronounced as a word of two syllables, -εω- sounding somewhat like –υō-. This is called synizesis (setting together).
V · Omission of vowels
20. Between two consonants, a short vowel is sometimes dropped. (This is called Syncope.) Thus, ἔδται shall be, for ἔδεται ; ἦλθον came, for ἦλυθον.
21. Between two vowels, the vowels ι and υ are sometimes dropped. Thus, πλεί-ων more becomes πλείων ; *βασιλευ-ων becomes βασιλέων of kings.
CONSONANT CHANGES
Doubled consonants
227. Attic regularly has ττ in place of Ionic σσ.
The Ionic form, however, is adopted by some of the Attic poets and earlier writers of prose.
23. Whenever the initial ρ, by inflection or composition, has a single vowel brought before it, the ρ is doubled: thus, ῥέω flow, ἔρρει was flowing. A diphthong, however, does not cause the ρ to be doubled: thus, εὔ-ροος fairflowing.
24. The ρσ of earlier Attic later assimilates to ρρ. Thus, θάρσος courage later becomes θάρρος.
Mutes before mutes
25. Before a lingual mute, a labial or a palatal mute becomes coordinate (see § 12, 2).
For example, *γεγραφ-ται have been becomes γέγραπται has been written, *λελεγ-ται becomes λέλεκται has been said, *ἐλειπθην becomes ἐλείφθην was left, *έτριβ-θην becomes έτριφθην was rubbed.
26. A lingual mute before another lingual mute is changed to σ. Thus,*ιδ-τε becomes ἴστε you know, *έπειθθην becomes έπείσθην was persuaded.
Mutes before liquids
27. 1. Before μ a labial mute becomes μ. Thus, *λελειπ-μαι, becomes λέλειμμαι, have been left.
2. Before μ a palatal mute becomes γ. Thus, *πεπλεκ-μαι becomes πέπλεγμαι have been twisted.
3. Before μ a lingual mute becomes σ. Thus, *πεπειθ-μαι becomes πέπεισμαι have been persuaded.
Mutes before σ
28. A labial mute before σ unites with it to form ψ (cf. § 12, 3). Thus, *λειπ-σω becomes λείψω shall leave, *φλεβ-ς becomes φλἐψ; vein, *γραφ-σω becomes γράφω shall write.
29. A palatal mute before σ unites with it to form ξ (cf. § 12, 3). Thus, *κορακ-ς becomes κόραξ raven, *φλογ-ς becomes φλόξ flame, *βηχ-ς becomes βήξ cough.
308. A lingual mute, before σ is dropped. Thus, *σωματ-σι becomes σώμασι bodies (dat.), *ἐλπιδ-σι becomes ἐλπίδι hopes (dat.), *ὀρνῑθ-σι becomes ὄρνῑσι birds (dat.).
ν Before other consonants
31. When ν comes before a labial mute it changes to μ. Thus, *ἐν-πειρος becomes ἔμπειρος experienced, *ἐν-φανης becomes ἐμφανής visible, *ἐν-ψυχος becomes ἔμψυχος living.
32. When v comes before a palatal mute, it changes to γ-nasal. Thus, *συν-γενης; becomes συγγενής akin, *συν-χεω becomes συγχέω pour together.
33. When ν comes before λ, μ, or ρ it is assimilated. Thus, *ἐν-λειπω becomes ἐλλείπω leave in, *ἐν-μενω becomes ἐμμένω abide, *συν-ρεω becomes συρρέω flow together.
34. When ν comes before σ it is dropped (likewise ντ, and νθ, see § 30) and the preceding vowel is lengthened in compensation (see § 16). Thus, *μελαν-ς becomes μέλᾱς black, *λῡο-νσι becomes λῡ́ονσι they loose (§ 16, 1). Cf. § 99.
Disappearance of σ
359. When σ comes between two consonants, it is regularly dropped, and when two sigmas are brought together by inflection, one of them is dropped. Thus, *ἐσταλ-σθε becomes ἔσταλθε you have been sent, and *τειχεσ-σι becomes τείχεσι walls (dat.).
3610. When σ stands before a vowel at the beginning of a word, it is often changed to the rough breathing: thus, ἵστημι set, for *σι-στημι (Latin sisto).
37. When a comes between two vowels, it is regularly dropped: thus, γένεος (contracted γένεους) of a race for *γενεσ-ος (Latin generis).
V · Consonants with vowels
Metathesis
38. A vowel and a liquid are sometimes transposed. Thus, θάρσοσ and θράσοσ boldness.
1. Sometimes the vowel, standing after the liquid, has its long form (§ 13): τέμ-νω cut, perfect τέ-τμπ-κα have cut.
Consonants befoke ι
39. The vowel ι (which may sometimes have the value of a consonant), following certain consonants, gives rise to several changes. Thus:
1. With κ, χ, τ, or θ, an ι unites to form ττ (Ionic σσ, § 22): thus, φυλάττω guard, for *φυλάκ–ιω; νῆττα duck, for *νητ-ια; θάττων quicker, for *ταχ-ιων; (§ 41).
2. With γ or δ an ι unites to form ζ: μείζων greater, for *μεγ-ιων; ἐλπίζω hope, for ἐλπiδ-ιω.
3. With λ an ι forms λλ: βάλ-λω throw, for *βαλ-ιω.
4. With ν or ρ, an ι goes over to the preceding vowel and unites with it by contraction: μαίνομαι am mad, for *μαν-ιομαι.
V · Rejection or Transfer of Aspiration
40. The Greeks tried to avoid beginning two successive syllables with a rough mute (or a rough breathing). Thus, ἐ-τἐ–θην and ἐ-τύ-θην (instead of *ἐ-θε-θην and *ἐ-θυ-θην) are the aorists passive of τίθημι put and θῡ́ω sacrifice.
For the imperative ending –θι (changed to –τι) see § 233, 3; for the change of a rough mute to smooth in reduplication, see § 178.
4111. For the same reason, a few roots beginning with θ, and ending in φ or χ, preserve the rough mute only at the beginning or the end. So, when, in the process of inflection, the rough mute at the end disappears, the smooth mute at the beginning becomes rough. For example, τριχ-ὀς hair, gen. sing., has for its nominative θρίξ; τρέφν nourish has for its future θρέψω; the root ταφ– becomes θαπ– in θάπ- in θάπ-τω bury.
V · Hiatus (Crasis and Elison)
42. Hiatus occurs when a word ending in a vowel is followed by a word beginning with a vowel.
Hiatus was usually avoided in Greek by means of (1) Crasis, (2) Elision, or (3) the addition of a Movable Consonant.
Crasis
43. Crasis (mingling') is the contraction of a vowel or diphthong at the end of a word with a vowel or diphthong at the beginning of the next word. It is indicated by the coronis (’) written over the contracted syllable.
Crasis in general follows the rules for contraction (§§ 18 and 19): thus, τοὐναντίον the contrary for τό έναντίον, έγᾦμαι I suppose for έγώ οἶμαι, θοἰμάτιον the cloak for τὸ (cf. § 44, 4). But some exceptions occur: thus, ταὐτό for τό αὐτό.
Note 1. If the first word ends in a diphthong, its final vowel is dropped before contraction: thus, κᾱ́γαθός for καὶ ἀγαθός.
Note 2. Synizesis between Two Words. In poetry a crasis, not indicated in writing, sometimes occurs between two words, and is called synizesis (see § 19, note 2). This happens only when the first word ends in a long vowel or diphthong: thus, μή οὐ, pronounced as one syllable.
Note 3. Apocope is the cutting off of a final short vowel before a consonant. Thus, πάρ, κάτ, for πάρα, κάτα. It affects chiefly prepositions, and is nearly confined to poetry.
Elision
4412 13 14. Elision is the cutting off of a short vowel at the end of a word when the next word begins with a vowel. In place of the missing vowel, an apostrophe (’) is written: thus, ἐπ’ ἐμοί in my power, for ἐπὶ ἐμοί; ἕπτ’ ἦσαν were seven, for ἐπτὰ ἦσαν. (For the accent of ἕπτ’ see § 66.)
1. Elision is most frequent in prepositions, conjunctions, and familiar adverbs: for example, the final vowel in γέ, δέ, παρά, ἀλλά, μάλα, τάχα is frequently elided.
2. The vowel υ is never elided, nor is –ι in the dative of the third declension, nor the vowels of τά, τί, τό.
3. In the formation of compound words, elision occurs, but without being indicated by the apostrophe: thus, ἀπ-έχω keep away, from ἀπό and ἔχω; ἐπ-άνω on top, from ἐπί and ἄνω; ἀπ-έβην went away, aorist of ἀπο-βαίνω.
4. Whenever by elision a smooth mute and a rough breathing are brought together, the smooth mute becomes the cognate rough mute (§ 12, 2): thus, ἀφ’ὧν from which, for ἀπό ὧν; καθ-ίημι let down, from κατά and ἴημι.
V · Movable consonants
45. ν Movable. – All words ending in –τι, all verbs of the third-person singular ending in -ε, and ἐδτί is, when they stand before a word beginning with a vowel, or at the end of a clause, regularly add a ν at the end. This ν is called ν movable: thus, πέμπουσι τὸν ἄνδρα they send the man, but πέμπουσιν ἄνδρα they send a man; εἶδε τήν θάλατταν he saw the sea, but εἶδεν ὄψιν he saw a vision.
46. The adverb οὐ before a vowel with the smooth breathing, becomes οὐκ: thus, οὐκ εἶδον did not see. Before a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes οὐχ (cf. § 44, 4): so οὐχ εἱλόμην did not choose.
47. The preposition ἐξ out of appears as ἐξ before words beginning with a vowel, and ἐκ before words beginning with a consonant: thus, ἐξ ἄστεως from town, but ἐκ τῆς πόλεως from the city.
V · Final consonants
48. The only consonants allowed standing at the end of a Greek word are ν, ρ, and ς.
Note. – Observe that words ending in ψ (= πς) or ξ (= κς) do not violate this rule.
V · Syllables and quantity
49. In Greek, as in Latin, each single vowel or diphthong makes a separate syllable. For example, ὑγίεια, has four syllables.
50. In dividing a word into syllables a single consonant or any combination of consonants that can begin a word is customarily written with the following vowel: thus, ἱ-κα-νός suitable, ὄ-ψο-μαι shall see, ῥά-βδος wand, κά-μνω labour.
Other combinations of consonants are divided: thus, ἵπ-πος horse, ἐλ-πίς hope.
51. The last syllable of a word is called the Ultima, the next to the last the Penult, and the one before the penult the Antepenult.
Quantity of syllables
52. A syllable is long by Nature when it has a long vowel or a diphthong. Thus, in κρῑ-νοί-μην, all the syllables are long.
5315. A syllable is long by Position (or Convention) when its vowel is followed by two consonants or a double consonant (§ 12, 3). Thus, in ὄρ-τυξ; quail, both syllables are long by position.
Of the two consonants, one or both may be in the next word. Thus, in ἄλλος τόπος another place and ἄλλο στόμα another mouth the last syllable of the first word is long by position.
Note. – Observe, however, that the quantity of the vowel is not affected by position. The ε in λέξω is short, although the syllable in which it stands is long by «position.»
5416. When a vowel naturally short is followed by a mute and a liquid (§ 12) the length of the syllable is Common, that is, the syllable is used in verse either as long or short. Thus, in rewov child, τέκνον child, τυφλός blind, τί χρή, what is to be done? The first syllable is common.
Note. The mute and the liquid must be in the same word; otherwise the syllable is long by position.
ACCENT
55. The Greek accent consisted in a raising of the pitch of the accented syllable. It was not a stress accent like that of English.
56. In Greek there are three kinds of accent, the Acute (ʹ), the Grave (`), and the Circumflex ( ˆ ); the last being made up of the acute and the grave.
1. Every syllable of a Greek word had an accent, but, as the grave accent is of such frequent occurrence (standing on every syllable which has not the acute or circumflex), it was not written except in the case mentioned under § 67.
2. The marks of accent were not used in early times. They were invented about 200 b.c. for the help of foreigners and of others who were studying the greek language.
57. The marks of accent are written over the vowel of the accented syllable.
1. In case of a diphthong the accent stands over the second vowel, unless the second vowel is ι subscript: thus, αὐτοîς, αὐτούς; but αὐτῷ (cf. § 8, 2 and note).
2. When both breathing and accent belong to the same vowel, the acute or the grave accent is written after the breathing: thus, ὅλος whole, ὃς ἔσται who shall be. But the circumflex accent is written above the breathing: thus, ἦγε was leading.
3. When breathing and accent belong to a capital letter they are placed before it: thus, Ἕλλην Greek, Ἦλις Elis, Ἅιδης Hades (cf. § 8, 1).
Rules for accent
58. The circumflex accent can stand only on a syllable long by nature (§ 52); the acute may stand on a long or a short syllable.
59. The circumflex accent may stand only on one of the last two syllables of a word; the acute may stand only on one of the last three syllables.
60. Moreover, if the last syllable is long by nature (§ 52), the circumflex may stand only on the last syllable, and the acute only on one of the last two syllables.
61. A long penult followed by a short final syllable must, if it has a written accent, have the circumflex.
Note. Some further special rules of accent will be given under Inflection, but the position of the accents on Greek words must, in general, be learned by observation.
62. Examples of accented words are:
| Acute on the ultima | (called oxytone) | ὁδός |
| “ “ “ penult | (called paroxytone) | ἀνθρώπων |
| “ “ “ antepenult | (called proparoxytone) | ἄνθρωπος |
| Circumflex on the ultima | (called perispomenon) | χωρῶν |
| “ “ “ penult | (called properispomenon) | γλῶττα |
63. The diphthongs at and 01 at the end of a word have the effect of short vowels on the accent, except in the optative mood and in the adverb οἴκοι: thus, χῶραι lands, ἄνθρωποι men; but παιδεύοι, optative of παιδεύω educate.
64. Recessive Accent. A word is commonly said to have Recessive Accent when the written accent stands as far from the end of the word as the laws of accent (§§ 58–61) will allow. Thus, ἐλύθην was loosed, λῡον was loosing, θέατρον theatre, have recessive accent.
Accent of contracted syllables
65. When two syllables contract into one, in case either of the original syllables had a written accent (that is, the acute or the circumflex), the syllable resulting from the contraction retains a written accent; otherwise it has the unwritten grave (§ 56, 1). Thus, τῑμά-ει gives τῑμᾷ, but τῑ́μα–ε gives τῑ́μᾱ.
1. If the first of the two syllables originally had the acute, the acute combines with the unwritten grave (§ 56, 1) of the second syllable to form the circumflex. Thus, τῑμά-ω (i.e. τῑ́μά-ὼ) gives τῑμῶ.
2. But if the second of the two syllables had the acute, the syllable resulting from the contraction also has the acute (since it is plain that ˋ ˊ will not combine into
). Thus, ἑστα-ώς (i.e. ἓστὰ-ώς) gives ἑστώς.
Accent of elided words
66. In elision (§ 44) oxytone (§ 62) prepositions and conjunctions lose their written accent: thus, ἀλλ’ ἔφη but he said, for ἀλλὰ ἔφη; other words retain it, but on the preceding syllable: thus, ἕπτ’ ἦσαν were seven, for ἑπτὰ ἦσαν.
Note. In crasis (§ 43) the first of the two words loses its written accent.
Change of acute to grave
67. Wherever a word having the acute accent on the last syllable is followed by another word in close connection, its acute changes to the grave: thus, παρά beside, τόν the, but παρά τόν βασιλέα to the side of the king. (For τίς, see § 148, 1.)
6817. Anastrophe. A preposition of two syllables having the acute accent on the last syllable, when it follows the substantive with which it is used, or when it does the duty of a verb, shifts its written accent from the last syllable to the first: thus, τούτων πέρι about this; πάρα, for πάρεστι, it is allowed.
V · Proclitics and enclitics
69. A few words of one syllable attach themselves so closely to the following word that they lose their own written accent. They are called Proclitics (from προκλῑ́ lean forward). They are:
The forms ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, of the article the;
The conjunctions εἱ if, ὡς as;
The prepositions ἑν in, εἱς (ἑς) into, ἑξ (ἑκ, § 47) out of, ὡς to;
The adverb οὑ (οὑκ, οὑχ § 46) not.
1. When, however, a proclitic stands at the end of a sentence, or is followed by an enclitic (§ 70, 8), it receives a written accent. Thus, φῄς, ἢ οὔ; do you say yes or no? οὔ φημι I say no.
V · Enclitics
70. Some words of one or two syllables attach themselves so closely to the preceding word that they give up their own written accent. These words are called Enclitics (from ἑγλῑ́ lean upon). They are:
The pronouns μοῦ, μοί, μέ; σοῦ, σοί, σέ; οὗ, οἷ, ἕ and σφίδι. See however § 139, 2;
The indefinite pronoun τὶς, τὶ in all its forms, and the indefinite adverbs ποῦ, πῇ, ποῖ, ποθέν, ποτέ, πῶ, πῶς;
The present indicative of εἰμί am and φημί say, except the second persons singular εἶ, φῄς. (For the accent of ἐδτί see § 262, 1);
The particle’s γέ, τέ, τοί, πέρ.
1. If the word preceding an enclitic has the acute accent on either of the last two syllables, or the circumflex on the last syllable, its accent remains unchanged: thus, ἀνήρ τις a man, λόγων τινῶν (§ 71,4) of some words, χωρῶν τιυων of some lands.
2. If the word preceding an enclitic has the acute accent on the antepenult, or the circumflex on the penult, it adds an acute accent on the last syllable: thus, ἄνθρωποί τινες some men, γλῶττά a tongue.
3. A proclitic (§ 69) before an enclitic takes an acute accent: thus, εἴ τις if anybody, οὔ φασι, they deny (see § 69, 1).
4. If several enclitics follow each other, the last alone remains without written accent; each of the others receives an acute accent from the following enclitic: thus, εἴ πού τίς τινα [ἴδοι] if anybody [should see] anybody anywhere.
71. Accent of Enclitics Retained. – Enclitics retain their own accent:
1. When they begin a sentence, as εἰδὶν ἄνδρες there are men;
2. When they are emphatic, as ἀλλά δὲ λέτγω but you I mean;
3. When the vowel which would be affected by the enclitic has been elided (§ 44), as ταῦτ’ ἐστί, for ταῦτά ἐστι this is;
4. When an enclitic of two sjdlables follows a word which has the acute accent on the penult, as ἀνθρώπου τινός of a man.
Note. – Some words are so frequently combined with an enclitic that the combination comes to be regarded as one word. Thus, ὥστε so that (ὡς + τε), καίτοι although (καί + τοι), οὗτινος of whomsoever (οὗ + τινος), are not exceptions to the rule of accent given in §§ 59 and 61.
V · Punctuation
72. The Greek marks of punctuation are the period (.), colon (•), comma (‚), and mark of interrogation (;).
The colon is a point above the line, and it takes the place of the English colon and semicolon.
Note. The ancient Greeks seldom used any marks of punctuation, but wrote their words continuously. Thus, ΕΔΟΞΕΝΤΗΙΒΥΛΗΙΚΑΙΤΩΙΔΗΜΩΙ = ἔδοξεν τῇ βουλῇ καί τῷ δήμῳ It was voted by the Senate and the People.
Ancient greek writing on stone
(Of the Fifth Century b.c.)
Inflection
73. Inflection is a change in the form of a word to indicate its relation to other words.
1. In inflection a part of the word remains the same, and is called the Stem. Thus, the stem of ἄνθρωπος man is ἀνθρωπο-, and -ς is the ending of the nominative case; in ἔ-λῡε he was loosing, λῡε– is a stem of the present system, and ἐ- is a prefix denoting past time. (See also § 163.) Some words, in their inflection, show more than one form of stem.
2. The inflection of Nouns (Substantives and Adjectives) and Pronouns is called Declension ; the inflection of Verbs is called Conjugation.
VI · Nouns (Substantives and Adjectives)
74. Gender, Number, and Case. – There are in Greek:
three GENDERS: Masculine, Feminine and Neuter;
three NUMBERS: Singular, Dual and Plural;
five CASES: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative and Vocative.
Note 1. The dual number refers to two objects. It has but two forms, one for the nominative, accusative, and vocative, the other for the genitive and dative.
Note 2. The vocative in the plural is always like the nominative ; in the singular it is often so.
Note 3. Neuter words always have the nominative and vocative like the accusative; in the plural these cases always end in –α (at least before contraction).
75. Declensions. – There are in Greek three declensions of nouns, classed according to the endings of the stems. The First Declension has steins ending in –ᾱ, the Second Declension has stems ending in –ο. These two together are sometimes called the Vowel Declension. The Third Declension has mostly stems ending in a consonant (see § 93) and is called the Consonant Declension.
7618. Case endings
The case endings of the vowel and the consonant declension have many points in common, as may be seen from the following table: –19
| . | Vowel Declension | Consonant declension | ||||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Sing. Nom. | -ς | none | -ν | -ς or none | -ς or none | none |
| Gen. | -ιο | -ς | -ιο | -ος | -ος | -ος |
| Dat. | ι | ι | -ι | -ι | -ι | -ι |
| Acc. | -ν | -ν | -ν | -ν or -α | -ν or -α | none |
| Voc. | none | none | -ν | none | none | none |
| Dual N.A.V. | none | none | none | -ε | -ε | -ε |
| C.D. | -ιν | -ιν | -ιν | -οιν | -οιν | -οιν |
| Plur. N.V. | -ι | -ι | -α | -ες | -ες | -α |
| Gen. | -ων | -ων | -ων | -ων | -ων | -ων |
| Dat. | -ισι,-ις | -ισι,-ις | -ισι,-ις | -σι | -σι | -σι |
| Acc. | -νς | -νς | -α | -νς or -ας | -νς or -ας | -α |
Note. – Locative Case. There are in Greek some relics of a Locative Case, confined mostly to names of places. The ending of the locative in the singular is -ι and in the plural –σι: Πῡθοῖ at Pytho (Delfi), οἴκοι at home, Ἄριει at Argos, Ἀθήνησι at Athens.
77. Accent in Declension. – 1. The written accent of a noun, throughout its declension, remains on the same syllable as in the nominative singular, or as near that syllable as the general laws of accent will allow: thus, ἄνθρωπος man, acc. sing. ἄνθρωπον, nom. plur. ἄνθρωποι, but gen. sing. ἄνθρωπου (§ 60), dat. plur. ἀνθρώποις; ὄνομα name, gen. sing. ὀνόματος (§ 59), gen. plur. ὀνομάτων (§ 60).
2. In the genitive and dative of all numbers a long final syllable, if it has written accent, has the circumflex: thus, ποταμός river, dat. sing, ποταμῷ; πούς foot, gen. plur. ποδῶν.
VI · Substantives
General rules for gender
78. 1. MASCULINE are names of Males, of Winds, of Rivers, and of Months.
2. FEMININE are names of Females, and most names of Lands, Islands, Towns, Trees, and Abstract Ideas.
3. NEUTER are most Diminutives (§ 283) and most names of Fruits.
Note. – Common Gender. Some names of beings may be used either as masculine or feminine, as occasion requires. Thus, παῖς child may be masculine or feminine, and may mean boy or girl.
79. It is customary to indicate the gender of Greek words by means of the article (§ 144): ὁ for masculine, ἡ for feminine, and τό for neuter.
FIRST DECLENSION
(the –α declension)
80. Words of the first declension are feminine or masculine. They have stems ending in ᾱ. In many of the forms this ᾱ is shortened or disguised.
A. Feminines
81. The feminines form two classes: (1) those ending in – ᾱ or –η, and (2) those ending in short –ᾱ. They are declined as follows
| First Class | Second Class | |||
| ἡ χώρᾱ land (stem χωρᾱ-) | ἡ τιμή honor (stem τῑμᾱ-) | ἡ γέφῡρα bridge, (stem γεφῡρᾱ-) | ἡ γλῶττα tongue, (stem γλωττα-) | |
| Singular | Singular | |||
| Nom. | χώρᾱ | τῑμή | γέφῡρα | γλῶττα |
| Gen. | χώρᾱς | τῑμῆς | γεφῡρᾱς | γλῶττης |
| Dat. | χώρᾷ | τῑμῇ | γέφῡ́ρᾷ | γλώττῃ |
| Acc. | χώρᾱ-ν | τῑμή-ν | γέφῡρα-ν | γλῶττα-ν |
| Voc. | χώρᾱ | τῑμή | γέφῡρα | γλῶττα |
| Dual | Dual | |||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | χώρᾱ | τῑμᾱ́ | γέφῡ́ρᾱ | γλώττᾱ |
| Gen. Dat. | χώραιν | τῑμαῖν | γέφῡ́ραιν | γλώτταιν |
| Plural | Plural | |||
| Nom. Voc. | χῶραι | τῑμαί | γέφῡραι | γλῶτται |
| Gen. | χωρῶν | τῑμῶν | γέφῡρῶν | γλωττῶν |
| Dat. | χώραις | τῑμαῖς | γέφῡ́ραις | γλώτταις |
| Acc. | χώρας | τῑμᾱ́ς | γέφῡ́ρας | γλώττᾱς |
Other examples of the first class are: ἡμέρᾱ day (gen. sing, μἡμέρᾶς, nom. plur. ἡμέραι), σκιᾱ́ shadow (gen. sing. σκιᾶς, nom. plur. σκιαί), πύλη gate (gen. sing. πύλης nom. plur. πύλαι), γνώμη judgment (gen. sing. γνώμης nom. plur γνῶμαι).
Other examples of the second class are: μοῖρα fate (gen. sing, μοίρᾱς, nom. plur. μοῖραι), δόξα opinion (gen. sing. δόξης, nom. plur. δόξαι), τράπεζα table (gen. sing. τραπέζης, nom. plur. τραπέζαι.
82. Observe that the second class has short –a in the final syllable of three cases of the singular nominative, accusative, and vocative. The first class, on the other hand, has a long vowel (ᾱ or η) in the final syllable throughout the singular.
8320. All words of the first class originally ended in –a. This a is retained if immediately preceded by ε, ι, or ρ (cf. § 15); thus, γενεᾱ́, σοφίᾱ, χώρᾱ. Otherwise it is changed to η throughout the singular: thus, τῑμή (formerly τιμᾱ́).
1. In the genitive and dative singular of words of the second class, the use of ᾱ́ or η is determined by the same rule: thus, γεφῡ́ρᾱς (because ρ precedes the ᾱ), but γλώττης.
8421. The Genitive Plural of the first declension always has the circumflex accent on the last syllable, because –ῶν is contracted from –ᾱ́–ων (originally *- ᾱ́–σων; cf. § 37, and the Latin ending arum in stellarum): thus, χωρῶν for χωρᾱ-́ων.
Note. – In the accusative plural –ας is for –ᾱνς (§ 34).
B. Masculines
85. The masculines have the case ending –ς in the nominative singular. They are declined as follows:
| ὁ νεᾱνίᾱς young man (stem νεᾱνίᾱ-) | ὁ πολίτης citizen (stem πολίτᾱ-) | ὁ Ἀτρείδης son of Atreus (stem Ἀτρείδᾱ-) | |
| Singular | |||
| Nom. | νεᾱνίᾱ-ς | πολίτη-ς | Ἀτρείδης |
| Gen. | νεᾱνίου | πολίτου | Ἀτρείδου |
| Dat. | νεᾱνίᾷ | πολίτῃ | Ἀτρείδῃ |
| Acc. | νεᾱνίᾱ-ν | πολίτη-ν | Ἀτρείδη-ν |
| Voc. | νεᾱνίᾱ | πολίτα | Ἀτρείδη |
| Dual | |||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | νεᾱνίᾱ | πολίτᾱ | Ἀτρείδᾱ |
| Gen. Dat. | νεᾱνίαιν | πολίταιν | Ἀτρείδαιν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. Voc. | νεᾱνίαι | πολῖται | Ἀτρεῖδαι |
| Gen. | νεᾱνιῶν | πολῑτῶν | Ἀτρειδῶν |
| Dat. | νεᾱνίαις | πολίταις | Ἀτρείδαις |
| Acc. | νεᾱνίᾱς | πολίτᾱς | Ἀτρείδᾱς |
Other examples for declension are steward (like νεᾱνίας), στρατιώτης soldier (like πολῑ́της), κρτής judge(gen. sing. κριτοῦ voc. κριτά, nom. plur. κριταί), Κρνίδης son of Kronos (like Ἀτρείδης, but nom. plur. Κρονίδαι).
86. In the last syllable of the singular ᾱ is retained after ε, ι and ρ (§ 15); otherwise it changes to η. Compare § 83.
8722. The vocative singular of words in –ης, like Ἀτρείδης, ends in –η; but all words in-της, and compaund nouns and names of nationality in –ης have short –α in the vocative: thus, πολῖτα, voc. of πολίτης; citizen; σῑτοπῶλα, voc. of σῑτοπώλης grain seller; Πέρσα, voc. of Πέρσης Persian.
Note. The ending –ου of the genitive singular is borrowed bodily from the second declension (cf. § 87 a).
8823. In some words, –εα (or –αα) is contracted to –ᾱ or –η. All cases then have the circumflex (§ 65, 1). Such words are declined as follows:
| ἡ μνᾶ mina (stem μνᾱ– for (μναᾱ-) | ἡ γῆ land (stem γη- for γεᾱ or –γαᾱ) | ὁ Ἑρμῆς Hermes (stemἙρμῆ – for Ἑρμεᾱ-) | |
| Singular | |||
| Nom. | μνᾶ | γῆ | Ἑρμῆς |
| Gen. | μνᾶς | γῆς | Ἑρμοῦ |
| Dat. | μνᾷ | γῆ | Ἑρμῆ |
| Acc. | μνᾶ-ν | γῆ-ν | Ἑρμῆ-ν |
| Voc. | μνᾶ | γῆ | Ἑρμῆ |
| Dual | |||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | μνᾶ | γᾶ | Ἑρμᾶ |
| Gen. Dat. | μναῖν | γαῖν | Ἑρμαῖν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. Voc. | μναῖ | γαῖ | Ἑρμαῖ |
| Gen. | μνῶν | γῶν | Ἑρμῶν |
| Dat. | μναῖς | γαῖς | Ἑρμαῖς |
| Acc. | μνᾶς | γᾶς | Ἑρμᾶς |
So also is declined Βορρᾶς (for Βορέᾶς with irregular –ρρ-) north wind, in the singular only.
SECOND DECLENSION
89. Words of the Second Declension are nearly all masculine or neuter. The few feminines are declined like the masculines. The stems end in ο.
The nominative singular of masculines and feminines ends in –ος. The nominative, vocative, and accusative of neuters are alike, and they end in the singular in –ον, and in the plural in –α.
9024. Words of the second declension are inflected as follows:
| ὁ λόγος word (stem λoγο-) | ὁ (or ἡ) ἄνθρωπος man (stem ἀνθρωπο-) | ἡ ὁδός road (stem ὁδο-) | τὸ δῶρον gift (stem δωρο-) | |
| Singular | ||||
| Nom. | λόγο-ς | ἄνθρωπο-ς | ὁδό-ς | δῶρο-ν |
| Gen. | λόγου | ἀνθρώπου | ὁδοῦ | δώρου |
| Dat. | λόγῳ | ἀνθρώπῳ | ὁδῳ | δῶρῳ |
| Acc. | λόγο-ν | ἄνθρωπο-ν | ὁδό-ν | δῶρο-ν |
| Voc. | λόγε | ἄνθρωπε | ὁδέ | δῶρο-ν |
| Dual | ||||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | λόγω | ἀνθρώπω | ὁδω | δώρω |
| Gen. Dat. | λόγοιν | ἀνθρώποιν | ὁδοῖν | δώροιν |
| Plural | ||||
| Nom. Voc. | λόγοι | ἀνθρώποι | ὁδοί | δῶρα |
| Gen. | λόγων | ἀνθρώπων | ὁδοῶν | δώρων |
| Dat. | λόγοις | ἀνθρώποις | ὁδοῖς | δώροις |
| Acc. | λόγους | ἀνθρώπους | ὁδούς | δώρα |
So also are declined νόμος law (gen. sing, νόμου, nom. plur. νὀμοι), κίννδῡνος danger, ταῦρος bull (nom. plur. –ταῦροι), ποταμός river, στρατηγός general, νῆσος (fem.) island, μέτρον measure, ἷμάτιον cloack.
Contract substantives of the second declension
91. Words which have stems ending in –οο and –εο undergo contraction in accordance with the rules given in §§ 18 and 19. They are, thus, declined:
| ὁ νοῦς mind (stem νοο–) | ὁ περίπλους voyage around, circumnavigation (stem περιπλοο–) | τὸ ὁ στοῦν bone (stem ὁστεο-) | |
| Singular | |||
| Nom. | νοῦ-ς (νόο-ς) | περίπλου-ς (περίπλοο-ς) | ὁστοῦ-ν (ὀστέο-ν) |
| Gen. | νοῦ (νόου) | περίπλου (περίπλόου) | ὁστοῦ (ὀστέου) |
| Dat. | νῷ (νόῷ) | περίπλῳ (περίπλοῷ) | ὁστῷ (ὀστέῷ) |
| Acc. | νοῦ-ν (νόο-ν) | περίπλου-ν (περίπλοο-ν) | ὁστοῦ-ν (ὀστέο-ν) |
| Voc. | νοῦ (νόε) | περίπλου (περίπλοε) | ὁστοῦ-ν (ὀστέο-ν) |
| Dual | |||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | νώ (νόω) | περίπλω (περιπλόω) | ὁστώ (ὀστέω) |
| Gen. Dat. | νώ (νόοιν) | περίπλοιν (περίπλόοιν) | ὁστοῖν (ὀστέοιν) |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. Voc. | νοῖ (νόοι) | περίπλοι (περίπλόοι) | ὁστᾶ (ὀστέα) |
| Gen. | νών (νόων) | περίπλων (περίπλόων) | ὁστῶν (ὀστέων) |
| Dat. | νοῖς (νόοις) | περίπλοις (περίπλόοις) | ὁστοῖς (ὀστέοις) |
| Acc. | νώ (νόους) | περίπλους(περίπλόους) | ὁστᾶ (ὀστέα) |
So also are declined ὁ ῥοῦς (ῥόος) stream, τὸ κανοῦν (κάνεον, cf. § 118, 3) basket.
1. Observe that the contraction of ὁστᾶ is contrary to the rule of § 18, 6.
2. Observe that the nominative dual, if it has written accent on the last syllable, has the acute (contrary to § 65, 1): thus, νώ (irregularly from νόω).
3. Observe that contracted compounds have recessive accent (§ 64) in spite of the contraction: thus, περίπλῳ (for περίπλόῳ), εὖνοι (for εὔνοοι) kindly disposed. But the written accent almost never goes back to the syllable on which it stood in the nominative singular (§ 77): thus, περίπλοι (not πέριπλοι).
Stems in –ω–
ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION
9225. To the second declension belong also a few words whose stems end in co. They are, thus, declined:
| ὁ νεώς temple (stem νεω-) | ||
| Singular | Dual | Plural |
| Nom. νεώ-ς | Nom. νεῴ | |
| Gen. νεώ | Nom. Acc. Voc. νεώ | Gen. νεών |
| Dat. νεῴ | Gen. Dat. νεῴν | Dat. νεῴς |
| Acc. νεῴ-ν | Acc. νεώς | |
| Voc. νεώς | Voc. νεῴ | |
So also λεώς people, κάλως cable.
1. Observe that the genitive and dative, when they have written accent on the last syllable, take the acute, contrary to § 77, 2.
2. Many of these words were produced by an interchange of quantity (§ 17), ᾱο becoming εω: thus, λεώς from λᾱός. In such words, the long vowel at the end does not affect the position of the accent (cf. § 60): thus, Μενέλεως Menelaus (from Μενέλᾱος).
3. Some words have no ν in the accusative singular. Thus, λαγώς hare has acc. sing. λαγώ and λαγών; ἕως dawn has only ἕω.
THIRD DECLENSION
93. Words of the Third (or Consonant) Declension have stems ending in a consonant, or in a vowel (ι or υ) which may sometimes be sounded as a consonant. A few stems appear to end in ο (but see §§ 112, 113).
1. The stem of words of this declension may usually be found by dropping the ending –ος of the genitive singular.
94. Gender. – The gender of words of the third declension must usually be learned by observation, but a few general rules may be given.
1. Stems ending in a labial or a palatal mute are never neuter.
2. MASCULINE are stems ending in ευ, ντ, ητ (except those in –τητ-), ωτ and ρ (except those in –αρ-).
3. FEMININE are stems ending in τητ, δ, θ, ι (with nom. in –ις), and υ (with nom. in –υς).
4. NEUTER are stems ending in αρ, ασ, ατ, ες (with nom. in –ος), and υ (with nom. in –υ).
Formation of cases
95. Neuters. – Neuter words of the third declension regularly have the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular like the simple stem. A final τ is dropped (§ 48): thus, σῶμα (stem σωματ) body.
96. Masculine and Feminine Nominative Singular. – Most masculine and feminine words of the third declension form the nominative by adding –ς to the stem. For the euphonic change which may follow, see §§ 28–30, 34: thus, κλῖμαξ (for *κλιμακ-ς) ladder (cf. Latin dux, ducis).
1. But stems in –ν-, –ρ-, –σ– and –οντ– regularly have in the nominative only the simple stem with a long vowel (§ 13): thus, λιμήν (λιμεν-) harbor, ῥήτωρ (ῥήτορ) orator, Σωκράτης (Σωκράτεσ-) Socrates, λέων (λεοντ-) lion (§ 48).
Note. Some of these words retain the long vowel of the nominative throughout their declension: thus, Ἕλλην Greek, gen. Ἕλλη-νος, etc.; χειμών winter, gen. χειμῶνος, etc.
97. Accusative Singular. – The accusative singular of masculine and feminine words adds –α to consonant stems and –ν to vowel stems: thus, πούς foot (stem ποδ-), accus. sing. πόδ-α; but πόλις city (stem πολι-), accus. sing. πόλιν. (Cf. § 14, 2 note.)
1. But stems of more than one syllable ending in ιτ or ιδ, without written accent on the last syllable, almost always drop the final mute and take the ending ν: thus, ἕρις strife (stem ἐριδ-), accus. sing. ἕριν.
98. Vocative Singular. – The vocative singular is regularly the mere stem: thus, δαίμων divinity, voc. δαῖμον (stem δαιμον-); γέρων old man, voc. γέρον– (stem γεροντ-, see § 48).
1. But masculine and feminine words which form their nominative singular without ς (§ 96, 1), when they have written accent on the last syllable, and all other mute stems (except those in –ιδ-), use the nominative singular as vocative: thus, ποιμήν (stem ποιμεν-) shepherd, voc. ποιμήν; φύλαξ; (stem φυλακ-) watchman, voc. φύλαξ (but ἐλπίς (stem ἐλπιδ-), voc. ἐλπί).
9926. Dative Plural. – When ν alone is dropped before the ending –σι of the dative plural (§ 34), the preceding vowel remains unchanged, contrary to § 34: thus, ποιμέσι to shepherds, for *ποιμεν-σι; δαίμοσι to divinities, for *δαίμον-σι.
1. But when ντ is dropped, the preceding vowel is lengthened: thus, λέουσι to lions, for *λεοντ-σι; πᾶσι to all, for *παντ-σι.
100. Special Rule of Accent. – Words with stems of one syllable in the third declension regularly have the written accent on the last syllable of the genitive and dative of all numbers. If the last syllable is long, it receives the circumflex (§ 77, 2): thus, πούς foot, gen. sing. ποδός, gen. plur. ποδῶν, dat. plur. ποδί.
Note. For exceptions see δᾷς (§ 115, 5), δμώς (§ 115, 7), οὖς (§ 115, 18), παῖς (§ 115, 19), πᾶς (§ 125, 2), Τρώς (§ 115, 23), and ὤν (§ 129, 3).
CONSONANT STEMS
101. Labial and Palatal Stems. – Stems ending in a labial or palatal mute are, thus, declined:
| ὁ φύλαξ watchman (stem φυλακ-) | ἡ φάλαγξ phalanx (stem φαλαγγ-) | ἡ θρίξ hair (stem τριχ-) | ὁ κλώψ thief (stem κλωπ-) | ἡ φλέψ vein (stem φλεβ-) | |
| Singular | |||||
| Nom. | φύλαξ | φάλαγξ | θρίξ | κλώψ | φλέψ |
| Gen. | φύλακ-ος | φάλαγγ-ος | τρίχ-ός | κλωπ-ός | φλέβ-ός |
| Dat. | φύλακ-ι | φάλαγγ-ι | τρίχ-ί | κλωπ-ί | φλέβ-ί |
| Acc. | φύλακ-α | φάλαγγ-α | τρίχ-α | κλῶπ-α | φλέβ-α |
| Voc. | φύλαξ | φάλαγξ | θρίξ | κλώψ | φλέψ |
| Dual | |||||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | φύλακ-ε | φάλαγγ-ε | τρίχ-ε | κλῶπ-ε | φλέβ-ε |
| Gen. Dat. | φύλακ-οιν | φάλαγγ-οιν | τρίχ-οῖν | κλωπ-οῖν | φλέβ-οῖν |
| Plural | |||||
| Nom. Voc. | φύλακ-ες | φάλαγγ-ες | τρίχ-ες | κλῶπ-ες | φλέβ-ες |
| Gen. | φύλακ-ων | φάλαγγ-ων | τριχ-ῶν | κλωπ-ῶν | φλεβ-ῶν |
| Dat. | φύλαξι | φάλαγξι | θρίξι | κλώψι | φλεψι |
| Acc. | φύλακ-ας | φάλαγγ-ας | τρίχ-ας | κλῶπ-ας | φλέβ-ας |
So also are declined ὁ Αἱθίοψ (stem Αἱθιοπ-) Aethiopian, ὁ χάλυψ (stem χαλυβ-) steel, ἡ κλῖμαξ (stem κλῑμακ-) ladder, ἡ μάστιξ (stem μαστῑγ-) whip, ὁ ὄνυξ (stem ὀνυχ-) claw.
1. For the ξ and ψ in the nominative singular and dative plural, see §§ 28 and 29. For the vocative singular, see § 98, 1. For the change of θ to τ in θρίξ see § 41.
10227. Lingual Stems. – Stems ending in a lingual mute are, thus, declined:
Masculine and feminine
| ὁ θής serf (stem θητ-) | ἡ ἐλπiς hope (stem ἐλπiδ-) | ἡ ἔρις strife (stem ἐριδ-) | ἡ νύξ night (stem νυκτ-) | ὁ γέρων old men (stem γεροντ-) | |
| Singular | |||||
| Nom. | θής | ἐλπiς | ἔρις | νύξ | γέρων |
| Gen. | θητ-ός | ἐλπiδ-ος | ἔριδ-ος | νυκτ-ος | γέροντ-ος |
| Dat. | θητ-ί | ἐλπiδ-ι | ἔριδ-ι | νυκτ-ί | γέροντ-ι |
| Acc. | θῆτ-α | ἐλπiδ-α | ἔριν | νύκτ-α | γέροντ-α |
| Voc. | θής | ἐλπi | ἔρι | νύξ | γέρον |
| Dual | |||||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | θῆτ-ε | ἐλπiδ-ε | ἔριδ-ε | νύκτ-ε | γέροντ-ε |
| Gen. Dat. | θητ-οῖν | ἐλπiδ-οιν | ἔριδ-οιν | νυκτ-οῖν | γερόντ-οιν |
| Plural | |||||
| Nom. Voc. | θῆτ-ες | ἐλπiδ-ες | ἔριδ-ες | νύκτ-ες | γέροντ-ες |
| Gen. | θητ-ῶν | ἐλπiδ-ων | ἐρίδ-ων | νυκτ-ῶν | γερόντ-ων |
| Dat. | θησί | ἐλπiσι | ἔρισι | νυξί | γέρονσι |
| Acc. | θῆτ-ας | ἐλπiδ-ας | ἔριδας | νύκτ-ας | γέροντ-ας |
So also are declined ὁ ἔρως (stem ἐρωτ-) love, ἡ ἐσθής (stem ἐσθητ-, gen. sing. ἐσθῆτοςτ) clothing, ἡ λαμπάς (stem λαμπαδ-, gen. sing. λαμπάδος) torch, ἡ χάρις (stem χαριτ-) favor, ὁ γίγᾱς (stem γιγαντ-) giant, ὁ έλων (stem λεοντ-) lion, ὁ ὀδούς (stem ὀδοντ-, gen. sing. ὀδόντος) tooth (the nominative singular is formed contrary to § 96, 1).
1. For the dropping of τ (and ντ), δ, or θ before δ in the nominative singular and dative plural, see § 30. For the dative plural of stems in –ντ– (like γέρουσι) see § 99, 1. For the vocative singular, see § 98, 1. For the accusative singular of stems in –ιτ– and –ιδ– (χάριν, ἔριν) see § 97, 1.
10328.
NEUTER
| τό σῶμα body (stem σωματ-) | |||||
| Singular | Dual | Plural | |||
| Nom. | σῶμα | Nom. | σώματ-α | ||
| Gen. | σώματ-ος | Nom. Acc. Voc. | σώματ-ε | Gen. | σωμάτ-ων |
| Dat. | σώματ-ι | Gen. Dat. | σωμάτ-οιν | Dat. | σώμασι |
| Acc. | σῶμα | Acc. | σώματ-α | ||
| Voc. | σῶμα | Voc. | σώματ-α | ||
So also are declined στόμα (stem δτοματ-) mouth, ὄνομα (stem ὀνοματ-) name, μέλι (stem μελιτ-) honey, γάλα (stem γαλακτ-) milk (§ 48).
1. A few words form their nominative from a stem in –ρ– (§ 73, 1): thus, ἦπαρ (gen. sing, ἤπατ-ος) liver, ἦμαρ (gen. sing. ἤματ-ος) day (poetic).
2. Four words, πέρασ, πέρατοσ, end; τέρασ, τέρατοσ prodigy; κέρασ, κέρατοσ, horn; φῶς (contracted from φάος), light, form their nominatives singular from a stem ending in σ (§ 73, 1). (For the full declension of κέρας see § 115, 10.)
104. Liquid Stems. – Stems ending in a liquid are, thus, declined:
| ὁ λιμήν harbor (stem λιμεν-) | ὁ δαίμων divinity (stem δαιμον-) | ὁ ἀγών contest (stem ἀγων-) | ὁ ῥήτωρ orator (stem ῥητορ-) | |
| Singular | ||||
| Nom. | λιμήν | δαίμων | ἀγών | ῥήτωρ |
| Gen. | λιμέν-ος | δαίμων-ος | ἀγῶν-ος | ῥήτορ-ος |
| Dat. | λιμέν-ι | δαίμων-ι | ἀγῶν-ι | ῥήτορ-ί |
| Acc. | λιμέν-α | δαίμων-α | ἀγῶν-α | ῥήτορ-α |
| Voc. | λιμήν | δαίμον | ἀγών | ῥῆτορ |
| Dual | ||||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | λιμέν-ε | δαίμον-ε | ἀγῶν-ε | ῥήτορ-ε |
| Gen. Dat. | λιμέν-οιν | δαιμόν-οιν | ἀγών-οιν | ῥητόρ-οῖν |
| Plural | ||||
| Nom. Voc. | λιμέν-ες | δαίμον-ες | ἀγῶν-ες | ῥήτορ-ες |
| Gen. | λιμέν-ων | δαιμόν-ων | ἀγών-ων | ῥητόρ-ῶν |
| Dat. | λιμέσι | δαίμοδι | ἀγῶσι | ῥήτορσι |
| Acc. | λιμέν-ας | δαίμον-ας | ἀγῶν-ας | ῥήτορ-ας |
So also are declined ὁ μήν (stem μην-) month, ὁ αἰών (stem αἰων-) age, ὁ κρᾱτήρ (stem κρᾱτηρ-) mixing bowl, ὁ φώρ (stem φωρ-) thief, ὁ θήρ (stem θηρ-) wild beast.
1. For the dative plural, see § 99.
Note. – In vocative singular three words, σωτήρ savior, Ἀπόλλων Apollo, and Ποσειδῶν Poseidon, have a short vowel (§ 13) in the syllable of the stem (contrary to § 98, 1) and throw the written accent back upon the first syllable: thas σῶτερ, Ἄπολλον, Πόσειδον (cf. § 105, 2).
10529. Five substantives of the third declension with stems ending in ρ show in their inflection two forms of the stem, one with ε, and the other with no vowel (or with α). See §§ 14 and 73, 1.
These are: πατήρ father, μήτηρ mother, θυγάτηρ daughter, γαστήρ belly, ἀνήρ man. In ἀνήρ, a δ is developed between the ν and ρ whenever they come together. These words are, thus, declined:
| ὁ πατήρ father (stem πατερ– or πατρ) | ἡ μήτηρ mother (stem μητερ– or μητρ) | ἡ θυγάτηρ daughter (stem θυγατερ– or θυγατρ) | ὁ ἀνήρ man (stem ἀνερ– or ἀν(δ)ρ-) | |
| Singular | ||||
| Nom. | πατήρ | μήτηρ | θυγάτηρ | ἀνήρ |
| Gen. | πατρ-ός | μητρ-ός | θυγατρ-ός | ἀνδρ-ός |
| Dat. | πατρ-ι | μητρ-ι | θυγατρ-ι | ἀνδρ-ί |
| Acc. | πατέρ-α | μητέρ-α | θυγατέρ-α | ἄνδρ-α |
| Voc. | πατέρ | μῆτερ | θύγατερ | ἄνερ |
| Dual | ||||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | πατέρ-ε | μητέρ-ε | θυγατέρ-ε | ἄνδρ-ε |
| Gen. Dat. | πατέρ-οιν | μητέρ-οιν | θυγατέρ-οιν | ἀνδρ-οῖν |
| Plural | ||||
| Nom. Voc. | πατέρ-ες | μητέρ-ες | θυγατέρ-ες | ἄνδρ-ες |
| Gen. | πατέρ-ων | μητέρ-ων | θυγατέρ-ων | ἀνδρ-ῶν |
| Dat. | πατρά-σι | μητρά-δι | θυγατρά-σι | ἀνδρά-σι |
| Acc. | πατέρ-ας | μητέρ-ας | θυγατέρ-ας | ἄνδρ-ας |
Like πατήρ is declined γαστήρ belli. (See also § 115, 2.)
1. Observe that in the genitive and dative the shorter forms take their written accent on the last syllable, after the analogy of stems of one syllable (§ 100): thus, πατρός, ἀνδρῶν (but πατέρων, ἀνδράσι).
2. Observe that the vocative singular of these words has recessive accent (cf. § 104, note).
3. For the α in the dative plural, see § 14, 1.
10630. Stems in –σ-. – Stems ending in σ lose their final σ whenever it comes between two vowels (§ 37) and the vowels, thus, brought together usually contract.
Such stems are, thus, inflected:
| Neuter | ||
| τὸ γένος race (stem γενοσ-, γενεσ-) | τὸ γέρας prize (stem γερασ-) | |
| Singular | ||
| Nom. | γένος | γέρας |
| Gen. | γένους (*γενεσ-ος, γένε-ος) | γέρως (*γερασ-ος, γέρα-ος) |
| Dat. | γένει (*γενεσ-ι, γένε-ϊ) | γέρᾷ (*γερασ-ι, γέρα-ϊ) |
| Acc. | γένος | γέρας |
| Voc. | γένος | γέρας |
| Dual | ||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | γένει (*γενεσ-ε, γένε-ε) | |
| Gen. Dat. | γενοῖν (*γενεσ-οιν, γένε-οιν) | |
| Plural | ||
| Nom. Voc. | γένη (*γενεσ-α, γένε-α) | γέρᾱ (*γερασ-α, γέρα-α) |
| Gen. | γενέων (*γενεσ-ν) | γερῶν (*γερασ-ων, γέρα-ων) |
| γενῶν | ||
| Dat. | γένεδι (*γενεσ-σι) | γέραδι (*γέραδ-σι) |
| Acc. | γένη (*γενεσ-α, γένε-α) | γέρᾱ (*γερασ-α, γέρα-α) |
So also are declined τὸ τεῖχος wall, τὸ ἄνθος flower, τὸ ἔτος year, τὸ γῆρας old age, τὸ κέρας horn, wing (with other forms from a stem κερατ-; see § 115, 10).
1. Observe that neuters ending in –ος form their nominative, accusative, and vocative singular from the stem in –οσ-. (See §§ 14 and 73, 1).
2. In the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural of neuters in –ος, –εα after ε contracts into ᾱ. Thus, χρέᾱ for χρέε-α (*χρεεσ-α) from χρέος debt, stem χρεεσ-.
107. Masculine and feminine
| Σωκράτης Socrates (stem Σωκράτεσ) | ||
| Nom. | Σωκράτης | |
| Gen. | Σωκράτους | (*Σωκρατεσ–ος, Σωκράτε-ος) |
| Dat. | Σωκράτει | (*Σωκρατεσ-ι, Σωκράτε-ϊ) |
| Acc. | Σωκράτη | (*Σωκρατεσ-α, Σωκράτε-α) |
| Voc. | Σωκράτες | |
So also are declined Δηνοσθένης Demosthenes, Διογένης Diogenes.
1. Observe that the vocative singular of names like Σωκράτης has recessive accent.
10831. Proper names in –κλεης, of which the last part is the stem κλεες– (κλέος fame), are doubly contracted in the dative. Περικλῆς (stem Περικλεεσ-) Pericles is thus, declined:
| Nom. | Περικλέης | |
| Περικλῆς | ||
| Gen. | Περικλέους | (*Περικλεες–ος, Περικλέε-ος) |
| Dat. | Περικλεῖ | (*Περικλεεσ-ι, Περικλεε-ϊ, Περικλέει) |
| Acc. | Περικλέᾱ | (*Περικλεεσ-α, Περικλέε-α) |
| Voc. | Περίκλεις |
10932. Stems in –οσ-. – There is one stem in –οσ– (ἡ αἰδώς shame) which is, thus, inflected: nom. αἰδώς, gen. αἰδῦς (*αἰδος-ος, αἰδό-ος?), dat. αἰδοῖ (*αἰδόσ-ι, αἰδό-ι), acc. αἰδῶ (*αἰδοσ-α, αἰδο-α), voc. αἰδώς. The dual and plural are not found.
VOWEL STEMS
11033. Stems in –ι– and –υ-. – Stems ending in ι or υ are, thus, declined:
| ἡ πόλις city (stem πολι-) | ὁ πῆχυς forearm (stem πηχυ–) | τὸ ἄστυ town (stem ἀστυ) | ὁ ἰχθῡ́ς fish (stem ἰχθυ-) | |
| Singular | ||||
| Nom. | πόλι-ς | πῆχυ-ς | ἄστυ | ἰχθῡ́-ς |
| Gen. | πόλε-ως | πήχε-ως | ἄστε-ως | ἰχθύ-ός |
| Dat. | πόλει (πόλε-ϊ) | πήχει (πήχε-ϊ) | ἄστει (ἄστε-ϊ) | ἰχθύ-ϊ |
| Acc. | πόλι-ν | πῆχυ-ν | ἄστυ | ἰχθῡ́-ν |
| Voc. | πόλι | πῆχυ | ἄστυ | ἰχθῡ́ |
| Dual | ||||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | πόλει (πόλε-ε) | πήχει (πήχε-ε) | ἄστει (ἄστε-ε) | ἰχθύ-ε |
| Gen. Dat. | πολέ-οιν | πηχέ-οιν | ἀστέ-οιν | ἰχθύ-οιν |
| Plural | ||||
| Nom. Voc. | πόλεις (πόλε-ες) | πήχεις (πήχε-ες) | ἄστη (ἄστε-α) | ἰχθύ-ες |
| Gen. | πόλε-ων | πήχε-ων | ἀστε-ων | ἰχθύ-ῶν |
| Dat. | πόλε-σι | πήχε-δι | ἀστε-σι | ἰχθύ-σι |
| Acc. | πόλεις | πήχεις | ἄστη (ἄστε-α) | ἰχθῦς |
So also are declined ἡ δύναμις power, ὁ μάντις seer, ὁ πέλεκυς axe (like πῆχυς), ὁ or ἡ σῦς hog (like ἰχθῡ́ς gen. sing. συ-ός), βότρυς cluster of grapes (like ἰχθῡ́ς but with short υ). Most of these words are masculine or feminine; the only neuter in frequent use is ἄστυ town.
Note. – It is probable that in words like πόλις and πῆχυς we have, as we have seen elsewhere (§ 105, 1), two forms of the same stem existing side by side, πολι– and πολει– (see §§ 14, 2 and 73, 1). Thus, the nominative is formed from the shorter stem, ut the genitive was originally from the longer stem(*πόλι-ς, *πῆχυ-ς). These latter forms, however, are not found, for the ι or υ at once went over into the corresponding consonant form (j or F) and disappeared (§ 21). In compensation the preceding vowel was sometimes lengthened (§ 16), and thus, we have πόλη-ος (in Homer) and *πηχη-ος, by an interchange of quantity (§ 17), we get the usual Attic forms πόλεως and πήχεως. Observe that the interchange of quantity does not affect the position of the accent (§ 60).
1. Most steins in –v– keep the υ throughout and are declined like ἰχθῡ́ς. Stems of one syllable have the circumflex accent in the nominative, accusative, and vocative.
2. Proper names in –ις usually retain the ι of the stem throughout their inflection: thus, Συέννεσις Syennesis, gen. Συεννέσι-ος, etc. So also is declined κῑ́ς weevil, gen. κῑός, etc.
3. Observe that the accent of the genitive plural is irregularly made like that of the genitive singular.
4. The accusatives plural, πόλεις and πήχεις, are irregularly made like the nominatives plural.
11134. Stems ending in a diphthong lose the final vowel of the stem before all endings beginning with a vowel (§ 21). They are, thus, declined:
| ὁ βασιλεύς king (stem βασιλευ-) | ὁ, ἡ βοῦς ox, co (stem βου–) | ἡ γραῦς woman (stem γραυ) | ἡ ναῦς ship (stem ναυ-) | |
| Singular | ||||
| Nom. | βασιλεύ-ς | βοῦ-ς | γραῦ-ς | ναῦ-ς |
| Gen. | βασιλέ-ως | βο-ός | γρᾱ-ός | νε-ώς |
| Dat. | βασιλεϊ (βασιλέ-ϊ) | βο-ϊ | γρᾱ-ϊ | νη-ϊ |
| Acc. | βασιλέ-ᾱ | βοῦ-ν | γραῦ-ν | ναῦ-ν |
| Voc. | βασιλεῦ | βοῦ | γραῦ | ναῦ |
| Dual | ||||
| Nom. Acc. Voc. | βασιλῆ | βό-ε | ἄστει (ἄστε-ε) | νῆ-ε |
| Gen. Dat. | βασιλέ-οιν | βο-οῖν | γρᾱ-οῖν | νε-οῖν |
| Plural | ||||
| Nom. Voc. | βασιλῆς later -εῖς (-έ-ες) | βό-ες | γρᾶ-ες | νῆ-ες |
| Gen. | βασιλέ-ων | βο-ῶν | γρᾱ-ῶν | νε-ῶν |
| Dat. | βασιλεῦ-σι | βου-δί | γραυ-δί | ναυ-σι |
| Acc. | βασιλέ-ᾱς | βοῦς | γραῦς | ναῦς |
So also are declined ὁ ἱππεύς horseman, ὁ ἱρεύς priest, ὁ χοῦς three-quart measure (but w. acc χόα, acc. plur. χόας).
Note. – Many of the forms from stems in -ευ- are to be explained similarly to thouse from πῆχυς and πόλις. Thas, the genetive singular βασιλέ-ως comes by an interchange of quantity (§ 17), from βασιλῆ-ος (in Homer), and this, in turn, is for *βασιλῆφ-ος (§ 21). So also the accusatives singular and plural have -έ-ᾱ and -έ-ᾱς, for earlier -ῆ-α and -ῆ-ας.
1. Observe that the nominative, accusative, and vocative dual (βασιλῆ), and the older form of the nominative plural βασιλῆς), are contracted from βασιλῆ-ε and βασιλῆ-ες. (See note.)
2. When the final –ευ– of the stem follows a vowel or diphthong, contraction usually takes place in the genitive and accusative. Thus, Πειραιεύς Peiraeus usually has for its genitive Πειραιεῶς (for Πειραιέως)?), and for its accusative Πειραιᾶ (for Πειραιέᾱ).
112. Stems in –οι-. – Stems ending in οι (found in the singular only) lose their final ι in all cases except the vocative (§ 21). They are, thus, declined:
| ἡ πειθώ persuasion (stem πειθοι–) | ||
| Nom. | πειθώ | |
| Gen. | πειθοῦς | (πειθό-ος) |
| Dat. | πειθοῖ | (πειθό-ϊ) |
| Acc. | πειθώ | (πειθό-α) |
| Voc. | πειθοῖ | |
So also are declined ἡ ἠχώ echo, ἡ Λητώ Leto. All words which follow this declension have their written accent on the last syllable.
11335. Stems in –ω– (or ωF). A few words of the third declension appear to have stems ending in ω, but this could not have been the original ending. Possibly such stems ended originally in –ωF-. They are, thus, declined:
| ό ἤρως hero (stem ἡρω+?) | |||||
| Singular | Dual | Plural | |||
| Nom. | ἤρως | Nom. | ἤρω-ες, ἤρως | ||
| Gen. | ἤρω-ος | Nom. Acc. Voc. | ἤρω-ε | Gen. | ἡρώ-ων |
| Dat. | ἤρῳ (ἤρω-ϊ) | Gen. Dat. | ἡρώ-οιν | Dat. | ἡρώ-σι |
| Acc. | ἤρω-ϊ, ἤρω | Acc. | ἤρω-ας, ἤρως | ||
| Voc. | ἤρως | Voc. | ἤρω-ες, ἤρως | ||
So also are declined ὁ μήτρως mother's brother, ὁ πάτρως father's brother.
SUBSTANTIVES OF PECULIAR OR IRREGULAR DECLENSION
11436. 1. The Greeks sometimes declined the same word in different ways, especially when two different stems would give the same nominative singular. Thus, the stems σκοτο– and σκοτεσ– both give a nominative singular σκοτος darkness, genitive singular σκότου (2d decl.) or σκότους (3d decl.). So also stems of proper names in –ης, like Σωκρατεσ– (nom. sing. Σωκράτης, gen. sing. Σωκράτους, ace. sing. Σωκράτη), have sometimes an accusative singular in –ην; (Σωκράτην), as if of the first declension.
2. Again, certain cases may have been formed from stems of wholly different words: thus, ὁ ὄνειρος dream (2d decl. regular), but gen. sing, also ὁνείρατος, dat. ὁνείρατι, nom. plur. ὁνείρατα, gen. ὁνειράτων, dat. ὁνείρασι. See also § 103, 1 and 2.
3. Again, words sometimes have different genders in the different numbers. Thus, σῖτος grain (masc.) has for its plural σῖτα (neuter); τὸ στάδιον stade has for its plural usually oἱ στάδιοι.
11537. The peculiarities of substantives irregularly declined can best be learned from a lexicon, but some of the more important of these will be found in the following list:
1. ὁ Ἄρης (stem Ἀρεσ-) Ares, gen. Ἄρεως (poetic Ἄρεος ), dat. Ἄρει, voc. Ἄρες.
2. [ὁ, ἡ ἀρήν] (stem ἀρεν-, ἀρν-, ἀρνα-) lamb, of the same kind of declension as πατήρ (§ 105): thus, ἀρν–ός, ἀρν–ι, ἄρν-α, ἄρν-εα, ἀρνά-σι. The nominative singular is supplied by ἀμνός, 2d decl., regular.
3. τὸ γόνυ knee (Lat. genu), nom. ace. voc. sing. All other cases are formed from stem γόνατ- ος, γόνατ-ι, etc.
4. ἡ γυνή woman. All other forms come from a stem γυναικ-: the genitives and datives have their written accent on the last syllable: gen. sing. γυναικός, dat. γυναικί, acc. γυναῖκα, voc. γύναι ; dual γυναῖκε, γυναικοῖν; plur. γυναῖκες, γυναικῶν, γυναιξί, γυναῖκας. (Cf. § 73, 1).
5. ἡ δᾶς (δᾷδ-) torch, 3d decl., regular, but the genitive plural δᾷ́δων is an exception to the rule of accent for stems of one syllable (§ 100).
6. τὸ δόρυ spear, nom. ace. voc. sing. All other case from stem δορατ– (cf. γόυν, § 115, 3): δόρατ–ος, δόρατ–ι, etc. (cf. § 73, 1). Poetic gen. δορός, dat. δορί and δόρeι.
7. ὁ δμώς (δμω-) slave (poetic); 3d decl., regular, but the genitive plural (δμώων) is an exception to the rule of accent for stems of one syllable (§ 100).
8. Ζεύς (cf. § 39, 2) Ζeus, gen. Διός, dat. Διϊ; acc. Δία, voc. Ζεῦ.
9. τὸ κάρᾱ (καρᾱτ-, κρᾱτ-, § 73, 1) head (poetic), gen. κρᾱτ–ος, dat. κρᾱτ-ί or κάρᾷ, acc. κάρᾱ (or even κρᾶτα), voc. κάρᾱ; acc. plur. (rare) τοὺς κρᾶτας.
10. τὸ κέρας horn, wing, has forms from two different stems, κερασ– and κερατ-. See § 103, 2, and a. Sing. nom. acc. voc. κέρας, gen. κέρᾱτ or κέρως (for *κερα(σ)-ος, dat. κέρᾱτ–ι or κέρᾷ; dual nom. acc. voc. κέρᾱτε or κέρᾱ, gen. dat. κερᾱ́τοιν or κέρῳν; plur. nom. acc. voc. κέρᾱτα or κέρᾱ, gen. κερᾱ́των, dat. κέρᾱσι. In the meaning wing, forms from the stem κερασ are usually employed.
11. ὁ, ἡ κύων dog, voc. sing. κύον. All other cases from a stem κυν-: κυνός, κυνί, κύνα; plur. κυνeς, κυνῶν, κυσί, κύνας.
12. ὁ λᾶς stone (poetic), contracted from λᾶα-ς, gen. λᾶ-ος, dat. λᾶ-ϊ, acc. λᾶα-ν, λᾶ-ν; plur. λᾶ-ες, λᾱ́-ων, λᾱ́-εσσι, or λᾱ́-εσι.
13. ὁ, ῥ μάρτυς (μαρτυρ-) witness, gen. μάρτυρ-ος, etc., regular, except dat. plur μάρτυσι.
14. Οἰδίπους Oedipus, gen. Οἰδίποδος or Οἰδίπου (§ 114, 1), dat. Οἰδίποσι, acc. Οἰδίπουν, voc. Οἰδίπους or Οἰδίπου.
15. ἡ οἶς sheep (stem οι– for ὀφι-, cf. Lat. ovis), sing. οἶ-ς, οἰ-ός, οἰ-ΐ', οἶ-ν; plur. οἶ-ες, οἰ-ῶv, οἰ-σί, οἶς.
16. ὁ, ἡ ὄρνῑς (ὀρνῑθ-) bird, declined regularly (§ 102), but acc. sing, both ὄρνῑθα and ὄρνῑν (§ 97, 1).
17. τὸ οὖς ear, sing. nom. acc. voc. οὖς, all other forms from a stem ὠτ– (contracted from οὐατ– (*ὀ(φ)ατ-), see § 115, 18 a): thus, ὠτ-ός, ὠτ-ί; plur. ὦ-τα, ὤ-των, ὠσί. The genitive plural is an exception to the rule of accent for stems of one syllable (§ 100).
18. ὁ, ἡ παῖς (παιδ-) child, gen. παιδός, etc., regular, but voc. sing. παῖ. The genitive and dative dual (παί– δοιν) and the genitive plural (παίδων) are exceptions to the rule of accent for stems of one syllable (§ 100).
19. ἡ Πνύξ Pnyx (Πνυκ/c-, Πυκν-, § 38), Πυκνός, Πυκνί, Πύκνα.
20. ὁ πρεσβευτής (πρεσβευτᾱ-) embassador, rare in the plural. Instead, the plural of the poetic πρέσβυς (πρεσβυ-) old man is commonly used: thus, πρέσβεις, πρέσβεων, πρέσβεσι, πρέσβεις.
21. τὸ πῦρ (stem πυρ-) fire, gen. πυρός, etc., 3d decl.; but plural τὰ πυρά watch-fires, dat. πυροῖς, 2d decl.
22. ὁ Τρώς (stem Τρω-) Trojan; the genitive plural (Τρώων) is an exception to the rule of accent for stems of one syllable (§ 100).
23. τὸ ὔδωρ (ὑδατ-) water, gen. ὕδατος, etc.
24. ὁ υἱός (υἱό– and sometimes ὑο-, § 21) son, 2d decl., regular; also many 3d decl. forms from a stem υἱυ– or ὑυ (ι being usually dropped between the two vowels, § 21). These are: sing. gen. υ(ἱ)έος, dat. υ(ἱ)εῖ ; dual υ(ἱ)εῖ, υ(ἱ)έοιν; plur. υ(ἱ)εῖς, υ(ἱ)έων, υ(ἱ)έσι, υ(ἱ)εῖς.
25. ῥ χεἰρ (χειρ-) hand, 3d decl., regular, but dat. plur. χερσί, and sometimes dat. dual χεροῖν.
VI · Adjectives
116. The declension of adjectives in Greek is like that of substantives, and the general statements given under the three declensions of substantives will apply also to the declension of adjectives.
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS
(Vowel Declension)
11738. Most adjectives of the first and second declensions have three endings, masc. –ος, fern, –ᾱ or –η (§ 15), neut. –ος (cf. §§ 81 and 90). The masculine and neuter follow the second declension; the feminine follows the first declension. They are inflected as follows:
| ἀγαθός good | φίλιος friendly | |||||
| Singular | ||||||
| Masculine | Feminine | Neutral | Masculine | Feminine | Neutral | |
| Nom. | ἀγαθός | ἀγαθή | ἀγαθόν | φίλιος | φιλίᾱ | φίλιον |
| Gen. | ἀγαθοῦ | ἀγαθῆς | ἀγαθοῦ | φιλίου | φιλίᾱς | φιλίου |
| Dat. | ἀγαθῷ | ἀγαθῇ | ἀγαθῷ | φιλίῷ | φιλίᾷ | φιλίῷ |
| Acc. | ἀγαθόν | ἀγαθής | ἀγαθόν | φίλιον | φιλίᾱν | φίλιον |
| Voc. | ἀγαθέ | ἀγαθή | ἀγαθόν | φίλιε | φιλίᾱ | φίλιον |
| Dual | ||||||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | ἀγαθώ | ἀγαθᾱ́ | ἀγαθώ | φιλίω | φιλίᾱ | φιλίω |
| Gen., Dat. | ἀγαθοῖν | ἀγαθαῖν | ἀγαθοῖν | φιλίοιν | φιλίαιν | φιλίοιν |
| Plural | ||||||
| Nom., Voc. | ἀγαθοί | ἀγαθαί | ἀγαθά | φίλιοι | φίλιαι | φίλια |
| Gen. | ἀγαθῶν | ἀγαθῶν | ἀγαθῶν | φιλίων | φιλίων | φιλίων |
| Dat. | ἀγαθοῖς | ἀγαθαῖς | ἀγαθοῖς | φιλίοις | φιλίαις | φιλίοις |
| Acc. | ἀγαθούς | ἀγαθᾱ́ς | ἀγαθά | φιλίοις | φιλίᾱς | φίλια |
So alswo are declined σοφός, σοφή, σοφόν wise, μακρός, μακρᾱ́, μακρόν long, ἄξιος, ἀξίᾱ, ἄξιον worthy.
1. Observe that the feminine always has a long vowel, either ᾱ or η. After ε, ι or ρ the ᾱ is retained, otherwise it is changet to η (§ 83). After ο on η follows, unlees the ο is preceded by ρ; then ᾱ is employed: thas ὀγδόη (fem.) eight, but ἀθρόᾱ (fem.) collected.
2. Observe that, in regard to accent, the feminine follows the masculine rather than its own nominative singular. Thas φίλιαι nom. plur. and φιλίων gen. plur (contrary to §§ 77 and 84).
3. In the dual, the masculine forms are often used instead of the feminine. Thas, φίλω κόρα, two dear girls.
118. Many adjectives in –εος and -οος are contracted. They are, thus, declined:
| χρῡσοῦς (χρῡ́σεος) golden | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masculine | Feminine | Neutral | |
| Nom., Voc. | χρῡσοῦς (χρῡ́σεους) | χρῡσῆ (χρῡσέᾱ) | χρῡσοῦν (χρῡ́σεον) |
| Gen. | χρῡσοῦ (χρῡσέου) | χρῡσῆς (χρῡσέᾱς) | χρῡσῆς (χρῡσέου) |
| Dat. | χρῡσοῷ (χρῡσέῳ) | χρῡσῇ (χρῡσέᾷ) | χρῡσῇ (χρῡσέοῳ) |
| Acc. | χρῡσοῦν (χρῡ́σεον) | χρῡσῆν (χρῡσέᾱν) | χρῡσῆν (χρῡ́σεον) |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | χρῡσώ (χρῡσέω) | χρῡσᾶ (χρῡσέᾱ) | χρῡσώ (χρῡσέω) |
| Gen., Dat. | χρῡσοῖν (χρῡσέοιν) | χρῡσαῖν (χρῡσέαιν) | χρῡσοῖν (χρῡσέοιν) |
| Plural | |||
| Nom., Voc. | χρῡσοῖ (χρῡ́σεοι) | χρῡσαῖ (χρῡ́σεαι) | χρῡσᾶ (χρῡ́σεα) |
| Gen. | χρῡσῶν (χρῡσέων) | χρῡσῶν (χρῡσέων) | χρῡσῶν (χρῡσέων) |
| Dat. | χρῡσοῖς (χρῡσέοις) | χρῡσαῖς (χρῡσέαις) | χρῡσοῖς (χρῡσέοις) |
| Acc. | χρῡσοῦς (χρῡ́σεους) | χρῡσᾶς (χρῡσέᾱς) | χρῡσᾶ (χρῡ́σεα) |
| ἀργυροῦς (ἀργύρεος) silver | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masculine | Feminine | Neutral | |
| Nom., Voc. | ἀργυροῦς (ἀργύρεος) | ἀργυρᾶ (ἀργυρέᾱ) | ἀργυροῦν (ἀργύρεον) |
| Gen. | ἀργυροῦ (ἀργυρέου) | ἀργυρᾶς (ἀργυρέᾱς) | ἀργυροῦ (ἀργυρέου) |
| Dat. | ἀργυρῷ (ἀργυρέῳ) | ἀργυρᾷ (ἀργύρέᾷ) | ἀργυρῷ (ἀργυρέῳ) |
| Acc. | ἀργυροῦν (ἀργύρεον) | ἀργυρᾶν (ἀργύρέᾱν) | ἀργυροῦν (ἀργύρεον) |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | ἀργυρώ (ἀργυρέω) | ἀργυρᾶ (ἀργυρέᾱ) | ἀργυρώ (ἀργυρέω) |
| Gen., Dat. | ἀργυροῖν (ἀργυρέοιν) | ἀργυραῖν (ἀργύρέαιν) | ἀργυροῖν (ἀργυρέοιν) |
| Plural | |||
| Nom., Voc. | ἀργυροῖ (ἀργύρέοι) | ἀργυραῖ (ἀργύρεαι) | ἀργύρᾶ (ἀργύρεα) |
| Gen. | ἀργυρῶν (ἀργυρέων) | ἀργυρῶν (ἀργυρέων) | ἀργυρῶν (ἀργυρέων) |
| Dat. | ἀργυροῖς (ἀργυρέοις) | ἀργυραῖς (ἀργυρέαις) | χρῡσοῖς (ἀργυρέοις) |
| Acc. | ἀργυροῦς (ἀργυρους) | ἀργυρᾶς (ἀργυρέᾱς) | ἀργύρᾶ (ἀργύρεα) |
| ἁπλοῦς (ἁπλόος) simple. | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masculine | Feminine | Neutral | |
| Nom., Voc. | ἁπλοῦς (ἁπλόος) | ἁπλῆ (ἀπλέᾱ) | ἁπλοῦν (ἁπλόον) |
| Gen. | ἁπλοῦ (ἁπλόον) | ἁπλῆς (ἀπλέᾱς) | ἁπλοῦ (ἁπλόον) |
| Dat. | ἁπλῷ (ἁπλόῳ) | ἁπλῇ (ἀπλέᾷ) | ἁπλῷ (ἁπλόῳ) |
| Acc. | ἁπλοῦν (ἁπλόον) | ἁπλῆν (ἀπλέᾱν) | ἁπλοῦν (ἁπλόον) |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | ἁπλώ (ἁπλόω) | ἁπλᾶ (ἁπλέᾱ) | ἁπλώ (ἁπλόω) |
| Gen., Dat. | ἁπλοῖν (ἁπλόοιν) | ἁπλαῖν (ἁπλέαιν) | ἁπλοῖν (ἁπλόοιν) |
| Plural | |||
| Nom., Voc. | ἁπλοῖ (ἁπλόοι) | ἁπλαῖ (ἁπλέαι) | ἁπλᾶ (ἁπλόα) |
| Gen. | ἁπλῶν (ἁπλόων) | ἁπλῶν (ἁπλέων) | ἁπλῶν (ἁπλόων) |
| Dat. | ἁπλοῖς (ἁπλόοις) | ἁπλαῖς (ἁπλέαις) | ἁπλοῖς (ἁπλόοις) |
| Acc. | ἁπλοῦς (ἁπλόους) | ἁπλᾶς (ἁπλέᾱς) | ἁπλᾶ (ἁπλόα) |
1. Observe that in contraction, a short vowel before a is absorbed. Thus, χρῡσέαις becomes χρῡσάις and ἁπλόα ἁπλᾶ. In the feminine singular, however, this takes place only after ρ: ἀργυρέᾱ, ἀργυρᾶ, but ἁπλέᾱ, ἁπλῆ (cf. § 83).
2. Observe that adjectives in –οος form their contracted feminine from a stem in –εα-.
3. Adjectives of material in –εος irregularly have their written accent on their contract syllables. Thus, χρῡ́σεος, when contracted, becomes χρῡσοῦς. For the accent of the nominative dual (χρῡσώ) cf. § 91, 2.
Adjectives of two endings in the vowel declension
11939. By an adjective of two endings, we mean one that uses the masculine form also for the feminine. Thus, masc. and fern. ἥσυχος, neut. ἥσυχον quiet.
Compound adjectives, as a rule, have only two endings: so ἄ-λογος, ἄ-λογον irrational, εὔ-νους, εὔ-νουν well-disposed. They are, thus, declined:
| ἥσυχος quiet | ἵλεως propitious | |||
| Singular | ||||
| Masc. & Fem. | Neutral | Masc. & Fem. | Neutral | |
| Nom. | ἥσυχος | ἥσυχον | ἵλεως | ἵλεων |
| Gen. | ἡσύχου | ἡσύχου | ἵλεω | ἵλεως |
| Dat. | ἡσύχῳ | ἡσύχῳ | ἵλεῳ | ἵλεῳ |
| Acc. | ἥσυχον | ἥσυχον | ἵλεων | ἵλεων |
| Voc. | ἥσυχε | ἥσυχον | ἵλεως | ἵλεως |
| Dual | ||||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | ἡσύχω | ἡσύχω | ἵλεω | ἵλεω |
| Gen., Dat. | ἡσύχοιν | ἡσύχοιν | ἵλεῳν | ἵλεῳν |
| Plural | ||||
| Nom., Voc. | ἥσυχοι | ἥσυχα | ἵλεῳ | ἵλεα |
| Gen. | ἡσύχων | ἡσύχων | ἵλεων | ἵλεων |
| Dat. | ἡσύχοις | ἡσύχοις | ἵλεῳς | ἵλεῳς |
| Acc. | ἡσύχους | ἡσύχα | ἵλεως | ἵλεα |
So also are declined βάρβαρος, βάρβαρον barbarian, ἐπί-φθονος, ἐπί-φθονον envious, ἄ-τεκνος, ἄ-τεκνον childless: so also with contraction (see § 91, 3), εὔ-νους (εὔ-νοος), εὔ-νουν well-disposed.
1. For the accent of ἵλεως, see § 92, 2.
2. One adjective, πλέως, full has a feminine πλέᾱ.
THIRD DECLENSION
(Consonant Declension)
12040. Adjectives belonging wholly to the consonant declension have only two endings, the masculine being the same as the feminine.
Most of these have stems ending in εσ– or ον. They are, thus, declined:
| ἁλνθής true | εὐδαίμων happy | |||
| Singular | ||||
| Masc. & Fem. | Neutral | Masc. & Fem. | Neutral | |
| Nom. | ἁληθής | ἁληθές | εὐδαίμων | εὔδαίμον |
| Gen. | ἁληθοῦς (ἁληθέ-ος) | ἁληθοῦς (ἁληθέ-ος) | εὐδαίμονος | εὐδαίμονος |
| Dat. | ἁληθεῖ (ἁληθέ-ϊ) | ἁληθεῖ (ἁληθέ-ϊ) | εὐδαίμονι | εὐδαίμονι |
| Acc. | ἁληθῆ (ἁληθέ-α) | ἁληθές | εὐδαίμονα | εὔδαιμον |
| Voc. | ἁληθές | ἁληθές | εὔδαιμον | εὔδαιμον |
| Dual | ||||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | ἡσύχω | ἡσύχω | εὐδαίμονε | εὐδαίμονε |
| Gen., Dat. | ἡσύχοιν | ἡσύχοιν | εὔδαιμόνοιν | εὔδαιμόνοιν |
| Plural | ||||
| Nom., Voc. | ἥσυχοι | ἥσυχα | εὐδαίμονες | εὐδαίμονα |
| Gen. | ἡσύχων | ἡσύχων | εὔδαιμόνων | εὔδαιμόνων |
| Dat. | ἡσύχοις | ἡσύχοις | εὐδαίμοσι | εὐδαίμοσι |
| Acc. | ἡσύχους | ἡσύχα | εὐδαίμονας | εὐδαίμονα |
So also are declined σαφής, σαφές clear; ἐνδεής, ἐνδεές needy (see § 120, 3); σώφρων, σῶφρων discreet; ἄρρην, ἄρρεν male. For fuller information about stems in –εσ– see §§ 106–107.
1. Observe that the accent of the neuter εὔδαιμον is recessive.
2. Compound adjectives in –ης, without written accent on the last syllable, have recessive accent even in contracted forms: Thus, masc. and fem. αὐτάρκης self-sufficient, neut. αὔταρκες, gen. plur. αὐτάρκων (instead of αὐτάρκῶν from αὐτάρκέ(σ)-ων.
3. The contraction of εα following an ε (and sometimes an ι or υ) gives ᾱ (cf. § 118, 1): thus, ἐνδεᾶ for e from ἐνδεέ(σ)-α from ἐνδεής needy.
121. Declension of Comparatives in –ων. – To this form of declension belong also comparatives in –ων, which in some cases are often formed on a stem in –οσ– (§ 73, 1) (cf. Lat. mel–ίōr–is for *mel-iōs-is), and so suffer contraction. They are, thus, declined:
| βελτίων better | ||
| Singular | ||
| Masc. & Fem. | Neutral | |
| Nom. | βελτίων | βέλτῑον |
| Gen. | βελτίον-ος | |
| Dat. | βελτίον-ι | |
| Acc. | βελτίον-α or βελτίω (for βελτῑο (σ)-α) | βέλτῑον |
| Voc. | βέλτῑον | βέλτῑον |
| Dual | ||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | βελτίον-ε | βελτίον-ε |
| Gen., Dat. | βελτῑόν-οιν | βελτῑόν-οιν |
| Plural | ||
| Nom., Voc. | βελτίον-ες or βελτίους (for βελτῑο (σ)-ες) | βελτίον-α or βελτίω (for βελτῑο (σ)-α) |
| Gen. | βελτῑόν-ων | βελτῑόν-ων |
| Dat. | βελτίοσι | βελτίοσι |
| Acc. | βελτίον-ας, or βελτίους | βελτίον-α, or βελτίω (for βελτῑο (σ)-α) |
So also are declined μείξων greater (neut. μεῖξον), καλλῑ́ων more beautiful, θᾱ́ττων swifter.
1. Observe that the neuter (βέλτῑον) is recessive in accent.
2. The accusative βελτῑους (which should properly be βελτῑως for βελτῑο(σ)-ας is imitated from the nominative.
Other adjectives of two endings in the consonant declension
Some other adjectives of two endings are made by compounding substantives with a prefix. Such, for example, are:
εὔ-ελπις, εὔ-ελπι of good hope, gen. sing. εὐέλπιδ-ος, acc. sing. masc. and fem. εὔελπιν (§ 97, 1), ἀ-πάτωρ, ἄ-πατορ fatherless, gen. sing, ἀ-πάτορ-ος, etc.
ADJECTIVES OF THREE ENDINGS OF THE FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS
122. Adjectives of the consonant declension which have a separate form for the feminine always inflect the feminine like the second class of substantives of the first declension (§§ 81, 82).
1. The feminine is formed from the stem of the masculine by adding –ια, but the ι regularly combines with the preceding letter (see § 18, 1, and § 39).
2. The genitive plural of the feminine always has the circumflex accent on the last syllable (§ 84).
12341. Stems in –υ-. – Adjectives with stems ending in υ are, thus, declined:
| ταχύς swift | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | ταχύς | ταχεῖα | ταχύ |
| Gen. | ταχέος | ταχείᾱς | ταχέος |
| Dat. | ταχεῖ (ταχέ-ϊ) | ταχείᾷ | ταχεῖ (ταχέ-ϊ) |
| Acc. | ταχύν | ταχεῖαν | ταχύ |
| Voc. | ταχύ | ταχεῖα | ταχύ |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | ταχεῖ (ταχέ-ε) | ταχείᾱ | ταχεῖ (ταχέ-ε) |
| Gen., Dat. | ταχέοιν | ταχείᾱιν | ταχέοιν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | ταχεῖς (ταχέ-ες) | ταχεῖαι | ταχέα |
| Gen. | ταχέων | ταχειῶν | ταχέων |
| Dat. | ταχέσι | ταχείαις | ταχέσι |
| Acc. | ταχεῖς | ταχείᾱς | ταχέα |
So also are declined γλυκύς sweet, βραδύς slow, εὐρύς wide.
1. Observe that the genitive singular masculine and neuter ends in –ος, and that the neuter plural is uncontracted. Compare the declension of πῆχυς and ἄστυ (§ 110).
Note. The feminine ταχεῖα is for *ταχευ-ια (cf. § 14, 2 and § 21).
124. Stems in –αν-. – Adjectives with steims ending in αν are, thus, declined:
| μέλᾱς black | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | μέλᾱς | μέλαινα | μέλαν |
| Gen. | μέλανος | μελαίνης | μέλανος |
| Dat. | μέλανι | μελαίνῃ | μέλαν |
| Acc. | μέλανα | μέλαιναν | μέλαν |
| Voc. | μέλαν | μέλαινα | μέλαν |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | μέλανε | μελαίνᾱ | μέλανε |
| Gen., Dat. | μελάνοιν | μελαίναιν | μελάνοιν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | μέλανες | μέλαιναι | μέλανα |
| Gen. | μελάνων | μελαίνῶν | μελάνων |
| Dat. | μέλασι | μελαίναις | μέλασι |
| Acc. | μέλανας | μελαίνᾱς | μέλανα |
Like μέλᾱς is declined only τάλᾱς? wretched.
Note. The feminine μέλαινα is for *μέλαν-ια (see § 39, 4).
1. The nominative singular masculine is formed with ς, contrary to § 96, 1. Observe that the nominative singular masculine (μέλᾱς) has long ᾱ according to § 34, while the short a of the dative plural (μέλᾱσι) is in accordance with § 99.
125. Stems in –ντ-. – Stems in –ντ– are, thus, declined:
| χαρίεις pleasing | πᾶς all | |||||
| Singular | ||||||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | χαρίεις | χαρίεσσα | χαρίεν | πᾶς | πᾶσα | πᾶν |
| Gen. | χαρίεντος | χαρίεσσης | χαρίεντος | παντός | πᾱ́σης | παντός |
| Dat. | χαρίεντι | χαρίεσσῃ | χαρίεντι | παντί | πᾱ́σῃ | παντί |
| Acc. | χαρίεντα | χαρίεσσαν | χαρίεν | πάντα | πᾶσαν | πᾶν |
| Voc. | χαρίεν | χαρίεσσα | χαρίεν | πᾶν | πᾶσα | πᾶν |
| Dual | ||||||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | χαρίεντε | χαριέσσᾱ | χαρίεντε | |||
| Gen., Dat. | χαρίεντοιν | χαριέσσαιν | χαρίεντοιν | |||
| Plural | ||||||
| Nom. | χαρίεντες | χαρίεσσαι | χαρίεντα | πάντες | πᾶσαι | πάντα |
| Gen. | χαρίεντων | χαριεσσῶν | χαρίεντων | πάντων | πᾶσῶν | πάντων |
| Dat. | χαρίεσι | χαριέσσαις | χαρίεσι | πᾶσι | πᾱ́σαις | πᾶσι |
| Acc. | χαρίεντας | χαριέσσᾱς | χαρίεντα | πάντας | πᾱ́σᾱς | πάντα |
Like χαρίεις are inflected πτερόεις winged, voiced.
Note 1. The feminine –πᾶσα is for *παντ-jα, *παντ-σα (§ 34), while χαρίεσσα (-εττα, see § 125, 1) is for *χαρίεντια (§ 39, 1), from a shorter form of the stem (χαριετ-). The dative plural χαρίεσι (for *χαριετ-σι, § 30) also comes from this stem.
Note 2. The nominatives singular masculine χαρίεις and πᾶς are for *χαριεντ-ς and *παντ-ς. See § 34.
1. The feminine of adjectives like χαρίες occurs only in poetic diction, and so the feminine χαρίεσσα has σσ instead of ττ (§ 22). The Attic prose form of this word would be χαρίεττα.
2. Observe that the genitives and datives πάντων, πᾶσι are accented contrary to § 100.
3. Observe that the neuter singular πᾶν irregularly has ᾱ, imitated from the masculine.
Adjectives of one ending
126. A few adjectives from their meaning have no neuter, and the masculine and feminine are inflected alike: so ἄ-παις childless, gen. sing. ἄ-παιδ-ος, etc.; πένης poor, gen. sing. πένητ–ος, etc.
ADJECTIVES OF IRREGULAR DECLENSION
12742. The irregular adjectives μέγας great (stems μεγα and μεγαλο-, § 73, 1) and πολύς much, many (stems πολυ and πολλο-, § 73, 1) are, thus, declined:
| μέγας great | πολύς much, many | |||||
| Singular | ||||||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | μέγας | μεγάλη | μέγα | πολύς | πολλή | πολύ |
| Gen. | μεγάλου | μεγάλης | μεγάλο | πολλοῦ | πολλῇς | παντός |
| Dat. | μεγάλῳ | μεγάλῃ | μεγάλῳ | πολλῷ | πολλῇ | παντί |
| Acc. | μέγαν | μεγάλην | μέγα | πολύν | πολλήν | πολύ |
| Voc. | μέγας | μεγάλη | μέγα | |||
| Dual | ||||||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | μεγάλω | μεγάλᾱ | μεγάλω | |||
| Gen., Dat. | μεγάλοιν | μεγάλαιν | μεγάλοιν | |||
| Plural | ||||||
| Nom. | μεγάλοι | μεγάλαι | μεγάλα | πολλοί | πολλαί | πολλά |
| Gen. | μεγάλων | μεγάλων | μεγάλων | πολλῶν | πᾶσῶν | πολλῶν |
| Dat. | μεγάλοις | μεγάλαις | μεγάλοις | πολλοῖς | πᾱ́σαις | πολλοῖς |
| Acc. | μεγάλους | μεγάλᾱς | μεγάλα | πολλούς | πολλᾱ́ς | πολλά |
Note. In πολύς two stems are to be seen (§ 73, 1), one with and one without ο: thus, (1) πολλυ– and (2) πολλυ-, i.e. πολφο, and by assimilation πολλο.
128. Declension of πρᾷος. – πρᾷος mild (stem πρᾷο-) forms its feminine and usually most of its plural from a stem πρᾱυ– (§ 73, 1). Thus, nom. sing. fern. πρᾱεῖα (for *πρᾱευα–ια; cf. ταχεῖα, § 123, note), nom. plur. masc. πρᾷοι or πρᾱεῖς, gen. plur. masc. πρᾷ́ων or (usually) πρᾱέων, etc.
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES
129. All participles of the middle voice, together with the participle of the future passive, are inflected like ἀγαθός (§ 117).
All other participles, namely, the participles of the active voice, together with the participle of the aorist passive, belong to the first and third declensions (§ 122). The stems of all of these, with the exception of the perfect active participle, end in ντ. Such participles are, thus, declined:
| βουλεύων planning (stem βουλευοντ-) | ὤν being (stem ὀντ-) | |||||
| Singular | ||||||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | βουλεύων | βουλεύουσα | βουλεῦον | ὤν | οὖσα | ὄν |
| Gen. | βουλεύοντος | βουλευούσης | βουλεύοντος | ὄντος | οὔσης | ὄντος |
| Dat. | βουλεύοντι | βουλευούσῃ | βουλεύοντι | ὄντι | οὔσῃ | ὄντι |
| Acc. | βουλεύοντα | βουλεύουσαν | βουλεῦον | ὄντα | οὖσαν | ὄν |
| Voc. | βουλεύων | βουλεύουσα | βουλεῦον | ὤν | οὖσα | ὄν |
| Dual | ||||||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | βουλεύοντε | βουλευούσα | βουλεύοντε | ὄντε | οὔσᾱ | ὄντε |
| Gen., Dat. | βουλευόντοιν | μεγάλαιν | βουλευόντοιν | ὄντοιν | οὔσαιν | ὄντοιν |
| Plural | ||||||
| Nom. | βουλεύοντες | μεγάλαι | μεγάλα | ὄντες | οὖσαι | ὄντα |
| Gen. | βουλευόντων | μεγάλῶν | μεγάλων | ὄντων | οὐσῶν | ὄντων |
| Dat. | χαρίεσι | μεγάλαις | μεγάλοις | οὖσῖ | οὔσαις | οὖσῖ |
| Acc. | χαρίεντας | μεγάλᾱς | μεγάλα | οὔτας | οὔσᾱς | ὄντα |
| διδούς giving (stem διδοντ-) | δεικνῡ́ς showing (stem δεικνυντ-) | |||||
| Singular | ||||||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | διδούς | διδοῦσα | διδόν | δεικνῡ́ς | δεικνῦσα | δεικνύν |
| Gen. | διδόντος | διδούσης | διδόντος | δεικνύντος | δεικνῡ́σης | δεικνύντος |
| Dat. | διδόντι | διδούσῃ | διδόντι | δεικνύντι | δεικνῡ́σῃ | δεικνύντι |
| Acc. | διδόντα | διδοῦσαν | διδόν | δεικνύντα | δεικνῦσαν | δεικνύν |
| Voc. | διδούς | διδοῦσα | διδόν | δεικνῡ́ς | δεικνῦσα | δεικνύν |
| Dual | ||||||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | διδόντε | διδούσᾱ | διδόντε | δεικνύντε | δεικνῡ́σᾱ | δεικνύντε |
| Gen., Dat. | διδόντοιν | διδούσαιν | διδόντοιν | δεικνύντοιν | δεικνῡ́σαιν | δεικνύντοιν |
| Plural | ||||||
| Nom. | διδόντες | διδοῦσαι | διδόντα | δεικνύντες | δεικνῦσαι | δεικνύντα |
| Gen. | διδόντων | διδουσῶν | διδόντων | δεικνύντων | δεικνῡσῶν | δεικνύντων |
| Dat. | διδοῦσι | διδούσαις | διδοῦσι | δεικνῦσι | δεικνῡ́σαις | δεικνῦσι |
| Acc. | διδόντας | διδούσᾱς | διδόντα | δεικνύντας | δεικνῡ́σᾱς | δεικνύντα |
| λῡ́σᾱς having loosed (stem λῡσᾱντ-) | λυθείς loosed (stem λυθεντ-) | |||||
| Singular | ||||||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | λῡ́σᾱς | λῡ́σᾱσα | λῦσαν | λυθείς | λυθεῖσα | λυθέν |
| Gen. | λῡ́σαντος | λῡσᾱ́σης | λῡ́σαντος | λυθέντος | λυθείσης | λυθέντος |
| Dat. | λῡ́σαντι | λῡσᾱ́σῃ | λῡ́σαντι | λυθέντι | λυθείσῃ | λυθέντι |
| Acc. | λῡ́σαντα | λῡ́σᾱσαν | λῦσαν | λυθέντα | λυθεῖσαν | λυθέν |
| Voc. | λῡ́σᾱς | λῡ́σᾱσα | λῦσαν | λυθείς | λυθεῖσα | λυθέν |
| Dual | ||||||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | λῡ́σαντε | λῡσᾱ́σᾱ | λῡ́σαντε | λυθέντε | λυθείσᾱ | λυθέντε |
| Gen., Dat. | λῡσάντοιν | λῡσᾱ́σαιν | λῡσάντοιν | λυθέντοιν | λυθείσαιν | λυθέντοιν |
| Plural | ||||||
| Nom. | λῡ́σαντες | λῡ́σᾱσαι | λῡ́σαντα | λυθέντες | λυθεῖσαι | λυθέντα |
| Gen. | λῡσάντων | λῡσᾱσῶν | λῡσάντων | λυθέντων | λυθείσῶν | λυθέντων |
| Dat. | λῡ́σᾱσι | λῡσᾱ́σαις | λῡ́σᾱσι | λυθεῖσι | λυθείσαις | λυθεῖσι |
| Acc. | λῡ́σαντας | λῡσᾱ́σᾱς | λῡ́σαντα | λυθέντας | λυθείσᾱς | λυθέντα |
So also are declined παιδεύων educating (like βουλεύων, λιπών (2d aor.) having left (like ὤν), ἑκών willing (like ὤν), παιδεύσᾱς having educated (like λῡ́σᾱς), ἱστᾱ́ς erecting (like λῡ́σᾱς), παιδευθείς educated (like λυτείς), τιθείς putting (like λυτείς).
1. Observe that all stems in –οντ-, except those of –μι verbs (§ 170), form their nominative singular masculine without –ς, according to § 96, 1. All other stems in –ντ– form their nominative by adding –ς.
2. Observe that the accent of the neuter singular follows that of the masculine (βουλεῦον, unlike εὔδαιμον, § 120, 1).
3. Observe that participles of one syllable keep their written accent on the first syllable in the genitive and dative, contrary to § 100.
4. Observe that the vocative singular is like the nominative (cf. § 98, 1).
130. The present participle of verbs in –ῶ, (-άω, -έω and –όω) and the future participle of liquid verbs (§ 213) are contracted. They are declined as follows:
| τῑμῶν honoring (contracted from τῑμάων) | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | τῑμῶν (-άων) | τῑμῶσα (-άουσα) | τῑμῶν (-άον) |
| Gen. | τῑμῶντος (-άοντος) | τῑμώσης (-αούσης) | τῑμῶντος (-άοντος) |
| Dat. | τῑμῶντι (-άοντι) | τῑμώσῃ (-αούσῃ) | τῑμῶντι (-άοντι) |
| Acc. | τῑμῶντα (-άοντα) | τῑμῶσαν (-άουσαν) | τῑμῶν (-άον) |
| Voc. | τῑμῶν (-άων) | τῑμῶσα (-άουσα) | τῑμῶν (-άον) |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | τῑμῶντε (-άοντε) | τῑμώσᾱ (-αούσᾱ) | τῑμῶντε (-άοντε) |
| Gen., Dat. | τῑμῶντοιν (-αόντοιν) | τῑμώσαιν (-αούσαιν) | τῑμῶντοιν (-αόντοιν) |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | τῑμῶντες (-άοντες) | τῑμῶσαι (-άουσαι) | τῑμῶντα (-άοντα) |
| Gen. | τῑμώντων (-αόντων) | τῑμωσῶν (-αουσῶν) | τῑμώντων (-αόντων) |
| Dat. | τῑμῶσι (-άουσι) | τῑμώσαις (-αούσαις) | τῑμῶσι (-άουσι) |
| Acc. | τῑμῶντας (-άοντας) | τῑμώσᾱς (-αούσᾱς) | τῑμῶντα (-άοντα) |
| φιλῶν loving (contracted from φιλέων) | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | φιλῶν (-έων) | φιλοῦσα (-έουσα) | φιλοῦν (-έον) |
| Gen. | φιλοῦντος (-έοντος) | φιλούσης (-εούσης) | φιλοῦντος (-έοντος) |
| Dat. | φιλοῦντι (-έοντι) | φιλούσῃ (-εούσῃ) | φιλοῦντι (-έοντι) |
| Acc. | φιλοῦντα (-έοντα) | φιλοῦναν (-έουσαν) | φιλοῦν (-έον) |
| Voc. | φιλῶν (-έων) | φιλοῦσα (-έουσα) | φιλοῦν (-έον) |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | φιλοῦντε (-έοντε) | φιλούσᾱ (-εούσᾱ) | φιλοῦντε (-έοντε) |
| Gen., Dat. | φιλοῦντων (-έοντοιν) | φιλούσαιν (-εούσαιν) | φιλοῦντων (-έοντοιν) |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | φιλοῦντες (-έοντες) | φιλοῦσαι (-έουσαι) | φιλοῦντα (-έοντα) |
| Gen. | φιλούντων (-έοντων) | φιλουσῶν (-εουσῶν) | φιλούντων (-έοντων) |
| Dat. | φιλοῦσι (-έουσι) | φιλούσαις (-εούσαις) | φιλοῦσι (-έουσι) |
| Acc. | φιλοῦντας (-έοντας) | φιλούσᾱς (-εούσᾱς) | φιλοῦντα (-έοντα) |
1. The present participle of δηλῶ (-όω), δηλῶν (for δηλόων), is inflected exactly like φιλῶν. The uncontracted forms do not occur.
131. Perfect Active Participles. – The stem of the perfect active participle ends in οτ or ος (§ 73, 1). The declension is as follows:
| λελυκώς having loosed (stem λελυκοτ-, λελυκοσ-) | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | λελυκώς | λελυκυῖα | λελυκός |
| Gen. | λελυκότος | λελυκυίᾱς | λελυκότος |
| Dat. | λελυκότι | λελυκυίᾷ | λελυκότι |
| Acc. | λελυκότα | λελυκυῖαν | λελυκός |
| Voc. | λελυκώς | λελυκυῖα | λελυκός |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., Voc. | λελυκότε | λελυκυίᾱ | λελυκότε |
| Gen., Dat. | λελυκότοιν | λελυκυίαιν | λελυκότοιν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | λελυκότες | λελυκυῖαι | λελυκότα |
| Gen. | λελυκότων | λελυκυιῶν | λελυκότων |
| Dat. | λελυκόσι | λελυκυίαις | λελυκόσι |
| Acc. | λελυκότας | λελυκυίᾱς | λελυκότα |
So also are inflected πεπαιδευκώς, –κυῖα, –κός having educated; ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα, ἑστός standing (stem ἑστωτ-(ἑστωσ–), contracted from ἑσταοτ-).
Note. The neuter of ἑστώς is usually written ἑστός, probably to distinguish it from the masculine, since otherwise both would be ἑστώς.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
132. Comparison by –τερος, –τατος. – Most adjectives form the comparative degree by adding –τερος, –τερᾱ, – τερον (declined like μακρός, § 117) to the masculine stem of the positive. The superlative is formed by adding –τατος, –τατη, –τατον (declined like ἀγαθός, § 117) to the same stem. Thus,:
| Positive | Comparative | Superlative |
| κοῦφος light | κουφό-τερος | κουφό-τατος |
| πικρός bitter | πικρό-τερος | πικρό-τατος |
| ὀξύς sharp | ὀξύ-τερος | ὀξύ-τατος |
| μέλᾱς black | μελάν-τερος | μελάν-τατος |
| σαφής clear | σαφέσ-τερος | σαφέσ-τατος |
| χαρίεις pleasing | χαριέσ-τερος (for *χαριετ-τερος see § 26 and § 125, note 1) | χαριέσ-τατος |
1. Stems in –o– lengthen the final o of the stem unless the preceding syllable is long (either by nature or position, §§ 52, 53). Thus,:
| Positive | Comparative | Superlative |
| σοφός wise | σοφώ-τερος | σοφώ-τατος |
| ἄξιος worthy | ἀξιώ-τερος | ἀξιώ-τατος |
2. A few words usually drop the final o of the stem: thus, γεραιός old, comparative γεραίτερος; φίλος friendly, comparative φίλτερος, superlative φίλτατος.
133. Adjectives in –ων and –ους (-οος) are compared as if their stems ended in εσ: thus, σώφρων discreet, comparative σωφρονέσ–τερος, etc.; εὔνους well disposed, comparative εὐνούστερος etc. (for *εὐνοεσ–τερος).
13443. Comparison by –ῑων, –ιστος. – A few adjectives are compared by adding to the root of the positive the endings –ῑων, – ῑον to form the comparative, and –ιστος, –ιστη, –ιστον to form the superlative. The superlative is declined like ἀγαθός (§ 117); for the declension of the comparative see § 121. Thus,:
| Positive | Comparative | Superlative |
| ἡδ-ύ-ς pleasant (cf. ἥδ-ομαι am pleased) | ἡδ-ῑ́ων | ἥδ-ιστος |
| ταχ-ύ-ς swift (cf. τάχ-ος swiftness) | θᾱ́ττων (for τάχ-ῑων, §§ 39,1 and 41) | τάχ-ιστος |
| μέγ-α-ς great (cf. μέγ-εθος greatness) | μείζων (for μεγ–ῑων, § 39,2) | μέγ-ιστος |
| ἐχθ-ρό-ς hostile (cf. ἔχθ-ος halred) | ἐχθ-ῑ́ων | ἔχθ-ιστος |
| αἰσχ-ρό-ς shameful (cf. αἶσχ-ος shame) | αἰσχ-ῑ́ων | αἴσχ-ιστος |
135. Comparison by (μᾶλλον, μάλιστα. – Adjectives are sometimes compared by means of the adverbs μᾶλλον more and μάλιστα most. Thus, φίλος friendly, μᾶλλον φίλος more friendly, μάλιστα φίλος most friendly.
136. Irregular Comparison. – The following list contains the most important adjectives of irregular comparison:
| Positive | Comparative | Superlative |
| ἀγαθός good | ἀμείνων | ἄριστος (cf. ἀρ-ετή virtue) |
| βελτῑ́ων | βέλτιστος | |
| κρείττων | κράτιστος (cf. κράτ-ος strength) | |
| λῴων | λῴστος | |
| κακός bad | κακῑ́ων | κάκιστος |
| χείρων deterior | χείριστος | |
| ἥττων inferior | ἥκιστα adv. least of all | |
| μικρός small | μικρότερος | μικρότατος |
| μείων | ||
| ἐλάττων (for *ἐλαχιων, § 39, 1) | ἐλαχιστος | |
| πολύς much, many | πλείων, πλέων (see § 21) | πλεῖστος |
| καλός beautiful | καλλῑ́ων | κάλλιστος (cf. κάλλ-ος beauty) |
| ῥᾷ́διος easy | ῥᾷ́δων | ῥᾷ́δτος |
| ἀλγεινός painful | ἀλγῑ́ων | ἄλγιστος (cf. ἄλγ-ος pain) |
VI · Adverbs
13744. Form of Adverbs. – Most Adverbs end in –ως, and are regularly derived from adjectives. Their form is in all respects like the genitive plural, except that the last letter is ς instead of ν.
Their form can always be determined by substituting 5 for the final ν of the genitive plural.
Thus, σοφῶς wisely (σοφός wise, gen. plur. πάντως wholly (πᾶς whole gen. plur. πάντων), ταχέως quickly (ταχύς quick, gen. plur. ταχέων), σαφῶς clearly (σαφής clear, gen. plur. contracted (§ 120) σαφῶν).
Note. The adverb corresponding to ἀγαθός good is εὖ well.
1. Besides the regularly formed adverbs many nouns (some of them obsolete) and some pronominal stems are used in certain cases adverbially.
Thus, πολύ much (§ 336), σπουδῇ earnestly (§ 389), οἴκολ at home (see § 76, note), πρῴ early, ἀμαχεί without a battle, ποῖ whither, ποῶ where (cf. § 358), οὐδαμοῦ nowhere (cf. § 358).
2. Certain local endings of the nature of case-endings (§ 76) are used to form adverbs of place. These are: –θι, Place Where, as in ἄλλο-θι elsewhere; –θεν, Place Whence, as in οἴκο-θεν from home, πάντο-θεν from all sides; –δε, Place Whither, as in οἴκα-δε homeward, Ἀθήνᾱζε (for Ἀθήνᾱς-δε) toward Athens.
138. Comparison of Adverbs. – Adverbs in –ως employ for their comparative the neuter singular of the comparative of their adjective ; for their superlative they employ the neuter plural of the superlative.
Thus, σοφῶς wisely, σοφώτερον more wisely, σοφώτατα most wisely; ῥᾷδίως easily, ῥᾷον more easily, ῥᾷστα most easily.
1. Adverbs in –ω have the comparative and superlative ending in –ω. Thus, ἄνω above, ἀνωτέρω higher, ἀνωτά) highest. above, avcorepco higher, ἀνω highest.
2. The adverb μάλα very has for its comparative μᾶλλον (for μάλ-ιον, § 39, 3), and for its superlative μάλιστα.
VI · Pronouns
13945. The Personal Pronouns. – The pronouns of the first, second, and third person are, thus, declined:
| First Person | Second Person | Third Person | |
| Singular | |||
| Nom. | ἐγώ I | σύ you | him, her, it |
| Gen. | ἐμοῦ; μου (enclitic) | σοῦ; σου (enclitic) | οὗ; οὑ (enclitic) |
| Dat. | ἐμοί; μοι (enclitic) | σοί; σοι (enclitic) | οῖ; οἱ (enclitic) |
| Acc. | ἐμοῦ; μου (enclitic) | σἐ; σε (enclitic) | ἔ; ἑ (enclitic) |
| Voc. | ἐμοῦ; μου (enclitic) | σύ | |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., (Voc.) | νώ we twο | σφώ you t wo | |
| Gen., Dat. | νῷν | σφῷν | |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | ἡμεῖς we | ῡ́μεῖς you | σφεῖς they |
| Gen. | ἡμῶν | ῡ́μῶν | σφῶν |
| Dat. | ἡμῖν | ῡ́μῖν | σφίσι |
| Acc. | ἡμᾶς | ῡ́μᾶς | σφᾶς |
| Voc. | ῡ́μεῖς | ||
Note. – The stems of the pronoun of the first person are (ἐ) με-(the nominative ἐγώ being of different formation), νω-, and ἡμε- (from ἁμμε-); of the second person συ- (for τυ-), σε- (for *τφε-) σφω-, and ῡ́με (from ὑμμε-); of the third person ἑ– (originally *σφε-, § 36 a), ἑε– (for *σεφε-), and σφε-. From the shorter stem τν– of the second person comes only the nominative σύ (cf. πολύς, § 127, note). From the longer form of the stem of the third person ἑε– (*σεφε-) comes the Homeric form ἑὴ, acc.
1. The enclitic (§ 70) forms are used when there is no emphasis on the pronoun. Thus, δοκεῖ μοι it seems (to me). But when the pronoun is emphatic the forms with written accent (and in the first person the longer forms ἐμοῦ), etc.) are employed: thus, εἰπὲ καὶ ἐμοί tell even me. This is regularly the case when prepositions are used with the pronouns: thus, παῤ ἐμοῦ from beside me, περὶ σοῦ about you.
2. The pronoun of the third person οὗ, οἷ, ἕ, when used as a direct reflexive (§ 470), is never enclitic.
Note 1. The Tragedians for the accusative of the third personal pronoun use νιν (encl.) and σφε (encl.) for all genders both singular and plural.
Note 2. The genitive, dative, and accusative plural of the first and second persons sometimes throw their written accent to the first syllable (often shortening at the same time the final syllable): thus, ἥμων, ἧμιν, ὗμας.
14046. The Intensive Pronouns αὐτός. – The pronoun αὐτός self, same is thus, inflected:
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | αὐτός | αὐτή | αὐτό |
| Gen. | αὐτόῦ | αὐτῆς | αὐτόῦ |
| Dat. | αὐτῷ | αὐτῇ | αὐτῷ |
| Acc. | αὐτόν | αὐτήν | αὐτό |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc., (Voc.) | αὐτώ | αὐτᾱ́ | αὐτώ |
| Gen., Dat. | αὐτοῖν | αὐταῖν | αὐτοῖν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | αὐτοί | αὐταί | αὐτά |
| Gen. | αὐτόῶν | αὐτόῶν | αὐτόῶν |
| Dat. | αὐτοῖς | αὐταῖς | αὐτοῖς |
| Acc. | αὐτόῦς | αὐτᾱ́ς | αὐτά |
Like αὐτός is inflected also ἄλλος, ἄλλη, ἄλλο other.
1. In Attic the oblique cases of αὐτός are usually employed instead of the pronoun of the third person οὗ, οἷ, ἕ etc.
14147. Reflexive Pronouns. – The reflexive pronouns are formed from the stems of the personal pronouns compounded with αὐτός. From their meaning they can have no nominative case. The third person has also a neuter. In the plural both stems are declined together, yet the third person plural has also the compound form. They are, thus, declined:
| Singular | |||
| myself | thyself | himself, herself, itself | |
| Gen. | ἐμαυτοῦ, -ῆς | σεαυτοῦ, -ῆς | ἐαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -οῦ |
| Dat. | ἐμαὐτῷ, -ῇ | σεαὐτῷ, -ῇ | ἐαὐτῷ, -ῇ, -ῷ |
| Acc. | ἐμαυτόν, -ήν | σεαυτόν, -ήν | ἐαυτόν, -ήν, -ό |
| Plural | |||
| ourselves | yourselves | themselves | |
| Gen. | ἡμῶν αὐτῶν | ῡ́μῶν αὐτῶν | ἑαὐτῶν or σφῶν αὐτῶν |
| Dat. | ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, -αῖς, | ῡ́μῖν αὐτοῖς, -αῖς, | ἑαυτοῖς, -αῖς, – οῖς or σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, -αῖς, |
| Acc. | ἡμᾶς αὐτόῦς, -ᾱ́ς | ῡ́μᾶς αὐτόῦς, -ᾱ́ς | ἑαυτοὐς, -ᾱ́ς, -ά or σφᾶς αὐτόῦς, -ᾱ́ς |
1. σεαυτοῦ and ἐαυτοῦ are often contracted: σαυτοῦ, σαυτῆς; αὑτοῦ, αὑτῆς, etc.
142. Reciprocal Pronouns. – The reciprocal pronouns, meaning one another, from its meaning has no singular number, and no nominative or vocative case declined:
| Stem άλληλο– (for *ἀλλ-aλλo-) | |||
| Dual | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Gen. Dat. | άλλήλοιν | άλλήλαιν | άλλήλοιν |
| Acc. | άλλήλω | άλλήλᾱ | άλλήλω |
| Gen. | άλλήλων | άλλήλων | άλλήλων |
| Dat. | άλλήλοις | άλλήλαις | άλλήλοις |
| Acc. | άλλήλους | άλλήλᾱς | ἄλλήλα |
14348. Possessive Pronouns. – The possessive pronouns are formed from the stems of the personal pronouns. They are:
| ἐμός ἐμή ἐμόν my, mine | ἡμέτερος -ᾱ -ον our, ours |
| σός σή σόν thy, thine | ῡ́μέτερος -ᾱ -ον your, yours |
| ὅς ἥ ὅν his (her, its) own | σφέτερος -ᾱ -ον their own |
1. The possessive ὅς is not used in Attic prose, but its place is taken by the genitive of αὐτός (§ 477–8).
14449. Demonstrative Pronouns. – The definite article ὁ, ἡ, τό, is thus, inflected:
| Stems το– and ὁ (for σο-, § 36) | |||
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | ὁ | ἡ | τό |
| Gen. | τοῦ | τῆς | τοῦ |
| Dat. | τῷ | τῇ | τῷ |
| Acc. | τόν | τήν | τό |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc. | τώ | τώ | τώ |
| Gen., Dat. | τοῖν | τοῖν | τοῖν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | οἱ | αἱ | τά |
| Gen. | τῶν | τῶν | τῶν |
| Dat. | τοῖς | ταῖς | τοῖς |
| Acc. | τούς | τᾱ́ς | τά |
14550. The demonstrative pronouns ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε this, and οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο this, that, are, thus, declined:
| Singular | ||||||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | ὅδε | ἥδε | τόδε | οὗτος | αὕτη | τοῦτο |
| Gen. | τοῦσε | τῆσδε | τοῦδε | τούτον | ταύτης | τούτον |
| Dat. | τῷςε | τῇδε | τῷδε | τούτῷ | ταύτῃ | τούτῷ |
| Acc. | τόνσε | τήνδε | τόδε | τοῦτον | ταύτην | τοῦτο |
| Dual | ||||||
| Nom., Acc. | τώδε | τώδε | τώδε | τούτω | τούτω | τούτω |
| Gen., Dat. | τοῖνδε | τοῖνδε | τοῖνδε | τούτοιν | τούτοιν | τούτοιν |
| Plural | ||||||
| Nom. | οἵδε | αἵδε | τάδε | οὗτοι | οὗται | τοῦτα |
| Gen. | τῶνδε | τῶνδε | τῶνδε | τούτων | τούτων | τούτων |
| Dat. | τοῖσδε | ταῖσδε | τοῖσδε | τούτοις | ταύταις | τούτοις |
| Acc. | τόύσδε | τᾱ́σδε | τάδε | τούτους | ταύτᾱς | ταῦτα |
1. Observe that the use of ου or αυ in οὗτος depends on the character of the last syllable, ου being used to correspond to an o-sοund, and αυ to correspond to an α (η)-sοund.
14651. Ἐκεῖνος, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο that, is declined like αὐτός (§ 140).
147. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes made more emphatic by adding -ῑ́: thas οὑτοσῑ, τουτουΐ. In such case a preceding short vowel is dropped: thus, οσῑ, ταυτῑ.
14852. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns. – The interrogative pronoun is τίς, τί who? what? The indefinite pronoun is τίς, τί, enclitic (§ 70), some, any. They are, thus, declined:
| Interrogative | Indefinite | |||
| Singular | ||||
| Masc. & Fem. | Neut. | Masc. & Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | τίς | τί | τίς | τί |
| Gen. | τίνος, τοῦ | τίνος, τοῦ | τίνος, τοῦ | τίνος, τοῦ |
| Dat. | τίνι, τῷ | τίνι, τῷ | τίνι, τῷ | τίνι, τῷ |
| Acc. | τίνα | τί | τίνα | τί |
| Dual | ||||
| Nom., Acc. | τίνε | τίνε | τινέ | τινέ |
| Gen., Dat. | τίνοιν | τίνοιν | τινοῖν | τινοῖν |
| Plural | ||||
| Nom. | τίνες | τίνα | τίνες | τίνα |
| Gen. | τίνων | τίνων | τινῶν | τινῶν |
| Dat. | τίσι | τίσι | τισί | τισί |
| Acc. | τίνας | τίνα | τινάς | τινά |
1. The acute accent of the interrogative, τίς, τί never changes to the grave (§ 67).
Note 1. – The form ἄττα is sometimes used for the indefinite τίνα.
Note 2. – Δεῖνα. Another indefinite pronoun, used in familiar speech, is δεῖνα “Mr. what’s his name”, always with article: ὁ (ἡ, τὸ) δεῖνα. Sometimes it is not declined, but when declined it is inflected as follows: ὁ δεῖνα, τοῦ δεῖνος, τῷ δεῖνι, τόν δεῖνα, οἱ δεῖνες, τῶν δεῖνων, τοὺς δεῖνους.
14953. Relative Pronouns. – The relative pronoun ὅς, ἥ, ὅ who, which, is thus, inflected:
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | ὅς | ἥ | ὅ |
| Gen. | οὗ | ἧς | οὗ |
| Dat. | ᾧ | ᾗ | ᾧ |
| Acc. | ὅν | ἥν | ὅ |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc. | ὥ | ὥ | ὥ |
| Gen., Dat. | οἷν | οἷν | οἷν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | οἵ | αἵ | ἅ |
| Gen. | ὧν | ὧν | ὧν |
| Dat. | οἷς | αἷς | οἷς |
| Acc. | οὕς | ἅς | ἅ |
15054. The indefinite relative pronoun, ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι (sometimes written ὅ,τι) whoever, whichever, is made by joining ὅς and –τὶς, both parts being declined.
| Singular | |||
| Masc. | Fem. | Neut. | |
| Nom. | ὅςτις | ἥτις | ὅ τι |
| Gen. | οὗτινος, ὅτου | ἧστινος | οὗτινος, ὅτου |
| Dat. | ᾧτινι, ὅτᾧ | ᾗτινι | ᾧτινι, ὅτᾧ |
| Acc. | ὅντινα | ἥν | ὅ τι |
| Dual | |||
| Nom., Acc. | ὥτινι | ὥτινι | ὥτινι |
| Gen., Dat. | οἷντινοιν | οἷντινοιν | οἷντινοιν |
| Plural | |||
| Nom. | οἵτινες | αἵτινες | ἅτινα |
| Gen. | ὧντινων, ὅτων | ὧντινων | ὧντινων, ὅτων |
| Dat. | οἷστισι, ὅτοις | αἷστισι | οἷστισι, ὅτοις |
| Acc. | οὕστινας | ἅστινας | ἅτινα |
1. The shorter forms ὅτου, ὅτᾧ are more common than οὗτινος, ᾧτινι.
Note. – The indefinite τίς may be added also to other relatives to make them more indefinite: thas ὁποῖός τις of whatsoever kind.
151. Correlation of Pronouns. – In Greek certain pronominal adjectives and adverbs show a regular correspondence in form and meaning. Thas the interrogative form begins with πο-, the indefinite has the same form but is enclitic, the demonstrative has το-, and the relative ὁ- or (general relative) ὁπο-. This may best be seen from the following list:
| Interrogative | Indefinite (enclitic) | Demonstrative | Relative | ||
| Adjectives | |||||
| πόσος how great | πόσος of some size | (τόσος) | so great | ὅσος | as great as |
| τοσόσδε | ὁπόσος | ||||
| τοσοῦτος | |||||
| ποῖος of what kind | ποιός of some kind | (τόιος) | of this kind | οἷος | of such kind as |
| τοιόσδε | ὁποῖος | ||||
| τοιοῦτος | |||||
| πηλίκος of what age | τηλίκος | of this age | ἡλίκος | of such age as | |
| τηλικόσδε | ὁπηλίκος | ||||
| τηλικοῦτος | |||||
| Adverbs | |||||
| ποῦ where | ποῦ somewhere | οὗ, ὅπου | where | ||
| πόθεν whence | ποθέν from some place | τόθεν | [(poetic) thence] | ὅθεν, ὁπόθεν | whence |
| ποῖ whither | ποῖ to some place | οἱ, ὅποι | whither | ||
| πότε when | ποτέ sometime | τότε | then | ὅτε, ὁποτε | when |
| πηνίκα at what time | (τηνίκα) | at this time | ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα | at which time | |
| τηνικάδε | |||||
| τηνικαῦτα | |||||
| πῇ which way | πῇ someway | τῇ-δε | this way | ᾗ, ὅπῃ | which way |
| πῶς how | πῶς somehow | τώς | [(poetic) thus,] | ὡς, ὅπως | as |
1. Observe that some correlative forms are lacking, having been supplanted by other words. Thus, ἐνθάδε or ἐνταῦθα is the usual word for here; ὧδε and οὕτως thus, have crowded out the earlier (Epic and poetic) τώς.
Note. The indefinite relative pronouns, adjectives, and adverbs may be made more indefinite by adding οὖν, δή, or δή ποτε thus, ὅστις οὖν (or ὅστισοῦν), ὁστισ-δή-ποτε, or even ὁστισ-δη-ποτ-οῦν who-so-ever.
VI · Numerals
15255. The Greek numerals are as follows:
| Sign | Cardinal | Ordinal | Adverb | |
| 1 | αʹ | εἷς, μία, ἕν one | πρῶτος first | ἅπαξ once |
| 2 | βʹ | δύο two | δεύτερος second | δίς twice |
| 3 | γʹ | τρείς, τρία | τρίτος | τρίς |
| 4 | δʹ | τέτταρες, τέτταρα | τέτταρτος | τετράκις |
| 5 | εʹ | πέντε | πέμπτος | πεντάκις |
| 6 | ξʹ | ἕξ | ἕκτος | ἑξάκις |
| 7 | ζʹ | ἑπτά | ἕβδομος | ἑπτάκις |
| 8 | ηʹ | ὀκτώ | ὄγδοος | ὀκτάκις |
| 9 | θʹ | ἐννέα | ἔνατος | ἐνάκις |
| 10 | ιʹ | δέκα | δέκαατος | άκις |
| 11 | ιαʹ | ἕνδεκα | ἑνδέκατος | ἑνδεκάκις |
| 12 | ιβʹ | δώδεκα | δωδέκατος | δωδεκάκις |
| 13 | ιγʹ | τρεῖς καὶ δέκα (or τρεισκαὶδεκα) | τρίτος καὶ δέκατος | etc. |
| 14 | ιδʹ | τέτταρες καὶ δέκα (or τετταρεσκαὶδεκα | τέταρτος καὶ δέκατος | |
| 15 | ιεʹ | πεντεκαίδεκα | πέμπτος καὶ δέκατος | |
| 16 | ιξʹ | ἑκκαίδεκα | ἕκτος καὶ δέκατος | |
| 17 | ιζʹ | ἑπτάκαίδεκα | ἕβδομος καὶ δέκατος | |
| 18 | ιηʹ | ὀκτωκαίδεκα | ὄγδοος καὶ δέκατος | |
| 19 | ιθʹ | ἐννεακαίδεκα | ἔνατος καὶ δέκατος | |
| 20 | κʹ | εἴκοσι (ν) | εἰκοστός | εἰκοσάκις |
| 30 | λʹ | τριᾱ́κοντα | τριᾱκοστός | τριᾱκοντάκις |
| 40 | μʹ | τετταράκοντα | τετταρακοστός | τετταρακοντάκις |
| 50 | νʹ | πεντήκοντα | πεντηκοστός | πεντηκοντάκις |
| 60 | ξʹ | ἑξήκοντα | ἑξηκοστός | ἑξηκοντάκις |
| 70 | οʹ | ἑβδομήκοντα | ἑβδομηκοστός | ἑβδομηκοντάκις |
| 80 | πʹ | ὀγδοήκοντα | ὀγδοηκοστός | ὀγδοηκοντάκις |
| 90 | ϙʹ | ἐνενήκοντα | ἐνενηκοστός | ἐνενηκοντάκις |
| 100 | ρʹ | ἑκατόν | ἑκατοστός | ἑκατοντάκις |
| 200 | σʹ | διᾱκόδιοι, αι, α | διᾱκοσιοστός | διᾱκοσιάκις |
| 300 | τʹ | τριᾱκόδιοι, αι, α | τρικοσιοστός | etc. |
| 400 | υʹ | τετρακόδιοι, αι, α | τετρακοσιοστός | |
| 500 | φʹ | πεντακόδιοι, αι, α | πεντακοσιοστός | |
| 600 | χʹ | ἑξακόδιοι, αι, α | ἑξακοσιοστός | |
| 700 | ψʹ | ἑπτακόδιοι, αι, α | ἑπτακοσιοστός | |
| 800 | ωʹ | ὀκτακόδιοι, αι, α | ὀκτακοσιοστός | |
| 900 | ϡʹ | ἐνακόδιοι, αι, α | ἐνακοσιοστός | |
| 1 000 | ͵α | χῑ́λιοι, αι, α | χῑλιοστός | χῑλιάκις |
| 2 000 | ͵β | δισχῑ́λιοι, αι, α | δισχῑλιοστός | etc. |
| 3 000 | ͵γ | τρισχῑ́λιοι, αι, α | τρισχῑλιοστός | |
| 10 000 | ͵ι | μῡ́ριοι, αι, α | μῡ́ριοστός | μῡ́ριάκις |
| 20 000 | ͵κ | δισμῡ́ριοι | etc. | |
| 100 000 | ͵ρ | δεκακισμῡ́ριοι | ||
153. For 21, 22, etc., 31, 32, etc., we have εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι, εἴκοσι καὶ εἷς or εἴκοσιν εἷς, etc. In the ordinals we have for 22d, etc., 32d, etc., δεύτερος καὶ εἰκοστός and εἰκοστός καὶ δεύτερος, etc., but for 21st, 31st, etc., always εἷς καὶ εἰκοστός, εἷς καὶ τριᾱκοστός, etc.
154. The numbers 18, 19, 28, 29, 38, 39, etc., are commonly expressed by ἑνός (or δυοῖν) δέοντες (wanting) εἴκοσι, etc.: thus, ναυσὶ μιᾶς δεούσαις πεντήκοντα with 49 ships.
15556. Declension of Numerals. – The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 inclusive are indeclinable. The cardinals from 200 upwards and all the ordinals are declined regularly like adjectives in –ος (§ 117). The cardinal numbers from 1 to 4 are declined as follows:
| one | two | three | four |
| N. εἷς μία ἔν | N. A. δύο | N. τρεῖς τρία | τέτταρες τέτταρα |
| G. | G. D. δυοῖν | G. τριῶν τριῶν | τεττάρων τεττάρων |
| D. | sometimes also used indeclinably | D. τρισί τρισί | τέτταρσι τέτταρσι |
| A. | A. τρεῖς τρία | τέτταρες τέτταρα |
1. Like εἷς are declined οὐδείς and μηδείς no one. These are sometimes declined also in the plural: thus, οὐδένες, οὐδένων, οὐδέσι, οὐδένας.
156. Notation. – Observe that in notation the letters of the alphabet (including the three obsolete letters, ς = ϝ vau (§ 2a), q = ϙ koppa, and ϡ sampi) are employed in order, the first nine for units, the second nine for tens, and the remaining nine for hundreds. For thousands the same characters are used again but with the stroke under the letter: thus, ͵αυπαʹ = 1481.
Note. – The books of Homer are usually numbered by using the letters of the ordinary alphabet consecutively, the capitals being employed for the Iliad and the small letters for the Odyssey. Thus, Κ stands for Book 10 of the Iliad, λ for Book 11 of the Odyssey.
VI · Verbs
157. The verb distinguishes in its inflection Voice, Mode, Person, Number, and Tense.
1. By its Voice it indicates whether the subject acts (active), acts for himself (middle), or is acted upon (passive).
2. By its Mode it indicates the manner in which the action is thought of: for example, as a fact or as a possibility.
3. By its Person it indicates whether its subject is the speaker, or some second person spoken to, or some third person or thing spoken of.
4. By its Number it indicates how many persons or things are concerned in its action.
5. By its Tense it indicates the time of the action.
VI · Voice
158. The Greek verb has three voices, Active, Middle, and Passive (see § 236).
1. The passive voice has a separate form of inflection only in the aorist and future; elsewhere the middle form is used both for the middle and passive.
2. Many verbs, from their meaning, are used only in the active.
3. Deponent Verbs. – Likewise many verbs have only a middle (or passive) form. Such verbs are called Deponent. Those which have the middle form throughout are called Middle Deponents; those which have the passive form for the aorist (and future) are called Passive Deponents.
VI · Mode
159. Greek has four modes: the Indicative (the mode of fact), the Subjunctive and Optative (the modes of possibility), and the Imperative (the mode of command). These modes are called the Finite Modes.
1. Beside the four finite modes are the Infinitive and Participle, which are properly verbal nouns (although sometimes called modes). The infinitive represents the action of the verb as a substantive: thus, εἶναι to be, the act of being. The participle represents the action of the verb as an adjective: thus, ὁ παρών καιρός the present occasion.
2. To these must be added the Verbal Adjectives in –τός and –τέος, of which the former denotes what has been or may be done (thus, λυτός loosed or loosable), and the latter, what needs doing (thus, λυτέος needing to be loosed).
16057. Mode Suffix. – The subjunctive and the optative have a special mode suffix. The subjunctive has a long vowel –ω– or –η– ; the optative has –ι– or –in-.
1. The use of ω or η is determined by the same rules as that of ο and ε (§ 169). The mode sign –ιη– is regularly used in the singular active of –μι verbs and contract verbs; elsewhere –ι– is used. In the third plural of the optative –ιε– appears as the mode sign.
Note. In the singular active of contract verbs –ι– very rarely is found as mode sign, while in classical Greek –ιη– was probably never used in the optative dual or plural of any verbs. (See also § 199, note, and § 233, note.)
2. Verbs whose stem ends in a vowel usually contract the mode suffix with the final vowel of the stem (§§ 170, 2–3; 200, 1; 211, 1–2; 233, 1–2).
VI · Tense
161. Greek has seven tenses:
Present, Imperfect,
Future, Aorist,
Perfect, Pluperfect, Future Perfect.
Note. The Greek aorist corresponds closely to the English past tense: thus, ἐποίησα did. The other tenses correspond to the same tenses in English or Latin.
1. The tenses of the indicative are divided into:
(1) Primary (or Principal) tenses, expressing present or future time: the present, future, perfect, and future perfect.
(2) Secondary (or Past) tenses, expressing past time: the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect.
Tense Systems
162. The various forms of the Greek verb group themselves into certain Tense Systems, each of which is formed on a common Tense Stem. The tense systems of the Greek verb are as follows:
| the Present system | including | the Present and Imperfect |
| the Future system | "" | Future Active and Middle |
| the First Aorist system | "" | 1st Aorist Active and Middle |
| the Second Aorist system | "" | 2d Aorist Active and Middle |
| the First Perfect system | "" | 1st Perf. and 1st Plup. Act. |
| the Second Perfect system | "" | 2d Perf. and 2d Plup. Act. |
| the Perfect Middle system | "" | Perf., Plup., and Fut. Perf. Mid. |
| the First Passive system | "" | 1st Aor. and 1st Fut. Pass. |
| the Second Passive system | "" | 2d Aor. and 2d Fut. Pass. |
1. The tenses called second differ from the corresponding first tenses in form, but they usually have like meanin unless, as rarely happens, the same verb has both first and second forms of the same tense in use at the same time (See § 207, note 3.)
2. Principal Parts. – The “principal parts” of a verb are the first person singular indicative of every system used in it. Thus,
παιδεύω educate, παιδεύσω, ἐπαίδευσα, πεπαίδευκα, πεπαίδευµαι, ἐπαιδεύθην. See § 236.
λεύπῳ leave, λείψεω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην.
βούλομαι wish, βουλήσομαι, βεβούλημαι, ἐβουλήθην (passive deponent, § 158, 3).
γίγνοµαι become, γενήσοµαι, ἐγενόμην, γεγένημαι (middle deponent, § 158, 3).
163. Theme. – That part of the Greek verb which is common to all its forms is called the Theme (or by some the Verb Stem). From this theme the various tense-stems are formed: thus, κελεύω order, theme κελευ-, present stem κελευ(ο-, ε-), future stem κελευσ(ο-, ε-), aorist stem κελευσα-, etc.
For the formation of the various tense-systems see §§ 186–234.
1. According as the verb theme ends in a vowel, a mute, or a liquid (§ 12), verbs are classed as Vowel Verbs, Mute Verbs, or Liquid Verbs.
164. Irregular Verbs. – Sometimes, when two or more verbs happen to coincide in meaning, each is used only in certain tenses, usually in such a way as to supplement each other.
Thus, τρέχω run is used only in the present system; in the other tenses another verb from the theme δραμ– corresponds in meaning to τρέχω; so δραμοῦμαι shall run, ἔδραμον ran, etc. In the same way, corresponding in meaning to ὁρῶ see (theme ὁρα-), we have ὄψομαι shall see (theme ὀπ-), and εἶδον saw (theme ἰδ-). Such verbs are often called Irregular Verbs.
165. Primitive and Denominative Verbs. – A Primitive verb forms its tense stems from a root; a Denominative verb from a longer theme, originally a noun stem (§ 269).
Thus, τίω (root τι-) give what is due is a primitive verb, while τιμῶ (-άω) honor is a denominative verb, derived from a noun, τιµή honor.
Note. – Most primitive verbs have themes of one syllable. (See § 270, note.)
VI · Person and Number (Personal endings)
166. There are three persons: First, Second, and Third.
The Greek verb, like the Greek noun, has three numbers (§ 74): Singular, Dual, and Plural.
In the inflection of the verb, the person and number are shown by certain endings, attached to the tense stem, which are called Personal Endings.
1. The active and the middle voice have each a different set of personal endings.
The passive voice has no endings of its own, but in the aorist it employs the ending of the active, and in the future those of the middle.
2. The indicative mood has two sets of endings in each voice, one for primary tenses and the other for secondary tenses (§ 161, 1).
3. The subjunctive mood employs the same endings as the primary tenses of the indicative.
4. The optative mood has the same endings as the secondary tenses of the indicative.
16758. The forms of the personal endings may be seen from the following table:
| Active | Middle | |||
| Indicative (primary tenses) | Indicative (secondary tenses) | Indicative (primary tenses) | Indicative (secondary tenses) | |
| And Subjunctive | And Optative | And Subjunctive | And Optative | |
| Sing. | 1. -μι | -ν | -μαι | -μην |
| 2. -ς (for –σι) -σθα, -θα | -ς, -σθα | -σαι | -σο | |
| 3. -σι (for –τι) | -ται | -το | ||
| Dual. | 2. -τον | -τον | -σθον | σθον |
| 3. -τον | -την | -σθον | σθην | |
| Plur. | 1. -μεν (for -μες) | -μεν | -μεθα | -μεθα |
| 2. -τε | -τε | -σθε | -σθε | |
| 3. -νσι (for -ντι) | -ν, -σαν | -νται | -ντο | |
| Active | Middle | |||
| Imperative | ||||
| Sing. | 2. None or –θι | -σο | ||
| 3. -τω | -σθω | |||
| Dual. | 2. -τον | -σθον | ||
| 3. -των | -σθων | |||
| Plur. | 2. -τε | -σθε | ||
| 3. -ντων | -σθων | |||
| Infinitive | ||||
| (-εναι) -εν, -ναι | -σθαι | |||
| Participle | ||||
| -vt- (perfect –οτ – and –οσ-) | -μενο- | |||
| For the declension of participles see §§ 129–131. | ||||
| Verbals | ||||
| το- and -τεο | ||||
Note 1. – For the first person dual the first person plural is almost always used. A special ending, –μεθον, in the middle, is rarely found.
Note 2. – The poets often have –μεσθα for –μεθα: thus, ἐλαυνόμεσθα we are being driven.
Nore 3. – The present third plural active of -μι verbs has the ending -ανσι: thus, τιθέ-ᾱσι they put (for *τι-θε-ανσι), ἱστᾶσι they erect (for *ἱ-στα-ανσι).
Note 4. – An ending of the third plural imperative rarely found is –τωσαν (middle –σθωσαν): thus, ἴ-τωσαν let them go. In later Greek this ending often occurs.
VI · Inflection (-ω Form and -μι Form)
168. There are in Greek two slightly different ways of inflecting verbs, called respectively (from the ending of the first person singular active) the –ω form and the –μι form.
169. The –ω Form of Inflection. – In the –ω form of inflection the stem ends in the variable vowel (ο-, ε-) (§ 14). Before µ or ν, and in the optative mode, ο is employed, elsewhere ε: thus, λῡ́ομεν we loose, λῡ́ετε you loose, λῡ́οιμεν optative; so also λῡ́ουσι, for *λῡονσι they loose.
1. To the –ω form of inflection belong all futures and the present, the imperfect, and the second aorist with variable vowel (§ 210).
17059. The –μι Form of Inflection. – In the –μι form of inflection (which is older than the –ω form) the endings are added directly to the stem without the variable vowel (ο-, ε-). The endings retain more nearly their original form than in the –ω form of inflection.
1. A final vowel of the stem usually has its long form in the singular of the indicative active; elsewhere the short form: thus, τίθη-μι I put, τίθε–μεν we put; ἵστη-μι I cause to stand, ἵστα-μεν we cause to stand.
2. In the subjunctive a final α, ε or ο of the stem is contracted with the mode suffix: thus, τιθῶ, τιθῇς, etc., for τιθέῳ, τιθέῃς. In contraction, αη (αῃ) gives η (ῃ) and οῃ gives ῳ (contrary to § 18, 6 and § 19, 2): thus, ἱστῆται for ἱστάηται and διδῷς for διδόῃς.
3. In the optative the ι of the mode suffix contracts with the final vowel of the stem (§ 160, 2): thus, τιθείην, τιθεῖμεν, from τίθηµι put.
4. In a few forms –μι– verbs have the inflection of contract verbs in –έω or –όω: thus, regularly impf. act. ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδους, ἐδίδου, from δίδωµι give, and ἐτίθεις, ἐτίθει, from τίθηµι put ; so also impv. δίδου, τίθει. Sometimes also 2d sing. τιθεῖς, and opt. τιθοῖτο, τιθοῖντο, θοῖτο.
Notes on the Personal Endings
Note 1. Primary Endings of the Active. – The endings –μι and –σι (for –τι) are found only in μι verbs. In tenses of the –ω inflection the first person singular active of primary tenses ends in – ω (λῡ́ω loose).
The second person singular was probably originally *λῡε-σι, which became *λῡει (§ 37), and later –ς was added from the secondary tenses, making λῡ́εις, to distinguish this form from the third singular λῡ́ει, for λῡε-σι (originally *λῡε-τι, § 37).
In –νσι, the primary ending of the third person plural active, ν is regularly dropped before σ (§ 34), and the preceding vowel is lengthened: thus, λῡ́ουσι they loose is for *λῡο-νσι (-ντι), λελύκᾱσι they have loosed is for *λε-λυκα-υσι, τιθέᾱσι they put is for *τιθε-ανσι (§ 167, note 3).
In the second singular of the imperative an ending –ς is sometimes found: thus, σχές from ἔχω have, δός from δίδωμι, give.
Note 2. Secondary Endings of the Active. – Of the secondary endings, –v (3d plural) belongs regularly to the –ω form of inflection, and –σαν to the –μι form. The first person singular active of the optative mode uses the primary ending –μι when the mode sign is –ι– (§ 160, 1): thus, λῡ́οιµι, λῡ́σαιμι.
Note 3. The Endings of the Middle. – In the endings –σαι and –σο of the second person singular middle the σ is regularly dropped (§ 37), aud the vowels contracted. Thus, from λῡω loose we have pres. indic. λῡῃ or λῡει (for *λῡε-σαι), pres. subj. λῡ́ῃ (for *λῡη-σαι), impert. indie. ἑλῡ́ου (for *ἐλῡε-σο), aor. indic. ἐλῡ́σω (for *ἐλῡσα-σο).
In the optative the σ is dropped, but the vowels do not contract: thus, ἑλῡ́οι (for *λῡοι-σο). In the present and imperfect of the –μι verbs, the σ of these endings is usually retained: thus, τίθε-σαι, ἐτίθε-σο, from τίθηµι put.
Note 4.– If we place side by side the presents indicative of early Greek (Doric) φᾱ-μί (Attic φη-μί) say and Latin inquam, we shall see how closely the present endings of Greek and Latin agree.
| Singular | Plural | |||
| 1 | φᾱ-μι | inqua-m | φᾱ-μές | inqui-mus |
| 2 | φᾱ-σι | inqui-s | φᾱ-τέ | inqui-tis |
| 3 | φᾱ-τι | inqui-t | φᾱ-ντί | inqui-unt |
VI · Augment
17160. The augment is the sign of past time. It belongs therefore only to the past or secondary tenses of the indicative; namely, imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect. The augment has two forms, Syllabic and Temporal.
17261. Syllabic Augment. – Verbs beginning with a consonant augment by prefixing e-. Such augment is called syllabic, since it increases the number of syllables in the word: thus, λύω loose, imperf. &\dov was loosing; γράφω write, aor. &ypayra wrote ; pluperf. ἐ-γε-γράφη had written.
1. Words beginning with p double it after the augment (§ 23): thus, &ppimrov, imperfect of ῥίπτω throw.
2. A few verbs which originally began with a consonant, but which now begin with a vowel, still have syllabic augment. The most common of these are:
| ἄγνῡμι break | aor. ἕαξα | (for *ἐ–ραξα) |
| ἀνδάνω please | aor. ἕ-αδον | (for *ἐ-σραδον) |
| ἀν-οίγω open | impf. ἀν-έῳγου | (for *ἀν-ε-ϝοιγον) |
| ἐῶ (-άω) permit | impf. εἴων | (for *ἐ-σεραον) |
| ἐθίζω accustom | impf. εἴθιζον | (for *ἐ-σρεθιζον) |
| ἑλίττω roll | aor. εἴλιξα | (for *ἐ–ϝελιξα) |
| ἕλκῳ draw | impf. εἶλκον | (for *ἐ-σελκον) |
| ἕπομαι follow | impf. εἰπόμην | (for *ἐ-σεπομην) |
| ἐργάζομαι work | impf. εἰργαζόμην | (for *ἐ-ϝεργαζομην) |
| ἕρπω creep | impf. εἷρπον | (for *ἐ-σερπον) |
| ἑστιῶ (-άw), entertain | impf. εἰστίων | (for *ἐ-ϝεστιαον) |
| ἔχω have, hold | impf. εἶχον | (for *ἐ-ἐσεχον) |
| ἵημι let go | aor. (dual) εἶτον | (for *ἐ--σε-τον) |
| ὁρῶ (-άω) see | impf. ἑώρων | (for *ἐ–ϝopaov) |
| ὡθῶ (-έω) push | impf. ἐώθουν | (for *ἐ–ϝωθεον) |
| ὠνοῦμαι (-έομαι) buy | impf. ἐωνούμην | (for *ἐ–ϝωνεομην) |
| (ἑλ-) take | aor. εἶλον | (for *ἐ–ϝeλον?) |
| (ἐδ-) seat | aor. εἶσα (§ 30). | (for *ἐ–σεδ-σα) |
| (ἰδ-) see | aor. εἶδον | (for *ἐ–ϝιδον) |
Note 1. – Observe that ὁρῶ (-άω) and ἀνοίγω, in addition to the syllabic augment, lengthen the first vowel of the stem.
Note 2. – The consonants at the beginning of most of these words may still be seen in other languages. For example, with ἐθίζω, ἕλκω, ἕπομαι, ἑδ-, ἰδ-, may be compared Latin suesco, sulcus, sequor, sedeo, video.
173. Temporal Augment. – Verbs beginning with a vowel augment by lengthening the first vowel. Such augment is called temporal, since it usually increases the time occupied in pronouncing the syllable: thus, ἥλαυνον, imperf. from ἐλαύνω drive; ὤμοσα, aor. from ὄμνῦμι swear; ῑ᾿κέτενον, impf. from ἱκετεύω supplicate. The vowels α and ᾱ become η: thus, ἧγον, impf. from ἄγω lead; ἤθλουν, impf. from ᾱ́θλῶ (-έω) contend. The other long vowels remain unchanged: thus, ἡγούμην, impf. from ἡγοῦμαι (-έομαι) lead.
1. Diphthongs lengthen the first vowel: thus, ᾖσθανόpnp, impf. from αἰσθάνομαι perceive; ᾔκαξον, impf. from εἰκάζω guess; ᾤκτῑρον, impf. from οἰκτῑ́ρω pity; ηὕρισκον, impf. from εὑρίσκω find. But ου-, and ει– when it is an apparent diphthong (§ 6, 8), remain unchanged: thus, οὕταζον, impf. of οὐτάζω wound, εἶκον, impf. of εἴκω yield.
174. Augment of Compound Verbs. – Verbs compounded with a preposition take their augment after the preposition: thus, εἰσ-έφερον imp. of εἰσ-φέρω bring in; προσ-ῆγον impf. of προσ-άγω lead tο.
1. But sometimes compounds, of which the simple verb is not commonly used, are augmented at the beginning, as if they were not compounds at all: thus, ἤμφίεσα, aor. of ἀμφι-έννὺμι clothe: so often ἐκαθήμην, imp. of κάθ-ηµαι sit.
175. Denominative verbs formed from nouns already compounded take their augment at the beginning. Thus, the imperfect of οἰκοδομῶ (-έω) build (from οἰκο-δόμος housebuilder) is ᾠκοδόμουν the imperfect of ἐναντιοῦμαι (-όομαι) oppose (from ἐναντίος opposite) is ἠναντιούμην.
1. But since there are so many verbs compounded with prepositions, some confusion arises in the case of verbs derived from compound nouns whose first part is a preposition. Thus, the imperfect of ἐπιστατῶ (-έω) oversee is ἐπεστάτουν, and of κατηγορῶ (-έω) accuse is κατηγόρουν, although both of these are denominative verbs, derived respectively from ἐπιστάτης overseer and κατήγορος accuser.
Note.–A few verbs even have two augments, one before and one after the preposition: thus, ἀν-έχομαι endure, imperfect, ἠν-αχόμην.
17662. Augment of the Pluperfect. – The pluperfect takes no augment except the syllabic: thus, ἐ–λελύκη (perf. λέλυκα), pluperfect of λῡ́ω loose. When the perfect stem begins with a vowel, the pluperfect has no augment: thus, ἑστάλκη (perf. ἄσταλκα), pluperfect of στέλλω send; εἰλήφη (perf. εἴληφα). from λαμβάνω take ; ὠφελήκη (pert. ὠφέληκα), from ὠφελῶ (-έω) help.
Note. – But verbs with “Attic Reduplication” (§ 179) regularly take augment in the pluperfect: thus, ἠκηκόη, plup. of ἀκήκοα have heard.
VI · Reduplication
177. Reduplication belongs regularly to the perfect system (including the pluperfect and future perfect), where it denotes completed action. It is sometimes found in the present and the second aorist systems. It consists in doubling the sound at the beginning of the word.
178. Reduplication of the Perfect. – In the perfect, verbs beginning with a consonant repeat that consonant with ε: thus, λῡ́-ω loose, perf. λέ-λυκα. A rough mute in reduplication is changed to the corresponding smooth (§ 40): thus, θῡ́ω sacrifice, perf. τέ–θυκα.
1. In verbs beginning with two consonants (except a mute and a liquid), a double consonant, or ρ, the reduplication consists of ε- merely: thus, ἔ–ψευσμαι, perf. of ψεύδομαι lie; ἕ–σταλκα, perf. of στέλλω send; ἔ-ρριφα (§ 23), pert. of ῥῑ́πτω throw; but γέ–γραφα, perf. of γράφω write.
Note. – But γν– is usually reduplicated in the perfect by means of ε: thus, ἔ–γνωκα, perf. of γι–γνώσκω know.
2. Five verbs reduplicate with e-. These are:
| λαμβάνω take | perf. | εἴ-ληφα |
| λαγχάνω get by lot | perf. | εἴ-ληχα |
| λέγω (only in composition) collect | perf. | εἴ-λοχα |
| (μερ-) | perf. | εἴ-μαρται it is fated |
| (ἐρ-, ῥη) say | perf. | εἴ-ρηκα |
Note. – The explanation of this reduplication is very uncertain. See, however, εἴρω and μείρομαι in the Verb List, § 720.
3. Verbs beginning with a short vowel reduplicate by lengthening the vowel; a diphthong lengthens the first vowel; a long vowel remains unchanged: thus, ἦχα, perf. of ἄγω lead; ᾔρηκα, of αἱρῶ (-έω) take; ὠφέληκα, of ὠφελῶ (-έω) help.
17963. “Attic Reduplication.” – A few verbs beginning with a, ε or ο, followed by a single consonant, reduplicate by repeating the first vowel and consonant, and lengthening the first vowel of the theme: thus, ἀλ-ήλιφα, ἀλ-ήλιμμαι, perf. of ἀλείφω anoint; ἑλ-ήλακα, ἑλ-ήλαμαι, of ἐλαύνω drive; ὀρ-ώρυχα, ὀρ-ώρυγμαι, of ὀρύττω dig.
180. Reduplication with ε– before a Vowel. – The apparently vowel verbs, mentioned in § 172, 2, which originally began with a consonant reduplicate regularly, but the disappearance of the consonant leaves only ε– (which is often contracted with the following vowel): thus, ἔᾱγα (originally *ϝε-ϝᾱγα), perf. of ἄγνυμι break; εἶκα (for *σε-σεκα), perf. of ἵημι send, etc.
181. Reduplication of Compound Verbs. – In compound verbs, and in verbs derived from compound nouns, the reduplication has the same place as the augment (§§ 174–175): thus, ἀπο-κέ-κρικα, perf. of ἀπο-κρῑ́νω separate; κε–χειροτόνηκα, perf. of χειρο-τονῶ (-έω) elect.
182. Reduplication of the Present. – A few verbs reduplicate in the present (§§ 193, 3; 197, 1) by repeating the first consonant with ι: thus, γι–γνώσκω know, τί–θηµι put.
183. Reduplication of the Second Aorist.– Sometimes in Attic (often in Homer) the second aorist is formed by reduplication. See § 908,1 and a.
VI · Accent of the Verbs
184. The accent of verbs (both simple and compound) is regularly recessive (§ 64).
1. But in compound verbs the written accent cannot recede beyond the augment: thus, πάρειµι be present, παρῆ was present.
18564. Infinitives, participles, and verbal adjectives, since they are in reality nouns (§ 159, 1 and 2), do not come under the rule of accent for verbs.
1. The accent of the infinitive and participle in each tense and voice must usually be learned by observation; but present and future infinitives and participles of the –ω form (§ 169, 1) are recessive in accent, and all infinitives in –ναι take their written accent on the penult.
2. The verbal adjective in –τός takes its written accent on the final syllable: thus, λυτός, λυτή, λυτόν loosed, gen. λυτοῦ, etc. The verbal adjective in –τέος always has the acute accent on the penult: thus, λυτέος, λυτέᾱ, λυτέον needing to be loosed, gen. λυτέου, etc.
Note. – Contract verbs (§ 199) are not an exception to the rule of § 184, since their accent in the uncontracted form was recessive. Some other apparent exceptions in accent are to be explained by contraction. See §§ 200, 1; 210, 1–2; 233, 1–2.
VI · Formation of Tense Stems
186. The various tense stems are formed from the theme by means of a tense suffix (or prefix, sometimes both). In primitive verbs (§ 165) we usually find also a variation in the vowel of the theme (§§ 13–14): thus, pres. τήκ-ω melt, aor. pass. ἑ-τάκ-ην; πέτ-οµαι fly, 2d aor. ἑ-πτ-όμην; λείπ-ω leave, perf. λέλοιπ-α, 2d aor. ἔ-λιπ-ον.
1. Verbs which show a variation between long and short vowels (§ 13) usually have the short vowel in the second aorist ; elsewhere the long form: thus, τήκ-ω, Me, ete. melt, but 2d aor. pass. ἑτάκ-ην.
2. Verbs which show the vowel variation ο, e,@ (§ 14) regularly have in the second aorist, and often in the perfect middle (cf. § 224, note), the form with no vowel or with a (§ 14, 1), in the second perfect the form with ο, and elsewhere the form with e. Ixamples are:
| Present | Future | 2d Perect | 2d Aorist |
| κλέπ-τω steal | kλέψω | κέ-κλοφ-α | ἐ-κλάπ-ην |
| (απο-) κτείνω kill (for *κτεν-ιω, § 39,4) | κτεν-ῶ | ἕ-κτον-α | (Epic) ἕ-κτανί-ον |
| λείπω leave (§ 14, 2) | λείψω | λέ-λοιπ-α | ἔ-λιπ-ον |
| φθείρω destroy (for *φθερ-ιω, § 39, 4) | φθερ-ῶ | ἔ-φθορ-α | ἐ-φθάρ-ην |
| Perfect Middle | |||
| ἔ-φθαρ-μαι |
187. Vowel Verbs. ---In most verbs whose theme ends in a vowel, this vowel is long outside of the present system. After ε, ι, or ρ, an α becomes ᾱ, otherwise η (§ 15): thus, τιμῶ (-άω) honor, τῑμήσω, ἐτῑ́μησα, τε-τέμηκα, τε-τῑ́µημαι, ἐτμήθην; φιλῶ (-έω) love, φιλήσω, ἐφίλησα, etc.; δηλῶ (-όω) show, δηλώσω, ἐδήλωσα, etc.; ἐῶ (-άω) permit, ἐᾱ́σω, etc. ; δρῶ (-άω) do, δρᾱ́σω, etc.
188. But some apparently vowel verbs had originally themes ending in a consonant. Such verbs naturally preserve the short vowel throughout all their tenses, and, by analogy, some real vowel verbs do the same: thus, τελῶ (-έω, for *τελεσ-ιω, cf. τέλος end) finish, fut. τελῶ, aor. ἐτέ-λεσα, perf. τε–τέλεκα, etc.: γελῶ (-ἀω), γελάσοµαι, ἐγέλασα.
1. A few verbs have the short vowel only in certain tenses: thus, αἱρῶ (-έω), αἱρήσω, etc., but aor. pass. ᾑρέθην.
189. Most verbs which keep the short vowel in all their tenses (§ 188), and, by analogy, some others, have in the perfect middle and aorist passive (and verbals, § 235) a σ at the end of the theme: thus, τελῶ (-έω) finish, perf. mid. τετέλεσ–μαι, aor. pass. ἐτελέσ–θην; so also ἀκούω hear has ἤκουσμαι and ἠκούσθην κελεύω order has κεκέλευσμαι and ἐκελεύσθην.
Note. – As most of these verbs originally had themes ending in σ or a lingual mute (§§26; 27, 3), there is nothing strange about the σ in the perfect middle and aorist passive.
19065. ε in Tense Formation. – Some verbs vary between themes with ε (η) and themes without ε (η). Usually both themes are not found together in the same tense, but even this sometimes happens: thus, βούλομαι (βουλ-) wish, fut. βουλήσομαι (βουλε), aor. ἐβουλήθην, μένω (μεν-) remain, perf. µεμένηκα (μενε–); αἰσθάνομαι (αἰσθ-) perceive, fut. αἰσθήσομαι (αἰσθε), aor. ᾐσθόμην (αἰσθ-); δοκῶ (-έω) (δοκε), fut. δόξω (δοκ-). No rules in this matter can be laid down, but the eccentricities of such verbs may be learned from the Verb List, § 729.
THE PRESENT SYSTEM
(PRESENT AND IMPERFECT)
192. Verbs may be divided into five classes, according to the way in which they form their present stem. These classes are: (1) the simple class, (2) the τ class, (3) the ι class, (4) the ν class, (5) the σκ class.
193. The Simple Class. – The simple class employs for the present stem the simple theme, with or without the variable vowel (§ 169). Verbs with the variable vowel show –ω in the first person singular of the present indicative active: thus, λέγω (theme λεγ-, present stem λεγο-/ε-). Verbs without the variable vowel are –μι verbs (§ 170): thus, φημί say (theme φη-, φα-, present stem φη-, φα-).
1. Primitive verbs whose themes show the interchange of long and short vowels (§ 13) usually have in the present the form with the long vowel (§ 186, 1): thus, τήκω melt (theme τηκ– and τακ-), λῡ́ω loose (theme λῡ-, λυ-). The –μι– verbs, however, have the long vowel only in the singular of the indicative active (see § 170, 1).
2. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel variation ο, ε (α) (§ 14), usually have in the present the form with ε (or εἰ or ευ, § 14,2): thus, πέµπω send (theme πεµπ-, ποµπ-, present stem πεµπο-/ε-), λείπω leave (theme λοιπ, λειπ-, λιπ-, present stem λειπο-/ε-), φεύγω flee (theme φευγ-, φυγ-, present stem φευγο-/ε-). See § 186, 2.
Note. – Here belong also the verbs πλέω sail, χέω pour, θέω run, γέω swim, πνέω breathe, ῥέῳ flow, whose themes end in –ευ– (for *πλευ-ω, *χευ-ω, etc. See § 21).
3. A few verbs, mostly –μι verbs, have reduplication in the present system (§ 182): thus, τέθηµι (θε, θη-) put, γί-γνομαι (γον-, γεν-, γν-) become. (Cf. Latin gi-gno.)
194. The τ Class. – Some verbs, with stems in π, β, or φ form the present tense stem by adding –το/ε- to the theme (cf. Latin flec-to): thus, τύπ-τω strike (theme τυπ-, present stem τυπτο-/ε-), καλύπ–τω cover (theme καλυβ-, § 25), σκάπ-τω dig (theme σκαφ-, § 25).
19566. The ι Class. – Many mute and liquid verbs form their present stem by adding the suffix –ιο-/ε- to the theme (cf. Latin fac-io), but this suffix almost always combines in some way with the preceding letters. See § 39, and cf. § 292.
1. With k, χ, τ, θ the ι unites to form ττ (Ionic σσ, § 22): thus, κηρῡ́ττω proclaim (theme κηρῡκ-, present stem κηρῡττο-/ε-) for *κηρῡκ-ιω: ταράττω disturb (theme ταραχ-) for *ταραχ–ιω. (See § 39,1.)
2. With γ and δ the ι unites to form ζ (8 39, 2): thus, σφάζω slay (theme σφαγ-) for *σφαγ-ιω: παίζω play (theme παιδ-) for *παιδ-ιω.
Note 1.– Themes in –γγ– lose the first γ: thus, κλάζω (theme κλαγγ-) for *κλαγγ-ιω.
Note 2. – In a number of verbs γ-ι seems to combine into ττ: thus, τάττω arrange (theme ταγ., cf. ταγ-ός commander), but a good many of these words can be shown to have had parallel themes in –κ-, and these probably influenced the rest.
3. With λ the ι assimilates to form λλ (§ 39, 3): thus, ἀγγέλλω (theme ἀγγελ-) for *ἀγγελ-ιω.
4. With ν and ρ the ι goes over to the preceding vowel and unites with it by contraction (§ 39,4): thus, φαύνω show (theme φαν-) for *φαν-ιω: κρῑ́νω distinguish (theme κριν-) for *κριν–ιω: σπείρω sow (theme σπερ-) for *σπερ-ιω.
Note. – A few apparently vowel verbs form their present with this suffix: thus, καίω (for καϝ-ι-ω, theme καυ-, § 21) burn, κλαίω (for *κλαϝ-ι-ω, theme κλαυ– § 21) weep.
196. The ν Class. – A number of verbs form their present stem by adding to the theme a suffix containing ν (cf. Latin cer-n-o).
1. Suffix –νο-/ε-. – Some verbs add –νο-/ε- alone: thus, τέμ–νω cut (theme τεµ-).
2. Suffix –ανο-/ε-. – A good many verbs add –ανο-/ε-: thus, αἰσθ-άνομαι perceive (theme αἰσθ-).
If the last syllable of the theme is short, a sympathetic nasal (ν with a lingual, μ with a labial, γ with a palatal) appears in the theme: thus, μανθ-άνω learn (theme μαθ-), λαμβ-άνω take (theme λαβ-), λαγχ-άνω get by lot (theme λαχ-).
3. Suffix –va-, –νη– (§ 170, 1). – A very few verbs, mostly poetic, take a suffix –να-, –νη-; thus, πέρ-νη-μι sell (πέρ-να-μεν we sell, theme περ-).
4. Suffix –veο-/ε-. – A few verbs take a suffix –veο-/ε- (§ 190): thus, ἱκ-νοῦ-μαι (-νέο-μαι) arrive (theme ἱκ-).
5. Suffix –νυ-. Several verbs have a suffix –νυ-: thus, δείκ-νῡ-μι show (theme δεικ-).
Note. – After a vowel this suffix appears as ννυ, but in most of these cases the extra ν comes from the assimilation of another consonant in which the theme originally ended: thus, ἕννυμι clothe (theme originally ϝεσ- cf. Latin vestis) for *ἑσ-νυμι.
197. The σκ Class. – Several verbs form their present stem by adding to the theme –σκο-ε- or –ἰσκο-ε-: (cf. Latin gno-sco); (regularly, vowel themes take –σκο-ε-, and consonant themes –ἰσκο-ε-): thus, ἀρέ-σκω please (theme ἀρε-), εὑρ-ίσκω find (theme εὑρ-).
1. Some of these verbs have also reduplication in the present system (§ 182): thus, γι-γνώ-σκω know (theme γνω-).
INFLECTION OF THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT
198. The –ω Form. – For the paradigm see § 237; for an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3.
19967. Contract Verbs. – Verbs in ῶ (-άω, –έω, –όω) contract the final vowel of the stem with the variable vowel ο-ε-; for the paradigms see §§ 248–250.
1. In the optative, contract verbs almost always have –ίη– for the mode sign in the singular and –ι– in the dual and plural.
Note. – Rarely –ι– is found as mode sign in the singular, while ιη: seldom, if ever, appears in the dual and plural (cf. § 160, note).
2. Verbs of two syllables in –εω (originally –εύω, § 193, note) contract only when the contraction will give ει; otherwise they remain uncontracted: thus, πλέω sail, πλεῖς, πλεῖ, πλεῖτον, πλεῖτον, πλέομεν, πλεῖτε, πλέουσι.
Note. – But δῶ (for δέω, *δε-ιν) bind is contracted throughout, and ξέω (for *ξεσω) scrape is usually contracted throughout.
3. A few verbs seem to have stems in –η-, and so have η wherever the ordinary contract verbs have ᾱ: thus, ζῶ live, ζῇς, ζῇ, ζῆτον, ζῶμεν, ζῆτε, ζῶσι; subj. ζῶ, ζῇς, etc. opt. ζῴην, ζῴης, etc; impv. ζῆ, etc.; infin. ζῆν; partc. ζῶν. The most common of these verbs are ζῶ live and χρῶμαι use; for the others see the Verb List, § 729.
20068. The –μι Form. – For the paradigms see §§ 251–254. Observe that the end vowel of the stem is long in the singular of the indicative active (§ 170, 1); elsewhere short.
1. In the subjunctive and optative the mode sign is regularly contracted with the final vowel of the theme (§ 170, 2–3); thus, τιθῇς (subj.) for τιθέ-ῃς, τιθείην (opt.) for τιθε-ίην, from τίθημι put.
Note. – Three deponent verbs, δύναμαι can, ἐπίσταμαι understand, κρέμαμαι hang, are accented in the subjunctive and optative as if uncontracted: δύνωμαι, ἐπίστωμαι, κρέμωμαι; opt. 3d sing. δύναιτο, ἐπίσταιτο, κρέμαιτο.
THE FIRST AORIST SYSTEM
(ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)
20169. The first aorist stem is formed by adding –σα– to the theme: thus, παιδεύω educate (theme παιδευ-), aor. ἐ-παίδευ-σα (aorist stem παιδευσα-).
1. The theme of primitive verbs usually appears in the first aorist with ε or with the long vowel (see § 186, 1–2): thus, ἔτρεψα turned, ἔτηξα melted.
202. Vowel Verbs. – Most vowel verbs show a long vowel before the aorist suffix (§ 187): thus, ἐῶ (άω) allow, aor. εἴᾱ-σα (§ 15); τίμῶ (-άω) honor, aor. ἐ-τῑ́μη-σα (§ 15); ποιῶ (-έω) do, aor. ἐ-ποίη-σα; δηλῶ (όω) show, aor. ἐ-δήλω-σα. For some apparent exceptions see § 188.
203. Mute Verbs. – A labial or palatal mute at the end of the stem combines with the σ of the suffix, and forms ψ' or ξ (see §§ 28 and 29): thus, ἔ-κοψα, from κόπτω cut (κοπ-); ἔ-γραψα, from γράφω write (γραφ-); ἐ-φύλαξα, from φυλάττω guard (φυλακ-); έ-σφαξα, from σφάζω slay (σφαγ-).
A lingual mute is dropped before the σ of the suffix (§ 30): thus, ἔ-πεισα, from πείθω persuade (πειθ-); ἔ-σπεισα (see § 34), from σπένδω pour (σπενδ-).
20470. Liquid Verbs. – Liquid verbs lose the σ of the aorist suffix, and in compensation (§ 16) lengthen the preceding vowel: thus, φαίνω show (theme φαν-), aor. ἔφηνα; στέλλω send (theme στελ-), aor. ἔστειλα; κρῑ́νω distinguish (theme κριν-), aor. ἔκρῑνα.
Note 1. – The σ of the suffix was first assimilated to the liquid, and later, when the two liquids became one, the preceding vowel was lengthened in compensation (§ 16). Thus, *ἐ-μεν-σα became ἔμεννα, (which is the Aeolic form), and finally ἔμεινα.
Nore 2. – After ι or ρ the lengthened form of α is always ᾱ; after other letters η sometimes appears, contrary to § 15, 1: thus, περαίνω (περαν-) finish, aor. ἐπέρᾱνα; so also κερδαίνω (κερδαν-) gain, aor. ἐκέρδᾱνα, but φαίνω (φαν-) show, aor. ἔφηνα.
205. Three verbs – δίδωμι (δο-, δω-) give, ἵημι (ἑ-, ἡ-) send, τίθηµι (θε-, θη-) put – form the singular of their aorists active with the suffix –κα: thus, ἔδωκα, ἦκα, ἔθηκα. See § 211, 3. Very rarely this form intrudes elsewhere: thus, sometimes ἔδωκαν (= ἕ-δο-σαν, 3d plur.) they gave.
INFLECTION OF THE FIRST AORIST
206. The first aorist middle differs from the active only in the personal endings: thus, active ἐ-παίδευ-σα, middle ἐ-παιδευ-σά-μην. For the paradigms see § 240.
Note. – In the third singular of the indicative active –α changes to ε: ἐπαίδευσε. The imperatives παίδευσον, παίδευσαι, and the infinitive παιδεῦσαι, are irregular, and cannot be satisfactorily explained.
THE SECOND AORIST SYSTEM
(ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)
20771. A considerable number of primitive verbs form their aorists without any suffix, and employ only the simple theme of the verb. These aorists fall into two classes, – those with, and those without the variable vowel.
1. Consonant themes are inflected with the variable vowels ο-/ε- vowel themes follow the –μι form of inflection.
Note 1. – A very few second aorists go over to the inflection of the first aorist: so ἔ-χε-α (ἔχευα) poured (for *ἐχευ-ν, § 14, 1, note).
Note 2. – The stem of the second aorist always differs from the present stem, since otherwise its forms would be confused with those of the imperfect.
Note 3. – Few verbs have both a first and a second aorist in use at the same time. In such case, however, the two aorists always differ in meaning, the first aorist being transitive, and the second intransitive: thus, ἔστησε caused to stand, erected, ἔστην stood.
20872. Second Aorist of the –ω Form. – The second aorist of the –ω form has regularly that form of the stem with no vowel or with α (see §§ 14; 180, 2): thus, ἑ-πτ-όμην, from πέτ-ομαι fly; ἐ-τραπ-όμην, from τρέπ-ω turn; so also ἕλιπ-ον, from λείπ-ω leave (§ 14, 2); ἔ-φυγ-ον, from φεύγ-ω flee (§ 14, 2).
1. The verb ἄγω lead has a reduplicated (§ 183) second aorist ἤγαγον (infin. ἀγ-αγ-εῖν, § 179); so also εἶπον said, probably for *ἑ-ϝε-ϝεπ-ον (from root ϝεπ-).
209. Second Aorist of the -μι Form. – In the second aorist of the –μι form the stem is the simple theme of the verb: thus, ἕ-στη-ν (στα-, στη-) stood, ἔ-δο-μεν (δο-, δω-) gave (1st person plural).
INFLECTION OF THE SECOND AORIST
21073. The –ω Form. – The second aorist of the – ω form is inflected with the variable vowel ο-/ε-. For the paradigm see § 241.
Note. – The following imperatives active of the second aorist have irregular accent: εἰπέ say, ἐλθέ come, εὑρέ find, ἰδέ see, λαβέ take; but not when compounded: thus, ἄπ-ελθε be off!
21174. The -μι Form. – In the –μι form the endings are attached directly to the stem, the final vowel of which is long in the indicative, infinitive, and imperative (except the impv. 3d plur.): thas ἔστην stood, ἔβην went, infin. βῆναι, but opt. βαίην, 3d plur. impv. βάντων.
1. The subjunctive contracts a final α, ε or ο of the theme with the ω or η of the mode sign (§ 170, 2): thus, θῇς for θέ-ῃς (τίθηµι put), δῶ for δό-ω (δίδωµι give).
2. In the optative the ι of the mode sign contracts with the final vowel of the theme (§ 170, 8): thus, θείην͵ θεῖμεν (τίθηµι put).
Note. – But two deponent verbs, ἐπριάμην bought (§ 257) and ὠνήμην received profit, ave accented as if uncontracted (cf. § 200, note).
3. Three verbs, δίδωµι give, ἵημι send, τίθηµι put, keep the vowel of their stems short throughout the second aorist; in the singular of the indicative active they have forms with –κα (§ 205); and in the infinitive and imperative they are slightly peculiar. For their conjugation see §§ 255, 256, 260.
THE FUTURE SYSTEM
(ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)
212. The stem of the future is, in general, the same as that of the first aorist (§ 201), except that the variable vowel ο-/ε- appears in the suffix instead of α: thus, παιδεύ-ω educate, aor. ἐ-παίδευ-σα, fut. παιδεύ-σω (stem παιδευσο-/ε-).
1. Some few verbs in –ῶ (-έω) and –άζω drop the σ of the future and contract. This happens only when the σ of the tense sign is preceded by a short vowel (α or ε) which in turn is preceded by a short syllable: thus, τελῶ (-έω) finish, fut. τελῶ (for τελέ-σω, τελέω); βιβάζω make go, fut. βιβῶ for (βιβά-σω, βιβάω); sο also ἐλῶ (for ἑλά-σω), future of ἐλαύνω drive. These futures are usually reckoned among the Attic futures of § 215.
21375. Liquid Verbs. – Liquid verbs form their futures with the suffix –εω (for –εσω, § 87); the ε is contracted with the following vowel, as in the present of φιλῶ (-έω), §§ 199, 249: thus, φαίνω show (theme φαν-), fut. φανῶ, for φανέω.
Note. – The ε here is probably a mere help vowel, generated in the pronunciation of a liquid before σ thus, *φαν-σω (regularly formed like λῡ́-σῳ) soon became *φανεσω, then φανέω, and finally φανῶ.
214. Doric Future. – A few verbs form their future with a suffix –δεο-/ε-, which undergoes the regular contraction. This is found only in verbs which employ the future middle in an active meaning; such verbs have also the regular future in –σομαι: thus, πνέω breathe, fut. πνευσοῦμαι or πνεύσομαι; φεύγω flee, fut. φευξοῦμαι or φεύξομαι. This is the regular form of the future in the Doric dialect, and sο it is usually called the Doric Future.
215. Attic Future. – Verbs in –ίξω also take the future suffix –σεο-/ε-, but drop the σ between the two vowels (§ 87), which then contract: thus, νομίζω think, fut. νομιῶ (for *νομισεω, *νομιεω). This is usually called the Attic Future.
216. Four or five verbs have no future suffix, so that their future tense has the form of a present: thus, ἔδομαι shall eat, πίοµαι shall drink.
Note. – These forms are really old subjunctives with a short mode sign (§ 160 a), which have come to be used as futures (cf. § 555, note).
INFLECTION OF THE FUTURE
217. The future belongs to the -w form of inflection; for the paradigms see §§ 238–239.
THE FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM (ACTIVE)
(PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT)
21876. The stem of the first perfect is formed by reduplicating (§ 178) the theme and adding the suffix –κα: thus, λέ-λυ-κα, from λῡ́ω loose.
1. A lingual mute is dropped before –κᾱ– thus, πέ-πει-κα, from πείθ-ω persuade. A ν either disappears or is changed to γ-nasal: thus, κέ-κρι-κα, from κρίνω distinguish, but πέ-φαγ-κα, from φαίνω show.
2. Vowel verbs usually have a long vowel (§ 187) before the suffix –κα: thus, τε-τῑ́μη-κα, from τιμῶ (-άω) honor; πε-ποίη-κα, from ποιῶ (-έω) do.
3. Some liquid themes undergo metathesis (§ 38), and so are treated as vowel themes (§ 163, 1): thus, βέ-βλη-κα, from βάλλω (βαλ-) throw; κέ-κµη-κα, from κάµνω (καμ-) labor.
4. Stems of one syllable with the vowel variation ο, ε, (α) (§ 14, 1) have in the first perfect the form with α, – borrowed, probably, from the perfect middle (§ 224, 1, note): thus, ἔσταλκα, from στέλλω (στελ-, σταλ-) send; ἔφθαρκα, from φθείρω (φθορ-, φθερ-, φθαρ-) destroy.
THE SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM (ACTIVE)
(PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT)
21977. The stem of the second perfect (confined almost wholly to primitive verbs) is formed by reduplicating (§ 178) the theme, and adding the suffix –α: thus, γέ–γραφ-α, from γράφω (γραφ-) write.
1. Most stems ending in π, β, κ, or γ change the last letter into the corresponding rough mute (§ 12, 2): thus, βέ-βλαφ-α, from βλάπτω (βλαβ-) injure; ἦχ-α, from ἄγω (ἀγ-) lead.
2. Verbs whose themes show the variation of long and short vowels (§ 18) have in the second perfect the long vowel (§ 186, 1): thus, τέ-τηκ-α, from τήκω (της-, τακ-) melt.
3. Verbs whose themes show the vowel variation ο, ε, α (§ 14) have in the second perfect the form with o (or οι) (§ 186, 2): thus, τέ-τροφ-α, from τρέφω (τροφ-, τρεφ-, τραφ-) nourish; λέ-λουπ-α, from λείπω (λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ-) leave.
Νοte 1. – Themes with the variation ου, ευ, υ (§ 14,2) should also have (o) ov in the second perfect, but the only example of this regular form is the Epic εἰλήλουθα have come. All others have ευ, as πέ-φευγ-α, from φεύγω (φευγ, φυγ) flee.
Νοte 2. – Verbs with Attic reduplication (§ 179) regularly have the short form of the root: thus, ἀλ-ήλιφ-α, from ἀλείφω anoint.
220. A few second perfects are formed without any suffix, the endings being added directly to the reduplicated theme: thus, ἕ-στα-μεν we stand, τε-θνά-ναι to be dead. Such forms are never found in the singular of the indicative (cf. §§ 219 and 258).
INFLECTION OF THE PERFECTS ACTIVE
(First and Second)
221. The first and second perfect systems are alike in their inflection. For the paradigms see §§ 242–243.
Note. – In the third singular of the indicative active –α changes to –ε: πεπαίδευκε (cf. § 206, note).
1. For the subjunctive and optative the perfect participle with the corresponding form of εἰμί am is very often used: thus, πεπαιδευκὼς ὦ, πεπαιδευκὼς εἴην (cf. § 227).
2. The imperative is hardly ever found except in perfects with present meaning: thus, ἕσταθι stand.
THE PLUPERFECTS ACTIVE
(FIRST AND SECOND PLUPERFECTS)
22278. The stem of the pluperfect active is the same as that of the perfect active, with the substitution of ε or η for the α of the suffix: thus, 1st perf. λέλυκα, 1st plup. ἐ-λε-λύ-κη 2d perf. γέγραφα, 2d plup. ἐ-γε-γράφ-η.
INFLECTION OF THE PLUPERFECTS ACTIVE
(Fist and Second)
223. For the inflection of the pluperfects active. see the paradigms §§ 242–243. For the augment see § 176.
THE PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM
PERFECT, PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT
224. The stem of the perfect middle is the reduplicated theme, to which the endings are attached directly: thus, λέ-λυ-μαι, from λῡ́ω loose.
1. The perfect middle in general agrees with the first perfect active in vowel changes of the theme and the retention or rejection of ν. Examples are:
τε-τίμη-μαι, from τιμῶ (-άω) honor.
πε-ποίη-μαι, from ποιῶ (-έω), do.
πέ-πεισ-μαι (§ 27, 3), from πείθ-ω persuade.
ἕ-σταλ-μαι, from στέλλω (στελ-, σταλ-) send.
κά-κρι-μαι, from κρΐνω (κριν-) distinguish.
βέ-βλη-μαι (§ 38,1), from βάλλω (βαλ-) throw.
Note. – Properly the perfect middle of primitive verbs with the vowel variation ο, ε (α) (§§ 14, 1 and 186, 2), should have the form of the theme with no vowel or α: thus, τέθραµ-μαι (τρέφω nourisk), τέ-τραμ-μαι (τρέπω turn), ἕ-στραμ-μαι (στρέφω turn), ἕ-σπαρ-μαι (σπείρω (σπερ-) soig), τέ-τα-µαι (for *τετι-μαι (§ 14, 1, note), from τείνω (τεν-) stretch), πέ-πυσ-µαι (πυνθάνοµαι (πευθ:, πυθ-) learn); but the form of the theme with has often intruded: thus, πέ-πεµ-μαι (πέµπ-ω send), πέ-πεισ-µαι (πείθ-ω persuade).
For σ at the end of the stem in the perfect middle of some verbs see § 189.
INFLECTION OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE
225. 1. The inflection of the perfect middle system of vowel verbs may be seen in § 244. In mute or liquid verbs the final consonant of the theme before the personal endings is subject to the euphonic changes mentioned in §§ 25–31 and 85. These may be seen from the paradigms § 247.
2. When the σ at the end of the perfect middle stem of some verbs (§ 189) comes before o in a personal ending, the two sigmas are reduced to one (§ 35): thus, τε-τέλεσ-μαι, τε-τέλεσαι (for τε-τελεσ-σαι), from τελῶ (-έω) finish; see § 247.
22679. In the third person plural of the indicative middle consonant stems employ the perfect participle with εἰσί they are for the perfect, and with ἦσαν they were for the pluperfect, since the endings –νται, –ντο are regularly used only after a vowel: thus, ἡγμένοι εἰσί, they have been led.
227. The perfect middle subjunctive and optative (like the third plural of the indicative) are periphrastic. They are made by combining the perfect participle with the subjunctive and optative of εἰμί am (cf. Latin amatus sim, amatus essem); thus, πεπαιδευμένος ὦ, πεπαιδευµένος εἴην.
Note. – A few perfects middle that have a present meaning form their subjunctive and optative directly from the stem: so μέμνημαι remember, from μιμνῄσκω remind; subj. μεμνῶμαι, opt. μεµνῄμην or μεμνῴμην, 2d pers. μεµνῄ–ο, for *με–μνη–ι(σ)ο, etc.
THE FUTURE PERFECT
228. The stem of the future perfect is formed by adding –σο-/ε– to the stem of the perfect middle. A vowel before –σο-/ε– is always long, althoughtin the perfect middle it may have been short: thus, λε-λῡ́-σο-μαι (perf. mid. λέ-λυ-μαι) from λῡ́ω loose; δε-δή-σο-μαι (perf. mid. δέ-δε-μαι) from δῶ (δέω) bind.
INFLECTION OF THE FUTURE PERFECT
229. The future perfect is inflected with the middle endings. It differs from the future middle only in having reduplication. Its meaning is almost always passive. For the paradigm see § 244.
230. Future Perfect Active. – Most verbs form their future perfects active periphrastically by combining the perfect participle with ἔσομαι shall be: thus, γε-γραφὼς ἔσομαι shall have written (cf. in Latin the corresponding passive form scriptus ero). But two perfects with present meaning, in frequent use, have developed a special future perfect active. These are τέθνηκα am dead ((ἀπο)θνῄσκω die), fut. perf. τεθνήξω shall be dead; and ἕστηκα stand (ἴστημι set up), fut. perf. ἑστήξω shall stand.
THE FIRST AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEM
231. The stem of the first aorist passive is formed by adding to the theme of the verb the suffix θε-, the ε of which appears as η in the indicative, infinitive, and imperative (except the 3d plur.impv., cf. § 211): thus, ἐ-λύ-θη-ν, from λῡ́ω loose.
1. Before the θ of the suffix a labial or palatal mute (π, β, κ, γ) becomes coordinate (§ 25); a lingual mute becomes σ (§ 26): thus, ἐ-πρᾱ́χ-θη-ν (πρᾶγ-), from πρᾱ́ττω do; ἐ-λείφ-θη-ν (λειπ-), from λείπω leave; ἐπείσ-θη-ν (πειθ-), from πείθω persuade.
2. Vowel verbs show a vowel of the same length as in the perfect middle: thus, ἑτῑμή-θη-ν (perf. mid. τε-τῑ́μη-μαι), from τἰμῶ (-άω) honor; ἐ-δό-θη-ν (perf. mid. δέ-δο-μαι), from δίδωμι give; ἐ-κρί-θη-ν, perf. mid. κέ-κρι-μαι, from κρῑ́νω distinguish.
3. For the σ before the suffix of some verbs (ἐτελέσθην, ἠκούσθην, etc.) see § 189.
4. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel variation ο, ε, (α) (§ 14) usually have in the first aorist passive the form with ε: thus, ἐ-τρέφ-θη-ν, from τρέπω (τροπ-, τρεπ-, τραπ-) turn; ἐ-λείφ-θην, from λείπω (λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ-) leave.
THE SECOND AORIST PASSIVE
232. The stem of the second aorist passive is formed by adding the suffix –ε– to the theme of the verb. This ε appears as η in the indicative, infinitive, and imperative (except the 3d plur. impy., cf. § 211): thus, ἐ-φάν-η-ν, from φαίνω (φαν-) show.
1. Primitive verbs whose themes show the variation between a short and a long vowel (§ 13) have in the second aorist passive the form with the short vowel (§ 186, 1): thus, ἑ-τάκ-η-ν, from τήκ-ω (τηκ-, τακ-) melt.
2. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel variation ο, ε, (α) (§ 14) have in the second aorist passive the form with α (§ 186, 2): thus, ἑ-στάλ-η-ν, from στέλλω (στελ-, σταλ-) send.
INFLECTION OF THE AORISTS PASSIVE
23380. The first and second aorists passive are alike in their inflection. They take the active endings (§ 166, 1), and closely resemble the second aorist of the –μι form. For the par digms see §§ 245–246.
1. The subjunctive contracts the ε of the passive suffix with the ω or η of the mode sign (§ 160, 2): thus, λυθῶ for λυ-θέ-ω (λῡ́ω loose).
2. The optative has for mode sign –ιη– in the singular and ι in the plural (§ 160, 1). The ι of the mode sign is contracted with the ε of the suffix (§ 160, 2): thus, λυθείην, λυθεῖμεν ( λῡ́ω loose).
Note. – In the dual and plural –ιη– sometimés is found as the mode sign, but there is little doubt that this is due to errors of copyists, who were influenced by the analogy of the singular.
3. The imperative ending –θι in the first aorist passive becomes –τι to avoid rough mutes at the beginning of two successive syllables (§ 40): thus, λύθη-τι (for *λυθη-θι).
THE FUTURES PASSIVE
(FIRST AND SECOND FUTURES PASSIVE)
234. The stem of the future passive is formed by adding –σο-/ε- to the stem of the aorist passive (cf. §§ 212; 228): thus, λυθή-σο-μαι (aor. pass. ἐ-λύθη-ν), from λῡ́ω loose ; φανή-σο-μαι (aor. pass. ἐ-φάνη-ν), from φαίνω show.
1. The future passive is inflected like the future middle. For the paradigms see §§ 245; 246, 1.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES
235. The stems of the verbal adjectives are formed by adding -το- and -τεο- to the theme, which usually has the same form as in the first aorist passive, except that a rough mute is made codrdinate before the 7 of the suffix (§ 25): Thus,
| Aorist Passive | Verbals | |
| λῡ́ω loose | ἐ-λύ-θην | λυ-τός, λυ-τεός |
| τῑμῶ (-άω) honor | ἐ-τιμή-θην | τῖμη-τός, τιµη-τέος |
| πείθω persiade | ἐ-πείσ-θην | πεισ-τός, πεισ-τέος |
| κρῑ́νω distinguish | ἐ-κρί-θην | κρι-τός, κρι-τέος |
| τάττω arrange (ταγ-) | ἐ-τάχ-θην | τακ-τός, τακ-τέος |
| τρέφω nourish | ἐ-θρέφ-θην | θρεπ-τός, θρεπ-τέος |
1. The verbal adjectives belong to the first and second declensions of adjectives (λυτός, –ή, -όν; λυτέος͵ –ᾱ -ον). See § 117. For the accent see § 185, 2.
2. The verbal in –τός expresses what has been done or may be done; that in –τέος what needs doing: thus, λυτός loosed or loosable; λυτέος needing to be loosed.
236. The meanings of the different persons, numbers, modes, tenses, and voices, may be seen from the following paradigm and synopsis of παιδεύω educate. The meanings of the subjunctive and optative have no brief equivalent in English, and they must be learned from the chapter on Syntax.
VI · Synopsis of παιδεύω
Present Indicative Active of παιδεύω educate
| Singular | Dual | Plural |
| 1. παιδεύω I educate | παιδεύοµεν we educate | |
| 2. παιδεύεις you educate | παιδεύετον you (two) educate | παιδείετε you educate |
| 3. παιδεύει he educates | παιδεύετον they (two) educate | παιδεύουσι they educate |
SYNOPSIS OF THE VERB παιδεύω educate
The Present and Imperfect
| Active | Middle | Passive | |
| Indic. | παιδεύω I educate (or am educating) | παιδεύομαι I educate for myself, get educated (or am getting educated) | The present middle is used also as passive (§ 158, 1) |
| ἐπαίδειον I was educating | ἐπαιδενόμην I was getting educated | ||
| Subj. | παιδεύω | παιδεύωµαι | |
| Opt. | παιδεύοιμι | παιδενοίµην | |
| Impv. | παίδευε educate | παιδεύον get educated | |
| Infin. | παιδεύειν to educate | παιδεύεσθαι to get educated | |
| Partic. | παιδεύων educating | παιδενόµενος getting educated |
The Future
| Active | Middle | Passive | |
| Indic. | παιδεύσω I shall educate | παιδεύσομαι I shall get educated | παιδευθήσοµαι I shall be educated |
| Opt. | παιδεύσοιμι | παιδευσοίµην | παιδευθησοίµην |
| Infin. | παιδεύσειν to be about to educate | παιδεύσεσθαι to be about to get educated | παιδεθήσεσθαι to be about to be educated |
| Partic. | παιδεύσων about to educate | παιδευσόµενος about to get educated | παιδευθησόµενος about to be educated |
SYNOPSIS OF παιδεύω educate (continued)
The Aorists
| Active | Middle | Passive | |
| Indic. | ἐπαίδευσα I educated | ἐπαιδευσάμην I got educated | ἐπαιδεύθην was educated |
| Subj. | παιδεύσω | παιδεύσωμαι | παιδευθῶ |
| Opt. | παιδεύσαιμι | παιδευσαίμην | παιδευθείην |
| Impv. | παίδευσον educate | παίδευσαι get educated | παιδεύθητι be educated |
| Infin. | παιδεῦσαι to educate | παιδεύσασθαι to get educated | παιδευθῆναι to be educated |
| Partic. | παιδεύσᾱς having educated | παιδευσάμενος having got educated | παιδευθείς having been educated |
The Perfect and Pluperfect
| Active | Middle | Passive | |
| Indic. | πεπαίδευκα I have educated | πεπαίδευμαι I have got (or am, § 534) educated | The perfect middle is used also as passive (§ 158, 1) |
| ἐπεπαιδείκη I had educated | ἐπεπαιδεύμην I had got (or was, § 534) educated | ||
| Subj. | πεπαιδεύκω | πεπαιδευµένος ὦ | |
| Opt. | πεπαιδεύκοιμι | πεπαιδευµένος εἵην | |
| Impv. | [πεπαίδευκε] | πεπαίδευσο be educated | |
| Infin. | πεπαιδευκέναι to have educated | πεπαιδεῦσθαι to have got (or to be, § 53) educated | |
| Partic. | πεπαιδευκώς having educated | πεπαιδευμένος having got educated, or simply educated (§ 534) |
The Future Perfect
| Active. See § 230 | (Middle and) Passive. See § 229 | |
| Indic. | πεπαιδευκὼς ἔσομαι I shall have educated | πεπαιδεύσομαι I shall have (got or) been educated, or shall be educated (cf. § 538) |
| Opt. | πεπαιδευκὼς ἐσοίμην | πεπαιδευσοίµην |
| Infin. | πεπαιδευκὼς ἔσεσθαι to be about to have educate etc. | πεπαιδεύσεσθαι to be about to have (got or) been educated |
| Partic. | πεπαιδευσόμενος about to have (got or) been educated |
Verbal adjectives
παιδεντός educated or capable of being educated
παιδευτέος needing to be educated
VI · Paradigms of – ω Verbs
237. Present System
παιδείτ-ω educate
| Active | Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | παιδεύω | ἐ-παιδευο-ν | παιδεύο-μαι | ἐ-παιδευό-μην |
| 2 | παιδεύεις | ἑ-παίδευε-ς | παιδεύῃ, or -ει | ἐ-παιδεύον | ||
| 3 | παιδεύει | ἑ-παίδευε | παιδεύε-ται | ἑ-παιδεύε-το | ||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύε-τον | ἑ-παιδεύε-τον | παιδεύε-σθον | ἑ-παιδεύε-σθον | |
| 3 | παιδεύε-τον | ἑ-παιδεύε-την | παιδεύε-σθον | ἑ-παιδεύε-σθην | ||
| P. | 1 | παιδεύο-μεν | ἑ-παιδεύο-μεν | παιδεύο-μεθα | ἑ-παιδεύο-μεθα | |
| 2 | παιδεύε-τε | ἑ-παιδεύε-τε | παιδεύε-σθε | ἑ-παιδεύε-σθε | ||
| 3 | παιδεύουσι | ἐ-παιδευο-ν | παιδεύο-νται | παιδεύο-ντο | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | παιδεύω | παιδεύω-μαι | ||
| 2 | παιδεύῃς | παιδεύῃ | ||||
| 3 | παιδεύῃ | παιδεύη-ται | ||||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύη-τον | παιδεύη-σθον | |||
| 3 | παιδεύη-τον | παιδεύη-σθον | ||||
| P. | 1 | παιδεύω-μεν | παιδεύω-μεθα | |||
| 2 | παιδεύη-τε | παιδεύη-σθε | ||||
| 3 | παιδεύωσι | παιδεύω-νται | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | παιδεύοι-μι | παιδευοί-μην | ||
| 2 | παιδεύοι-ς | παιδεύοι-ο | ||||
| 3 | παιδεύοι | παιδεύοι-το | ||||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύοι-τον | παιδεύοι-σθον | |||
| 3 | παιδευοί-την | παιδευοί-σθον | ||||
| P. | 1 | παιδεύοι-μεν | παιδεύοι-μεθα | |||
| 2 | παιδεύοι-τε | παιδεύοι-σθε | ||||
| 3 | παιδεύοιε-ν | παιδεύοι-ντο | ||||
| Impv. | 2 | παίδενε | παιδεύον | |||
| 3 | παιδευέ-τω | παιδευέ-σθω | ||||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύε-τον | παιδεύε-σθον | |||
| 3 | παιδευέ-των | παιδευέ-σθων | ||||
| P. | 2 | παιδευέ-τε | παιδευέ-σθε | |||
| 3 | παιδευό-ντων | παιδευέ-σθων | ||||
| Infin. | παιδεύειν | παιδευέ-σθαι | ||||
| Partic. | παιδεύων, -ουσα, -ον | παιδευό-μενο-ς, -η, -ον | ||||
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms sce § 170, notes 1–3.
Future System
| 238. Vowel Verbs | 239. Liquid Verbs | |||||
| παιδεύ-ω educate | φαίνω (φαν–) show | |||||
| Active | Middle | Active | Middle | |||
| Future | Future (contracted) | |||||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | παιδεύσω | παιδεύσο-μαι | φανῶ (-έω) | φανοῦμαι (-έο–) |
| 2 | παιδεύσεις | παιδεύσῃ or -ει | φανεῖς (–έεις) | φανῇ or -εῖ (έῃ or –έει) | ||
| 3 | παιδεύει | παιδεύσε-ται | φανεῖ (–έει) | φανεῖται (-έε-) | ||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύε-τον | παιδεύσε-σθον | φανεῖ-τον (-έε–) | φανεῖσθον (-έε-) | |
| 3 | παιδεύε-τον | παιδεύσε-σθον | φανεῖ-τον (-έε–) | φανεῖσθον (-έε-) | ||
| P. | 1 | παιδεύο-μεν | παιδευσό-μεθα | φανοῦ-μεν (-έο–) | φανοῦμετα (-έο–) | |
| 2 | παιδεύε-τε | παιδεύσε-σθε | φανεῖ-τε (-έε–) | φανεῖσθε (-έε-) | ||
| 3 | παιδεύουσι | παιδεύσο-νται | φανοῦσι (-έου–) | φανοῦνται (-έο-) | ||
| No Subjunctive | No Subjunctive | |||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | παιδεύσοι-μι | παιδευσοί-μην | φανοίη-ν (-εοίην) | φανοί-μην (-εοί–) |
| 2 | παιδεύσοι-ς | παιδεύσοι-ο | φανοίη-ς (-εοίης) | φανοῖ-ο (έοιο) | ||
| 3 | παιδεύσοι | παιδεύσοι-το | φανοίη- την (-εοίη) | φανοῖ-το (-έοι–) | ||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύσοι-τον | παιδεύσοι-σθον | φανοῖ-τον (-έοι–) | φανοῖ-σθον (-έοι–) | |
| 3 | παιδευσοί-την | παιδευσοί-σθην | φανοί- την (-εοί–) | φανοί- σθην (-εοί–) | ||
| P. | 1 | παιδεύσοι- μεν | παιδευσοί-μεθα | φανοῖ-μεν (-έοι–) | φανοί- μεθα (-εοί–) | |
| 2 | παιδεύσοι-τε | παιδεύσοι-σθε | φανοῖ-τε (-έοι–) | φανοῖ-σθε (-έοι–) | ||
| 3 | παιδεύσοιε-ν | παιδεύσοι-ντο | φανοῖε-ν (-έοι–) | φανοῖ-ντο (-έοι–) | ||
| No Imperative | No Imperative | |||||
| Infin. | παιδεύειν | παιδευέ-σθαι | φανεῖν-(έειν) | φανεῖ-σθαι (-έε-) |
| Partic. | παιδεύων, -ουσα, -ον | παιδευσό-μενος, -η, -ον | φανῶν-(έων), –οῦσα, – οῦν | φανού-μενος (έο), -η, ον |
NOTE. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3.
| 240. First Aorist System | 241. Second Aorist System | |||||
| παιδεύ-ω educate | λείπω (λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ §14,2) leave | |||||
| Active | Middle | Active | Middle | |||
| 1st Aorist | 2nd Aorist | |||||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | ἐ-παίδευσα | ἐ-παιδευσά-μην | ἔ-λιπο-ν | ἐ-λιπο-μην |
| 2 | ἐ-παίδευσα-ς | ἐ-παιδεύσω | ἔ-λιπε-ς | ἐ-λίπου | ||
| 3 | ἐ-παίδευσε | ἐ-παιδευσά-το | ἔ-λιπε | ἐ-λίπε-το | ||
| D. | 2 | ἐ-παιδεύσα-τον | ἐ-παιδεύσα-σθον | ἐ-λίπε-τον | ἐ-λίπε-σθον | |
| 3 | ἐ-παιδευσά-την | ἐ-παιδευσά-σθον | ἐ-λιπέ-την | ἐ-λιπέ-σθην | ||
| P. | 1 | ἐ-παιδευσά-μεν | ἐ-παιδευσά-μετα | ἐ-λίπο-μεν | ἐ-λιπό-μετα | |
| 2 | ἐ-παιδευσά-τε | ἐ-παιδεύσα-σθε | ἐ-λίπε-τε | ἐ-λίπε-σθε | ||
| 3 | ἐ-παίδευσα-ν | ἐ-παιδεύσα-ντο | ἔ-λιπο-ν | ἐ-λίπο-ντο | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | παιδεύσω | παιδεύσω-μαι | λίπω | λίπω-μαι |
| 2 | παιδεύσῃς | παιδεύσῃ | λίπῃς | λίπῃ | ||
| 3 | παιδεύσῃ | παιδεύση-ται | λίπῃ | λίπη-ται | ||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύση-τον | παιδεύση-σθον | λίπη-τον | λίπη-σθον | |
| 3 | παιδεύση-τον | παιδεύση-σθον | λίπη-τον | λίπη-σθον | ||
| P. | 1 | παιδεύσω-μεν | παιδευσώ-μεθα | λίπω-μεν | λιπὼ-μετα | |
| 2 | παιδεύση-τε | παιδεύση-στε | λίπη-τε | λίπη-σθε | ||
| 3 | παιδεύσωσι | παιδεύσω-νται | λίπωσι | λίπω-νται |
| Opt. | S. | 1 | παιδεύσαι-μι | παιδευσαί-μην | λίποι-μι | λιποί-μην |
| 2 | παιδεύσειας, -σαις | παιδεύσαι-ο | λίποι-ς | λίποι-ο | ||
| 3 | παιδεύσειε, -σαι | παιδεύσαι-το | λίποι | λίποι-το | ||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύσαι-τον | παιδεύσαι-σθον | λίποι-τον | λίποι-σθον | |
| 3 | παιδευσαί-την | παιδευσαί-σθην | λιποί-την | λιποί-σθην | ||
| P. | 1 | παιδεύσαι-μεν | παιδευσαί-μετα | λίποι-μεν | λιποί-μετα | |
| 2 | παιδεύσαι-τε | παιδεύσαι-σθε | λίποιε-τε | λίποι-σθε | ||
| 3 | παιδεύσειαν,-αιε-ν | παιδεύσαι-ντο | λίποιε-ν | λίποι-ντο |
| Impv. | S. | 2 | παίδευσον | παιδεύσαι | λίπε | λίποῦ |
| 3 | παιδευσά-τω | παιδευσά-σθο | λιπέ-τω | λιπέ-σθω | ||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύσα-τον | παιδεύσαι-σθον | λίπε-τον | λίπε-σθον | |
| 3 | παιδευσά-των | παιδευσά-σθων | λιπέ-των | λιπέ-σθων | ||
| P. | 2 | παιδεύσαι-τε | παιδεύσαι-σθε | λίπε-τε | λίπε-σθε | |
| 3 | παιδεύσειαν,-αιε-ν | παιδεύσαι-ντο | λιπό-ντων | λιπέ-σθων |
| Infin. | παιδεῦσαι | παιδεύσα-σθαι | λιπεῖν | λιπέ-σθαι |
| Partic. | παιδεύσᾱς, -οᾱσα, -σαν | παιδευσά-μενος, -η, -ον | λιπών, –οῦσα, – όν | λιπό-μενος, -η, ον |
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3. The first aorist infinitive active παιδεῦσαι is irregular in accent (§ 185). In the second aorist the 2d singular of the imperative middle, the intinitives active and middle, and the participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185).
| 242. First Perfect System | 243. Second Perfect System | |||||
| παιδεύ-ω educate | λείπω (λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ §14,2) leave | |||||
| Active | Active | |||||
| 1st Perfect | 1st Pluperfect | 2d Perfect | 2d Pluperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | πε-παίδευκα | ἐ-πε-παιδεύκη | λέλοιπα | ἐ-λελοίπη |
| 2 | πε-παίδευκα-ς | ἐ-πε-παιδεύκη-ς | λέλοιπα-ς | ἐ-λελοίπη-ς | ||
| 3 | πε-παίδευκε | ἐ-πε-παιδεύκει (ν) | λέλοιπε | ἐ-λελοίπει (ν) | ||
| D. | 2 | πε-παιδεύκα-τον | ἐ-πε-παιδεύκε-τον | λελοίπα-τον | ἐ-λελοίπε-τον | |
| 3 | πε-παιδεύκα-τον | ἐ-πε-παιδευκέ-την | λελοίπα-τον | ἐ-λελοιπέ-την | ||
| P. | 1 | πε-παιδεύκα-μεν | ἐ-πε-παιδευκέ-μεν | λελοίπα-μεν | ἐ-λελοίπε-μεν | |
| 2 | πε-παιδεύκα-τε | ἐ-πε-παιδευκέ-τε | λελοίπα-τε | ἐ-λελοίπε-τε | ||
| 3 | πε-παιδεύκᾱσι | ἐ-πε-παιδεύκε-σαν | λελοίπᾱσι | ἐ-λελοίπε-σαν | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | πε-παιδεύκω | (See also § 221, 1) | λελοίπω | (See also § 221, 1) |
| 2 | πε-παιδεύκῃς | λελοίπῃς | ||||
| 3 | πε-παιδεύκῃ | λελοίπῃ | ||||
| D. | 2 | πε-παιδεύκη-τον | λελοίπη-τον | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδεύκη-τον | λελοίπη-τον | ||||
| P. | 1 | πε-παιδεύκω-μεν | λελοίπω-μεν | |||
| 2 | πε-παιδεύκη-τε | λελοίπη-τε | ||||
| 3 | πε-παιδεύκωσι | λελοίπωσι |
| Opt. | S. | 1 | πε-παιδεύκοι-μι or –οίη-ν | (See also § 221, 1) | λελοίποι-μι or –οίη-ν | (See also § 221, 1) |
| 2 | πε-παιδεύκοι-ς or –οίη-ς | λελοίποι-ς or –οίη-ς | ||||
| 3 | πε-παιδεύκοι or –οίη | λελοίποι or –οίη | ||||
| D. | 2 | πε-παιδεύκοι-τον | λελοίποι-τον | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδευκοί-την | λελοιποί-την | ||||
| P. | 1 | πε-παιδεύκοι-μεν | λελοίποι-μεν | |||
| 2 | πε-παιδεύκοι-τε | λελοίποι-τε | ||||
| 3 | πε-παιδεύκοιε-ν | λελοίποιε-ν |
| Impv. | S. | 2 | [πε-παίδευκε | (See also § 221, 2) | [λέλοιπε | (See also § 221, 2) |
| 3 | πε-παιδευκέ-τω | λελοιπέ-τω | ||||
| D. | 2 | πε-παιδεύκε-τον | λελοίπε-τον | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδευκέ-των | λελοιπέ-των | ||||
| P. | 2 | πε-παιδεύκε-τε | λελοίπε-τε | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδευκό-ντων | λελοιπό-ντων |
| Infin. | πε-παιδευκέ-ναι | λελοιπέ-ναι |
| Partic. | πε-παιδευκώς, -κυῖα, -κός | λελοιπώς, -υῖα, -ός |
Note. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170. notes 1–3. The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185).
| 244. Perfect Middle System | |||||
| παιδεύ-ω educate | |||||
| Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Perfect | Pluperfect | Future Perfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | πε-παίδευ-μαι | ἐ-πε-παιδεύ-μην | πεπαιδεύσο-μαι |
| 2 | πε-παίδευ-σαι | ἐ-πε-παίδευ-σο | πεπαιδεύσῃ or -ει | ||
| 3 | πε-παίδευ-ται | ἐ-πε-παίδευ-το | πεπαιδεύσε-ται | ||
| D. | 2 | πε-παίδευ-σθον | ἐ-πε-παίδευ-σθον | πεπαιδεύσε-σθον | |
| 3 | πε-παίδευ-σθον | ἐ-πε-παιδεύ-σθην | πεπαιδεύσε-σθον | ||
| P. | 1 | πε-παιδεύ-μεθα | ἐ-πε-παιδεύ-μεθα | πεπαιδευσό-μεθα | |
| 2 | πε-παίδευ-σθε | ἐ-πε-παίδευ-σθε | πεπαιδεύσε-σθε | ||
| 3 | πε-παίδευ-νται | ἐ-πε-παίδευ-ντο | πεπαιδεύσο-νται | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | πε-παιδευμένος (-η,-ον) ὦ | No Subjunctive | |
| 2 | πε-παιδευμένος (-η,-ον) ᾖς | ||||
| 3 | πε-παιδευμένος (-η,-ον) ᾖ | ||||
| D. | 2 | πε-παιδευμένω (-ᾱ,-ω) ἦτον | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδευμένω (-ᾱ,-ω) ἦτον | ||||
| P. | 1 | πε-παιδευμένοι (-αι,-α) ᾦμεν | |||
| 2 | πε-παιδευμένοι (-αι,-α) ἦτε | ||||
| 3 | πε-παιδευμένοι (-αι,-α) ᾦσι | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | πε-παιδευμένος (-η,-ον) εἴην | πεπαιδευσοί-μην | |
| 2 | πε-παιδευμένος (-η,-ον) εἴης | πεπαιδεύσοι-ο | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδευμένος (-η,-ον) εἴη | πεπαιδεύσοι-το | |||
| D. | 2 | πε-παιδευμένω (-ᾱ,-ω) εἷτον or εἴητον | πεπαιδεύσοι-σθον | ||
| 3 | πε-παιδευμένω (-ᾱ,-ω) εἴτην or εἰήτην | πεπαιδευσοί-σθην | |||
| P. | 1 | πε-παιδευμένοι (-αι,-α) εἷμεν or εἴημεν | πεπαιδευσοί-μεθα | ||
| 2 | πε-παιδευμένοι (-αι,-α) εἷτε or εἴητε | πεπαιδεύσοι-σθε | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδευμένοι (-αι,-α) εἷεν or εἴησαν | πεπαιδεύσοι-ντο | |||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | πε-παίδευ-σο | No Imperative | |
| 3 | πε-παιδεύ-σθω | ||||
| D. | 2 | πε-παίδευ-σθον | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδεύ-σθων | ||||
| P. | 2 | πε-παίδευ-σθε | |||
| 3 | πε-παιδεύ-σθων | ||||
| Infin. | πε-παιδεῦ-σθαι | πεπαιδεύσε-σθαι |
| Partic. | πε-παιδευ-μένος, -η, -ον | πεπαιδεύσό-μενος, -η, -ον |
Note. – The infinitive and participle of the perfect middle are irregular in accent (§ 185).
| 245. First Passive System | 246. Second Passive System | ||||||
| παιδεύ-ω educate | φαίνω (φαν-) appear | ||||||
| 1st Aorist | 1st Future | 2d Aorist | |||||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | ἐ-παιδεύθη-ν | παιδευθήσο-μαι | ἐ-φάνη-ν | ||
| 2 | ἐ-παιδεύθη-ς | παιδευθήσῃ or -ει | ἐ-φάνη-ς | ||||
| 3 | ἐ-παιδεύθη | παιδευθήσε-ται | ἐ-φάνη | ||||
| D. | 2 | ἐ-παιδεύθη-τον | παιδευθήσε-σθον | ἐ-φάνη-τον | |||
| 3 | ἐ-παιδεύθή-την | παιδευθήσε-σθον | ἐ-φανή-την | ||||
| P. | 1 | ἐ-παιδεύθη-μεν | παιδευθησό-μεθα | ἐ-φάνη-μεν | |||
| 2 | ἐ-παιδεύθη-τε | παιδευθήσε-σθε | ἐ-φάνη-τε | ||||
| 3 | ἐ-παιδεύθη-σαν | παιδευθήσο-νται | ἐ-φάνη-σαν | ||||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | παιδευθῶ | No Subjunctive | φανῶ | ||
| 2 | παιδευθῇς | φανῇς | |||||
| 3 | παιδευθῇ | φανῇ | |||||
| D. | 2 | παιδευθῆ-τον | φανῆ-τον | ||||
| 3 | παιδευθῆ-τον | φανῆ-τον | |||||
| P. | 1 | παιδευθῶ-μεν | φανῶ-μεν | ||||
| 2 | παιδευθῆ-τε | φανῆ-τε | |||||
| 3 | παιδευθῶσι | φανῶςι | |||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | παιδευθείη-ν | παιδευθησοί-μην | φανείη-ν | ||
| 2 | παιδευθείη-ς | παιδευθήσοι-ο | φανείη-ς | ||||
| 3 | παιδευθείη | παιδευθήσοι-το | φανείη | ||||
| D. | 2 | παιδευθεῖ-τον [είητον] | παιδευθήσοι-σθον | φανεῖ-τον [είητον] | |||
| 3 | παιδευθεί-την [ειήτην] | παιδευθησοί-σθην | φανεί-την [ειήτην] | ||||
| P. | 1 | παιδευθεῖ-μεν [είημεν] | παιδευθησοί-μεθα | φανεῖ-μεν [είημεν] | |||
| 2 | παιδευθεῖ-τε [είητε] | παιδευθήσοι-σθε | φανεῖ-τε [είητε] | ||||
| 3 | παιδευθεῖε-ν [είησαν] | παιδευθήσοι-ντο | φανεῖ-ν [είησαν] | ||||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | παιδεύθη-τι | No Imperative | φάνη-θι | ||
| 3 | παιδευθή-τω | φανή-τω | |||||
| D. | 2 | παιδεύθη-τον | φάνη-τον | ||||
| 3 | παιδευθή-των | φανή-των | |||||
| P. | 2 | παιδεύθη-τε | φάνη-τε | ||||
| 3 | παιδεύθέ-ντων | φανέ-ντων | |||||
| Infin. | παιδευθῆ-ναι | παιδευθήσε-σθαι | φανῆ-ναι | ||||
| Partic. | παιδευθείς, -εῖσα, έν | παιδευθησό-μενος, -η, -ον | φανείς, -εῖσα, έν | ||||
1. The future passive of φαίνω (φανήσομαι) is inflected exactly like παιδευθήσοµαι.
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3. For the accent of the aorist subjunctive and optative see § 233, 1–2. The infinitive and participle of the aorist are irregular in accent (§ 185).
247. In the perfect and pluperfect middle of stems ending in a consonant various euphonic changes occur (§ 225).
| λείπω (λειπ-, § 14, 2) leave | ἄγω (ἀγ-) lead | πείθω (πειθ-, § 14, 2) persuade | φαίνω (φαν-) show | ||
| Perfect Indicative | |||||
| S. | 1 | λέ-λειμ-μαι | ἦγ-μαι | πέ-πεισ-μαι | πέ-φασ-μαι |
| 2 | λέ-λειψαι | ἦξαι | πέ-πεισαι | [πέ-φαν-σαι] | |
| 3 | λέ-λειπ-ται | ἦκ-ται | πέ-πεισ-ται | πέ-φαν-ται | |
| D. | 2 | λέ-λειφ-θον | ἦχ-θον | πέ-πεισθον | πέ-φαν-θον |
| 3 | λέ-λειφ-θον | ἦχ-θον | πέ-πεισθον | πέ-φαν-θον | |
| P. | 1 | λε-λείμ-μεθα | ἤγ-μεθα | πέ-πείσ-μεθα | πε-φάσ-μεθα |
| 2 | λέ-λείφ-θε | ἦχ-θε | πέ-πεισθε | πέ-φαν-θε | |
| 3 | λε-λειμ-μένοι εἰσί | ἠγ-μένοι εἰσί | πε-πεισ-μένοι εἰσί | πε-φασ-μένοι εἰσί | |
| Pluperfect Indicative | |||||
| S. | 1 | ἐ-λε-λείμ-μην | ἤγ-μην | ἐ-πε-πείσ-μην | ἐ-πε- φάσ-μην |
| 2 | ἐ-λέ-λειψο | ἦξο | ἐ-πέ-πεισο | [ἐ-πέ-φαν-σο] | |
| 3 | ἐ-λέ-λειπ-το | ἦκ-το | ἐ-πέ-πεισ-το | ἐ-πέ-φαν-το | |
| D. | 2 | ἐ-λέ-λειφ-θον | ἦχ-θον | ἐ-πέ-πεισ-θον | ἐ-πέ-φαν-θον |
| 3 | ἐ-λε-λείφ-θην | ἤχ-θην | ἐ-πε-πείσθην | ἐ-πε-φάν-θην | |
| P. | 1 | ἐ-λε-λείμ-μεθα | ἤγ-μεθα | ἐ-πε-πείσ-μεθα | ἐ-πε-φάσ-μεθα |
| 2 | ἐ-λέ-λειφ-θε | ἦχ-θε | ἐ-πέ-πεισθε | ἐ-πέ-φαν-θε | |
| 3 | λε-λειμ-μένοι ἦσαν | ἠγ-μένοι ἦσαν | ἐ-πε-πείσ-μένοι ἦσαν | πε-φασ-μένοι ἦσαν | |
| Perfect Subjunctive and Optative | |||||
| λε-λειμ-μένος ὦ | ἠγ-μένος ὦ | πε-πεισ-μένος ὦ | πε-φασ-μένος ὦ | ||
| λε-λειμ-μένος εἴην | ἠγ-μένος εἴην | πε-πεισ-μένος εἴην | πε-φασ-μένος εἴην | ||
| Perfect Imperative | |||||
| S. | 2 | λέ-λειψο | ἦξο | πέ-πεισο | [πέ-φαν-σο] |
| 3 | λέ-λείφ-θω | ἤχ-θω | πε-πείσθω | πε-φάν-θω | |
| D. | 2 | λέ-λειφ-θον | ἦχ-θον | πέ-πεισθον | πέ-φαν-θον |
| 3 | λέ-λείφ-θων | ἤχ-θων | πε-πείσθων | πε-φάν-θων | |
| P. | 2 | λέ-λειφ-θε | ἦχ-θε | πέ-πεισθε | πέ-φαν-θε |
| 3 | λέ-λείφ-θων | ἤχ-θων | πε-πείσθων | πε-φάν-θων | |
| Perfect Infinitive and Participle | |||||
| λε-λεῖφ-θαι | ἦχ-θαι | πε-πείσθαι | πε-φάν-θαι | ||
| λε-λειμ-μένος | ἠγ-μένος | πέ-πεισ-μένος | πε-φας-μένος | ||
1. Like λέ-λειμμαι are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending in a labial mute. But stems in –μπ– lose the π before all endings beginning with μ: thus, πέπεμμαι (for *πε-πεμπ-μαι), πέ-πεμπψαι, etc., from πέμπω (πεμπ-) send.
2. Like ἦγμαι are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending in a palatal mute. But stems in –γγ– or –γχ lose a final mute before all endings beginning with μ: thus, ἐλήλεγ-μαι (for *ἐληλεγχ-μαι from ἐλέγχω (ἐλεγχ-) convict (§ 179).
3. Like πέπεισμαι are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending in σ– or α– lingual mute.
| 248. Present System of Contract Verbs in –αω | ||||||
| τῑμῶ (τῑμά-ω), honor | ||||||
| Active | Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | τῑμῶ (-άω) | έτῑ́μω-ν (-αον) | τῑμῶ-μαι (-άο-) | ἐτῑμώ-μην (-αό) |
| 2 | τῑμᾷς (-άεις) | έτῑ́μᾱ-ς (-αες) | τῑμᾷ (-άῃ or -άει) | ἐτῑμῶ (-άου) | ||
| 3 | τῑμᾷ (-άει) | έτῑ́μᾱ (-αε) | τῑμᾷ-ται (-άε-) | ἐτῑμᾷ-το (-άε-) | ||
| D. | 2 | τῑμᾶ-τον (-άε-) | έτῑμᾶ-τον (-άε-) | τῑμᾶ-σθον (-άε-) | έτῑμᾶ-σθον (-άε-) | |
| 3 | τῑμᾶ-τον (-άε-) | έτῑμᾱ́-την (-αέ-) | τῑμᾶ-σθον (-άε-) | έτῑμᾱ́-σθην (-άε-) | ||
| P. | 1 | τῑμῶ-μεν (-άο-) | έτῑμῶ-μεν (-άο-) | τῑμώ-μεθα (-αό-) | έτῑμώ-μεθα (-αό-) | |
| 2 | τῑμᾶ-τε (-άε-) | έτῑμᾶ-τε (-άε-) | τῑμᾶ-σθε (-άε-) | έτῑμᾶ- σθε (-άε-) | ||
| 3 | τῑμῶσι (-άου-) | έτῑ́μων (-αον-) | τῑμῶ-νται (-άο-) | έτῑμῶ-ντο (-άο-) | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | τῑμῶ (-άω) | τῑμῶ-μαι (-άωμαι) | ||
| 2 | τῑμᾷς (-άῃς) | τῑμᾷ (-άῃ) | ||||
| 3 | τῑμᾷ (-άῃ) | τῑμᾶ-ται (-άηται) | ||||
| D. | 2 | τῑμᾶ-τον (-άητον) | τῑμᾶ-σθον (-άησθον) | |||
| 3 | τῑμᾶ-τον (-άητον) | τῑμᾶ-σθον (-άησθον) | ||||
| P. | 1 | τῑμῶ-μεν (-άωμεν) | τῑμώ-μεθα (-αώμεθα) | |||
| 2 | τῑμᾶ-τε (-άητε) | τῑμᾶ-σθε (-άησθε) | ||||
| 3 | τῑμῶσι (-άωσι) | τῑμῶ-νται (-άωνται) | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | τῑμῴη-ν (-αοί) | [τῑμῷ-μι (-άοι-)] | τῑμῴ-μην (-αοίμην) | |
| 2 | τῑμῴη-ς (-αοί) | [τῑμῷς (-άοις-)] | τῑμῴ-ο (-άοιο) | |||
| 3 | τῑμῴη (-αοί) | [τῑμῷ (-άοι-)] | τῑμῴ-το (-άοιτο) | |||
| D. | 2 | τῑμῴ-τον (-άοιτον) | τῑμῴ-σθον (-άοισθον) | |||
| 3 | τῑμῴ-την (-αοίτην) | τῑμῴ-σθην (-αοίσθην) | ||||
| P. | 1 | τῑμῴ-μεν (-άοιμεν) | τῑμῴ-μεθα (-αοίμεθα) | |||
| 2 | τῑμῴ-τε (-άοιτε) | τῑμῴ-σθε (-άοισθε) | ||||
| 3 | τῑμῴε-ν (-άοιεν) | τῑμῴ-ντο (-άοιντο) | ||||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | τῑ́μα (-αε) | τῑμῶ (-άου) | ||
| 3 | τῑμᾱ́-τω (-αέτω) | τῑμᾱ́-σθω (-αέσθω) | ||||
| D. | 2 | τῑμᾶ-τον (-άετον) | τῑμᾶ-σθον (-άεσθον) | |||
| 3 | τῑμᾱ́-των (-αέτων) | τῑμᾱ́-σθων (-αέσθων) | ||||
| P. | 2 | τῑμᾶ-τε (-άετε) | τῑμᾶ-σθε (-άεσθε) | |||
| 3 | τῑμώ-ντων (-αόντων) | τῑμᾱ́-σθων (-αέσθων) | ||||
| Infin. | τῑμᾶν (-άειν) | τῑμᾶ (-άεσθαι) | ||||
| Partic. | τῑμῶν (-άων), –ῶσα, -ῶν | τῑμώ-μενος (-αό), -η, -ον | ||||
| 249. Present System of Contract Verbs in -εω | ||||||
| φιλῶ (φιλέ-ω), love | ||||||
| Active | Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | φιλῶ (-έω) | ἐφίλου-ν (-εον) | φιλοῦ-μαι (-έο-) | ἐφίλού-μην (-εό-) |
| 2 | φιλεῖς (-έεις) | ἐφίλει-ς (-εες) | φιλεῖ (-έῃ or έει) | ἐφίλού (-έου) | ||
| 3 | φιλεῖ (-έει) | ἐφίλει (-εε) | φιλεῖ-ται (-έε-) | ἐφιλεῖ -το (-έε-) | ||
| D. | 2 | φιλεῖ-τον (-έε-) | ἐφιλεῖ-τον (-έε-) | φιλεῖ-σθον (-έε-) | ἐφιλεῖ – σθον (-έε-) | |
| 3 | φιλεῖ-τον (-έε-) | ἐφιλεί-την (-εέ-) | φιλεῖ-σθον (-έε-) | ἐφιλεί-σθην (-εέ-) | ||
| P. | 1 | φιλοῦ-μεν (-έο-) | ἐφιλοῦ-μεν (-έο-) | φιλού-μεθα (-έο-) | ἐφιλού-μεθα (-εό-) | |
| 2 | φιλεῖ-τε (-έε-) | ἐφιλεῖ-τε (-έε-) | φιλεῖ-σθε (-έε-) | ἐφιλεῖ-σθε (-έε-) | ||
| 3 | φιλοῦσι (-έου-) | ἐφίλουν (-εον-) | φιλοῦ-νται (-έο-) | ἐφιλοῦ-ντο (-έο-) | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | φιλῶ (-έω) | φιλῶ-μαι (-έωμαι) | ||
| 2 | φιλῇς (-έῃς) | φιλῇ (-έῃ) | ||||
| 3 | φιλῇ (-έῃ) | φιλῇ-ται (-έηται) | ||||
| D. | 2 | φιλῆ-τον (-έηται) | φιλῆ-σθον (-έησθον) | |||
| 3 | φιλῆ-τον (-έηται) | φιλῆ-σθον (-έησθον) | ||||
| P. | 1 | φιλῶ-μεν (-έωμεν) | φιλώ-μετα (-εώμεθα) | |||
| 2 | φιλῆ-τε (-έητε) | φιλῆ-σθε (-έησθε) | ||||
| 3 | φιλῶσι (-έωσι) | φιλώ-νται (-εώνται) | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | φιλοίη-ν (-εοί-) | [φιλοῖ-μι (-έοι-)] | φιλοί-μην (-εοίμην) | |
| 2 | φιλοίη-ς (-εοί-) | [φιλοῖ-ς (-έοις-)] | φιλοῖ-ο (-έοιο) | |||
| 3 | φιλοίη-ν (-εοί-) | [φιλοῖ (-έοι-)] | φιλοῖ-το (-έοιτο) | |||
| D. | 2 | φιλοῖ-τον (-έοιτον) | φιλοῖ-σθον (-έοισθον) | |||
| 3 | φιλοί-την (-εοίτην) | φιλοί-σθην (-εοίσθην) | ||||
| P. | 1 | φιλοῖ-μεν (-έοιμεν) | φιλοί-μεθα (-εοίμεθα) | |||
| 2 | φιλοῖ-τε (-έοιτε) | φιλοῖ-σθε (-έοισθε) | ||||
| 3 | φιλοῖε-ν (-έοιεν) | φιλοῖ-ντο (-έοιντο) | ||||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | φίλει (-εε) | φιλοῦ (-έου) | ||
| 3 | φιλεῖ-τω (-εέτω) | φιλεῖ-σθω (-εέσθω) | ||||
| D. | 2 | φιλεῖ-τον (-εέτον) | φιλεῖ-σθον (-έεσθον) | |||
| 3 | φιλεί-των (-εέτων) | φιλεί-σθων (-εέσθων) | ||||
| P. | 2 | φιλεῖ-τε (-έετε) | φιλεῖ-σθε (-έεσθε) | |||
| 3 | φιλού-ντων (-εόντων) | φιλεί-σθων (-εέσθων) | ||||
| Infin. | φιλεῖν (-έειν) | φιλεῖ-σθαι (-έεσθαι) | ||||
| Partic. | φιλῶν (-έων), -οῦσα, – οῦν | φιλού-μενος (-εό-), -η, -ον | ||||
| 250. Present System of Contract Verbs in –οω | ||||||
| δηλῶ (δηλό-ω), manifest | ||||||
| Active | Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | δηλῶ (-όω) | ἐδήλου-ν (-οον) | δηλοῦ-μαι (-όο-) | ἐδηλού-μην (-οό-) |
| 2 | δηλοῖς (-όεις) | ἐδηλου-ς (-οες) | δηλοῖ (-όῃ or όει) | ἐδηλοῦ (-όου) | ||
| 3 | δηλοῖ (-όει) | ἐδηλου (-οε) | δηλοῦ-ται (-όε-) | ἐδηλοῦ-το (-όε) | ||
| D. | 2 | δηλοῦ-τον (-όε) | ἐδηλοῦ-τον (-όε) | δηλοῦ-σθον (-όε-) | ἐδηλοῦ- σθον (-όε) | |
| 3 | δηλοῦ-τον (-όε) | ἐδηλού-την (-όε) | δηλοῦ-σθον (-όε-) | ἐδηλού-σθην (-οέ) | ||
| P. | 1 | δηλοῦ-μεν (-όο) | ἐδηλοῦ-μεν (-όο) | δηλού-μεθα (-οό) | ἐδηλού-μεθα (-οό) | |
| 2 | δηλοῦ-τε (-όε) | ἐδηλοῦ-τε (-όε) | δηλοῦ-σθε (-όε) | ἐδηλοῦ-σθε (-όε) | ||
| 3 | δηλοῦσι-τε (-όου-) | ἐδηλουν (-οον) | δηλοῦ-νται (-όο) | ἐδηλοῦ-ντο (-όο) | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | δηλῶ (-όω) | δηλῶ-μαι (-όωμαι) | ||
| 2 | δηλοῖς (-όῃς) | δηλοῖ (-όῃ) | ||||
| 3 | δηλοῖ (-όῃ) | δηλῶ-ται (-όηται) | ||||
| D. | 2 | δηλῶ-τον (-όητον) | δηλῶ-σθον (-όησθον) | |||
| 3 | δηλῶ-τον (-όητον) | δηλῶ-σθον (-όησθον) | ||||
| P. | 1 | δηλῶ-μεν (-όωμεν) | δηλώ-μεθα (-όωμεθα) | |||
| 2 | δηλῶ-τε (-όητε) | δηλῶ-σθε (-όησθε) | ||||
| 3 | δηλῶσι (-όωσι) | δηλῶ-νται (-όωνται) | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | δηλοίη-ν (-οοί-) | [δηλοῖ-μι (-όοι-)] | δηλοί-μην (-οοίμην) | |
| 2 | δηλοίη-ς (-οοί-) | [δηλοῖ-ς (-όοις)] | δηλοῖ-ο (-όοιο) | |||
| 3 | δηλοίη (-οοί-) | [δηλοῖ (-όοι)] | δηλοῖ-το (-όοιτο) | |||
| D. | 2 | δηλοῖ-τον (-οοίτον) | δηλοῖ-σθον (-όοισθον) | |||
| 3 | δηλοί-την (-οοίτην) | δηλοί-σθην (-οοίσθην) | ||||
| P. | 1 | δηλοῖ-μεν (-οοίμεν) | δηλοῖ-μεθα (-όοιμεθα) | |||
| 2 | δηλοῖ-τε (-οοίτε) | δηλοῖ-μεθα (-όοιμεθα) | ||||
| 3 | δηλοῖε-ν (-οοίεν) | δηλοῖ-ντο (-όοιντο) | ||||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | δήλου (-οε) | δηλοῦ (-όου) | ||
| 3 | δηλού-τω (-οέτω) | δηλού-σθω (-οέσθω) | ||||
| D. | 2 | δηλοῦ-τον (-όετον) | δηλοῦ-σθον (-όεσθον) | |||
| 3 | δηλού-των (-οέτων) | δηλού-σθων (-οέσθων) | ||||
| P. | 2 | δηλοῦ-τε (-όετε) | δηλοῦ-σθε (-όεσθε) | |||
| 3 | δηλού-ντων (-οόντων) | δηλού-σθων (-οέσθων) | ||||
| Infin. | δηλοῦ (-όειν) | δηλοῦ-σθαι (-όεσθαι) | ||||
| Partic. | δηλῶν (-όων), -οῦσα, – οῦν | δηλού-μενος (-οό-), -η, –ον | ||||
VI · Paradigms of – μι Verbs
| 251. Present System | ||||||
| τίθημι (θε-, θη-), put | ||||||
| Active | Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | τί-θη-μι | ἐ-τί-θη-ν | τί-θε-μαι | ἐ-τι-θέ-μην |
| 2 | τί-θη-ς, τιθεῖς | ἐ-τί-θεις | τί-θε-σαι | ἐ-τί-θε-σο | ||
| 3 | τί-θη-σι | ἐ-τί-θει | τί-θε-ται | ἐ-τί-θε-το | ||
| D. | 2 | τί-θε-τον | ἐ-τί-θε-τον | τί-θε-σθον | ἐ-τί-θε-σθον | |
| 3 | τί-θε-τον | ἐ-τι-θἐ-την | τί-θε-σθον | ἐ-τί-θέ-σθην | ||
| P. | 1 | τί-θε-μεν | ἐ-τί-θε-μεν | τι-θέ-μεθα | ἐ-τι-θέ-μεθα | |
| 2 | τί-θε-τε | ἐ-τί-θε-τε | τί-θε-σθε | ἐ-τί-θε-σθε | ||
| 3 | τι-θέ-ᾱσι | ἐ-τί-θε-σαν | τί-θε-νται | ἐ-τί-θε-ντο | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | τι-θῶ | τι-θῶ-μαι | ||
| 2 | τι-θῇ-ς | τι-θῇ | ||||
| 3 | τι-θῇ | τι-θῆ-ται | ||||
| D. | 2 | τι-θῆ-τον | τι-θῆ-σθον | |||
| 3 | τι-θῆ-τον | τι-θῆ-σθον | ||||
| P. | 1 | τι-θῶ-μεν | τι-θώ-μεθα | |||
| 2 | τι-θῆ-τε | τι-θῆ-σθε | ||||
| 3 | τι-θῶ-σι | τι-θῶ-νται | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | τι-θείη-ν | τι-θεί-μην or τι-θoί-μην | ||
| 2 | τι-θείη-ς | τι-θεῖ-ο | τι-θοῖ-ο | |||
| 3 | τι-θείη | τι-θεῖ-το | τι-θοῖ-το | |||
| D. | 2 | τι-θεῖ-τον [τι-θείη-τοη] | τι-θεῖ-σθον | τι-θοῖ-σθον | ||
| 3 | τι-θεί-την [τι-θειή-την] | τι-θεί-σθην | τι-θοί-σθην | |||
| P. | 1 | τι-θεῖ-μεν [τι-θείη-μεν] | τι-θεί-μεθα | τι-θοί- μεθα | ||
| 2 | τι-θεῖ-τε [τι-θείη-τε] | τι-θεῖ-σθε | τι-θοῖ-σθε | |||
| 3 | τι-θεῖε-ν [τι-θείη-σαν] | τι-θεῖ-ντο | τι-θοῖ-ντο | |||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | τί-θει | τί-θε-σο | ||
| 3 | τι-θέ-τω | τι-θέ-σθω | ||||
| D. | 2 | τί-θε-τον | τί-θε-σθον | |||
| 3 | τι-θέ-των | τι-θέ-σθων | ||||
| P. | 2 | τί-θε-τε | τί-θε-σθε | |||
| 3 | τι-θέ-ντων | τι-θέ-σθων | ||||
| Infin. | τι-θέ-ναι | τι-θέ-σθαι | ||||
| Partic. | τι-θείς, -εῖσα, – έν | τι-θέ-μενος, -η, –ον | ||||
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3. For the contraction in the ubjunctive and optative see § 200, 1. For the third person plural of the present indicative active see § 167, note 3. The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185). For τιθεῖς, ἐτίθεις, ἐτίθει, τίθει, and the optative τιθοίµην, see § 170, 4.
| 252. Present System | ||||||
| δίδωμι (δο-, δω-) give | ||||||
| Active | Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | δί-δω-μι | ἐ-δί-δουν | δί-δο-μαι | ἐ-δι-δό-μην |
| 2 | δί-δω-ς | ἐ-δί-δους | δί-δο-σαι | ἐ-δί-δο-σο | ||
| 3 | δί-δω-σι | ἐ-δί-δου | δί-δο-ται | ἐ-δί-δο-το | ||
| D. | 2 | δί-δο-τον | ἐ-δί-δο-τον | δί-δο-σθον | ἐ-δί-δο-σθον | |
| 3 | δί-δο-τον | ἐ-δι-δό-την | δί-δο-σθον | ἐ-δι-δό-σθην | ||
| P. | 1 | δί-δο-μεν | ἐ-δί-δο-μεν | δι-δό-μεθα | ἐ-δι-δό-μεθα | |
| 2 | δί-δο-τε | ἐ-δί-δο-τε | δί-δο-σθε | ἐ-δί-δο-σθε | ||
| 3 | δι-δό-ᾱσι | ἐ-δί-δο-σαν | δί-δο-νται | ἐ-δί-δο-ντο | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | δι-δῶ | δι-δῶ-μαι | ||
| 2 | δι-δῷ-ς | δι-δῷ | ||||
| 3 | δι-δῷ | δι-δῶ-ται | ||||
| D. | 2 | δι-δῶ-τον | δι-δῶ-σθον | |||
| 3 | δι-δῶ-τον | δι-δῶ-σθον | ||||
| P. | 1 | δι-δῶ-μεν | δι-δώ-μεθα | |||
| 2 | δι-δῶ-τε | δι-δῶ-σθε | ||||
| 3 | δι-δῶ-σι | δι-δῶ-νται | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | δι-δοίη-ν | δι-δοί-μην | ||
| 2 | δι-δοίη-ς | δι-δοῖ-ο | ||||
| 3 | δι-δοίη | δι-δοῖ-το | ||||
| D. | 2 | δι-δοῖ-τον [δι-δοίη-τον] | δι-δοῖ-σθον | |||
| 3 | δι-δοί-την [δι-δοιή-την] | δι-δοί-σθην | ||||
| P. | 1 | δι-δοῖ-μεν [δι-δοίη-μεν] | δι-δοί-μεθα | |||
| 2 | δι-δοῖ-τε [δι-δοίη-τε] | δι-δοῖ-σθε | ||||
| 3 | δι-δοῖε-ν [δι-δοίη-σαν] | δι-δοῖ-ντο | ||||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | δί-δου | δί-δο-σο | ||
| 3 | δι-δό-τω | δι-δό-σθω | ||||
| D. | 2 | δί-δο-τον | δί-δο-σθον | |||
| 3 | δι-δό-των | δι-δό-σθων | ||||
| P. | 2 | δί-δο-τε | δί-δο-σθε | |||
| 3 | δι-δό-ντων | δι-δό-σθων | ||||
| Infin. | δι-δό-ναι | δι-δό-σθαι | ||||
| Partic. | δι-δούς, -οῦσα, – όν | δι-δό-μενος, -η, –ον | ||||
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3. For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see § 200, 1. For the third person plural of the present indicative active see § 167, note 3. The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185). For ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδους, ἐδίδου, and δίδου, see § 170, 4.
| 253. Present System | ||||||
| ἴστημι (στα-, στη-) set | ||||||
| Active | Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | ἴ-στη-μι | ἴ-στη-ν | ἴ-στα-μαι | ἴ-στά-μην |
| 2 | ἴ-στη-ς | ἴ-στη-ς | ἴ-στα-σαι | ἴ-στα-σο | ||
| 3 | ἴ-στη-σι | ἴ-στη | ἴ-στα-ται | ἴ-στα-το | ||
| D. | 2 | ἴ-στα-τον | ἴ-στα-τον | ἴ-στα-σθον | ἴ-στα-σθον | |
| 3 | ἴ-στα-τον | ἴ-στά-την | ἴ-στα-σθον | ἴ-στά-σθην | ||
| P. | 1 | ἴ-στα-μεν | ἴ-στα-μεν | ἴ-στά-μεθα | ἴ-στά-μεθα | |
| 2 | ἴ-στα-τε | ἴ-στα-τε | ἴ-στα-σθε | ἴ-στα-σθε | ||
| 3 | ἱ-στᾶσι | ἴ-στα-σαν | ἴ-στα-νται | ἴ-στα-ντο | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | ἱ-στῶ | ἱ-στῶ-μαι | ||
| 2 | ἱ-στῇ-ς | ἱ-στῇ | ||||
| 3 | ἱ-στῇ | ἱ-στῇ-ται | ||||
| D. | 2 | ἱ-στῇ-τον | ἱ-στῇ-σθον | |||
| 3 | ἱ-στῇ-τον | ἱ-στῇ-σθον | ||||
| P. | 1 | ἱ-στῶ-μεν | ἱ-στώ-μεθα | |||
| 2 | ἱ-στῇ-τε | ἱ-στῇ-σθε | ||||
| 3 | ἱ-στῶ-σι | ἱ-στῶ-νται | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | ἱ-σταίη-ν | ἱ-σταί-μην | ||
| 2 | ἱ-σταίη-ς | ἱ-σταῖ-ο | ||||
| 3 | ἱ-σταίη | ἱ-σταῖ-το | ||||
| D. | 2 | ἱ-σταῖ-τον [ἱ-σταίη-τον] | ἱ-σταῖ-σθον | |||
| 3 | ἱ-σταί-την [ἱ-σταιή-την] | ἱ-σταί-σθην | ||||
| P. | 1 | ἱ-σταῖ-μεν [ἱ-σταίη-μεν] | ἱ-σταί-μεθα | |||
| 2 | ἱ-σταῖ-τε [ἱ-σταίη-τε] | ἱ-σταῖ-σθε | ||||
| 3 | ἱ-σταῖε-ν [ἱ-σταίη-σαν] | ἱ-σταῖ-ντο | ||||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | ἴ-στη | ἴ-στα-σο | ||
| 3 | ἱ-στά-τω | ἱ-στά-σθω | ||||
| D. | 2 | ἱ-στα-τον | ἱ-στα-σθον | |||
| 3 | ἱ-στά-των | ἱ-στά-σθων | ||||
| P. | 2 | ἴ-στα-τε | ἴ-στα-σθε | |||
| 3 | ἱ-στά-ντων | ἱ-στά-σθων | ||||
| Infin. | ἱ-στά-ναι | ἴ-στα-σθαι | ||||
| Partic. | ἴ-στᾱ́ς, -ᾶσα, – άν | ἴ-στα-μενος, -η, –ον | ||||
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3. For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see § 200, 1. For the third person plural of the present indicative active see § 167, note 3.
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185).
| 254. Present System | ||||||
| δείκνῡμι (δεικ-, δεικνυ- §196, 5) show | ||||||
| Active | Middle (Passive) | |||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | δείκνῡ-μι | ἐ-δείκνῡ-ν | δείκνυ-μαι | ἐ-δεικνύ-μην |
| 2 | δείκνῡ-ς | ἐ-δείκνῡ-ς | δείκνυ-σαι | ἐ-δεικνυ-σο | ||
| 3 | δείκνῡ-σι | ἐ-δείκνῡ | δείκνυ-ται | ἐ-δεικνυ-το | ||
| D. | 2 | δείκνυ-τον | ἐ-δείκνυ-τον | δείκνυ-σθον | ἐ-δεικνυ-σθον | |
| 3 | δείκνυ-τον | ἐ-δεικνύ-την | δείκνυ-σθον | ἐ-δεικνύ-σθην | ||
| P. | 1 | δείκνυ-μεν | ἐ-δείκνυ-μεν | δεικνύ-μεθα | ἐ-δεικνύ-μεθα | |
| 2 | δείκνυ-τε | ἐ-δείκνυ-τε | δείκνυ-σθε | ἐ-δείκνυ-σθε | ||
| 3 | δεικνύ-ᾶσι | ἐ-δείκνυ-σαν | δείκνυ-νται | ἐ-δείκνυ-ντο | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | δεικνύω | δεικνύωμαι | ||
| 2 | δεικνύῇς | δεικνύῇ | ||||
| 3 | δεικνύῇ etc., from δεικνύω show, inflected like παιδεύω, § 237 | δεικνύηται etc., from δεικνύω show, inflected like παιδεύω, § 237 | ||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | δεικνύοιμι | δεικνυοίμην | ||
| 2 | δεικνύοις | δεικνύοιο | ||||
| 3 | δεικνύοι etc., from δεικνύω show, inflected like παιδεύω, § 237 | δεικνύοιτο etc., from δεικνύω show, inflected like παιδεύω, § 237 | ||||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | δείκνῡ | δείκνυ-σο | ||
| 3 | δεικνύ-τω | δεικνύ-σθω | ||||
| D. | 2 | δείκνυ-τον | δείκνυ-σθον | |||
| 3 | δεικνύ-των | δεικνύ-σθων | ||||
| P. | 2 | δείκνυ-τε | δείκνυ-σθε | |||
| 3 | δεικνύ-ντων | δεικνύ-σθων | ||||
| Infin. | δεικνύ-ναι | δείκνυ-σθαι | ||||
| Partic. | δεικνῡ́ς, -ῦσα, – ύν | δεικνύ-μενος, -η, –ον | ||||
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3. For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see § 200, 1. For the third person plural of the present indicative active see § 167, note 3.
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185).
| 255. | Second Aorist System | 256. | ||||||||
| τίθημι (θε-, θη-) put | δίδωμι give | |||||||||
| Active | Middle | Active | Middle | |||||||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | (ἔθηκα) | ἐ-θέ-μην | (ἔδωκα) | ἐ-δό-μην | ||||
| 2 | (ἔθηκας) | ἔ-θου | (ἔδωκας) | ἔ-δου | ||||||
| 3 | (ἔθηκε) | ἔ-θε-το | (ἔδωκε) | ἔ-δο-το | ||||||
| D. | 2 | ἔ-θε-τον | ἔ-θε-σθον | ἔ-θε-τον | ἔ-θε-σθον | |||||
| 3 | ἐ-θέ-την | ἐ-θέ-σθην | ἐ-δό- την | ἐ-δό-σθην | ||||||
| P. | 1 | ἔ-θε-μεν | ἐ-θέ-μεθα | ἔ-θε-μεν | ἐ-δό-μεθα | |||||
| 2 | ἔ-θε-τε | ἔ-θε-σθε | ἔ-δο- τε | ἔ-δο-σθε | ||||||
| 3 | ἔ-θε-σαν | ἔ-θε-ντο | ἔ-δο-σαν | ἔ-δο-ντο | ||||||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | θῶ | θῶ-μαι | δῶ | δῶ-μαι | ||||
| 2 | θῇ-ς | θῇ | δῷ-ς | δῷ | ||||||
| 3 | θῇ | θῆ-ται | δῷ | δῶ-ται | ||||||
| D. | 2 | θῆ-τον | θῆ-σθον | δῶ-τον | δῶ-σθον | |||||
| 3 | θῆ-τον | θῆ-σθον | δῶ-τον | δῶ-σθον | ||||||
| P. | 1 | θῶ-μεν | θώ-μεθα | δῶ-μεν | δώ-μεθα | |||||
| 2 | θῆ-τε | θῆ-σθε | δῶ-τε | δῶ-σθε | ||||||
| 3 | θῶ-σι | θῶ-νται | δῶ-σι | δῶ-νται | ||||||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | θείη-ν | θεί-μην | δοίη-ν | δοί-μην | ||||
| 2 | θείη-ς | θεῖ-ο | δοίη-ς | δοῖ-ο | ||||||
| 3 | θείη | θεῖ-το, θοῖτο | δοίη | δοῖ-το | ||||||
| D. | 2 | θεῖ-τον [θείη-τον] | θεῖ-σθον | δοῖ-τον [δοίη-τον] | δοῖ-σθον | |||||
| 3 | θεί-την [θειή-την] | θεί-σθην | δοί-την [δοιή-την] | δοί-σθην | ||||||
| P. | 1 | θεῖ-μεν [θείη-μεν] | θεί-μεθα, θοίμετα | δοῖ-μεν [δοίη-μεν] | δοί- μεθα | |||||
| 2 | θεῖ-τε [θείη-τε] | θεῖ-σθε, θοῖσθε | δοῖ-τε [δοίη-τε] | δοῖ-σθε | ||||||
| 3 | θεῖε-ν [θείη-σαν] | θεῖ-ντο, θοῖντο | δοῖε-ν [δοίη-σαν] | δοῖ- ντο | ||||||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | θέ-ς | θοῦ | δό-ς | δοῦ | ||||
| 3 | θέ-τω | θέ-σθω | δό–τω | δό-σθω | ||||||
| D. | 2 | θέ-τον | θέ-σθον | δό–τον | δό-σθον | |||||
| 3 | θέ-των | θέ-σθων | δό–των | δό-σθων | ||||||
| P. | 2 | θέ-τε | θέ-σθε | δό–τε | δό-σθε | |||||
| 3 | θέ-ντων | θέ-σθων | δό–ντων | δό-σθων | ||||||
| Infin. | θεῖ-ναι | θέ-σθαι | δοῦ-ναι | δό-σθαι | ||||||
| Partic. | θείς, θεῖσα, θέ-ν | θέ-μενος, -η, –ον | δούς, δοῦσα,δό-ν | δό-μενος, -η, –ον | ||||||
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3. For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see § 211, 1–2. For the singular of the indicative active see §§ 205 and 211, 3.
| 257. Second Aorist System | |||||
| ἴςτημι (στα-, στη-) set | δῡ́-ω enter | ἐπριάμην bought | |||
| Active | Active | Middle | |||
| Indic. | S. | 1 | ἔ-στη-ν stood | ἔ-δῡ-ν | ἐπριά-μην |
| 2 | ἔ-στη-ς | ἔ-δῡ-ς | ἐπρίω | ||
| 3 | ἔ-στη-στη | ἔ-δῡ | ἐπριά-το | ||
| D. | 2 | ἔ-στη-τον | ἔ-δῡ-τον | ἐπριά-σθον | |
| 3 | ἔ-στή-την | ἔ-δῡ́-την | ἐπριά-θτην | ||
| P. | 1 | ἔ-στη-μεν | ἔ-δῡ-μεν | ἐπριά-μεθα | |
| 2 | ἔ-στη-τε | ἔ-δῡ-τε | ἐπριά-σθε | ||
| 3 | ἔ-στη-σαν | ἔ-δῡ-σαν | ἐπριά-ντο | ||
| Subj. | S. | 1 | στῶ | δύω | πρίω-μαι |
| 2 | στῇ-ς | δύῃς | πρίῃ | ||
| 3 | στῇ | δύῃ | πρίη-ται | ||
| D. | 2 | στῆ-τον | δύντον | πρίη-σθον | |
| 3 | στῆ-τον | δύντον | πρίη-σθον | ||
| P. | 1 | στῶ-μεν | δύωμεν | πριώ-μετα | |
| 2 | στῆ-τε | δύντε | πρίη-σθε | ||
| 3 | στῶ-σι | δύωσι | πριώ-νται | ||
| Opt. | S. | 1 | σταίη-ν | πριαί-μην | |
| 2 | σταίη-ς | πρίαι-ο | |||
| 3 | σταίη | πρίαι-το | |||
| D. | 2 | σταῖ-τον [σταίη-τον] | No optative is faund in Attic. Cf. § 211, 2a | πρίαι-σθον | |
| 3 | σταί-την [σταιή-την] | πριαί-σθην | |||
| P. | 1 | σταῖ-μεν [σταίη-μεν] | πριαί-μετα | ||
| 2 | σταῖ-τε [σταίη-τε] | πρίαι-σθε | |||
| 3 | σταῖ-ν [σταίη-σαν] | πρίαι-ντο | |||
| Impv. | S. | 2 | στῆ-θι | δῦ-θι | πρίω |
| 3 | στή-τω | δῡ́-τω | πριά-σθω | ||
| D. | 2 | στῆ-τον | δῦ-τον | πρία-σθον | |
| 3 | στή-των | δῡ́-των | πριά-σθων | ||
| P. | 2 | στῆ-τε | δῦ-τε | πρία-σθε | |
| 3 | στά-ντων | δύ-ντων | πριά-σθων | ||
| Infin. | στῆ-ναι | δῦ-ναι | πρία-σθαι | ||
| Partic. | στᾱ́ς, στᾶσα, στά-ν | δῡ́ς, δῦσα, δύ-ν | πριά-μενος | ||
Note. – For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1–3. For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see § 211, 1–2. The sabjunctive and optative of are accented as if uncontracted (§ 211, 2, note).
258. Second Perfect System without Suffix
| Second Perfect System without Suffix (§ 220) | ||||||
| ἴστημι (στα-, στη-) set | ||||||
| Second Perfect Active | Second Pluperfect Active | |||||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Indicative | ||||
| S. | 1 | (ἔστηκα) stand | ἑστῶ, etc. | (εἱστήκη) | ||
| 2 | (ἔστηκας) | (like στῶ, § 257) | (εἱστήκης) | |||
| 3 | (ἔστηκε) | Optative | (εἱστήκηει) | |||
| D. | 2 | ἔ-στα-τον | ἑ-σταίη-ν, etc. | ἔ-στα-τον | ||
| 3 | ἔ-στα-τον | (like σταίην, § 257) | ἑ-στά-την | |||
| Imperative | ||||||
| P. | 1 | ἔ-στα-μεν | S. | 1 | ἔ-στα-θι | ἔ-στα-μεν |
| 2 | ἔ-στα-τε | 2 | ἑ-στά-τω, etc. | ἔ-στα-τε | ||
| 3 | ἔ-στᾶσι | ἔ-στα-σαν | ||||
| Infinitive | Participle | |||||
| ἑ-στά-ναι | ἑ-στώς, ἑ-στώσα, ἑ-στός, (§ 131, note) | |||||
25981. Οἶδα (for *ϝοιδα (§ 2 a), stem οἰδ-, εἰδ-, ἰδ-, § 14, 2), a perfect with present meaning, is formed without reduplication. Its inflection (somewhat irregular) is as follows:
| Second Perfect | Second Pluperfect | ||||||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Optative | Imperative | Indicative | |||
| S. | 1 | οἶδα | εἰδῶ | εἰδείην | ᾔδη [ᾔδειν] | ||
| 2 | οἶσθα | εἰδῇς | εἰδείης | ἴσθι | ᾔδησθα | ||
| 3 | οἶδε | εἰδῇ | εἰδείη | ἴστω | ᾔδει(ν) | ||
| D. | 2 | ἴστον | εἰδῆτον | εἰδεῖτον | ἴστον | ᾖστον | |
| 3 | ἴστον | εἰδῆτον | εἰδεῖτην | ἴστων | ᾔστην | ||
| P. | 1 | ἴσμεν | εἰδῶμεν | εἰδεῖμεν [-είημεν] | ᾖσμεν | ||
| 2 | ἴστε | εἰδῆτε | εἰδεῖτε [-είητε] | ἴστε | ᾖστε | ||
| 3 | ἴσασι | εἰδῶσι | εἰδεῖεν [-είησαν] | ἴστων | ᾖσαν, ἤδεσαν | ||
| Infinitive | Participle | ||||||
| εἰδέναι | εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα, εἰδός; gen. εἰδότος, etc. (§ 131) | ||||||
VI · Irregular Verbs in -μι
26082. ῞Ῑημι (theme ἑ-, ἡ-) send is inflected nearly like τίθηµι (§§ 251, 255). The present and second aorist systems are inflected as follows:
| Active | Middle (Passive) | ||||||||
| Present | Imperfect | Present | Imperfect | ||||||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Indicative | Indicative | Subjunctive | Indicative | ||||
| S. | 1 | ῎ῑημι | ‛ῑῶ | ῎ῑην | ῎ῑεμαι | ‛ῑῶμαι | ‛ῑέμην | ||
| 2 | ῎ῑης, ‛ῑεῖς | ‛ῑῇς | ῎ῑεις | ῎ῑεσαι | ‛ῑῇ | ῎ῑεσο | |||
| 3 | ῎ῑησι | ‛ῑῇ, etc. | ῎ῑει | ῎ῑεται | ‛ῑῆται, etc. | ῎ῑετο | |||
| D. | 2 | ῎ῑετον | Optative | ῎ῑετον | ῎ῑεσθον | Optative | ῑεσθον | ||
| 3 | ῎ῑετον | ‛ῑείην | ῎ῑέτην | ῎ῑεσθον | ‛ῑείμην | ῑεσθον | |||
| P. | 1 | ῎ῑεμεν | ‛ῑείης | ῎ῑεμεν | ‛ῑέμεθα | ‛ῑεῖο | ‛ῑέμεθα | ||
| 2 | ῎ῑετε | ‛ῑείη | ῎ῑετε | ῎ῑεσθε | ‛ῑεῖτο | ῎ῑεσθε | |||
| 3 | ‛ῑᾶσι | ‛ῑεῖτον | ῎ῑεσαν | ῎ῑενται | ‛ῑεῖσθον | ῎ῑεντο | |||
| ‛ῑείτην | ‛ῑείσθην | ||||||||
| ‛ῑεῖμεν, etc. | ‛ῑεῖμεθα,etc. | ||||||||
| Imperative | Imperative | ||||||||
| ῎ῑει | ῎ῑεσο | ||||||||
| ‛ῑέτω | ‛ῑέσθω, etc. | ||||||||
| Infinitive | Participle | Infinitive | Participle | ||||||
| ‛ῑέναι | ‛ῑείς, ‛ῑεῖσα, ‛ῑέν | ῎ῑεσθαι | ‛ῑέμενος, -η, -ον | ||||||
| Second Aorist | Second Aorist | ||||||||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Indicative | Subjunctive | ||||||
| S. | 1 | (ἧκα) | ὧ | εμηνἴ | ὧμαι | ||||
| 2 | (ἧκας) | ᾗς | εῖσο | ᾗ | |||||
| 3 | (ἧκε) | ἧ, etc. | εῖτο | ἧται, etc. | |||||
| D. | 2 | εἷτον | εἷσθον | ||||||
| 3 | εἴτην | Optative | εἷσθην | Optative | |||||
| εἴην | εἴμην | ||||||||
| P. | 1 | εἷμεν | εἴης | εἴμεθα | εἷο | ||||
| 2 | εἷτε | εἴη | εἷσθε | εἷτο | |||||
| 3 | εἷσαν | εἷτον | εἷντο | εἷσθον | |||||
| εἴτην | εἴδθην | ||||||||
| εἷμεν, etc. | εἴμεθα, etc. | ||||||||
| Imperative | Imperative | ||||||||
| ἔς | οὗ | ||||||||
| ἔτω, etc. | ἔσθω etc. | ||||||||
| Infinitive | Participle | Infinitive | Participle | ||||||
| εἷναι | ἔις, εἷσα, | ἔσθαι | ἔμενος, -η, -ον | ||||||
In the optative, forms of the –ω inflection (ἴοιτε, ἴοιεν, οἷτο) are sometimes found (§ 170, 4). The future of ἴημι is ἤσω; perfect εἷκα, εἷμαι; aorist passive εἴθην. The aorists and the perfect hardly ever occur except in compounds.
26183. Εἶμι (theme ἰ-, εἰ– ; Latin eo, ire) go has only the present system.
| Present | Imperfect | |||||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Optative | Imperative | Indicative | ||
| S. | 1 | εἶμι | ἴω | ἴοιμι, ἰοίην | ᾖα [ᾔειν] | |
| 2 | εἶ | ἴῃς | ἴοις | ἴθι | ᾔεισθα [ᾔεις] | |
| 3 | εἶσι | ἴῃ | ἴοι | ἴτω | ᾔει [ᾔειν] | |
| D. | 2 | ἴτον | ἴητον | ἴοιτον | ἴτον | ᾖτον |
| 3 | ἴτον | ἴητον | ἴοίτην | ἴτων | ᾖτην | |
| P. | 1 | ἴμεν | ἴωμεν | ἴοιμεν | ᾖμεν | |
| 2 | ἴτε | ἴητε | ἴοιτε | ἴτε | ᾖτε | |
| 3 | ἴᾱςι | ἴωσι | ἴοιεν | ἰόντων, ἴτωσαν | ᾖσαν, ᾔεσαν | |
| Infinitive | Participle | Verbal Adjectives | ||||
| ἰέναι | ἰών, ἰοῦσα, ἰόν; gen. ἰόντος, ἰούσης, etc. | ἰτός, ἰτέος (ἰτητέος, from ἰτῶ (άω) go) | ||||
1. Compounds of εἶμι have recessive accent in the present except in the infinitive and participle: thus, πάρειµε approach, πάρει, etc. Imperf. παρῇα (§ 184, 1), etc., but infin. παριέναι, participle παριών.
2. The present indicative of εἶμι, in prose (and almost always in poetry), has a future meaning shall go (cf. § 524, note).
26284. Εἰμί (theme ἐσ– ; Latin es-se) be has only the present and future systems.
| Present | Imperfect | |||||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Optative | Imperative | Indicative | ||
| S. | 1 | εἰμί | ὦ | εἴην | ἦ, ἦν | |
| 2 | εἶ | ᾖς | εἴης | ἴσθι | ἦσθα | |
| 3 | ἐστί | ᾖ | εἴη | ἔστω | ᾖν | |
| D. | 2 | ἐστόν | ᾖτον | εἶτον, εἴητον | ἔστον | ἦστον |
| 3 | ἐστόν | ᾖτον | εἴτην, εἰήτην | ἔστων | ἤστην | |
| P. | 1 | ἐσμέν | ὦμεν | εἶμεν, εἴημεν | ἦμεν | |
| 2 | ἐστέ | ᾖτε | εἶτε, εἴητε | ἔστε | ἦτε, ἦστε | |
| 3 | εἰσί | ὦσι | εἶεν, εἴησαν | ἰόντων, ἴτωσαν | ἦσαν | |
| Infinitive | Participle | |||||
| εἰναι | ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν; gen. ὄντος, οὔσης, etc. c. (§ 129) | |||||
Future indicative ἔσομαι, etc. (3d sing. ἔσται (§ 20)); optative ἐσοίμην, etc. infinitive ἔσεσθαι; participle ἐσόμενος, –η, –ον.
Note. – The present indicative εἰμί is for *ὲσ-μι (§ 16); εἶ is for *ἐσι (originally ἐσ-σί); ἐσ-τί retains the original ending τι. The subjunctive ὦ is for ἕω, from *ἐσ–ω; the optative εἴην is for *ἐσ-ιη-ν . The infinitive εἶναι is for *ἐσ-ναι; the participle ὤν is for ἐών, from *ἐσ-ων.
1. All forms of the present indicative, except the second person singular ef, are enclitic (§ 70). But the third person singular ἐστί takes its written accent on the first syllable (ἔστι):
When it stands at the beginning of a sentence; as ἔστι δὲ τίς οὗτος ; but who is this?
When it expresses existence or possibility; as σοὶ μὲν ἔστιν ἰδεῖν it is possible for you to see;
When it follows the conjunctions εἰ, καί or ἀλλά or the adverbs οὐκ, μή or ὡς; as οὐκ ἔστιν is not.
Note. – In composition the participle is accented as in the simple verb: thus, παρ-ών present. In the subjunctive and optative, παρ-ῶ (for –έω, § 170, 2), παρ-εῖμεν, etc., the accent is not irregular. See §§ 170, 2–3 and 185, note.
26385. Φημί (φα-, φη-; Latin fa-ri) say is inflected in the present system as follows:
| Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Indicative | ||
| S. | 1 | φημί | φῶ, φῇς, φῇ, etc. | ἔφην |
| 2 | φῄς | (like στῶ, § 257) | ἕφησθα or ἔφης | |
| 3 | φησί | ἕφη | ||
| Optative | ||||
| D. | 2 | φατόν | φαίην, φαίης, etc. | ἔφατον |
| φατόν | (like σταίην § 257) | ἔφατην | ||
| 3 | φαμέν | Imperative | ἔφαμεν | |
| P. | 1 | φᾱσι | φάθι or φαθί, φάτω, etc. | ἔφασαν |
| 2 | Infinitive | Participle | Verbal Adjectives | |
| 3 | φάναι | φάς, φᾶσα, φάν, but in Attic φάσκων is used instead | φατός, φατέος | |
The future is φήσω, etc.; aorist ἔφησα, etc.
1. All forms of the present indicative, except the second person singular φῄς, are enclitic (§ 70).
26486. Κεῖμαι (κει-) lie, am laid (regularly used as the perfect passive of τίθηµι put).
| Present | Imperfect | |||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Indicative | ||
| S. | 1 | κεῖμαι | κέωµαι, κέῃ | ἐκείμην |
| 2 | κεῖσαι | κέηται, etc. | ἔκεισο | |
| 3 | κεῖται | ἔκειτο | ||
| Optative | ||||
| D. | 2 | κεῖσθον | κεοίμην, κέοιο, κέοιτο etc. | ἔκεισθον |
| 3 | κεῖσθον | ἐκείσθην | ||
| P. | 1 | κείμεθα | ἐκείμεθα | |
| 2 | κεῖσθε | Imperative | ἔκεισθε | |
| 3 | κεῖνται | κεῖσο, κείσθω, etc. | ἔκειντο | |
| Infinitive | Participle | |||
| κεῖσθαι (so also in composition: κατακεῖσθα, contrary to § 184) | κείμενος | |||
| The future is κείσοµαι, etc., regular. | ||||
26587. Ἧμαι (ἡσ-) sit retains the σ of its stem only before the endings –ται and –το. It is found only in the present system:
| Present Indicative | Imperfect Indicative | ||
| ἦ-μαι, ἦσαι, ἧσ-ται; ἦσθον, ἦσθον, ἥ-μεθα, ἦσθε, ἦ-νται | ἤ-μην, ἦσο, ἦσ-το, ἦσθον, ἤσθην, ἤ-μεθα, ἦσθε, νἦ-ντο | ||
| Imperative | Infinitive | Participle | |
| ἦσο, ἤσθω, etc. | ἦσθαι | ἤ-μενος | |
The subjunctive and optative of the simple verb are not found.
1. For ἧμαι, Attic almost always uses the compound κάθ-ημαι (properly sit down), which loses the σ of its stem everywhere except in the form καθῆστο of the imperfect.
It is inflected as follows:
| Present | Imperfect | |||||
| Indicative | Subjunctive | Indicative | ||||
| S. | 1 | κάθηµαι | καθῶμαι | ἐκαθήμην | or | καθήμην |
| 2 | κάθησαι | καθῆται, etc. | ἐκάθησο | καθῆστο | ||
| 3 | καθῆται | ἐκάθητο | καθῆστο | |||
| Optative | ||||||
| D. | 2 | κάθησθον | καθοίµην, καθοῖο, | ἐκάθησθον | καθῆσθον | |
| 3 | κάθησθον | καθοῖτο, etc. | ἐκάθησθην | κάθησθην | ||
| P. | 1 | καθήµεθα | ἐκαθήμεθα | καθήµεθα | ||
| 2 | κάθησθε | Imperative | ἐκάθησθε | καθῆσθε | ||
| 3 | κάθηνται | κάθησο, καθήσθω, etc. | ἐκάθηντο | καθῆντο | ||
| Infinitive | Participle | |||||
| καθῆσθαι | καθήμενος | |||||
For the augment (ἐκαθήμην) see § 174, 1.
266. Ἦμι (cf. Latin a-io) say, is used only in present 1st singular ἡμε and imperfect 1st and 3d singular ἦν, ἦ ( ἦν δ᾽ ἐγώ said I, ἦ δ᾽ ὅς said he).
267. Χρή it is necessary is really a substantive with which ἐστί is, is to be supplied (§ 308). Outside of the present indicative it unites (cf. § 43, note 2) with the forms of εἰμί into a single word: so impf. χρῆν (for χρὴ ἦν), and even with augment ἐχρῆν ' subj. χρῇ (for χρὴ ἦν); opt. χρείη (for χρὴ εἴη); infin. χρῆναι (for χρὴ εἶναι); partic. χρεών, indeclinable (for χρὴ ὂν, § 17).
Formation of Words
268. Words are formed in two ways: (1) by Derivation and (2) by Composition.
1. Derived words are formed by means of suffixes (which are not themselves separate words) either from roots or from the stems of other words. Thus, δύση right (from the root δικ-), δίκα-ιος just (from the stem δικᾶ-) are derived words.
2. Compound words are formed by combining two or more words or stems of words into one. Thus, ίππό-δαμος horse-tamer, μεγά-θῦμος great-hearted, are compound words. Of course derived words may be formed from stems of compound words. Thus, οἰκοδομῶ (-έω) build a house, from οἰκο-δόμος house-builder, is a derived word.
VII · Derivative Words
269. Primitive and Denominative Words. – A Primitive Word is formed directly from a root by means of a suffix; a Denominative Word is formed from the stem of a noun. Thus, ζυγ-ό-ν yoke is a primitive word, being formed from the root ζυγ– by means of the suffix –o-. From the stem of ζυγόν (ζυγο-) is formed the denominative verb ζυγῶ (-όω) yoke, join together.
Note. – Less correctly the term Primitive Word is sometimes applied to a word formed by means of a suffix from the theme of a verb.
270. Roots. – The root of a word, like the perfume of a flower, has no separate, tangible existence. It merely uggests the meaning of a word or group of words. Only when united with inflectional endings (and usually a suffix as well) does it receive definite form and meaning, and become a full-blown word.
Note. – Roots consist usually of only one syllable. From roots stems are formed by means of suffixes, and from stems words are formed by means of inflectional endings. (Very few words are formed directly from roots without any suffix.) Thus:
| Root | λεγ- | Stems | λεγ-ο/ε- | Words | λέγω speak |
| λογ- | λογ-ο/ε- | λόγος speech |
271. Word-Groups. – The same root often appears in many different words which are formed from it in various ways. Such words are commonly said to form a Word-Group.
Thus, from the root γραφ– are derived (directly or indirectly)
| γράφ-ω mark, write | γραμ-μή (for *γραφ-μη, § 27,1) line |
| γραφ-ή writing | γράμ-μα letter |
| γραφ-εύς painter | γραμ-ματεύς clerk, secretary |
| γραφ-ίς style, pencil | γραμ-ματεύω be secretary |
| γραφ-ικός suited for writing or painting | γραμ-ματική grammar |
| γραμ-ματεῖον writing tablet |
From the root οἰκ– are derived (directly or indirectly)
| οἶκ-ος dwelling | οἰκ-ειότης relationship, friendship |
| οἰκ-ία house | οἰκ-ειῶ (-όω) make onés own |
| οἰκ-ίον, οἰκ-ίσκος, οἰκ-ίδιον (diminutives, § 283) little house | οἰκ-είωσις making onés own, appropriation |
| οἰκ-έτης house-slave (masc.) | οἰκ (-έω) dwell |
| οἶκ-έτες house-slave (fem.) | οἰκ-ητός inhabited |
| οἰκ-ετικός pertaining to house-slaves | οἴκ-ησις habitation |
| οἰκ-εῖος belonging to the Household | οἴκ-ημα dwelling place |
| οἰκ-ήτωρ inhabitant | |
| οἰκ-ίζω colonize | |
| οἰκ-ιστής colonist |
These examples are enough to show the importance, for a ready understanding of Greek, of a thorough knowledge of derivation.
272. Changes of Roots in Derivation. – In the formation of words from roots, Greek has a very clear method of differentiation by means of the vowel variation (ο, ς, (α)), spoken of in § 14: thus, λέγ-ω speak, λόγ-ος speech; λεύπ-ω leave, λοιπ-ός left; σπεύδ-ω hasten, σπουδ-ή haste.
See below, §§ 277, 1–3 and 280, 1.
273. Changes of Stems in Derivation. – When suffixes are added to stems the usual euphonic changes take place; – that is, vowels thus, brought together usually contract, and consonants, and consonants and vowels, undergo the changes described in §§ 25–39. Examples are:
ἀρχαῖος old (for *ἀρχα–ῖο-ς), βασιλείᾱ kingdom (for *βασιλεν–ιᾶ, § 21), ἀλήθεια truth (for *ἀληθεσ-ια, § 37), ὄμμα eye (for *ὀπ-μα, § 27,1), ὄψις look, vision (for *ὀπ-σις, § 28), δικαστής judge (for *δικαδ-της, § 26), ἐλπίζω hope (for *ἐλπιδ-ιω, § 39, 2).
274. A noun stem may vary its final vowel before the suffix, or, before a suffix beginning with a vowel, may drop it altogether (cf. § 44,3): thus, οἰκέ-της house-slave, from οἶκος (stem οἰκο-) house; οὐράν-ιος heavenly, from οὐρανός (stem οὐρανο-) heaven.
Note. – Before a suffix beginning with a consonant the end vowel of a stem usually, but not always, has its long form (§ 13): thus, ποίη-σις α making, ποιῶ (-έω) make.
275. Formation by Analogy. – In Greek, as in other languages, many words were formed by analogy. Thus, ίππεύ-ω be a horseman is formed from ίππεύ-ς horseman; but since ἵππ– is common to more words (ἵππ-ος, ίππ-ικός, etc.) than is ίππεύ-, the letters –εύω came to be felt as a sort, of suffix, which formed ίππεύω from ίππ-, and so could be used to form other denominative verbs from various stems: thus, δουλ-εύω be a slave (δοῦλο-ς slave), βουλ-εύω plan (βουλή plan), παιδ-εύω educate (παῖς, παιδ-ός child).
In the formation of verbs analogy plays a great part, and the important verb endings of this sort are given in § 292.
So also sometimes in the formation of nouns, endings such as –αιος and –ειος, for -α-ιο-ς and –-ε-ιο-ς, formed by adding the suffix –ιo– to a stem ending in α– or ε– (ευ-, εσ-) (see § 287, 5, 'Αθηναῖος, οἰκεῖος, βασιλεῖος), are used in similar fashion: thus, σκοτ-αῖος (σκότος) dark, ἀνδρ-εῖος (ἀνήρ, ἀνδρ-ός) brave (for examples of such formations see §§ 283, 1; 284, 1; 287, 5).
FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES
276. A very few substantives are formed from roots without any suffix: thus, φλόξ (φλογ-) flame (φλέγ-ω burn).
277. The following are the most important suffixes in the formation of substantives:
1. –o-. Masculine in –ός (agent) and –ος, neuter in –ον.
(Roots with the vowel variation ο, ε (α) (§ 14), usually show ο.)
| τροφ-ός nurse (πρέφ-ω nourish) | πομπ-ό-ς escort (πέµπ-ω send, escort) |
| λόγ-ο-ς speech (λέγ-ω speak) | ῥό-ο-ς stream (ῥέ-ω flow) |
| ἔργ-ο-ν work (ῥέζω (ῥεγ, ἔργ–§ 38) do) | ζυγ-ό-ν yoke (ζεύγ-νῡμι yoke) |
2. –ᾱ-. Nominative in –ᾱ or –η; all feminine.
(Roots with the vowel variation ο, ε (α) (§ 14), regularly show ο.)
| τροφ-ή nurture (τρέφ-ω nourish) | φορ-ᾱ́ bearing (φέρ-ω bear) |
| λοιβ-ή pouring (λείβ-ω pour) | σπουδ-ή haste (σπεύδ-ω hasten) |
3. –εσ-. Nominative in –ος (§ 106, 1): neuter.
(Roots with the vowel variation ο, ε (α) (§ 14), regularly show ε.)
| γέν-ος race (γίνομαι (γον- γεν-, γv-) be born) | ζεῦγ-ος pair (ζεύγ-νῦμι (ζευγ–ζευγ-, ζυγ-) yoke, join) |
| εἶδ-ος form (οίδ-, εἰδ-, ἰδ– see) | εὕρ-ος width (εὑρύς wide) |
278. AGENT
1. –ευ-. Nominative in –εύς: masculine.
| γραφ-εύ-ς painter (γράφ-ω write, paint) | ἱππ-εύ-ς horseman (ἵππος horse) |
| ἱερ-εύ-ς priest (ἱερός sacred) |
2. –τηρ-. Nominative in –τήρ: masculine.
| σω-τήρ savior (σῴζω save) | δο- τήρ giver (δίδωμι (δο-, δω) give) |
3. –τορ-. Nominative in –τωρ: masculine.
| ῥή-τωρ orator (ἐρ-, ῥε-, ῥή– speak) | οἰκή-τωρ dweller (οἰκῶ (-έω) dwell) |
| 4 | τᾱ- | Nominative in -της | masculine |
| -τιδ | Nominative in -τις | feminine | |
| -τριδ | Nominative in -τρίς |
| οἰκέ-τη-ς (ὁ), οἰκέ-τις (ἡ) house–slave (οἶκο-ς house) | αὐλη-τή-ς (ὁ), αὐλη-τρίς (ἡ) flute-player (αὐλῶ (-έω) play the flute) | |
| πολῑ́-τη-ς (ὁ), πολῖ-τις (ἡ) citizen (πόλι-ς city) | ||
279. ACTION
1. –τι-. Nominative in -τις: feminine.
πίσ-τι-ς faith (πείθω (ποιθ-, πειθ, πιθ-) persuade, § 26)
2. –σι– (weakened from –τι-). Nominative in-σις: feminine.
| κρί-σι-ς judgment (κρίνω judge) | πρᾶξι-ς action (πράττω (πρᾶγ-) act, § 28) |
3. –σιᾱ-. Nominative in –σιᾶ: feminine.
| γυμνα-σίᾱ exercise (γυμνάζω (γυμ-ναδ-) train, § 30) | δοκιμα-σίᾱ examination (δοκιμάζω (δοκιμαδ-) examine, § 30) |
280. RESULT OF ACTION
1. –ματ-. Nominative in –μα: neuter. A great many substantives are formed from verb stems by
this suffix.
(Roots with the vowel variation ο, ε (α) (§ 14), regularly have ε.)
| πρᾶγ-μα deed (πρᾱ́ττω (πρᾱγ-) do) | ῥεῦ-μα stream (ῥέω (ῥου-, ῥευ-, ῥυ) flow) |
2. –μο-. Nominative in – μός: masculine.
| ὀδυρ-μό-ς wailing (ὀδύρ-ομαι wail) | λογισ-μό-ς calculation (λογίζο-μαι (λογιδ-) calculate) |
3. –μᾱ-. Nominative in –μη: feminine.
| γνώ-μη opinion (γεγνώ-σκω know) | γραμ-μή line (γράφ-ω mark, §27, 1) |
281. MEANS OR INSTRUMENT
1. –τρο-. Nominative in –τρον: neuter (cf. Latin claustru-m).
| ἄρο-τρον plow (ἀρῶ (-όω) plow) | φέρε-τρον bier (φέρω carry) |
282. QUALITY (ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES)
1. –ιᾱ-. Nominative in –ίᾱ: feminine (cf. Latin memor-ia).
This suffix (cf. § 287, 5) is the one most frequently employed to form abstract substantives.
| σοφ-ίᾱ wisdom (σοφό-ς wise) εὐδαιμον-ίᾱ happiness (εὐδαίμμων happy) | παιδείᾶ (for *παιδευ-ιᾱ, § 21) education (παιδεύ-ω educate) |
2. –ια-. Nominative in –ια: feminine (mostly from adjectives in –ης).
| ἀλήθεια (*ἀληθεσ-ια, § 37) truth (ἀληθής (ἀληθέσ-) true) | εὔνοια (cf. §133) good will (εὔνους well-disposed) |
This suffix forms also a few concrete feminines corresponding to masculines: thus,
| σώτειρα (for *σωτερ-α, § 39,4) savior (fem.) (σω-τήρ savior, § 278, 2) | ἱέρεια (for *ἱέρευ-ια, § 21) priestess ( ἱερ-εύ-ς priest, § 278, 1) |
3. –τητ-. Nominative in –της: feminine (cf. Latin veritās, –tāt-is).
| ταχύ-της swiftness (ταχύ-ς swift) | νεό-της youth (νέο-ς young) |
4. –συνᾱ-. Nominative in –σύνη: feminine.
| δικαιο-σύνη justice (δίκαιο-ς just) | σωφρο-σύνη discretion (σώφρων, discreet, § 34) |
283. DIMINUTIVES
(Often used as pet names.)
1. -ιο (-ιδ–ιο-, –αρ-ιο-, § 275). Nominative in –ιον: neuter.
| παιδ-ίο-ν παιδ-άριο-ν little child (παῖς (παιδ-) child) | οἰκ-ίδιο-ν little house (olko–ς house) |
2. –ισκο-, –ισκᾱ-. Nominative in –ίσκος (masc.) or –ίσκη (fem.).
| οἰκ-ίσκο-ς little house (οἴκο–ς house) | παιδ-ίσκο-ς litile boy παιδ–ίσκη litle girl | (παῖς(παιδ-) child) |
284. PLACE (OR MEANS)
1. –ιο-. From substantives in –τηρ (§ 278, 2, mostly obsolete) and –εύς (§ 278, 1). Nominative in –τήριον and –εῖον (for *-ευ–ιον, § 21): neuter.
| δικαστήρ-ιο-ν courthouse (δικασ-τήρ (= δικαστής) judge) | κουρεῖον barber shop (κουρ-εύ-ς barber) |
| δεσµωτήρ-ιο-ν prison (*δεσμω-τηρ = δεσµώτης prisoner) | Θησεῖιον temple of Theseus (Θησεύ-ς Theseus) |
So, by analogy (see § 275),
| σημ-εῖον signal (cf. σῆμα sign) | μουσ- εῖον seat of the muses (cf. μοῦσα muse) |
2. –ων-. Nominative in –ών: masculine (place only).
| ἀνδρ-ών men's room (ἀνήρ (ἀνδρ-) man) | ἱππ– ών stable (ἵππο-ς horse) |
285. PATRONYMICS (descendant of)
| 1. | -ιδᾱ- | Nominative in –ίδης: masculine. |
| -ιδ- | Nominative in –ίς: feminine. |
| Masculine | Feminine | |
| Τανταλ-ίδη-ς son of Tantalus | Τανταλ-ίς | from Τάνταλος |
| Δανα–ίδη-ς son of Danaus | Δανα–ις | from Δαναό-ς |
| Πηλε-ίδη-ς (§ 21) son of Peleus | from Πνλεύ-ς |
| 2. | -αδᾱ- | Nominative in –ἄδης: masculine. |
| -αδ- | Nominative in –άς: feminine. |
| Masculine | Feminine | |
| Βορε-άδη-ς son of Boreas | Βορε-άς | from Βορέᾱ-ς |
| Θεστι-ἄδης son of Thestius | Θεστι-άς | from Θέστι-άς |
286. GENTILE OR PLACE NAMES
| 1. | -ευ- | Nominative in –εύς (cf. § 278, 1): masculine. |
| -ιδ- | Nominative in –ίς (cf. § 285, 1): feminine. |
| Masculine | Feminine | |
| Μεγαρ-εύς a Megarian | Μεγαρ-ίς | (Mέγαρα Megara) |
| 2. | -τᾱ- | Nominative in –της (cf. § 278, 4): masculine. |
| -τιδ- | Nominative in –τίς (cf. § 278, 4): feminine. |
| Masculine | Feminine | |
| Τεγεᾱ-τη-ς a Tegean | Τεγεᾶ-τίς | (Τεγέᾱ Tegea) |
FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES
287. The following are the most important suffixes forming adjectives:
1. –υ-. Nominative in ύς, εῖα, –ύ (§123) (from roots only).
| ἡδ-ύ-ς sweet (cf. ἥδιομαι am pleased) | ταχ-ύ-ς swift (cf. τάχ-ος swiftness) |
2. –εσ-. Nominative in –ής, –ές (§ 120) (mostly compounds).
| σαφ-ής clear (σαφ-) | ψευδ-ής false (cf. ψεύδ-ομαι lie) |
3. –μον-. Nominative in –μων, –μον (§ 120).
μνή- μων mindful (cf. μι-μνῄσκω remind)
4. –ο-. Nominative in –ος, –ᾱ (-η), –ον (§ 117).
λοιπ-ό-ς remaining (cf. λείπ-ω (λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ) leave)
5. ιο-. Nominative in –ίος, –ίᾱ, –ιον (sometimes ιος, –ιον, § 119). This is the most common adjective-suffix.
| οὐράν-ιο-ς heavenly ((οὐρανό-ς heaven) | οἰκετῖος (for *οἰκε-ιο-ς, § 274) domestic (οἶκο-ς house) |
| πλούσ-ιο-ς (for *πλουτ-ιο-ς) wealthy (πλοῦτο-ς wealth) | βασίλειος (for *βασιλευ-ιο-ς, §21) kingly (βασιλεύ-ς king) |
| ᾿Αθηναῖος (for *᾿Αθηνα-ιο-ς ) Athenian (᾿Αθῆναι Athens) | σωτήρ-ιο-ς (cf. § 283, 1) preserving (σωτήρ savior) |
So, by analogy (see § 275),
| σκοτ-αῖος in darkness (σκότος darkness) | ἀνδρ-εῖος manly (ἀνήρ, ἀνδρ-ός man) |
6. –ικο– (-κο-). Nominative in -κός, –κή, –κόν. Next to –ιο-, this is the most frequent adjective-suffix.
| μουσ-ικό-ς musical (μοῦσα muse) | σκεπτ-ικό-ς reflective (σκεπτό-ς, verbal of σκέπ-τομαι investigate) |
| φυσ-ικό-ς natural (φύσι-ς nature) | πολεμ-ικό-ς warlike (πόλεμο-ς war) |
7. –vo-. Nominative in –νός, –νή, –νόν.
| δει–νό-ς terrible (cf. ἔ-δει-σα feared) | στυγ-νό-ς hated (cf. στυγ-ῶ (-ἔω) hate) |
| ἀλγεινό-ς (for *ἀλγεσ-νο-ς) painful (ἄλγος pain) |
8. –po– (-ερο-, –υρο-). Nominative in –ρός, –ρᾱ́, –ρόν.
| ἐχθ-ρό-ς hateful (cf. ἔχθ-ος hatred) | βλαβ–ερό injurious (cf. βλαβ-ή injury) |
| λαμπ-ρό-ς bright (cf. λάμπ-ω shine) | ἐχ-υρό-ς secure (cf. ἔχ–ω hold) |
9. –λο– (-ελο-, –αλεο-). Nominative in-λος, λη, –λον (-αλέος, –αλέᾱ, –αλέον).
| δει-λό-ς timid (cf. ἔ-δει–σα feared) | εἴκ-ελο-ς like (cf. εἰκ-ώς like) |
| σιωπη-λό-ς silent (σιωπή silence) | κερδ-αλέ-ς shrewd (cf. κέρδ–ος gain) |
288. MATERIAL OR SOURCE
1. –ο– (for –ια-, the same as –ιο– in § 287, 5).
χρῡσοῦς golden, for χρῡ́σε–ος, χρῡ́σε-ιο–ς (Homer), from χρῡσό–ς gold.
2. –ινο-. Nominative in –ινος, ίνη, –ινον (cf. § 287, 7).
| λίθ-ινο-ς of stone (λίθο-ς stone) | ἀνθρώπ-ινο-ς human (ἄνθρωπο-ς man) |
289. FULLNESS OR ABUNDANCE
1. –εντ– (for earlier –ϝεντ-). Nominative in –εις, –εσσα, –εν (mostly poetic).
| χαρί-εις graceful (χάρι-ς grace) | ἀνεμό-εις windy (ἄνεμο-ς wind) |
FORMATION OF ADVERBS
290. Beside the adverbs regularly formed from adjectives (§ 187) and from pronominal stems (§ 187, 1), and the nouns used adverbially (§ 187, 1), adverbs are formed also by means of certain endings approaching the nature of suffixes (cf. § 137, 2). Of these the more important are:
1. –δόν.
| σχε-δόν nearly (cf. ἔχω (*σεχ-, –σχε-, § 38) hold) | ὁμοθῡμ-α-δόν with one accord |
2. –δην.
| βά-δην on foot (cf. βαίνω (βα-) go | κρύβ-δην secretly (cf. κρύπτω (κρυβ-) hide) |
3. –τε.
| ἄλλο-τε at another time (ἄλλο-ς other) | πάντο-τε at all times (πᾶς all) |
4. -ᾱκις.
| τετρ-άκις four times (τέτταρες four) | πολλ-άκις many times (πολλοί many) |
Note. – Some adverbs end also in –ᾱ– thus, μάλα very, τάχα quickly.
FORMATION OF VERBS
291. Primitive verbs (such as φη-μί or λέγ-ω say) are formed directly from roots (§ 165), while denominative verbs are formed from the stems of nouns.
29288. The Suffix -ι-ο/ε-. – The suffix by which nearly all denominative verbs were originally formed is -ι-ο/ε- (or more properly -Ι-ο/ε-), but between vowels the ι disappeared (§ 21), and with consonants it combined to form other letters (§ 39). Thus, arose several classes of denominative verbs, their form depending on the form of the noun from which they were derived, then by analogy (§ 275) the endings of these verbs were used to form other similar verbs from various noun stems. The most important of these classes (as seen in the present indicative) are given below:
1. (-ό-ω). From stems in –o– By analogy (§ 275) –όω.
| 1 | (-ό-ω) | From stems in –o– (mostly causative) | By analogy (§ 275) –όω | ||
| δηλῶ (δηλό-ω) make plain, from δῆλο-ς plain | ζημιῶ (ζημι-όω) punish (ζημίᾱ penalty) | ||||
| ἀνδρῶ (ἀνδρ-όω) make a man of (ἀνήρ, ἀνδρ-ός man) | |||||
| 2 | (-έ-ω) | From stemsin-o– (see § 274) and –εσ– | By analogy (§ 275) -έω. | ||
| οἰκῶ (οἰκέ-ω) dwell, from οἶκο-ς house | ἐπιχειρῶ. (ἐπιχειρ-έω) attempt (χείρ hand) | ||||
| τελῶ (τελέ-ω, for *τελεσ-ιω, § 37) finish, from τέλος (τελεσ-) end | ἀλγῶ (ἀλγ-έω) be pained (ἄλγος pain), fut. ἀλγήσω, cf. § 188. | ||||
| 3 | (-ά-ω) | From stems in-ᾱ– (ᾱ becomes ᾰ from analogy with –έω and –όω). | By analogy (§ 275) –αω | ||
| τῑμῶ (τῑμά-ω) honor, from τῑµή (τιμᾱ-) honor | γοῶ (γο-άω) lament (γόος wailing) | ||||
| ἀντιῶ (ἀντι-άω) meet (ἀντίος) opposite) | |||||
| 4 | (-εύ-ω) | From stems in –εν– | By analogy (§ 275) –εύω | ||
| βασιλεύ-ω be king, from βασι-λεύ-ς king | τοξ-εύω shoot with the bow (τόξον bow) | ||||
| 5 | (-ττ-ω) | From stems in -κ-, -χ, -τ-, –θ– (see §195,1) | By analogy (§ 275) -ίζω and -άξω. | ||
| κηρῡ́ττ-ω proclaim, from κῆρυξ (κηρῡκ-) herald | τειχ-ίζω fortify (τεῖχος wall) | ||||
| 6 | (-ζ-ῳ) | (-ίζω, –άζω). From stems in –δ– or –γ– (see § 195, 2). | μηδ-ίζω favor the Medes (Μῆδος Mede) | ||
| ἐλπίζ-ω hope, from ἐλπίς (ἐλπιδ) hope | δικά-ζω judge (δίκη right) | ||||
| λιθάζ-ω stone, from (λιθαδ-) stone | ἑτοιμ-άζω make ready (ἕτοιμος ready) | ||||
| 7 | (-λλ-ω) | From stems in –λ– (see § 195, 3) | |||
| ἀγγέλλ-ω announce, from ἄγγε-λος messenger | |||||
| 8 | –ίν-ω –ίρ-ω | (for –ν-ιω) | from | stems in-ν- (especially –αν-) and –ρ– (see §195, 4) | By analogy (§ 275) – αίνω |
| (for –ρ-ιω) | κερδ-αίνω gain (κέρδος gain) | ||||
| μελαίν-ω blacken, from μέλᾱς (μελαν) black | χαλεπ–αίνω am angry (χαλεπός hard) | ||||
| τεκμαίρ-ομαι determine from signs, from τέκµαρ sign | |||||
| Note. – Many verbs in –μαινω are formed from substantives in –μα (gen. –ματ-ος) which originally had stems in –μαν– (compare Latin no-men with Greek ὄνο-μα, ὀνό-ματ-ος, name): thus, σηµαίνω (for *σημαν-ιω) indicate, from σῆμα, σήµατ-ος sign. | |||||
| 9 | (-ῡ́v-w) | (suffix –νιο-/ε-, cf. § 196, 1). From adjective stems in –υ-. | By analogy (§275) – ῡ́vw | ||
| ἡδῡ́-ν-ω sweeten, from ἡδύ-ς sweet | ἀλγ–ῡ́vw pain (ἄλγος pain) | ||||
| μεγαλ–ῡ́vw make great (μέγας, great) | |||||
293. Desideratives. – Verbs expressing a desire to do something are usually formed by the ending –σειω: thus, γελα-σείω desire to laugh (γελῶ (-άω) laugh).
VII · Compound Words
Formation or Compound Worps
294. Compound words are formed by combining two or more separate words, or stems of words, into one word.
Their accent is usually recessive (§ 64): thus, μακρό-βιος (μακρό-ς + βίος) long-lived, προ–βουλή (πρό + βουλή) forethought.
1. The compound word thus, formed often follows the inflection of its last part, as in the examples above, or it may go over into a different form of inflection: thus, φιλό-τῑμος (τιμή) honor-loving, εὐ-γενής (γένος) well-born, θεο-φιλής (φίλος) dear to the gods, πολυ-πράγμων (πρᾶγμα, πρᾱ́γματ-ος) greatly active, meddlesome, εὔ-φρων (φρήν) glad-hearted.
295. When the first part of a compound word is an inflected word, only its stem is used: thus, λογο-γράφος (λόγο-ς) speech-writer, πείθ-αρχος (πείθ–ω) obedient to command.
1. A final short vowel (α or ο) is elided if the second part began with a vowel (but see § 2a): thus, χορ-ηγός (χορό-ς) chorus-leader (but θεο-ειδής (θεος+ϝεἶδος, § 2) god-like.
2. Stems other than –o– stems, when used to form the first part of a compound word, have a strong tendency to take the form of –o– stems: thus, λυρο-ποιός (λύρᾱ) lyre-maker, πατρο-κτόνος (πατήρ, πατρ-ός) father-slayer, parricide, φυσιο-λόγος (φύσι-ς) natural philosopher, ἰχθυο-πώλης (ἰχθῡ́-ς) fish-seller.
Note. – Sometimes other letters (usually ε, ι, or σι) appear between the parts of a compound word: thus, δακέ–θῡμος soul-consuming, αἰγ-ί-βοτος grazed by goats, δει-σι-δαίμων god-fearing. This seldom happens except when the first part of the compound is a verb stem, and such compounds are usually to be explained as formations from earlier (mostly verbal) noun stems which ended in this way. Analogy (§ 275) also probably played some part in such formations.
296. Tn compound nouns α, ε, or ο, at the beginning of the last part often becomes long (η or ω), unless the syllable in which it stands is already long by position (§ 53): thus, στρατ-ηγός (ἄγω) army-leader, general, ἀν-ώνυμος (ὄνομα) nameless (cf. § 132, 1).
297. Apparent Compounds. – Sometimes words often used together come to be written as one word (cf. § 1, note): thus, Διόσ-κοροι sons of Zeus (i.e. the Dioscuri, Castor and Pollux), ἀπο-πέμπω send away. Such words, although they are usually classed among compound words, are not real compounds, but only apparent.
29889. Compound Verbs. – Verbs can be compounded (see § 207) only with prepositions (which were originally adverbs modifying the verb): thus, ἐπι-βάλλω throw on.
Note. – It must be noticed that in denominative verbs formed from compound nouns the verb is not compounded. Thus, πείθοµαι means obey, but disobey is not *ά-πειθομαι but ἀπειθῶ (-έω), a denominative verb formed from ἀ-πειθής disobedient.
29990. Inseparable Prefixes. – Certain words used to form the first part of compound words have no separate existence. The most important are:
1. ἀν- (before a consonant ἀ-, usually called alpha privative) not, like Latin in-, English un-: thus, ἀν-αιδής shameless, ἄ-θεος godless.
2. ᾱ– conjunctive: thus, ἄ-λοχος bed-fellow.
3. δυσ– (the opposite of εὖ well), ill, dificult: thus, δύσ-ποτµος ill-starred, δυσ-χερής hard to handle.
4. ἡμι– half-: thus, ἡμί-θεος demigod.
MEANING OF COMPOUND WORD
300. The meaning of most compound words is at once evident from the meaning of their parts.
In nearly all of them the first part limits or determines the meaning of the second part: thus, ψευδό-μαντις false prophet, ὁμό-δουλος fellow-slave, ἄ-γραφος unwritten, ἀμφι-θέατρον round theater, χειρο-ποίητος hand-made, ἀργυρό-τοξος silver-bowed = having a silver bow, γλαυκ-ῶπις bright-eyed.
1. Observe that compound nouns may be either substantives or adjectives, and that often a verbal clement in a compound word may have either an active or a passive meaning: thus, compare λογο-γράφος speech-writer with ἄ-γραφος unwritten.
Note. – In compound words whose last part is a verbal formed by the suffix –ο– the written accent regularly stands on that part of the word which indicates the agent (or instrument): thus, μητρο-κτόνος mother-slayer, matricide, µητρό-κτονος mother-slain, i.e. slain by a mother; λιβο-βόλος stone-throwing, λιθό-βολος struck by stones. When the written accent is on the last part of the word, it stands on the penult if that is short, otherwise on the ultima: thus, λογο-γράφος speech-writer, but λογο-ποιός speech-maker, στρατ-ηγός army-leader, general.
Syntax
301. Syntax (σύνταξις arrangement) treats of the relations of words to one another.
302. Attributive and Predicate. – Anttributive word, it is taken for granted, modifies another word ; a predicate word is stated to modify another word. Thus, in ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ the good man, ἀγαθός is an Attributive adjective; in ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός ἐστιν the man is good, ἀγαθός is a Predicate adjective.
In Greek, attributive and predicate words are usually distinguished by their position with reference to the article (see §§ 451 and 453).
1. Anttributive may be an adjective, a limiting genitive (§§ 348–355), an adverb with adjective force (§ 429, 1), or a prepositional phrase.
VIII · The Sentence
303. A sentence expresses a thought, and contains a Subject and a Predicate.
304. The Subject. – The subject must be a substantive, or some word or words having the value of a substantive: thus, ὁ παῖς γράφει the child is writing, ἐγὼ γράφω I am writing, οἱ τότε ἀνδρεῖοι ἦσαν the men of that time were brave, ἔφυγον… περὶ ὀκτακοσίους about eight hundred fled Xn. Hell. 6, 5, 10.
305. Subject not Expressed. – The subject is not usually expressed when it is clearly indicated by the verb ending or by the context: thus, ἀκούω I hear, ἀκούσατε hear ye, ἐσάλ-πιγξε he (i.e. the trumpeter) sounded the trumpet Xn. A. 1, 2,17. ὔει it (i.e. Ζεύς or ὁ θεός) rains, φᾱσί they (i.e. people) say, τὸν λαμπτῆρα ἐγγὺς προσενεγκάτω let him (i.e. the servant) bring the light close Xn. Symp. 5, 2.
Note. – The origin of the so-called impersonal use of the verb (which is comparatively rare in Greek) is probably to be explained in this way (§ 303): thus, δεῖ μάχης (the condition of affairs) needs a battle, παρεσκεύασταί μοι (things) have been made ready by me.
306. The Predicate. – The predicate is a verb or some word or words equivalent to a verb: thus, Δᾱρεῖος ἠσθένει Darius was ill, Κῦρος βασιλεὺς ἦν Cyrus was king, Κῦρος ἀνδρεῖος ἦν Cyrus was brave.
307. Copula. – When a verb like εἰμί am, γύγνομαι become, φαίνομαι appear, etc., is used merely to connect a predicate noun with the subject, it is called a Copula (cf. ἦν in the last two examples above).
308. Omission of the Verb. – The verb is sometimes omitted when it can be easily understood; especially the copula of the third person ἐστί is or εἰσί are: as ἐχθρῶν ἄδωρα δῶρα foes’ gifts no gifts S. Aj. 665. ὤρᾱ λέγειν (it's) time to speak, τῷ vόμῳ πειστέον obedience (is) to be rendered to the law. Τί ἄλλο οὗτοι ἢ ἐπεβούλευσαν; what else (did) these men than plot against us? Th. 3, 39.
Note. – Omission of the copula of the first or second person is rarely found: ἐγὼ… ἕτοιμος I (am) ready Dem. 4,29. σὺ αἴτιος you (are) to blame Xn. Symp. 6, 7.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE
309. A simple sentence contains but one subject and one predicate, as Δᾱρεῖος ἠσθένει Darius was ill.
310. Enlargement of the Simple Sentence. – The subject of a sentence may be enlarged by an attributive (§ 302, 1) or appositive (§ 317) τὸ Μένωνος στράτευμα ἀφῑ́κετο Menon’s army arrived, Δάρεῖος ὁ βασιλεὺς ἠσθένει Darius the king was ill.
311. The predicate of a sentence may be enlarged by an object (direct or indirect, §§ 329 and 375) or cognate accusative (§ 381), or by adverbial words or phrases: thus, τῇ στρατιᾷ ἀπέδωκε Κῦρος μισθόν Cyrus paid the army wages, ἐνῑ́κησε τὴν μάχην he won the battle, εὖ λέγεις περὶ τούτων you speak well about this matter.
THE COMPOUND SENTENCE
312. A compound sentence consists of two or more codrdinate simple sentences: thus, τόνδε πέμψομεν… σὺ δὲ θανῇ him wéll send, and you shall die Ε. Ι.Τ. 614.
1. The subject or predicate of a compound sentence is not needlessly repeated: thus, ὁ δὲ πείθεται καὶ συλλαµβάνει Κῦρον he was persuaded (§ 525), and (he) arrested Cyrus Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. εἶχε τὸ μὲν δεξιὸν Μένων καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ Menon occupied the right wing, and those with him (occupied it) Xn. A. 1, 2,15. σύ τε γὰρ Ἕλλην εἶ καὶ ἡμεῖς for you are a Greek, and (so are) we Xn. A. 2, 1, 10.
Note. – Here belongs the phrase καὶ οὗτος and he, and this, commonly found in the neuter plural καὶ ταῦτα and that too: thus, Μένωνα δὲ οὐκ ἐζήτει, καὶ ταῦτα παρ’ Ἀριαίου ὢν τοῦ Μένωνος ξένου he did not ask for Menon, and that too (he didn’t do) although ke was from Ariaeus, Menon's guest-friend Xn. Α. 2, 4, 15.
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE
313. A complex sentence consists of a main and a subordinate sentence: thus, καὶ βασιλεὺς μὲν δὴ, ἐπεὶἤκουσε Τισσαφέρνους τὸν Κῡ́ρου στόλον, ἀντιπαρεσκευάζετο and the King, of course, when he had heard from Tissaphernes of Cyrus's move, made counter-preparations Xn. A. 1, 2, 5. εἰ μὲν δὴ δίκαια ποιῄσω οὐκ οἶδα whether I shall do right I know not Xn. A. 1, 3, 5. ἐπορευόμην ἵνα… ὠφελοίην αὐτόν I marched to help him Xn. A. 1,3, 4.
Note. – A complex sentence may include more than one subordinate sentence, and a subordinate sentence may in turn have other subordinate sentences dependent on it: thus, ὁ & ὡς ἀπῆλθε…, βου-λεύεται ὅπως μήποτε ἔτι ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ, ἀλλὰ, ἣν δύνηται, βασι-λεῦσει ἀντ’ ἐκείνου when he came back…, he planned to be no longer in the power of his brother, but, if possible, to be king in his stead. Subordinated to the main sentence, βουλεύεται, are the sentences ὡς ἀπῆλθε, ὅπως… ἔσται, and… βασιλεύσει while… βασιλείσει has dependent on it another subordinate sentence, ἣν δύνηται Xn. A. 1, 1, 4.
VIII · Agreement
314. General Principles of Agreement. – The inflected parts of speech, in general, indicate their relations with other words by agreeing, so far as possible, in gender, number, case, and person, with the words they modify. So a word in apposition with another word stands in the same case (§ 817), an adjective agrees with its substantive in gender, number, and case (§ 420), a pronoun takes the number and gender (and sometimes the person) of its antecedent (§ 462), and a finite verb agrees with its subject in number and person (§ 495).
Note. – Observe that as verbs have no distinction of gender, so substantives (and some pronouns, § 462) have no distinction of person, and may be used with any person (although most frequently with the third), as: Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω παρὰ σέ (1), Themistocles, have come to you Th. 1, 137. εἰ βούλεσθέ µοι οἴ τε στρατηγοὶ καὶ οἱ λοχαγοὶ ἐλθεῖν… if (you) generals and captains are willing to come and see me Xn. Α.2, 5,25. ὄς γε κελεύεις (you) who bid Xn. Mem. 2, 3, 15.
315. Construction according to Sense.– A word not infrequently violates the formal rules of grammar by agreeing with the real gender or number of the word it modifies.
So a collective substantive often has a verb or participle in the plural (§§ 321, 500); neuter words or circumlocutions (like βίη Ἡρακληείη mighty Heracles, lit. the might of Heracles) denoting persons often have participles or relative pronouns agreeing with their real gender (§§ 422, 464).
316. Attraction. – Sometimes a word, owing to the influence of other neighboring or preceding words, takes different number, gender, case, or mode, from that expected, or even demanded, by the construction of the clause in which it stands; this is called Attraction.
So an adjective standing with an infinitive may be attracted into the accusative, although the word it really modifies is in the genitive or dative (§ 631, 1); a pronoun may be attracted to the case of its antecedent (§ 484) or to the gender of its predicate substantive (§ 465); a verb may be attracted to the number of its predicate substantive (§ 501) or to the mode or tense of another verb on which it depends (§ 590, notes 1 and 4).
VIII · Syntax of Substantives
AGREEMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES
APPOSITION
31791. A substantive used to describe another substantive word, if it denotes the same thing, agrees with it in case (Apposition) ; if possible, it agrees also in number and gender, but this cannot always be: thus, Κῦρος ὁ βασιλεύς Cyrus, the king, Κῦρος καὶ Κροῖσος οἱ βασιλεῖς Cyrus and Croesus, the kings (cf. § 421), ὁ Εὐφρᾱ́της ποταμός the river Euphrates, but Πέλται πόλις οἰκουμένη Peltae an inhabited city.
318. Apposition to a Sentence. – A substantive (in the nominative or accusative case) may stand in apposition to the thought expressed by a sentence. καὶ, τὸ μέγιστον, ἐφοβεῖτο ὅτι ὀφθήσεσθαι ἔμελλε and – most important of all – he was afraid because he was likely to be seen Xn. Cy. 3, 1, 1. εὐδαιμονοίης, μισθὸν ἠδίστων λόγων happiness be yours – reward for sweetest words E. El. 231.
Note.– A word in apposition with a sentence may acquire an adverbial force: thus, δεύτερον αὖ Σολύμοισι μαχέσσατο and secondly (lit. the second thing) he battled with the Solymi Z 184. (For χάριν for the sake of see § 336).
319. Partitive Apposition. – A word in apposition may describe only in part the word to which it refers: thus, οἰκίαι αί μὲν πολλαὶ ἐπεπτώκεσαν, ὀλίγαι δὲ περιῆσαν the houses mostly had fallen, but a few were still left Th. 1, 89. οὗτοι... ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει these say one one thing, another another Xn. A. 2, 1, 15.
PREDICATE SUBSTANTIVE
320. A substantive used asa predicate (cf. §§ 326, 341) agrees in case (often also in number and gender, cf. § 317) with the word it describes: thus, ἂν έρες ἔστε, φίλοι be men, my friends O 734. Δᾱρεῖος βασιλεὺς ἣν Darius was king. ἡ πόλις… φρούριον κατέστη the city turned itself into a fortress Th. 7, 28. αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε he made him satrap Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. τούτοις χρῶνται δορυφόροις these they use as body-guards Xn. Hier. 5, 3.
Note.– Observe the difference between the construction of the predicate substantive and that of the direct object (§ 329). Words meaning be, become, appear, choose, regard, name, and the like, can have a predicate substantive.
PECULIARITIES IN THE MEANING OF SUBSTANTIVES
321. Collectives. – A collective substantive, while singular in form, may really have a plural meaning (cf. § 815): so (ἡ) ἵππος cavalry, δῆμος people, πλῆθος multitude, etc. Τροίᾱν ἑλόντες ᾿Αργείων στόλος the Argives, army (which had) taken Troy Aesch. Ag. 577.
322. Abstract for Concrete. – Anbstract substantive is often used with concrete meaning (Antonomasia): thus, μῖσος hateful thing (lit. hate), ὄλεθρος baneful person (lit. destruction), κήδευµα relative (lit. relationship) ; so, by a similar process, τὰ ὅπλα (lit. arms) = camp, ἰχθύες (lit. fish) = fish market, etc.
VIII · The Cases
323. In earlier times Greek (or, at any rate, its parent language) possessed three other cases besides those in regu- lar classical use. These were: (1) Ablative (separation), (2) Instrumental (including accompaniment), and (9) Loca- tive (place where). The ablative has become one with the genitive, and the instrumental has been absorbed by the dative. Of the locative some traces still remain (see § 76, note), but most of its forms and functions have been absorbed by the dative.
324. The Greeks had a keen sense of the finer shades of meaning conveyed by the different cases, and did not hesitate to use different constructions with the same word: thus, ἀκούεν λόγου to hear a speech (§ 356), ἀκούειν λόγον to hear (the whole of) a speech (§ 856 note 1), ἀκούειν λόγον to hearken (i.e. be obedient) to a speech (§ 376).
1. Often a combination of words may demand the use of a certain case which no one of them alone could command: as ἐμαυτῇ διὰ λόγων ἀφϊκόμην (= ἐμαυτῇ δι-ελέχθην) I have held converse with myself (lit. come through words with myself) Ε. Med. 872.
2. So verbs compounded with a preposition are thereby (either with the help of the preposition alone, or from the general meaning of the compound) enabled to take a case which the simple verb could not command. (See §§ 345, 370, and 394.)
VIII · The Nominative and Vocative Case
3. For practical purposes it becomes necessary to classify these various usages, and in the following pages the v arious uses of the cases are given in detail, but in the use of the cases, as elsewhere, analogy is at work, and it must be remembered that not every use of a case can be put into the grammatical pigeon holes here provided. (As a rule, only the general principles are here stated, and the exact usage with any particular word is always to be learned from the lexicons.)
THE NOMINATIVE
325. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative case: thus, ἠσθένει Δᾱρεῖος Darius was ill, ὅστις ἀφικνοῖτο whosoever came, μηδεὶς νοµισάτω let nobody think.
326. A noun in the predicate (§ 320) agreeing with the subject of a finite verb is also in the nominative case: thus, Κῦρος βασιλεὺς ἦν Cyrus was king.
Note. – The nominative is not infrequently used in address and exclamations where we might expect the vocative: thus, Ζεῦ πάτερ Ἠέλιός θ’, ὃς πάντ’ ἐφορᾷς Father Zeus and the Sun who lookest on all things Γ 277, Κλέαρχε καὶ Πρόξενε καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι οἱ παρόντες Ἕλληνες Clearchus, Prozenus, and you other Greeks here present Xn. A. 1,5, 10, Οὗτος, τί πάσχεις Here you, what's the matter? Ar. V. 1, Σχέτλιος hard of heart! E 403.
THE VOCATIVE
327. The person (or thing) addressed stands in the Vocative case, often preceded by ὦ: thus, ἄνθρωπε, τί ποιεῖς man, what are you doing? Xn. Cy. 2, 2, T. ὦ ἄνδρες Αθηναῖοι men of Athens. (Cf. § 326, note.)
VIII · The Accusative
328. The function of the Accusative is to modify closely and directly the meaning of the verb.
DIRECT OBJECT
329. The direct object of a transitive verb stands in the accusative case: thus, τὸν ἄνδρα ὁρῶ I see the man Xn. A. 1, 8, 26.
1. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek have no transitive equivalent in English. The following are noteworthy: ὀμνύναι τοὺς θεούς to swear by the gods, λανθάνειν τινά to escape the notice of anybody, αἰδεῖσθαι or αἰσχῡ́νεσθαί τινα to feel ashamed before anybody.
2. On the other hand, many Greek intransitive verbs which are followed by a genitive or dative can be rendered vinto English by transitive verbs. See §§ 356 and 376.
330. Circumlocutions equivalent to a transitive verb may, of course, take an object in the accusative (cf. §324, 1): thus, ἐπιστήμονες ἦσαν τὰ προσήκοντα they understood their duties Xn. Cy. 3, 3, 9. συνθήκᾶς ἔξαρνος γίγνεται he denies the agreement Dem. 23,171. ἔστι... τὰ μετέωρα φροντιστής he is a student of things above Pl. Ap. 18 b. So the verbs λέγω say and ποιῶ (-έω) do, with the help of an adverb or cognate accusative (§ 331), are enabled to take a direct object of the person: as εὖ or κακῶς λέγειν τινα to speak good or ill of anybody (cf. § 340).
THE COGNATE ACCUSATIVE
331. In Greek, almost any verb, intransitive or transitive, may be followed by an accusative of kindred meaning with the verb, to define it more closely: thus, δρόµον δραμεῖν to run a race, ἀρίστην βουλὴν βουλεύειν to plan the best plan, Ι T4, ηὐτύχησαν τοῦτο τὸ εὐτύχημα they had this good luck Xn. A. 6, 3, 6, συνέφυγε τὴν φυγὴν ταύτην he had his share in this banishment Pl. Ap. 21 a.
332. Circumlocutions equivalent to a verb may, of course, take a cognate accusative (cf. § 330): thus, σοφὸς ὤν τὴν ἐκείνων σοφίᾱν being wise in their wisdom Pl. Ap. 22 e.
333. The Greeks were very fond of the construction of the cognate accusative, and used it with astonishing freedom. Often the kindred meaning of the accusative is only implied in the verb. The following examples will serve better than explanation to make the matter clear: ζῶ βίον µοχθηρόν I live a grievous life S. El. 599. ἀπόλωλε κακὸν μόρον he has perished (by) an evil fate, a 166. ἠγωνίζοντο… στάδιον they competed in foot-racing Xn. A. 4, 8, 27. τὰ Λύκαια ἔθῡσε he celebrated by sacrifice the Lycaean (festival) Xn. Α. 1, 2, 10. So ἕλκος οὐτάσαι to make a wound, ὁδὸν πορεύεσθαι to make a journey, πλεῖν θάλατταν to sail the sea, ἐξελαύνει… σταθμοὺς τρεῖς he marches three days’ journey, πῦρ πνεῖν to breathe (forth) fire, πῦρ… δεδορκώς looking fire τ 446. ἡ βουλὴ… ἔβλεψε νᾶπυ the Senate looked mustard Ar. Eq. 631. δεινός εἰμι ταύτην τὴν τέχνην I am clever at this business (cf. § 330) Xn. Cy. 8, 4, 18.
334. A neuter adjective or pronoun is often used as a cognate accusative, since the substantive with which it would agree is already implied in the verb: thus, οὐδὲν ψεύδεται hés telling no lie (i.e. οὐδὲν ψεῦδος ψεύδεται) Ar. Ach. 561. τοῦτο ἠρώτᾱ he asked this question (i.e. τοῦτο τὸ ἐρώτημα), μεγάλα ὠφελεῖν to help greatly, τί χρήσεται αὐτῷ what use will he make of him Ar. Ach. 935. τί κατάκειµαι; why am I lying down? Xn. A. 3,1, 13.
33592. Accusative of the Part Affected. – Closely allied with the cognate accusative is the accusative of the Part Affected, found mostly with passive and intransitive verbs (see § 335 a): thus, βόθληαι κενεῶνα you are hit in the belly E 284. τᾱ́ς φρένας ὑγιαίνειν to be sound in mind Hdt. 3, 33. ἀλγεῖν τοὺς πόδας to have gout Xn. Mem. 1, 6, 6. τί τὸ δέρμ᾽ ἔπαθες what's the matter with your hide? (lit. what have you experienced in your skin?) Ar. Pax 746.
336. ADVERBIAL USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE.
– From the free use in Greek of the cognate accusative (§ 383), there have arisen several adverbial uses of the accusative: thus, τὴν ταχίστην (50. ὁδόν) the shortest way (originally with a. verb of motion), τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον in this manner, χάριν Τον the sake of (originally an accusative in apposition with a sentence, § 818; o.g. ἐμὴν χάριν for my sake), δίκην in the fashion of, like (e.g. πώλου δίκην like a colt), οὗ . +. ἀρχήν not at all (i.e. not (to make) even the begin- ning), μέγα (μεγάλα) greatly, τὸ πολύ (τὰ πολλά) for the most part, πρῶτον at first, πρότερον formerly, τὸ Ἄοιπόν for the future, τέλος finally, and a good many others whose meanings will readily suggest themselves. Here belong also the comparative and superlative of adverbs in –ως (§ 188).
337. Accusative of Specification. – The accusative case of certain much used words like ὄνομα name, ὔψος height, εὖρος width, μέγεθος size (perhaps originally cognate), very early came to be felt as adverbial, and soon other accusatives came to be used in the same way: thus, ποταμὸς Κύδνος ὄνομα, εὖρος δύο πλέθρων a river, Cydnus by name, two plethra in width Xn. A. 1, 2, 23. πόδας ὠκὺς ᾽Αχιλλεύς Achilles swift of foot, Hm. τυφλὸς τά ὦτα τόν τε νοῦν τά τ’ ὄμματ’ εἶ blind in ears, and mind, and eyes, art thou, S. Ο.Τ. 371.
338. Accusative of Extent. – The accusative (modifying a verb) is used to denote the extent of time or space: thus, ἔμεινεν ἡμέρᾱς πέντε he remained five days Xn. A. 1, 2,11. ἀπέχει ἡ Πλάταια τῶν Θηβῶν σταδίους ἑβδομήκοντα Plataea is seventy stades from Thebes Th. 2, 5.
Note. – Many accusatives denoting extent can readily be seen to be cognate: thus, ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς he marches (a march of) three days’ journey Xn. A. 1, 2,5. ἑβίω ἔτη ἓξ καὶ ἐνενήκοντα he lived (a life of) ninety-six years, Isaeus 6, 18. From such verbs as these the usage came to be extended to other verbs.
33993. Accusative of Limit of Motion. – The limit of motion in Greek is expressed by the accusative (in prose regularly with the help of a preposition): thus, ἐξελαύνει… εἰς Κολοσσᾱ́ς he marched to Colossae Xn. A. 1, 2,6.
TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB
340. Since the cognate accusative may be used with transitive verbs (§ 831), it follows that some verbs may take two accusatives, one of the object and the other cognate: thus, τοσοῦτον ἔχθος ἐχθαίρω σε with such hatred do I hate thee S. El. 1034. Μέλητός µε ἐγράψατο τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην Meletus brought this indictment against me PΙ. Ap. 19 b. Κῦρος τὸ στράτευμα κατένειµε δώδεκα μέρη Cyrus divided his army into twelve divisions Xn. Cy. T, 5, 13. ταῦτα τοῦτον ἐποίησα this I did to him Hdt. 1, 115. τοὺς Κορινθίους πολλά τε καὶ κακὰ ἔλεγε he said many bad things of the Corinthians Hdt. 8, 61. Κῦρον αἰτεῖν πλοῖα to demand vessels of Cyrus Xn. A. 1, 3, 14. πολλὰ διδάσκει μ᾿ ὁ πολὺς βίοτος long life teaches me many lessons Ε. Hipp. 252. ἀναμνήσω ὑμᾶς καὶ τοὺς… κινδύνους I will remind you also of the dangers Xn. A. 3, 2, 11. ἀφαιρεῖσθαι τοὺς… Ἕλληνας τὴν γῆν to deprive the Greeks of their land Xn. A. 1, 3, 4. τὴν μὲν θυγατέρα ἔκρυπτε τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ἀνδρός from his daughter he concealed her husband's death Lys. 32, 7.
Among these verbs are those meaning to ask, teach, clothe, remind, conceal, deprive, say (anything) of or do (anything) to (a person), and many others.
1. When these verbs are used in the passive, the cognate accusative is retained in the same case (§ 512): thus, τύπτεσθαι… πεντήκοντα πληγᾱ́ς to be struck fifty blows Aeschin. 1, 139. μουσικὴν… παιδευθείς instructed in music Pl. Menex. 236 a. τοῦτο οὐκ ἐψεύσθησαν in this they were not deceived Xn. A. 2, 2, 13.
341. Predicate Accusative. – Verbs meaning to make, name, appoint, regard, and the like, may have a predicate accusative agreeing with the object (§ 320): thus, στρατηγὸν αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε he appointed him general Xn. Α. 1, 1, 2. ἀύπνους ἄμμε τίθησθα you make us wakeful ι 404. νόµιζε τὴν μὲν πατρίδα οἶκον regard your native land as your house Xn. Hier. 11, 14.
1. This construction is exactly parallel with ὁ Κῦρος στρατηηὸς ἀπεδείχθη Cyrus was appointed general, and in the passive construction both accusatives become nominatives (§ 511).
PARTICULAR USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE
342. Subject of the Infinitive. – The subject of the infinitive stands in the accusative case (see § 629).
Note. – Originally the accusative in this construction was probably a direct object, while the infinitive (a verbal substantive, § 628) was used to define the verb still further, but as the infinitive partook more and more of the functions of the verb, the origin of the construction was forgotten, and the accusative came to be used with great freedom as the subject of any infinitive.
343. Accusative Absolute. – The participle of an impersonal verb (§ 305, note), having no grammatical connection with the rest of the sentence, stands in the Accusative Absolute (§ 658).
Note. – No doubt the accusative absolute, like the genitive absolute (§ 369), owes its origin to a loosening of its grammatical connection with the rest of the sentence. So in a sentence like ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω even a fool can see a thing thut's been done P 32, or δεδογµένον δὲ αὐτοῖς εἰθὺς μὲν ἀδύνατα ἦν ἐπιχειρεῖν it was impossible to take up arms at once – a thing which had been voted by them (cf. § 318) Th. 1, 125, the participle came to be thought of as having little or no connection with the rest of the sentence (“when a thing has been done – even a fool can see it,” and “it having been voted by them,” etc.), and so such participles came to be freely used as an independent construction.
344. Accusative of Swearing. – The accusative is used in oaths, regularly preceded by νή or μά: νή or ναὶ μά is always affirmative; οὐ µά or µά alone is negative: thus, νὴ Δία by Zeus, ναὶ μά Δία yes, by Zeus, οὐ µά Δία or µά Δία no, by Zeus.
345. Accusative with Compound Verbs. – Some verbs by being compounded with a preposition, which can be used with the accusative (§ 346), are, thus, enabled to take an accusative which they could not otherwise command (§ 324, 2): thus, ἐσπλέοντι τὸν Ἰόνιον κόλπον (= πλέοντι ἐς τὸν... κόλπον, § 398, note 1) to one sailing into the Ionian Gulf, Th. 1, 91. τοῦτον διαβᾱ́ς having crossed this [river] Xn. Α.1, 2, 6. ὑπέρβη λᾱ́ινον οὐδόν he stepped over the threshold of stone, θ 80.
346. Prepositions with the Accusative. – The use of the Accusative to express Extent (§ 998) or Limit of Motion (§ 339) is often made more clear and definite by the help of prepositions. The preposition εἰς into (as well as the improper preposition ὡς to), from its meaning, can be used only with the accusative; so also in prose ἀνά up. Other prepositions used sometimes with the accusative are ἀμφί about, διά through, ἐπί towards, κατά down, µετά after, παρά to the side of, περί round about, πρός towards, ὑπέρ above, ὑπό under. For the details of their use see §§ 400–417.
VIII · The Genitive
347. The uses of the genitive in Greek can be grouped under two heads: the true genitive and the ablative genitive (§ 361), but in many instances the two have become fused together, and not every use of the genitive can be surely referred to one or the other in fact, many uses of the genitive are very hard to classify: thus, δέπας οἴνου cup of wine may appear to some a partitive genitive (§ 355), to others a descriptive genitive (of material, § 352, and note); ταύτης τῆς γενεᾶς εἰμι l am of this race may appear to some a descriptive genitive (§ 352), to others a genitive of source (§ 365), to others still a partitive genitive (§ 355), and many other examples of a similar sort might be quoted.
A. THE TRUE GENITIVE
POSSESSIVE GENITIVE
348. The genitive limiting a substantive may denote Possession or Belonging: thus, οἰκίᾱ́ πατρός father's house, κῡ́ματα τῆς θαλάττης waves of the sea, Ἑλένη ἡ Διός Helen the (daughter) of Zeus.
1. The possessive genitive can stand equally well in the predicate: thus, αἱ κῶμαι… Παρυσᾱ́τιδος ἦσαν the villages were Parysatis’ Xn. A. 1, 4, 0. νομίζει ὑμᾶς ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι he thinks you are his own Xn. A. 2, 1, 11. τῶν γὰρ μάχῃ νῑκώντων καὶ τὸ ἄρχειν ἐστίν for to rule is also (the right) of those who conquer in battle Xn. A. 2, 1, 4.
Note. – The possessive genitive is often used with the definite article when the substantive with which the article would agree can be easily supplied (see § 421): thus, Πολέμαρχος ὁ Κεφάλου Polemarchus the (son of) Cephalus, τὰ τῆς πόλεως the (affairs) of the State; so also εἰς τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ to my brother's (i.e. to his house).
2. The meaning of the possessive genitive is often made more clear by the addition of adjectives like ἴδιος one’s own, οἰκεῖος belonging to one’s house, ἱερός sacred (to): thus, ἱερὸς ὁ χῶρος τῆς ᾿Aρτέμιδος the place is (a) sacred (place) of Artemis Xn. A. 5, 8, 13.
SUBJECTIVE GENITIVE
349. A genitive limiting a substantive sometimes expresses the relation which would be expressed by the subject of a verb: thus, φόβος τῶν πολεµίων fear of the enemy (i.e. οἱ πολέµιοι φοβοῦνται the enemy are afraid), εὔνοια τῶν πολιτῶν good will of the citizens.
Note. – The line between the subjective and the possessive (8 348) genitive is very hard to draw, for the two imperceptibly shade into each other.
OBJECTIVE GENITIVE
350. The genitive may express the relation which would be expressed by the object (direct or indirect) of a verb: thus, φόβος τῶν πολεµίων fear of the enemy (i.e. φοβεῖral τις τοὺς πολεμίους some one fears the enemy), εὔνοια τῶν πολιτῶν good will toward the citizens (i.c. εὐνοεῖ τις τοῖς π.ολίταυς some one is well disposed toward the citizens), ἐπιθῡμία τῆς σοφίᾶς desire for wisdom, τούτων αἰτίᾷ the cause of this.
351. Objective Genitive with Adjectives. – Adjectives kindred to verbs which take an object may be followed by an objective genitive ἐπιστήμων τῆς τέχνης understanding the art Pl. Go. 448 b. ὀψιμαθὴς τῆς ἀδικίᾱς late in learning injustice Pl. Rep. 409 b. τούτων αἴτιος responsible for this Ar. Eq. 1356.
DESCRIPTIVE GENITIVE
352. The genitive may describe the substantive which it limits: thus, παῖς δέκα ἐτῶν a boy of ten years, χιλίων δραχμῶν δίκη a thousand drachmae suit, ἀργυρίου μνᾶ a silver mina, ἅμαξαι σῑ́τον wagon loads of grain, Τροίης πτολίεθρον city of Troy (poetic; cf. § 317).
Note. – The descriptive genitive is often subdivided into genitive of measure, material, value, etc.
1. The descriptive genitive often stands in the predicate (cf. § 348, 1): thus, ἦν ἐτῶν ὡς τριᾱ́κοντα he was about thirty years old Xn. A. 2, 6, 20. ἡ κρηπίς ἐστι λίθων μεγάλων the foundation is of large stones Hdt. 1, 93.
Note. – Here doubtless belongs the infinitive of purpose with τοῦ used by Thucydides and later writers (5 639): as φρούριον ἐπ' αὐτοῦ ἦν… τοῦ μὴ ἐσπλεῖν Μεγαρεῦσι μηδ' ἐκπλεῖν μηδέν on it there was a fort so that nothing should sail in or out for the Megarians, Th. 2, 93.
353. Genitive of Value. – With words of valuing, buying, selling, and the like, the genitive (perhaps originally a descriptive genitive, § 352) is used to denote the valueor price: thus, μείζονος αὐτὰ τῑμῶνται they value them more highly Xn. Cy. 2, 1, 13. δραχμῆς πρίασθαι to buy for a drachma PL. Ap. 26 e. τῶν πόνων πωλοῦσιν ἡμῖν πάντα τᾱγάθ' οἱ θεοί the gods sell all things to us at the price of toil Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 20 (from Epicharmus). πόσου διδάσκει; πέντε μνῶν what is his price for instruction? Five minae Pl. Ap. 20 b.
Note. – But if the price is regarded as the means of acquiring a thing, it stands in the dative (see § 387).
1. The genitive of value may be made more clear by the help of adjectives like ἄξιος worthy, ἀνάξιος unworthy, ἀντάξιος equivalent, etc.: thus, ἄξιος πολλοῦ worth much, ἀνάξια ἐμοῦ (things) unworthy of me Pl. Ap. 38 e.
PARTITIVE GENITIVE
354. A word denoting anything of which only a part is considered, stands in the genitive case.
355. Partitive Genitive with Substantives. – A substantive (or substantive pronoun) may be described by a genitive denoting the whole of which it is a part: thus, τῶν πελταστῶν ἀνήρ a man of the peltasts Xn. A. 4, 8, 4. ἧλθον ἐξ Ἐφέσου τῆς ᾿Ιωνίᾱς they came from Ephesus (a part) of Ionia Xn. A. 2, 2, 6. οἱ ἁλόντες Ἑλλήνων those of the Greeks who were captured Hdt. 7, 175. πολλοὶ τῶν στρατιωτῶν many of the soldiers, οὐδεὶς τῶν πολεμίων no one of the enemy, εἰς τοσοῦτον τόλµης to such a (point) of boldness Lys. 12, 22.
1. Adjectives or adverbs of the superlative degree are often followed by a partitive genitive (§ 427, 1): thus, βέλτιστος ἀνθρώπων best (man) of men.
Here belong also poetical expressions like δῖα γυναικῶν divine among women δ 305, etc.
Note. – The partitive genitive with substantives has commonly the predicate position (§ 454).
2. The partitive genitive can stand equally well in the predicate: thus, ἦν δὲ καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης τῶν ἀμφὶ Μίλητον στρατενοµένων Socrates also was (one) of those engaged in military operations around Miletus Xn. A. 1, 2, 3. ἐμὲ… θὲς τῶν πεπεισµένων put me down as (one) of the converts PL. Rep. 424 c.
356. Partitive Genitive with Verbs. – Any verb whose action affects the object only in part is regularly followed by the genitive. Many verbs, from their meaning, are almost always so used, others only occasionally. Thus, verbs meaning to share, touch, take hold of, be full of, begin, aim at, hit, miss, taste of, smell of, enjoy, hear, remember and forget, care for and neglect, spare, desire, exercise authority (in some respect) over, and the like, regularly take the genitive: thus, λαβόντας τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ στρατοῦ taking (part) of the barbarian army Xn. A.1, 5, 7. τῆς γῆς ἔτεμον they ravaged (some) of the country Th. 1, 30. δεῖ ὑμᾶς… τῶν κινδῡ́νων μετέχειν you must share the dangers Xn. Hell. 2, 4, 9. συλλήψομαι δὲ τοῦδέσοι κἀγὼ πόνου but I too will take part with you in this task Ε. Med. 946. λάβε πέτρης, τῆς ἔχετο he seized hold of the rock, and to this he clung ε 428. τὰ ᾿Αναξαγόρου βιβλία γέµει τούτων τῶν λόγων Anazagoras’ books are full of these subjects Pl. Ap. 26 d. τοῦ λόγου δὲ ἤρχετο ὧδε and thus, he began his speech Xn. A. 3, 2, 7. παιδὸς ὀρέξατο he reached for his child Ζ 466. νῑ́κης τετυχήκαµεν we have met with victory Xn. Cy. 4, 1, 2. λωτοῖο φαγών eating of lotus ι 102. ὀλίγοι… σῑ́τον ἐγεύσαντο few tasted of food Xn. A. 3, 1, 3. δαιτὸς ὄνησο enjoy the banquet τ 68. τῆς κραυγῆς ᾔσθοντο they perceived the shouting Xn. Hell. 4, 4, 4. δέδοικα μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ I fear lest we forget the homeward way Xn. A. 3, 2, 25. σέθεν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὐκ ἀλεγίζω but I care not for you A 180. τούτων τῶν µαθηµάτων πάλαι ἐπιθῡμῶ I have long been desirous of this learning Xn. Mem. 2, 6, 30. ἐκράτουν τῆς θαλάσσης they were masters of the sea Th. 1, 80. Χειρίσοφος ἡγεῖτο τοῦ στρατεύματος Chirisophus led the army Xn. A. 4, 1, 6.
Note 1. – Of course, when these verbs affect the object as a whole, they take the accusative: thus, οὐ µετέλαβε τὸ πέµπτον µέρος τῶν ψήφων he did not get (as his share) the fifth part of the votes PL. Αp. 36 a. θεοῦ ἔκλυεν αὐδήν he heard the voice of the god O 270. πίε οἶνον drink wine I 347. ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν Ὀρόντᾱν they seized Orontas by the girdle (i.e. they seized Orontas, but took hold of his girdle) Xn. A. 1, 6, 10. ἣν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν τέμωμεν if we ravage their land Th. 1, 81.
Note 2. – As partitive is to be explained the genitive with verbs of imploring (poetic): as ἐμὲ λισσέσκετο γούνων she besought me by (taking hold of) my knees I 451.
357. Partitive Genitive with Adjectives. – Adjectives (and sometimes their adverbs) of kindred meaning with verbs which take the partitive genitive (§ 356) may also be construed with the genitive. See also § 851. (Usually such adjectives stand with a copula, thus, forming a circumlocution equivalent toa verb; cf. § 330): thus, μέτοχος σοφίᾱς partaking of wisdom, μεστὸς κακῶν full of evil, λήθης ὢν πλέως being full of forgetfulness Pl. Rep. 486 c. ἐπιστήμης κενὸς void of knowledge (but cf. § 362, 2 and §347), πλούσιος φρονήῄσεως rich in wisdom, ὑπήκοος τῶν γονέων obedient to his parents Pl. Rep. 463 d. κακῶν ἄγευστος without taste of evil S. Ant. 582. ἀμνήμων κακῶν unmindful of evil E. Ἠ. F. 1397 (but cf. § 351).
35894. (Partitive) Genitive of Place. – The partitive genitive (in prose regularly with the help of a preposition or adverb, see §§ 308–418) is used to denote the place within some part of which an action takes place: thus, ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go (into any part of the county) ahead Xn. A. 1, 3, 1. So also δεξιᾶς and ἀριστερᾶς (sc. χειρὸς) on the right and on the left (hand): τὸ δὲ ἀριστερῆς χερὸς ἕστηκε and it stands (on a portion of the ground) on the left Hdt. 5, 77. So περὶ τρόπιος about (part of) the keel, διὰ πεδίου through (part of) the plain, πέρᾶν τοῦ ποταμοῦ (in some part of the space) across the river, πλησίον τοῦ δεσµωτηρίου (in some part of the space) near the prison, etc.
Here belong also the adverbs in –ου like ποῦ, οὐδαμοῦ, etc. (§ 137, 1).
359. (Partitive) Genitive of Time. – The genitive is used to denote the time within some part of which an action takes place: thus, βασιλεὺς οὐ μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν the king will not fight (at any time) within ten days Xn. A. 1, 7, 18: so frequently ἡμέρᾱς by day, νυκτός by night, χειμῶνος in the winter, etc.
360. Partitive Genitive with Adverbs. – Adverbs of place and time (rarely others) may be used with a partitive genitive (sce §§ 358, 359): thus, ποῦ γῆς where on earth (Latin ubinam gentium). οὐδαμῇ Αἰγύπτου nowhere in Egypt, οὐχ ὁρᾶς ἵν κακοῦ you see not in what plight of ill you are S. Aj. 886. πόρρω τοῦ βίου far on in life PL Ap.38 c. ὀψὲ τῆς ἡμέρᾶς late in the day. πῶς ἔχεις δόξης; in what state of opinion are you? PL. Rep. 456 d.
Note. – The partitive genitive with adverbs is by some authors used very freely; as χρημάτων εὖ ἥκοντες being well off in money Hdt. 5, 62. Ἀθηναῖοι ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον τάχιστα ἐβοήθεον the Athenians, with all possible speed of fool, went to assist Hdt. 6, 116.
B. THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE
361. The genitive performs also the duties of the original ablative which it has absorbed (see § 998).
GENITIVE OF SEPARATION
36295. The ablative genitive is used with words denoting or implying separation: thus, –
1. With Verbs. – ἀπεῖχον τῆς Ἑλλάδος, they were distant from Greece Xn. A. 3, 1, 2. ἡ νῆσος οὗ πολὺ διέχει τῆς ἠπείρου the island is not far distant from the mainland Th. 3, 51. δυοῖν ἀδελφοῖν ἑστερήθημεν δύο of two brothers were we two bereft S. Ant. 13. τούτους... οὗ παύσω τῆς ἀρχῆς I shall not depose these from office Xn. Cyr 8, 6, 3. οὐδὲν διοίσεις Χαιρεφῶντος you will not differ at all from Chaerephon Av. Nub. 503.
2. With Αadjectives. – φίλων ἀγαθῶν ἔρημοι destitute of good friends Xn. Mem. 4, 4, 24. ὀρφανὸς ἀνδρῶν bereft of men Lys. 2. 60. ἕτερον τὸ ἡδὺ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ the pleasant is different from the good PL. Go. 500 d.
3. With Adverbs. – χωρὶς τῆς δόξης apart from the reputation Pl. Ap. 35 b. ἄνευ πλοίων without boats Xn. A 4. 2, 2, 3. πόρρω τῆς πόλεως far off from the city Xn. Hell. 4, 5, 14. διαφερόντως τῶν ἄλλων differently from the vest Xn. Hier. 7, 4.
Note. – Verbs of depriving sometimes take a genitive of separation instead of the accusative of § 340: thus, τῶν ἄλλων ἀφαιρούμενοι χρήματα taking away property from the rest Xn. Mem. 1, 5, 3. πόσων ἀπεστέρησθε of how much have you been bereft! Dem. 8, 63.
363. Genitive with Comparatives. – Adjectives and adverbs of the comparative degree may be followed by a genitive (of separation) of the thing compared (see § 426, 2): thus, χρῡσὸς δὲ κρείσσων μῡρίων λόγων gold is more potent than unnumbered words Ε. Med. 965. ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ τούτων at a time later than these (events) Hdt. 4, 166. [πονηρίᾱ] θᾶττον θανάτου θεῖ baseness runs swifter than death P1. Ap. 39 a.
364. Genitive with Verbs of Inferiority and Superiority. – Verbs denoting Inferiority or Superiority (or Comparison, § 363) may be followed by a genitive of separation: thus, τάχει… περιεγένου αὐτοῦ you surpassed him in quickness Xn. Cy. 3, 1, 19. τούτου… οὐχ ἧττησόµεθα εὖ ποιοῦντες we do not mean to be outdone by him in kindly deeds Xn. A. 2, 3, 23. τἰμαῖς τούτων ἐπλεονεκτεῖτε in honors you had the advantage of these men Xn. A. 3, 1, 37. Ἀβροκόμᾱς δὲ ὑστέρησε τῆς μάχης but Abrocomas was too late for the fight Xn. A. 1, 7, 19. ἡττῶντο τοῦ ὕδατος they were vanquished by the water Xn. Hell. 5, 2, 5.
Note. – Observe that the genitive (of separation) with these verbs differs from the (partitive) genitive of § 356 in that the accusative can never be substituted for it (§ 336, note 1).
GENITIVE OF SOURCE
365. The ablative genitive is sometimes used to denote the source: thus, μάθε δέ µου καὶ τάδε but learn of me this also Xn. Cy. 1, 6, 44. ἐμοῦ ἀκούσεσθε πᾶσαν τὴν ἁλήθειαν from me you shall hear the whole truth Pl. Ap. 17 b. Δᾱρείον καὶ Παρυσᾱ́τιδος γύγνονται παῖδες δύο of Darius and Parysatis were born two children Xn. A. 1, 1, 1.
GENITIVE OF CAUSE
366. The ablative genitive is sometimes used to express cause: thus, χωόμενος γυναικός angry because of a woman A 429. ἐθαύμασα τῆς τολμῆς τῶν λεγόντων… I have wondered at the effrontery of those who say Lys. 12, 41. τούτους… οἰκτέρω τῆς ἄγᾶν χαλεπῆς νόσου I pity them Τον their very serious infirmity Xn. Sym. 4, 37. καί σφεας τῑμωρήσομαι τῆς ἐνθάδε ἀπέξιος I shall punish them for their coming hither Hdt. 3, 145. The genitive with ἕνεκα concerning, on account of, and χάριν for the sake of, is probably a true genitive (§ 347): as ἐλευθερίᾱς ἕνεκα for the sake of freedom Dem. 18, 100.
Note. – Genitive of Exclamation. The genitive of cause is also used alone in exclamations: thus, ἀλλὰ τῆς ἐμῆς κάκης but (to think of) my cowardice! E. Med. 1051. φεῦ τοῦ ἀνδρός alas for the man! Xn. Cy. 3, 1, 39.
367. Genitive of the Charge or Penalty. – The genitive, with words of judicial action, is used to denote the Charge. or Penalty: thus, διώξομαί σε δειλίᾱς Íll prosecute you Τον cowardice Ar. Eq. 368. δώρων ἐκρίθησαν they have been convicted of bribery (lit. gifts) Lys. 27, 3. τῶν… ἀδικημάτων ηὐθύνθη he was acquitted of wrong-doing Th. 1, 95.
So with adjectives of similar meaning: ἔνοχος λιποταξίον liable for desertion Lys. 14, 5. τῆς ἀρχῆς ὑπεύθυνος liable to give account of his office Dem. 18, 117. τῆς προτέρᾱς ὀλιγαρχίᾱς αἰτιώτατος ἐγένετο he was most to blame for the earlier oligarchy Lys. 12, 65 (cf. § 351).
Note. – The origin of the Genitive of the Charge or Penalty cannot be surely explained, but most instances can be referred to the genitive of cause (§ 366): as διώκω τοῦτον κλοπῆς I am prosecuting this man for (i.e. because of) theft. On the other hand a genitive like θανάτου in θανάτου τῑμῶμαι I set the penalty at death (and so by extension, θανάτου κρῑ́νειν to try for a capital crime) is almost certainly in origin a genitive of value (§ 353).
PARTICULAR USES OF THE GENITIVE
368. Two or More Genitives with One Word. – It may happen that more than one genitive limits the same word: thus, τῶν Ἰώνων τὴν ἡγεμονίην τοῦ πρὸς Δᾱρείον πολέμου the leadership of the Tonians in the war against Darius Hdt. 6, 2.
369. The Genitive Absolute. – A substantive and modifying participle having no grammatical connection with the rest of a sentence stand in the Genitive Absolute (see § 657).
Note. – No doubt the Genitive Absolute (like the Accusative Absolute, § 343) arose from the gradual loosening of the grammatical connection of a limiting genitive and participle, until such a genitive came to be felt as an independent construction. Thus, in sentences like οὐδέ τι μῆχος ῥεχθέντος κακοῦ ἔστ' ἄκος εὑρέμεν and no way is there to devise a cure for evil done (objective genitive, § 350) I 350, or ὡς δ’ ὅτε καπνὸς ἰὼν εἷς οὐρανὸν εὑρὺν ἵκηται ἄστεος αἰθομένοιο as when smoke rises and reaches to the broad heavens – (the smoke) of a burning city (descriptive genitive, § 352) Φ 523, the genitives came to be felt as independent constructions, and to mean “evil having been done,” “a city being on fire.”
370. Genitive with Compound Verbs. – Many verbs compounded with: prepositions which can be used with the genitive, are, thus, enabled to take a genitive which, unaided, they could not command (§ 324, 2): thus, ἔκβαιν’ ἀπήνης (= βαῖν' ἐξ ἀπήνης, § 398, note 1) step forth from the chariot Aesch. Ag. 906. προδραμόντες… τῶν ὁπλῖτὢν running in advance of the hoplites (§ 398, note 1) Xn. A. 5, 2, 4. ἠπείρου ἐπιβῆναι to set foot on land = βῆναι ἐπ᾽ ἠπείρου, § 408, 1) ε 399. Especially κατά in the sense of against (cf. § 409, 1 B): τούτου δειλίᾱν καταψηφίζεσθαι (=ψηφίξεσθαι δειλίᾱν κατὰ τούτου) to vote cowardice against this man (i.e. to condemn him for cowardice) Lys. 14, 11. κατεβόων τῶν Ἀθηναίων they eried out against (i.e. decried) the Athenians Th. 1, 67. So κατηγορῶ(-έω) accuse, and similar words (cf. § 409, 1B).
Note. – Observe that the genitive with compound verbs may be either a True Genitive (§ 348 ff.), or an Ablative Genitive (§ 361).
371. Prepositions with the Genitive. – The use of the Partitive Genitive (of Place or Time, §§ 358, 859) and the Genitive of Separation (§ 362) or Source (§ 865) is often made more clear and definite by the help of prepositions (see § 898). The prepositions ἀντέ instead of, ἀπό from, ἐξ out of, πρό before, and almost all “improper” prepositions (§ 418) are used with the genitive only. Other prepositions used sometimes with the genitive are ἀμφί about, διά through, κατά down, µετά with, ὑπέρ above, ἐπί upon, παρά beside, περί around, πρός by, at, ὑπό under. For the details of their use see §§ 400–417.
372. The Genitive of Agent. – The Agent with passive verbs (§ 516) is regularly expressed by the genitive with ὑπό under, by, sometimes with πρός or παρά at the hands of, less often by ἐκ or ἀπό from.
VIII · The Dative
373. The dative in Greek inherits most of the functions of three earlier distinct cases (see § 323): the True Dative (§ 874), the Locative (§ 383), and the Instrumental (§ 386).
A. THE TRUE DATIVE
374. The True Dative (which belongs properly with verbs or expressions equivalent to a verb) in general denotes that to or for which anything is or is done. (Hence words denoting persons are more likely to stand in the dative than those denoting things.) Some words and phrases require a dative to complete their meaning; to others a dative may be added at pleasure.
DATIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT
375. The Indirect Object stands in the dative case: thus, Συέννεσις ἔδωκε Κῡ́ρῳ χρήματα πολλά Syennesis gave (to) Cyrus a great deal of money Xn. A. 1, 2, 27. ἐκείνῳ αὕτη ἡ χώρᾱ… ἐδόθη to him this country had been given Xn. Hell. 3, 1, 6. τῷ Ἀσκληπιῷ ὀφείλομεν ἀλεκτρυόνα we owe a cock to Asclepius Pl. Phaed. 118 a. θεοῖσι δὲ χεῖpas ἀνέσχον and to the gods they lifted up their hands Γ 318.
376. Many verbs, and circumlocutions equivalent to a verb (cf. § 330), normally require a dative (of the indirect object) to complete their meaning: thus, τοῖς νόµοις πείθονται they are obedient to the laws Xn. Mem. 4, 4, 15. ἐναυμάχεον ἀνηκουστήσαντες τοῖσι στρατηγοῖσι they Sought, in disobedience to (the orders of) the generals Hdt. 6, 14. ἐπίστευον αὐτῷ αἱ πόλεις the cities had confidence in him Xn. A.1, 9, 8. τῷ χρηστηρίῳ πίσυνος ἐών being confident in the oracle Hdt. 1, 73. ὠργίζοντο ἰσχυρῶς τῷ Κλεάρχῳ they were mightily angry at Clearchus Xn. A. 1, 5, 11. ἐπολέμει τοῖς Θρᾷξί he waged war with the Thracians Xn. A. 2, 8, 5. βασιλεῖ φίλους εἶναι to be friends to the king Xn. A. 2, 1, 20. οὗ μὴ δυσμεvis ἔσῃ φίλους surely you will not be hostile to your friends Ε. Med. 1151. εἰ τοῖς πλέοσι ἀρέσκοντές ἔσμεν, τοῖσδ’ ἂν μόνοις οὐκ ὀρθῶς ἀπαρέσκοιμεν if we are in favor with (lit. pleasing to) the majority, we could not by any right be in disfavor with these alone Th. 1, 38. τί οὖν πρέπει ἀνδρὶ πένητε; now what is suitable for a poor man? Pl. Ap. 36 d.
In general, verbs (and verbal expressions) meaning please, profit, trust, aid, befit, obey, and their opposites (many of which are rendered in English by transitive verbs), require a dative to complete their meaning; but the exact usage with each word must be learned from the lexicons.
Note. – Only predicate adjectives regularly take a dative of indirect object (since: an attributive adjective commonly has the genitive, § 351); rarely such a dative is arrogated by an attributive adjective (or even by a substantive, § 393): thus, Αἴολος... φιλος ἀθανάτοισι θεοῖσιν Acolus, dear to the immortal gods κ 2.
THE DATIVE OF INTEREST
377. A dative of the Person Interested may be added to almost any sentence.
Note 1.– Observe that the dative often adds the idea of personal interest (Advantage or Disadvantage) to what might otherwise be expressed by a genitive. Thus, compare the following: Δἀρείου καὶ Παρυσᾱ́τιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο of Darius and Parysatis two children were born (§ 365) Xn. A. 1, 1, 1. ἦσαν Κροίσῳ δύο παῖδες Croesus was blessed with two children (§ 379) Hdt. 1, 34. Δαναών ἀπὸ λοιγὸν ἀμῦναι to keep destruction away from the Danaans II 75. Δανασῖσι... λοιγὸν ἄμῡνον relieve the Danaans of the pestilence A 456. So δέξατό οἱ σκῆπτρον he received the scepler at his hands B 186.
Note 2. – It is convenient to subdivide the dative of Interest into “Advantage or Disadvantage” (§ 378), “Possession” (§ 378), “Agent” (§ 380), “Reference” (§ 382), and the “Ethical” dative (§ 381), but it must be remembered that no hard and fast lines can be drawn between these various uses (§ 324, 3). Thus, in διαμένει ἔτι καὶ νῦν τοῖς βασιλεῦσι ἡ πολυδωρίᾱ the custom of giving costly gifis lasts even to this day for the kings; the dative of Interest (βασιλεῖσι), may be explained as dative of Advantage, Possession, or Reference.
378. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage. – The dative of interest may imply Advantage or Disadvantage: thus, πᾶς ἀνὴρ αὑτῷ πονεῖ every man labors for himself S. Aj. 1366. οἴ τὸ πάγχρῡσον δέρος Πελίᾷ μετῆλθον who went to fetch the golden fleece for Pelias Ε. Med. 6. στεφανοῦσθαι πάντας τῷ θεῷ all to be crowned in honor of the god Xn. Hell. 4, 3, 91. Δαναοῖσι ἀεικέα λοιγὸν ἄμῦνον ward off vile pestilence from the Danaans A 456. (So with ἀμῡ́νω alone: τῇ πόλει… ἀμῡ́νειν καὶ θεοῖς to defend the State and gods Ar. Eg. 577). τοὺς Θρᾷκας τοὺς τῷ Δημοσθένει ὑστερήσαντας the Thracians who came too late for (i.e. to the disadvantage of) Demosthenes Th. 7, 29.
379. Dative of Possession. – The dative of interest (or advantage) is used with verbs like εἰμί am, or γίγνομαι become, to denote possession (cf. in Latin est mihi filius): thus, ἦσαν Κροίσῳ δύο παῖδες Croesus had two children Hdt. 1, 34. εἰσίν ἐμοὶ ἐκεῖ ξένοι I (luckily) have friends there Pl. Crit. 45 c. Οὔτις ἐμοί of ὄνομα Noman is my name ι 366.
380. Dative of Agent. – The dative of interest with the perfect or pluperfect passive, or with the verbal in –τέος (§ 666), comes even to denote regularly the Agent: thus, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται everything has been done by us Xn. A. 1, 8, 12. τοσαῦτά μοι εἰρήσθω let this much have been said by me Lys. 24, 4. ἡμῖν… πάντα ποιητέα (sc. ἐστί) everything must be done by us Xn. A. 3, 1, 35.
381. The Ethical (or Emotional) Dative. – The dative of a personal pronoun is often used to denote a lively or emotional interest which a person may have in something: thus, καί µοι μὴ θορυβήσετε and do not, I beg you, make any uproar Pl. Ap. 20 e. Ἀρταφέρνης ὑμῖν Ὑστάσπεός ἐστι παῖς now Artaphernes, you must know, is the son of Hystaspes Hdt. 5, 30. καὶ ὁ ἀνήρ σοι ὁ νεᾱνίᾱς ἐκεῖνος προελθὼν τοῦ λοχᾱγοῦ πρότερος ἐπορεύετο and would you believe it, that young fellow stepped out in front, and marched in advance of the captain! Xn. Cy. 2, 2, 7.
382. Dative of Reference. – Datives expressing a remote interest (or merely a point of view) are conveniently classed as datives of Reference: thus, σφῷν μὲν ἐντολὴ Διὸς ἔχει τέλος δή the command of Zeus so far as touches you twain, has its end Aesch. Pr. 12. Σωκράτης ἐδόκει τιμῆς ἄξιος εἶναι τῇ πόλει Socrates seemed to be deserving of honor from (lit. in reference to) the State Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 62. ὅλωλεν ὡς ὅλωλεν τοῖσιν εἰδόσιν hés dead – as dead may be – for those who know E. LT. 575. So in the idiomatic expressions like εἰ καὶ ἐκείνῳ βουλομένῳ ταῦτ' ἐστί if this is agreeable to him also (lit. to him wishing) Xn. Hell. 4, 1, 11. Ἐπίδαμνός ἐστι πόλις ἐν δεξιᾷ ἐσπλέοντι τὸν Ἰόνιον κόλπον Epidamnus is a city on the right as one sails (lit. to, or with reference to, one. sdiling) into the Ionian Gulf Th. 1,24, So ὡς συνελόντε εἰπεῖν to speak briefly (lit. to speak from the point of view of one who has condensed the matter) Xn. A. 8, 1, 38.
Note. – No hard and fast line can be drawn between the dative of Reference and the dative of Advantage or Disadvantage, for a good many datives can be referred to either class.
B. THE LOCATIVE DATIVE
383. As the heir to most of the functions of an earlier locative case (§ 323) the dative is used in expressions of place and time.
38496. Dative of Place. – The dative (in prose regularly with the help of a preposition) is used to denote the place where (cf. § 384 a): thus, ἐν τῇ πόλει in the city.
385. Dative of Time. – The dative (often with the help of a preposition) is used to denote time when (cf. § 383): thus, τῇ ὑστεραίᾷ on the following (day), τετάρτῳ ἔτει the fourth year, μιᾷ νυκτί on one night, ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ χειμῶνι the same winter Th. 2, 34.
C. THE INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE
386. The dative performs also the duties (in expressing means, manner, cause, accompaniment) of the earlier instrumental case which it has absorbed (§ 323).
387. Dative of Means. – The dative may denote the Means or Instrument: thus, λίθοις ἔβαλλον they pelted (them) with stones Xn. A. 5, 4, 23. ῞ϊησι τῇ ἀξίνῃ he threw the axe (lit. with the axe) Xn. A.1, 5, 12. γνωσθέντες τῇ σκευῇ τῶν ὅπλων known by the make of their weapons Th. 1, 8.
Note. – The verb χρῶμαι use (i.e. serve onés self with) regularly takes the dative of Means: thus, λόγῳ χρῶνται they use reason Xn. Mem. 3, 3, 11.
388. Dative of Degree of Difference. – The dative of means with comparatives and expressions implying comparison (sometimes also with superlatives) denotes the Degree of Difference: thus, τῇ κεφαλῇ μείζω taller by a (lit. the) head Pl. Phaed. 100 e. οὐ πολλαῖς ἡμέραις ἡμέραις ὔστερον not many days later (lit. later by not many days) Xn. Hell. 1, 1, 1. πόλτ λογίµῳ ἡ Ἑλλὰς γέγονε ἀσθενεστέρη Greece has become weaker by one famous city Hdt. 6, 106. δέκα ἔτεσι πρὸ τῆς ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχίᾱς ten years before the sea fight at Salamis Pl. Leg. 698 e. πολλῷ πλεῖστοι by far the most Hdt. 5, 92, 5.
389. Dative of Manner. – The dative may denote Manner (sometimes with the help of a preposition): thus, τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ἐπορεύθησαν in this manner they proceeded Xn. A. 3, 4, 23. δρόμῳ ῞ῑεντο ἐς τοὺς βαρβάρους on the run they rushed against the barbarians Hdt. 6, 112. So in several adverbial expressions like βίᾷ with violence, σῑγῇ in silence, τῇ ἀληθείᾷ in truth, τῷ ὄντι in reality, λόγῳ in word, ἔργῳ in deed, τῇ ἐμῇ γνώμῃ in my opinion, ταύτῃ (sc. ὁδῷ) in this way.
390. Dative of Respect. – The dative of Manner or Means is sometimes used to show in what respect a thing is so (but this usage has been greatly encroached on by the accusative of specification, § 337): thus, εὐρύτερος ὤμοισι broader in shoulders Γ 194. τῇ φωνῇ τραχύς harsh in voice Xn. A. 2, 6, 9. ἰσχύειν τοῖς σώμασι to be strong in their bodies (i.e. with their bodies) Xn. Mem. 2, 7, 7. ἐγὼ οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχὺς οὔτε χερσὶν ἰσχυρός I am neither swift of foot nor strong of arm Xn. Cy. 2, 3, 6.
391. Dative of Cause. – The dative may be used to denote Cause: thus, ῥῑ́γει ἀπωλλύμεθα we were dying of cold Xn. A. 5, 8, 2. οὐδενὶ οὕτω χαίρεις ὡς φίλοις ἀγαθοῖς you delight in nothing so much as in good friends Xn. Mem. 2, 6, 35. χαλεπῶς φέρω τοῖς παροῦσι πρᾱ́γμασι Iam distressed at the present circumstances Xn. A. 1, 3, 3.
Note. – The dative usually denotes a more active or immediate cause than the genitive of cause (§ 366).
392. Dative of Accompaniment or Association. – The dative (often helped by a preposition) may be used with words denoting (or implying) accompaniment, association, or likeness: thus,:
1. With Verbs. –ἐνθάδ’ ἱκᾱ́νεις νηί τε καὶ ἑτάροισι; are you come hither with your ship and crew? λ 161. σὺν νηί τ᾽ ἐμῇ καὶ ἐμοῖς ἑτάροισιν ἐλθών going with my ship and crew ι 173. ἡμῖν ἐφείποντο οἱ πολέμιοι καὶ ἱππικῷ καὶ πελταστικῷ the enemy followed us with cavalry and peltasts Xn. A. 7, 6, 29. σὺν τῇ ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ eis Ἀθήνᾱς κατέπλευσε with the remainder of his army he sailed to Athens Xn. Hell. 1, 4, 10. ὠμῑλείτην αὐτῷ they associated with him Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 39. ἀμφισβητοῦμεν ἀλλήλοις we dispute with each other Pl. Phaedr. 263 a. τῷ ἡγεμόνι... ἕπεσθαι to follow the leader Xn. A. 1, 3, 17. ἀλλήλοις σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο they made a truce with each other Xn. Hell. 3, 2, 20. ἐμανυτῇ διὰ λόγων ἀφῑκόμην I have been reasoning with myself VL. Med. 872. φιλοσόφῳ ἔοικας you seem like a philosopher Xn. A. 2, 1, 13. The last example may also be explained as a true dative, § 376.
Note. – With words meaning to fight the simple dative means to fight against; the dative with σύν to fight on the side of: thus, Ἀθηναίοις μάχεσθαι to fight against the Athenians; σὺν Ἀθηναίοις μάχεσθαι to fight on the side of the Athenians.
2. With Adjectives. – ὄμοιος Ἀχιλλεῖ like Achilles Xn. Sym. 4, 0. χώρᾱν ὅμορον τῇ Λακεδαιμονίων a land contiguous with that of the Lacedaemonians Dem. 15, 22, κόμαι Χαρίτεσσιν ὁμοῖαι hair like (that of) the Graces (cf. § 717, 6) P 51. πολλοῖς εἰμι διάφορος with many Ím at variance E. Med. 579. So with ὁ αὐτός the same: τὸ αὐτὸ τῷ ἠλιθίῳ the same thing as (lit. with) foolishness Xn. A. 2, 6, 22. ὠπλισμένοι ἦσαν τοῖς αὐτοῖς Κῡ́ρῳ ὅπλοις they were armed with the same weapons as (those of) Cyrus (cf. § 717, 6) Xn. Cy. 7, 1, 2.
3. With Adverbs. – ἑπομένως τῷ νόµῳ conformably to law PL. Leg. 844 e. σύμμιγα τῇσι γυναιξί together with the women Hdt. 6, 58. ἄμα τῇ ἡμέρᾷ at daybreak (lit. along with the day). So with ὁμοῦ together with, ἐφεξῆς neat in order.
Note. – As dative of accompaniment is probably to be explained the idiomatic use of the dative and αὐτός (§ 475, 3, note 2): as νέας τέσσερας αὐτοῖσι τοῖς ἀνδράσι εἶλον they took four ships men and all (lit. with the men themselves) Hdt. 6, 93.
PARTICULAR USES OF THE DATIVE
393. Dative with Substantives. – The verbal idea in a verbal substantive sometimes makes it possible to construe a dative with it: thus, τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ δόσιν ὑμῖν Heaven's gift to you (dative of the indirect object, § 375) PL Ap. 30 d. πεµφθέντα ταύρων πυρπνόων ἐπιστάτην ζεύγλαισι sent to master (lit. as master of) with the yoke (dative of means, § 387) the fiery bulls Ε. Med. 478. κοινωνίᾱ τοῖς ἀνδράσι association with the men (dative of association, § 392) Pl. Rep. 466 c.
394. Dative with Compound Verbs. – Many verbs compounded with ἐν, σύν, or with other prepositions which may be used with the dative (§ 395), are, thus, assisted in taking a dative which the verb of itself could not command: thus, τοῖς ὅρκοις ἐμμένει ὁ δῆμος (= μένει ἐν τοῖς ὅρκοις, see § 398, note 1) the people abides by its oaths Xn. Hell. 2, 4, 43. συνεπολέμει Κῡ́ρῳ he joined with Cyrus in making war Xn. A. 1, 4, 2… ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι αὐτῷ… that he was plotting against him Xn. 4. 1, 1, 3. ἐπειδὴ προσβάλοιεν ἀλλήλοις when they attacked each other Th. 1, 49. So likewise denominative verbs (§ 298, note) containing these prepositions: as ἐπιχειρῆσαι ἀλλήλοις to lay hands on each other Th. 1, 49.
Note. – Such compound verbs as take the dative (§ 394) are enabled to do so usually by virtue of the meaning of the preposition alone, but sometimes apparently from the general meaning of the compound (compare the first two examples above with the fourth).
39597. Prepositions with the Dative. – The use of the Locative Dative (of Place or Time, §§ 384, 385), and the Instrumental Dative (of Accompaniment, § 392), and rarely the True Dative (§ 374), is often made more definite by the help of prepositions. The prepositions ἐν in, and σύν with, are, from their meaning, used with the dative only. Other prepositions used sometimes with the dative ave: ἐπί upon, παρά beside, περί about, πρός at, ὑπό under. For the details of their use see §§ 400–417.
VIII · Place and Time (Summary)
396. 1. Place at which is expressed by the locative (§76, note) or locative dative (§ 384), the latter usually with a preposition: Ἀθήνησι at Athens, ἐν τῇ πόλει in the city.
2. Place within which is expressed by the partitive genitive (usually with a preposition or adverb, § 358): τῆς δεξιᾶς on the right, διὰ πεδίου through the plain.
3. Place from which is expressed by the genitive of separation (usually with a preposition, § 362): ἐξ ἄστεως from town.
4. Place towards or to which is expressed by the accusative of limit of motion (in prose regularly with a preposition, § 339) εἰς τὴν πόλιν into the city.
397. 1. Time at which is expressed by the locative dative (§ 385): τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾷ on the third day.
2. Time within which is expressed by the partitive genitive (§ 359): ἡμέρᾱς by day (i.e. at some time within the day).
3. Time during which is expressed by the accusative (§ 338): τὴν ἡμέρᾱν ταύτην during (the whole of) this day.
VIII · Prepositions with the Cases
39898. The Prepositions were originally adverbs modifying the verb, and serving to define more clearly and exactly the adverbial uses of the cases (see § 398 a). They early came to be united with the verb (Composition, § 298), or to be used regularly with such cases as their meaning would allow; then by a sort of crystallization of their usage certain phrases were formed which came to have special or idiomatic meanings.
For the so-called “Improper Prepositions” see § 418.
Note 1.– The preposition in Greek has sometimes become attached to the verb where in English it would be rendered with the accompanying substantive: as ἀπεστρατοπεδεύοντο οἱ βάρβαροι τοῦ Ἑλληγικοῦ the barbarians encamped away from the Greek army Xn. A. 3, 4, 34.
Note 2. – Not infrequently the preposition is used both with the verb and with the substantive: as πρὸς τὴν κώµην προσιόντες coming forward to the village Xn. A. 3, 4, 33. εἰσβᾶς εἰς πλοῖον embarking in a ship Xn. A. 5, 7, 15. Thus, the Greek could say βαίνω εἰς τὴν πόλιν, or εἶσ βαίνω τὴν πόλιν, or εἶσ βaivw εἰς τὴν πόλιν go into the city, but the tendency was, wherever possible, to join the preposition with the verb.
Note 3. – Greek (like Latin) sometimes differs from English in the point of view from which it uses the cases aud the accompanying preposition; especially words suggesting motion (although denoting rest) are often used with a case and preposition appropriate to motion (to or from), although not so rendered in English: thus, κατέστη εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν Ἀρταξέρξης Artazerzes was established in power Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον… εἰς χωρίον ὀχυρόν they abandoned the city (and went) into a stronghold Xn. A. 1, 2, 24. οἱ ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς καταλιπόντες τὰ ὤνια ἔφυγον the people in the market (lit. from the market) abandoned their wares, and fled Xn. A. 1, 2, 18. So with corresponding adverbs: οὐ γὰρ εἶχον οἴκοθεν for I had none (that I could bring) from home᾿ Ar. Ρax. 522.
GENERAL VIEW OF THE PREPOSITIONS
39999. Summary of Usage. – In Attic prose the prepositions are used as follows:
With the Accusative only: ἀνά, εἰς.
With the Genitive only: ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐξ, πρό.
With the Dative only: ἐν and σύν
With the Accusative or Genitive: ἀμφί διά, κατά, µετά, ὑπέρ.
With the Accusative, Genitive, or Dative: ἐπί, παρά, περί, πρός, ὑπό.
For the special functions of the cases which admit the aid of prepositions see §§ 346, 371, 395.
USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS
[In the following pages only the general facts about the meanings and uses of the prepositions (besides a few special phrases) are recorded; the exact details about each preposition are to be found in a lexicon].
400100. ἀμφί about (properly on both sides of; Latin amb-); see § 400 a.
1. With the Genetive (in origin a Partitive Genitive of Place, § 338) about, concerning (rare inprose, περί being generally used instead) ἀμφὶ ὧν εἶχον διαφερόµενοι quarreling about what they had Xn. A. 4, 5, 17.
2. With the Accusative (of Extent, § 338) about.
Place: τῶν ἀμφὶ Μίλητον στρατευοµένων of those engaged in military operations about Miletus Xn. A. 1, 2, 3
Time: ἀμφὶ μέσον ἡμέρᾶς about noon Xn. A. 4, 4, 1.
Derived Meanings: ἀμφὶ τὰ πεντήκοντα about fifty Xn. A. 2, 6, 15.
In Composition: about, on both sides of
401101. ἀνά up (opposed to κατά down); see § 401 a.
With the Accusative:
A. (of Extent, § 338) up, along.
Place: ἀνὰ τὸν ποταµόν up the river Hdt. 2, 96. ἀνὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα throughout Greece Hdt. 6, 131.
Derived Meanings: ἀνὰ νύκτα along (in) the night Ξ 80. ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέρᾱν every day Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 8.
B. (of Limit of Motion, § 339) upon.
Place: θῆκεν ἀνὰ μυρίκην he put them up on a tamarisk bush K 466.
Derived Meanings: ἀνὰ κράτος up to (his) strength (i.e. at full speed) Xn. A.1, 10, 15. ἀνὰ ἑκατόν up to a hundred (i.e. by hundreds) Xn. A. 5, 4, 12.
In Composition: up, back, again.
402. ἀντί instead of; for, originally over against (Latin ante) (but in this use it was supplanted by ἐναντίον).
1. With the Genitive (in origin a Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358).
Derived Meanings only: τὰ παρ’ ἐμοὶ ἑλέσθαι ἀντὶ τῶν οἴκοι to choose the lot with me instead of (ic. rather than) that at home Xn. A. 1, 7, 4. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν εὖ ἔπαθον in return for the favors I have received Xn. A. 1, 3, 4. ἀντὶ ἡμέρης νὺξ ἐγένετο instead of day it became night Hdt. 7, 37.
In Composition: against, instead, in return.
403. ἀπό from, away from (Latin ab).
With the Genitive (of separation or source, §§ 362, 365) only:
Place: ἀπὸ θαλάσσης μᾶλλον ᾠκίσθησαν they were settled rather (at a distance) away from the sea Th. 1, 7. λύοντο δὲ τεύχε' ἀπ’ ὤμων and they stripped the armor from their shoulders P 318. ἐθήρευεν ἀπὸ ἵππου he used to hunt on horseback (lit. from a horse, § 398, note 3) Xn. Α 1, 2, 7.
Time: ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ χρόνου from this time Xn. A. 7, 5, 8.
Derived Meanings: of (remote) agency πλούσιον γίγνεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως to get rich from the state Dem. 24, 124. So, sometimes, in Thucydides: ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν by them Th. 1, 17.
In Composition: from, away from.
404. διά through (cf. Latin dis-).
1. With the Genitive (originally the Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358) through (some part of):
Place: ἐξελαύνει διὰ Καππαδοκίας he marched through Cappadocia Xn. Α. 1, 2, 20.
Time: διὰ νυκτός through the night Xn. A. 4, 6, 22.
Derived Meanings: δι᾿ ἐτέων εἴκοσι through (ie. at the end of) twenty years Hdt. 6, 118. ἔλεγε… δι᾿ ἑρμηνέως he spoke through an interpreter Xn. A. 2, 3, 17. διὰ πολέμου αὐτοῖς ἰέναι to go through war with them (i.e. to act in a hostile way towards them); so διὰ φιλίᾱς ἰέναι to act in friendly fashion Xn. A. 3, 2, 8. διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν tο hold through (the grasp of) one’s hand (i.e. in one’s power) Th. 2, 13. τὸν Κῦρον διὰ στόµατος εἶχον they had (the name of) Cyrus on (lit. passing through) their lips Xn. Cy. 1, 4, 25. διὰ τάχους through speed (ie. speedily) Th. 2, 18.
2. With the Accusative (of Extent, § 338) through, throughout, more often through in the sense of because of.
Place and Time: βάν ῥ' ἴμεν… διὰ νύκτα µέλαιναν… διά τ᾿ἔντεα καὶ μέλαν αἷμα they went on their way through the dark night and through the weapons and the black blood K 297.
Cause: διὰ καῦμα through (ie. on account of) heat Xn. A. 1, 7, 6. κακοὶ δοκοῦμεν εἶναι διὰ τοῦτον we appear to be base through (i.e. because of) this man Xn. A. 6, 6, 23.
In Composition: through, also apart (cf. Latin dis-).
405102. εἰς (or ἐς, see § 405 a) into, to (for *ἐνς: cf. § 47 and latin in with the accusative).
With the Accusative (of Limit of Motion, § 339) only:
Place: διέβησαν ἐς Σικελίᾱν they crossed over into Sicily Th. 6, 2. So also with persons: εἰς ὑμᾶς εἰσιέναι to come into the midst of you PL Ap. 17 c. ἐλθεῖν εἰς Ἀχιλῆα to come into the presence of Achilles P 709.
Time: πρόπαν ἧμαρ ἐς ἡέλιον καταδύντα δαίνυντ’ all day long till setting sun they feasted A 601. ἐς ἐμέ to my time Hdt. 1,92. εἰς τὴν ὑστεραίᾱν οὐχ ἦκεν he didn't come the following day (§ 298, note 3).
Derived Meanings: εἰς τετρακοσίους up to the number of four hundred Xn. A. 3, 3, 6. εἰς ζώνην δεδομέναι given for girdle-money Xn. Α. 1, 4, 9. ἐς τέλος finally (§ 298, note 3).
In Composition: in, into, to.
406103. ἓν in (Latin en-do, in).
With the (Locative, § 384) Dative only:
Place: ἐν Σπάρτῃ in Sparta Th. 1, 128. ἐν πολλῇ δὴ ἀπορίᾷ ἦσαν οἱ Ἕλληνες the Greeks were naturally in much perplexity Xn. A. 3, 1, 2. ἐν ἐμοί in me (i.e. in my power) Dem. 18, 193. ἐν τοῖς φίλοις in (i.e. among) their friends Xn. A. 5, 4, 32. ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις in (ie. under) arms Xn. 4, 3, 7.
Time: ἐν πέντε ἡμέραις in five days Xn. Mem. 3, 13, 5. ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς in (the time of) the truce Xn. A. 3, 1, 1.
In Composition: in, on.
407. ἐξ (before consonants ἐκ, § 47) out of, from.
With the Genitive (of Separation or Source, §§ 362, 365) only:
Place: ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθών going out from Pylos A 269.
Time: ἐκ παιδός from a child (ie. since childhood) Xn. Cy. 5, 1, 2. ἐκ τοῦ ἀρίστου from breakfast (i.e. directly after breakfast) Xn. Α. 4, 6, 21.
Of Source: καὶ γὰρ τ᾿ὄναρ ἐκ Διός ἐστιν for a dream, too, is from Zeus A 63. So sometimes of the (remote) agent (§ 372): ἐκ βασιλέως δεδοµέναι given from (i.e. by) the King Xn. A. 1, 1, 6.
Phrases: ἐκ δεξιᾶς on (lit. from, § 398, note 3) the right, ἐκ πολλοῦ at (lit. from, § 398, note 3) a great distance, ἐξ ἴσου on an equality.
In Composition: out of; from, out.
408, ἐπί upon.
1. With the Genitive (Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358, or Time, § 359) upon (some part of):
Place: παρελαύνων ἐφ᾽ ἅρματος riding by (seated) on a chariot Xn. Α. 1, 2, 16. ἐπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου (sc. κέρως) on the left wing Xn. A. 1, 8, 9. With words denoting motion, toward (some part of), in the direction of: ἀπιέναι… ἐπὶ Ἰωνίᾱς to be going away toward Ionia Xn. Α. 2, 1, 3.
Time: ἐπ᾽ εἰρήνης in time of peace B 797. ἐπὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων προγόνων in the time of our forefathers Xn. Cy. 1, 6, 31.
Derived Meanings: ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγων τεταγµένοι drawn up a few deep Xn. A. 4, 8, 11.
2. With the (Locative, § 384) Dative upon, at (rarely perhaps with the True Dative (§ 374) toward, against), αὐτοῦ μίμν’ ἐπὶ πύργῳ stay here upon the tower (i.e. at this place, cf. § 408, 1) Z 431. ἔστι… βασίλεια… ἐπὶ ταῖς πηγαῖς τοῦ Μαρσύου ποταμοῦ there is a palace at the source of the Marsyas river Xn. A. 1, 2, 8. ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάττῃ at the sea-shore Xn. A. 1, 4, 1.
Derived Meanings: ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ in the power of his brother Xn. A. 1, 1, 4. τὸ ἐπὶ τούτῳ the thing (next) upon (ie. immediately following) this PL. Ap. 27 b. ἐπὶ τούτοις… ὀμόσᾱς having given an oath upon these terms Xn. A. 3, 2, 4. (So often ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε on condition that, § 596), ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν Ὀρόντᾱν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ they seized Orontas by the girdle upon (determination of) his death (i.e. as a sign of condemnation) Xn. A. 1, 6, 10. ἐπὶ τίνι μέγα φρονεῖς; on what do you pride yourself? Xn. Sym. 3, 8.
In expressions like ὤρσεν ἐπ᾽ Ἀργεῑ́οισι he roused him against the Argives M293, the dative seems to be in origin a True Dative (§ 374).
3. With the Accusative (of Extent, § 388) upon (or of Limit of Motion, § 339) toward, ὁράων ἐπ᾽ ἀπείρονα πόντον gazing over the boundless deep A 350. ἦλθε θοᾱς ἐπὶ νῆας he came to the swift ships A 12. ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον ἀναβᾱ́ς mounting upon his horse Xn. A.1, 8, 3. ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἰέναι to be going toward (ie. against) the king Xn. Α.1, 3, 1. ἐξέρχονται δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν θήρᾱν and they go forth to (ie. for) the hunt Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 11. ἐπὶ πολύ to a great extent Th. 1, 6.
In Composition: upon (after), over, against.
409. κατά down (opposed to ἀνά up).
1. With the Genitive:
A. (of Separation, § 362) down from.
Place: ᾤχοντο κατὰ τῶν πετρῶν φερόμενοι they were gone headlong down (from) the cliffs Xn. A. 4, 7, 14. So κατ᾿ ἄκρης from the top down (i.e. completely) Ν 772. κατὰ νώτου in (lit. down from) the rear Th. 4, 33.
B. (Partitive Genitive of Place) down underneath some part of, down over some part of, (down) against a person (cf. § 370). κατὰ χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξἂς fixing his eyes upon (a part of) the ground Γ 217. κατὰ γῆς ὀργυιᾱ́ς γενέσθαι to be (buried) fathoms beneath (a part of) the earth Xn. A. 7, 1, 30.
Derived Meanings: κατ’ ἐμαντοῦ ἐρεῖν to be intending to speak against myself (cf. § 370) PL. Ap. 37 b.
2. With the Accusative (of Extent, § 338) down over, down along (or of Limit of Motion, § 339), down to.
Place: κατὰ ῥόον down stream Hdt. 2, 96. κατὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν (down) along over the entire land Hdt. 3, 109. κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν along over (ie. by) land and sea Xn. A.3, 2, 13. τὸ καθ᾽ αὐτούς the part along by (i.e. opposite) themselves.
Time: κατ’ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον along (i-e. at) that time Th. 1,139 οἱ καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς those along (at) our time (i.e. our contemporaries).
Derived Meanings: κατὰ πρῆξιν on business γ 72. κατὰ φιλίᾱν for friendship Th. 1, 60. κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον according to the same fashion Xn. Cy. 8, 2, 5. κατὰ κράτος down to (the limit of) strength (i.e. at full speed: cf. ἀνὰ κράτος, § 401) Xn. A. 1, 8, 19. κατὰ τὸν νόµον according to law Xn. Hell. 1, 7, 5.
In Composition: down, against (cf. § 370).
410104. μετά amid, among (and so often close to, close upon).
1. With the (Partitive, § 354) Genitive (probably originally of Place) among, in company with: μετὰ Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο they fought among the Boeotians N 700. κοινῇ μετὰ σοῦ in common along with you PL. Crit. 46 d. μετὰ πολλῶν δακρύων amid (ie. with) many tears Pl. Αp. 34 c.
2. With the Accusative (of Limit of Motion, § 339) into the midst of, and so, more frequently, close upon, close afer, after: ἵκοντο μετὰ Τρῶας καὶ Ἀχαιούς they came into the midst of the Trojans and the Achaeans Γ 264. βῇ δὲ per’ ἄλλους and he went among (i.e. close after, in pursuit of) others Δ 292. Κάλλιστος μετὰ Ἡηλείωνα most beautiful next (after) Peleus’ son B 674. So often μετὰ ταῦτα (close) after this.
In Composition: with (of sharing), among, after (in quest of). Often it denotes change (of state or position): as μετα βαίνω go fo a new place, μετανοῶ (-έω) change one’s mind, repent.
411. παρά beside.
1. With the Genitive (of Separation, § 362, or Source, § 365) from beside, from the side of: παρὰ δὲ βασιλέως πολλοὶ πρὸς Κῦρον ἀπῆλθον from beside the king many came away to Cyrus Xn. A. 1, 9, 29. φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος παρὰ μηροῦ drawing his sharp sword from beside his thigh A 190. παρ’ Αἰγυπτίων μεμαθηκέναι to have learned from the Egyptians Hdt. 2, 104. So of the remote agent (§ 372): παρὰ πάντων ὁμολογέῖται it is agreed on the part of all Xn. A. 1, 9, 1.
2. With the (Locative, § 384) Dative at the side of; at, with.
Place: ἡμέη… παρὰ πατρὶ γέροντι sitting beside her aged father A 358. τὰ παρὰ θαλάττῃ χωρία the places beside the sea Xn. A. 7, 2, 25.
Derived Meanings: ἐστρατήγει παρὰ Κῡ́ρῳ he was general beside (ie. under) Cyrus Xn. Α. 1, 4, 3.
3. With the Accusative:
A. (of Limit of Motion, § 339) to the side of (usually of persons): πέµπει παρὰ Ξενοφῶντα τοὺς πελταστᾱ́ς he sent the peltasts to (the side of) Xenophon Xn. A. 4, 3, 27.
B. (of Extent, § 338) along beside, alongside of:
Place: βῆ… παρὰ θῖνα he went along beside the shore A 34. ἦν παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν κρήνη there was a spring alongside the road Xn. A. 1, 2, 13.
Time: παρὰ πάντα μοι τὸν χρόνον προσῄει along (i.e. during) all the time he used to come in to see me Pl. Phaed. 116 d.
Derived Meanings: So ii phrases like παρ’ οὐδέν (lit. alongside of nothing, i.e.) of no account, παρὰ μικρόν (lit. alongside of little, i.e.) nearly, almost, slightly.
Often the idea of passing alongside suggests passing beyond; so παρά often means beyond, contrary to: as often παρὰ τὸν νόµον contrary to law, παρὰ τὴν δόξαν contrary to expectation, etc.
In Composition: beside, along by, beyond.
412105. περί about, round about (properly on all sides of, cf. ἀμφί, § 400).
1. With the Genitive:
A. (Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358) about (some part of): περὶ σπέεος round about (a part of) the cave ε 68.
More often in the derived meaning of about, concerning: περὶ τῶν ὑμετέρων ἀγαθῶν μαχούμεθα we shall fight about your goodly possessions Xn. A. 2, 1, 12. εἴ τις περὶ τῶν τοιούτων σοφός ἐστι if anybody is wise about such matters Pl. Ap. 19 e.
B. (of Separation, § 362) all about, surpassing, more than: περὶ πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων to be superior to all others A 287. So often in prose in phrases like περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαι ( to regard as of greal importance (lit. more than much), περὶ οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαι to regard as of no importance, περὶ παντὸς ποιεῖσθαι to regard as of all possible importance (as Xn. Cy. 1, 4, 1).
2. With the (locative, § 384) Dative about (not frequent in Attic prose): ἔχοντες … στρεπτοὺς περὶ τοῖς τραχήλοις with necklaces about their necks Xn. A. 1, 5, 8. δεδιότες περὶ τῷ χωρίῳ being alarmed about the place Th. 1, 60.
3. With the Accusative (of Extent, § 338) round about, about.
Place: ἀπέστειλαν τᾱ̀ς ἑκατὸν ναῦς περὶ Πελοπόννησον they sent off the hundred ships around the Peloponnesus Th.2, 23. περὶ Ἑλλήσποντον ὤν being about (i.e. in the neighborhood of) the Hellespont Dem. 8, 3. τοὺς περὶ αὐτὸν Πέρσᾱς the Persians about him Xn. A. 1, 5, 8.
Time: περὶ τούτους τοὺς χρόνους about these times Th. 3, 89.
Derived Meanings: αἰεὶ περὶ κεῖνον ὀίζυε be ever troubled about him Γ 408. περὶ θεοὺς μὴ σωφρονεῖν not to be sober-minded about the gods Xn. Mem. 1,1, 20.
In Composition: around, surpassing (sometimes = Latin per-).
413. πρό before (Latin prǒ-).
With the Genitive (of Separation, § 362) only:
Place: πρὸ τῶν πυλῶν out in front of the gates Xn. Hell. 2, 4, 34.
Time: πρὸ τῆς μάχης before the battle Xn. A. 1, 7, 13.
Derived Meanings: πρὸ ῡ́μῶν ἀγρυπνήσαντα watching in your behalf (i.e. in front of you as a protection), τὸν δὲ πρὸ δέκα μνῶν ἑλοίμην, ἄν another I would choose rather than ten minae Xn. Mem. 2, 5, 3.
In Composition: before (so sometimes in defense of ), forward, forth.
414106. πρός at, by, toward (properly in front of).
1. With the Genitive (the Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358) in front of (some part of), toward, over against: τὸ πρὸς ἑσπέρᾱς τεῖχος the wall in front of (ie. toward) the west Xn. Hell. 4, 4, 18. τὰ ὑποζύγια ἔχοντες πρὸς τοῦ ποταμοῦ with the pack animals on the side toward the river Xu. A. 2, 2, 4. πρὸς τῶν Καρδούχων ἰέναι to go in the direction of the Carduchi Xn. A. 4, 8, 26. So by extension πρὸς πατρός on the father's side Hdt. 7, 99. οὐκ ἦν πρὸς τοῦ Κῡ́ρου τρόπου it was not in keeping with Cyru’s character Xn. A. 1, 2, 11. πρὸς θεῶν in the sight of the gods, with words of swearing. So sometimes of the remote agent (§ 272): ὁμολογεῖται πρὸς πάντων he is acknowledged on the part of all people Xn. Α. 1, 9, 20. (Some of these genitives may be explained as Genitives of Separation, § 362.)
2. With the (locative, § 384) Dative at: τὰ δεξιὰ τοῦ κέρατος ἔχων πρὸς τῷ Εὐφρᾱ́τῃ ποταμῷ with the right of the wing (resting) on the Euphrates river Xu. A.1, 8, 4. So, figuratively, πρὸς τούτοις besides this (as Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 8).
3. With the Accusative (of Limit of Motion, § 339) to, toward (properly to a position in front of):
Place: ὑπεχώρησαν πρὸς τὸν λόφον they retreated toward the hill Th. 4, 44. πρὸς βορρᾶν toward the north Th. 6, 2. So ofteri of persons: ἔρχονται πρὸς ἡμᾶς they come to us Xn. A. 5, 7, 20. ἰέναι πρὸς τοὺς πολεµίους to go toward (ie. against) the enemy Xn. A. 2, 6, 10. διαβάλλει Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν he slandered Cyrus to his brother Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. So often of feeling toward: ἀθυμοῦσι πρὸς τὴν ἔξοδον they feel discouraged in regard to the expedition Xn. A. 7, 1, 9.
Derived Meanings: Often πρὸς ταῦτα in view of this, πρὸς χάριν in view of favor (i.e. with a view to please), πρὸς βίᾱν with (a view to) violence, etc.
In Composition: to, toward, in addition.
415107. σύν (also ξύν, cf. Lat. cum) with, in company with; see § 415 a.
With the Dative (of Accompaniment, § 392) only: βασιλεὺς σὺν στρατεύματι πολλῷ προσέρχεται the King is advancing with a great army Xn. A.1, 8, 1. σὺν θεοῖς with (the help of) the gods Xn. Cy. 6, 4, 19. σὺν τῷ νόμῳ (in accordance) with the law Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 17.
In Composition: with, together.
416. ὑπέρ over (Latin super).
1. With the Genitive (Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358) over (some part of), above: ὑπὲρ τῆς κώμης γήλοφος ἦν above the village was a hill Xn. A. 1, 10, 12. στῆ δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς and it stood over his head (cf. § 358 a, 3d example) B 20.
Derived Meanings: From fighting over comes the derived meaning in behalf of, on account of. πονεῖν ὑπὲρ σοῦ to toil in behalf of you Xn. Α. 7, 3, 31. ὑπὲρ τῆς ἐλευθερίᾱς ὑμᾶς εὐδαιμονίζω I congratulate you on account of our freedom Xn. A. 1, 7, 3. (Later, sometimes, the meaning in behalf of comes to mean little more than about, concerning.)
2. With the Accusative (of Extent, § 338) over, beyond: ὑπὲρ οὐδὸν ἑβήσετο he stepped over the threshold η 135. τοῖς ὑπὲρ Ἑλλήσποντον οἰκοῦσι with those who dwell beyond the Hellespont Xn. А. 1, 1, 9. ὑπὲρ δύναμιν beyond onés ability.
In Composition: over, beyond, in behalf of.
417. ὑπό under (Latin sub).
1. With the Genitive:
A. (of Separation, § 362) from under: ὑπ' ἀπήνης ἡμιόνους ἕλυον they loosed the mules from under the wagon η 5.
B. (Pattitive Genitive of Place, § 358) under.
Place: under some part of, τὰ ὑπὸ γῆς things under the earth Pl. Ap. 18 b. ἔιφίδια ὑπὸ µάλης ἔχοντας with daggers under their arms Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 23. νύμφᾶς… δαῑ́δων ὕπο λαµποµενᾱ́ων ἡγίνεον ἀνὰ ἄστυ under (the light of) torches they were leading the brides trough the city Σ 492.
Agent: from such examples as the last came the regular usage of ὑπὸ with the genitive to denote the Agent (§ 372), i.e. the person (or thing) under whose influence an action takes place: πιεζόµενος ὑπὸ τῶν οἴκοι ἀντιστασιωτῶν being hard pressed by lis political opponents at home Xn. Α.1, 1, 10. εὖ ἔπαθον ὑπ΄ ἐκείνου I was well treated by him Xn. A.1, 3, 4. So not infrequently of things παντελῶς ἂν ὑπὸ λῑμοῦ ἀπολοίμεθα we should utterly perish by starvation Xn. Α. 2, 2, 11.
2. With the (locative, § 384) Dative under, beneath.
Place: εἶχον δὲ τὰ δρέπανα… ὑπὸ τοῖς δίφροις they had their scylhes beneath the chariot boxes Xn. A. 1, 8, 10. ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει at the fool of the acropolis Xn. A. 1, 2, 8.
Derived Meanings (chiefly poetic): οἱ… ὑπὸ βασιλεῖ ὄντες (those under the power of the King Xu. Cy. 8, 1, 6. ἐμῷ ὑπὸ δουρὶ δαμέντα subdued beneath my spear Ε 653.
3. With the Accusative:
A. (of Limit of Motion, § 339) to a position under.
Place: αὐτὸν ἀκοντίζει τις παλτῷ ὑπὸ τὸν ὀφθαλμόν somebody hit him with a javelin under the eye Xn. A. 1, 8, 27.
Time: ὑπὸ νύκτα toward (ie. just before) night (cf. Latin sub noctem).
B. (of Extent, § 338) along under.
Place: ἀκρωνυχίᾱν ὄρους, ὑ φ' ἣν ἡ κατάβασις ἦν εἰς τὸ πεδίον a spur of the mountain, along under which was the descent into the plain Xn. A. 3, 4, 37. ἐν ταῖς ὑπὸ τὸ ὄρος κώµαις in the villages along at the foot of the mountain Xn. A.7, 4, 5.
Time: ὑπὸ τὴν παροιχομένην νύκτα along under (i.e. during) the past night Hdt. 9, 58.
In Composition: under, underhandedly, gradually, slightly (cf. Latin sub).
IMPROPER PREPOSITIONS
418108. Properly the term preposition is applied only to those (earlier) adverbs which can be compounded with a verb into a single word (§ 298), but there are also other adverbs (of varying origin) which, for one reason or another, are regularly found in company with certain cases (mostly the genitive); to these, as a class, is given the name of Improper Prepositions (cf. § 362, 3). The most important of these are: ἄνευ without, ἀντίον and ἐναντίον opposite, ἐκτός and ἔξω outside, ἐντός and εἴσω inside, ἐγγύς and πλησίον near, ἄχρι and µέχρι until, μεταξύ between, πέρᾱν across, πλήν except, ἕνεκα on account of, ἔμπροσθεν in front of, ὄπισθεν behind, χάριν for the sake of, δίκην in the manner of; like, λάθρᾷ without the knowledge of; ἅμα along with, ὡς to, and others (cf. § 418 a).
Of these, all except ἅμα and ὡς are used with the genitive. ἅμα is used with the dative (of Accompaniment, §.392) and ὡς with the accusative (of Limit of Motion, § 339) of names of persons only: as ὡς βασιλέἂ to the King.
Note. – The genitives used with the improper prepositions are of various sorts. For example, ἄνευ is used with the Genitive of Separation (§ 362), ἐγγύς with the Partitive Genitive of Place (§ 358), and χάριν with the Descriptive Genitive (§ 352).
VIII · Syntax of Adjectives
419. Adjectives are used to modify substantives (including words used substantively) and substantive pronouns.
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES
420. Adjectives (including participles, adjective pronouns, and the definite article, § 443 ff.) agree in gender, number, and case, with the substantives which they modify: thus, ἀνὴρ σοφός a wise man, ἀνδρὸς σοφοῦ of a wise man, ἀνδράσι σοφοῖς to wise men, ὁ παρὼν καιρός the present occasion, οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ this man, ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ the same man.
Note. – Since an adjective may be equivalent to the genitive case of a substantive, it sometimes happens that an adjective is followed by a genitive case in apposition (§ 317) with the substantive implied in it: as Ἀθηναῖος ὢν πόλεως τῆς μεγίστης being a man of Atens, a city the greatest P1. Ap. 29 d.
421. A predicate adjective belonging to two or more substantives is usually plural (or dual), or it may agree with one (usually the nearer) and be understood with the rest: as αἰεὶ γάρ τοι ἔρις τε φίλη, πολεµοί τε μάχαι τε for always strife, and wars, and battles, are dear to you A 177. For examples of the plural see § 422 below.
422. A predicate adjective belonging to substantives of different gender is commonly masculine if the substantives are felt to denote persons, and neuter if they are felt to denote things: thus, ὡς εἶδε πατέρα τε καὶ μητέρα καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα αἰχμαλώτους γεγενημένους when he saw that both his father and mother and brother and his own wife had been made captives Xn. Cy. 3, 1, 7. ἡ τύχη καὶ Φίλιππος ἦσαν τῶν ἔργων κόριοι Fortune and Philip were masters of the deeds Aeschin. 2, 118. ἔχω αὐτῶν καὶ τέκνα καὶ γυναῖκας… φρουρούμενα I have their wives and children safely guarded (i.e. as chattels) Xn. Α. 1, 4, 8.
423. A predicate adjective may be used substantively (§ 424), and is then neuter, although the subject may be masculine or feminine (cf. § 422): thus, τερπνὸν… τράπεζα πλήρης a thing of joy is a wellfilled board E. Hipp. 109. γυνὴ δὲ θῆλυ κἀπὶ δακρύοις ἔφῡ but woman is a feminine thing and prone to tears E. Med. 928. So often the neuter τί: as τί ἦν τὰ λεχθέντα what was the conversation? (lit. the things said were what?) Pl. Phaed. 58 c.
Note. – In tragedy when a woman speaks of herself in the plural (§ 495, note) she regularly uses the masculine form of the participle: thus, ἀρκοῦμεν ἡμεῖς οἱ προθνγῄσκοντες σέθεν sufficient am I (ie. Alcestis) who am dying in your stead E. Alc. 383.
424. Adjectives Used Substantively. – The substantive which an adjective modifies is often omitted when it is a common word like man, woman, child, thing, land, road, day, hand, etc., which can be readily understood. The adjective alone then acquires the force of a substantive: thus, ὁ σοφός the wise man (sc. ἄνθρωπος), ἡ καλή the beautiful woman (sc. γυνή), ἀγαθόν a good thing (sc. πρᾶγμα), οἱ πολλοί the many (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ὁ Δᾶρείου the son of Darius (sc. υἱός), ἡ Ἀγαμέμνονος the daughter of Agamemnon (sc. θυγάτηρ), τὰ τῆς πόλεως the affairs of State (sc. πρᾱ́γματα), ἡ ἐμαυτοῦ my own land (sc. γῆ), τὴν ἐπὶ Μέγαρα the road to Megara (sc. ὁδόν), τὴν ταχίστην the shortest way (sc. ὁδόν), τῇ ὑστεραίᾷ on the following day (sc . ἡμέρᾷ), τῇ δεξιᾷ with the right hand (sc. χειρἰ).
Norte. – Numerous adjectives have come thus, to be used regularly as substantives: thus, πατρίς fatherland (sc. γῇ), τριήρης trireme (sc. ναῦς), μουσική music (sc. τέχνη), ἑσπέρα evening time (sc. ὥρᾱ), and many others.
425. Adjectives with Adverbial Force. – Sometimes in Greek (as is so frequent in Latin) an adjective modifying a substantive in a sentence may have the effect of modifying the predicate: thus, χθιζὸς ἔβη he went yesterday (ire. χθές) A 424, εὗδον παννύχιοι they slept all night long B 2, τριταῖοι ἀφῑ́κοντο they arrived on the third day Th. 1. 60, κατέβαινον… σκοταῖοι they came down in darkness Xn. A. 4, 1, 10.
THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE
426. The Comparative Degree denotes more than the positive: as σοφώτερος more wise or wiser. The comparative may be used absolutely, or the person or thing with which comparison is made may be expressed.
1. The comparative used absolutely means rather, somewhat, and sometimes (by implication) too much: thus, γελοιότερον rather amusing Pl. Ap. 30 e. χείρους rather bad (i.e. rascals), Lys. 16, 3. θᾶττον too quickly.
2. When the word with which comparison is made is expressed it stands either with ἤ than, or else in the genitive case (§ 363): thus, σοφώτερος ἤ ἐγώ or σοφώτερος ἐμοῦ wiser than I.
Note 1. – When 7 is used after a comparative, the two objects compared regularly stand in the same case, unless the second is the subject of a verb (expressed or understood); then it is in the nominative: thus, φιλοῦσα αὐτὸν μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν βασιλεύοντα Ἀρταξέρξην loving him more than (she did) the king Artazerses Xn. A. 1, 1, 4. ἐπ ἄνδρας στρατεύεσθαι πολὺ ἀμείνονας ἢ Σκύθᾱς to march against men much braver than Scythians (“than against Seythians”) Hdt. 7, 10. Rarely a feeling that the second word is the subject of a verb (expressed or understood) causes it to be put in the nominative: thus, ἀνδρὸς πολὺ δυνατωτέρου ἤ ἐγώ υἱόν the son of a man much more powerful than I (am) Xn. Cy. 5, 2, 28.
Note 2.– The genitive after a comparative is commonly equivalent to the nominative or accusative with ἤ than; less often can it be said to represent some other case: thus, τοὺς φόρους οὐδὲν ἧττον τᾱ̀νδρὸς ἀπεδίδου she used to pay in the tazes no less than (did) her husband (ἢ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπεδίδου) Xn. Hell. 3, 1, 12. σεῦ ἀμείνονι φωτὶ μάχεσθαι. to fight with a better man than you (are) Η. 111. Ὀρφέως κάλλῑον ὑμνῆσαι μέλος tο sing a strain more beautiful than (that of) Orpheus E. Med. 543 (cf. § 717, 4).
Note 3.– When two adjectives or adverbs are compared, ἢ is always used, and both stand in the comparative degree: thus, πρόθῡµος μᾶλλον ἢ σοφωτέρᾱ more willing than wise E. Med. 485.
Note 4. – The neuter comparative πλέον more, ἑλᾶττον (or μεῖον) less, when used purely as adverbs, sometimes do not affect the construction of the sentence: thus, ἀποκτείνουσι τῶν ἀνδρῶν οὐ μεῖον πεντακοσίους they killed at least (lit. not less than) five hundred men Xn. A. 6, 4, 24.
Note 5. – Comparatives may also be followed sometimes by ἀντι instead of (§ 402), or ἤ and the infinitive, with or without ὥστε, lit. than so that (§ 645, note), or ἤ κατά (with the accusative) than according to (§ 409, 2).
Note 6. – A thing may be compared with itself under other circumstances; such a comparison is expressed by the genitive of the reflexive pronoun (§ 470), often helped by αὐτός in agreement with the subject (§ 473): thus, ἐγένοντο… μακρῷ ἀμείνονες αὐτοὶ ἑωντῶν they far surpassed themselves Hdt. 8, 86. This usage is sometimes found also with the superlative.
THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE
427. The superlative degree means most: as σοφώτατος most wise or wisest.
1. The superlative may be used absolutely meaning very, or it may be followed by a partitive genitive (§ 355, 1): thus, ἀνὴρ σοφώτατος a very wise man, or σοφώτατος ἀνδρῶν wisest (one) of men.
Note. – Iu place of the partitive genitive the words ἐν τοῖς (lit. among those who) are also found with the superlative (they do not affect the construction): Uius ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὸν σίδηρον κατέθεντο the Athenians were the first among those who put aside the wearing of the sword Th. 1,6. ἐν τοῖς Bapirar’ ἂν ἐνέγκαιμι I should bear it most heavily among those (who would bear it heavily) PL Crit. 43 c.
428. Strengthened Superlative. – The superlative may be strengthened by ὡς or ὅτι (less often by ᾖ, οἷος or other relative words): thus, ὡς τάχιστα as quickly as possible, ὅτι πλεῖστοι as many men as possible, χωρίον οἷον χαλεπώτατον an extremely difficult spot Xn. A. 4, 8, 2 (cf. § 485, note 2).
Note. – Probably a word meaning “possible” has come to be omitted in these expressions, since sometimes such a word is found: as εἰσεφόρησαν ὡς ἐδύναντο πλεῖστα they carried in the most (things) they could Xn. A. 4, 6, 1.
VIII · Syntax of Adverbs
429. Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs.
1. Andverb in the attributive position (§ 451) is sometimes used with the force of an adjective: thus, οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι the men of that time.
Note. – Andverb may be modified by a preposition (see § 398): as εἰς ἀεί for ever.
430. Comparative and Superlative of Adverbs. – In general what has been said about the comparative and superlative of adjectives (§§ 426–428) applies also to the comparative and superlative of adverbs: thus, σοφώτερον more wisely or rather wisely, σοφώτατα most wisely ov very wisely, σοφώτατα πάντων (§ 355, 1) most wisely of all.
THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS οὐ and μή
431. Greek possesses two adverbs, οὐ (οὐκ, οὐχ. § 46, οὐχί) and μή, meaning not; of these, οὐ is used in negative expressions of fact; in other negative expressions μή is used.
1. Hence it follows that in expressions of negative command, wish, purpose, condition (including adjectives and participles which imply a condition, § 653, 6), in relative clauses with indefinite antecedent (§ 620 ff.), and with the infinitive used as a substantive (§§ 633, 635) μή is regularly used.
2. But when the infinitive or participle is used in indirect discourse (§ 671), it retains the negative which it would have had in the direct discourse.
3. A particular word in a sentence may by itself be modified by οὐ, even when the sentence as a whole would require μή: so often οὐκ ἐῶ not allow = forbid, οὐ πολλοι not many = few, οὔ φημι deny, etc.: as ἐᾱ̀ν οὐ φῆτε if you deny PL. Ap. 25 b. (CE. § 600, note.)
4. The distinction between od and μή applies also to their compounds: as οὐδείς, μηδείς nobody; οὐδέ, μηδέ not even, etc.
Note. – Irregularities in the use of οὐ and μή. – Occasionally μή is used where we should expect οὐ, or vice versa οὐ where we should expect μή. Thus, a participle or adjective depending on a word which has (or might have) μή may take μή by attraction (§ 316): as κελεύ αἰτοῦ μεῖναι... ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ μὴ διαβάντας he bade them stay right there at the river without crossing (here οὐ would be proper (§ 431, 3), but the influence of the infinitive, μεῖναι (§ 431, 1), is too strong) Xn. A. 4, 3, 28. ἐάν τι τοιοῦτον αἴσθῃ σεαντὸν μή εἰδότα if you perceive yourself not to be informed on any suck matter (here εἰδότα, being in indirect discourse (§ 431, 2), would naturally take οὐ, but the influence of theconditional clause (§ 431, 1) permits μή to be used) Xn. Mem. 3, 5, 23.
The infinitive used as a substantive (§ 635 ff.) sometimes appears to have οὐ instead of μή (§ 431, 1), but in such case the negative probably did not originally belong with the infinitive, but with the word on which the infinitive depends: as χρὴ δ’ οὕποθ'… παῖδας περισσῶς ἐκδιδάσκεσθαι σοφούς one ought never (or never ought) to have his children taught to be too wise E. Med. 295.
A few rare examples in Classical Greek of the actual misuse of οὐ and μή are probably to be explained simply as grammatical mistakes.
432. When one simple negative stands next to another simple negative, οὐ οὐ or μὴ μή is never found, but always μὴ οὐ or οὐ μή.
433. Strengthened Negation. – In Greek (unlike English) two negatives do not always make an affirmative. The simple negatives (οὐ and μή) usually retain everywhere their separate negative force, but compound negatives following another negative serve only to strengthen the negation: thus, καὶ οὐδὲν μέντοι οὐδὲ τοῦτον παθεῖν ἔφασαν, οὐδ' ἄλλος δὲ… ἔπαθεν οὐδεὶς οὐδέν however, they say that not even this man suffered any harm, nor did anybody else suffer any harm whatever Xn. A. 1, 8, 20.
434. Sympathetic (or Redundant) Negative. – An infinitive (more rarely a participle or a finite mood) depending on a word which is modified by a negative, or which in itself contains a negative idea (like hinder, forbid, deny, ete.) often takes an extra negative (μή or οὐ) to confirm the idea of negation: as πᾶς γὰρ ἀσκὸς δύο ἄνδρας ἕξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι for each skin will keep two men from sinking(καταδῦναι alone might have been used) Xn. 4. 3, 5, 11. οὐδεμίᾱν ῡ̀μέων ἔχω ἐλπίδα μὴ οὐ δώσειν ῡ̀μέας δίκην I have no expectation that you will not pay the penalty (μὴ δώσειν might have been used) Hdt. 6, 11. So also ὥστε πᾶσιν αἰσχύνην εἶναι μὴ οὐ συσπουδάζειν so that all were ashamed not to take hold earnestly (μὴ συσπουδάζειν alone might have been used, but αἰσχύνη suggests “thought it not right,” and so prepares the way for the extra negative) Xn. Α. 2, 3, 11. εἰνάτῃ δὲ οὐκ ἐξελεύσεσθαι ἔφασαν μὴ οὗ πλήρεος ἐόντος τοῦ κύκλου and they said they would not march out on the ninth if the circle of the moon were not full (μὴ… ἐόντος alone might have been used) Hdt. 6, 106. (A negative may also be implied in a question, as in the second example below.)
435. Double Sympathetic Negative. – So also an infinitive depending on a word which contains a negative idea (§ 434), and which, at the same time, is modified by a negative, may take two extra negatives (μὴ οὐ), one in sympathy with the negative idea in the verb, the other in sympathy with the negative adverb: thus, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲν αὐτοὺς ἐπιλῡ́εται ἡ ἡλικία τὸ μὴ οὐχὶ ἀγανακτεῖν but their age does not prevent them from being distressed Pl. Crit. 43 c. τί ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ… ἀποθανεῖν; what is to prevent (i.e. there is nothing to prevent) our being put to death? Xn. A. 3, 1, 13.
Note. – Observe that the double sympathetic negative (μὴ οὐ, which is not to be rendered at all in English) is found only with an infinitive dependent on a doubly negative expression; elsewhere (see the last three examples under § 434) one of the negatives (μή) always retains its negative force.
THE ADVERB ἄν
436109. The adverb ἄν generally serves to give a tinge of indefiniteness to the clause in which it stands. It has no equivalent in English, and often cannot be translated. (For the sake of completeness a summary of its uses is here given.)
437. In independent clauses dv is used with the potential optative (§ 563) and the potential indicative (§ 565).
Note. – For the quasi independent use of ἄν with the infinitive and participle not in indirect discourse see §§ 647 and 662.
438. In dependent clauses ἄν is used regularly with the subjunctive in conditional (§§ 604, 609) and relative (§§ 623, 625) clauses.
Note. – With εἰ, ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, or ἐπειδή, the adverb ἄν unites to form ἐᾱ́ν (ἤν, ᾱ̀ν), ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπᾱ́ν (Hdt. ἐπεάν), or ἐπειδάν (cf. § 439, note 1).
439. In indirect discourse ἄν is retained (even though the mode is changed) where it originally stood in the direct form, except when a dependent subjunctive with ἄν is changed to the optative after a secondary tense; then ἄν disappears. See §§ 670, 2; 673.
Note 1.– Position of &. – The adverb dv never stands at the beginning of its clause. It may stand next to the verb it modifies, or it may stand immediately after some other prominent word in the sentence (as regularly in relative and conditional clauses, § 438). Thus, it may stand with the negative (οὐκ ἄν) or with any emphatic word (πῶς ἄν, μάλιστ᾿ ἄν) or even with the principal verb instead of the subordinate one with which it really belongs: as σὺν ῡ̀μῖν μὲν ἄν οἶμαι εἶναι τῑ́µιος with you I think that I should be honored (i.e. οἶμαι ἂν εἶναι) Xn. А. 1, 3, 6.
Note 2.– ἄν Repeated. – In a long sentence ἄν is sometimes repeated as ῡ́μεῖς δ’ ἴσως τάχ’ ἂν ἀχθόμενοι… κρούσαντες ἄν με … ῥᾷδίως ἂν ἀποκτείνατε but you perhaps might be vezed . . . and strike me… and easily kill me Pl. Ap. 31 a.
Note 3. – Verb Supplied. – Sometimes the verb with which ἄν belongs is to be supplied from the context: as δικαίως μὲν ἐν ὀλιγαρχίᾷ δίκην δόντος… δικαίως δ’ ἂν ἐν δημοκρατίᾷ justly did he suffer punishment at the time of an oligarchy, and justly would he have suffered (sc. δόντος) at the time of a democracy Lys. 12, 78.
VIII · Conjunctions
440. Conjunctions may be divided into two classes: Cobrdinate and Subordinate. (For “Postpositives” cf. § 452, note.)
441110. Coordinate conjunctions connect words, phrases, or clauses which stand in the same construction.
The principal coordinate conjunctions are: καί and (Latin et), τε and (Latin –que), ἀλλά, ἄταρ but (Latin sed), δέ but (Latin autem), οὐδέ (μηδέ) nor, not even, ἤ or, than, ἄρα, accordingly, so then, γάρ for, οὖν therefore, accordingly (including οὐκοῦν therefore and οὕκουν therefore not), ὥστε so that (§ 595), καί… καί or τε... τε or τε… καί both… and, εἴτε… εἴτε whether… or, οὔτε (μήτε)… οὔτε (μήτε) neither… nor (§ 431, 4), ἤ… ἤ either… or, μὲν… δέ on the one hand… on the other.
Note 1. – καί often has the meaning also or even. The expression ἄλλως τε… καὶ means especially (literally in other ways, and alsο…). The expression τε… καὶ δὴ καὶ means and particularly; thus, δὲ ἐρήμων τε τόπων… ἄλλων καὶ δὴ καὶ ὑπὸ γῆν through other desert places and, in particular, beneath the earth Pl. Phaed. 112 e.
Note 2. – γάρ (-γε + ἄρ) is often used (e.g. in wishes and in questions and answers) merely to show a close relation or sequence between clauses; it is then often best rendered by why, why then, then, etc. The expression καὶ γὰρ… may often be conveniently translated ‘yes, for’ and ἀλλὰ γὰρ… ‘no, for’ or ‘but enough, for’.
442111. Subordinate conjunctions connect subordinate clauses with the clauses on which they depend.
The following are the more important subordinate conjunctions (most of them are really relative adverbs): that, because, ὡς how, as, that, εἰ, ἐᾱ́ν (= εἰ + ἄν) if, ὅπως how, as, in order that, ὥστε so that, ἵνα where, in order that, ὅτε, ὁπότε when, since, ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα at which time, when, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή (= ἐπεί + δή) when, since, ἔστε until, ἕως as long as, until (§ 618, note), µέχρι, ἄχρι up to that point, until, πρίν before, μή (after expressions of fear) lest.
Note. – οὐχ ὅτι or μὴ ὅτε means not only (literally, perhaps, not to say that…).
VIII · The definite Article ὁ, ἡ, τό
443112. Originally ὁ, ἡ, τό was a demonstrative pronoun, meaning this, and in Homer and other early poets (§ 443 a) it commonly has this meaning. In Attic Greek it has come to mean the, but in Attic its use as a pronoun has survived in the following phrases:
1. ὃ μὲν… ὃ δέ (in all the cases) the one… the other, this… that: as
οἳ μὲν ἐπορεύοντο, οἳ δ᾽ εἴποντο the one party proceeded, and the other followed Xn. A. 3, 4, 16. τοὺς μὲν ἀπέκτεινε, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐξέβαλεν some he killed and others he banished Xn. A. 1, 1, 7. ἐπορεύθησαν τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι they proceeded, sometimes fighting a bit, sometimes resting Xn. A. 4, 1, 14.
Very often ὃ δέ… but he, and he, is found without a preceding ὃ μὲν; it regularly shows a change in the subject of the sentence: thus, Κῦρος δίδωσιν αὐτῷ μῡρίους δάρεικούς ὃ δὲ λαβὼν τὸ χρῡσίον στράτευμα συνέλεξεν Cyrus gave him ten thousand daries; and he took the money, and collected an army Xn. A. 1, 1, 9.
2. τὸν καὶ τόν this one and that one; neuter also τὸ καὶ τό, and τὰ καὶ τά: as καὶ ἀφικνοῦμαι ὡς τὸν καὶ τόν and I came to this man and that man Lys. 1, 23.
3. καὶ τόν and he, καὶ τήν and she with an infinitive: as καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν and he said (cf. also the phrase καὶ ὃς ἔφη and he said, § 144 a).
4. πρὸ τοῦ before this.
Often in Homer and Herodotus, and sometimes in Attic tragedy, ὁ, ἡ, τό is used as a relative pronoun (see § 149 a-b).
ὁ, ἡ, τό AS AN ARTICLE (the)
444. As the definite article ὁ, ἡ, τό the usually marks its substantive as evidently known, or before mentioned: thus, ἡ μάχη the battle, οἱ Ἕλληνες the Greeks, τὰ δέκα ἔτη the ten years (of the Trojan war) Th. 1, 11.
445. So a substantive modified by an attributive (such as an adjective, adjective pronoun, or a limiting genitive) may take the article if the speaker feels that the substantive, because of this limitation, is made well known to his hearers: thus, αἱ πρῶται τάξεις the foremost ranks, ἡ εἱμαρμένη ἡμέρα the fated day, ἡ τῶν πολλῶν δόξα the opinion of the multitude, οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ this man, ἐμὸς φίλος my friend (but φίλος ἐμός a friend of mine).
446. Article with Proper Names. – So proper names (if well known or previously mentioned) often take the article: thus, ὁ Πλάτων Plato (the famous philosopher), οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι the Athenians; διέβησαν εἰς Σικελίᾱν… ἐλθόντες δὲ ἐς τὴν Σικελίᾱν, κ.τ.λ. they crossed to Sicily… And when they had come to (the) Sicily (above mentioned) Th. 6, 2.
Note. – Βασιλεύς (the) King (of Persia) was probably felt by the Greeks to be a sort of proper name, and so it is often found without the article.
447. Article with the Force of a Possessive. – The article modifying a substantive (§444) may acquire the force of a possessive pronoun: thus, Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν Tissaphernes slandered Cyrus to his (lit. the) brother Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. Κλέαρχος… ἔχει τὴν δίκην Clearchus has his (lit. the) deserts Xn. A. 2, 5, 38.
448. Generic Article. – The article is often used to mark a substantive as belonging to a well-known class: thus, ὁ ἄνθρωπος θνητός ἐστιν man is mortal, οἱ γέροντες the old, ἡ ἀλήθεια truth. (The fact that the article is generic is determined by the context.)
449. Article with Predicate Substantive. – The predicate substantive (unless previously mentioned or well known) cannot have the article: thus, Κλέαρχος Λακεδαιμόνιος φυγὰς ἦν Clearchus was a Spartan exile Xn. A. 1, 1, 9. θάνατός ἐστιν ἡ ζημίᾱ the penalty is death Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 62 (but τὰς νέας τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος εἶναι that the ships were the wooden wall (mentioned in the oracle) Hdt. 7, 142).
Note. – Thus, (§ 449) subject and predicate are clearly distinguished in such sentences as νὺξ ἡ ἡμέρη ἐγένετο the day became night Hdt. 1, 103.
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE
450. The article always precedes the word it modifies.
451. Attributive Position. – Words or phrases standing between the article and its substantive (or immediately after the article, if the substantive precedes or is not expressed) are said to have Attributive Position: thus, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ the good man (cf. § 302).
1. Attributive adjectives (§ 302), and adverbs with adjective force (§ 429, 1), and, in general, most attributive phrases, have attributive position: thus, ἡ Ἑλληνικὴ δύναμις the Greek force, οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι the men of that time, τὰ σῑγῇ βουλευόμενα the things planned in silence, τὸν ἐκ τῶν Ἑλλήνων εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους φόβον the fear inspired by the Greeks in the barbarians Xn. A. 1, 2, 18.
452. When article and attributive together are used with a substantive, three different arrangements are possible: Thus, –
(1) ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ the good man.
(2) ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός the man (namely) the good (one).
(3) ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός (a) man (namely) the good (one).
Of these three arrangements the first is oftenest found, but the second is by no means uncommon, as ἐν τῇ ἀναβάσει τῇ μετὰ Κύρου on the march inland with Cyrus Xn. Α. 5, 1, 1; the third arrangement is found when the substantive alone would stand without the article: thus, σύνειμι μὲν θεοῖς, σύνειμι δὲ ἀνθρώποις τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς I associate with gods and with men (that is) the good (men) Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 32.
Note. – Postpositives. – The words μέν, δέ, γε, τε, τοι, γάρ, δή, and οὖν, being “postpositive” cannot stand at the beginning of a sentence; hence they are often found in the attributive position (§ 451), but without being attributives: as ὁ μὲν οὖν πρεσβύτερος παρὼν ἐτύγχανε now then the elder happened to be present Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. (In poetry δή sometimes is not postpositive.)
453. Predicate Position of Adjectives. – A predicate adjective (§ 302) cannot stand in the attributive position, but either precedes or follows the article and its substantive: thus, ἀγαθὸς ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός the man is good.
1. By using adjectives in the predicate position, the Greeks were able to express frequent subordinate predications which are difficult to render into English: thus, ψῑλὴν ἔχων τὴν κεφαλὴν with his head (which was) bare Xn. A. 1, 8, 6. ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ with his horse (which was) in a sweat Xn. A. 1, 8, 1.
PECULIARITIES OF POSITION WITH THE ARTICLE
454. With µέσος, ἄκρος, etc. – The adjectives µέσος middle, ἄκρος lit. pointed, sharp, ἔσχατος farthest, ἥμισυς half, when used in the predicate position (§ 453) (often also without the article) mean middle of, tip of or top of, end of, half of (cf. Latin summus mons): thus, μέση ἡ πόλις or ἡ πόλις μέση the middle of the city (but ἡ μέση πόλις the middle city), ἐπ᾽ ἄκρῳ τῷ ὄρει on the top of the mountain.
455. With πᾶς and ὅλος. – The adjectives πᾶς (ἅπᾶς, σύμπᾶς) all and ὅλος whole, when used with the article, commonly have predicate position (§ 453): thus, πᾶσα ἡ πόλις the whole city, πάντες οἱ πολῖται all the citizens, ἐν ὅλη τῇ πόλει in the whole city.
1. But when πᾶς and ὅλος are real attributives, meaning the whole collectively, they have the attributive position: thus, ἡ πᾶσα Σικελίᾱ entire Sicily, οἱ πάντες ἄνθρωποι the whole world Xn. A. 5, 6, 7. τὸ ὅλον στράτευμα the entire army Xn. A. 6, 2, 10.
456. With Demonstrative Pronouns, etc. – A substantive modified by a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος) or by ἄμφω, ἀμφότερος both, ἑκάτερος each (of two), ἕκαστος each (of several) commonly has the article (cf. § 445), and the pronoun has the predicate position (§ 453): thus, οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ this man, ἥδε ἡ γνώμη this opinion, τὼ παῖδε ἀμφοτέρῳ both the children.
Note. – But proper names, and substantives modified by numerals or a relative clause, seldom need the article with a demonstrative: thus,: Αὐτολύκῳ τούτῳ for this Autolycus (here) Xn. Sym. 3, 8. οὗτοι οὓς ὁρᾶτε βάρβαροι these barbarians whom you behold. Xn. A. 1, 5, 16.
457. 1. With Limiting Genitives. – Genitives of the personal pronouns (including αὐτός used for the pronoun of the third person, § 475, 3), when used to limit a substantive with the article, have the predicate position (§ 453): thus, ὁ πατήρ µου or ἐμοῦ ὁ πατήρ my father, οἱ στρατιῶται αὐτοῦ his soldiers.
2. Limiting genitives of other (than personal) pronouns commonly stand in attributive position: thus, ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ πατήρ my own father, τὸ ἐκείνων πλοῖον their boat Xn. A. 1, 4, 8.
3. The Partitive Genitive modifying a substantive with the article nearly always has predicate position (§ 453).
458. Predicate Position Modified. – Most words which regularly have predicate position (§§ 454–457) may, if an attributive word follows the article, stand between the attributive and the substantive: thus, ἡ στενὴ αὕτη ὀδὸς this narrow way Xn. A. 4, 2, 6.
VIII · Syntax of Pronouns
459. Pronouns (like nouns, § 73, 2) may be either substantive or adjective, and some pronouns (like τὶς and αὐτός) are used both substantively and adjectively.
460. Antecedent. – The substantive to which a pronoun refers is called its Antecedent (from antecedo), since normally it precedes the pronoun: thus, αἱ κῶμαι ἐν αἷς ἐσκήνουν the villages in which they were encamped Xn. A. 1, 4, 9.
461. Antecedent Implied. – Anntecedent may be implied, instead of being expressed, by some preceding word: thus, ἐλθὼν εἰς Λακεδαίμονα ἔπειθεν αὐτοὺς στρατεύσασθαι he went to Sparta, and tried to persuade them (i.e. the Spartans) to take up arms Lys. 12, 58. ναυμαχίᾱ παλαιτάτη ὧν ἴσμεν a sea fight the most ancient of the sea fights (i.e. τῶν ναυμαχιῶν) of which we know Th. 1, 13.
462. Agreement of Pronouns (general). – Andjective pronoun agrees in gender, number, and case, with the substantive it modifies (cf. § 420); a substantive pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender, number, and person (so far as these are distinguished in its inflection, cf. § 314 note), but its case depends on the construction of the clause in which it stands: thus, κεῖνον δ᾿ ἐγὼ θάψω but I (Antigone, nom. sing. fem.) will bury him (Polynices, acc. sing. masc.) S. Ant. 71.
463. A pronoun referring to two or more antecedents follows the same principles of agreement as the predicate adjective (§§ 421–423): as τῇ φωνῇ τεκαὶτῷτρόπῳ… ἐν οἷσπερ ἐτεθράμμην in the manner of speech and behavior in which I had been brought up Pl. Ap. 18 a.
464. Construction according to Sense.– A pronoun sometimes agrees with the real, rather than with the grammatical, gender of its antecedent (see § 315): as βίη Ἡρακλείῃ ὅσπερ… mighty Heracles (lit. might of Heracles) who… Hm. τὸ Ἀρκαδικὸν ὁπλιτικόν, ὧν ἧρχε Κλεᾱ́νωρ the force of Arcadian hoplites whom Cleanor commanded Xn. Α. 4, 8, 18.
1. So a word in the singular may suggest a plural, or vice versa a word in the plural may suggest a corre sponding singular, and the pronoun may agree with the implied antecedent (cf. § 461): thus, ἧ μάλα τις θεὸς ἔνδον, οἳ οὐρανὸν εὑρὺν ἔχουσιν surely a god is within (one of the gods) who hold the broad heavens τ 40 (cf. τις… βροτῶν οἳ one of mortals, who Z 142). ἀνθρώπους τίνυσθον, ὅ τίς κ᾿ ἐπίορκον ὁμόσσῃ you punish mankind (every single one) whoever swears falsely Γ 279.
465. Attraction. – A pronoun may be attracted (§ 316) to the gender and number of its predicate substantive: thus, σκοπεῖν… εἰ δίκαια λέγω ἢ μή: δικαστοῦ μὲν γὰρ αὕτη (i.e. for τοῦτο) ἀρετή to see whether I speak fairly or not, for this is the merit of a judge Pl. Ap. 18 a. (Οἱ. hoc opus, hic labor est Verg. Aen. 6, 129).
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
466. Agreement. – A personal pronoun agrees with its antecedent in person and number; it has no distinction of gender, and its case depends on the construction of the clause in which it stands (§ 462): thus, σὺ δ᾿ εἰπέ μοι but do you (Antigone, 2d pers. nom. sing. fem.) tell me (Creon, 1st pers. dat. sing. mase.) S. Ant. 446.
467. The personal pronouns in the nominative case are not expressed unless emphatic (see § 305).
468. In Attic the pronoun of the third person οὗ, οἷ, etc. (§ 139, 2) is always reflexive (see § 472); to supply its place as a personal pronoun of reference the corresponding forms of αὐτός are used (§§ 140, 1 and 475, 3).
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
469. Agreement. – A reflexive pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender, number, and person; its case depends on its construction in the clause in which it stands.
470113. Direct Reflexive. – A reflexive pronoun regularly refers to the most important word in the sentence – usually the subject: thus, γνῶθι σαυτόν know thyself; Κλέαρχος… ἀφιππεύει ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνήν Clearchus rode back to his own tent Xn. A. 1, 5, 12. τοὺς περιοίκους ἀφῆκεν ἐπὶ τᾱ̀ς ἑαυτῶν πόλεις the perioeci he dismissed to their own cities Xn. Hell. 6, 5, 21.
471. Indirect Reflexive. – In dependent clauses a reflexive pronoun may sometimes refer back to the subject of the principal verb (cf. se in Latin): thus, ἐβούλετο δὲ καὶ Κλέαρχος ἅπαν τὸ στράτευμα πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην moreover, Clearchus wished the entire army to give its mind to him(self) Xn. Α. 2, 5, 29.
1. But αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, etc., (§ 475, 3) is also frequently found in dependent clauses referring to the subject of the principal verb (cf. eius in Latin); thus, τῶν map’ ἑαυτῷ βαρβάρων ἐπεμελεῖτο ὡς… εὐνοῑκῶς ἔχοιεν αὐτῷ he was careful of the barbarians with him(self) that they should be well disposed toward him(self) Xn. A. 1, 1, 5.
Note 1. – Sometimes the reflexive pronoun of the third person is used in referring to the first or second person (cf. § 143 a): thus, εὑρήσετε σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἡμαρτηκότας you will find that you have made a mistake Xn. Hell. 1, 7, 19.
Note 2. – The plurals of the reflexive pronouns sometimes have the force of a reciprocal (§ 142) pronoun: thus, ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς διαλεξόμεθα we shall converse with one another (lit. with ourselves) [Dem] 48, 6.
472114. The personal pronoun of the third person (οὗ, οἷ, etc.) is in Attic always used as an indirect reflexive (§ 471); rarely the personal pronouns of the first and second persons are so used: thus, λέγεται Ἀπόλλων ἐκδεῖpaι Μαρσύᾱν νῑκήσᾱς ἐρίζοντά οἱ περὶ σοφίᾱς Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas when he had outdone him in a contest with himself in skill Xn. A. 1, 2, 8. So in the phrase δοκῶ µοι I seem to myself.
473. The use of the reflexive pronouns may be made more emphatic by adding αὐτός (§ 475, 2) in agreement with the subject: thus, αὐτοὶ ἐν αὐτοῖς στασιάζοντες being at variance among themselves Xn. Hell. 1, 5, 9 (cf. the similar use of ipse… se in Latin).
THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN αὐτός
474. Agreement. –The pronoun αὐτός is used both substantively and adjectively. When used as an adjective it follows the rules of agreement for adjectives (§ 420); when used as a personal pronoun of the third person (§ 475, 3) it follows the rules for agreement of such pronouns (§ 462).
475115. Uses of αὐτός. – There are three different uses of αὐτός as follows: –
1. As an adjective in the attributive (§ 451) position αὐτός means same: thus, ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ the same man, ταὐτά (§ 43) the same things (sc. πρᾱ́γματα).
2. As an adjective in the predicate position (§ 453), or without the article, αὐτός means self (myself, yourself, himself, etc.): thus, αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτός the man himself, σὺ αὐτός you yourself, etc.
Note. – Frequently in the nominative case (less often in the other cases) the substantive is to be supplied from the context, so that αὐτός appears to stand alone meaning self. αὐτός τε καὶ oἱ σοὶπρόγονοι (you) yourself and your ancestors PL. Crit. 50 e. αὐτὸν ἐλέησον (sc. ἐμέ from the context) pity me myself Ω 503. καὶ Ἀθηναῖοι πάλιν ἐς Εὔβοιαν διαβάντες… κατεστρέψαντο πᾶσαν… Ἑστιαιᾶς δὲ ἔξοικίσαντες αὐτοὶ τὴν γῆν ἔσχον the Athenians again crossed over into Euboea and entirely subdued it… and, afler driving the Histiaeans from their homes, took possession of their land themselves Th. 1, 114. So αὐτὸς ἔφη he himself (ie. the master) said it.
3. In cases other than the nominative, αὐτός may be used substantively as a personal pronoun of the third person (§ 468) him, her, it, them. In Attic this is the regular usage: thus, αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε he made him satrap Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. οὐδὲν ἤχθετο αὐτῶν πολεμούντων he was not at all disturbed because they were fighting. Xn. Α. 1, 1, 8.
IDIOMATIC USES OF αὐτός
Note 1. – With an ordinal numeral αὐτός is best translated with (n – 1) others: thus, ἠρέθη πρεσβευτὴς… δέκατος αὐτός he was chosen ambassador with nine others (lit. he himself the tenth) Xn. Hell. 2, 2, 17.
Note 2. – Combined with a substantive in the dative case (§ 392, note) αὐτός is best translated and all: thus, τέτταρας ναῦς ἔλαβον αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσι they took four ships, crews and all (lit. with the men themselves) Xen. Hell. 1, 2, 12.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
476. Agreement. – A possessive pronoun is an adjective, agreeing in gender, number, and case, with the word it modifies, but its stem conforms to the person and number of its antecedent. Thus, in ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ my father, ἐμός agrees with πατήρ in gender, number, and case, but its stem ἐμο– corresponds with that of the pronoun of the first person singular.
477116. An equivalent of the possessive pronoun often found is the genitive of the personal pronouns µου, σου, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν (and for the third person αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, αὐτῶν, § 468), always in the predicate position (§ 457, 1): thus, ὁ πατήρ μου my father, ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ his brother, ὁ ἀδὲλφὸς αὐτῆς her brother.
Note. – Since a possessive pronoun is equivalent to a genitive case, a word in the genitive may stand in apposition (§ 317) to a possessive pronoun: thus, δαὴρ αὖτ’ ἐμὸς ἔσκε κυνώπιδος my brother by marriage was he also – of shameless me Γ 180. αὐτῶν γὰρ σφετέρῃσιν ἀτασθαλίῃσιν ὄλοντο for by their own perversity they perished α 7 (cf. § 420, note).
478117. The possessive pronouns (except ὄς and σφέτερος, which are always reflexive) may or may not refer to the subject of the sentence; usually in referring to the subject the genitive of the reflexive pronouns (ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, etc.), in the attributive (§ 457, 2) position, is used. This is the regular prose usage with the third person singular, since ὅς is poetic only: thus, Kλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτᾶς ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι Clearchus tried to force his own soldiers to proceed Xn. A. 1, 3, 1.
479. A possessive pronoun is sometimes made clearly reflexive by the addition of αὐτός in the genitive case (cf. § 477 note); in the singular this usage is poetic only, but in the plural it is very common: thus, ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ χρεῖος my own need B 45. ἑὸν αὐτοῦ χρεῖος his own need α 409. τοῖς σοῖσιν αὐτοῦ to your own (friends) S. 0. R. 416. ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμετέρᾱς αὐτῶν far from our own (land) Th. 6. 21.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
480. Agreement. – The demonstrative pronouns are used both adjectively (§ 420), as οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ this man, and substantively, as οὗτος this (man), ἐκείνη that (woman), τάδε these (things) (cf. § 459).
481. Of the demonstrative pronouns οὗτος this, that, is the most general in meaning, and is most frequently used. Ὄδε this (here) refers to something near the speaker; ἐκεῖνος that (over there) refers to something remote: thus, οὗτός γ᾿Ἀτρείδης this man (of whom you ask) is Atreu’s son Γ 178. Ἕκτορος ἥδε γυνή this (woman here) is Hector’s wife Z 460. εἰ κεῖνον… ἰδοίατο if they should see that man (i.e. Odysseus, who is now far away) α 163.
For the predicate position of demonstrative pronouns see § 456.
482. Generally in referring backward (to something previously mentioned) οὗτος (less often ἐκεῖνος) is used, while in referring forward (to something about to be mentioned) ὅδε (sometimes οὗτος) is employed: as τεκµήριον δὲ τούτου καὶ τάδε a proof of that (which I have said) is also this (which I am now going to state) Xn. A. 1, 9, 29.
So also τοιοῦτος, τοσοῦτος, usually refer back, while τοιόσδε and τοσόσδε usually refer forward.
Note. – The demonstrative ὅδε is often equivalent to a possessive, or even a personal, pronoun of the first person; this use is especially common in tragedy: thus, σκήπτρῳ τυπεὶς ἐκ τῆσδε χειρός struck by the staff held in this hand (of mine) S. O. R. 811. νυμφευθεῖσα δὲ παρ’ ἀνδρὶ τῷδε but wedded with this man (i.e. with me) E. Med. 1337. ὅδε τοι πάρειµι Here am I, Sir Hdt. 1, 115.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
483. Agreement. – A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent (§ 460) in gender and number, but its case depends on the construction of the clause in which it stands: as ἀνὴρ ὃς ἦλθεν a man who came, ἀνὴρ ὃν εἴδομεν a man whom we saw.
484. Attraction. – 1. A relative pronoun is often attracted (§ 316) into the case of its antecedent, especially from the accusative into the genitive or dative: thus, ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίᾱς ἧς κέκτησθε worthy of the freedom which you possess (ἧς, if not attracted, would be ἤν) Xn. A. 1, 7, 3. εἰ τῷ ἡγεμόνι πιστεύσομεν ᾧ ἂν Kῦρος διδῷ if we intend to trust the guide that Cyrus gives (ᾧ, if not attracted, would be ὅν) Xn. A. 1, 3, 16.
2. Much more rarely the antecedent is attracted into the case of the relative: as πάντων ὧν δέονται πεπρᾶγότες having accomplished everything that they need (for πάντα ὧν) Xn. Hell. 1, 4, 2 (cf. in Latin urbem quam statuo vestra est Verg. Aen. 1, 573).
485. “Incorporation”. – The antecedent is often made a part of the relative clause (usually only when the antecedent is indefinite). Both relative and antecedent then stand in the same case: thus, ἀδικεῖ Σωκράτης οὓς μὲν ἡ πόλις νομίζει θεοὺς οὐ νοµίζων Socrates commits an offense in not believing in the gods which (or what gods) the State believes in Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 1. εἰς δὲ ἣν ἀφῑ́κοντο κώμην μεγάλη ἧν the village at which they arrived was large (i.e. ἡ κώμη εἰς ἥν) Xn. A. 4, 4, 2. εἰ δέ τινα ὀρῴη… κατασκευάζοντα ἧς ἄρχοι χώρᾱς if he saw any one improving the country he governed (i.e. τὴν χώρᾱν ἧς, § 484, 2) Xn. Α. 1, 9, 19. τούτους καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐποίει ἧς κατεστρέφετο χώρᾱς these he made rulers of the territory he subdued (i.e. τῆς χώρᾱς ἣν, § 484, 1) Xn. A. 1, 9, 14. ἐπορεύετο σὺν ᾗ εἶχε δυνάμει he proceeded with what force he had (i.e. σὺν τῇ δυνάμει ἦν, § 484, 1) Xn. Hell. 4, 1, 23.
Observe that attraction into the genitive or into the dative (§ 484) usually takes place if either antecedent or relative would stand in one of those cases. Cf. in English “he gave to what persons he could.”
Note 1. – Here belongs the phrase οὐδες ὅστις οὗ (lit. nobody who… not = ) every one, in which οὐδείς is regularly attracted to the case of the relative (οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ, οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐ etc): thus, κλαίων καὶ ἀγανακτῶν οὐδένα ὄντινα οὗ κατέκλασε by his weeping and wailing he broke down the fortitude of everybody Pl. Phaed. 117 d. So similarly θαυμαστός ὅσος lit. wonderful how much, θαυμαστοῦ ὅσου, etc. (adverbially θαυμαστῶς ὡς): as μετὰ ἱδρῶτος θαυμαστοῦ ὅσου with a wonderful amount of sweat (= θαυμαστόν ἐστι μεθ’ ὅσου) PL. Rep. 350d. This attraction is sometimes (rarely) found with other adjectives.
Note 2. – A peculiar attraction and condensation commonly takes place with οἷος, ὅσος, ὁστισοῦν and a few other relatives, by which both the relative and a following nominative are attracted to the case of the antecedent: thus, χαριζόµενον οἵῳ σοι ἀνδρί doing favor to a man like you (the full form would be τοιούτῳ οἷος σὺ εἶ) Xn. Mem. 2, 9, 3. τὴν δὲ γυναῖκα εὗρον ὅσην τ’ ὄρεος κορυφήν and his wife they found as huge as a mountain peak κ 113. Sometimes even with the article: τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν to such as we are Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 25. So often with superlatives (see § 428).
486. Antecedent not Expressed. – Anntecedent denoting the general idea of persons or things is seldom expressed, since its gender, number, and case are usually made clear by the context: thus, ἐγὼ δὲ… καὶ ὧν ἐγὼ κρατῶ μενοῦμεν but I and those (nom. plur. masc.) whom I command will remain Xn. Cy. 5, 1, 26. στυγῶν μὲν ἤ μ’ ἔτικτεν hating her (ace. sing. fem.) who bore me E. Alc. 338. εἰδέναι τὴν δύναμιν ἐφ' οὓς ἂν ἴωσιν to know the strength of those (gen. plur. masc.) against whom they are going Xn. A. 5, 1, 8. δεῖταί σου τήµερον τοῦτον ἐκπιεῖν σὺν οἷς μάλιστα φιλεῖς he desires you to drink this up today in company with those (dat. plur. masc.) whom you, most love (§ 484, 1) Xu. Α. 1, 9, 25. So with relative adverbs: ἄξω ὑμᾶς ἔνθα τὸ πρᾶγμα ἐγένετο I will conduct you to the place where the affair occurred Xn. Cy. 5, 4, 21. Cf. in English “he gave to whom he could.”
Note. – Here belong the phrases ἔστων ὅστις (or ὃς)... there is some one who (i.e. somebody), εἰσὶν οἴ… there are those who (i.e. some), but in other cases in the plural regularly ἔστιν ὧν, ἔστιν οἷς, ἔστιν οὄς: thus, ἔστι δ’ ὅστις κατελήφθη and one man was taken off his guard Xn. A. 1, 8, 20. εἰσὲ δὲ οἳ λέγουσι and some (lit. there are those who) say Hdt. 3, 45. πλὴν Ἰώνων καὶ ᾿Αχαιῶν καὶ ἔστιν ὧν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν except the Ιonians and Achaeans and some other nations Th. 3, 92. Rarely ἦν (ἦσαν) is found: ἦν δὲ τούτων τῶν σταθμῶν οὓς πάνυ μακροὺς ἤλαυνεν some of these days’ marches he made very long Xn. A. 1, 5, 7. So also with relative adverbs: ἔστιν οὗ (or ὅπου)… (lit. there is where) somewhere, ἔστιν ὅπως (lit. there is how) somehow, ἔστιν ὅτε (lit. there is when) sometimes, etc.
487. Relative not Repeated. – In a compound (§ 312) relative sentence the relative (pronoun or adverb) is seldom repeated (cf. § 312, 1) with the succeeding verbs: thus, Ἀριαῖος δέ, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠθέλομεν βασιλέᾱ καθιστάναι, καὶ ἐδώκαμεν καὶ ἐλάβομεν πιστά but Ariaeus, whom we wished to make king and to whom we gave and from whom we received pledges Xn. A. 3, 2, 5. εἶπεν ὅτι οὐδὲν αὐτᾷ µέλοι… ἐπειδὴ πολλοὺς μὲν Ἀθηναίων εἰδείη τοὺς τὰ ὅμοια πρᾱ́ττοντας αὑτῷ, δοκοῦντα δὲ Λυσάνδρῳ καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις λέγοι he said that he didn't care…, since he knew of many Athenians who were acting in concert with him and since what he proposed was agreeable to Lysander and the Spartans Lys. 12, 74.
Note. – Preposition not Repeated. – A preposition belonging with both antecedent and following relative is seldom repeated with the relative.
488. Use of Relatives. – The indefinite relatives (ὅστις ὁπόσος, ὑποῖος, etc.) ure regularly used when the antecedent is indefinite, but the simple relatives (ὃς, ὅσος, etc.) not infrequently refer to an indefinite antecedent; as ἃ μὴ οἶδα οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι what (ever) I don’t know I don't even think that I know Pl. Ap. 21 d.
Note. – Relatives in Exclamations. – Relatives (οἷος, ὅσος, ὡς) are sometimes used in exclamations: as ὦ πάππε, ὅσα πράγματα ἔχεις how much trouble you have, grandpa! (lit. so much trouble as you have! cf. § 485) Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 4. ὡς καλός µοι ὁ πάππος how handsome grandpa is! Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 2.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
489. Agreement. – The interrogative pronouns are used both substantively and adjectively (see § 462): as τίς who? τίς ἀνήρ what man?
490. Use. – The interrogatives (pronouns and adverbs, § 151) are used both in direct and in indirect questions, but in indirect questions the indefinite relatives (§§ 150–151) are commonly preferred: as βουλεύεσθαι ὅ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν to consider what must be done Xn. A. 1, 3, 11.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
491. The indefinite pronoun τὶς, τὶ, is used both substantively and adjectively (see § 462) as ᾖλθέ τις somebody came, ἀνήρ τις ᾖλθε some man came. (Observe that it does not stand at the beginning of a sentence.)
Note 1. – The indefinite τὶς is often best rendered by ‘α, an’: as ἕτερός τις δυνάστης another nobleman; sometimes it can be rendered by “a sort of” or “something like": as ἡ γραφὴ… τοιᾱ́δε τις ἦν the indictment was something like this Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 1. τριᾱ́κοντά τινες somewhere about thirty. So τι with adverbs: σχεδόν τι pretty nearly.
Note 2.– Sometimes τὶς meaning anybody implies everybody; as εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω let every one sharpen well kis spear B 382; but usually this meaning is expressed by πᾶς τις or ἑκαστός τις.
THE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS ἄλλος AND ἕτερος
492. ἄλλος other (of several), and ἕτερος other (of two), are sometimes loosely used, one of them being employed when we might properly expect the other.
IDIOMATIC USES OF ἄλλος AND ἕτερος
Note 1. – By a peculiar idiom in Greek ἄλλος other, rest, often precedes that with which it is contrasted: as τά τε ἄλλα ἐτίμησε καὶ μῡρίους ἔδωκε δάρεικούς he gave me ten thousand darics and honored me in other ways Xn. A.1, 3, 3.
Note 2.– Not infrequently ἄλλος or ἕτερος expresses merely a contrast without being strictly logical, and so can be best rendered by besides: as οὗ γὰρ ἦν χόρτος οὐδὲ ἄλλο οὐδὲν δένδρον for there was no grass, and not even d tree besides (lit. no grass or other tree) Xn. Α. 1, 5, 5.
Note 3. – ἄλλος… ἄλλος (also ἕτερος… ἕτερος means one… another (but this is usually expressed by ὃ μὲν… ὃ δέ § 443, 1). In saying one… one…, another… another…, the second half of the expression, being but a repetition of the first half, is left unsaid, and ἄλλος with itself in a different case (or an adverb from its stem) is sufficient (cf. Latin alius… aliud): thus, ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει one says one thing, another (says) another Xn. Α. 2, 1, 15.
VIII · Syntax of the Verb
493. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs. – A transitive verb can take an object in the accusative case (§ 329); an intransitive verb cannot. Thus, γράφω (ἐπιστολήν) I write (a letter) is transitive; καθεύδω I sleep is intransitive.
1. In Greek many transitive verbs are used absolutely as intransitive: thus, λεύπω leave, also fail; ἐλαύνω drive, also march; ἔχω hold, also hold one’s self, be.
Note. – In many of these verbs an object is easily supplied: thus, ἐλαύνω (ἕππον) drive (a horse), τελευτῶ (τὸν βίον) finish (onés life), i.e. die; but this is not the case with all.
2. Some intransitive verbs when compounded with a preposition become transitive (see § 345 and cf. § 324, 2): thus, βαίνω go (intransitive) ; but δια-βαίνω cross (transitive), παρα-βαίνω transgress (transitive).
494. Transitive and Intransitive Tenses – In a few verbs which have at the same time (§ 162, 1) both the first and the second aorist (active and middle), or the first and the second perfect, the first tenses are transitive, and the second intransitive (cf. § 207, note 3). The most important of these are the following (the others are given in the list of verbs, § 729): –
| 1 | Present | 1st Aorist | 2d Aorist |
| βαίνω go | ἔβησα caused to go | ἔβην went | |
| δῡ́ω enter | ἆδῡσα caused to enter | ἔδῡν entered | |
| ἵστημι cause to stand | ἔστησα caused to stand, erected | ἔστην stood | |
| σβάνυμι put out, extinguish | ἔσβεσα put out | ἔσβην went out | |
| φῡ́ω produce | ἔφῡσα produced | ἔφῡν grew | |
| Note. – The future active follows the first aorist in being transitive (cf. § 212): as βῄσω shall cause to go, φύσω shall produce. | |||
| 2 | ἄλλῦμι destroy | ὀλώλεκα have destroyed | ἅλωλα am ruined |
| πείθω persuade | πέπεικα have persuaded | πέποιθα trust | |
3. On the same principle, in some transitive verbs the perfect (usually the second perfect) is intransitive; thus,: –
| Present | 2d Perfect | Present | 1st perfect |
| ἄγνῡμι break | ἔᾱγα am broken | ἵστημι cause to stand | ἕστηκα stand |
| πήγνῡμι fix | πέπηγα am fixed | ||
| φαίνω show | πέφηνα have appeared | φῡ́ω produce | πέφῡκα am by nature |
AGREEMENT OF VERBS
495. A finite verb (§ 159) agrees with its subject in person and number; thus, (ἡμεῖς) ᾖλθομεν we came, Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει Cyrus marches, δύο ἄνδρε τέθνατον two men are dead Xn. A. 4, 1,19.
Note. – Plural for Singular. – In Greek, as in other languages, the first person plural (modestly) is sometimes used for the singular (sometimes called in English “the editorial we”): as οὐ δικαίως, ἣν θάνω, θανούμεθα unjustly shall I die if Ι am (lit. we are) put to death E. Tro. 904.
496. Agreement with Two or More Subjects. – Two or more subjects taken together, of course, count as a plural (or dual) and so may take a plural (or dual) verb: thus, ἀπολελοίπᾱσιν ἡμᾶς Ξενίᾱς καὶ Πᾱσίων Xenias and Pasion have abandoned us Xn. A. 1, 4, 8. ἧχι ῥοας Σιµόεις συμβάλλετον ἠδὲ Σκάμανδρος where Simois and Secamander join their streams E 774.
1. But with two or more subjects the verb often agrees only with the nearer or more important: thus, βασιλεὺς καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ εἰσπῑ́πτει εἰς τὸ στρατόπεδον the king and his followers forced their way into the camp Xn. Α. 1, 10, 1.
497. Subjects of Different Persons. – When the subjects are of different persons the verb is of the first person if possible, otherwise of the second: i.e.
| you and I (or we) | = we | you and he (or they) = you |
| he (or they) and I (or we) | ||
| you and he (or they) and I (or we) |
as, καὶ ἐψ ὼ, ἔφη, καὶ σὺ πολλὰ… εἴπομεν Both you and I, said he, have said a good deal Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 15.
PECULIARITIES IN AGREEMENT
498. Neuter Plural Subject: – A neuter plural subject regularly has a singular verb: thus, τὸν δ’ οὕποτε κῡ́ματα λείπει this the waves never leave B 396. καλὰ ἦν τὰ σφάγια the sacrifices were favorable Xn. A. 4, 8, 19.
Note. – A neuter plural subject denoting persons, or used distributively, may take a plural verb: thus, τοσάδε μὲν μετὰ Ἀθηναίων ἔθνη ἐστράτευον so many nations were active on the Athenian side Th. 7, 57; ἦσαν ταῦτα δύο τείχη these were two walls Xn. A. 1, 4, 4.
499. Dual and Plural. – A subject in the dual often takes a verb in the plural; less often a subject in the plural, suggesting a dual, takes a verb in the dual: thus, τὼ δὲ τάχ᾽ ἐγγύθεν ἦλθον and soon the two came mear E 275. αἱ δὲ οἱ ἵπποι ἀμφὶς ὁδοῦ δραµέτην and his steeds ran apart along the way Ψ 392.
Note. – Not infrequently dual and plural verbs are found in the same sentence: thus, ἱκέσθην, τὸν δ’ ηὗρον they came, and found him I 185.
500. Collectives. – Words like πᾶς everybody, πλῆθος a multitude, δῆμος people, στρατός army, etc. (collective nouns, § 321), when used to denote persons usually take a plural verb (cf. § 315): thus, ὡς φάσαν ἡ πληθύς thus, spoke the multitude B 278. ὁ ἄλλος στρατὸς ἀπέβαινον the rest of the army began to disembark Th. 4, 32.
501. Agreement with Predicate Substantive. – The verb sometimes agrees with the predicate substantive when the latter is more prominent than the subject (cf. § 316): thus, ἅπαν δὲ τὸ µέσον τῶν τειχῶν ἦσαν στάδιοι τρεῖς the entire distance between the walls was three stades Xn. A. 1, 4,4.
VIII · The Voices
502. The Greek verb has three voices (§ 158): active, middle, and passive.
THE ACTIVE VOICE
503. The active voice represents the subject as acting or being: thus, λέγω say, πάσχω experience, εἶμι go, εἰμί be.
Note. –The context may sometimes show that the active voice means to cause a thing to be done (by others): as Ἀρταξέρξης συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον Artazerzes caused Cyrus to be arrested Xn. Α. 1, 1, 3. So often ἀποκτείνω kill or cause to be put to death, οἰκοδομῶ build or cause to be built, and many others.
THE MIDDLE VOICE
504118. The middle voice represents the subject as interested in the action of the verb. It has a variety of meanings which shade off into one another, and may indicate that the subject acts with or within his own means or powers, or for himself, or (less often) upon himself: thus, λούομαι τοὺς πόδας wash (one’s own) feet, παρέχοµαι furnish (from one’s own resources), λῡ́ομαί (τινα) loose for one’s self, ransom (as ἦλθε λῡσόμενος θύγατρα he came to ransom his daughter A 13), περιτίθεµαι put on (one’s self), ἄγομαι γυναῖκα marry (i.e. lead to one’s own house) a wife, περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοῦμαί τι make anything of much importance (in one’s own eyes), λῡ́οµαι loose one’s self (as πρῶτος ὑπ' ἀρνειοῦ λυόµην, ὑπέλῡσα δ’ ἑταίρους first I loosed myself from beneath the ram, and then I freed my companions ι 463), τρέποµαι turn onés self, παύοµαι stop onés self, cease, πείθοµαι (Lit. persuade one’s self) believe, obey.
505. The middle voice often means to get a thing done either to one’s self or to another person or thing (cf. § 503 note): thus, διδάσκοµαι get taught, διδάσκοµαι τὸν υἱόν get one’s son taught, ἀπογράφομαι τὰς ναῦς have a list of the ships made.
Note. – From this use of the middle it is but a slight step to the use of the middle as passive (§ 514).
506. Active and Middle differently Translated. – The active and the middle voices of the following verbs usually must be differently rendered in English (other similar verbs may be found, and they are to be explained in similar manner):
| αἱρῶ take | αἱροῦμαι choose (take for one’s self) |
| ἀποδίδωμι give back | ἀποδίδομαι sell (give for value received) |
| ἅπτω fasten | ἅπτομαι touch |
| βοουλεύω take counsel | βοουλεύομαι consider one’s own plan |
| γαμῶ marry (of the man) | γαμοῦμαι marry (of the woman) |
| γράφω write or propose a law | γράφομαι indict (i.e. have the suit entered in writing) |
| δανείζω make a loan | δανείζομαι borrow (i.e. have a loan made to one’s self) |
| δικάζω judge | δικάζοµαι go to law |
| ἔχω hold | ἔχομαι (w. gen.) hold to, and so be close to |
| θῡ́ω sacrifice | θῡ́ομαι sacrifice (for omens) |
| μισθῶ let | μισθοῦμαι hire (ie. have let to one’s self) |
| πολῑτεύω be a citizen | πολῑτεύομαι perform one’s duty as a citizen |
| πρεσβεύω be an ambassador | πρεσβεύομαι negotiate |
| τίθηµι νόµον establish a law (for others to obey) | τίθεµαι νόµον enacta law (i.e. of the State, for itself) |
| φυλάττω (w. acc.) watch, guard | φυλάττομαι (w. acc.) be on guard against |
507. Middle Form in Future only. – On account of the greater natural interest in future events, many active verbs regularly use the middle voice in the future tense: thus, ἀκούω hear, future ἀκούσομαι, aorist ἤκουσα, etc., ἁμαρτάνω miss, future ἁμαρτήσομαι, aorist fuaprov, etc. (cf. § 504 a).
508. Deponent Verbs. – Deponent verbs (§ 108, 3) show the various uses of the middle voice, and differ from other verbs only in having no active forms: thus, ὑπισχνοῦμαι (hold one’s self under) obligate one’s self, promise, δέχομαι receive (for one’s self), αἰσθάνομαι perceive (with one’s own senses), etc.
THE PASSIVE VOICE
509. The passive voice represents the subject as acted upon: thus, ἐλύθην was loosed, or was ransomed.
1. Observe that the passive voice is the passive of the middle as well as of the active, and the context must determine which voice it represents: thus, the passive form ἐλύθην may need to be translated (§ 506) was loosed (λῡ́ω) or was ransomed (λῡ́ομαι), ᾑρέθην was taken (αἱρῶ) or was chosen (αἱροῦμαι), ἐγράφην was written (γράφω) or was indicted (γράφομαι), and so in other tenses (see § 510 note).
510. Passive of Deponent Verbs. – From the preceding section it follows that deponent verbs (§ 508) may have a passive: thus, τοιαῦτα αὐτοῖς… εἴρψασται such things have been done by them (ἐργάξομαι do) Lys. 12, 1. ὲκ σοῦ βιάζονται τάδε this is done with violence by you (βιάξομαι act with violence) S. Ant. 1073. ἑωνήθη was bought (ὠνοῦμαι buy) Xn. Mem. 2, 7, 12.
Note. – The passive meaning usually can be determined only by the context, since there can be no difference of form except in the aorist and future of middle deponents (§ 158, 3).
511. Object of Active Becomes Subject of Passive. – The object of the verb in the active (or middle) regularly becomes the subject when the verb is changed to the passive form (but see § 515, 3): thus, ἐτάχθησαν οἱ Ἕλληνες the Greeks were drawn up (active ἔταξε τοὺς Ἕλληνας).
512. Cognate Accusative Retained with Passive. – A cognate accusative (§ 331) or an accusative of the part affected (§ 335) used with the active is regularly retained in the same case in the passive form; see § 340, 1 (cf. in Latin rogatus est sententiam): thus, γραφεὶς τὸν ἀγῶνα τοῦτον having been indicted in this suit Dem. 18,103 (cf. Μέλητός µε ἐγράψατο τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην Meletus brought this indictment against me Pl. Ap. 19 a). οἴ τε ὑπὸ τοῦ ψύχους τοὺς δακτύλους τῶν ποδῶν ἀποσεσηπότες and those who had their toes frozen off by the cold Xn. A. 4, 5, 12.
Note. – Sometimes intransitive verbs (such as can take only a cognate acousative) are used in the passive; when so used the cognate accusative of the active becomes the subject of the passive: as ὁ κίνδῡνος κινδύνεύεται the risk is run, τὰ χρήματα κινδῦνεύεται the money is risked Dem. 34, 28. Often the passive participles of these verbs are found: as εἰς ἔλεγχον τῶν αὐτοῖς βεβιωμένων καταστῆναι to submit to an examination of their past lives Lys. 16, 1.
513. Active Forms with Passive Force. – The passive of some verbs is supplied by the active voice of a different (intransitive) verb: thus,: –
| ἀποκτείνω kill | ἀποθνῄσκω (die) be killed |
| εὖ ποιῶ benefit | εὖ πάσχω be benefited |
| εὖ (or κακῶς) λέγω speak well (or ill) of | εὖ (or κακῶς) ἀκούω (poetic κλύω) be well (or ill) spoken of |
| ἐκβάλλω cast out | ἐκπίπτω be cast out or banished |
| διώκω pursue, prosecute | φεύγω (lit. flee) be prosecuted (ἀποφεύγω escape, be acquitted) |
1. Sο also intransitive second aorists (§ 494, 1) are often equivalent to the passive of the corresponding (transitive) first aorists; as ἀναστάντες ὑπὸ Θεσσαλῶν having been forced to migrate by the Thessalians Th. 1, 12.
514. Origin of the Passive. – Greek originally had no passive voice, and in most tenses the middle voice served also to express the passive meaning. In the aorist an originally intransitive form (cf. § 494, 1, and § 513, 1) of some verbs came to be felt as a passive, and by analogy other aorists passive were formed later. The future passive (with the middle endings) was formed from the aorist passive by adding the regular future suffix (-σο-/ε-): thus, φαίνω show, ἔφηνα showed, ἐφάνην appeared, i.e. was shown, future φανήσομαι shall appear or be shown.
515119. The statement of § 514 will serve to explain the following facts: –
1. The future (rarely the aorist) middle is often used with a passive meaning: thus, ἄξη you shall be led Aesch. Ag. 1632, ἡ γῇ… εὖ φυλάξεται the land will be well guarded Xn. Oec. 4, 9. See § 519, note 2.
2. Many (intransitive) verbs which are regularly followed by the genitive (§ 356) or the dative (§ 376) may be used in the passive voice. In such case the genitive or dative used with the active voice is represented by the nominative as subject in the corresponding passive construction: thus, οὐκέτι ἀπειλοῦμαι ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη ἀπειλῶ ἄλλοις I am no longer threatened, but now I threaten others (active ἀπειλῶ τινι) Xn. Symp. 4, 31. μανθάνουσιν ἄρχειν τε καὶ ἄρχεσθαι they learn to govern and to be governed (active ἄρχω τινός).
Note. – A cognate accusative used with the active is retained in the passive construction (see § 512): thus, πρὸς σοῦ τὰ δείν’ ἐκεῖν' ἐπηπειλημένοι threatened by you with those dread threats (active ἐπειλῶ δεινά τινι) S. Ant. 408.
3. Finally, even an accusative of the direct object is sometimes retained in the same case in the passive construction, while a genitive or dative denoting a person becomes the subject of the passive verb: thus, οἱ ἐπιτετραµμένοι τὴν φυλακήν those intrusted with the guard (active ἐπιτρέπω τὴν φυλακήν τινι) Th. 1, 126. ἀπετμήθησαν τᾱ̀ς κεφαλᾱ́ς they were beheaded Xn. Cy. 8, 8, 3 (cf. τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ἀπέτεμε τὴν κεφαλήν Xn. A. 3, 1, 17).
Note. – But of course the accusative may become the subject (according to § 512), while the genitive or dative remains in the same case; as ἁπάντων θάνατος κατεγιγνώσκετο the sentence of death was passed on all Lys. 13, 38. ἐμοί… σκῆπτρον καὶ δύναμις πᾶσα ἡ Πολυκράτεος ἐπιτέτραπται to me Polycrate’s scepter and power entire has been intrusted Hdt. 3, 142 (cf. in English “the duty was intrusted to him” and “he was intrusted with the duty”).
516120. Agent. – The Agent with passive verbs is regularly expressed by the genitive (§ 372) with ὑπό under, by (§ 414, 1), sometimes with πρός (§ 414, 1) or παρά (§ 411, 1) at the hands of, more rarely with ἐκ (§ 407) or ἀπό (§ 403) from.
1. Often with the perfect or pluperfect passive, and regularly with the verbal in –τέος (§ 666), the agent is expressed by the dative (§ 380). With the verbal in –τέος, the accusative of agent is also sometimes found (see § 6606, note).
VIII · Use of the Tenses
517. Primary and Secondary Tenses. – The Primary Tenses are the Present, the Perfect, the Future, and the Future Perfect.
The Secondary Tenses are the Imperfect, the Aorist, and the Pluperfect.
1. The Historical Present (§ 525) counts as a secondary tense, and the Gnomic Aorist (§ 530) as a primary tense. The imperfect indicative with ἄν, referring to present time (§ 565), counts as a primary tense.
2. The subjunctive, optative, and imperative modes (§§ 554; 557; 560) in their independent uses normally look toward the future and so have in all tenses the value of a primary tense.
518. Special Meanings of Tenses from the Context. – The context may sometimes add a special meaning to a tense. Thus, the present or imperfect may be used to describe an action merely attempted (§§ 523; 527), the present may be used in describing an action which is to be completed in the future (§ 524), and the aorist may sometimes express a general truth (Gnomic aorist, § 530).
1. Imaginative Use of the Tenses.– A tense may refer to a time other than that which it denotes, if the speaker’s (or writer's) imagination carries him into that time; so the present tense may be used in describing events actually past (§ 525), and the aorist or the perfect may be used in describing events which have not yet taken place (§§ 531; 537).
THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
519121. In independent clauses the tenses of the indicative express time absolutely; in dependent clauses they express time relatively to that of the verb on which they depend (cf. § 551, 1).
Note 1. – The Greeks, unlike the English and, more particularly, the Romans, were not careful to distinguish with exactness the temporal relations of subordinate clauses (as is done in Latin by the pluperfect and future perfect), but often employed the same or similar tenses in both subordinate and principal clauses, leaving the exact relation of time to be inferred from the context (cf. also § 676 a): as σχεδὸν δ᾽ ὅτε ταῦτα ἦν καὶ ἥλιος ἐδῡ́ετο about the time that this was going on the sun was setting (ie. at the same time) Xn. A. 1, 10, 15. ἡγεῖτο δ᾽ αὐταῖς Ταμὼς… ἔχων ναῦς ἑτέρᾱς... als ἐπολιόρκει Μιλητον Tamos conducted them, with other ships with which he had been besieging Miletus (i.e. at a prior time) Xn. A. 1, 4,2.
This fact will help to explain the frequent use of the aorist where we might expect the pluperfect (§ 528, 1).
SUMMARY
Note 2.– The tenses of the indicative from the point of view of time, and the manner of viewing the action, may be grouped as follows: –
| Present | Past | Future | |
| Continued | Present | Imperfect | Future (active and middle) |
| Completed and Lasting | Perfect | Pluperfect | Future Perfect |
| Simply Brought to Pass | – | Aorist | Future (passive) |
Occasionally the future active shows a distinction between action ‘continued’ and action brought to pass’: as ἕξω shall hold (cf. ἔχω hold), σχήσω shall obtain (cf. ἔσχον obtained, § 529).
THE PRESENT TENSE
520. The present tense represents an action as going on at the present time: thus, γράφω I write οr I am writing.
1. So the present often expresses a customary action or a general truth: thus, νέᾱ γὰρ φροντὶς οὐκ ἀλγεῖν φιλεῖ the heart of youth is free from care Ε. Med. 48.
521. Present Denoting a Continued State. – The present may denote a continued state as well as a single act. So the present of some verbs may admit two different English translations: thus, βασιλεύω rule or be ruler, νϊκῶ conquer or be victorious, φεύγω flee or be in exile, ἀδικῶ do wrong or be a wrong–doer, αἰσθάνομαι perceive or be cognizant of.
Note. – So ἤκω am come, arrive, and οἴχομαι am gone, may regularly be translated as perfects.
522. Present with Adverbs like πάλαι. --- When adverbs like πάλαι long ago are used with the present tense they mean that the action is continued from the past into the present (cf. in Latin iam dudum): as πάλαι σπεύδοµεν we have long been eager Xn. A. 4, 8, 14.
SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE PRESENT FROM THE CONTEXT
523. Attempted Action. – The context (§ 518) may imply that the present denotes only an attempted action (ef. § 527). Thus, δίδωμι give may mean also offer, πείθω may mean try to persuade: as σοὶ δ’ Ἀγαμέμνων ἄξια δῶρα δίδωσι Agamemnon offers you worthy gifts Ι 261, ἐξελαύνετε ἡμᾶς ἐκ τῆσδε τῆς χώρᾶς you are trying to drive us out of this country Xn. A. 7, 7, 7.
524122. Present with Future Meaning. – It may be implied by the context (§ 518) that an action expressed by the present tense will be completed in the future: thus, εἰ αὕτη ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται καὶ ἡ πᾶσα Σικελίᾱ if this city shall be captured, all Sicily as well is (i.e. is going to be) in their power Th. 6, 91: so ἀπόλλυμαι I am going to be put to death Lys. 12, 14.
Note. –The present indicative of εἶμι am going (and its compounds) regularly has a future meaning. This meaning extends to other modes when used to represent the indicative in indirect discourse, and sometimes also to the participle when used to express purpose (§ 653, 5).
525123. Historical Present. – In vivid narration the speaker may for the moment feel that he is living the past over again, and so may use the present tense in describing events already past (§ 518, 1): thus, Θρασύβουλος… Φυλὴν χωρίον καταλαμβάνει ἰσχυρόν… ἐπιγίγνεται τῆς νυκτὸς χιὼν παµπληθής Thrasybulus took (lit. takes) possession of Phyle, a stronghold. There came (lit. comes) on during the night a great snowstorm Xn. Hell. 2, 4, 2–3. Δᾱρείον καὶ Παρυσᾱ́τιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο of Darius and Parysatis were (lit. are) born two sons Xn. A. 1, 1, 1.
Note. – The historical present is freely interchanged with the past tenses, and should be regularly translated by a past tense in English: as καὶ ὁ Λύκιος ἤλασέ-τε καὶ ἰδὼν ἀπαγέλλει and Lycius rode (away), and, when he had seen, reported Xn. A. 1, 10, 15.
THE IMPERFECT
526. The Imperfect represents an action as going on in past time: thus, ἔγραφον I was writing.
1. Hence the imperfect often expresses a customary past action: thus, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνοιχθείη, εἰσῇμεν but when [the prison] was opened, we used to go in Pl. Phaed. 59 d.
SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE IMPERFECT FROM THE CONTEXT
527. Attempted Action. – The context (§ 518) may imply that the imperfect denotes only an attempted action (cf. § 523) or what was likely to happen: thus, Κλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτᾶς ἐβιάξετο ἰέναι οἱ δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἔβαλλον Clearchus tried to force his own soldiers to move; but they pelted him with stones Xn. A. 1, 8, 1. ἐκαινόμην ξίφειἀλλ᾽ ἐξέκλεψεν… Ἄρτεμις I was like to be slain with the sword; but Artemis stole me thence E. I.T. 27.
Note. – The Imperfect of a truth just realized, and the “Philosophical Imperfect.” – The imperfect in some expressions may be best rendered in English by the present: thus, καὶ τοῦτ’ ἄρ’ ἣν ἀληθὲς, ᾐσθόμην, φίλαι this then is true, as Ι perceive, my friends (lit. was true, but all the time Ι did not realize it) E. Ι.Τ. 351. διαφθεροῦμεν ἐκεῖνο… ὃ τῷ μὲν δικαῖῳ βέλτῑον ἐγίγνετο we shall destroy that which (as we agreed) becomes better by justice PL. Crit. 47 d.
THE AORIST
528. The aorist (ἀόριστος undefined) represents the action as one that simply took place in past time: thus, ἔγραψα I wrote.
1. Aorist instead of Perfect or Pluperfect. – Since the perfect and pluperfect in Greek are used only when the result of the action is lasting (§ 534), the aorist is often used where English would employ the perfect or pluperfect (especially in relative and temporal clauses): thus, τῶν οἰκετῶν οὐδένα κατέλιπεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἅπαντα πέπρᾱκεν of his servants he (has) left not one, but has sold everything Aeschin 1, 99. Κῦρον δὲ µεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἧς αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησεν he sent for Cyrus from the government of which he had made (lit. made) him satrap Xn. Α. 1, 1, 9, ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐτελεύτησε Δᾱρεῖος but when Darius (had) died Xn. Α. 1, 1, 3.
529. Inceptive Aorist. – The aorist of verbs whose present can denote a continued state (§ 521) may express the entrance into that state: thus, βασιλεύω rule or be king, ἐβασίλευσα ruled or became king; so ἔσχον held or got possession of (ἔχω hold) ἐδάκρῡσα wept or burst into tears (δακρῡ́ω weep, be in tears).
Note. – Aorist rendered by the Present. – The Greeks sometimes used the aorist with an exactness which admits no English equivalent, and such examples must usually be rendered in English by the present tense: as οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην, τὸ δὲ πρόθῡµον ᾖνεσα I could not do it, but I still approve your zeal (lit. approved at the time you showed your zeal) E. ΙT. 1023. So often ἤσθην am pleased (lit. was pleased, ἔγελασα laugh(ed), ὤμωξα lament(ed), and similar words. So also sometimes in impatient questions: as τί οὖν… οὐ καὶ τὴν δύναμιν ἔλεξάς μοι why don’t you tell me (lit. why didnt you tell me) about their force? Xn. Cy.2, 1, 4.
SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE AORIST FROM THE CONTEXT
530124. Gnomic Aorist. – From the context the aorist indicative may often be seen to express a general truth (“once true always true»): thus, παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω even a fool learns by experience Hes. Ο. D. 218. ἣν δέ τις τούτων τι παραβαίνῃ ζημίᾱν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσαν but if anybody transgresses any one of these laws they impose a penalty upon such persons Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 2.
531. Aorist Imagined as Future. – The time of the aorist is sometimes vividly imagined as future (§ 518): thus, ἀπωλόμην ἄρ' εἴ µε δὴ λεύψεις Ι perish if you leave me B. Alc. 386.
THE FUTURE
532. The future denotes that an action will take place at a future time: thus, γράψω I shall write (or shall be writing).
Note. – For the second person of the future implying a permission or a mild command see § 583, note 1.
533. Periphrastic Future. – A periphrastic future (denoting a present intention) is formed by combining the various forms of μέλλω be about to with the present or future (rarely the aorist) infinitive (§ 549, 1): thus, ύμᾶς μέλλω ἄγειν Ι am going to lead you Xn. A. 5, 7, 5. μέλλω γὰρ ὑμᾶς διδάξειν for I am going to inform you PL Ap. 21 b.
1. So the past tenses of μέλλω ave similarly used to express a past intention: as πορεύεσθαι ἔμελλον they were intending to proceed Xn. A. 8, 5, 17. ἔμελλε καταλῡ́ειν he was about to halt for the night Xn. A. 1, 8, 1.
Note. – The simple future appears from the context sometimes to be used like the periphrastic future to express a present intention: as αἷρε πλῆκτρον, εἶ μαχῇ raise your spur if yoúre going to fight Ar. Av. 759. εἰ... πιστεύσομεν if we are going to trust Xn. A. 1, 3, 16.
THE PERFECT AND THE PLUPERFECT
534. The perfect, in Greek, represents an action as completed and lasting at the present time; the pluperfect as completed and lasting at a past time: thus, γέγραφα I have written (and the writing now stands), ἐγεγράφη I had written (and the writing stood completed). ἐτύγχανε γὰρ ἐφ᾽ ἀμάξης πορευόµενος διότι ἐτέτρωτο for he happened to be traveling on a wagon because he had been (and still was) wounded Xn. A. 2, 2, 14.
535. Perfect with Present Meaning. – In the perfect system of many verbs the duration of the result (§ 534) rather than the completion of the act is the more prominent, so that the perfect is best rendered in English by the present (and the pluperfect by the English imperfect): thus,
βέβηκα (βαίνω) be gone or stand (have stepped)
δέδοικα (root δοι-, δει-, δι) be afraid (have been frightened, cf. § 494, 3)
κάκτηµαι (κτῶμαι) possess (have acquired)
μέμνημαι (μιμνῄσκῳ) remember (have reminded myself)
οἶδα (cf. εἶδον saw) know (have seen or perceived)
ἕστηκα (ἵστημι) stand (have set myself, cf. § 494, 3)
πέποιθα (πείθω) trust (have persuaded myself, cf. § 494, 2)
πέφῡκα (φῡ́ω) am by nature (have been produced, cf. § 494, 3), and many others.
536. Periphrastic Perfect. – 1. Other forms of the perfect, besides those already noted (§§ 226; 227; 221, 1), are sometimes found expressed periphrastically: thus, τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ εἰμὶ τοῦτο δεδρᾱκώς I am the one who has done this deed Dem. 21, 104.
2. The aorist (rarely the perfect) participle with the present or imperfect of ἔχω have is sometimes used as the equivalent of the perfect or pluperfect: thus, ὅς σφε νῦν ἀτῑμάσᾱς ἔχει who has now dishonored her E. Med. 33. πολλὰ χρήματα ἔχομεν ἀνηρπακότες we have plundered much property (lit. have, having plundered) Xn. A. 1, 3, 14.
SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE PERFECT FROM THE CONTEXT
537. Perfect Imagined as Future. – The time of the perfect is sometimes vividly imagined as future (§ 518, 1): thus, κ῍ᾱν τοῦτ’, ἔφη, νῑκῶμεν, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται “if we are victorious in this,” he said, “everything has been accomplished (i.e. will have been accomplished) by us” Xn. A. 1, 8, 12.
THE FUTURE PERFECT
538. The future perfect denotes that an action will be completed (and lasting) at a future time: as γεγραφὼς ἔσομαι I shall have written, γεγράψεται it will have been written (and will stand written).
For the periphrastic forms of the future perfect see § 230.
Note.– The future perfect (as well as the other portions of the perfect system) may emphasize the duration of the result of an action (§534); hence a good many verbs, because of their meaning, regularly employ the future perfect instead of the future (see § 729): as νομίζετε… ἐμὲ κατακεκόψεσθαι you must believe that I shall be cut to pieces Xn. Α. 1, 5, 16. ὅτᾱν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I have nol strength, then shall I stop S. Ant. 91.
So also commonly with the verbs whose perfect has present meaning (§ 535) µεμνήσομαι shall remember (μέμνημαι remember), ἑστήξω shall stand (ἕστηκα stand) etc.
TENSES OF OTHER MODES THAN THE INDICATIVE
539. The tenses of the indicative mode only (and of other modes representing the indicative in indirect discourse, § 551) really denote time; in the other modes, the tenses (with the very limited exception of the future, see § 548) do not denote time, but only the manner of viewing the action, whether continued (present), or completed (perfect), or simply brought to pass (aorist).
Time may be implied either by the mode (see §§ 554; 557; 560) or by the context (see §§ 541–547, and cf. 519 note 1) but it is not denoted by the tense.
THE PRESENT
540. The present tense in modes other than the indicative represents an action as going on (at any time); as γράφειν to be writing, ἐᾱ̀ν γράφω if I be engaged in writing, γράφε be writing (in the future, § 560), γράφων writing.
TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT
541. Relation of time with the principal verb may be indicated by the context (§ 539): as ὁπότε θῡ́οι ἐκάλει whenever he was engaged in sacrifice he used (i.e. at the same time) to invite his friends Xn. Mem. 2, 9, 4. εἰ δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιοῖεν, κολάζειν but if they act contrary to this, to punish them (i.e. afterwards) Xn. Cy. 1, 6, 33.
542. Present Participle. – Especially with the present participle the context usually shows that its time is the same as that of the principal verb: as ἔχων ὁπλίτᾱς ἀνέβη he went up with (lit. having) hoplites Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. παρὼν ἐτύγχανε he happened to be present Xn. A. 1, 1, 2.
1. But sometimes the context shows that the present participle refers to a time prior to that of the principal verb (the so-called Participle of the Imperfect”): as οἱ Κῡ́ρειοι πρόσθεν σὺν ἡμῖν ταττόµενοι νῦν ἀφεστήκᾱσιν the troops of Cyrus who were formerly marshaled with us have now deserted Xn. A. 3, 2, 17. παρὼν ἐρῶ since I was present, Ι will tell S. Ant. 1192.
THE AORIST
543. The aorist tense in modes other than the indicative represents the action simply as brought to pass (at any time): as γράψαι to write, ἐὰν γράψω if I write, γράψον write (impv., § 560), γράψᾱς having written (or writing): thus, εἶπε δ᾽ ἐπευξάμενος he spoke in prayer Z 475. οὗτος οὔτε τοὺς θεοὺς δείσᾱς οὔτε Κῦρον τεθνηκότα αἰδεσθεὶς… ἡμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖν πειρᾶται this man, without any fear of the gods, or respect for Cyrus, who is now dead, is trying to injure us Xn. A. 3, 2, 5. βουλοίμην δ᾽ ἄν… λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών I should like to get away without his knowledge Xn. A. 1, 3, 17.
TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT
544. Relation of time with the principal verb may be indicated by the context (§ 539): as τῷ ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν ἕλησθε πείσοµαι I shall obey the man whom you choose (i.e. shall have chosen) Xn. A. 1, 3, 15. θαυμαστὸν δὲ φαίνεταί μοι καὶ τὸ πεισθῆναί τινας it seems to me wonderful too that some people have been persuaded (lit. the being persuaded of some people) Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 1.
545. Aorist Participle. – Especially with the aorist participle the context often shows that it refers to a time prior to that of the principal verb: as ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσᾱς διέβαινε when he had done this he proceeded to cross Xn. A. 1, 4, 17. καταβᾱ̀ς δὲ διὰ τούτου τοῦ πεδίου ἤλασε when he had come down (from the mountains) he marched through this plain Xn. A. 1, 2, 23 (but cf. § 543, last three examples).
THE PERFECT
546. The perfect tense in modes other than the indicative represent an action as completed (at any time): as γεγραφέναι to finish writing, ἐὰν ψεγράφω if I shall finish writing, γεγράφθω let it stand written, γεγραφώς having written, τὰ γεγραμμένα the things written, τῆς γὰρ ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς πάντα ταῦτα δεῖ πεπρᾶχθαι tonight all this must be completed PL. Crit. 46 a.
TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT
547. Tt usually happens that an action described by the perfect as completed has taken place at a time preceding that of the principal verb (cf. § 539): thus, οὐδὲ βovλεύεσθαι ἔτι ὥρα, ἀλλὰ βεβουλεῦσθαι it is time no longer to deliberate, but to decide PL. Crit. 46 a. ἔλεγον πάντα τὰ γεγενημένα they told all that had happened (i.e. previously) Xn. Α. 6, 3, 11 (cf. § 546, last example).
THE FUTURE (AND FUTURE PERFECT)
548125. The modes of the future (and future perfect) other than the indicative are devoted almost wholly to representing the future indicative in indirect discourse (§ 551); this is the only use of the future optative (which is a comparatively late development, see § 548 a); the future infinitive is almost always so used, and the future participle often. Yet a desire to emphasize the idea of futurity (or present intention) has led to the occasional use of the future infinitive as a substantive, and, more often, of the future participle as an ordinary adjective.
549. Future Infinitive as a Substantive. – The future infinitive (denoting future time relative to the principal verb) is sometimes used as a substantive when it is desired to emphasize the idea of futurity; as πολλοῦ δέω ἐμαυτόν γε ἀδικήσειν I am certainly far from intending to wrong myself Pl. Ap. 37 b.
1. With µέλλω. – Sο often the future infinitive is used with μέλλω am about to to emphasize the future idea (as in English many people say incorrectly “I meant to have written” for “I meant to write” from a feeling that “meant” does not sufficiently express the past idea): thus, μέλλω γὰρ ὑμᾶς διδάξειν for I am about to inform you PL. Ap. 21 b.
2. With Verbs of Promising, etc. – So with verbs (and verbal expressions) meaning to hope, expect, promise, swear, and the like, the idea of a future realization of the hope or promise often leads to the use of the future infinitive. Both the present and aorist, however, are also found with these verbs. The negative is regularly μή (§ 431, 1): thus, ὑπισχνεῖται ἡμιόλιον πᾶσι δώσειν he promised to give to all half as much again Xn. A. 1, 3, 21. τὸν ἐκ ποίᾱς πόλεως στρατηγὸν προσδοκῶ ταῦτα πράξειν from what city is the general to come whom I expect to do this? Xn. A. 3, 1, 14. ἠγγυᾶτο μηδὲν αὐτοὺς κακὸν πείσεσθαι he pledged himself that they should suffer no harm Xn. A. 7, 4, 13. ἐλπίδας ἔχει καλῶς ἔσεσθαι he has hopes that all will be well Xn. A. 4, 3, 8. (Cf. μίᾷ [ἐλπὶς] σωθῆναι one hope of being saved Xn. A. 2, 1, 19.)
Note. – The future infinitive with verbs of promising, etc. (§ 549, 2) is often explained as indirect discourse (§ 671), but the fact that it takes μή as its regular negative points to its use here as the ordinary object infinitive.
550. Future Participle. – The future participle is used only when it is desired to emphasize the idea of future time (or present intention, § 533, note) relatively to the principal verb: thus, ᾖλθε… λῡσόμενός τε θύγατρα he came to ransom his daughter (lit. about to ransom) A 13. ὁ ἡγησόμενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται there will be nobody who will lead us Xn. A. 2, 4, 5.
TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
551. When the optative, infinitive, or participle stands in indirect discourse (§ 670 ff.), each tense represents. the same tense of the direct discourse, except that the present infinitive or participle may stand for the imperfect indicative, and the perfect infinitive or participle for the pluperfect indicative, since those tenses have only the indicative mode; cf. also § 675, note: thus, (Present) ἔγνωσαν… ὅτι κενὸς ὁ φόβος εἴη they learned that their fear was groundless (i.e. ἔστι) Xn. A. 2, 2, 21. ἀπιέναι φησίν he says he is going away (i.e. ἄπειμι) Xn. A. 2, 2, 1. ὶᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησιν he says that he himself treated the wound (i.e. ἰώμην, impf.) Xn. A. 1, 8, 26. ἤκουσε Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾷ ὄντα he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (i.e. ἐστί) Xn. A. 1, 4, 5. οἶδα δὲ κἀκείνω σωφρονοῦντε ἔστε Σωκράτει συνήστην I know that even they two kept within bounds so long as they associated with Socrates (i.e. ἐσωφρονεύτην, impf.) Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 18.
(Aorist) Μένονι δὲ καὶ δῶρα ἐλέγετο πέμψαι he was said actually to have sent presents to Menon (i.e. ἔπεμψεν) Xn. Α. 1, 4, 17.
(Perfect) Ὁμολογεῖς οὖν περὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος γεγενῆσθαι do you admit that you have been a wrong–doer against me? (i.e. γεγένησαι) Xn. A. 1, 6, 8. καταλαµβάνουσι… τὰ πλεῖστα διηρπασµένα they found that most things had been plundered (i.e. διήρπασται) Xn. A. 1, 10, 18.
(Future) ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἡ ὁδὸς ἔσοιτο πρὸς βασιλέᾱ μέγαι he said that the advance would be against the great king (i.e. ἔσται) Xn. A. 1, 4, 11. ἡγεῖτο γὰρ ἅπαν ποιήσειν αὐτὸν εἴ τις ἀργύριον διδοίη for he thought that [Theognis] would do anything, if anybody offered him money (i.e. ποιῄσει, ἐᾱ́ν τις… διδῷ he will do, if anybody offers Lys. 12, 14.
1. When verbs stand in indirect discourse they denote the same time relatively to the verb on which they depend as was denoted by the tense (§ 539) of the direct discourse which they represent. See the preceding examples.
VIII · Uses of the Finite Modes
552. In the following pages the various uses of the finite modes are described in detail, but, for the sake of completeness, a brief summary of the uses of each mode is here given.
THE INDICATIVE MODE
553. The indicative mode is used in statements of fact: thus, βασιλεύω I am king, Δᾱρεῖος ἠσθένει Darius was ill.
1. A fact may be assumed for purposes of argument: thus, καὶ δὴ τεθνᾶσι (suppose that) they are dead E. Med. 386. So regularly in conditions εἴπερ ἦν ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός if (i.e. assuming that) he was a good man, etc. Lys. 12, 48.
For the semi-dependent indicative in object clauses and clauses of fearing see §§ 593 and 594, 1.
2. The past tenses of the indicative, probably from their use in conditions contrary to fact (§ 606) (although there was originally no such idea in the usage, cf. § 553, 1), have come to be used also to express hopeless wishes (§ 588) and unaccomplished purpose (§ 590, note 4).
3. Further, ἄν (or κε) may be added to the past tenses of the indicative to give them a potential meaning (§ 565).
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE
554. The Subjunctive mode looks always toward the future (thus, having the value of a primary tense, when it is used independently, § 517, 2).
555. The uses of the subjunctive may be grouped under two great divisions: the Volitive Subjunctive (which expresses an action as willed), and the Anticipatory Subjunctive (which anticipates an action as an immediate future possibility), a use in which the subjunctive is closely related to the future indicative (see § 562 a and compare §§ 563 a; 576 a; 594, 1 note).
No hard and fast line, however, can be drawn between these two uses of the subjunctive.
Note. – In the earlier language (i. in Homer) the anticipatory subjunctive (with or without «e or dv) was not infrequently used in independent clauses (§ 562 a), but in this use it was soon crowded out by the future indicative, and only a few relics of this use are to be found in Attic Greek, but in dependent clauses (e.g. conditions and relative clauses) it continued to be regularly used.
556126. The uses of the subjunctive may be summarized as follows: –
INDEPENDENT
In exhortations (§ 585) and prohibitions (§ 584).
In deliberative questions (§ 577).
In cautious future assertions with μή and μὴ οὐ (§ 569, 1).
In strenuous future denials with οὐ μή (§ 569, 2).
DEPENDENT
In purpose clauses (§ 590).
After words of fearing (§ 592).
In the protasis of a future more vivid (§ 604) or a present general condition (§ 609).
In relative clauses of anticipation (future, §§ 623; 526–7) or of general possibility (present, § 625).
THE OPTATIVE MODE
557. The optative mode may be briefly characterized as a more remote subjunctive. Hence, in its independent uses, and in most of its dependent uses, it commonly looks toward the future, but more remotely than the subjunctive, and often from the point of view of past time (cf. § 517, 2).
558. The uses of the optative may be grouped under three heads: (1) the Optative of Wish (corresponding to a remote volitive subjunctive, § 555) which expresses an action as desired, but not actually willed to happen; (2) the Potential Optative (corresponding to a remote anticipatory subjunctive, § 555), which expresses what the speaker regards as a more or less remote possibility (see note 1); (3) the Optative in Indirect Discourse, which is a development peculiar to Greek.
Note 1. – In earlier Greek the simple optative could be used potentially, but very soon the adverb ἄν (epic κε) came to be regularly used with it, and the use of the potential optative was extended far beyond its original bounds (cf. § 563 and the examples).
Note 2. – The name optative comes from the use of the mood in wishes (Latin opto wish).
559127. The following are the various uses of the optative in Attic Greek: –
INDEPENDENT
In wishes (§ 587).
Potential optative with ἄν (or κε) (§ 563).
DEPENDENT
In future less vivid conditions (§ 605).
In past general conditions (§ 610).
In relative clauses of remote possibility (future, §§ 624; 626–7), or of general possibility (past, § 625).
In indirect discourse (including indirect questions) after a secondary tense (§ 673).
In purpose clauses after a secondary tense (§ 590).
Tn clauses of fearing after a secondary tense (§ 592).
560. The imperative mode (in all tenses) refers always to the future. It is used in commands (§ 583) and prohibitions (§ 584).
STATEMENTS
561. 1. Statements of fact (what is, was, or will be) stand in the indicative mode.
2. Statements of opinion (what may be, can be, might be, could have been, and the like) stand in the optative mode with ἄν, or in a past tense of the indicative with ἄν.
The details of usage are given in the following sections (§§ 562–568).
Note. – Two special forms of statement are described in § 569.
562128. Statements of Fact. – A statement of fact is in the indicative mode; the negative is οὐ: thus, ἀναβαίνει ὁ Κῦρος Cyrus goes up, ἠσθένει Δᾱρεῖος Darius was ill, ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ he will be in the power of his brother, οὓς ᾖσθάνετο he did not perceive.
563129. Potential Optative. – A statement of a future possibility, propriety, or likelihood, as an opinion of the speaker, stands in the optative mode with ἄν (Potential Optative); the negative is οὐ: thus, πολλᾱ̀ς ἂν εὕροις μηχανᾱ́ς many devices you could find E. And. 85. ἴσως ἂν οὖν δόξειεν ἄτοπον εἶναι now perhaps it may seem strange Pl. Ap. 31 c. οὓς ἂν οὖν θαυμάζοιμι now I shouldn't wonder Xn. A. 3, 2, 35. οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου Ι couldn't (i.e. won't) give up the throne Ar. Ran. 830.
The apodosis of a future less vivid condition (§ 605) is regularly expressed by the potential optative.
Note. – Observe that the potential optative may express all shades of opinion, from mere suggestion of possibility to ideal certainty, and the English rendering should be made to suit the context.
564. But a statement of a future (or present) possibility, necessity, or likelihood, can be expressed more exactly as a fact (§ 562) by a present or future tense of the indicative of a verb meaning be possible or necessary, and a dependent infinitive denoting what is possible or necessary to be or to be done: thus, δύναμαι συνεῖναι τοῖς πλουσιωτάτοις I can associate with the very richest (but as an opinion συνείην ἄν) Lys. 24, 9. ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν πιστὰ λαβεῖν παρ’ ἡμῶν it is possible for you to receive pledges from us (λάβοιτε ἄν) Xn. A. 2, 3, 26. ὑμᾶς δ᾽ αὖ ἡμῖν δεήσει ὀμόσαι it will be necessary for you to swear to us (ὁμόσαιτε ἄν) Xn. A. 2, 3, 27.
Note 1. – Observe that the difference between ἔξεστί σοι ἰδεῖν and ἴδοις ἄν you can see is that the former states the possibility as a fact, the latter states what the speaker thinks is a possibility.
Note 2.– Observe that if ἄν is used with the optative of a verb denoting possibility, propriety, or the like, it shows that the possi- bility or propriety is stated as something which, in the opinion of the speaker, might or could exist (cf. § 567 note): as οὐκ ἂν δυναίµεθα ἄνευ πλοίων διαβῆναι we could not have the power to cross (i.e. could not possibly cross) without boats Xn. A. 2, 2, 3.
565130. Potential Indicative. – A statement of a past or present possibility or necessity, as an opinion of the speaker, stands in a past tense of the indicative with ἄν (Potential Indicative); the negative is οὐ: thus, θᾶττον ἤ ὥς τις ἂν ὥετο quicker than anybody would have thought Xn: Α. 1, 5, 8. ὕπο κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἶλεν fear might have seized even a stout-hearted man Δ 421. ἐβουλόμην ἄν I could wish.
The apodosis of a condition contrary to fact (§ 606) is regularly expressed by the potential indicative or an equivalent statement (§ 567).
566. But a statement of a past possibility, necessity, or likelihood, can be expressed more exactly as a fact (§ 562) by a past tense of the indicative of a verb meaning be possible or necessary and a dependent infinitive denoting what was possible or necessary to be or to be done: thus, ἔδει ῥοφοῦντα πίνειν ὥσπερ βοῦν it was necessary to drink in gulps like an ox Xn. A. 4, 5, 32. χρῆν γὰρ Κανδαύλῃ γενέσθαι κακῶς for Candaules was bound to get into trouble Hdt. 1, 8. διαφυγεῖν οὓς ἐδύνατο he could not escape Lys. 1, 27.
567. But nine times out of ten the existence of a past possibility or necessity is stated only to show that what “might have been” or “ought to have been done” did not actually take place; hence such statements usually imply a “contrary to fact” idea (as, “he might have gone,” but the fact is he did not go). (Such a statement is often used as the apodosis of a condition contrary to fact, § 606): thus, τῷ δὲ Ἐρατοσθένει ἐξῆν εἰπεῖν ὅτι οὐκ ἀπήντησεν it was possible for Eratosthenes to say (i.e. “Eratosthenes might have said”) that he had not met him Lys. 12, 31. ἐχρῆν τὸν Σωκράτην μὴ πρότερον τὰ πολιτικὰ διδάσκειν τοὺς συνόντας ἣ σωφρονεῖν Socrates ought not to have taught his associates politics in preference to self-control Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 17. χρῆν γὰρ ἄλλοθέν ποθεν βροτοὺς παῖδας τεκνοῦσθαι mortals ought to beget children from some other source (but they do not) E. Med. 573.
Observe that in such expressions the aorist infinitive refers always to a single act (usually in past time), while the present infinitive refers to continued or repeated action either present or past (cf. § 539).
Note. – Observe that the mere statement of a past possibility or necessity may always suffice to imply that the possible or necessary event did not occur: as εἶδες dv you might have seen (if you had been present), or ἐξῆν ἰδεῖν it was possible to see (if you had been present). If ἄν is used with a past tense of the indicative of a verb denoting possibility, propriety, or the like, it shows that the possibility or propriety is stated not as a fact, but as something which might or could have existed (cf. § 564 note 2): as ἐξῆν ἂν ἰδεῖν it would (or might) have been possible to see. Compare οὐκ ἂν ἑτέρων ἔδει σοι μαρτύρων you would not have any need of other witnesses (but as it is, you do need them) Lys. 7, 22, and εἴπερ ἦν ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός, ἔχρην ἂν – . . μὴ παρανόμως ἄρχειν if he had been a good man, he would have had to rule with-out transgressing the laws (but a bad man is under uo such obligation) Lys. 12, 48, with χρῆν δ᾽ αὐτὸν… προθὐμίαν ἔχειν he ought to have had zeal (but did not have) Lys. 12, 50.
1. The expressions which may be used to denote a past possibility or necessity (without ἄν) are very numerous; some of the most common of them are the following: ἔδει, χρῆν or ἐχρῆν it was necessary, εἰκὸς ἣν it was likely, προσῆκε, ἔπρεπε it was fitting, ἐξῆν it was possible, ἔμελλον was likely to, and many adjectives with ἣν, such as δίκαιον ἣν it was just, ἄξιον ἣν it was proper, αἰσχρὸν ἣν it was shameful, οἷός τ᾽ ἣν was possible, and many others (cf. oportebat, decebat, and the like, in Latin).
568. Statements of Past Recurrent Action. – A statement of an indefinitely recurrent past action, which would take place only under certain circumstances, stands in a past tense of the indicative with ἄν: thus, ἀναλαμβάνων οὖν αὐτῶν τὰ ποιήματα… διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν so, taking up their compositions, Ι would ask (if ever an opportunity occurred) them what they meant Pl. Ap. 22 b. εἴ τις αὐτῷ δοκοίη… βλᾱκεύειν, ἐκλεγόμενος τὸν ἐπιτήδειον ἔπαισεν ἄν if any one seemed to him to be lazy, he would pick out the proper man, and strike him Xn. A. 2, 3, 11.
Note. – Observe that this form of statement does not necessarily express the occurrence as a fact, but only as what could or would take place (and undoubtedly did take place) if circumstances demanded. Hence it is easily explained as a special use of the potential (§ 565) indicative.
569. 1. Subjunctive with μή and μὴ οὐ. – In Plato, and sometimes in other writers, a cautious suggestion is occasionally expressed by the subjunctive with μή (negatively μὴ οὐ, § 432): thus, μὴ ὡς ἀληθῶς ταῦτα σκέμµατα ᾖ τῶν ῥᾷδίως ἀποκτωνύντων may not these really prove to be the considerations of those who thoughtlessly put men to death? PL Crit. 48 c. ἀλλὰ μὴ οὗ τοῦτ᾽ ᾗ χαλεπόν but possibly this may not be so difficult Pl. Ap. 39a.
In origin these expressions are doubtless questions (§ 576 a), but they are usually printed without the mark of interrogation.
2. οὐ μή with the Subjunctive (or Future Indicative). – An emphatic future denial (which sometimes borders on a prohibition, § 584) may be expressed by the subjunctive (or rarely the future indicative) with οὗ µῄ: thus, οὐκέτι μὴ δύνηται βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς καταλαβεῖν the king will nο longer be able to overtake us Xn. A. 2, 2, 12. οὗ μὴ δυσμενὴς ἔσῃ φίλοις you shall not be hostile to your friends Ε. Med. 1151. οὗ γὰρ μὴ ἀπώσεται for she will not possibly reject it Hdt. 1, 199.
QUESTIONS
DIRECT QUESTIONS
570. Direct Questions may be divided into two classes: (1) ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ Questions, in which the question is asked by the verb, and (2) Word Questions, in which the question is asked by some interrogative pronoun, adjective, or adverb. The latter class cannot be answered by ‘yes’ or ‘no’.
‘Yes’ or ‘No’ Questions
571131. A ‘yes’ or ‘no’ question may sometimes have the same form as a statement, and the fact that it is a question is determined wholly by the context: thus, ἔστιν ὅ τι σε ἠδίκησα; is there any matter in which I have wronged you? Xn. A. 1, 6, 7.
1. More often the interrogative meaning is made clearer by means of certain adverbs (ἦ, ἆρα): thus, ἦ καὶ περὶ ἵππους οὕτω σοι δοκεῖ ἔχειν; Do you really think this is the case also with horses? Pl. Ap. 25 a. ἆρ’ εἰσίν; ἆρ’ οὐκ εἰσί; Are they (living)? Are they not? E. Ι. T. 577.
Such questions merely ask for information and do not imply any previous assumption on the part of the speaker.
572. Questions with οὐ and μή. – The negative adverbs οὐ and μή (§ 431) either alone or combined with other interrogative adverbs are used also in questions.
1. A question introduced by οὐ (or by ἆρ’ οὗ or οὐκοῦν) asks whether a fact is not so, and expects the answer ‘yes’: thus, οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει; Is it not so? (i.e. “I think it is so; pray tell me if it is not so”) Pl. Ap. 27 c. οὐκ ἐλᾷς; Won't you move on? (i.e. “I think you will”) Ar. Nub. 1298.
2. A question introduced by μή, ἆρα μή, or μῶν (= μὴ οὖν), implies uncertainty (or even apprehension) on the part of the speaker: thus, ἆρα γε μὴ ἐμοῦ προμηθῇ; Are you not perhaps concerned for me? (i.e “I don’t think you ought to be, but I have a feeling that you possibly are”) PL Crit. 44 e. μῶν προσῆκέ σοι; Is it not perhaps possible that he was related to you? E. I. T. 550.
Note. – When οὗ is used in a question introduced by μή it modifies some particular word ( 431, 3): thus, μῶν οὗ πάποιθας; Is it possible that you don’t believe me? E. Med. 732.
573. Rhetorical Questions. – The context often shows that a question is asked merely for effect, with the knowledge that the answer must be ‘no’. Such questions are often (but not always) introduced by μή: as μὴ αὐτὸν οἴῃ φροντίσαι θανάτου καὶ κινδῡ́νου; Think you that he considered death and danger? (“Of course you do not”) PL Ap. 28 d. ἄλλοι δέ ἄρα αὐτᾱ́ς οἴσουσι ῥᾷδίως; Will others then bear them easily? (“Far from it“) Pl. Ap. 37 d.
Note. – The words ἄλλο τι ἤ (or sometimes only ἄλλο τι, the ἤ being omitted), meaning literally (Is it) anything else than, are not infrequently used to introduce a question which the speaker feels must be answered by ‘Yes’: thus, ἄλλο τι ἢ οὐδὲν κωλύει παριέναι; Therés nothing to stop our passing along, is there? Xn. A. 4, 7, 5. ἄλλο τι φιλεῖται ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν; Isn't it loved by the gods? Pl. Euthypliro 10 d.
ALTERNATIVE QUESTIONS
574132. Direct alternative questions are commonly introduced by πότερον (πότερα)… ἤ (Latin, utrum… an) whether… or, or separated by ἤ alone: thus, πότερον ἐᾷς ἄρχειν ἣ ἄλλον καθίστης; Do you let im rule or do you appoint another? Xn. Cy. 3, 1, 12. φῂς ἣ οὔ; Do you say yes or no? PL. Ap. 27 d.
Note. – The first part of a double question is sometimes omitted (cf. Latin an in questions): thus, ἐπιστάμενος πάλαι ἀπεκρύπτου ἢ ὀκνεῖς, ἔφη, ἄρξαι; “You have been concealing your knowledge this long time. (Is there some hidden reason for this) or do you hesitate to begin?” said he. Xn. Mem. 2, 3, 14.
WORD QUESTIONS
575. A question may be expressed by any interrogative pronoun, adjective, or adverb: thus, τίς ἀγορεύειν βούλεται; who wishes to speak? τί εἶπε; what did he say? τίνος ἕνεκα καλεῖ μέ τις; what will anybody invite me for? ποίᾶς συμμαχίᾱς δεόµεθα; what kind of alliance do we want? πότε ἦλθεν; when did he come?
Note 1. – In Greek, unlike English, the interrogative word is often connected with some subordinate word of the sentence instead of with the principal verb: thus, τὸν ἐκ ποίᾱς πόλεως στρατηγὸν προσδοκῶ ταῦτα πρᾱ́ξειν; From what sort of a city must the general be whom 1 expect to do this? (lit. the general from what sort of a city do I expect will do this?) Xn. A. 3, 1, 14. For τί μαθών and τί παθών, see § 653, note 4.
Note 2. – Greek sometimes condenses two interrogatives into one sentence: thus, τίς πόθεν εἰς ἀνδρῶν; Who are you, and from where among men do you come? α 170. πῶς ἐκ τίνος νεὼς… ἥκετε; In what way and from what skip have you come? Ἓ. Hel. 1543.
MODES IN DIRECT QUESTIONS
576133. Questions are distinguished from statements usually by some interrogative word, but sometimes only by the context (§ 571); hence the modes used in statements are used also in questions:
thus, (Indicative) σοὶ δοκεῖ; Do you think so? τί σοι δοκεῖ; What do you think? οὔ σοι δοκεῖ; Don't you think so? μή σοι δοκεῖ; Is it not perhaps possible that you think so?
(potential optative) τίς οὐς ἂν ὁμολογήσειεν; Who would mot admit? Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 5.
(potential indicative) πῶς ἂν πολλοὶ μὲν ἐπεθῡ́μουν τυραννεῖν; How could many wish to rule? Xn. Hier. 1, 9. πῶς ἂν… ἐγώ τί σ᾿ ἠδίκησα; How could I have done you any wrong? Dem. 37, 57.
577. Deliberative Questions. – Questions expressing doubt or deliberation stand in the subjunctive mode (Deliberative Subjunctive). The negative is μή. Such questions are often made more explicit by the addition of βούλῃ or βούλεσθε do you wish? Thus, ποῖ τράπωμαι; ποῖ πορευθῶ; whither shall t turn? whither go? Ε. Hec. 1099. εἴπω τι τῶν εἰωθότων, ὦ δέσποτα; Shall I make one of the stock jokes, Sir? Ar. Ran. 1. μηδ' ἐάν τι ὠνῶμαι… ἔρωμαι ὁπόσου πωλεῖ; And, if I am marketing, am I not to ask the price of anything? Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 36. βούλῃ σκοπῶμεν; Shall we consider, if you please? Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 1.
INDIRECT QUESTIONS
578. Indirect ‘yes’ or ‘no’ questions are introduced by εἰ whether, if (sometimes by ἆρα or μή): thus, ἠρώτησεν εἰ ἤδη ἀποκεκριμένοι εἶεν he asked if they had already given their answer Xn. A. 2, 1, 15.
579134. Alternative indirect ‘yes’ or ‘no’ questions are introduced by πότερον (πότερα)… ἤ or by εἰ… ἤ or by εἴτε… εἴτε; as διηρώτᾶ τὸν Κῦρον πότερον βούλοιτο μένειν ἣ ἁπιέναι she asked Cyrus whether he wanted to stay or to go back Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 15. ἐβουλεύετο… εἰ πέμποιέν τινας ἣ πάντες ἴοιεν he considered whether they should send some, or all should go Xn. A. 1, 10, 5.
580. In indirect word-questions (§ 575) the interrogative of the direct form may be retained (τίς, ποῦ, etc.), or it may be represented by the corresponding indefinite relative (ὅστις, ὅπου, etc., § 490): as βουλεύεσθαι ὅ τι χρὴ ποιεῖν to consider what must be done (ἀῑνοοί τί χρὴ ποιεῖν;) Xn. Α. 1, 3, 11.
MODES IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS
581. Indirect questions follow the rules for indirect discourse (§§ 673 ff.); after a secondary tense their verbs may be changed from the indicative or subjunctive to the optative of the same tense, or they may be retained in their original mode. For examples see § 673.
COMMANDS AND EXHORTATIONS
582. The modes used in expressing commands and exhortations are the imperative and the subjunctive. In the first person the subjunctive is used (since there is no imperative of the first person); in the other persons the imperative is commonly used (but see § 584).
Note. – ἄγε, ἴθι, φέρε, etc. – Commands and exhortations are often preceded by ἄγε (ἄγετε), εἰ δ’ ἄγε, ἴθι, φέρε, come now (often with δή or νυν), and sometimes by δεῖρο or δεῦτε (lit. hither): as ἄγε δὴ… εἶπέ come now, tell us Xn. A. 2, 2, 10. φἐρ’ ἴδω come, let me see Ar. Nub. 21. These words are often used without regard to the person and number of the accompanying imperative or subjunctive (as ἄγε μίμνετε come stay Β 331).
583. Commands. – A command is regularly expressed by the imperative mode: thus, ἐμοὶ πείθου καὶ σώθητι take my advice, and be saved PL. Crit. 44 b. θεοὶ δ’ ἡμῖν μάρτυρες ἔστων and let the gods be our witnesses Xn. Cy. 4, 6, 10. τοσαῦτά μοι εἰρήσθω let so much have been said by me Lys. 24, 4. (The perfect active or middle imperative is rare.)
Note 1.– In Greek, as in English, a polite command (or request) may be implied in a future statement: as πάντως δὲ τοῦτο δρᾱ́σεις at all events you will do this (i.e. “you will be kind enough to do this”) Ar. Nub. 1352. χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you might go within (i.e. “go within”) S. ΕΙ. 1491.
Nore 2. – Infinitive in Commands. – A command may be suggested by the infinitive used independently (§ 644). A person addressed stands in the vocative case, but a predicate word referring to this voeative is in the nominative (cf. § 631); otherwise the subject is in the accusative (§ 629): as παῖδα δ’ ἐμοὶ λῦσαί τε φίλην, τά τ’ ἄποινα δέχεσθαι ἀζόμενοι Διὸς υἱόν but set my dear child free, and take this ransom, in holy fear of Zeus’ son A 20. γεωργοὺς ἀπιέναι Oyez, Oyes, Oyez! the husbandmen (are) to depart Ar. Pax. 551.
Note 3.– A command is sometimes expressed by ὅπως (negative ὅπως μή, § 431, 1) and the future indicative, or (less often) a subjunctive: thus, ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἧς κέκτησθε prove yourselves men worthy of the freedom which you possess Xn. Α. 1. 7, 3. ὅπως μὴ φήσῃ τις (take care to) let no one say Xn. Symp. 4, 8.
584. Negative Commands (Prohibitions). – A negative command is expressed regularly by μή (§ 431, 1) with the present imperative or the aorist subjunctive (the present, as usual, referring to a continued action, while the aorist represents a single act, § 539): thus, (Pres. Impv.) μὴ οὖν οἴου now don’t entertain the idea Xn. A. 2, 1, 12. μὴ κτεῖνε Κροῖσον (stay) don’t kill Croesus (i.e. don't continue what you are now doing) Hat. 1, 85.
(Aor. Subj.) μὴ ποιήσῃς ταῦτα don’t do this Xn. A. 7, 1, 8. μηδενὶ τοῦτο παραστῇ let not this occur to the mind of anybody Lys. 12, 62.
Note.– The third person of the aovist imperative is occasionally found in prohibitions (e.g. μηδεὶς… προσδοκησάτω let nobody expect PL. Ap. 17 c); other exceptions to the rule of § 584 are very rare.
585. Exhortations. – Exhortations are expressed by the first person of the subjunctive mode; if negative, by the subjunctive with μή (§ 481, 1): thus, ἔωμεν let us go, φέρ᾽ ἴδω come, let me see Ar. Nub. 21. μή μέλλωμεν let us not delay Xn. Α. 3, 1, 46.
WISHES
586135. Wishes are either hopeful or hopeless.
587136. Hopeful Wishes. – A hopeful wish (future) stands in the optative mode, and may be introduced by εἴθε or εἰ γάρ: thus, τούτους μὲν οἱ θεοὶ ἀποτείσαιντο these may the gods repay Xn. A. 3, 2, 6. εἴθε σὺ… φίλος ἡμῖν γένοιο would that you might become a friend to us Xn. Hell. 4, 1, 38. So often ὄλοιτο curse him (lit. may he perish).
Note 1. – A wish (future) may be expressed in a roundabout way by βουλοίμην (ἐθέλοιμι) ἄν I could wish with an infinitive (cf. § 588,note): as βουλοίμην μὲν οὖν ἂν τοῦτο οὕτω γενέσθαι I could wish that this night so happen PL. Ap. 19 a.
Note 2. – A wish (future) may sometimes be implied in a question asked by the potential optative (§ 576): as πῶς ἂν ὁλοίμην how might I die (i.e. ῾Ι wish I might die’) E. Supp. 796.
Note 3. – The infinitive used independently (§ 644) may suggest a wish (the construction is rare in prose): as Ζεῦ πάτερ, ἢ Αἴαντα λαχεῖν ἢ Τυδέος υἱόν Father Zeus, may Ajax get the lot, or Tydeus' son! H 179. ὦ Ζεῦ, ἐκγενέσθαι µοι Αθηναίους τείσασθαι Grant me, Zeus, to take vengeance on the Athenians Hdt. 5, 105.
588137. Hopeless Wishes. – A hopeless wish (present or past) is expressed either (1) by a past tense of the indicative with εἴθε or εἰ γάρ, or (2) by some form of ὤφελον (aorist indicative of ὀφείλω owe) with the present or aorist infinitive: thus, –
(1) εἴθε σοι, ὧ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόµην I wish, Pericles, that I had been with you then Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 46. εἴθ' ἦν Ὀρέστης πλησίον would that Orestes were near! E. ΕΙ. 282.
(2) Ἀλλ᾽ ὤφελε μὲν Κῦρον ζῆν Would that Cyrus were alive! (lit. Cyrus ought to be alive) Xn. A. 2, 1, 4. Such wishes also may be preceded by εἴθε or εἰ γάρ: εἰ γὰρ ὤφελον, ὦ Κρίτων, οἷοί τ᾽ εἶναι οἱ πολλοὶ τὰ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐργάζεσθαι would that the common herd, Crito, were capable of doing the greatest harm Pl. Crit. 44 d.
Observe that the aorist in hopeless wishes refers to a single act (in past time), while the imperfect refers to a continued act (in present, seldom in past, time). Cf. § 606. The same principle applies to the present or aorist infinitive with ὤφελον. Cf. § 567.
Note. – A hopeless wish is sometimes expressed in a roundabout way by ἐβουλόμην (or ἤθελον) ἄν I could wish (cf. § 587 note 1): as ἐβουλόμην ἂν αὐτοὺς ἀληθὴ λέγειν I could wish that they spoke the truth Lys. 12, 22.
589. Negative Wishes. – All negative wishes take the negative μή (§ 431, 1). (This is true even with ὤφελον, where we should expect οὐ; cf. § 431 note): thus, ὡς δὴ μὴ ὄφελον νῑκᾶν would that Ι had not been victor λ 548. Zεῦ, μηκέτ’ εἴην may I no longer live, Ο Zeus E. Hipp. 1191.
Note. – With ὤφελον the negative μή probably belonged originally with the infinitive (§ 431, 1), but later came to precede the whole sentence (cf. § 431 note).
FINAL CLAUSES
PURPOSE
590138. Purpose Clauses. – Purpose clauses regularly take the subjunctive after a primary tense and the optative (or subjunctive, § 674) after a secondary tense. They are introduced by ἵνα, ὡς, or ὅπως that, in order that, and if negative they add the negative μή (§ 431, 1): thus, Εἰς καιρὸν ἥκεις, ἔφη, ὅπως τῆς δίκης ἀκούσῃς “you have come in good time,” he said, “that you may hear the trial” Xn. Cy. 8, 1, 8. διανοεῖται αὐτὴν λῦσαι… ὡς μὴ διαβῆτε he has in mind to destroy it [the bridge] so that you may not cross Xn. A. 2, 4, 17.
λαβὼν ὑμᾶς ἐπορευόμην ἵνα… ὠφελοίην αὐτόν I proceeded with you in order to help him Xn. A. 1, 3, 4. τὴν δὲ Ἑλληνικὴν δύναμιν ἤθροιξεν ὡς μάλιστα ἐδύνατο ἐπικρυπτόμενος, ὅπ ως ὅτι ἀπαρασκευότατον λάβοι βασιλέα he collected the Greek force as secretly as possible, so as to take the King completely unprepared Xn. Α. 1, 1, 6.
ἃ… κατάκαυσὲν ἵνα μὴ Κῦρος δια βῇ which [vessels] he had burned, so that Cyrus should not cross Xn. A. 1, 4, 18.
Peculiarities in Purrose Clauses
Note 1. Optative by Attraction. – A purpose clause depending on an optative (potential or of wishing) commonly stands in the optative by attraction (§ 316): thus, βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι περὶ παντὸς ἃν ποιήσαιτο ἵνα καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις Ἕλλησι φόβος εἴη the king would regard our destruction as all important, so that the rest of the Greeks may be afraid Xn. Α. 2, 4, 3.
Note 2. – ἃν – The adverb ἄν is sometimes used with ὡς or ὅπως and the subjunctive – probably a survival from the time when the purpose clause partook somewhat of the nature of a relative clause of anticipation (§ 623): thus, ὡς δ᾽ ἂν μάθῃς… ἀντάκουσον but in order that you may learn, listen to the other side of the case Xn. Α. 2, 5, 16.
Note 3. Future Indicative. – The future indicative with ὅπως is sometimes found in purpose clauses (cf. §§ 593 and 555).
Note 4. Unattained Purpose. – When a purpose clause depends on an expression which shows that the purpose was not attained, it takes a past tense of the indicative: thus, ἔδει τὰ ἐνέχυρα τότε λαβεῖν, ὡς μηδ' εἰ ἐβούλετο ἐδύνατο ἐξαπατᾶν security ought to have been taken at the time so that he would not have been able to play false, even if he had wished to do so Xn. A.7, 6, 23.
591. Relative Clause of Purpose. A relative clause with the future indicative may be used so as to express purpose (negative μή): as ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν Κῦρον ὄστις… ἀπάξει to demand of Cyrus a guide who will lead us back Xn. A. 1, 8, 14. κρύψω τόδ᾽ ἔγχος… ἔνθα μή τις ὄψεται Íll hide this sword where none shall see it S. Aj. 658.
592. Infinitive of Purpose. – Purpose may be expressed also by the infinitive (§ 640), but usually only with words which can take an indirect object (§ 375): as τὸ δὲ ἤμισυ κατέλιπε φυλάττειν τὸ στρατόπεδον the other half (of the army) he left to guard the camp Xn. A. 5, 2, 1. ταύτην τὴν χώρᾶν ἐπέτρεψε διαρπάσαι τοῖς Ἕλλησιν this country he turned over to the Greeks to plunder Xn. A. 1, 2, 19.
For purpose suggested by the infinitive with ὥστε see § 595, note. For the participle see § 653, 5.
593139. Object Clauses. –
An object clause differs from a purpose clause in being in apposition with the object (or ubject) of a verb denoting care, attention, or effort.
Object clauses take the future indicative with ὅπως (rarely after a secondary tense the future optative, § 677); a negative clause adds the negative μή (§ 431, 1): as ὅπως δε καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ ἑπαινέσετε ἐμοὶ μελήσει it shall be my care that (lit. how that) you, in turn, shall commend me Xn. A. 1, 4, 16. τοῦτο δεῖ παρασκενάσασθαι, ὅπως ὡς κράτιστα μαχούμεθα this we must arrange, namely how we shall best fight Xn. A. 4, 6, 10. (Fur. Opt.; rare) διεπρᾶττοντο ὅπως ἐν τῇ ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστοι ἡγήσοιντο they arranged that they should be severally leaders in their own countries Xn. Hell. 7, 5, 3.
1. The (present or aorist) subjunctive or optative (§ 677) is sometimes found in object clauses instead of the future indicative (cf. § 555): thus, ὄρᾱ… ὅπως μὴ παρὰ δόξαν ὁμολογῆς see to it that you do not make any admission contrary to what you really think PL. Crit. 49 c. ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι αὐτῷ µέλοι ὅπως καλῶς ἔχοι he replied that he was taking care that all should go well Xn. A. 1, 8, 13.
Note. – Instead of ὅπως μή, sometimes μή is found with the subjunctive after words like ὁρῶ and σκοπῶ see to it.
594. Clauses of Fearing. –
A fear that something may happen (in the future), depending on words of fearing and the like, is expressed by the subjunctive with μή after a primary tense and the optative (or subjunctive, § 674) with μή after a secondary tense. If negative, οὐ is added (§ 432): thus, δέδοικα… μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ I fear we may forget the homeward way Xn. A. 3, 2, 25. οὗ τοῦτο δέδοικα μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ὅτι δῶ I am not afraid that 1 shall not have anything to give Xn. A. 1, 7.
ἔδεισαν οἱ Ἕλληνες μὴ προσάφοιεν πρὸς τὸ κέρας the Greeks were in terror lest they should lead against their flank Xn. A. 1, 10, 9.
ὑπερεφοβεῖτο μή οἱ ὀ πάππος ἀποθάνῃ he was more than afraid that his dear grandfather might die Xn. Cy. 1, 4, 2.
Note. – Rarely the future indicative is found after words of fearing; sometimes also ὅπως μή (instead of μή) with the future indicative or the subjunctive (cf. §§ 593 and 555).
1. A fear concerning the present or past stands in the indicative, with μή or μὴ οὐτ as φοβούμεθα μὴ ἀμφοτέρων ἅμα ἡμαρτήκαμεν we fear that we have failed of both at once Th. 3, 53. δείδω μὴ δὴ πάντα θεὰ νηµερτέα εἶπεν Ι fear that all the goddess said is true ε 300.
Note. – The construction after words of fearing (§ 594) is best explained as derived from the use of μή in questions (§ 572, 2) with the indicative or the anticipatory subjunctive (§ 576 a). Thus, originally δέδοικα᾽ μὴ ἔρχεται (or ἦλθεν); meant I am afraid; may he not possibly be coming (or have come) ?, and δέδοικα᾽ μὴ ἔλθῃ; meant I am afraid; may he not perhaps come? Later the second clause came to be regarded as dependent on the first.
As fears mostly concern the future rather than the present or past, the subjunctive is of course much more common than the indicative. The optative after a secondary tense is due to the influence of the principle of indirect discourse (§ 677).
RESULT
595. Clauses of result are regularly introduced by ὥστε so that (sometimes by ὡς or an equivalent relative). If the result is regarded purely as result (without stating its actual attainment), the infinitive mode is used (§ 645); if the attainment of the result is emphasized, the indicative mode (or some other form of independent sentence) is employed: thus, (Infinitive) τά οὕτως ἐστὶ δεινὸς λέγειν ὥστε σε πεῖσαι; who is so clever at speaking as to persuade you? Xn. A. 2, 5, 15. ἤλαυνεν ἐπὶ τοὺς Μένωνος, ὥστ᾽ ἐκεῖvous ἐκπεπλῆχθαι he advanced against Menon's soldiers so that they were panicstricken Xn. A. 1, 5, 13. ἐνετύγχανον τάφροις καὶ αὐλῶσιν ὕδατος πλήρεσιν, ὡς μὴ δύνασθαι διαβαίνειν they came upon ditches and conduits full of water, so that they were (lit. so as to be) unable to cross Xn. A. 2, 3, 10.
(Indicative) ἡ µήτηρ συνέπρᾶττεν αὐτῷ ταῦτα: ὥστε βασιλεὺς τὴν μὲν πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἐπιβουλὴν οὐκ ᾖἠσθάνετο his mother codperated with him in this, so that the King was not aware of the plot against him Xn. A. 1, 1, 8.
(Potential Optative) πλοῖα ὃ ὑμῖν πάρεστιν ὥστε bmp ἂν βούλησθε ἐξαίφνης ἂν ἐπιπέσοιτε you have boats, 0 that you could make a sudden descent on any place you choose Xn. A. 5, 6,20. So also the imperative as well as other forms of statement, wish, question, etc., are occasionally found with ὥστε.
Note. – A result not yet attained, expressed by ὥστε and the infinitive, may sometimes come very near denoting purpose: as pyyaval πολλαί εἶσιν… ὥστε διαφεύγειν θάνατον there are many devices ευ as to escape (i.e. for escaping) death PL Ap. 39 a.
596. ἐφ᾽ᾧ, ἐφῷτε (and Gore). – A clause introduced by ἐφ'ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ῷτε (and sometimes ὥστε) on the ground that with the infinitive or (less often) the future indicative, regularly implies a proviso: as αἱρεθέντες δὲ ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ξυγγράψεαι νόµους but having been chosen so that (“with the proviso that”) they should compile laws Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 11. ποιοῦνται κοινῇ ὁμολογίᾶν… ὥστε Ἀθηναίοις μὲν ἐξεῖναι βουλεῦσαι they made a general agreement, so that (i.e. “with the proviso that”) the Athenians should be allowed to consider measures Th. 3, 28.
597. Relative Clause Implying Result. – Result may also be implied by a relative clause with the indicative (§ 619, note): as τίς οὕτω μαίνεται ὅστις οὐ βούλεταίσοι φίλος εἶναι; who is so mad as not to (lit. who does not) wish to be a friend to you? Xn. A. 2, 5, 12.
CAUSAL CLAUSES
598140. Causal clauses are introduced by ὅτε (διότε) because; less often by ἐπεί (ἐπειδή) or ὅτε when, since (cf. the Latin cum), ὡς as, since, or by a relative pronoun (§ 619, note).
The mode of the verb in a causal clause is regularly the indicative (although a potential form of statement is sometimes possible): as ἐπεὶ ᾔσθετο… καὶ ὅτι… ἤκουε since he had learned, and because he heard Xn. A. 1, 2, 21.
Cause may also be implied by a circumstantial participle (see § 653, 4, and § 656, 1).
Note. – After a secondary tense causal clauses are subject to the principles of indirect discourse, and may have the optative (§ 677).
1. εἰ after words of wondering, etc. – After words expressing surprise, joy, sorrow, anger, and the like, a cause is sometimes more delicately put as a mere supposition: as οὐ θαυμαστὸν δ᾽ εἰ τότε τᾱ̀ς μορίᾶς ἐξέκοπτον it's not wonderful that (lit. if) at that time they destroyed the sacred olive trees Lys. 7. 7.
CONDITIONS
599. 1. In Greek, as in other languages, a simple condition (in which nothing is implied as to the fulfillment) stands in the indicative mode (§ 602).
2. A condition in which something is implied as to the fulfillment (i.e. as not likely to take place, not taking place, or not having taken place) has in Greek, as in other languages, a special conditional form. See Future Less Vivid (§ 605) and Contrary to Fact Conditions (§ 606).
3. In addition to the conditional forms common to other languages, Greek has also a special form of future condition (§ 604), and in present and past time a special form for general conditions (§ 608).
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
600141. A conditional sentence consists regularly of two parts: the Protasis (or Conditidn), which states the condition, and the Apodosis (or Conclusion), which states what happens (or would happen) under that condition.
1. The protasis is introduced by some word meaning or implying if (εἰ, ἐάν, or a relative, § 620); the regular negative of the protasis is μή (§ 431, 1).
(For εἰ after words of wondering, etc., see § 598, 1.)
Note. – If οὗ is used in the protasis, it usually modifies some particular word of the protasis (cf. § 431, 3): thus, εἰ τοὺς θανόντας οὐκ ἐᾷς θάπτειν if you don't allow (i.e. forbid) the burial of the dead S. Aj. 1131.
601. In classifying conditional sentences, it is convenient to refer them to certain normal forms which repeatedly oceur, but the Greek did not hesitate to employ that form of protasis or apodosis which should best express his meaning (see § 612).
Note. – Apodotic δέ – Originally the two parts of a conditional sentence were cogrdinate, and could be connected by coirdinate conjunctions (like δὲ and ἀλλά). Traces of this earlier usage still appear sometimes in the use of δέ (rarely ἀλλά) in the apodosis, as if to connect it with the protasis: thus, ἐᾱ́ν τ᾿ αὖ λέγω ὅτι καὶ τυγχάνει µέγιστον ἀγαθὸν ὃν ἀνθρώπῳ τοῦτο…, ταῦτα 8 ἔτι ἧττον πείσεσθε if, on the other hand, I say that this happens to be the greatest good for a man, then you will even less believe this PL. Ap. 38 a.
602. Simple Conditions. – In Greek, as in other languages, a simple condition (in which nothing is implied as to the fulfillment) takes the indicative mode in both protasis and apodosis: thus, εἰ δέ τις οἴεται ἕνα αἱρετὸν εἶναι ὀφθαλμὸν βασιλεῖ, οὐκ ὀρθῶς οἴεται but if anybody thinks that one chosen man is Eye for the King, he doesn’t think rightly Xn. Cy. 8, 2, 11. εἰ μὲν θεοῦ ἣν, οὐκ ἣν… αἰσχροκερδής if he was a god's son, he was not basely greedy of gain Pl. Rep. 408 c. εἰ τιµωρήσεις Πατρόκλῳ… τὸν φόνον καὶ Ἕκτορα ἀποκτενεῖς, αὐτὸς ἀποθανῇ if you avenge the murder of Patroclus, and slay Hector, you yourself shall die Pl. Ap. 28 c.
1. Protasis and apodosis need not be in the same tense: thus, εἰ . . . ἔλῦε τὰς σπονδὰς, τὴν δίκην ἔχει if he broke the truce, he has his deserts Xn. A. 2, 5, 41.
Note: 1. – Equivalents of the Indicative in Simple Conditions. – Equivalents of the indicative may be substituted for it in the apodosis (and rarely in the protasis). Thus, the optative of wishing (= ἐλπίζω Ι hope, § 587), the imperative (= κελεύω I command, § 582), the subjunctive of exhortation (= δεῖ or χρή it is necessary or proper), or even the potential optative or indicative (= ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ it seems to me) (§§ 563, 565) may stand for the indicative: as σοὶ δ᾽ εἴ πῃ ἄλλῃ δέδοκται, λέγε καὶ δίδασκε but if you have come to any different conclusion, (I beg you) speak and explain PL. Crit. 49 e. καὶ εἴτε μηδεμίᾱ αἴσθησίς ἐστιν… θαυµάσιον κέρδος ἂν εἴη ὁ θάνατος and if it is unconsciousness, (it seems to me) death would be a wondrous gain PL. Ap. 40 c.
Note 2.– Future Indicative in Present Conditions. – Rarely the future indicative is used in the protasis with the force of a periphrastic future (see § 533 note) to express a present intention. Such conditions are better classed as present conditions: thus, εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεµός τε δα μᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς if war and plague together are to lay the Achaeans low A 61. Sο εἰ… πιστεύσομεν if we are going to trust Xn. A.1 ,3, 16.
FUTURE CONDITIONS (MORE VIVID AND LESS VIVID)
603. In future conditions the Greeks usually preferred not to assume the condition as a fact (§ 602), but to anticipate it as a more or less remote possibility (cf. §§ 555, 558); hence we find two special forms of future conditions, the Future More Vivid and the Future Less Vivid.
604142. Future More Vivid. – A Future More Vivid Condition, anticipating an immediate future possibility, has:
In the protasis – the subjunctive with ἐάν (ἤν or ἄν).
In the apodosis – the future indicative (or its equivalent):
thus, ἣν γὰρ τοῦτο λάβωμεν, οὐ δυνήσονται μένειν for if we capture this, they will not be able to stay Xn. A. 3, 4, 41. ἐὰν σωφρονῆτε, οὗ τούτου ἀλλ᾽ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν φείσεσθε if you are discreet, you will spare not him, but yourselves Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 34.
Note. – Equivalents of the future indicative, such as the imperative, hortatory subjunctive, subjunctive with οὗ μή (§ 569, 2), and the like (cf. § 602, note 1) may fake the place of the future indicative in the apodosis: as καὶ χρῶ αὐτοῖς éav δέῃ τι and use them, if you need them at all Xn. Cy. 5, 4, 30. κ῎ᾱν φαινώμεθα ἄδικα αὐτὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, μὴ οὗ δέῃ, κτλ., and if we shall appear to do this unjustly, will it not perhaps be necessary, etc., PL. Crit. 48 d.
605143. Future Less Vivid. – A Future Less Vivid condition, implying that the supposition is a somewhat remote possibility, has:
In the protasis,
the optative with εἰ.
In the apodosis,
the potential optative (i.e. optative with ἄν, § 563):
thus, ὁδοποιήσειέ γ᾽ ἂν αὐτοῖς καὶ εἰ σὺν τεθρίπποις βούλοιντο ἀπιέναι he would make roads for them even if they should want to depart with chariot-and-four Xn. A. 3, 2, 24. ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἔλθοιτε ἄν, εἰ τὸν Ἅλυν διαβαῖτε to which [i.e. the Parthenius] you would come, if you should cross the Halys Xn. A. 5, 6, 9.
Note. – Observe that the less vivid condition of future time corresponds to the contrary to fact condition of present or past time.
CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT
606144. In a condition contrary to fact the supposition stated in the protasis is contrary to the existing facts. Such conditions have:
In the protasis,
a past tense of the indicative with εἰ.
In the apodosis,
the potential indicative (§ 565) (i.e. a past tense of the indicative with ἄν), or its equivalent (§ 566).
The aorist in these conditions denotes a single act, and hence refers regularly to past time; the imperfect denotes a continued action (or state), and refers either to present or to past time; the pluperfect is used only when the completion and continuance of the result of the act (§ 534) are emphasized, and refers usually to present time. Protasis and apodosis need not stand in the same tense: thus,
Aorist (Past Time) οὐκ ἂν ἐποίησεν Ἀγασίᾱς ταῦτα, εἰ μὴ ἐγὼ αὐτὸν ἐκέλευσα Agasias would not have done this, if I had not told him to Xn. A. 6, 6, 15. καὶ ἴσως ἂν διὰ ταῦτ’ ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη and perhaps I should have been put to death for this, if the government had not soon been overthrown Pl. Ap. 32 d. (Anorist (ἂν… εἶπες) of a single act in present time (rare) is in PL Rep. 337 b.)
Imperfect (Present Time) ταῦτα δὲ οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ καὶ dairy μετρίᾷ ἐχρῶντο they would not have the power to do this, if they did not also lead a temperate life Xn. Cy. 1, 9, 10.
(Past Time) οὐκ ἂν οὖν νήσων… ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν now he would not have been master of islands, if he had not possessed also some naval force Th. 1, 9.
Pluperfect (Present Time) with aorist (past time) εἰ τριᾱ́κοντα µόναι µετέπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύψφη ἄν if only thirty of the votes had been cast on the other side, ι should (now) be free Pl. Ap. 36 a.
Aorist (Past) and imperfect (Present) εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορενόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέᾱ if you had not come we should (now) be marching against the king Xn. A. 2, 1, 4.
Imperfect (Past) and Aorist (Past) εἰ μὲν πρόσθεν ἠπιστάμην, οὐδ' ἂν συνηκολούθησά σοι if I had understood this before, I should not have followed with you Xn. A. 7, 7, 11.
607. In place of the potential indicative in the apodosis of a condition contrary to fact may be substituted a statement of fact expressed by the imperfect indicative (without ἄν) of a verb denoting possibility, propriety, necessity, and the like (ἐξῆν, ἔδει, χρῆν, etc.). See § 567 and note: thus,
With Aorist Infinitive (Past Time) ἐξῆν σοι φυγῆς τιμήσασθαι, εἰ ἐβούλου it was possible for you to propose the penalty of exile, if you so desired PL. Crit. 52 c.
With Present Infinitive (Present Time) χρῆν σ᾿ εἴπερ ἦσθα μὴ κακὸς, πείσαντά µε γαμεῖν γάμον τόνδ' you ought, if you were not so base, to win my sanction to contract this marriage E. Med. 586.
With Present Infinitive (Past Time) ἐχρῆν γὰρ αὐτοὺς, εἴπερ ὑμῶν ἕνεκα ἔπρᾶττον ταῦτα, φαίνεσθαι τῆς αὐτῆς τιμῆς πολλὰς ἡμέρᾶς πωλοῦντας for, if they were doing this on your account, they ought to have been observed to sell at the same price for many days Lys. 22, 12.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
608. In present and past time the Greeks had a special form for a general condition (to state what always happens (or happened) if the condition is (or was) ever fulfilled).
609145. Present General. – In a Present General condition the usage is:
In the protasis – the subjunctive with ἐάν (ἤν or ἄν).
In the apodosis – the present indicative (or the equivalent):
thus, ἣν δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδείς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if Death comes near, nobody wants to die E. Alc. 671. τᾱ̀ς δὲ ὠτίδας, ἄν τις ταχὺ ἀνιστῇ, ἔστι λαμβάνειν it is possible to catch bustards if one starts them up suddenly Xn. Α. 1, 5, 3.
Note 1. – In place of the present indicative in the apodosis may be substituted the gnomic aorist (§ 530). See § 530 and the second example there quoted.
Note 2. – Observe that the present general condition differs from the future more vivid (§ 604) only in the apodosis, which states what always takes place (instead of what will take place), in case the antici pation expressed in the protasis is realized.
610146. Past General. – In a Past General condition the usage is:
In the protasis – the optative with εἰ.
In the apodosis – the imperfect indicative (or the equivalent):
thus, εἴ πού τι ὀρφη βρωτόν, διεδίδου if he saw anywhere anything eatable, he distributed it Xn. A. 4, 5, 8. εἴ τι ἄλλο πρᾱ́ττειν βούλοιντο, κῡ́ριοι ἦσαν if (ever) they wished to do anything else, they had authority Lys. 12, 44
Note 1. – As an equivalent of the imperfect indicative in the apodosis, the imperfect or aorist indicative with ἄν (§ 568), or the aorist modified by “never,” “often,” and the like may be used: as εἰ δέ τινος τοῦ κλήρου ὀ ποταμός τι παρέλοιτο, ἐλθὼν ἂν πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐσήμαινε τὸ γεγενηµένον if (ever) the river carried away any portion of a man's lot, he would come before him [the king] and relate that had happened Hdt. 2,109. For an example of the aorist with ἂν as the apodosis of a past general condition, see § 568. For the aorist with a negative see Xn. 4. 1, 9, 18.
Note 2. Observe that the past general condition differs from the future less vivid (§ 605) only in the apodosis, which states what regularly took place (instead of what would take place), in case the possibility suggested in the protasis came true.
SUMMARY OF CONDITIONAL FORMS
611. The normal usage in conditions may be summarized as follows:
| Time | Form | Protasis | Apodosis |
| Future | Simple (or most vivid) | Fut. Indic. with εἰ | Fut. Indic. (or equivalent) |
| More Vivid | Subj. with ἐᾱ́ν | Fut. Indic. (or equivalent) | |
| Less Vivid | Opt. with εἰ | Opt. with ἄν | |
| Present | Simple | Pres. (or Perf.) Indic. with εἰ | Pres. (or Perf.) Indic. (or equivalent) |
| General | Subj. with ἐᾱ́ν | Pres. Indic. (or equivalent) | |
| Contrary to Fact | Imperf. (or Pluperf.) Indic. with εἰ | Imperf. (or Pluperf.) Indic. with ἄν (or equivalent §§ 566–567) | |
| Simple | Past Tense of Indic. with εἰ | Past Tense of Indic. | |
| General | Opt. with εἰ | Imperf. Indic. (or equivalent) | |
| Contrary to Fact | Aorist or Imperf. Indic. with εἰ | Aorist or Imperf. Indic. with ἄν (or equivalent §§ 566–567) |
VARIATIONS FROM THE NORMAL FORMS OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
612. Besides the combinations given above, other combinations are not infrequent. The most common are:
1. Protasis Simple (§ 602) or More Vivid (§ 604) with Apodosis Less Vivid (§ 605). – ἀδικοίην μὲν ἂν εἰ μὴ ἀποδώσω unjustly should I act if I do not restore her E. Hel. 1010. οὐδὲ γὰρ ἂν πολλαὶ γέφῡραι ὦσιν, ἔχοιμεν ἂν ὅποι φυγόντες ἡμεῖς σωθῶμεν, for not even if there be many bridges, should we have anywhere to escape and save ourselves Xn. A. 2, 4, 19.
2. Protasis Less Vivid (§ 605) with Apodosis Simple (§ 602). – τοῦτό γέ µοι δοκεῖ καλὸν εἶναι, εἴ τις οἶός τ' εἴη παιδεύειν ἀνθρώπους this certainly seems to me to be a fine thing, if anybody should be able to educate men Pl. Ap. 19 e. τί τῷ πλήθει περιγενήσεται εἰ ποιήσαιµεν ἃ ἐκεῖνοι προστάττουσιν; what advantage will result for the people, if we should do what they insist on? Lys. 34, 6.
Note. – Potential Optative or Indicative in Protasis. – Rarely a potential optative or indicative is used in a protasis, retaining, of course, its regular force: as εἴ γε μηδὲ δοῦλον ἀκρατῆ δεξαίμεθ’ ἄν if we would not take even a slave who is intemperate Xn. Mem. 1, 5, 3.
613. The protasis sometimes depends remotely on an idea contained in the apodosis, in which case it is best translated “in case that” or “on the chance that”: as ὄρᾱ δὲ δὴ τῆς σκέψεως τὴν ἀρχήν, ἐᾱ́ν σοι ἱκανῶς λέγηται now consider the beginning of our investigation, in case it be stated to your satisfaction Pl. Crit. 48 e.
614. Implied Conditions. – A condition may be implied in a participle (§ 653, 6), adverb, or adverbial phrase, or a relative clause (§§ 621; 622): as σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν ἂν οἶμαι εἶναι τῑ́μιος... ὑμῶν δὲ ἔρημος ὤν οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς εἶναι οἶμαι οὔτ' ἂν φίλον ὠφελῆσαι oir’ ἂν ἐχθρὸν ἀλέξασθαι with you (i.e. εἰ σὺν ὑμῖν εἴην if Ι should be with you) I think I should be honored (i.e. εἴην ἄν), but deprived of you (i.e. εἰ ὑμῶν ἔρημος εἴην) I think Ι should not be able (i.e. εἴην ἄν) either to help a friend or to defend myself against a foe Xn. 1, 3, 6.
615. Verb not Expressed. – The verb in the protasis or apodosis sometimes is not expressed if it can be readily felt from the context: as εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος ἀνήρ, καὶ Κῦρος ἄξιός ἐστι θαυμάξεσθαι if any other man is worthy to be admired, Cyrus, too, is worthy to be admired Xn. Cy. 5, 1, 6. εἰ δή τῳ σοφώτερός του φαίην εἶναι, τούτῳ ἄν if I should say that T am wiser than anybody in any respect, it would (I should say) be in this respect Pl. Ap. 29 b.
616. From the regular suppression of the verb of the apodosis have arisen the following idiomatic expressions:
1. εἰ μή if not, i.e. except: as οὗ γὰρ δὴ... ὁρῶμεν εἰ μὴ ὀλίγους τούτους ἀνθρώπους for we do mot see any one except (lit. if not) these few men Xn. A. 4, 7, 5.
2. εἰ μὴ διά if not on account of, i.e. except for: as ἀπολέσαι παρεσκευάξοντο τὴν πόλιν, εἰ μὴ δι ἄνδρας ἀγαθούς they were making ready to destroy the State (and they would have destroyed it) if it had not been for some good men Lys. 12, 60.
3. εἰ δὲ μή but if not, i.e. otherwise (a supposition contrary to what immediately precedes): as ἀπῄτει τὰ… χρήματα’ εἰ δὲ μή, πολεμήσειν ἔφη αὐτοῖς he demanded restoration of the property; otherwise (lit. but if they should not vestore it) he said he should make war on them Xn. Hell. 1, 3, 3. So also εἰ δὲ μὴ is used even when the preceding clause is negative: as μὴ ποιήσῃς ταῦτα’ εἰ δὲ μή,… αἰτίᾱν ἕξεις don't do this; otherwise (i.e. if you persist in doing it) you will be blamed Xn. A. 7, 1, 8. So also εἰ δὲ μή is regularly used where ἐὰν δὲ μή (owing to a preceding ἐᾱ́ν) would be more logical.
4. ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ just as would be if, i.e. like as: thus, ἠσπάζετό τε αὐτὸν ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις πάλαι συντεθραµμένος… ἀσπάζοιτο he greeted him just as one would greet another if he should greet him after being long associated with him Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 2.
CONCESSIVE CLAUSES
617. Concessive clauses are introduced by εἰ καί (ἐᾱ́ν καί) if even or καὶ εἰ (καὶ ἐᾱ́ν, and by crasis § 43 κἄν) even if; otherwise they do not differ from conditional clauses: as ἱκανοί εἶσι… τοὺς μικροὺς κἂν ἐν δεινοῖς ὦσι, σφζειν εὖπετῶς they (the gods) are able easily to save lowly men, even if (i.e. although) they are in great straits Xn. A. 3, 2, 10.
Concession may also be implied by the circumstantial participle (§ 653, 7).
RELATIVE (AND TEMPORAL) CLAUSES
618147. Relative clauses are introduced by relative pronouns (substantive and adjective) and relative adverbs.
Note. – ἔως means both “while,” “so long as,” and “all the while till” i. e. until: as ἕωσπερ ἐμπνέω... οὗ μὴ παύσομαι so long as I live and breathe, I shall not stop Pl. Ap. 29 d. μέχρι γὰρ τούτου νομίζω χρῆναι κατηγορεῖν, ἕως ἂν θανάτου δόξῃ τῷ φεύγοντι ἄξια εἰργάσθαι for so far do I think one should continue his impeachment, until it shall appear that acts deserving death have been committed by the defendant Lys. 12, 37.
1. Negative Relative Clauses. – A relative clause that states a fact, if negative, takes the negative οὐ (§ 431, 1): other relative clauses (of anticipation, purpose, etc.) take the negative μή (§ 431, 1).
RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH DEFINITE
ANTECEDENT
619. A relative clause whose relative refers to a definite antecedent may have any of the constructions of an independent sentence (statement, question, wish, command, §§ 562–589).
Note. – Such clauses containing a statement in the indicative may imply cause (§ 598) or result (§ 597); if negative, they have οὐ.
620. Relative clauses in which the relative refers to an indefinite antecedent take the same modes as the protases of conditional sentences (§§ 602–610). If negative, they have always μή (§ 431, 1).
621. A relative clause containing the indicative may sometimes imply the protasis of a simple condition (negative μή): as ἃ μὴ οἶδα οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι what (ever) I don't know I don’t even think that I know Pl. Αp. 21 d. οἳ μὴ ἔτυχον ἐν ταῖς τάξεσιν ὄντες, εἰς τὰς τάξεις ἔθεον those who did not happen to be in line ran to their lines Xn. A. 2, 2, 14.
Note. – More commonly such clauses are conceived as general in nature, and so take the subjunctive or the optative according to § 625.
622. Rarely a relative clause containing a past tense of the indicative is so used as to imply the protasis of a condition contrary to fact (§ 606): as καὶ ὁπότερα τούτων ἐποίησεν, οὐδενὺς ἂν τον Ἀβηναίων πλούσιο, ἧσαν and whichever of these he did (i.e. assuming that he had done one of them, § 553, 1) they [the children] would have been as rich as any one of the Athenians Lys. 32, 23.
623148. A relative clause which merely anticipates a future event or a future possibility has the subjunctive with ἄν (cf. the future more vivid condition, § 604): thus, ὅ τι ἂν δέῃ πείσοµαι I will endure whatever may be necessary Xn. A.1, 8, 5. τῷ ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν ἕλησθε πείσοµαι I will obey whatever man you shall elect Xn. A. 1. 3, 15. ἐπειδὰν δὲ διαπράξωµαι ἃ δέοµαι, ἥξω as soon as I shall have accomplished my purpose I shall return Xn. A. 2, 3, 29. περιμένετε ἔστ' ἂν ἐγὼ ἔλθω wait till Ι come Xn. A. 5, 1, 4.
624. A relative clause which anticipates a more remote future possibility has the optative (cf. the future less vivid condition, § 605): thus, ὀκνοίην μὲν ἂν εἰς τὰ πλοῖα ἐμβαίνειν ἃ ἡμῖν δοίη I should hesitate to go on board the vessels which he might give us Xn. A. 1, 3, 17. ἀλλ᾽ ὃν πόλις στήσεις, τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν but whomsoe’er the State might set in station óer us, him we must obey S. Ant. 666.
625149. Relative clauses which suggest a general or repeated possibility have the subjunctive with ἄν when dependent on a present (or future) tense, and the optative when dependent on a past tense (cf. the general conditions §§ 609–610): thus,
Present General. – ἔως μὲν ἂν παρῇ τις, χρῶμαι as long as any one is present, I avail myself of his services Xn. A. 1, 4, 8. ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ’ ἔκλυον (§ 530) αὐτοῦ whosoever obeys the gods, him they most do hear A 218.
Past General. – σφοδρὸς [ἣν Χαιρεφῶν] ἐφ᾽ ὅτι ὁρμήσειε Chaerephon was very enthus,iastic in whatever he undertook Pl. Ap. 21 a. ἐθήρευεν ἀπὸ ἵππου ὁπότε γυμνάσαι βούλοιτο ἑαυτόν τε καὶ τοὺς ἵππους he hunted on horseback whenever he wanted to exercise himself and lis horses Xn. Α. 1, 2, 7. περιεµένομεν οὖν ἑκάστοτε ἕως ἀνοιχθείη τὸ δεσµωτήριον’… ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνοιχθείη, εἰσῆμεν so we waited each time until the prison should be opened ; and when (ever) it was opened we went in Pl. Phaed. 59 d.
Note. – ὅ τι μή and ὅσον μή. – ὅ τι μή and ὅσον μή are used elliptically, like εἰ μή (§ 616, 1), in the meaning except: as οὗ παρεγένοντο ὅ τι μή ὀλίγοι they were not present, with the exception of a few (lit. what was not the few who were present) Th. 4, 94.
626150. Temporal Clauses with Words Meaning “until”. – Temporal clauses introduced by words meaning “until” are sometimes used so as to imply purpose (cf. § 624 and § 625 last example). The suggestion of purpose makes no difference in the mode of the verb, which is regularly the subjunctive with ἄν in connection with a primary tense, and the optative in connection with a secondary tense (§§ 624; 625).
Note. – Rarely, for the sake of vividness (cf. § 674) the subjunctive is used in a temporal clause after a secondary tense: as ἕως ὃ ἂν ταῦτα διαπράξωνται φυλακὴν… κατέλιπε he left a garrison until they [the people] should carry out these measures Xn. Hell. 5, 3, 25.
627151. πρίν. – The temporal conjunction πρίν (in origin a comparative adverb from the root of πρό before) meaning sooner than, before (until) is used with the indicative (619), subjunctive (§§ 623; 625), and optative (§ 624) in the same way as other relative adverbs of time, but usually only after a negative sentence; after an affirmative sentence, πρίν is commonly used with the infinitive (§ 645): thus,
(Indicative) οὔτε τότε… ἰέναι ἤθελε πρὶν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτὸν ἔπεισε and he was not then willing to go until his wife persuaded him Xn. A. 1, 2, 26.
(Subjunctive) δεῖται αὐτοῦ μὴ πρόσθεν καταλῦσαι… πρὶν ἂν αὐτῷ συμβουλεύσηται he desires him not to come to terms before (i.e. until) he shall advise with him Xn. A. 1, 1, 10.
(Optative) ἐδέοντο μὴ ἀπελθεῖν πρὶν ἀπαγάφοι τὸ στράτευμα they wanted him not to go away before (i.e. until) he should lead back the army Xn. A. 7, 7, 57.
(Infinitive) διέβησαν πρὶν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀποκρίνασθαι they crossed before the rest replied Xn. A. 1, 4, 16.
Note. – The adverbs πρόσθεν or πρότερον are sometimes used in the principal clause as forerunners of πρίν (see the second example in § 627). Both πρὶν ἤ and πρότερον ἤ sooner than are sometimes used like πρίν.
VIII · The Infinitive
628. The infinitive is a verbal substantive (originally a dative or a locative case). It retains its verbal character, however, in so far that it has voice and tense, is modified by adverbs (not by adjectives), and takes its object in the same case as a finite verb.
SUBJECT OF THE INFINITIVE
629. Subject Accusative. – The subject of the infinitive, if expressed, is always in the accusative case (§ 342 and note). A predicate substantive or adjective belonging to the subject then agrees with it in case: as τοὺς φυγάδας ἐκέλευσε σὺν αὐτῷ στρατεύεσθαι he bade the exiles take the field with him Xn. A. 1, 2, 2. ὃν ᾤετο πιστόν οἱ εἶναι whom he thought to be faithful to himself Xn. A. 1, 9, 29. νομίζω γὰρ buds ἐμοὶ εἶναι καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους καὶ συμμάχους for I think you are to me both country, friends, and allies Xn. A. 1, 3, 6.
Note. – So also predicate words referring to an indefinite subject (not expressed) stand in the accusative case: as ἂ ἔξεστιν ἀριθμήσαντας… εἰδέναι things which it is possible (for people) to know by counting Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 9.
630. Subject not Expressed. – if the subject of the infinitive is expressed or indicated in connection with the word (or words) on which the infinitive depends, it is not expressed again with the infinitive; as ἔφη ἐθέλειν he said he was willing (but in latin dixit se velle) Xn. A. 4, 1, 27. νομίζει ὑπ' ἐμοῦ ἠδικῆσθαι he thinks he has been wronged by me Xn. Α. 1, 3, 10.
Note. – Exceptions to the rule of § 630 are comparatively rare, but if the subject is again expressed with the infinitive, it of course stands in the accusative (§ 629).
631. Agreement of Predicate Words. – When the subject of the infinitive is expressed or indicated not with the infinitive, but in connection with the word on which the infinitive depends (§ 630), a predicate substantive or adjective commonly stands in the same case with the subject as expressed: thus,
(Nominative) Πέρσης μὲν ἔφη εἶναι he said that he was a Persian Xn. A. 4, 4, 17. τοῦτο δ’ ἐποίει ἐκ τοῦ χαλεπὸς εἶναι he accomplished this by being severe Xn. A. 2, 6, 9.
(Genitive) τῶν φασκόντων δικαστῶν εἶναι of those who say that they are judges Pl. Ap. 41 a. Κύρου ἐδέοντο ὡς προθύμοτάτου πρὸς τὸν πόλεµον γενέσθαι they begged Cyrus to become as zealous as possible toward the war Xn. Hell. 1, 5, 2. i
(Dative) ἔδοξε τοῖς στρατηγοῖς βουλεύσασθαι συλλεγεῖσιν it seemed best to the generals to meet together and consider Xn. A. 4, 8, 9.
(Accusative) πάντας οὕτω διατιθεὶς ἀπεπέμπετο ὥστε αὐτῷ μᾶλλον φίλους εἶναι ἢ βασιλεῖ he sent them all back, so disposing them that they were more friendly to himself than to the King Xn. A. 1, 1, 5.
1. Sometimes, however, the influence of the infinitive causes a predicate noun referring to a genitive or dative (rarely a nominative) to stand in the accusative (cf. § 316): as Ἀθηναίων ἐδεήθησαν σφίσι βοηθοὺς γενέσθαι they wanted the Athenians to come to their assistance Hdt. 6, 100. Ξενίᾷ… ἥκειν παραγγέλλει λαβόντα τοὺς ἄλλους he sent instructions to Xenias to take the rest of the men, and come Xn. A. 1, 2, 1.
USES OF THE INFINITIVE
632. The infinitive has two distinct uses: (1) as a substantive (not in indirect discourse), and (2) in indirect discourse.
Note. – The use of the infinitive (with subject accusative) was developed from its substantive use, thus, ἀγγέλλω Κῦρον νῑκᾶν originally meant I report Cyrus in regard to being victorious, which amounts to saying Ι report that Cyrus is victorious, and (Κῦρον) νῑκᾶν is felt to represent (Κῦρος) νϊκᾷ, the present indicative (cf. § 342, note).
633. Negative with the Infinitive. – The infinitive used as a substantive has regularly as its negative μή (§ 431,1); the infinitive in indirect discourse retains the negative of the direct discourse (usually οὐ, § 431, 2).
634. Personal and Impersonal Construction. – In Greek, as in English, both the personal and the impersonal constructions are found with words of saying and the like. Thus, the Greeks said both Κῦρος λέγεται ἀναβῆναι Cyrus is said to have gone up, and λέγεται Κῦρον ἀναβῆναι it is said that Cyrus went up, but the tendency was to employ the personal construction more freely than in English. Hence some of the Greek personal constructions (especially with δῆλος evident, δίκαιος just, and the like) have to be rendered in English as impersonal: thus, δῆλος ἦν άναβῆναι it was evident that he was distressed (lit. he was evident) Xn. A. 1, 2, 11.
THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE
635. The use of the infinitive soon extended far beyond its original bounds (as a dative or locative case) and it was felt that the infinitive could stand in any case (nominative, genitive, dative, or accusative), but unless it is modified by the article (§ 636) it is often impossible to say definitely in what case the infinitive stands.
636152. Articular Infinitive. – The infinitive may be modified by the neuter of the definite article τό, τοῦ, τῷ (§ 444); when so modified, its substantive character appears even more clearly.
637. Infinitive as Subject. – The infinitive (with or without the article) may stand as the subject of a verb (or as a predicate substantive): as κόσμος καλῶς τοῦτο δρᾶν fo perform this as it should be done is a credit Th. 1, 5. τὸ γάρ τοι θάνατον δεδιέναι… οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἡ δοκεῖν σοφὸν εἶναι μὴ ὄντα for to fear death is nothing else than to seem to be wise when one is not PL Ap. 29 a.
If the infinitive is the subject of a finite verb, it is of course in the nominative case; if it is the subject of an infinitive, it is of course in the accusative case.
1. Infinitive as (Apparent) Subject. – With many impersonal verbs and similar expressions, such as δεῖ or χρή it is necessary, δοκεῖ it seems best, ἔστε it is possible, ἔξεστι it is allowed, πρέπει or προσήκει it is fitting, καλόν ἐστι it is a fine thing, δίκαιον it is right, and the like, the infinitive stands in the relation of subject or quasi-subject (cf. § 305, note): as ὧδε οὖν χρὴ ποιεῖν thus, then we must act Xn. A. 2, 2, 4. τί δεῖ αὐτὸν αἰτεῖν; why must he make demand? Xn. A. 2, 1, 10. ἔξεστων ὁρᾶν it is possible to see Xn. A. 3, 4, 39. ἔδοξεν οὖν αὐτοῖς… προϊέναι so it seemed best to them to proceed Xn. A. 2, 1, 2. δίκαιον γὰρ ἀπόλλυσθαι τοὺς ἐπιορκοῦντας for it is right for perjurers to perish Xn. A. 2, 5, 41. For the personal construction, instead of the impersonal, in examples like the last see § 634.
Here belongs also the infinitive in indirect discourse (§ 646) with passive verbs of saying and thinking, like λέγεται, νοµίζεται, ete. (cf. § 634).
638. Infinitive as Object or Cognate Accusative. – The infinitive with or without the article is used with great frequency as an object (§ 329) or cognate accusative (§ 331). When used as a cognate accusative it is often called the Complementary Infinitive. Examples are: ἤθελον αὐτοῦ ἀκούειν they were willing to listen to him Xn. A. 2, 6, 11. οὗ δυνάµενοι καθεύδειν not being able to sleep Xn. A. 3, 1, 8. οὐκ εἶχον ἱκανὰς [χιμαίρᾱς] εὑρεῖν they had not (the power) to find enough [goats] Xn. A. 3, 2, 12. μανθάνουσιν ἄρχειν τε καὶ ἄρχεσθαι they learn to govern and to be governed Xn. A. 1, 9, 4. ηὕχοντο αὐτὸν εὐτυχῆσαι they prayed for him to have good luck Xn. A. 1, 4, 17. τοὺς μὲν ὁπλῑ́τας αὐτοῦ ἐκέλευσε μεῖναι he bade the hoplites remain on the spot Xn. A. 1, 5, 13. οὐκ ἐκώλὑε βασιλεὺς τὸ Κῡ́ρου στράτευμα διαβαίνειν the King did not hinder Cyrus’ army from crossing Xn. A. 1, 7, 19. διεπρᾱ́ξατο πέντε μὲν στρατηγοὺς ἰέναι he managed to have five generals go Xn. A. 2, 5, 30.
Here belongs also the infinitive in indirect discourse after verbs of saying and thinking (§ 669). For the infinitive with verbs of promising and the like see § 549, 2.
(With the Article) φοβούμενοι οὐχ ἡμᾶς µόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ καταπεσεῖν in fear not only of us, but also of falling off Xn. A. 3, 2, 19.
(With Prepositions) πρὸς τὸ µετρίων δεῖσθαι πεπαιδευµένος trained to having only moderate wants Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 1.
639. Infinitive in the Genitive Case. – The infinitive (usually with the article) may stand in the genitive case: as οἱ δὲ ζῶντες αἴτιοι θανεῖν the living are the cause of his death S. Ant. 1173.
(With the Article) τοῦ πιεῖν ἐπθῡμίᾱ the desire to drink Th. 7, 84. ἀμελήσας τοῦ συλλέγειν πλοῖα having neglected to collect vessels Xn. A. 5, 1, 15. ἄρξαντες τοῦ διαβαίνειν taking the lead in crossing Xn. A. 1, 4, 15.
(With a Preposition) ἀντὶ τοῦ τοῖς πλείοσι πείθεσθαι instead of obeying the majority Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 34.
Note. – For the infinitive with τοῦ expressing purpose (mostly in Thucydides) see § 352, 1, note.
640. Infinitive in the Dative Case. – The infinitive (with or without the article) is often found in the dative case: as τὸ δὲ ἀσφαλὲς καὶ μένειν… καὶ ἀπελθεῖν αἱ νῇες παρέξουσι security both for staying and for going away, our ships will provide Th. 6, 18. Here doubtless are to be classed the infinitive expressing purpose (see § 592) and the infinitive with most adjectives and substantives (see § 641).
(With the Article) Μένων ἠγάλλετο τῷ ἐξαπατᾶν δύνασθαι Menon rejoiced in being able to deceive Xn. A. 2, 6, 26.
(With a Preposition) ἐν γὰρ τῷ κρατεῖν ἐστι καὶ τὸ λαμβάνειν τὰ τῶν ἡττόνων in being victorious is included also the right to take the property of the vanquished Xn. Α. 5, 6, 32.
641. Infinitive with Adjectives and Substantives. – Adjectives (adverbs) and substantives, denoting ability, fitness, power, sufficiency, and the like, and their opposites, may be followed by the infinitive: as δυνατὴν καὶ ὑποξυγίοις πορεύεσθαι ὁδόν a road practicable even for pack animals to travel Xn. A. 4, 1, 24. ὁπόσοι ἱκανοὶ ἦσαν τὰς ἀκροπόλεις φυλάττειν as many as were sufficient to guard the citadels Xn. A. 1, 2, 1. δεινὸς λέγειν clever at speaking Pl. Ap. 17 b. χαλεπὰ εὑρεῖν hard to find Pl. Rep. 412 b. οἷοί τε ἔσεσθε ἡμῖν συμπρᾶξαι you will be able to coöperate with us Xn. A. 5, 4, 9.
ὥρᾶ ἀπιέναι it's time to go away Pl. Ap. 42 a. ἀνάηκη ἐστὶ μάχεσθαι it is necessary to fight Xn. A. 4, 6, 10. ὄκνος ἣν ἀνίστασθαι there was a disinclination to get up Xn. A. 4, 4, 11. θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι a wonder to behold θ 366.
Note. – As in English, the active infinitive is commonly used with adjectives and substantives, even though the meaning may be passive: as ἄξιος θαυμάσαι worth admiring, worthy to be admired Th. 1, 138. CL. in English “a house to let.”
642. Adverbial Use of the Infinitive. – The infinitive (with or without the article) may be used adverbially, like the dative of Respect (§ 390), or the Adverbial Accusative (§ 336): as τὸ δὲ βίᾷ πολϊτῶν δρᾶν ἔφῡν ἀμήχανος but as for acting in defiance of the State, I am too weak for that S. Ant. 79. ὡς… σχολὴ ᾖ ἡμῖν τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι that we may have freedom so far as this man is concerned Xn. A. 1, 6, 9.
1. With the article τό the adverbial infinitive is most frequently found after words denoting hindrance and the like (§ 643); without the article it is most frequently found in certain set phrases (often preceded by ὡς): ὡς εἰπεῖν or ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν as one might say, (ὡς) συνελόντε εἰπεῖν (§ 382, last example) to speak concisely, (ὡς) ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν as it seems to me, ἑκὼν εἶναι willingly (lit. in respect to being willing), ὀλίγου δεῖν or pikpod δεῖν almost (lit. in regard to lacking little).
Note. – The infinitive δεῖν is often omitted from ὀλίγου δεῖν and μϊκροῦ δεῖν, leaving ὀλίγου or μῑκροῦ alone to mean almost: as ὀλίγου ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπελαθόμην Ι almost forgot who I was PL. Ap. 17 a.
643. Construction after Words of Hindering. – Words meaning (or suggesting) hinder may be followed by either (1) the simple infinitive (§ 638), or (2) the infinitive with τοῦ (§ 639), or (3) the simple infinitive with μή (§ 434) or (4) the infinitive with τοῦ μή (§ 434), or (5) the infinitive with τὸ μή (§ 642, 1 and § 434). Thus, he hinders me from speaking may be expressed in Greek by (1) κωλῡ́ει με λέγειν, (2) κωλῡ́ει με τοῦ λέγειν, (3) κωλῡ́ει µε μὴ λέγειν, (4) κωλῡ́ει µε τοῦ μὴ λέγειν, (5) κωλῡ́ει µε τὸ μὴ λέγειν.
Ιf the word of hindering is itself modified by a negative (see § 435), we may have also (6) οὐ κωλῡ́ει µε μὴ οὐ λέγειν, and (7) οὐ κωλῡ́ει µε τὸ μὴ οὐ λέγειν. For other examples see §§ 434–5.
644. Infinitive of Suggestion. – The infinitive may be used independently to suggest an action, but without stating it as a fact. An infinitive so used may suggest a wish (see § 587 note 3), or command (see § 583 note), or it may be used as an exclamation (usually with the article): as τῆς μωρίᾱς᾿ τὸ Δία νοµίζειν Stupidity! to think of having a belief in Zeus! Ar. Nub. 819.
Note. – Some of the so-called independent infinitives, it can be seen, were earlier dependent on words like δός grant (that) or ἔδοξε it was voted (that) and the like.
OTHER USES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE INFINITIVE
645. The infinitive is used with ὥστε (sometimes with ὡς), ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, to denote result (see §§ 595; 596), and with πρίν meaning before (see § 627).
Note.– The infinitive, with or without ὥστε or ὡς (§ 595) is sometimes used with ἤ after a comparative (§ 426, note 5): as νόσημα μᾶῖζον ἤ φέρειν a disease too great to bear S. Ο.Τ. 1293. ἑλάττω ἔχοντα δύναμιν ἢ ὥστε τοὺς φίλους ὠφελεῖν having a force too small to (lit. smaller than so as to) help his friends Xn. Hell. 4, 8, 23.
THE INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
646. When the infinitive is used in indirect discourse, each tense represents the same tense (of the indicative or optative) of the direct discourse (the present including also the imperfect, and the perfect the pluperfect; see §§ 551 and 671). If ἄν was used in the direct discourse, it is retained in the indirect (§ 439): thus, ἔφη ἐθέλειν he said he was willing (i.e. ἐθέλω Ι am willing) Xn. A. 4, 1, 27. ᾿ῑᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι he says that he himself treated the wound (i.e. ἰώμην I treated) Xn. A. 1, 8, 26. οἰόμεθα ἂν καὶ τῇ ἀρετῇ χρῆσθαι we think we could make some use also of our valor (i.e. χρῴμεθα ἄν we could use) Xn. A. 2, 1, 12. λέγεται οἰκοδομῆσαι he is said to have built (i.e. ᾠκοδόμησε he built) Xn. Α. 1, 2, 9. For additional examples see §§ 551 and 671.
647. Infinitive with ἄν. – The infinitive with ἄν usually represents in indirect discourse a potential optative or indicative of the direct discourse (§646), but the infinitive used as a substantive may sometimes take ἄν to give it a potential meaning (cf. § 436): as παντάπασιν ἀπεστερηκέναι… μὴ ἂν ἔτι σφᾶς ἀποτειχίσαι tο have deprived them completely of any possible power of walling them in Th. 7, 6.
VIII · The Participle
648. The participle is a verbal adjective (§ 159, 1), and follows the same principles of agreement as other adjec- tives (§§ 420–423).
649. The uses of the participle may be classed under three heads: Attributive, Circumstantial, and Supplementary, but these uses shade off into one another, and the same participle may sometimes be referred to two classes. Thus, in μαχόμενοι διετέλεσαν they continued fighting, μαχόμενοι is supplementary to διετέλεσαν, but it also denotes the circumstances under which they continued.
A. THE ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE
650. The participle is used to modify a substantive exactly like any other adjective (§ 419): thus, πόλις οἰκουμένη an inhabited city, ὁ παρὼν καιρός the present occasion, ὁ μὴ δαρεὶς ἄνθρωπος (§ 431, 1) the unflogged man.
1. The substantive which a participle modifies may be omitted, and the participle alone then has the value of a substantive (cf. § 424): thus, οἱ παρόντες the persons present, τὸ μέλλον the future (lit. the thing about to be), τὸ θαρσοῦν courage (lit. the thing not afraid) Th. 1. 36. τῶν ἐργασομένων ἐνόντων since there were in the country those who would cultivate it Xn. A. 2, 4, 22. ἔπλει… ἐπὶ πολλὰς ναῦς κεκτηµένους he sailed against men possessed of many ships Xn. Hell. 5, 1, 19.
Note 1. – A participle, like any other adjective (§ 424), used substantively, may sometimes be modified by a genitive, if its verbal force is no longer felt: as βασιλέως προσῄκοντές τινες some relatives of the king Th. 1, 128.
Note 2.– Greek uses the participle much more freely than English does, and the attributive participle must often be rendered in English by a substantive or a relative clause: as οἱ πεπεισμένοι (lit. the persuaded persons) those who have been persuaded or the converts, οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες the inhabitants Xn. A. 1, 5, 5. ὁ τὴν γνώµην ταύτην εἰπών the man who advanced this opinion Th. 8, 68. τὰ δέοντα the duties, etc.
651. Participle as a Predicate Adjective. – The participle, like any other adjective, may stand in the predicate with a copula (§ 307): as οὔτε γὰρ θρασὺς οὔτ' οὖν προδείσᾶς εἰμί for I am neither bold nor timorous S. Ο.Τ. 90. Many other examples are to be seen in the mass of periphrastic forms in the perfect system (§§ 226; 227; 221, 1; 230; 536).
B. THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE
652. The participle may serve to define the circumstances under which an action takes place: as πρὸς δὲ βασιλέα πέµπων ἡξίου sending to the king he demanded Xn. A. 1, 1, 8. συλλέξᾶς στράτευμα ἐπολιόρκει Μπίλητον collecting an army he besieged Miletus Xn. A. 1, 1, 7. ἀκούσᾶσι τοῖς στρατηγοῖς ταῦτα ἔδοξε τὸ στράτευμα συναγαγεῖν when the generals heard this, they decided to marshal their forces Xn. A. 4, 4, 19.
653. In Greek circumstantial participles are many times as frequent as in English, and very often they cannot be properly translated by a corresponding English participle; usually they are best rendered by an English clause or phrase expressing time, means, manner, cause, purpose, condition, concession, or merely an attendant circumstance, as best accords with the Greek context: thus,
1. Τime – ἀκούσ ἂς ταῦτα ἔλεξεν when he had heard this, he said Xn. A. 1, 7, 6. ἔτι παῖς ὤν while still a boy Xn. Α. 1, 9, 9 (see also § 655).
2. Means. – λῃξόμενοι ζῶσι they live by plundering Xn. Cy. 3, 2, 25.
3. Manner. – παρήλαυνον τεταγμένοι they marched by in order Xn. A.1, 2, 16. (Cf. also § 655, 1.)
4. Cause.– ἡ µήτηρ ὑπῆρχε τῷ Kῡ́ρῳ φιλοῦσα αὐτὸν μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν βασιλεύοντα Ἀρταξέρξην Cyrus’ mother took his side, because she loved him more than she did the king Artazerzes Xn. A. 1, 1, 4. ἡξίου ἀδελφὸς dv αὐτοῦ he demanded on the ground that he was his brother Xn. A. 1, 1, 8. (Cf. also § 655, 1 and § 656, 1.)
5. Purpose. – To express purpose the future participle is regularlygused, but the present is sometimes found (cf. § 524): thus, πέμψαι δὲ καὶ προκαταληψεομένους τὰ ἄκρα to send men to occupy the heights in advance Xn. A. 1, 3, 14. ἀνῑ́σταντο oἳ μὲν… λέξοντες ἃ ἐγίγνωσκον, oἳ δὲ… ἐπιδεικνύντες οἴᾱ εἴη ἡ ἀπορίᾷ some arose to tell what they thought, and others (with the purpose of) pointing out what the difficulty was Xn. A. 1, 3, 13. ( Cf. also § 656, 3.)
6. Condition. – o0d¢ χρήματα μὲν λαμβάνων διαλέγοµαι, μὴ λαμβάνων δ᾿οὔ moreover, I do not converse on condition of receiving money, and refrain from conversation if I receive none Pl. Ap. 33 a.
Observe that if a participle implying a condition is negatived, μή is always used (§ 431, 1).
7. Concession (“although”). – μέσον τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ἔχων τοῦ Κῡ́ρου εὐωνύμου ἔξω ἦν although he commanded the center of his own forces, he was beyond Cyrus’ left wing Xn. Α. 1, 8, 13. οὐδὲν ὑπ’ ἐμοῦ ἀδικούμενος… κακῶς ἐποίεις τὴν ἐμὴν χώρᾱν although you were in nowise wronged by me, you did damage to my land Xn. A. 1, 6, 7. (Cf. also § 655, 1 and § 656, 2.)
8. Any Attendant Circumstance. – συλλέξᾱς στράτευμα ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον having collected an army he laid siege to Miletus Xn. A. 1, 1, 7. Such participles are often best rendered in English by a codrdinate verb: as καταπηδήσᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἅρματος τὸν θώρᾶκα ἐνέδυ he leapt down from lis chariot, and put on his breastplate Xn. A. 1, 8, 3.
Note 1.– It is important to remember that these relations (of time, manner, etc, § 653, 1–8) are not expressed by the participle, EY al mor lly ish oot TEN fl aia ea Ar rendered in English in several different ways. Thus, ἐπολέμει ἐκ Χερρονήσον ὁρμώμενος (he waged war, using the Chersonese as a base of operations Xn. Α. 1, 1, 9), taken by itself, might be rendered he waged war while using the Chersonese, etc. (time, § 653, 1) or he waged war by using the Chersonese, etc. (means, § 633, 2) or he waged war, thus, using, etc. (manner, § 653, 3) or he was enabled to wage war because he used, etc. (cause, § 633, 4), or he waged war with the idea of using, etc. (purpose, § 653, 5), or he did wage war, if he used, etc. (condition, § 653, 6), or he waged war although he used, etc. (concession, § 653, 7), or he waged war with the Chersonese as a base of operations (attendant circumstance, § 633, 8); but in every case that form of English translation should be chosen which best suits the Greek context.
Note 2. – Some idiomatic uses of the circumstantial participle are often best rendered by a different idiom in English. Thus, ἀρχόμενος (lit. beginning) is often best rendered at first, in the beginning, τελευτῶν (lit. ending) finally, ἔχων (lit. holding on) persistently, ἀνύσᾶς (lit. having completed) quickly, θαρρῶν boldly, λαθών (lit. escaping notice) secretly, χαίρων (lit. rejoicing) with impunity, κλαίων (lit. weeping) to one’s sorrow, φθάσᾱς (lit. anticipating) before. (Many of these are to be explained as adjectives used with adverbial force, § 425): thus, ὅπερ ἀρχόμενος ἐγὼ ἔλεγον as I said in the beginning PL Ap.24 a. ἄνοιγ' ἀνύσᾶς make haste and open Av. Nub. 181.
Note 3.– Participles like ἔχων having, ἄγων leading, φέρων carrying, χρώμενος using may often be rendered “with”: as ἔχων ὁπλίτᾶς χῑλίους with a thousand hoplites Xn. A.1, 2, 9. ποίᾷ δυνάμει συμμάχῳ χρησάμενοι with what force as allies Xn. A. 2, 5, 13.
Note 4. – The phrases τί (ὅ τι) παθών (lit. having experienced what?), and τί (ὄ τί) μαθών (lit. having learned what?), are best translated “what possessed you to…” (πάσχω) or “what put it in your head to ” (μανθάνω), or loosely “why in the world”: as τί παθόντε λελάσμεθα what has possessed us to forget? A 313.
ADVERBS WITH THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE
654. The relations of time, manner, cause, etc., often implied in the circumstantial participle (§ 653), may be made clearer (1) by means of adverbs modifying the principal verb, or (2) they may be definitely stated by means of adverbs modifying the participle itself.
655. Adverbs Modifying the Principal Verb. – The adverbs εὐθύς straightway, αὐτίκα immediately, ἅμα at the same time, τότε (ἐνταῦθα) then, ἤδη already, εἶτα then, ἔπειτα thereupon, and a few others, modifying the principal verb, often serve to make clearer a temporal relation implied in the participle. Cf. § 653, 1. (The first four are often more closely connected in sense with the participle than with the principal verb): thus, τῷ δεξιῷ κέρᾷ τῶν Ἀθηναίων εὐθὺς ἀποβεβηκότι… ἐπέκειντο they attacked the right wing of the Athenians as soon as it was disem barked (lit. when the right wing was disembarked, they straightway attacked it) Th. 4, 43. ἐμάχοντο ἅμα πορευό µενοι they fought and marched at the same time Xn. A. 6, 3, 5. πολλαχοῦ δή pe ἐπέσχε λέγοντα μεταξύ it often checked me in the very act of speaking Pl. Ap. 40 b. ἐκελευσεν αὐτὸν συνδιαβάντα ἔπειτα οὕτως ἀπαλλάττεσθαι he advised Jim to cross with the rest, and then withdraw Xn. A. 7, 1, 4.
1. In like manner ὅμως nevertheless, οὕτως Thus, εἶτα, or ἔπειτα, with the principal verb, may help a participle implying concession (§ 653, 7), οὕτως may help a participle implying manner (§ 658, 3), and οὕτως or διὰ ταῦτα (τοῦτο) may help a participle implying cause (§ 653, 4): as ἄπειροι ὄντες αὐτῶν… ὅμως ἑτολμήσατε… ἰέναι εἰς αὐτούς although you knew nothing about them, yet yow dared to go against them Xn. A. 3, 2, 16. νοµίζων ἀμείνους καὶ κρείττους πολλῶν βαρβάρων ὑμᾶς εἶναι, διὰ τοῦτο προσέλαβον because I thought you better and braver than many barbarians (for this reason) I enlisted you Xn. A. 1,7, 3.
656153. Adverbs Modifying the Participle. – The following adverbs modify the participle itself:
1. The adverb dre (also οἷον, οἷα) inasmuch as (§ 441 a) gives the participle a causal meaning: thus, ὁ δὲ Κῦρος dre παῖς ὢν… ἤδετο τῇ στολῇ and Cyrus, inasmuch as he was a child, was pleased with the equipment Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 3. ἅτε θεωµένων τῶν ἑταίρων inasmuch as their companions were looking on Xn. A. 4, 8, 28.
2. Καίπερ although (sometimes also καί or καὶ ταῦτα, § 312 note) gives the participle a concessive meaning: thus, καὶ τότε προσεκύνησαν καίπερ εἰδότες ὅτι ἐπὶ θάνατον ἄγοιτο even then they did homage to him, although they knew that he was being led to death Xn. A. 1, 6, 10.
3. Ὡς shows that the participle states the reasons of somebody else without implicating the speaker or writer.
(The context sometimes shows that the reason is only pretended): thus, Πρόξενον… ἐκέλευσε… παραγενέσθαι, ὡς εἰς Πῖσιδας βουλόμενος στρατεύεσθαι, ὡς πρᾱ́γματα παρεχόντων τῶν Πῖσιδῶν τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χώρᾷ he bade Prozenus join him, on the (pretended) ground that he wished to undertake an expedition against the Pisidians, since the Pisidians (as he said) were causing trouble for his territory Xn. A. 1, 1, 11. ταύτην τὴν χώρᾶν ἐπέτρεψε διαρπάσαι τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ὡς πολεμίἂν οὖσαν this country he turned over to the Greeks to plunder since (in his opinion) it was hostile Xn. A. 1, 2, 19. συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον ὡς ἀποκτενῶν he arrested Cyrus with the (avowed) intention of putting him to death Xn. A. 1, 1, 3.
Note. – ὤσπερ as, just as, with the participle (as elsewhere) merely denotés comparison: as κατακείµεθα ὥσπερ ἐξὸν ἡσυχίδν ἄγειν we lie inactive as though it were possible to take οur ease Xn. A. 3, 1, 14. ὥσπερ πάλιν τὸν στόλον Κύρου ποιονµένον as if Cyrus were moving backwards on his expedition Xn. Α. 1, 3, 16. Cf. ὥσπερ ὀργῇ ἐκέλευσε he ordered, just as if in anger Xn. A. 1, 5, 8.
GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE
657. Genitive Absolute. – A substantive (noun or pronoun) and modifying participle having no grammatical connection with the rest of the sentence stand in the Genitive Absolute (§ 369): as ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη οὐδενὸς κωλῡ́οντος he went up on the mountains, no one hindering Xn. A. 1, 2, 22. σπεισαµένου Κῡ́ρου ἐπίστευε μηδὲν ἂν παρὰ τὰς σπονδὰς παθεῖν when Cyrus made a treaty [an enemy] was confident that he should experience nothing contrary to its terms Xn. A. 1, 9, 8.
1. The genitive absolute can seldom be rendered in English by a corresponding nominative absolute; usually it must be translated like other circumstantial participles (§ 658, 1–8) by some phrase or clause which best accords with the Greek context: as ἀνέβη… οὐδενὸς κωλῡ́ovτος he went up, since no one hindered, or without opposition Xn. A. 1, 2, 22. κακῶς γὰρ τῶν ἡμετέρων ἐχόντων, πάντες οὗτοι… βάρβαροι πολεμιώτεροι ἡμῖν ἔσονται for if our mutual relations are unpleasant, all these barbarians will be more hostile to us Xn. A. 1, 5, 16. οὐδὲ μὴν βοηθῆσαι, πολλῶν ὄντων πέρᾶν, οὐδεὶς αὐτοῖς δυνήσεται λελυμένης τῆς γψεφύρἂᾶς moreover, though there be many on the opposite bank, not a single soul will be able to come to their aid if the bridge is destroyed Xn. A. 2, 4, 20.
Note 1.– Substantive not Expressed. –The substantive in the genitive absolute sometimes is not expressed when it can be easily supplied from the context (cf. § 305): as ἐντεῦθεν προϊόντων ἐφιζvero ἴχνῃ ἵππων as they (i.e. the Greeks) were proceeding from that place, there appeared the tracks of horses Xn. A. 1, 6, 1. οὕτω δ᾽ ἐχόντων since (the above-mentioned) things are so Xn. A. 3, 2, 10. ὕοντος while it was raining (cf. § 305) Xn. Hell. 1, 1, 16.
Note 2. – The genitive absolute is sometimes employed when its use is not strictly logical: as ἐκ δὲ τούτου θᾶττον προϊόντων… δρόμος ἐγένετο τοῖς στρατιώταις thereupon, as the soldiers advanced faster and faster, they fell to running Xn. A. 1, 2, 17. διαβεβηκότος ἤδη Περικλέους ἠγγέλθη αὐτῷ… when Pericles had already crossed over, the news was brought to him Th. 1, 114 (cf. also § 661, note 4).
658. Accusative Absolute. – The participle of an impersonal verb having no grammatical connection with the main construction of the sentence stands in the Accusative Absolute (§ 843): as ἀλλὰ τί δὴ, ὑμᾶς ἐξὸν ἀπολέσαι, οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἤλθομεν but why, when it was in our power to destroy you, did we not proceed to do so? Xn. A. 2, 5, 22. οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν οὐδὲ σὺ σαυτὸν, οἷόν τε dv καὶ δυνατόν for we did not save you, nor did you save yourself, although it was possible and practicable Pl. Crit. 46 a. δῆλον γὰρ ὅτι οἶσθα, µέλον γέ σοι for of course you know, since it is a matter of interest to you Pl. Ap. 24 d.
Note. – After ὡς or ὥσπερ (§ 636, 3, and note) the accusative absolute is sometimes found where we should expect the genitive: thus, τοὺς υἱεῖς οἱ πατέρες.… ἀπὸ τῶν πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων εἴργουσιν, ὡς τὴν μὲν τῶν χρηστῶν ὁμιλ ἂν ἄσκησιν οὖσαν τῆς ἀρετῆς fathers keep their sons away from base men with the idea that association witk the good is a training in virtue Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 20. Rarely without a preceding ὡς or ὥσπερ: as δόξαντα δὲ ταῦτα but when this had been decided on Xn. Hell. 3, 2,19.
C. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE
659. The circumstantial participle sometimes forms an essential part of the predicate, which, without it, would hardly be complete. A participle so used is called Supplementary. Verbs whose meaning is of a general nature may take a supplementary participle to define a particular thing to which their action relates.
The supplementary participle may belong either to the subject or the object, – as shown by its agreement (§ 648).
I. The Supplementary Participle not in Indirect Discourse
660. The supplementary participle may be used with words meaning begin, continue, endure, cease, happen, escape notice, anticipate, and the like: ἄρχεται ἀπολείπουσα it [the soul] begins to leave Xn. Cy. 8, 7, 26. μαχόμενοι διετέλεσαν they continued fighting (i.e. “fought continuously”) Xn. A. 4, 8, 2. οὕποτε ἐπαυόμην ἡμᾶς μὲν οἰκτέρων I never ceased pitying ourselves Xn. A. 3, 1, 19.
Note. – With some verbs, especially τυγχάνω (poetic κυρῶ) happen, λανθάνω escape notice, φθάνω anticipate, the supplementary participle is often best rendered in English by a finite verb, while the finite Greek verb is translated as an adverbial modifier: thus, παρὼν ἐτύγχανε he was by chance present, or he happened to be present Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. τρεφόμενον ἐλάνθανεν αὐτῷ τὸ arpdreupa the army was secretly supported for him (lit. escaped notice being supported) Xn. A. 1, 1, 9. φθάνουσιν ἐπὶ τῷ ἄκρῳ γενόµενοι τοὺς πολεµίους they reached the height before the enemy (lit. they anticipated the enemy in reaching the height) Xn. A. 3, 4, 49. So likewise δῆλος ἦν ἦν ἀνῑώμενος he was evidently disturbed Xu. A. 1, 2, 11 (§ 634).
1. Verbs expressing emotion (vezation, anger, trouble, shame, joy, displeasure, or disgust, and the like) may be supplemented by a participle implying the cause (§ 653, 4): thus, ἧδομαι… ἀκούων σου φρονίμους λόγους I am pleased at hearing sensible remarks from you Xn. A. 2, 5, 16. ἐλεγχόμενοι ἤχθοντο they were vexed at being exposed Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 47. οὔτε νῦν µοι µεταμέλει οὕτως ἀπολογησαμένῳ and I do not now repent of having made (i.e. “because Ι made”) such a defense Pl. Ap. 38 e. καὶ τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ αἰσχῡ́νομαι λέγων and I am not ashamed to say this Xn. Cy. 5, 1, 21.
Note. – With some of the verbs which take the supplementary participle the infinitive may also be used, but commonly with a difference of meaning (cf. § 661 note 3), – the participle implying that the action takes place, while the infinitive implies that it has not yet taken place (and perhaps never will occur): thus, αἰσχύνομαι (or αἰδοῦμαι) λέγων I am ashamed to say (what Ι am saying), αἰσχύνομαι λέγειν I am ashamed to say (and so shall not say).
II. THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
661. When the participle is used in indirect discourse (after words meaning know, perceive, hear, remember, forget, appear, announce, etc., § 669, 3) each tense represents the same tense of the indicative or optative of the direct discourse (§ 551), the present representing also the imperfect indicative, and the perfect the pluperfect indicative. If ἄν was used in the direct discourse, it is retained also in the indirect (§ 439).
(The participle may belong either to the subject or object, – as shown by its agreement, § 648): thus, οὐ γὰρ ἤδεσαν αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα for they did not know that he was dead (i.e. τέθνηκεν) Xn. A. 1, 10, 16. ἤκουσε Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾷ ὄντα he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (i.e. ἐστι) Xn. A. 1, 4, 5. ἴσθι μέντοι ἀνόητος ὤν know, however, that you are a fool (i.e. ἀνόητος εἶ) Xn. A. 2, 1, 13. αὐτῷ Κῦρον ἐπιστρατεύοντα πρῶτος ἤγγειλα I was the first to announce to him that Cyrus was marching against him (i.e. ἐπιστρατεύει) Xn. A. 2, 3, 19. ἐπιβουλεύων ἡμῖν φανερός ἐστιν he is plainly plotting against us (i.e. ἐπιβουλεύει, cf. § 634) Xn. A. 3, 2, 20. εὑρίσκω δὲ ὧδε ἄν γινόμενα ταῦτα εἰ λάβοις τὴν ἐμὴν σκευήν I find that this would thus, come to: pass if you should take my garments (i.e. γίνοιτο ἄν) Hdt. 7, 15. (Other examples in § 551 and § 671.)
Note 1. – The participle in indirect discourse is plainly, in origin, a circumstantial participle. Thus, such a sentence as ἔγνων γάρ μιν… οἰωνὸν ἐόντα for I knew him being, as he was, a bird of omen ο 532 (in which μιν is the object of ἔγνων, and ἐόντα a circumstantial participle agreeing with μιν), soon came to be felt to mean “I knew the fact of his being (i.e. that he was) a bird of omen”. With this meaning established it is but a slight step to such expressions as ἡμεῖς ἀδύνατοι ὁρῶμεν ὄντες we see that we are unable (“being unable, we see that fact”), where the participle may truly be said to represent ἐσμέν.
Hence it cannot always be determined with certainty whether a participle is, or is not, in indirect discourse, but the context will usually decide. With some verbs (ἀκούω hear, πυνθάνοµαι, perceive) the participle in indirect discourse is regularly in the accusative, while the ordinary participle with these verbs stands in the genitive: as ὡς ἐπύθοντο τῆς Πύλου κατειλημμένης when they heard of the capture of Pylus Th. 4, 6. ὅτι πύθοιτο… τὸ Πλημῡ́ριον… ἑαλωκός that he had heard that Plemmyrium had been captured Th. 7, 31.
Note 2. – Construction with σύνοιδα.– When σύνοιδα or συγγιγνώσκω be conscious is used with a reflexive pronoun the participle may be either nominative, agreeing with the subject, or dative, agreeing with the reflexive pronoun: as ἐγὼ γὰρ δὴ οὔτε μέγα οὔτε σμικρὸν ξύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ σοφὸς ὤν for I am not conscious to myself of being wise in either great or small degree Pl. Ap. 21 b. ἐμαυτῷ γὰρ ξυνῄδη οὐδὲν ἐπισταμένῳ for I was conscious to myself of possessing no knowledge PL Αp. 22 d.
Note 3. – Infinitive instead of Participle. – Some of the verbs which regularly have the participle in indirect discourse (§ 661) are used also with the infinitive with little, if any, difference of meaning (cf. § 660, 1 note): as ἀκούω δὲ καὶ ἄλλα ἔθνῃ πολλὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι I hear that there are also many other such nations Xn. A. 2,5, 13. φαίνομαι appear with the participle usually means to appear to be (what one is), and with the infinitive to appear to be (what one perhaps is not): as εὔνοος ἐφαίνετο ἐών he was plainly well-disposed Hdt. 7, 173. κλαίειν ἐφαίνετο he appeared to be weeping (but really was not) Xn. Syn. 1, 15.
(But when with these verbs an object infinitive (§ 638) is used, the meaning is of course different (cf. § 660, 1, note) as μάθον ἔμμεναι ἐσθλός I have learned to be brave Z 114. μεμνήσθω ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς εἶναι let him remember to be a brave man Xn. A. 3, 2, 39).
Note 4. – ὡς with the Participle in Indirect Discourse. – With the participle in indirect discourse ὡς as may be used with the same meaning as with any circumstantial participle (§ 656, 3), but it is often hard to render in English: thus, δῆλος ἦν Kipos ὡς σπεύδων Cyrus made it evident that he was in haste Xn. A. 1, 5, 9 (but δῆλος ἦν σπεύδων was evidently in haste). So the genitive absolute with ὡς is sometimes used as a practical equivalent of the participle in indirect discourse (sometimes even with verbs which could not take such a participle, cf. § 657, note 2): as ὡς πολέμου ὄντος παρ’ ὑμῶν ἀπαγγελῶ; shall 1 report from you (on the assumption) that there is war? Xn. A. 2, 1, 21. ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς, οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε (on the assumption) that I am going wherever you go you can make up your minds (ice “be sure that I am going wherever you go”) Xn. A. 1, 3, 6.
662. Ἄv with the Participle. – The adverb ἄν may be used with the participle, not in indirect discourse, to give it a potential meaning (cf. § 436): thus, εἰς δὲ τὸ πόλισµα ἄν γενόμενον οὐκ ἐβούλοντο στρατοπεδεύεσθαι but the soldiers were unwilling to encamp on ground which might be made a city (i.e. ὃ ἂν γένοιτο § 563) Xn. A. 6, 4, 7. ῥᾷδίως ἂν ἀφεθεὶς… προείλετο μᾶλλον τοῖς νόµοις ἐμμένων ἀποθανεῖν although he might easily have been acquitted, he preferred to abide by the laws and be put to death (i.e. ἀφέθη ἄν, § 565) X. Mem. 4, 4, 4. αἰτεῖ αὐτὸν εἰς δισχϊλίους ξένους… ὡς οὕτω περιγενόµενος ἂν τῶν ἀντιστασιωτῶν he asked him for two thousand mercenaries on the ground that he could thus, get the better of his opponents Xn. A. 1, 1, 10.
VIII · The Verbal Adjectives
THE VERBAL IN -τέος
663. The verbal adjective in –τέος, –τέα, –τέον (§ 235), is passive in meaning, and expresses necessity (like the Latin gerundive). It is used with a copula, εἰμί (§ 307), in either a personal or an impersonal construction.
Note. – The copula (ἐστί, εἰσί) is often omitted (§ 308).
664. Personal Construction. – In the personal construction the verbal agrees with the subject in gender, number, and case: as ποταμὸς δ᾿ εἰ μέν τις καὶ ἄλλος ἄρα ἡμῖν ἐστι δια βατέος οὐκ οἶδα whether we must cross any other river I do not know Xn. A. 2, 4, 6. ὠφελητέδ σοι ἡ πόλις ἐστίν the State must be aided by you Xn. Mem. 3, 6, 3.
665. Impersonal Construction. – In the impersonal construction (which is the more common) the verbal stands in the nominative neuter (usually singular, but sometimes plural), and takes an object (or cognate accusative) in the same case which would follow any other form of the same verb: thus, τὴν πόλιν ὠφελητέον the State must be aided Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 28. τῶν βοσκημάτων ἐπιμελητέον the flocks and herds must be taken care of Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 28. πορευτέον ὃ ἡμῖν τοὺς πρώτους σταθμοὺς ὡς ἂν δυνώμεθα μακροτάτους we must make the first days’ marches as long as we can Xn. A. 2, 2, 12. οὓς οὐ παραδοτέα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐστίν who must not be surrendered to the Athenians Th. 1, 86.
Note. – Observe that verbals of intransitive verbs can be used in the impersonal construction only.
666. Agent with Verbals in -τέος. – The agent (i.e. the person on whom the necessity rests) with verbals in –τέος stands regularly in the dative case (§ 380).
Note. – The accusative of the agent is sometimes found with the impersonal construction (§ 665). It seems to denote rather the person to whom the necessity extends rather than on whom it rests: as οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ φαμὲν ἑκόντας ἀδικητεόν εἶναι; do we say that it in no way devolves on us to do wrong willingly? Pl. Crit. 49 a.
THE VERBAL IN –τός
667. The verbal adjective in –τός, –τή, –τόν (§ 235, 2), denotes both what has been done and (more often) what may be done: as ἂρ' οὖν βιωτὸν ἡμῖν ἐστι; is life endurable for us? PL. Orit. 47 ο.
Many verbals in –τός have acquired an independent existence as adjectives, as θαυμαστός (admired, admirable) wonderful.
VIII · Indirect Discourse
(Oratio Obligua)
668. A direct quotation repeats the exact words of the speaker: as Καὶ ταῦτ', ἔφη, ποιήσω “This, too, I will do,” said he; τί ποιήσωµεν, λέγετε “What shall we do?” you say.
An indirect quotation adapts the words of the speaker to the construction of the sentence in which they stand: as ἔφη καὶ ταῦτα ποιῄσειν he said that he would do this also, ἠρωτήσατε ὅ τι ποιήσαιτε you asked what you should do.
669154. Indirect discourse is introduced by some word or expression meaning say, know, think, perceive, and the like (verba sentiend! et declarandi).
1. Of the three common verbs meaning say, when used to introduce indirect discourse
φημέ is followed by the infinitive,
εἶπον is followed by ὅτι or ὡς with a finite verb,
λέγω admits either construction, but in the active voice it is more often followed by ὅτι or ὡς and a finite verb.
Note. – When εἶπον is used with the infinitive it regularly means command, order, advise: thus, elme… στρατηγοὺς μὲν ἑλέσθαι ἄλλους he advised them to close other generals Xn. A. 1, 3, 14.
2. Most verbs meaning think or believe (νομίζω, οἴομαι, ἡγοῦμαι, δοκῶ seem, and the like) are followed by the infinitive.
3. Most verbs meaning know, perceive, hear (οἵδα, αἰσθάνοµαι, ἀκούω, also ἀγγέλλω announce, δῆλός εἰμι be evident, and the like) are more Irequently Iollowed by the participle (§ 661), but any of them may take ὅτι or ὡς with a finite mode, and some of them may take the infinitive (§ 646) with little, if any, difference of meaning (cf. roughly in English “1 know of its being good,” “Ι know that it is good”, “Ι know it to be good”).
For the future infinitive after verbs of promising, hoping, and the like, see § 549, 2.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE
670. In changing from direct to indirect discourse, the MODE may be changed, but not the TENSE.
1. Verbs may be changed to the optative only after a secondary tense (§ 517). Only a principal verb of the direct discourse may be changed to the infinitive or participle (§ 671).
2. If the adverb ἄν (§§ 436–439) was used in the direct discourse, it is retained also in the indirect, except when a dependent subjunctive with ἄν is changed to the optative after a secondary tense (§ 439).
3. The same negative (οὐ or μή) which stood in the direct discourse is retained in the indirect (§ 431, 2).
PRINCIPLES OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE (IN DETAIL)
THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE
671. After a word which takes the infinitive or participle (§ 669, 2–3) the principal verb in indirect discourse is changed to the infinitive or participle of the same tense, the present including also the imperfect, and the perfect the pluperfect (see § 551). If ἄν was used in the direct discourse, it is retained also in the indirect: thus, ἀπιέναι φησίν he says he is going away (i.e. ἄπειμι Ι am going away) Xn. Α. 2, 2, 1. ἔφη βούλεσθαι ἐλθεῖν he said that he wanted to go (i.e. βούλομαι ἐλθεῖν I want to go Xn. A. 1, 3, 20. οὗ μεμνήσεσθαί σέ φασιν they say you will not remember (i.e. οὗ μεμνήσῃ you will not remember) Xn. A. 1, 7, 5. οὐ γὰρ ἤδεσαν αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα for they did not know that he was dead (i.e. τέθνηκεν he is dead) Xn. A. 1, 10, 16. σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν ἂν οἶμαι εἶναι τῑ́μιος in your company I think I should be honored (i.e. εἴην ἄν I should be) Xn. Α. 1, 3, 6. ὁρῶ δὲ καὶ σοὶ τούτων δεήσον and I see that you, too, will have need of these (i.e. δεήσει there will be need) Xn. Mem. 2, 6, 29.
Note. – Sometimes a relative or temporal clause is felt to be of equal importance with the principal clause, and so has the infinitive where we might expect a finite mode: as… ὅτι πολλοὺς φαίη Ἀριαῖος εἶναι Πέρσᾱς ἑαυτοῦ βελτίους, οὓς οὐκ ἂν ἀνασχέσθαι αὐτοῦ βασιλεύοντος that Ariaeus said there were many Pérsians better than himself, who would not endure his being king Xn. Α. 2, 2, 1.
672. After a primary tense (§ 517) all verbs of indirect discourse, unless changed to the infinitive or participle (according to § 671), are retained (with change of person, if necessary) in the mode and tense of the direct discourse: thus, λέγει δ᾿ ὡς ὑβριστής εἰμι he says that Ι am an insolent person (i.e. ὑβριστὴς εἶ you are an insolent person) Lys. 24, 15. οὓς οἶδα ὅ τι ἄν τις χρήσαιτο αὐτοῖς Ι don't know what use anybody could make of them (i.e. τὸ ἄν τις χρήσαιτο what use could anybody make?) Xn. A. 3, 1, 40. βουλεύομαί γε ὅπως σε ἀποδρῶ I am planning how I can run away from you (i.e. πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ; how shall I run away, deliberative subjunctive, § 577) Xn. Cy. 1, 4, 13.
OPTATIVE
673155. After a secondary tense (§ 517) any indicative not changed to the infinitive or participle (§ 671), or any subjunctive of the direct discourse, may be changed to optative of the same tense, unless the change would cause ambiguity: thus, (Optative for the Indicative) ἀπήγγελλεν ὅτι σπένδοιτο he announced that he made a truce (i.e. σπένδοµαι I make a truce) Xn. A. 2, 3, 9. τοῖς δὲ ὑποψείᾷ μὲν ἦν ὅτι ἄγοι πρὸς βασιλέα the others had a suspicion that he was leading them against the King (i.e. ἄγει is leading) Xn. A. 1, 3, 21. ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἡ ὀδὸς ἔσοιτο πρὸς βασιλέᾶ μέγαν he said that the advance would be against the great King (i.e. ἔσται will be) Xn. A. 1, 4, 11. εἶπεν ὅτι Δέξιππον μὲν οὐκ ἐπαινοίη εἰ ταῦτα πεποιηκὼς εἴη he said that he did not approve Dexippus if he had done this (i.e. οὓς ἑπαινῶ, εἰ πεποίηκε I do not approve if he has done this) Xn. A. 6, 6, 25.
Optative for a dependent Subjunctive (ἄν disappearing, § 670, 2) ἡγεῖτο γὰρ ἅπαν ποιήσειν αὐτὸν, εἴ τις ἀργύριον διδοίη for he thought that [Theognis] would do anything, if anybody offered him money (i.c. ἐάν τις διδῷ if anybody offers) Lys. 12, 14. ὤμοσεν Ἀγεσιλᾱ́ῳ εἰ σπείσαιτο ἕως ἔλθοιεν οὓς πέμψεειε πρὸς βασιλέα ἀγγέλους, διαπράξεσθαι, κ.τ.λ. he swore to Agesilaus that if he would make a truce until the messengers that he should send to the King should arrive, he would bring it about, etc. (i.e. ἐᾱ́ν σπείσῃ ἕως ἂν ἔλθωσιν οὓς ἂν πέμψεω if you will make a truce until the messengers that I send arrive) Xn. Ages. 1, 10.
Indirect Questions. –
Optative for the Indicative.
– ἤρετο... εἴτις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether there was anybody wiser than I (i.c. ἔστε τις is there anybody?) PL Ap. 21 a. ἠρώτησεν εἰ ἤδη ἀποκεκριμένοι εἶεν he asked if they had already given their answer (i.e. ἀποκέκρσθε have you given your answer?) Xn. A. 2, 1, 15.
Optative for the (Deliberative) Subjunctive.
– ἐβουλεύετο… εἰ πέµποιέν τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν he deliberated whether they should send some, or whether all should go (i.e. πότερον πέμπωμεν… ἢ ἴωμεν had we better send or go?) Xn. A. 1, 10, 5.
674. The change to the optative mode after a secondary tense (§ 673) is never obligatory, and, for the sake of vividness, an indirect quotation of this sort can always be expressed in the mode employed by the original speaker. Not infrequently both forms of quotation are found in the same sentence: as οὗτοι ἔλεγον ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς ἐν τῷ σταθμῷ εἴη these said that Cyrus was dead, and that Ariaeus had fled, and was at the halting place Xn. A. 2, 1, 3.
675. In order to avoid ambiguity (§ 673), the following forms of expression are not changed to the optative after a secondary tense:
1. The imperfect and pluperfect indicative are seldom changed to the optative in indirect discourse, since if they were changed to the present and perfect optative respectively, it could not be told that they did not represent the present or perfect indicative or subjunctive of the direct discourse: thus, εἶχε γὰρ λέγειν καὶ ὅτι μόνοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων βασιλεῖ συνεµάχοντο ἐν Πλαταιαῖς, καὶ ὅτι ὕστερον οὐδεπώποτε στρατεύσαιντο ἐπὶ βασιλέα for he was able to say that they alone of the Greeks had fought on the side of the King at Plataeae, and that never since then had they made a hostile move against him (observe that the imperfect, συνεµάχοντο for συνεμαχόμεθα of the direct discourse, remains unchanged, while the aorist, στρατεύσαιντο for ἐστρατευσάμεθα, is changed to the optative) Xn. Hell. 7, 1, 34.
Note. – Rarely, when no possible ambiguity could arise, an imperfect indicative is changed to the present optative (§ 673): as ἔλεγον ὅτι κατίδοιεν στράτευμα, καὶ νύκτωρ πολλὰ πυρὰ φαίνοιτο they said that they had caught sight of an army, and that al night many watch fires had been visible (i.e. κατείδοµεν we caught sight of, aovist, and ἐφαίνετο were visible, imperfect) Xn. A. 4, 4, 9. Still more rare is the use of the perfect optative to represent the pluperfect indicative.
2. The potential indicative with ἄν (§ 565) cannot be changed to the optative in indirect discourse, since then it could not be distinguished from the potential optative (§563): as ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐς ἄν ποτε οὕτω μῶροι ἦσαν… εἰ ᾖδεσαν they said in their defense that they should never have been so foolish if they had known (i.e. οὐκ ἂν μεν, εἰ ᾖσμεν we should not have been, if we had known, § 606; whereas οὐκ ἄν εἶεν, εἰ εἰδεῖεν would represent οὐκ ἂν εἶμεν, εἰ εἰδεῖμεν we should not be, if we should know, § 605) Xn. Hell. 5, 4, 22.
3. The aorist indicative in a subordinate clause is not changed in indirect discourse, since if it were changed to the aorist optative, the optative might be thought to represent an aorist subjunctive of the direct discourse: thus, ἔλεγον ὡς ὁ Ξενοφῶν οἴχοιτο ὡς Σεύθην… ἄ ὑπέσχετο αὐτῷ ληψρμενος they said that Xenophon had gone to Seuthes to receive what he had promised him (the optative ὑπόσχοιτο would mean what he might promise him, representing ἃ ἄν ὑπόσχηται (§ 673) of the direct discourse) Xn. Α. 7, 7, 55.
676156. Inserted Statements of Fact. – Statements or explanations of fact in the indicative mode may be inserted by the writer, even though the rest of the sentence stands in indirect discourse: as ἐκέλευσε σὺν αὐτῷ στρατεύεσθαι, ὑποσχόμενος: αὐτοῖς, εἰ καλῶς καταπρᾱ́ξειεν ἐφ' ἃ ἐστρατεύετο, μὴ πρόσθεν παύσεσθαι πρὶν, κτλ., he bade them join his expedition, promising them that if he should successfully accomplish the object for which (as 1 say) he was making the expedition, not to stop until, etc. Xn. A. 1, 2, 2. ἐν πολλῇ δὴ ἀπορίᾷ ἦσαν οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐννοούμενοι μὲν ὅτι ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως θύραις ἦσαν the Greeks were naturally in great perplexity, reflecting on the fact that they were (as I say) at the King's gates Xn. A. 3, 1, 2.
677. Implied Indirect Discourse. – In Greek (as in Latin) a clause expressing the thought of another person may take the construction of indirect discourse (i.e. the optative after a secondary tense) although not formally introduced by any words of saying, thinking, or the like: οἳ & ὤκτῖρον εἰ ἁλώσοιντο others pitied them if they should be captured (i.e. εἰ ἁλώσονται if they are going to be captured) Xn. A. 1, 4, 7. ἐστρατεύσαμεν δὲ ἐπ' αὐτὸν ὡς… ἀποκτενοῦντες, εἰ δυναίµεθα but we have proceeded against him with the avowed intention of killing him if we could (i.e. ἐᾱ́ν δυνώµεθα if we can) Xn. A. 3, 1, 17. σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο, ἕως ἀπαγγελθείη τὰ λεχθέντα they made a truce (which they agreed should last) until what had been said should be reported (i.e. ἕως ἂν ἀπαγγελθῇ until it is reported) Xn. Hell. 3, 2, 20.
It is on this principle that the optative is used in final clauses dependent on a secondary tense (§§ 590–594).
SUMMARY OF THE USAGE OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE
678. For the sake of completeness for reference a summary of the regular usages of indirect discourse is here given:
| OPTATIVE (after secondary tenses)157 | |
| In Indirect Discourse | Of Direct Discourse |
| Pres. opt. may represent | Pres. indic. (independent or dependent) |
| Pres. subj. w. ἄν (dependent) | |
| Pres. (interrog.) subj. (independent) | |
| Aorist opt. may represent | Aorist indic. (independent) |
| Aorist subj. w. ἄν (dependent) | |
| Aorist (interrog.) subj. (independent) | |
| Perf. opt. may represent | Pert, indic. (independent or dependent) |
| Perf. subj. w. ἄν (dependent) | |
| Perf. (interrog.) subj. (independent) | |
| Fut. opt. represents | Fut. indic. (independent or dependent) |
| INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE | |
| In Indirect Discourse | Of Direct Discourse |
| Pres. infin. or partic. = | Pres. indic. (independent) or Imperf. indic. (independent) |
| Pres. infin. or partic, w. ἄν = | Pres. opt. w. ἄν (independent) or Imperf. indic, w. ἄν (independent) |
| Aorist infin. or partic. = | Aorist indic, (independent) |
| Aorist infin. or partic. w. ἄν = | Aorist indic. w. ἄν (independent) or Aorist opt. w. ἄν (independent) |
| Perf. infin. or partic. = | Perf. indic. (independent) or Pluperf. indic. (independent) |
| Perf. infin. or partic. w. ἄν = | Perf. opt. w. ἄν (independent) or Pluperf. indic. w. ἄν (independent)158 |
| Fut. infin. or partic. = | Fut. indic. (independent) |
Note. The imperative is regularly represented in indirect discourse by the substantive infinitive (§ 638) dependent on a word meaning command, order, or the like: as ἤκειν παραγγέλλει he bids him come (i.e. ἧκε come) Xn. A. 1, 2, 1. Rarely can it be said that the imperative is changed to the infinitive in indirect discourse: as ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν he told him not to be alarmed (i.e. θάρρει don't be alarmed) Xn. A. 1, 3, 8.
Appendices
IX · A. Versification
679. Greek verse was dependent on the quantities (§§ 52–54) of the syllables, and not, like English, on word-accent or on rhythme.
680. Kinds of Poetry. – Greek poetry in general may be grouped under two heads: (1) that which was recited (Recitative), and (2) that which was sung (Lyric), but it should always be remembered that recited poetry was developed from poetry composed to be sung.
Note.– The Doric of the Drama. – The Lyric portions of the Attic drama, out of regard for its Doric origin, were regularly composed in a conventional Doric dialect, formed by writing a for η in all words in which the Attic 7 represents an original a (§ 15): as
ἔκλνον φωνᾶν, ἔκλυον δὲ βοᾱ̀ν
τᾶς δυστᾱ́νου. – E. Med. 131.
681. Metre (µέτρον measure) is the measurement of verse by feet, lines, strophes, etc.
682. In treating of metre it 3s customary and convenient to employ certain arbitrary signs as follows:
1. ◡ indicates a short syllable (also called a mora, assumed to be equal to ♪).
2. – indicates a long syllable (= two morae, or♩).
3. ﹂ (triseme) indicates a long syllable prolonged to equal three morae (i.e. –◡ or ♩.)
4. ⏘ (tetraseme) indicates a long syllable prolonged to equal four morae (i.e. – – or 𝅗𝅥 ).
5. ˃ (irrational syllable) indicates a long syllable used in the place where a short normally occurs.
6. ◡◡ indicates two short syllables used in the place where one short normally occurs: thus, –◡◡ (cyclic dactyl) indicates a dactyl used as an equivalent of a troches –◡ (§ 705); so also ◡◡– (cyclic anapaest) indicates an anapaest used in iambic rhythm. (These are also written –◡◡ and ◡◡–).
7. | | short perpendicular lines are used to indicate the divisions between the feet (§ 683).
8. || indicates the divisions between cola (§ 686).
9. ˄ indicates a pause at the end of a verse equal to one mora (◡).
10. ˄̄ indicates a pause at the end of a verse equal to two morae (–).
(So also ﹂˄ indicates a pause of three morae, and ⏘˄ of four morae.)
11. 𝄓 standing below the line is used to indicate a caesura (§ 690).
A comma (,) is sometimes used for the same purpose.
12. # is used to indicate a diaeresis (§ 690).
13. ⋮is used to indicate anacrusis (§ 706).
FEET
683. A group of syllables having a fixed metrical form is called a foot. The most common kinds of feet are the following:
| Feet of three morae (3/8 time) | |||
| Trochee | – ◡ | ♩♪ | λεῖπε |
| lambus | ◡ – | ♪♩ | λέγω |
| Tribrach | ◡ ◡ ◡ | ♪ ♪ ♪ | λέγετε |
| Feet of four morae (2/4 time) | |||
| Dactyl | – ◡ ◡ | ♩♪ ♪ | λείπομεν |
| Anapaest | ◡ ◡ – | ♪ ♪♩ | λεγέτω |
| Spondee | – – | ♩♩ | λείπων |
| Feet of five morae (5/8 time) | |||
| Cretic | – ◡ – | ♩♪♩ | λειπέτω |
| Bacchius | ◡ – – | ♪♩♩ | λιποιμην |
| Feet of six morae (3/4 time) | |||
| Ionic a minore | ◡ ◡ – – | ♪ ♪♩♩ | έλελοίπη |
| Ionic a maiore | – – ◡ ◡ | ♩♩♪ ♪ | λειπώμεθα |
| Choriambus | – ◡ ◡ – | ♩♪ ♪♩ | λειπομένων |
1. Many other kinds of feet159 are mentioned by the ancient grammarians, but they may all be explained as variations of the forms already described (cf. 685).
684. Thesis and Arsis. – That part of the foot on which the ictus or rhythmical accent falls is called the Thesis; the rest of the foot is called the Arsis.
685. Substitution. – In many kinds of verse two short syllables (◡ ◡) may be substituted for a long (_), or a long syllable may take the place of two short syllables.
Note. When a long syllable in the thesis is resolved into two short ( 685), the ictus properly belongs to the two, but is usually placed on the first.
COLA
686. Colon. – a group or feet (never more than six) is called a Colon, or a Rhythmical Series.
1. A colon of two feet is called a Dipody, of three feet a Tripody, of four feet a Tetrapody, of five feet a Pentapody, of six feet a Hexapody.
2. But trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic rhythms are measured not by single feet but by the dipody; hence four feet of such a rhythm form a Dimeter, six feet a Trimeter, and eight feet a Tetrameter.
THE VERSE
687. The Verse. – A verse is composed of one, two, or even three cola (§ 686), and is usually written and printed as a single line.
688. Syllaba Anceps. – The last syllable of any verse may be counted as long or short, as the rhythm may demand, without any regard to its actual quantity.
Note. –In the metrical schemes given below the existence of the syllaba anceps is taken for granted.
1. Hiatus (§ 42) is allowed only at the end of a verse (but of. § 2 a).
689. Catalexis. – A verse in which the last foot is incomplete is said to be Catalectic (καταληκτικός stopping short). A verse in which the last foot is complete is called Acatalectic.
1. A part or the whole of the last arsis is omitted in catalexis. If the omitted arsis formed the last part of the foot its place is filled by the pause (˄, 682, 9–10); if it formed the first part of the foot its place is filled by prolonging ( § 682, 3–4) the thesis of the preceding foot: as│◡ ∟́ ∟́│ for│◡ _ ◡ _│.
690. Caesura and Diaeresis. – A Caesura (lit. cutting) occurs whenever a word ends inside a foot. A Diaeresis occurs when the end of a word coincides with the end of a foot.
1. The principal caesura or The Caesura is one which marks also a break in the sense, and which occurs repeatedly at a fixed point in the verse.
Note. In antiquated language a caesura in the second foot is sometimes called tritkemimercd, because it comes after three half-feet (τριθ-ημι-μερής of three half-portions), a caesura in the third foot penthemimeral, etc.
For the Masculine and Feminine Caesuras see § 701, note.
STROPHE AND SYSTEM
691. Strophe. – A group of lyric verses recurring in fixed form is called a Strophe. An Antistrophe is a corresponding strophe immediately following.
Strophe and Antistrophe are sometimes followed by an Epode (not metrically corresponding).
692. System. – Verses are sometimes arranged in a system, in which the syllaba anceps and hiatus are allowed only at the end. Such a system may be regarded as one long verse. For examples see §§ 696; 703, 2.
RHYTHMS
693. Rhythms are named (trochaic, iambic, dactylic, etc.) from their fundamental feet.
TROCHAIC RHYTHMS
694. Trochaic rhythms are usually measured by dipodies (§ 686, 2) consisting of two trochees │_́ ◡ _ ◡│, and they admit the irrational syllable (>, § 682, 5) in the second foot of any dipody. Moreover two shorts may be substituted (§ 685) for the long syllable of the trochee in any foot except the final foot of the verse.
695. Trochaic Tetrameter. The most common trochaic rhythm (used by the line) is the Trochaic Tetrameter catalectic (consisting of two cola, § 686). Its scheme according to (§ 694) is as follows:
| _́ ◡ _ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ˄ |
| ◡́ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ | ◡́ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ | ◡́ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ | ◡́ ◡ ◡ |
| _ ˃ | _ ˃ | _ ˃ | |
| ◡ ◡ ˃ | ◡ ◡ ˃ | ◡ ◡ ˃ | |
| as: | # | ||
| _́ ◡ _ ˃ | _́ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ˄ |
| εὐτυχεῖς δ’ ἡ | μεῖς ἐσόμεθα | τἄλλα δ’ οὐ λé | γουσ’ ὄμως160 |
| # | |||
| _́ ◡ ◡ ◡ ˃ | _́ ◡ _ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ˄ |
| ἀλλά μεταβου | λευσόμεσθα | τοῦτο δ’ οὐ κα | λῶς λέγεις161 |
| # | |||
«Tell me nót in | moúrnful numbers, # life is but an | émpty dream.»
Note. Rarely in proper names a cyclic dactyl ( _ ◡ ◡ , § 682, 6) is used in place of a trochee. More freedom of substitution is usual in the first colon than in the second.
696. Trochaic rhythms are also found sometimes in systems (§ 692) ending in a catalectic dimeter; as
| _́ ◡ _ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ◡ |
| ταῦτα μὲν πρὸς | ἀνδρός ἐστι |
| _́ ◡ _ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ˃ |
| νοῦν ἔχοντος | καὶ φρένας καὶ |
| _́ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ _ ˄ |
| πολλὰ περιπά | πλευκότος.162 |
For lyric trochaic rhythms see § 707, 2.
ΙΑΜBΙC RHYTHMS
(Cf. § 706, note)
697. Iambic rhythins are usually measured by dipodies (§ 686, 2) consisting of two iambi |◡ _̀ ◡ _ |, and they admit the irrational syllable (>, § 682, 5) in the first foot of any dipody. Moreover, two shorts may be substituted (§ 685) for the long syllable of the iambus in any foot except the final foot of the verse.
698. Iambic Trimeter. – The most common iambic rhythm (used by the line) is the iambic trimeter. The iambic trimeter of tragedy is metrically much more strict than that of comedy, and, although the irrational syllable is frequent, the resolution of the long syllable (§ 697) is comparatively infrequent. In comedy, however, not only are resolutions numerous, but an anapaest (cyclic, § 682, 6) may stand in place of the iambus in any foot except the last, and the apparent dactyl (> ◡́ ◡) may stand in the fifth foot as well as in the first and third.
The principal caesura usually comes in the third foot.
The scheme of iambic trimeter (showing all possible variations) is as follows:
| Tragic | ◡ _́ ◡ _ | ◡ _́ ◡ _ | ◡ _́ ◡ _ |
| ◡ ◡́ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ | ◡ ◡́ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ | ◡ ◡́ ◡ | |
| ˃ _́ | ˃ _́ | ˃ _́ | |
| ˃ ◡́ ◡ | ˃ ◡́ ◡ | ||
| ◡◡ _́ | |||
| Comedy allows also | ˃ ◡́ ◡ | ||
| ◡◡ _ ́ ◡◡ _ | ◡◡ _ ́ ◡◡ _ | ◡ _́ |
Note. –In proper names the tragedians sometimes allow the cyclic anapaest (§ 082, 6) iu other feet than the first.
Examples of iambic trimeter are:
| Tragic | ˃ _́ ◡ _ | ˃ ‖ _́ ◡ _ | ˃ _́ ◡ _ |
| εἴθ’ ὤφελ’ Ἀρ- | γοῦς μή δια- | πτάσθαι σκάφος | |
| ˃ _́ ◡ _ | ˃ ‖ ◡́◡◡ _ | ˃ _́ ◡ _ | |
| Κόλχων ές αἶ- | αν κυανέᾱς | Συμπληγάδας163 | |
| Comic | ˃ _́ ◡◡ _ | ◡ _́ ◡ _ | ˃ _́ ◡ _ |
| Ὦ Ζεῦ βασιλεῦ’ | τὸ χρῆμα τῶν | νυκτῶν ὄστον | |
| ◡◡ _́ ◡ _ | ◡◡ _́ ◡ _ | ◡ _́ ◡ _ | |
| Ἀπέραντον’ οὐ- | δέποθ’ ἡμέρᾱ | γενήσεται; | |
| ◡◡ _́ ◡ _ | ˃ ◡́◡◡ _ | ˃ _́ ◡ _ | |
| Ἀπόλοιο δῆτ’, | ὦ πόλεμε, πολ- | λῶν οἴνεκα164 |
“Which, líke a woundjed snáke, drags its | slow léngth along”.
Note. – The Choliambus, or “limping trimeter” (σχάζων) has a spondee instead of an fambus in the last foot.
699. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. – The iambic tetrameter catalectic, consisting of two cola (§ 686), is often used in comedy. Its scheme
◡ _́ ◡ _ | ◡ _́ ◡ _ ǁ ◡ _́ ◡ _ | ◡ ∟́ _
♯
admits the same variations as the iambic trimeter (§ 698): thus,
| ◡ _́ ◡ _ | ˃ _́ ◡ _ | ◡ _́ ◡ _ | ◡ ∟́ _ ˄ |
| ἐγώ γὰρ ἤτ- | των μέν λόγος | δι᾿ αὐτὸ τοῦτ᾿ | ἐκλήθην |
| # | |||
| ˃ _́ ◡ _ | ˃ _́ ◡ ◡ ◡ | ˃ _́ ◡ ◡ ◡ | ◡ ∟́ _ ˄ |
| ἐν τοῖσι φρον- | τιδταῖσι ὄτι | πρώτιστος ἐπε- | νόησα165 |
| # | |||
«A cáptain bold | of Hálifax, # who lived in coun| try quárters».
1. Iambic rhythms are sometimes found in system (§ 692). For lyric iambic rhythms see § 707, 2.
DACTYLIC RHYTHMS
700. The fundamental foot of dactylic rhythms is the dactyl ( _ ◡ ◡ ), but the spondee ( _ _ ) may be substituted.
701. Dactylic Hexameter. The hexameter is the most common dactylic rhythm. It contains six feet,. of which the last is always a dactyl lacking the last syllable, _ ◡ ˄ (§ 689). The fifth foot is usually a dactyl, but may be a spondee, in which case the verse is called Spondaic. The other feet may be either dactyls or spondees, but dactyls predominate.
1. The principal caesura is usually in the third foot, less often after the thesis in the fourth foot (in which case there is often a corresponding caesura in the second foot). A diaeresis at the end of the fourth foot (Bucolic Diaeresis) is also very common.
Note. – Masculine and Feminine Caesuras. A caesura immediately following the long syllable of the thesis is called masculine, a caesura between the two short syllables of the arsis is called feminine.
2. The scheme of the dactylic hexameter is as follows:
| _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡ ˄ |
Examples are:
| _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ‖ _ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡ ˄ |
| μῆνιν ἄ- | ειδε, θε- | ᾱ́, Πη- | λ η ι ά- | δεω Ἀχι- | λῆος166 |
| _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ‖ ◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ˄ |
| ἄνδρα μοι | ἔννεπε, | Μοῦσα, πο- | λύτροπον, | ὃς μάλα | πολλά167 |
| _́ _ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ‖◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ _ | _́ ◡ ˄ |
| τίπτ᾿ αὖτ | αἰγιό- | χοιο Δι- | ὸς τέκος | εἰλή | λουθας;168 |
| _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ‖◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ˄ |
| ἣ δ᾿ ἀέ | κουσ᾿ἅμα | τοῖσι γυ | νή κίεν. | αὐτάρ Ἀ- | χιλλεύς169 |
| ♯ | |||||
For the synizesis of εω in the first example see § 19, note 2; for the shortening of μοι in the second see § 52 a. Observe that the third example is a spondaic line, and the fourth shows the bucolic diaeresis. For explanations of some other peculiarities of the Homeric verse see §§ 2 a; 13 a; 22 a; 36 a; 44 a; 44, 2 a; 53, a, b; 54 a.
702. The Elegiac Distich. – The Elegiac distich consists of a dactylic hexameter followed by two catalectic dactylic tripodies (which form the so-called pentameter).
The scheme entire is as follows:
| _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡ ˄ |
| _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | ⏘́ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ˄ |
| ♯ | |||||
Note. – In the pentameter the end of the first tripody always coincides with the end of a word, and neither hiatus (§ 668, 1) nor syllaba anceps (§ 688) is allowed at this point. Observe also that the second tripody does not admit spondees.
1. The Elegiac distich is a favorite metrical form for gnomic and didactic poetry. It is but once used in the extant tragedy, the first two lines of the passage being as follows:
| _́ ◡◡ | _́ _ | _́ ‖ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ◡ ˄ |
| Ἰλίῳ | αίπει- | νᾷ Πάις | οὐ γάμον | ἀλλά τιν᾿ | ἄτᾱν |
| _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ _ | ⏘́ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡ ◡ | _́ ˄ |
| ἀγάγετ᾿ | εὐναί- | ᾱν | εἰς θαλά | μους Ἑλέ- | νᾱν170 |
| ♯ | |||||
ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS
(Cf. 706, note)
703. The basis of anapaestic rhythms is the anapest (◡ ◡ _́ ), but for this the spondee ( _ _́ ) or even the dactyl ( _ ◡́ ◡) may be substituted. A dactyl (or the last of two or more dactyls) is regularly followed by a spondee ( _ ◡ ◡ _ _ ), since a dactyl followed by an anapaest (_ ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡ _) would bring four short syllables together.
1. Anapaestic rhythms are usually measured by dipodies (§ 686, 2), and the most common forms are the monometer (of two feet), the dimeter (of four feet), and the dimeter catalectic or Paroemiac. The schemes are as follows:
| (Monometer) | ◡ ◡ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | ||
| _ _́ _ _ | |||
| _ ◡́ ◡ | |||
| (Dimeter) | ◡ ◡ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | ◡ ◡ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | |
| _ _́ _ _ | _ _́ _ _ | ||
| _ ◡́ ◡ _ ◡́ ◡ | _ ◡́ ◡ | ||
| Cf. «And the olive of peace || sends its bránches abroád». | |||
| (Paroemiac) | ◡ ◡ _́ ˑ◡ ◡ _ | ◡ ◡⏘́ _ | |
| _ _́ _ _ | _ | ||
| _ ◡́ ◡ _ ◡́ ◡ | |||
| Cf. «The Lórd is adván ||cing. Prepáre ye»! | |||
2. Anapaestic Systems. Anapaestic rhythms were much used by the dramatists in systems (§ 692), a system consisting of a series of anapaestic monometers (usually printed as dimeters, with an occasional monometer) ending with a paroemiac (§ 703, 1). Hiatus and the syllaba anceps are allowed only at the end of the system (i.e. the last syllable of the paroemiac). There is usually a diaeresis (§ 690) at the end of each monometer.
The following is a short anapaestic system:
| _ ◡ ◡ _ _ | _ _́ ◡◡ _ |
| ἀλλά σ᾿ ὁ Μαίᾱς | πομπαῖος ἄναξ |
| ◡ ◡ _́◡◡ _ | _ ◡́◡_ _ |
| πελάσειε δóμοις, | ὧν τ᾿ ἐπίνοιαν |
| _ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | _ _́ ◡◡ _ |
| σπεύδεις κατέχων | πρᾱ́ξειας, ἐπεὶ |
| _ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | |
| γενναῖος ἀνήρ, | |
| _ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | ◡ ◡⏘́ _ |
| Αἰγεῦ, παρ ἐμοὶ | δεδόκησαι171. |
Note. – Observe that the last syllable in the second line (short by nature) is long by position (§ 53), owing to the following consonauts.
704. Anapaestic Tetrameter. – The anapaestic tetrameter, consisting of one anapaestic dimeter followed by the paroemiac, is much used by the line in comedy.
The scheme is as follows:
| ◡ ◡ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | ◡ ◡ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | ◡ ◡ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | ◡ ◡⏘́ _ |
| _ _́ _ _ | _ _́ _ _ | _ _́ _ _ | _ |
| _ ◡́ ◡ _ ◡ ◡ | _ ◡́ ◡ _ ◡ ◡ | _ ◡́ ◡ | |
| ♯ | |||
Examples are
| _ ◡◡ _ _ | _ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | _ _́ _ _ | ◡ ◡⏘́ _ |
| Πρόσχετε τὸν voῦν | τοῖς ἀθανάτοις | ἡμῖν, τοῖς αἰ- | ὲν ἐοῦσι, |
| ♯ | |||
| _ _́ ◡ ◡ _ | _◡́ ◡ _ _ | _ _́ ◡◡ _ | ◡ ◡ ⏘́ _ |
| Τοῖς αἰθερίοις, | τοῖσιν ἀγήρῳς | τοῖς ἄφθιτα μη | δομένοισιν172. |
| ♯ | |||
For lyric anapaestic rhythms (which usually admit more freedom of substitution) see § 709, 2.
LYRIC RHYTHMS
705. Lyric rhythms in general differ from recitative rhythms only in allowing much greater freedom of substitution. Their most notable characteristic is the Procrustean habit of frequently employing feet which are either longer or shorter than the fundamental foot of the verse, but which, by an arbitrary shortening or lengthening, are made to fit the rhythm (cf. § 682, 3–6). Thus, a long syllable of two morae ( _ ) by being lengthened ( ﹂ ), or a dactyl ( _ ◡ ◡) of four morae by being shortened ( _ ◡◡ ) is often employed in a rhythm whose fundamental foot is the trochee ( _ ◡ ) of three morae. Likewise a trochee ( _ ◡ ) of three morae may be used in a dactylic ( _ ◡ ◡ ) rhythm of four morae (as ﹂ ◡ ). But the character of the rhythm may always be determined by the preponderance of the fundamental foot.
706. Anacrusis. In the lyric rhythms each line does not always begin with a complete foot. The extra syllable (or syllables) at the beginning of such a line has received the name of anacrusis (ἀνάκρουσις upward beat).
1. The anacrusis must not be greater than the arsis. Hence we may have ◡ or > or ◡◡ as the anacrusis of a logaoedic verse (§ 707, 1) and ◡ ◡, or _, or ◡, as the anacrusis of a dactylo-epitritic verse (§ 709).
Anacrusis is indicated by⋮.
Note. – Some writers on meter recognize only those feet in which the ictus falls on the first part of the foot (i.e. trochees, dactyls, etc.). By this theory an iambic verse ( ◡ _ | ◡ _ ) is regarded as a catalectic trochaic with anacrusis ( ◡ ⋮ _ ◡ | _ ˄ ) catalectic dactylic with anacrusis, etc. But the ancients recognized rhythms in which the ictus falls on the second part of the foot, as well as the other kind, and such rhythms are often constructed on a differ- ent principle from the others. Hence it seems best to limit anacrusis to the strictly lyric rhythms, where the great variety and complexity of the verses demand the adoption of some simple wr orking hypothesis, although it is not certain that such rhythms were so treated by the ancients.
LYRIC RHYTHMS IN 3/8 TIME
707. The fundamental foot of lyric rhythm in 3/8 time is the trochee ( _ ◡ ), but in place of the trochee may be substituted the tribrach (◡ ◡ ◡), the irrational trochee ( _ >, § 682, 5), the cyclic dactyl ( _ ◡ ◡, § 682, 6), or the triseme (﹂_, § 682, 3). The cyclic dactyls are found before or between trochees, but trochees are not found between dactyls in the same verse. Anacrusis (§ 706) is frequent.
1. Logaoedic Rhythms. Rhythms in 3/8 time containing both trochees and (cyclic) dactyls have received the name of Logaoedic (λóγος speech, prose, ἀοιδή song).
2. Occasionally lyric verses in 3/8 time are found without cyclic dactyls or trisemes, and such verses by themselves might be explained as lyric trochaic, or (if they have anacrusis, cf. § 706, note) as lyric iambic rhythms; but since such verses are seldom found except in connection with other, logaoedic, verses, it is better to treat them all under one general head.
Note 1. – "Basis.» The first foot of a logaoedic verse allows great freedom. It may be a trochee (_́ ◡ ), a tribrach (◡́ ◡ ◡), an irrational trochee ( _́ >), or even an apparent iambus ( ◡́ _ ) or anapaest (◡́ ◡ > ). For an example see § 708, 6.
Note 2. – Logaoedic Rhythms are measured by the single foot. Some of them have acquired special names, which, however, are not particularly important, for a verse can always be described as a dipody, tripody, etc., according to the number of feet it contains.
708. It follows from § 707 that the lyric rhythms in 3/8 time may have great variety of form. Some examples of single verses are given below, but it must be remembered that these verses are, thus, severed from their connection in strophes of which they are an integral part.
| 1 Dipody (logaoedic) |
| _́ ◡ ◡ │ _́ ◡ |
| ὦ τὸν Ἄ│δωνιν (Adonic) |
| 2. Tripodies |
| Trochaic tripody (with resolved foot): |
| ◡́ ◡ ◡│ _́ ◡ │ _́ ◡ |
| φρενομό-│ρως ἀ│κούσῃ173 |
| Trochaic tripody with anacrusis (§ 706): |
| ◡ ⋮ _́ ◡│_́ ◡│_́ ◡│ |
| τέλος θά│νοιμι│καὐτός174 |
| Trochaic tripody catalectic, with anacrusis (“Iambic,” see § 707, 2): |
| ◡ ⋮ _́ ◡│_́ ◡ │_́ |
| τί τῶνδ' ἄ │νευ κα- │κῶν175; |
| Trochaic tripody catalectic, with anacrusis, containing a triseme (§ 682, 3): |
| ◡ ⋮ ﹂́│ _́ ◡│_́ |
| φίλαν │δρον’ με│νεῖ176. |
| Logaoedic tripodies: |
| _́ ◡ ◡ │ _́ ◡ │ _́ ◡ |
| βυρσότο│νον κύ│ κλωμα177. (First Pherecratean) |
| _́ ◡ ◡│_́ ◡│_́ |
| ἤ πόλις | ἤ φί│λων178. (First Pherecratean catalectic) |
| _́ │ _́ ◡◡│ _́ ◡ |
| παιδὸς | δύσφορον | ἄτᾱν179 (Second Pherecratean) |
| Logaoedic tripody (containing two dactyls) catalectic, with anacrusis: |
| > ⋮ _́◡◡ | _́ ◡◡│_́ |
| πῶς οὖν ἱε │ρῶν ποτα│μῶν180. |
| Logaoedic tripodics containing a triseme (§ 682, 3): |
| ◡ ⋮ ﹂́│_́ ◡◡│_́ |
| κακὰν | ἐλπίδ' ἔ | χων181 |
| _́ ◡◡│﹂́│_́ |
| τλάµονι | θῡ μῷ182 |
The last example might be scanned as a dipody (Adonic _ ◡ ◡│_ ◡ ), but the scansion of such lines is determined by the character of the strophe in which they stand.
The following will serve as examples of tetrapodies, although many more varieties are found:
| 3. Tetrapodies |
| _́ ◡│ _́ ◡ │ _́◡│ _́ |
| βάξις | εἰ δ̓ ἐ│τήτυ│μος183 |
| _́ ◡◡│ _́ ◡ │_́ ◡ │_́ ◡ │ |
| νῦν γὰρ ἐ│μοὶ μέ│λει χo│ρεῦσαι184. (First Glyconic) |
| _́ ◡◡│_́ ◡│_́◡│_́ |
| σῡρομέν|α σὸν | εὐνέ|τᾱν185. (First Glyconic catalectic) |
| _́ ◡│ _́ ◡◡│ _́ ◡ │_́ |
| ηὗρον | οὐδέ τι | φάρμα|κον186. (Second Glyconic catalectic) |
| ◡ ⋮ _́◡| _́ ◡│_́ ◡◡│_́ |
| ἑτλα δὲ | σοῖσι | μηλονό|μᾶς187. (Third Glyconic catalectic, with anacrusis) |
| ◡ ⋮ _́ ◡ | ﹂́│_́ ◡│_́ |
| μένει δ̓ ἀ|κοῦ|σαί τί |μου188. |
| ◡◡⋮ ﹂́│ ﹂́ │﹂| _́ |
| μονόπαις | ἀλλ᾽ | ἔμ|πᾱς189. |
| 4. Pentapodies |
| _́ ˃│ _́ ◡◡| _́ ◡│ _́ ◡│_́ ◡ |
| ἐν μύρ|του κλαδὶ | τὸ ξί | φος φο|ρήσω190 |
| _́ ◡◡│ ﹂│ _́ ◡◡| ﹂́│ _́ ˄ |
| τᾱ̀ν ὁ μέ|yas | μῦθος ἀ| έ |ξει191. |
| 5. Hexapodies |
| ˃⋮ _́ ◡◡│ _́ ◡◡| _́ ◡│ _́ ◡│﹂|_́ |
| εὐδαέμονες| οἷσι κα|κῶν ἄ|γευστος|αἰ|ών |
| _́ ◡ │ _́ ˃│ _́ ◡◡| _́ ◡◡|﹂́│ _́ ˄ |
| οἷς γὰρ| ἂν σει|σθῇ θεό| θεν δόμος|ἅ | τᾱς |
| _́ ◡ │ _́ ˃│_́ ◡◡| _́◡◡| _́ ◡́│ _́ ◡ |
| οὐδὲν | ἑλλεί|πει γενε|ᾶς ἐπὶ|πλῆθος|ἔρπον192. |
Some verses contain more than one colon. Examples are:
| 6. (Eupolidean) |
| _́◡│_́◡│_́ ◡◡| ﹂́|| ◡́ _│_́ ◡| _́ ◡| _́ ˄ |
| ὦ θε|ώμεν|οι κατε|ρῶ||πρὸς ὑ|μᾶς ἑ|λευθέ|ρως |
| _́ ˃ │_́ ˃│_́ ◡◡ |﹂ ́|| _́ ◡|_́ ˃│ _́ ◡│ _́ ˄ |
| οὔτω | νῑκή|σαιμί τ᾿ ἐ|γὼ||καὶ νο|μιζοί|µην σο|φός.193. |
| Observe the basis (§ 707, note 1) at the beginning of the second colon of the first line. |
| (Greater Asclepiadean) |
| _́◡│_́ ◡◡| ﹂́|| _́ ◡◡| ﹂́ || _́ ◡◡| _́◡| _́ ˄ |
| μηδὲν | ἄλλο φυ|τεύ||σῃς πρότε|ρον || δένδριον | ἀμπέ|λω194. |
| 7. The following examples show lyric verses in 3/8 time combined to form a strophe (§ 691): |
| _́◡│ _́ ◡◡ | _́ ˃ | _́ ˄ |
| καὶ σὲ |μέν, πότνι᾿, | Ἀργεί|α |
| _́ ˃ | _́ ◡◡ | _́ ◡| _́◡ |
| πεντη|κόντορος | οἶκον|ἄξει195. |
| ˃⋮﹂́| _́ ◡│ _́ ◡◡| _́ ˄ |
| συρί |ζων δ᾿ ὁ | κηροδέ|τᾱς |
| ◡́◡◡ | _́ ˃ | _́ ˃ | _́ ˄ |
| κάλαµος | οὐρεί|ου Πᾱ|νὸς |
| ˃⋮_́ ◡◡| ﹂́| ﹂́|_́ ˄ |
| κώπαις ἐπι|θω| ῡ́ |ξει196, |
| │|4 . 4 .| 4 . 4 |│+ 4 |
| ◡ ⋮ _́ ◡◡| _́ ◡◡|_́ ◡||_́ ◡| _́ ◡| _́ ˄ |
| σὺ δ᾿, ὦ τάλαν, | ὦ κακό|νυμφε|| κηδε|μὼν τυ|νων, |
| _́ ◡| _́ ◡|﹂́| _́ ˄ |
| παισὶν | οὐ κατ|ει|δὼς |
| ◡◡⋮ _́◡◡| _́ ◡◡| _́ ◡◡| _́ ◡|| _́ ◡◡| _́ ◡◡| _́ ˄ |
| ὄλεθρον βιο|τᾷ προσά|γεις ἀλό|χῳ τε|| σᾷ στυγε|ρὸν θάνα|τον. |
| ˃ ⋮| _́ ◡| ﹂́ | ﹂◡́| ﹂ ◡́ |﹂| _́ ˄ |
| δύστᾶνε, | μοί|ρᾱς ὄ|σον παρ| οί|χῃ197. |
| 3 4 . 4 . 4 3 + 6 |
DACTYLO-EPITRITIC RHYTHMS (2/4 TIME)
709. The fundamental foot of the dactylo-epitritic rhythm is the dactyl (_ ◡◡) or its equivalent spondee (_ _), occurring commonly in groups of two dactyls and a spondee (_ ◡◡ _ ◡◡ _ _). The lengthened trochee (﹂◡, § 682, 3) is also found, followed always by a spondee, the two together forming the so-called Epitrite (﹂◡ _ _). Either of these two combinations may be catalectic (§ 689), and anacrusis (§ 706) is frequent. Occasionally the tetraseme (⏘, § 682, 4), occupying the time of a whole foot, is found.
An example of this rhythm is:
| ◡⋮ _́◡◡| _́◡◡| _́ _ | ﹂ ◡| _́ _ |
| Ἄνω ποπα|μῶν ἱε|ρῶν χω|ροῦσι | πᾱγαί, |
| ﹂ ◡| _́ _ | _́ ◡ ◡| _́ ◡◡| _́ ˄ |
| καὶ δί |κᾱ καὶ | πάντα πά|λιν στρέφε|ται198. |
1. Other lyric dactylic rhythms are occasionally found, but they require no further explanation than has already been given.
2. Lyric anapaests also sometimes occur, but they may be explained as dactylic verses with anacrusis (see § 706, note).
OTHER RHYTHMS IN 3/4 AND 5/8 TIME
710. Choriambic Rhythms. – The fundamental foot of choriambic rhythms is the choriambus (_́ ◡ ◡ _). Such rhythms are rare. An example is:
| _́ ◡ ◡ _́ | _́ ◡ ◡ _́ | _́ ◡ ◡ _́ | _́ ◡ ◡ _́ |
| δεινὰ μὲν οὖν,|δεινὰ ταράσ|σει σοφὸς οἰ|ωνοθέτᾱς199. |
711. Ionic Rhythms. – Ionic rhythms have the ionic ( _ _ ◡ ◡ ) as their fundamental foot, for which occasionally ⏘◡ ◡ (§ 682, 4) is found. Such rhythms are regularly catalectic (§ 689) with anacrusis (§ 706), and by some they are explained as ionic a minore (see § 706 note).
An example is:
| ◡◡ ⋮ _́ _ ◡ ◡| _́ _ ◡ ◡| _́ _ ˄ |
| πεπέρᾶκεν μὲν ὁ| περσέπτολις|ἤδη |
| ◡ ◡ ⋮ _́ _ ◡ ◡ | _́ _ ◡ ◡| _́ _ ◡ ◡| _́ _ ˄ |
| βασίλεος στρατὸς | εἰς ἀντίπο|ρον γείτονα | χώρᾱν200. |
| ◡◡⋮ ⏘́ ◡ ◡| _́ _ ˄ |
| πολύγομφον ὄ|δισμα201. |
Note. – Anaclasis. – The last long syllable and the first short syllable of any foot may be transposed. This is called anaclasis (ἀνάκλασις breaking up): thus,
| ◡◡⋮_́ ◡_ ◡| _́ _ ˄ |
| ἰδίοις νόµοις κρα|τῡ́νων202. |
| (instead of ◡◡⋮_́ _ ◡◡| _́ _ ˄ |
712. Dochmiac Rhythms. – In some of the lyric portions of tragedy, where great excitement is expressed, a peculiar but unmistakable rhythm, called dochmiac, is often found. The exact nature of this is very uncertain, but it is based on a dipody ◡ _́ _ ◡ _́, which is thought to have a broken rhythm, with alternating 5/8 and 3/8 time.
It allows the irrational long (§ 682, 5) in place of either of the two short syllables, and also freely resolves any one of the three long syllables into two shorts. Hence many variations are possible, but only nineteen are actually found, and some of these very seldom. The following are the most common forms:
| ◡_́ _ ◡ _́ |
| δαϊχθεὶς χερῶν203. |
| ◡◡́◡_ ◡ _́ |
| κατολοφθρομαι204 |
| ˃ ◡́◡_ ◡_́ |
| Ἀργόθεν ὦ φίλος205 |
| ˃ ◡́ ◡_ ˃ _́ |
| ὦ σχέτλιοι πομπαί206 |
| ◡◡́ ◡◡ ◡ ◡ _́ |
| χθονὸς ἀπὸ πατρίδος207. |
| ◡ ◡́◡ ◡ ◡ ◡◡́◡ |
| τὸν ἔτι βρέφος ἕλιπον208. |
Dochmiacs are often found in systems (9 692). A good example is E. Med. 1258–60.
713. Bacchiac Rhythms. – Bacchiac Rhythms (based on the bacchius, ◡ _́ _ ) are seldom found except in connection with other rhythms (usually dochmiac). An example is in Aesch. Pr. 115.
714. Cretic Rhythms. – Cretic rhythms occasionally occur with the cretic ( _́ ◡ _ ) as the fundamental foot, which may be resolved (§ 685) into _́ ◡ ◡ ◡ (first paeon) or ◡́ ◡ ◡ (second paeon). An example is:
| _́ ◡ _| _́ ◡́ _ | _́ ◡ ◡◡ |
| ὄστις ἡ|μῶν μόνος |σπεισάµενος 209. |
IX · B. Table of Vowel Contractions
715.
| α + α = ᾱ (§18, 2) | ε + υ =εν (18, 1) | ||
| α + αι =αι (§§ 19, 88) | ε + ω = ω (18, 4) | ||
| α + ᾳ = ᾳ (§ 19) | ε + ῳ = ῳ (18, 4) | ||
| α + ε = ᾱ (§ 18, 6) | η + αι = ῃ (§ 19) | ||
| α + | ει (real) = ᾳ (§ 19) | η + | ει (real) = ῃ (§ 19) |
| ει (apparent) = ᾳ (§ 19) | ει (apparent) = η (§ 19) | ||
| α + η = ᾱ (§ 18, 6 rarely η, § 170, 2) | η + ι = ῃ (§ 18, 1) | ||
| α + ῃ = ᾳ (§ 19 rarely ῃ, § 170, 2) | ι + ι = ῑ (§ 18, 2) | ||
| α + ι = αι (§ 18, 1) | ο +α = ω (§ 18, 4 rarely ᾱ, § 118, 1) | ||
| ᾱ + ι = ᾳ (§ 18, 1) | ο + ε = ου (§ 18, 5) | ||
| α + ο = ω (§ 18, 1) | ο + | ει (real) = οι (§ 19, 2) | |
| α + οι = ῳ (§ 19) | ει (apparent) = ου (§ 19, 2) | ||
| α + ου (apparent)= ω (§ 19) | ο + η = ω (§ 18, 4) | ||
| α + ω = ω (§ 18, 4) | ο + ῃ = οι (§ 19, 2 rarely ῳ, § 170, 2) | ||
| ε + α = η (§ 18, 6, sometimes ᾱ, §§ 91, 1; 106, 2; 118, 1; 120, 3) | ο + ι = οι (§ 18, 1) | ||
| ε + αι = ῃ (§ 19 rarely αι, § 118, 1; or ει , § 170, note 3) | ο + ο = ου (§ 18, 3) | ||
| ε + ε = ει (§ 18, 3) | ο + ου = ου (§ 19) | ||
| ε + ει = ει (§ 19) | ο + ω = ω (§ 18, 2) | ||
| ε + η = η (§ 18, 2) | ο + ῳ = ῳ (§ 19) | ||
| ε + ῃ = ῃ (§ 19) | υ + ι = ῡ (§ 211, 2 a) | ||
| ε + ι = ει (§ 18,1; cf. 6, 3) | ω + α = ω (§ 18, 4) | ||
| ε + ο = ου (§ 18, 5) | ω + ε = ω (§ 18, 4) | ||
| ε + οι = οι (§ 19, 1) | ω + ι = ῳ (§ 18, 1) | ||
| ε + ου = ου (§ 19) | ω + ο = ω (§ 18, 2) | ||
IX · C. The Pronunciation of Greek Proper Names in English
716. Nearly all Greek proper names came into the English language through the medium of Latin. Hence the following rule for pronouncing such names:
Write the Greek name in the equivalent Latin letters (see § 1) and pronounce as an English word210 with Latin accent.
Note. – In addition to the equivalents given in § 1, the following should be mentioned:
| Gk. | Lat. | Gk. | Lat. | Gk. | Lat. |
| αι = | ae (ai) | ευ = | eu | Final –ος, -ον, | = -us, -um |
| ει = | ῑ (or ē) | ου = | ū | of 2d decl., | |
| οι = | oe (oi) | γ nasal (§ 11, 1) = | n | ρ with rough | = rh |
| αυ = | au | Final -οι = | -i | breathing (ῥ) | |
Examples are:
| Αἴγῑνα = Ae-gī'-na | Θουκυδίδης = Thū-cyd'-i-des |
| Ἀθήνη = Α-thē'-nē | Μίλητος = Mi-lē'-tus |
| Βοιωτίᾱ = Boe-ō'-ti-a | Ὀδυσσεύς = O-dys'-seus |
| Βυζάντιον = By-zan'ti-um | Ξενοφῶν = Xen'-o-phon |
| Δαρεῖος = Da-rí-us | Σφίγξ = Sphinx |
| Δελφοί = Del'-phi | Τιμόθεος = Timó-the-us |
| Διόσκουροι = Di-os-cí-ri | Χάρων = Chá-ron |
| Εὐρώτᾱς = Eu-rō'-tag |
IX · D. Some AdditionaL Grammatical Terms
717. The following grammatical terms are still occasionally employed by editors. Most of them explain themselves, but for completeness they are here catalogued.
1. Anacoluthon occurs when the construction of a sentence is changed from that with which it began: as καὶ διαλεγόµενος αὐτῷ, ἔδοξέ µοι οὗτος ὁ ἀνὴρ εἶναι σοφός and conversing with him, – this man seemed to me (instead of “I thought him ”) to be wise PL. Ap. 21 c.
2. Aphaeresis. – If the second of two words between which synizesis (§ 43, note 2) takes place begins with ε– some editors regard the ε as elided, and so indicate it: as μὴ 'γώ for μὴ ἐγώ.
3. Asyndeton is the omission of conjunctions between connected words or phrases. It is comparatively rare in Greek, – a language in which conjunctions were very numerous.
4. Brachylogy (brief expression) makes one word do double duty: as κόμαι Χαρίτεσσιν ὁμοῖαι hair like (the hair of) the Graces P 51. ὠπλισμένοι ἦσαν τοῖς αὐτοῖς Κύρῳ ὅπλοις they were armed with the same weapons as (those of) Cyrus Xn. Cy. 7, 1, 2.
5. Chiasmus (from the letter χ) inverts the order of the second pair of two pairs of words: as βασιλεύς τ’ ἀγαθὸς κρατερός τ᾿ αἰχμητής a goodly king and warrior bold Γ 179.
βασιλεύς 7° ἀγαθὸς
Χ
κρατερός 7 αἰχμητής
6. Ellipsis (lack) is the omission of words which would be requisite for a full logical expression of the thought. A good example is ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ just as (one would do) if, etc. Other examples of elliptical expressions are mentioned in §§ 439, note 2; 615; 616; 625, note.
7. Hendiadys (one through two) is the use of two codrdinate words to express what might have been expressed by one word and an attributive: as κράτη καὶ θρόνοι power and throne (i.e. throne of power) S. Ant. 173.
8. Hypallage (interchange) gives to the less important of two words the construction appropriate to the more important: as ὀδύνῃσι πελάζειν to bring him upon troubles (instead of “bring troubles upon him”) E 776.
9. Hyperbaton (overstepping) is a transposition (for the sake of emphasis) of the natural order of words: as παρ’ οὐκ ἐθέλων ἐθελούσῃ unwilling by her willing side, Σ 155.
10. Hypotaxis (opposed to parataxis) is the subordination of one construction to another (cf. § 594, 1 note).
11. Hysteron proteron is ‘putting the cart before the horse’: as εἵματα τ’ ἀμφιέσᾶσα θνώδεα καὶ λοέσᾶσα having clothed him in fragrant garments and given him a bath ε 264.
12. Litŏtes (plainness) and Meiōsis (lessening) are forms of understatement: as οὗ πολλοί not many (i.e. = ὀλίγοι a few).
13. Metonymy (change of name) is the use of one word in place of another which it suggests: as ἀσπὶς μῡρίᾱ ten thousand shield (i.e. soldiers, or men with shields) Xn. A. 1, 7, 10.
14. Oxymōron (keen foolishness) is a combination of apparently contradictory terms such as ‘painful pleasure’ or ‘living death’: thus, ψευσάμενον πιστὸν γενέσθαι to be believed for lis falsehood! Th. 3, 43.
15. Parataxis (opposed to hypotaxis) is the use of codrdinate constructions (cf. § 594, 1 note).
16. Paronomasia is a play on words of similar sound: as ἐπανέστησαν μᾶλλον ἤ ἀπέστησαν they have revolted rather than rebelled Th. 3, 39.
17. Pleonasm is unnecessary fullness of expression: as πειράσοµαι τῷ πάππῳ,… κράτιστος ὢν ἱππεύς, συμμαχεῖν αὐτῷ to my grandfather I shall try, by being a very good horseman, to be an ally to him Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 15. Other examples are mentioned in §§ 434; 601 note; 657, note 2.
18. Prolepsis (anticipation) is properly the use of an adjective which by its meaning anticipates the action of the verb: as δικαίων ἀδίκους φρένας παρασπᾷς you lead astray the unjust minds of righteous men, i.e. “so that they become unjust” S. Ant. 791.
More commonly prolepsis is used of the position of a substantive or a pronoun, which is transferred (usually with a change of case) from a (later) subordinate clause to an (earlier) principal clause: as ᾔδεε γὰρ κατὰ θῡμὸν ἀδελφεὸν ὡς ἐπονεῖτο for he knew in his heart full well how his brother was toiling (lit. « knew his brother how he was toil- ing») B 409. ᾔδει αὐτὸν ὄτι μέσον ἔχοι he knew that he commanded the center Xn. A. 1, 8, 21.
19. Zeugma (yoking) is the forcing of one verb to do the duty of two (dissimilar) verbs: as οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν ὄφῃ you shall not (hear) the voice or see the form of any mortal man Aesch. Pr. 21.
IX · E. Weights, Measures, and Time
| 718. Linear Measure | ||
| Equivalent | ||
| 1 δάκτυλος (finger breadth) | = almost 3/4 inch | |
| 4 δάκτυλοι | = 1 παλαιστή (palm) | = 2,9 + inch |
| 3 παλαισταί | = 1 σπιθαµή (span) | = 8,73 inch |
| 1 1/3 σπιθαµαί | = 1 πούς (foot) | = 11,65 inch |
| 1 1/2 πόδες | = 1 πῆχυς (cubit) | = 17,46 inch |
| 4 πήχεις (or 6 πόδες) | = 1 ὀργυιά (fathom) | = 5 feet, 10 – inches |
| 16 2/3 ὀργνιαί (or 100 πόδες) | = 1 πλέθρον (plethrum) | = 97 + feet |
| 6 πλέθρα | = 1 στάδιον (stade) | = 582 + feet |
| 9 στάδιοι | = 1 mile (+ 7 feet) | |
| 30 στάδιοι | = 1 παρασάγγης (parasang) | = 3 1/3 miles |
719. Square Measure
The Greeks measured small areas by the square foot, and larger areas (like land) by the square plethrum (=10,000 square πόδες, i.e. 97+ x 97+ = 9412 sq. feet, or a little over one-fifth of an acre).
720. Liquid Measure
| U. S. Liquid Measure | ||
| 1 ὀξύβαφον | = 0.144 + pint | |
| 4 ὀξύβαφα | = 1 κοτύλη | = 0.578 pint |
| 12 κοτύλαι | = 1 χοῦς | = 3.468 quarts |
| 12 χόες | = 1 ἀμφορεὺς µετρητής | = 10.4 + gallons |
721. Dry Measure
| U. S. Dry Measure | ||
| 1 κύαθος | = .08 + pint | |
| 6 κύαθοι | = 1 κοτύλη | = ½ (0.49+) pint |
| 4 κοτύλαι | = 1 χοῖνιξ | = 1 (0.99+) quart |
| 4 χούνικες | = 1 ἡμίεκτον | = ½ (0.49+) peck |
| 2 ἡμίεκτα | = 1 ἐκτεύς | =1 (0.99+) peck |
| 6 ἐκτεῖς | = 1 μέδιμνος | = 1 1/2 (1.49+) bushels |
Note. – Both the liquid and the dry κοτύλη had the same value, but the difference between liquid and dry measure in the United States causes the apparent difference in the tables.
Weights and Money
722. The tables of Greek weights and of money are identical, coins being named and valued by the weight of silver (ον gold) that they contained. he standards, however, were considerably different in different parts of Greece.
In Attica two standards were in use, corresponding to our Troy and Avoirdupois weights. The former consti- tutes the basis of the Attic coinage, and it was used also in weighing precious metals, drugs, ete. The second was used in ordinary commercial transactions. The approximate values of these were as follows:
723. Table of weights
| Attic | Commercial or Aeginetan | ||
| 1 ὀβολός | = 1/40 oz. | ||
| 6 ὀβολοί | = 1 δραχμή | = 6/40 oz. | 9/40 oz. |
| 100 δραχμαί | = 1 μνᾶ | = 15,4 + oz. | 1 lb. 6 1/6 oz. |
| 60 μναῖ | = 1 τάλαντον | = 58 Ibs. | 83 Ibs. |
724. Table of Attic Money
| Value In U. S. money | ||
| 8 χαλκοῖ (copper) | = 1 ὀβολός (obol) | $ .03 |
| 6 ὁβολοί | = 1 δραχμή (drachma) | .18 |
| 100 δραχμαί | = 1 μνᾷ (mina) | 18,00 |
| 60 μναῖ | = 1 τάλαντον (talent) | 1080.00 |
Note. – These values are only approximate, and are determined by the value (in gold) of the weight of the silver in the coins. The present great depreciation in the value of silver is not considered, but; it is reckoned as being to gold as 16:1. The purchasing power of money was much greater in antiquity than at present. Cf. Xn. A. 1, 3, 21, where the pay of the soldiers (already very high) is raised from 4 obols (80.12) to a drachma (80.18) a day.
1. The Attic coins (with the exception of the χαλκοῦς, which was of copper) were made of unalloyed silver, and ran from the 1/4 to the four-drachma piece (τετράδραχμov). The daric (δᾱρεικός), a Persian gold coin containing about 125.5 grains of gold, circulated at the value of 20 drachmae. The Cyzicene stater (of electrum, a mixture of gold and silver) was regarded as equivalent to 28 drachmae.
GREEK CHRONOLOGY
725. The Era. – Any particular year was known at Athens by the name of the Archon Eponymus (and in other places by the name of some other important civil or religious official).
Later came the general practice of numbering the years by olympiads (periods of four years each), the first year of the first olympiad (ol. 1, 1) beginning in the middle of the summer of 776 b.c.
Note. Observe that the first half of ol. 1, 1 falls in b.c. 776, and the second half in b.c. 775: thus,
| OL. | 1,1 | 1,2 | 1,3 | 1,4 | 2,1 | 2,2 | 2,3 |
| b.c. | 776 | 775 | 774 | 773 | 772 | 771 | 770 |
etc.
1. Hence the following rule for changing olympiads into years b.c.: multiply the number of the olympiad by 4, and subtract the product from 780. The remainder, will be the year b.c. in which the first year of that Olympiad began.
726. The Year. – Besides the ordinary divisions of the year into spring (ἦρ), summer (θέρος), autumn (ὀπώρα), and winter (χειμών), the year was divided into twelve months, containing alternately 30 (μῆνες πλήρεις) and 29 (μῆνες κοῖλοι) days each. But such a year ((6 x 30) + (6 x 29) = 354) had only 354 days, and hence was roughly 111/4 days too short. In eight years (8 x 11 1/4 = 90) the difference would amount to 90 days, or three months of 30 days each. So in every cycle of eight years (ἐννεαετηρίς) an extra month of 30 days (Ποσ(ε)ιδεών δεύτερος) was inserted in the 3d, 5th, and 8th year, thus, making those years to contain 384 days. The slight error remaining was variously equated.
1. The year in Attica began theoretically with the summer so1stice (June 21), although actually it varied from the middle of June to the first week in August. The months followed one another in the following order:
| 1 | Ἑκατομβαιών (about July) | 7 | Γαμηλιών (about January) |
| 2 | Μεταγειτνιών (August) | 8 | Ἀνθεστηριών (February) |
| 3 | Βοηδρομιών (September) | 9 | Ἐλαφηβολιών (March) |
| 4 | Πυανοψιών (October) | 10 | Μουνιχιών (April) |
| 5 | Μαιμακτηριών (November) | 11 | Θαργηλιών (May) |
| 6 | Ποσ(ε)ιδεών (December) | 12 | Σκιροφοριών (June) |
| (6. | Ποσ(ε)ιδεών δεύτερος, in leap years only) |
Note. – The names of the Attic months readily recalled by the following nonsense: Hector Met a Boy with a Pie. “My Poor Gamin!” Answered with A͡ laugh “Money, Theere, Skip!”
727. The Month. The days of the month were usually reckoned as follows:
1. νουμηνία.
2–10. δευτέρᾶ (τρίτη, etc211. § 152) ἱσταμένου, – δεκάτη ἱσταμένου.
11. ἐνδεκάτη.
12. δωδεκάτη.
13–19. τρίτη (etc. § 152) ἐπὶ δέκα – ἐνάτῃ ἐπὶ δέκα.
20. εἰκάς, or δεκάτη προτέρᾶ.
21. δεκάτη φθίνοντος or δεκάτη ὑστέρᾷ.
22–29, ἐνάτῃ (ὀγδόη, etc212. § 152) φθίνοντος – δευτέρᾶ φθίνοντος.
30. ἔνη καὶ νέα.
In the months of 29 days the δευτέρᾶ φθίνοντος was omitted.
Note. – Later the days 22–29 were also designated as δευτέρα (τρίτη, ete.) μετ’ εἰκάδας.
728. The Day. – The Greeks had no accurate divisions of the day (which was reckoned from sunrise to sunset), but employed the usual rough divisions of morning (πρωί), mid-day (μεσημβρίᾱ), and afternoon (δείλη). Other designations such as ὄρθρος dawn, περὶ πλήθουσαν ἀγορᾱ́ν about the time the market place is crowded (10 or 11 óclock), περὶ ἄριστον about lunch time, etc., were also used.
The early part of the night was called ἑσπέρᾱ evening, and midnight was μέση νύξ.
For measuring a definite lapse of time (as in the law courts) the water clock (κλεψύδρα) was employed.
IX · F . List of Verbs
729. LIST OF VERBS
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
In the following list, as a rule, only those tenses are given which actually occur in the works of the classical writers which have been preserved, but there is good reason to believe that, in most verbs, the other tenses, not listed here, were also in use; but, by chance, no instance of such use happens to survive. Nor is it at all certain that some of the verbs classed as poetic or Ιonic may not have been used also in prose. Such a classification is necessarily arbitrary, and it is made only for convenience.
ἀγάλλῳ (ἀγαλ-, § 195, 3) adorn, fut. ἀγαλᾶ, 1st aor. ἤγηλα.
ἄγα-μαι admire, aor. ἠγάσθην (§ 158, 3), vbl. ἀγαστός (§ 189).
ἀγγέλλῳ (ἀγγελ-, § 195, 3) announce, fut. ἀγγελῶ, 1st aor. ἦγγειλα, 1st perf. ἤγγελκα, perf. mid. ἤγγελμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἠγγέλθην.
ἀγείρῳ (ἀγερ-, § 195, 4, of. ἀγορᾱ́) collect, 1st aor. ἤγειρα.
ἄγ-νδ-μι (§ 196, 5, theme ἀγ-, for ϝαγ-, § 2 a) break (in composition also ἀγνύῳ), fut. (κατ)άξω, 1st aor. (κατ)έαξα (§ 172, 2), 2d pf. (κατ)έᾶγα (§§ 180; 494, 3), 2d aor. pass. (κατ)εᾶγην (§ 172, 2). ἄγ-ω (§ 193) lead, fut. ἄξω (cf. § 515, 1), 2d aor. ἤγαγον (§ 208, 1), 2d perf. ἦχα (§ 219, 1), perf. mid. ἦγμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἤχθην, vbl. ἀκτέος.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ιonic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ἀγωνίζομαι (§ 292, 6) contend (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. ἀγωνιοῦμαι (§ 215), 1st aor. ἠγωνισάμην, perf. ἠγώνισμαι, vbl. ἀγωνιστέος.
ᾇδ-ω (ᾱ́δ-, § 193) sing, fut. ᾄσομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ᾔσα, 1st aor. pass. ᾔσθην, vbl. ᾀστέος.
αἰδοῦμαι (-έομαι) (αἶδεσ-, § 188) fear, respect, fut. αἰδίσομαι and αἶδεσθήσομαι (see § 519, note 2), aor. ἠδίσθην (less often ἠδεσάμην, § 158, 3), perf. ᾖδεσμαι.
αἰκίζομαι (§ 292, 6; middle deponent, § 158, 3) outrage, fut. αἰκιοῦμαι (§ 215), aor. ἠκισάμην, perf. ᾖκισμαι, 1st aor. pass. ᾖκίσθην (§ 510).
αἰνῶ (-έ-ω, § 185) praise (usually in composition), fut. αἰνέσω, and also fut. mid. –αἰνέσομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. –ἥνεσα, perf. –ἥνεκα, perf. pass. ἤνημαι (§ 188, 1), 1st aor. pass. ᾖνέθην, vbl. αἰνετέος.
αἱρῶ (-έω) (αἱρε-, § 193) take (mid. choose), fut. αἱρήσω (§ 187), aor. supplied (§ 164) by 2d aor. εἶλον (§ 172, 2, from stem ἑλ-, subj. ἕλω, opt. ἔλοιμι, etc.), 1st perf. ᾔρηκα, perf. mid. ᾔρημαι, 1st aor. pass. ἠρέθην (§ 188, 1), vbl. αἱρετέος (§ 188, 1).
αἴρω (for *ᾱ́ρ-ιω (ᾱ́ρ-) § 195, 4) raise, fut. ᾱ́ρῶ (§ 213), 1st aor. ἦρα (subj. ἄρω, opt. ἄραιμι, etc.), perf. ἧρκα, perf. mid. ἧρμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἤρθην (fut. pass. ᾱ’ρθήσομαι), vbl. ᾱ’ρτέος.
αἰσθ-άν-ομαι (§ 196, 2, theme αἰσθ-) perceive (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. αἰσθήσομαι, 2d aor. ᾖσθόμην, perf. ᾖσθημαι.
αἰσχῡ́ (§§ 292, 9; 195, 4, theme αἰσχυν-) disgrace (mid. feel ashamed), fut. αἰσχυνῶ, 1st aor. ᾖσχῡνα (perf. mid. partic. epic ἠσχυμμένος), 1st aor. pass. ἠσχύνθην, vbl. αἰσχυντέος.
αἰτιῶμαι (-άομαι, § 193) blame, fut. αἰτιᾱ́σομαι, etc. (§ 187), middle deponent (§ 158, 3) regular.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. onic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ἀκοῦμαι (-έομαι, § 188, theme ἀκεσ-) heal (middle deponent, § 158, 3), aor. ἠκεσάμην, vbl. ἀκεστός (§ 189).
ἀκού-ω (§ 193) hear, fut. mid. ἀκούσομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἤκουσα, 2d perf. ἀκήκοα (§ 179; for *ἀκήκορα, § 21), 1st aor. pass. ἠκούσθην (§ 189), vbls. ἀκουστός, –τέος.
ἀκροῶμαι (-ομαι, § 193) listen, fut. ἀκροάσομαι (§ 187), οἷο., middle deponent (§ 158, 3) regular.
ἀλαλάζω (§ 100, 2, ἀλαλαγ-) raise the war-cry, fut. ἀλαλάξομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἠλάλαξα.
ἀλείφ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme ἀλειφ-, ἀλιφ-, § 14, 2) anoint, fut. ἀλείψω, 1st aor. ἤλειψα, 2d perf. ἀλήλιφα (§ 170, § 219, note 2), perf. mid. ἀλήλιμμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἠλείφθην, vbl. ἁλεπτέος.
ἀλέξω (§ 193; theme ἀλεξ-, ἀλεκ, ἀλκ, § 14, 1) fut. ἀλέξομαι, 1st aor. ἠλεξάμην.
(ἀλίνδω) roll, 1st aor. ἤλίσα, 1st perf. ἤλίκα, perf. pass. part. ἠλύνδημένος (§ 190).
ἀλ-ίσκομαι (§ 197, theme ἁλ-, ἁλο-) be taken (used as pass. of αἱρῶ), fut. άλώσομαι, 2d aor. ἑᾱ́λων or ἥλων (§ 172, 2, subj. ἀλῶ, etc., opt. ἁλοίην, etc., inf. ἀλῶναι, partic. ἁλούς, § 256), 1st perf. ἑᾱ́λωκα or ἥλωκα, vbl. ἁλωτός.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ἄλλαττω (§ 195, note 2; ἄλλαγ- ) change, fut. ἄλλάξω, 1st aor. ἤλλαξα, 2d perf. –ήλλαχα (§ 219, 1), perf. mid. ἤλλαγμαι, aorists pass. ἠλλάχθην (1st) and ἠλλάγην (2d), vbl. ἀλλακτέος.
ἄλλομαι (§ 195, 3, theme ἀλ-) leap, fut. ἁλοῦμαι, 1st aor. ἠλάμην (§ 204).
ἀλοῶ (-άω, § 193) thrash, 1st aor. ἠλόησα, perf. mid. ἠλόημαι,
ἀλῶ (-έω, § 188) grind, fut. ἀλῶ (§ 212, 1), 1st aor. ἥλεσα (§ 188), pf. mid. ἀλήλε(σ)μαι (§ 179).
ἁμαρτάνω (§ 196, 2; theme ἁμαρτ– and ἁμαρτε-, § 190) err, fut. ἁμαρτήσοµαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἤμαρτον, 1st perf. ἡμάρτηκα, perf. mid. ἡμάρτημαι, 1st aor. pass. ἡμαρτήθην, vbls. –αμάρτητος, –τέος.
ἀμβλ-ίσκω (§ 107, ἀμβλ– and ἀμβλο-) miscarry, 1st aor. –ήμβλωσα, 1st perf. –ήμβλωκα, perf. mid. ἤμβλωμαι [1st aor. pass. ἡμβλώθην, late].
ἀμπ-έχω and ἀμπ–ίσχω (ἀμφί + ἔχω, § 40) have about, put about, clothe, like ἔχω and ἴσχω, q.v., but for the augment (ἠμπειχόμην) see § 175, note.
ἀμῡ́νω (§ 195, 4; ἀμυν-) ward off (mid. defend, § 506), fut. ἀμυνῶ, 1st aor. ἤμῡνα, vbl. ἀμυντέος. For ἠμῡ́ναθον see § 191 a.
ἁμύττω (§195, 1; ἀμυχ-) scratch, fut. ἀμύξω, 1st aor. ἤμυξα.
ἀμφιγνοῶ (-έω, § 193) doubt, regular, but impf. ἤμφεγνόουν (§ 175, note), 1st aor. ἠμφεγνόησα (§ 175, note).
ἀμφιέννῡμι clothe, see ἔννῡμι.
ἀμφισβητῶ (-έω, § 193) dispute, regular, but impf. ἠμφεσβήτουν (§ 175, note), 1st aor. ἠμφεσβήτησα (§ 175, note).
ἀναίνομαι (§ 195, 4) refuse, mostly poetic; see below.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ἀνᾱλ-ίσκω (for ἀνα–ϝαλ–ισκω, § 2a; theme ἀνᾱλ-, § 197), also ἀναλῶ (-όω, theme ἀνᾱλο-) expend, fut. ἀνδλόσω, 1st aor. ἀνήλωσα, 1st perf. ἀνήλωκα, perf. mid. ἀνήλωμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἀνηλώθην, vbl. ἀνδλωτέος.
ἀνδάνω (§ 196, 2; theme ἁδ– for *σραδ-, § 36 a), mostly epic and Ionic (see below), but partic. ἄσμενος pleasing is much used as an adjective.
ἀνέχω hold up, ἀνέχομαι endure, like ἔχω, but for the augment (ἠνειχόμην) see § 175, note.
ἀν-οίγω open, see οἴγω.
ἀντιβολῶ (-έω) meet, beseech, often has two augments (§ 175, note), as 1st aor. ἠντεβόλησα.
ἀντιδικῶ (-έω) be a defendant, sometimes has two augments (§ 175, note), as 1st aor. ἠντεδίκησα.
ἁνύ-ω (§ 193) and ἀνύτω (§ 194) accomplish, fut. ἀνύσω, 1st aor. ἤνυσα, 1st pert. ἥνυκα, perf. mid. ἥνυσμαι, vbl. ἀνυστός.
ἅπτω (§ 191; theme ἁφ-, § 25) fusten, kindle, fut. ἄψω, 1st aor. ἦψα, perf. mid. ἦμμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἤφθην.
ἀράττω (§ 195, note 2; theme ἀραγ-) strike, fut. ἀράξω, 1st aor. ἤραξα, 1st aor. pass. ἠράχθην.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ἀρέ-σκω (§197; theme ἀρe-, § 189) please, fut. ἀρέσω, 1st aor. ἤρεσα, vbl. ἀρεστός.
ἀρκῶ (-έω, § 188) assist, suffice, fut. ἀρκέσω (§ 188), 1st aor. ἥρκεσα (§ 188).
ἁρμόττω (§ 195, note 2, ἁρμογ-), also ἁρμόζω (§ 195, 2, ἁρμοδ-) fit, fut. ἁρμόσῳ, 1st aor. ἥρμοσα, perf. mid. ἥρμοσμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἠρμόσθην (§ 189), vbl. ἁρμοστέος.
ἀρνοῦμαι (-έομαι, § 187) deny; passive deponent (§ 158, 3) regular.
ἁρπάζω (§ 195, 2; theme ἁρπαγ-, but see § 195, 2 a) seize, snatch, fut. ἁρπάσομαι (§ 507), seldom ἁρπάσω, 1st aor. ἤρπασα, 1st perf. ἤρπακα, perf. mid. or pass. ἤρπασμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἠρπάσθην.
(ἀρτῡ́νω) ἁρτύ–ω (§ 193) prepare, fut. ἁρτύσω, 1st aor. ἡρτῡσα, 1st perf. –ήρτῡκα, perf. mid. ἥρτῡμαι, 1st nor. pass. ἠρτύθην.
ἀρύ-ω (§ 193) and ἀρύ-τω (§ 108) draw (water), 1st aor. ἤρυσα, 1st aor. pass. ἠρύθην, vbl. –αρυστέος (§ 189).
ἄρχ-ω (§ 193) begin, command, fut. ἄρξω, 1st aor. ἦρξα, 2d perf. ἦρχα, perf. mid. ἦργμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἤρχθην, vbl. ἀρκτέος.
ἀρῶ (-όω, § 188) plow, 1st aor. ἤροσα (§ 188), 1st aor. pas. ἠρόθην (§ 188).
ἀρῶμαι (-άομαι, § 187) pray (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. –αρᾱ́σομαι, 1st aor. ἠρᾱσάμην, perf. –ήρᾶμαι.
αὐαίνω (for *αὐαν–ιω, § 100, 4) dry, fut. αὐανῶ, 1st aor. ηὔηνα, 1st aor. pass. ηὑάνθην.
αὐλίζομαι encamp (middle and passive deponent, § 158, 3), aor. ηὐλίσθην and ηὐλισάμην.
αὐξάνω (§196, 2, αὖξ-) and αὔξ–ω (§ 193) make to increase, grow, fut. αὐξήσω (§ 190), 1st aor. ηὕξησα (§ 190), 1st perf. ηὕξηκα (§ 190), perf. mid. ηὔξημαι, 1st aor. pass. ηὐξήθην.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ἄχθ-ομαι (5 193, theme ἀχθ– and ἀχθεσ-) be oppressed in spirit, displeased (passive deponent, § 155, 3), fut. ὀχθέσομαι (§ 188) and ἀχθεσθήσομαι (§ 519, note 2), 1st aor. ἠχθέσθην (§ 189).
βαδίζῳ (cf. § 292, 6) go, fut. βαδιοῦμαι (§ 215 and § 507), vbl. βαδιστέον.
βαίνω (for *βαν–ιω, § 195, 4; theme βα-, in the present βα–ν-, § 196) go, fut. βήσομαι (§ 507), βήσω shall cause to go (cf. § 494, 1, note), 1st aor. ἔβησα caused to go (§ 494, 1), 2d aor. ἔβην went (§ 494), 1st pf. βέβηκα, pf. mid. βέβαμαι, 1st aor. pass. –ἐβάθην, vbls. βατός, –βατέος.
βάλλω (for *βαλ–ιω, § 195, 3, theme βαλ-) throw, fut. βαλῶ (rarely βαλλήσω (§ 190) of continued action; cf. § 519), 2d aor. ἔβαλον, 1st pf. βέβληκα (§ 218, 3), pf. mid. βέβλημαι (§ 224, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἑβλήθην (§ 231, 2), vbL βλητέος.
βάπ-τω (§ 194; theme βαφ-) dip, fut. βάψω, 1st aor. ἔβαψα, pf. mid. βέβαμμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐβάφην, vbl. βαπτός.
βιάζοµαι, force, middle deponent (§ 158, 3), regular, has also aor. pass. ἐβιάσθην was forced (§ 510).
βιβάζω make go, fut. βιβάσω and βιβῶ (§ 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐβίβασα, vbl. βιβαστέος.
βιβρό-σκω (§ 197, 1; theme βρω-) eat, 1st pf. βέβρωκα (2d pf. partic. βεβρῶτες, § 220), pf. mid. βέβρωμαι, other forms supplied from ἰσθίω, q.v.
βιῶ (-όω, § 292, 1) live, fut. βιώσομαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἑβίων (rarely 1st aor. ἑβίωσα), 1st pf. βεβίωκα, pf. mid. βεβίωμαι, vbls. βιωτός, βιωτέος.
(βιώ-σκομαι) ἀνα–βιώσκομαι (§ 197) recive, 1st aor. ἀνεβιωσάμην (§ 207, note 3), and 2d aor. ἀνεβίων (§ 207, note 3).
βλάπτω (§ 194; theme βλαβ-) hurt, fut. βλάψω, 1st aor. ἔβλαψα, 2d pf. βέβλαφα (§ 219, 1), pf. mid. βέβλαμμαι, aorists pass. ἐβλάφθην (1st) and ἐβλάβην (2d).
βλαστάνω (§ 196 ,2; theme βλαστ-) sprout, 2d aor. ἕβλαστον, 1st pf. βεβλάστηκα (§ 190) and sometimes ἑβλάστηκα (cf. § 178, 1).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ιonic and poetic forms at the ‘bottom of the page.]
βλέπ-ω (§ 193) see, fut. βλέψομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἔβλεψα.
βλίττω (for *μ(β)λιτ-ιω, § 195, 1, from theme µλιτ– (μέλι, µέλιτ–ος honey) with sympathetic β, before which μ disappears) take honey, 1st aor. ἕβλισα, .
βόσκω feed, fut. βοσκήσω (§ 190), vbl. βοσκητέος (§ 190).
βούλ-ομαι (§ 193; theme βουλ– and βουλε-, § 190), passive deponent (§ 158, 3) will, wish, fut. βουλήσομαι (§ 190), 1st aor. ἐβουλήθην and ἠβουλήθην, perf. βεβούλημαι, vbl. βουλητός.
βοῶ (-ἄω, § 292, 3) cry out, fut. βοήσομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἐβόησα.
βῡνῶ (-νέ–ω, § 106, 4; theme βυ-) stop up, fut. βύσω, 1st aor. ἔβῡσα, pf. pass. βέβυσμαι (§ 189), vbl. βυστός.
γαμῶ (-έω, §§ 190; 193) marry (see § 506), fut. γαμῶ (§ 213), 1st aor. ἔγημα, pL. γεγάµηκα (§ 190), pf. mid. and pass. γεγάµηµαι (§ 190), vbls. γαμετός (§ 188, 1) and γαµητέος.
γελῶ (-άω, § 193) laugh, fut. γελάσοµαι (§§ 188; 507), 1st aor. ἐγέλασα (§ 188), 1st aor. pass. ἐγελάσθην (§ 189).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
(γηθῶ (-έω)) rejoice (cf. § 190), 2d pf. γέγηθα (§ 535).
γηρά-σκω (§ 197) and γηρῶ (-άω, § 292, 3) grow old, fut. γηρᾱ́σομαι (§ 507) rarely γηρᾱ́σω, 1st aor. ἐγήρᾱσα, 1st pf. γεγήρᾱκα.
γί-γν-ομαι (§ 193, 3; theme γον-, γεν-, γν-, § 14) become, be, fut. γενήσοµαι (§ 190), 2d aor. ἐγενόμην (§ 158, 3), pf. γεγένηµαι, 2d pf. γέγονα (§ 494, 2).
γι-γνώ-σκω (§ 197, 1; γνω-) know, fut. γνώσοµαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔγνων (subj. γνῶ, opt. γνοίην, impv. γνῶθε, inf. γνῶναι, partic. γνούς, cf. § 256), 1st pf. ἔγνωκα, pf. mid. ἔγνωσμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐγνώσθην (§ 189), vbls. γνωστός, γνωστέος (§ 189).
γλύφ-ω grave, regular, but pf. mid. γέγλυµμαι and ἔγλυμμαι (cf. § 178, 1).
γράφ-ω (§ 193) write, fut. γράψω, 1st aor. ἔγραψα, 2d pf. γέγραφα, pf. mid. γέγραµµαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐγράφην, vbl. γραπτός.
γρύζω (§ 195, 2; γρυγ-) grunt, fut. γρύξομαι (rarely γρύξω, § 507), 1st aor. ἔγρυξα.
δάκ-νω (§196, 1; theme δακ-, δηκ-, § 13) bite, fut. δήξομαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔδακον (§ 208), pf. mid. δέδηγµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐδήχθην.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ιonic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
δαμάζω (cf. § 202, 6) subdue, 1st aor. ἐδάμασα, 1st aor. pass. ἐδαμάσθην.
(δαρθ-άν-ω) (§ 196, 2) sleep (usually κατα-δαρθάνω), 2d aor. κατ-έδαρθον, 1st pf. partic. κατα–δεδαρθηκώς (§ 190).
(βατέομαι) (cf. δαίοµαι) divide, 1st aor. mid. (ἀνλεδασάμην, pf. mid. (ἀνα)δίδασμαι (§ 189), vbl. (ἀνά)δαστος.
δέδοικα be afraid, see [δίω].
δείκ-νῡ-μι (§ 196, 5) show (also δεικνύω), fut. δείξω, 1st aor. ἔδειξα, etc., regular. See § 254.
δέρω (also δείρω, § 195, 4; theme δερ-, δαρ-, § 14, 1) flay, fut. δερῶ, 1st aor. ἔδειρα, pf. mid. δέδαρµαι (§ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐδάρην (§ 232, 2).
δέχ-ομαι (§ 193) receive, fut. δέξοµαι, st aor. ἐδεξάμην, rarely ἐδέχθην (§ 158, 3). pf. δέδεγµαι, 1st aor. pass. (§ 510) ἐδέχθην (usually in composition), vbl. δεκτέος.
δέῳ (for *δεϝ–ω, § 2 a, § 193, 2 note) need, lack (cf. § 199, 2), fut. δεήσω. (§ 190), 1st aor. ἐδέησα (§ 190), 1st pf. δεδίηκα (§ 190), pf. mid. δεδέημαι (§ 190), 1st aor. pass. ἐδεήθην (§ 190). Ιmpersonal δεῖ it is necessary.
Διαιτῶ (-άω, § 193) regulate (life), arbitrate, fut. διαιτήσω, 1st aor. διῄτησα and –εδιῄτησα (§ 175, 1 and note), 1st pf. δεδιῄτηκα (§ 181), pf. pass. δεδιῄτημαι, 1st aor. pass. διῃτήθην.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
δι-δά-σκω (§ 197, 1; root δα, q.v., but the present theme (διδαχ– ?, cf. διδαχή teaching) has been carried into the other tenses) teach, fut. διδάξω, 1st aor. ἑδίδαξα (see § 515, 1), 2d pf. δεδίδαχα, pf. mid. δεδίδαγµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐδιδάχθην, vbls. διδακτός, διδακτέος.
δι-δρᾶ-σκω (§ 197, 1; theme δρᾱ-), only in composition, run away, fut. δρᾱ́σοµαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔδρᾱν (subj. –δρῶ, –ᾷς, –ᾷ etc., opt. –δραίην (like σταίην͵ § 257), infin. –δρᾶναι, partic. –δρᾱ́ς, –ᾶσα, –άν), 1st pf. –δέδρᾱκα.
δί-δω-μι (§ 193, 3; for the inflection see § 252) give, fut. δώσω, aor. δωκα (§211, 3; for the inflection see § 90), 1st pf. δέδωκα, pf. wid. δέδοµαι (§ 188, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐδόθην (§ 188, 1), vbls. δοτός, δοτέος.
[δίω] theme δοι-, δει-, δι-, § 14, 2 (for *δϝοι– etc.), 1st aor. ἔδεισα, 1st pf. δέδοικα, and 2d pf. δέδια, rare in the singular (cf. §§ 219 a; 220; and the inflection of ἕστατον § 258).
διώκ-ω (§ 193) pursue, fut. διόξω or διάξοµαι (§ 507), etc., regular. For διωκάθω see § 191 a.
δοκῶ (-έω, § 190) seem, think, fut. δόξω, 1st aor. ἔδοξα (1st pf. δεδόκηκα), pf. mid. δέδογµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐδόχθην.
δρῶ (-άω, § 193) do, fut. δρᾱ́σω, etc., regular, but 1st aor. pass. ἐδρᾱ́σθην (§ 189), vbl. δρᾱστέος (§ 189).
δύνα-μαι (§ 193) be able (augment sometimes ἠ-; for accent of pres. opt. see § 900 note), fut. δυνήσοµαι, aor. pass. ἐδυνήθην (and ἡδυνήθην), pf. δεδύνημαι, vbl. δυνατός.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
δύ-ω (§ 193) cause to enter, enter (§ 493, 1) (also rarely δῡ́–νω (§ 196,1) sink), fut. δύσω, 1st aor. ἔδῡσα (trans, § 494, 1), 2d aor. ἔδῡν (intrans. § 491, 1, for the inflection see § 257), 1st pf. δέδῡκα (§ 494, 3), sometimes also δέδύκα transitive, pf. mid. δέδυµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐδύθην, vbl. δντέος.
δῶ (δέω, § 199, 2 note) bind, fut. δήσω, 1st aor. ἔδησα, 1st pf. δέδεκα (§ 188, 1), pf. mid. δέδεµαι (fut. pf. δεδήσοµαι, § 228), 1st aor. pass. ἐδέθην (§ 188, 1), vbls. δετός͵ δητός (§ 188, 1) and δετέος.
ἐγείρω (for *ἐγερ–ιω, § 195, 4; theme ἐγορ-, ἐγερ-, ἐyp, § 14) wake, rouse, fut. ἐγερῶ, 1st aor. ἤγειρα, 2d aor. mid. ἠγρόμην awoke, 2d pf. ἐγρήγορα (with sympathetic ρ for *ἐγ–ηγορα, § 179), 1st aor. pass. ἠγέρθην, vbl. ἐγερτέος.
ἐγκωμιάζω praise, takes its augment and reduplication after the preposition (§ 175, 1).
ἐγχειρῶ, attempt, ἐγχειρίζω put in one’s hands, augment after the preposition (§175, 1): as ἐνεχείρησα.
[root ἐδ for *σεδ-, § 36] ἕζομαι sit, usually καθέζοµαι, fut. καθεδοῡμαι (cf. § 212, 1), [1st aor. εἶσα] 1st aor. mid. εἰσάμην (§ 172, 2).
ἐθῶλ-ω (§193), or less often θέλ-ω wish (impf. ἤθελον), fut. ἐθελήσω or θελήσω (§ 190), 1st aor. ἠθέλησα (§ 190, but subj. ἐθελήσω or θελήσω, opt. ἐθελήσαιμι or θελήσαιμι, etc.), st pf. ἠθέληκα (§ 190).
ἐθίζω (§ 292, 6; theme σϝεθ, § 36 a) accustom, fut. ἐθιῶ (§ 215), 1st aor. εἴθισα (§ 172, 2), 1st pf. εἴθικα (§ 180), pf. mid. εἴθισμαι (§ 189, note), 1st aor. pass. εἰθίσθην (§ 172, 2).
[ἔθω (for *σϝεθω, § 36 a)] be accustomed, 2d pf. εἴωθα am accustomed (for *σε–σϝοθα, cf. §§ 16; 36; 37; 219, 3), 2d plupf. εἰώθη.
εἶδον saw (2d aor.), see [ἰδ-].
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
εἰκάζω liken, guess (regular) augments usually to ᾖ– (cf. § 173, 1).
εἴκω yield (regular). For εἴκαθον see § 191 a.
[root εἰκ-, also ἐκ– and οἰκ-, § 14, 2 (for *ϝεικ– etc., § 2 a)], fut. εἴξω (cf. § 519 note 2), 2d pf. ἔοικα (§ 180) with 3d pl. εἴξᾱσι = ἐοίκᾱσι, 2d plupf. ἐῴκη (for *ἐ-ϝε-ϝοικη) and ᾖκη (cf. plupf. of οἶδα, § 259).
εἴλλω see ἴλλω.
(αἰλῶ(-έω)) press hard, drive together, 1st aor. pass. (ἀν-)ειλήθην.
εἶμι go, see § 201; εἰμί be, see § 262.
εἶπον said (2d aor), see [ἐπ-].
εἴργω (§ 193) shut in or out, also εἴργνῡμι and (rarely) εἰργνύω (§ 196, 5) shut in, fut. εἴρξω, 1st aor. εἷρξα, pf. mid. εἷργμαι, 1st aor. pass. εἴρχθην, vbls. εἰρκτός, εἰρκτέος. With a rough breathing (εἱργ-) the word is said to mean shut in, aud with a smooth breathing (εἰργ-) shut out, but the distinction is not always observed.
(εἴρομαι) ask, fut. ἐρήσομαι (§ 190), 2d aor. ἠρόμην.
(εἴρω) theme ἐρ– (for *ϝερ. § 2 a) and ῥη– (for *ϝρη, § 38, 1) say, fut. ἐρῶ, aor. supplied by εἶπον said, 1st pf. εἴρηκα (§ 178, 2 for *ϝε-ϝρη-κα, § 16), pf. pass. εἴρημαι (fut. pf. εἰρήσομαι), 1st aor. pass. ἐρρήθην (fut. pass. ῥηθήσομαι), vbls. ῥητός, –τέος.
εἴρω (§ 195, 4; theme ἐρ– for *σερ-) knit, join, 1st aor. –εἷρα, 1st pf. –εἷρκα, pf. mid. εἷρμαι (§ 180).
ἐκκλησιάζω call an assembly, augment ἠκκλη– and ἐξεκλη– (§ 175, 1).
[Attic principal parts in full faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
Ἐλαύνω (for *ἐλα–νυ–ω, § 196, 5, theme ἐλα-) drive, fut. ἐλῶ (212, 1), ist aor. ἤλασα, ist pf. ἐλήλακα, pf. pass. ἐλήλαμαι, ist aor. pass. ἠλάθην, vbl. ἑλατέος.
ἐλέγχ-ω (§ 193) examine, confute, fut. ἐλέγξω, etc., regular, but pf. mid. ἐλήλεγμαι (§§ 179, 247).
ἐλελίζω raise the war-cry, 1st aor. ἠλέλιξα.
ἑλίττω, εἱλίττω (§ 195, 1; ἐλικ-) roll, fut. ἑλίξω, 1st aor. εἴλιξα (§ 172, 2), pf. pass. εἴλιγμαι (§ 180), 1st aor. pass. ἐῑλίχθην (§172, 2), vbl. ἑλικτός.
ἔλκ-ω (§ 193), draw, fut. ἔλξω, other tenses from theme ἕλκὺ-, 1st aor. εἴλκυσα (§ 172, 2), 1st pf. εἴλκυκα (§ 180), pf. mid. εἴλκυσμαι (§§ 180; 189), 1st aor. pass. εἱλκύσθην (§§ 172, 2; 189), vbls. ἑλκτέος, ἑλκυστέος.
[root ἐλυθ-, ἐλθ-, § 20], only 2d aor. ἦλθον (impv. ἐλθέ, § 210, note), and 2d pf. ἐλήλυθα (§ 179). See ἔρχομαι.
ἐμῶ (-έω) vomit, fut. ἐμοῦμαι (§§ 507; 212, 1), 1st aor. ἥμεσα (§ 188).
ἐν–εδρεύω, waylay, lie in ambush, augment ἐν–ηδ– (§ 175, 1).
[root ἐνεκ-] ἤνεγκα, ἐνήνοχα, ἐνήνεγμαι, etc., cf. φέρω.
ἐνθυμοῦμαι (-έομαι) consider, augment ἐν–εθῡμ– (§ 175, 1).
(ἔν-νῡ-μi, § 196, 5, note) in prose regularly ἀμφιέννῡμι clothe, fut. ἀμφιῶ, 1st aor. ἠμφίεσα (§ 174, 1), pf. mid. ἠμφίεσμαι (§ 181).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ἐνοχλῶ (-έω), harass, augment usually ἠν–ωχ– (§ 175, note).
ἔοικα am like, see [εἰκ-].
ἑορτάζω keep a festival, augment ἑωρ– (for ἡορ, § 17).
[root ἐπ- (for ϝεπ-, § 2 α)] say, only 2d aor. εἶπον (§ 208, 1), or (seldom in prose) εἶπα (§ 207, note 1), subj. εἴπω, opt. εἴποιμι, impv. εἰπέ (§ 210, note), infin. εἰπεῖν, partic. εἰπών.
ἐπίσταμαι (§ 193) know, understand (impf. ἠπιστάμην; for accent of pres. opt. see § 200, note), fut. ἐπιστήσομαι, aor. ἠπιστήθην (§ 158, 3).
ἐπιστατῶ (-έω) oversee, augment ἐπεστ– (§ 175, 1).
ἐπιτηδεύω practise, augment ἐπετη– (§ 175, 1).
ἐπιτροπεύω be a guardian, augment ἐπετροπ– (§ 175, 1).
ἔπ-ομαι (§ 193; theme ἐπ– for *σεπ-, § 36, and σπ-, § 14), follow (impt. εἰπόμην, § 172, 2 with irregular breathing), fut. ἕψομαι, 2d aor. ἑσπόμην (§ 208, with irregular breathing, subj. σπῶμαι, opt. σποίµην, etc.). ἐπριάμην bought, see [πρια-].
(ἔρα–μαι, § 193; deponent passive, § 158, 3), present in prose supplied by ἐρῶ(-άω) love, 1st aor. ἠράσθην, fell in love (5 529), fut. ἐρασθήσομαι shall fall in love (§ 519, note 2), vbl. ἐραστός.
ἐργάζομαι (§ 292, 6; theme ϝεργ-, § 2 a) work; augment εἷ– (§ 172, 2) rarely ᾖ-; reduplication always εἷ– (§ 180), 1st aor. εἰργασάμην, pf. εἴργασμαι (§ 180), 1st aor. pass. εἰργάσθην (§ 510), vbl. ἐργαστέος.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.)
ἕρπ-ω creep (impf. εἷρπον § 172, 2), fut. ἔρψω.
ἔρρ-ω (§ 193), go away, perish, fut. ἐρρήσω (§ 190), 1st aor. ἤρρησα (§ 190), 1st pf. (εἰσ-)ήρρηκα (§ 190).
ἔρχομαι (§ 193) go, come, only in pres. and impf.; fut. supplied (§ 164) by pres. of εἷμι go (§ 261, 2), aor. supplied (§ 164) by 2d aor. ἤλθον, and pf. by 2d pf. ἐλήλυθα. See [ἐλυθ-].
[root ἐρ-] ask, see (εἴρομαι).
ἐσθίῳ (probably for *ἐδ-θι-ω, §§ 26; 191 a; 195) eat (impf. ἤσθιον), fut. ἔδομαι (§ 216), aor. supplied by 2d aor. ἔφαγον, 1st pf. ἑδήδοκα (§ 179), pf. mid. ἐδήδεσμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἠδέσθην, vbls. ἐδεστός, –τέος.
ἑστιῶ (-άω) entertain, augments to εἱ– (§ 172, 2).
(εὔδω, § 193) usually καθ–εύδω, sleep (impf. καθηῦδον and ἐκάθευδον, § 174, 1), fut. καθευδήσω (§ 190), vbl. καθευδητέον (§ 190).
εἱρίσκω (§ 197; εὑρ– εὑρε, § 190) find, fut. εὑρήσω (§ 190), 2d aor. ηὗρον (impv. εὑρέ, § 210, note), 1st pf. ηὕρηκα (§ 190), pf. mid. εὕρημαι (§ 190), 1st aor. pass. εὑρέθην (§ 188, 1), vbls. εὑρετός, –τέος (§ 188, 1).
εὐφραίνω (§ 195, 4; εὐφραν-) cheer, fut. εὐφρανῶ, 1st aor. ηὕφρᾱνα (§ 204, note 2), 1st aor. pass. ηὐφράνθην.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
εὔχ-ομαι (§ 193, εὖχ-) pray, boast, middle deponent (§ 158, 3), fut. εὔξομαι, 1st aor. ηὐξάμην, pf. ηὗγμαι.
(ἔχθω) hate (ἀπ-)εχθ–άνο–μαι (§ 196, 2) make oneself hated (middle depouent, § 138, 3), fut. (ἀπ-)εχθήσομαι (§ 190), 2d aor. (ἀπ-)ηχθόμην, pf. (ἀπ-)ήχθημαι (§ 190).
ἔχ-ω (§ 193, stem ἐχ-for *σεχ-, §§ 36; 40, σχ-, § 14, σχε-, § 38) have (impf. εἶχον, § 172, 2), fut. ἕξω or σχήσω (§ 519, note 2), 2d aor. ἔσχον (§ 208, subj. σχῶ, opt. σχοῖμι ov σχοίην, impv. σχές, § 170, note 1, infin. σχεῖν, partic. σχών), 1st pf. ἔσχηκα, pf. mid. ἔσχημαι, as aor. pass. ἐσχόμην is used (§ 515, 1), [1st aor. pass. ἐσχέθην, late], vbls. ἐκτός, σχετός, and ἑκτέος, σχετέος.
ἔψω (§ 193) cook, fut. ἁψήσω (§ 190), 1st aor. ἥψησα (§ 100), vbl. ἑφθός (for *ἑψ–τος, § 35), ἑψητός (§ 190).
ἐῶ (-άω, § 193) let alone, allow, fut. ἑᾱ́σω (§ 187; for ἑᾱ́σομαι as pass. see §§ 515, 1; 519, note 2), 1st aor. εἰᾱσα, etc., regular, but angment and reduplication εἰ– (§§ 172, 2; 180).
ζεύγ-νῡ-μι (§ 196, 5; theme ζευγ-, ζυγ-, § 14, 2), yoke, join, fut. ζεύξω, 1st aor. ἔζευξα, pf. mid. ἔζευγμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐζύγην (§ 232, 2).
ζἐω (§ 199, 2) boil, fut. ζέσω (§ 188), 1st aor. ἔζεσα (§ 188).
ζῶ (ζῇς, ζῇ, etc., § 199, 3) live, fut. ζήσω (and ζήσομαι, § 507). Other forms supplied (§ 164) by βιῶ live.
ζών-νῡ-μι (§ 196, note) gird, 1st aor. ἔζωσα, pf. mid. ἔζωμαι.
ἠβῶ (-άω) be vigorous, also ἠβᾱ́-σκω (§ 197) to come to man’s estate, fut. ἠβήσω, etc. regular.
–ἤδ-ομαι (§ 193) be pleased, 1st aor. ἤσθην (§ 158, 3), fut. ἠσθήσομαι (§ 158, 3).
ἦλθον came, see [ἐλυθ-].
ἦμαι sit, see § 265.
ἡμί say, see § 266.
ἤνεγκον bore, cf. [ἐνεκ-] and φέρω.
ἡττῶμαι (-άομαι) be vanquished, regular passive deponent (158, 3); fut. both ἠττήσομαι and ἠττηθήσομαι (§ 519, note 2).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
θάπ-πω (§ 194; theme θαφ-, § 41) bury, fut. θάψω, 1st aor. ἔθαψα, pf. mid. τέθαµμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐτάφην; vbl. θαπτέος.
θαυμάζω (§ 202, 6) admire, fut. θανμάσοµαι (§ 507), otherwise regular.
θέλῳ wish, see ἐθέλω.
θερμαίνω (§ 195, 4) warm, regular, but 1st aor. ἐθέρμηνα (§ 204, note 2).
θέω (§ 193, note) run, fut. θεύσομαι (§ 507), other forms supplied by other verbs (§ 164).
θλίβ–ω (§ 193, 1) press, fut. θλίψω, 1st aor. ἔθλιψα, 2d perf. τέθλιφα. (§ 219, 1), (pf. mid. τέθλτμμαι), 1st aor. pass. ἐθλίφθην.
(ἀπο-)θνῄσκω (§ 197, suffix –ισκ– contrary to § 197; theme θαν-, θνη-, § 38, 1) die, fut. (ἀπο-)θανοῦμαι, 2d aor. (ἀπ-)έθανον, 1st pf. τόθνηκα, but often 2d pf. τέ-θνα–τον, etc., see § 220 (2d pf. partic.
τεθνεώς is for τε-θνη–ώς, cf. § 17), fut. pf. τεθνήξω (§ 230). In prose regularly ἀποθνῄσκω, but pf. τέθνηκα.
θράττω (§195, 1; θραχ-), disturb, 1st aor. ἔθραξα, 1st aor. pass. ἐθράχθην; see ταράττω.
θραύ-ω (§ 193) bruise, fut. θραύσω, 1st aor. ἔθρανσα, pf. mid. τέθρανµαι and τέθρανσμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐθραύσθην (§ 189).
θρέξοµαι, see τρέχω.
θρύπ-τω (§ 194; theme θρυφ-, § 41) crush or weaken, fut. mid. θρύψομαι. (1st aor. ἔθρυψα), pf. mid. τέθρυµµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐθρύφθην.
θρῴσκω (§ 197, suffix –σκ– contrary to § 197; theme θορ-, θρω-, § 38, 1) leap, fut. θοροῦμαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔθορον.
[Attic principal parts in full faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the ‘bottom of the page.]
θύω (§ 193, 1) sacrifice, fut. θύσω, 1st aor. ἔθῡσα, 1st pf. τέθυκα, pf. mid. τέθυμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐτύθην (§ 40).
[root ἰδ– for *ϝιδ, § 2 a) see, 2d aor. εἶδον saw (for *έϝιδον, § 172, 2; impv. ἰδέ, § 210, note), 2d pf. οἶδα know (οιδ-, εἰδ-, ἰδ-; for the inflection see § 259), fut. εἴσομαι, vbl. ἰστέος.
ἱδρῶ(-όω) sweat, sometimes contracts to ω instead of ου (as partic. dat. sing. ἱδρῶντι), fut. ἱδρώσω, etc., regular.
ἴε-μαι (§ 193, theme *ϝῑε-, cf. Latin in-vi-tus) strive, desire, usually in composition as παρ-ῑ́εµαι beg. Its forms cannot be distinguished from those of ἵημι.
ἴζω (for *σι-σδω, § 193, 3) usually καθ–ίζω, seat or sit (impf. ἐκάθιξον, § 174, 1), fut. καθιῶ (§ 215), 1st aor. καθῖσα and ἐκάθισα (§ 174, 1).
ἵημι (for *σι–ση–μι, § 193, 3) send; for the inflection see § 260, fut. ἤσω, aor. ἦκα (see § 211, 3), 1st pf. εἶκα (§ 180), pf. mid. εἶμαι (§ 180), 1st aor. pass. εἴθην (§ 172, 2).
(ἀφ-)ἱκνοῦμαι (-έομαι) (§ 196, 4; ἱκ-) come (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. (ἀφ-)ἴξομαι, 2d aor. (ἀφ-)ῑ́κόμην, pf. (ἀφ-)ἶγμαι.
ῑ́λά-σκοµαι (§ 197) propitiate (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. ῑ́λάσοµαι, 1st aor. ῑ́λασάμην, 1st aor. pass. ῑ́λάσθην (§ 510).
ἴλλω (§ 195,3) roll, 1st aor. ἴλα (sometimes printed εἴλλω and εἶλα).
ἵστημι (§ 193, 3; for *σι-στη-μι, § 36) set, place (for the inflection see § 253), fut. στήσα, 1st aor. ἕστησα caused to stand (§ 207, note 3), 2d aor. ἔστην stood (§ 207, note 3; inflection § 257), 1st pf. ἕστηκα (for *σε–στη–κα, § 36; plupf. εἰστήκη for *ἐ-σε-στηκη), with 2d pf. ἕστατον, etc. (§ 258), 1st aor. pass. ἐστάθην, vbls. στατός, στατέος.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ἰσχναίνω (§ 195, 4) make lean or dry, fut. ἰσχανῶ, 1st aor. ἴσχνᾱνα (§ 204, note 2), 1st aor. pass. ἰσχνάνθην.
ἴσχω (§ 193, 3, for *σι-σχ–ω, §§ 36, 40) have, hold, cf. ἔχω.
καθαίρω (§ 195, 4; καθαρ-) purify, fut. καθαρῶ, 1st aor. ἐκάθηρα and ἐκάθᾱρα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. κεκάθαρµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐκαθάρθην.
καθ-ἐξομαι, sit down, see ἕχομαι; for imp. ἐκαθεζόμην see § 174, 1.
καθ-εύδω sleep, see εὔδω.
καθ-ίζω set, sit, see ἴξω.
καίνω (§ 195, 4; theme καυ-, καν-, § 14, 1) kill, fut. κανῶ, 2d aor. ἔκανον, 2d pf. κέκονα (§ 219, 3).
καίω (for καϝ–ιω, § 195, 4; theme καυ– or καϝ-, § 2 a), also κᾱ́ω (§ 21) burn, fut. καύσω, 1st aor. ἕκανσα, st pi. κέκαυκα, pf. mid. κέκαυµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐκαύθην.
καλινδοῦμαι (-έομαι) wander about, cf. κνλίνδω.
καλύπ-τω (§ 194; καλυβ-) corer, fut. καλύψω, 1st aor. ἐκάλυψα, Pf. mid. κεκάλυµμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐκαλύφθην.
καλῶ(-έω) call, fut. καλῶ (§ 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐκάλεσα (§ 188), 1st pf. κέκληκα (§ 218, 3), pf. mid. κέκληµαι (§ 224, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐκλήθην (§ 38, 1), vbls. κλητός, κλητέος.
κάµ-νω (§ 196, 1; καμ-) labor, fut. καμοῦμαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔκαμον, 1st PE. κέκμηκα (§ 218, 3).
κάµπ–τω (§ 194; καμπ-) bend, fut. κάµψω, 1st aor. ἔκαμψα, pf. mid. κέκαμμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐκάμφθην, vbl. καµπ–τός.
κατηγορῶ (-έω) accuse, for the augment κατη– see § 175, 1.
κεῖ–μαι (§ 198) lie (for the inflection see § 264), fut. κείσοµαι.
Κείρω (§ 195, 4; theme κερ-, καρ-) shear, fut. κερῶ, 1st aor. ἔκειρα, pf. mid. κέκαρµαι (§ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐκάρην (§ 232, 2).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
κελεύ-ω (§ 193) command, fut. κελεύσω, 1st aor. ἐκέλευσα, 1st pf. κεκέλευκα, pf. mid. κεκέλευσµαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐκελεύσθην (§ 189).
κεράν-νῡ-μι and κεραν–νύ–ω (§ 106, note; theme κέρα-, possibly for *κερασ-) mix, 1st aor. ἐκέρασα, pf. mid. κέκρᾱμαι (§ 38, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐκεράσθην, and ἐκράθην (§ 38, 1).
κερδαίνω (§ 195, 4) gain, fut. κερδανῶ, 1st aor. ἐκέρδᾱνα (§ 204, note 2).
κηρῡ́ττω (§ 195, 1; κηρῦκ-) proclaim, fut. κηρύξω, st aor. ἐκήρυξα, 2d pf. κεκήρυχα, pf. mid. κεκήρυγµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐκηρύχθην.
κί-χρη-μι (§ 193, 3 χρα-, χρη- § 13) lend (mid. borrow, § 506), fut. χρήσω, 1st aor. ἔχρησα, 1st pf. κέχρηκα, pf. mid. κέχρηµαι.
κλάζω (§ 195, note 1; κλαγγ-) also κλαγγ-άνω (§ 196, 2), resound, scream, fut. κλάγξω, 1st aor. ἔκλαγξα, 2d pf. κέκλαγγα.
κλαίῳ (for *κλαϝ–ιω, § 195, 4; theme κλαυ– or κλαϝ-, § 2 a), also κλᾱ́ω (§ 21) weep, fut. κλαύσομαι (§ 507) rarely κλαυσοῦμαι (§ 214) or κλαήσω (§ 190); 1st aor. ἔκλαυσα, pf. mid. κέκλαυµαι.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
κλέπ–τω (§ 194 κλοπ-, κλεπ-, κλαπ-, § 14, 1) steal, fut. κλέψω, 1st aor. ἔκλεψα, 2d ph. κέκλοφα (§ 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. κέκλεμμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐκλάπην (§ 232, 2).
κλῄ-ω, later κλείω (§ 193) shut, fut. κλῄσω, 1st aor. ἔκλῄσα, 1st pf. κέκλῄκα, DE mid. κέκλῄµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐκλῄσθην (§ 189).
κλῑ́νω (for *κλιν-ιω, § 195, 4) bend, incline, fut. κλινῶ (§ 213), 1st aor. ἔκλῑνα (§ 204), pf. mid. κέκλιµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐκλίθην, and sometimes 2d aor. pass. ἐκλίνην.
κλῶ (-άω) break, (fut. κλάσω), 1st aor. ἔκλασα, pf. mid. κέκλασµαι (§189), 1st aor. pass. ἐκλάσθην (§ 189).
κναίω (§ 193) scrape, fut. κναίσω, 1st aor. ἔκναισα, 1st pf. κέκναικα, pf. mid. –κέκναισμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. –ἐκναίσθην (§ 189).
κνῶ (κνῇς, κνῇ, etc., § 199, 3) = κναίω scrape, 1st aor. ἔκνησα, pf. mid. κέκνησμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐκνήσθην (§ 189).
κομίζω (§ 195, 2; κομιδ-) care for, carry, fut. κομιῶ (§ 215), 1st aor. ἐκόμισα, 1st pf. κεκόμικα, ph. mid. κεκόμισμαι (§ 189, note), 1st aor. pass. ἑκομίσθην (§ 189, note).
κόπ-τω (§ 194; κοπ-) cut, fut. κόψω (but fut. pf. κεκόψομαι is often used instead, § 538, note), 1st aor. ἔκοψα, 2d pf. κέκοφα (§ 219, 1), pf. mid. κέκομμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐκόπην.
κρᾱ́ζω (§ 195, 2; κραγ-, κρᾱγ– § 13) cry out, 2d aor. ἔκραγον, 2d pf. κέκρᾱγα, fut. pf. κεκρᾱ́ξομαι (§ 538, note).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page]
κρέμα-μαι (§ 193) hang (used as a passive of κρεμάννῡμι), fut. κρεµήσοµαι. (For accent of pres. opt. see § 200, note.)
κρεμάν-νῡ-μι (§ 196, note) suspend, fut. κρεμῶ (§ 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐκρέμασα, 1st aor. pass. ἐκρεμάσθην (§ 189), vbl. κρεµαστός (§ 189).
κρῑ́νω (for *κριν–ιω, § 195, 4) judge, fut. κρινῶ (§ 213), 1st aor. ἔκρῖνα (§ 204), 1st pf. κέκρικα (§ 218, 1), pf. mid. κέκρυμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐκρίθην.
κρού-ω (§ 193) beat, regular, but 1st aor. pass. ἐκρούσθην (§ 189).
κρύπ-τω (§ 194: κρυφ-) conceal, fut. κρύψω, 1st aor. ἔκρυψα, pf. mid. κέκρυμμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐκρύφθην, vbIs. κρυπτός, κρυπτέος.
(ἀπο-)κτενῶ (for *κτεν-ιω, § 195, 4; theme κτον-, κτεν-, κταν– (§ 14, 1) kill, fut. (ἀπο)κτενῶ, 1st aor. (ἀπ-)έκτεινα, 2d pf. (ἀπ-)ἔκτονα (§ 219, 3). For the passive, (ἀπο-)θνῄσκω is regularly used (§ 513).
(ἀπο) κτείνῡμι and (ἀπο-)κτεινύω = (ἀπο-)κτείνω kill. (These are sometimes printed κτείννῡμι, -ύω, or κτίννῡμι, -ύω.)
κτῶμαι (-άοµαι) acquire, fut. κτήσοµαι, 1st aor. ἐκτησάμην (§ 158, 3), pf. κέκτημαι (reduplication contrary to § 178, 1) possess (§ 535) (fut. pf. κεκτήσομαι shall possess, § 538, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐκτήθην (§ 510).
κυλίνδω (§ 193) roll (cf. καλινδοῦμαι), 1st aor. ἐκύλῑσα (§ 34), pf. mid. κεκύλισμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐκυλῑ́σθην (§ 150). From ἐκύλῑσα a present κυλῑ́ω was later formed.
κύπ-τω (§ 194; κῡφ-) stoop, fut. κύψω, 1st aor. ἔκῡψα, 2d pf. κέκῡφα.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
λαγχάνω (§ 196, 2; theme λαχ-, ληχ-, § 13) obtain by lot, fut. λήξομαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔλαχον (§ 186, 1), 2d pf. εἴληχα (§ 178, 2), pf. mid. εἴληγμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐλήχθην, vbl. ληκτέος.
λαμβάνω (§ 196, 2; theme λαβ-, ληβ-, § 13) take, fut. λήψομαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔλαβον (§ 186, 1; impv. λαβέ, § 210, note), 2d pf. εἴληφα (§ 178, 2), pf. mid. εἴλημμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐλήφθην, vbls. ληπτός, –τέος.
λάμπ-ω (§ 193) shine, fut. λάμψω, 1st aor. ἔλαμψα, 2d pf. λέλαμπα.
λανθάνω (§ 196, 2; theme λαθ-, ληθ-, § 13) lie hid, escape notice (mid. forget, usually ἐπι-λανθάνομαι), fut. λήσω, 2d aor. ἔλαθον (§ 186, 1), 2d pf. λέληθα, pf. mid. λέλησμαι (§ 189).
λέγ-ω (§ 193, 2) say, fut. λέξω, 1st aor. ἔλεξα, pf. act. supplied (§ 164) by εἴρηκα, pf. mid. λέλεγμαι (but διαλέγοµαι, converse, has διείλεγμαι, cf. § 178, 2), 1st aor. pass. ἐλέχθην.
λέγ-ω (§ 193, 2) select, count, gather, fut. λέξω, 1st aor. ἔλεξα, 2d pf. εἴλοχα (§§ 178, 2; 219, 3), pf. mid. εἴλεγμαι and sometimes λέλεγμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐλέχθην and rarely 2d aor. pass. ἐλέγην.
λείπ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ-, § 14, 2) leave, fut. λείψω, 2d aor. ἔλιπον (§ 208), 2d pf. λέλοιπα (§ 219, 3), pf. mid. λέλειμμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐλείφθην.
λεύ-ω (§ 193) stone, fut. λεύσω, etc., regular, but 1st aor. pass. ἐλεύσθην (§ 189).
[Attic principal parts in full faced type. Ιonic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
λῄζω (§ 202, 6) plunder (fut. λῄσομαι), 1st aor. mid. ἐλῃσάμην, pf. mid. λέλῃσμαι (§ 189). (The active is rare).
λιμπάνω (§ 196, 2; λιπ-) = λείπω leave.
λού-ω (§ 193) wash, often drops υ (§ 21) before a short vowel and is then contracted like δηλῶ (§ 250): as λοῦμεν (for λο(ύ)λομεν), λοῦσθαι (for λο(ύ)εσθαι); otherwise the verb is regular; fut. λούσω, 1st aor. ἔλουσα, etc.
λῡ́-ω (§ 104 theme λῡ-, λυ-, § 13), fut. λῡ́σω, 1st aor. ἔλῡσα, 1st pf. λέλυκα, pf. mid. λέλυμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐλύθην.
μαΐνω (§ 195, 4; theme μαν-, µην-, § 13), madden (mid. be mad, fut. mid. μανοῦμαι), 1st aor. ἔμηνα, 2d pf. μέμηνα am mad (§ 494, 3), 24 aor. pass. ἐμάνην (see § 514).
μανθάνω (§ 100, 2; μαθ-) learn, fut. μαθήσομαι (§§ 100; 507), 2d aor. ἔμαθον, 1st pf. µεµάθηκα (§ 190).
μάττω (§ 105, note 2, theme μαγ-) knead, fut. μάξω, etc., regular, but 2 pf. μέ-μαχ-α (§ 219, 1) and 2d aor. pass. ἐμάγην.
μάχ-ομαι (§ 193) fight (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. μαχοῦμαι (for μαχέσομαι, §§ 190, 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐμαχεσάμην (§ 190), pf. µεμάχημαι (§ 188, 1).
μεθύσκω (§ 197) make drunk, 1st aor. ἐμέθνσα, 1st aor. pass. ἐμεθύ–σθην became drunk.
[Attic principal parts in full faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the ‘bottom of the page.]
μεθύ-ω (§ 193) be drunk, only pres. and impf. Other tenses supplied from μεθύσκω.
μείγ–νῡ–µι (§ 196, 5; theme μειγ-, μιγ-, § 14, 2) mix, fut. μείξω, 1st aor. ἔμειξα, pf. mid. μέμειγ–μαι,. 1st aor. pass. ἐμείχθην, 2d aor. pass. ἐμίγην (§ 232, 2), vbls. μεικτός, μεικτέος. (Sometimes wrongly written μῑ́γνῡμι).
μείρομαι (§ 195, 4; theme μορ-, μερ-, µαρ-, § 14, 1, probably for σμορ-, etc.) obtain part in, pf. mid. 3d sing. εἵμαρται (for *σε–σμαρ–ται, § 224, note, = *έσμαρται, § 36, = εἵμαρται, § 16) it is fated.
μέλλ-ω intend, fut. μελλήσω (§ 190), 1st aor. ἐμλλησα (§ 190), seldom augments to ἠ– .
μέλ-ω (§ 193) concern, care for, 3d sing. impersonal μέλει it is a care, fut. μελήσω (§ 190), 150 aor. ἐμέλησα (§ 190), 1st pf. μεμέληκα (§ 190), pf. mid. μεμέλημαι (§ 190), 1st aor. pass. ἐμελήθην (§ 190), vbl. μελητέος (§ 190). Also ἐπι-μέλομαι and ἐπι-μελοῦμαι (passive deponents, § 138, 8) care for.
μέν-ω (§ 193) remain, fut. μενῶ, 1st aor. ἔμεινα, 1st pl. μεμένηκα (§ 190).
μιαίνω (for *μιαν–ιω, § 195, 4; theme μιαν-) stain, fut. μιανῶ, 1st aor. ἐμίᾶνα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. μεμίασμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐμιάνθην.
μιμνῄσκω (§ 197, suffix –ισκ– contrary to § 197) remind (mid. remember), fut. μνήσω, 1st aor. ἔμνησα, pf. mid. μέμνημαι remember (§ 535; for the subj. and opt. see § 227, note) (fut. pf. μεμνήσομαι shall remember, § 538, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐμνήσθην (§ 189) mentioned (§ 158, 3).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
μύζω (§ 195, 2; μυγ-) grumble, mutter, 1st aor. ἔμνξα.
μῡκῶμαι (-άομαι) bellow, 1st aor. iwvnaduny (§ 158, 3).
μῡ́ω shut the lips or eyes, 1st aor. ἔμυσα, 1st pf. μέμῡκα.
νέμ-ω (§ 193, 2) distribute, fut. νεμᾶ, 1st aor. ἕνειμα, 1st pf. νενέμηκα (§ 190), pf. mid. νενέμημαι (§ 190), 150 aor. pass. ἐνεμήθην (§ 190).
νέω (§ 193 note; theme νευ-, § 21), swim, fut. νεύσομαι (§ 507) or νευσοῦμαι (§ 214), 1st aor. ἔνευσα, 1st pf. νένευκα, vbl. νευστέος (§ 189).
νέω (§§ 193; 199, 2) heap up, 1st aor. ἔνησα, pf. mid. νένημαι.
νίζω (for *νιγ-ιω, § 195, 2) wash; other tenses from a stem νιβ– (which give a later pres. νίπ–τω, § 194), fut. νίψω, 1st aor. ἔνιψα, pf. mid. νένιμμαι (§§ 27, 1; 247), vbl. νιπτός.
νομίζω (§ 292, 6), think, fut. νομιῶ (§ 215), 1st aor. ἑνόμισα, 1st pf. νενόμικα, pf. mid. νενόμισμαι (§ 150), 1st aor. pass. ἐνομίσθην (§ 189), vbL. νοµιστέος.
νῶ (νῇς, νῇ, etc., § 199, 3) spin, fut. νήσω, 1st aor. ἔνησα, 1st aor. pass. ἐνήθην.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ξέω (usually contracted to ξῶ, etc., § 199, 2, note ; theme ξε– for *ξεσ-) scrape (1st aor. ἔξεσα, § 188), pf. mid. ἴξεσμαι (§ 189), vbl. ξεστός.
ξηραίνω (§ 292, 8; cf. ξηρός dry) dry, fut. ξηρανῶ (§ 213), 1st aor. ἑξήρᾱνα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. ἐξήρασμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐξηράνθην.
ξῡ́-ω (§ 193) polish, 1st aor. ἐξῡσα, 1st. aor. pass. ἐξύσθην (§ 189).
ὅζω (§ 195, 2; ὀδ-) smell, fut. ὀζήσω as if from *ὀζέω, 1st aor. ὤζησα.
οἴγ-ω (§ 193), οἴγ–νῡ–μι (§ 196, 5), usually ἀν–οίγω, ἀν–οίγνῡμι open, fut. ἀν–οίξω, 1st aor. ἀν–έῳξα (§ 172, note 1), 2d pf. ἀν–έῳγα (ἀνέῳχα), pi. mid. ἀν–έῳγμαι (§ 180), 1st aor. pass. ἀνεῴχθην (§ 172, note 1).
οἶδα (2d pf.) know (§ 259). See [ἰδ-].
οἰδῶ (-έω) swell, 1st aor. ῴδησα, 1st pf. ᾤδηκα.
οἰκτῑ́ρω (§ 195, 4; οἰκτιρ-) pity, 1st aor. ᾤκτῑρα (§ 204).
οἴομαι (§ 193), 1st per. often οἶμαι, impf. ᾤμην (probably pf. and plupt.), think, fut. οἰήσομαι (§ 190), 1st aor. pass. ᾤήθην (§ 158, 3).
οἴσω shall bear. Cf. φέρω.
οἴχ-ομαι (§ 193) be gone, fut. οἰχήσομαι (§ 190), 2d pf. οἴχωκα (§§ 179; 40).
ὀκέλλω (§ 195, 3; ὀκελ-) run ashore, 1st aor. ὤκειλα (§ 204).
ὀλισθ-άν-ω (§ 196, 2; ὀλισθ-) slip, 2d aor. ὤλισθον.
(ἀπ)ὄλλῡμι, (for *ὀλ–νῡ–μι, § 196, 5; theme ὁλ– and ὀλε-) also ἀπ–ολλύω destroy, lose (mid. perish), fut. (ἀπ-)ὁλῶ (§ 212, 1, for ὁλέσω, § 188), 1st aor. (ἀπ-)ὤλεσα (§ 188), 2d aor. (ἀπ-)ὠλόμην perished, 1st pf. (ἀπ-)ὀλώλεκα, 2d pf. (ἀπ-) ὅλωλα be lost, perish (§ 401, 2).
ὀλοφύρομαι (§ 195, 4) bewail, fut. ὁλοφυροῡμαι, 1st aor. ὠλοφῡράμην (§ 158, 3), 1st aor. pass. partic. ὁλοφῡρθείς made fo lament (§ 510).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the a bottom of the page.]
ὄμ-νῡ-μι and ὀμ-νύ-ω (§ 196, 5; theme ὀμ– and ὀμο-) swear, fut. ὁμοῦμαι (§ 507, for ὀμόσομαι, §§ 212, 1; 188), 1st aor. ὤμοσα (§ 188), 1st PL. ὁμάμοκα (§§ 170; 188); pf. mid. ὁμώμο(σγμαι, 1st aor. pass. ὠμό(σ)θην.
ὀμόργ–νῡ–μι (§ 196, 5) wipe, fut. ὀμόρξομαι, 1st aor. ὤμορξα, 1st aor. pass. (ἀπ-)ώμόρχθην.
ὀ-νί-νη-μι (§ 193, 3; reduplicated without regard to the o; theme ὀνη-, ὀνα-, § 13) benefit, fut. ὀνήσω, 1st aor. ὤνησα, 2d aor. mid. ὠνήμην derived benefit (opt. ὀναίμην, § 211, note, infin. ὄνασθαι), 1st aor. pass. ὠνήθην.
ὀξῡ́νω (§ 195, 4) sharpen, usually in the compound παρ–οξύνω provoke, irritate, fut. (παρ-)οξυνῶ (§ 213), 1st aor. (παρ-)ώξῡνα (§ 204), pi. mid. (παρ-)ώξυμμαι (§ 33), 1st aor. pass. (παρ-)ωβύνθην.
[root ὀπ-] see, fut. ὄψομαι (§ 507), pf. mid. ὤμμαι, 1st aor. pass. ὤφθην, cf. ὀρῶ.
ὀργίζω (§ 296, 6, f. ὀργή anger) enrage, regular, with fut. mid. ὀργιοῦμαι (§ 215), fut. pass. ὀργισθήσομαι (cf. § 519, note 2).
ὀρέγ-ω (§ 193) reach, fut. ὀρέξω, 1st aor. ὤρεξα, 1st aor. pass. ὠρέχθην.
ὀρύττω (§ 195, 1; theme ὀρυχ-) dig, fut. ὀρύξω, 1st aor. ὤρνξα, 2d pf.
ὀρ-ώρυχ-α (§ 179), pf. mid. ὀρώρυγμαι, 1st nor. pass. ὠρύχθην.
ὁρῶ(-άω) (§ 164) see (impf. ἑώρων, § 172, note 1), fut. supplied by ὄψομαι [όπ-], aor. supplied by 2d aor. εἶδον [ῖδ-], 1st pf. ἑόρᾱκα (plupf. ἑωρᾱ́κη, for ἡορ-, § 17), pf. mid. ἑώρᾱμαι, or supplied by ὤμμαι [ὀπ-], 1st aor. pass. (supplied) ὤφθην [ὀπ-], vbl. ὁρατός or (supplied) ὁπτέος.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
ὀσφραίνομαι (§ 292, 8; ὀσφρ-) smell, fut. ὀσφρῆσομαι (§ 190), 2d aor. mid. ὠσφρόμην, 1st aor. pass. ὠσφράνθην.
Οὐρῶ (-έω, § 292, 2) mingo, fut. οὐρήσομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἐούρησα (§ 172, 2), 1st pf. ἐούρηκα (§ 180).
ὀφείλω (5 195, 4; ὀφελ-) owe, fut. ὀφειλήσω (§ 190), 1st aor. ώφείλησα, (§ 190), 2d aor. ὤφελον (see § 588), 1st pf. ὠφείληκα (§ 190), 1st aor. pass. partic. ὀφειληθείς (§ 190).
ὀφλισκ–άν–ω (§§ 197; 196, 2; ὀφλ-) be guilty, incur, fut. ὀφλήσω (§ 190), 2d aor. ὦφλον (1st aor. ὤφλησα is doubtful), 1st pf. ὤφληκα.
παίζω (§ 195, 2; παιδ-) sport (fut. παίσοµαι, § 507), 1st aor. ἔπαισα, 1st pf. πέπαικα, pf. mid. πέπαισμαι (§ 189).
παλαίω (§ 193) wrestle, regular, but 1st aor. pass. ἐπαλαίσθην (§ 189).
παρα–νομῶ(-έω) transgress law, augments to παρ–εν– (§ 175, 1).
παροινῶ(-έω) commonly has double augment and reduplication (§§ 175, note; 181); as 1st aor. ἐ–παρ–ῴνησα, 1st pf. πε–παρ–ῴνηκα.
πάσχω (§ 197; for *παθ–σκω, § 30; the θ leaves its aspiration with the κ; theme πονθ-, πενθ-, παθ-, § 14, 1) experience, suffer, fut. πείσοµαι (for *πενθ–σομαι, § 34), 2 aor. ἔπαθον, 2 perf. πέπονθα (§ 219, 3).
παύ-ω (§ 193) stop, cause to cease, regular, but vbl. πανστέος (§ 189).
πείθ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme ποιθ-, πειθ., πιθ-, § 14, 9) persuade, fut. πείσω, 1st aor. ἔπεισα, 1st pf. πέπεικα (§ 494, 2), 2d pf. πέποιθα, trust (§ 494, 2), pf. mid. πέπεισµαι (§ 189, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐπείσθην (§ 189, note), vbls. πισ–τός, πεισ–τέος.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ιonic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
πεινῶ (-ῇς, -ῇ, etc., § 199, 3) hunger, fut. πεινήσω, etc., regular.
πέµπ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme ποµπ-, πεµπ-, § 14), send, fut. πέμψω, 1st aor. ἔπεμψα, 2d pi. πέποµφα (§ 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. πέπεµµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐπέμφθην, vbls. πεµπτός, πεµπτέος.
πεπαίνω (§ 292, 8) make soft, 1st aor. ἐπέπᾱνα (§ 204, note 2), 1st aor. pass. ἐπεπάνθην.
πέπρωται il is fated, see [πορ-].
περαίνω (§ 292, 8, cf. πέρας end) accomplish, fut. περανῶ, 1st aor. ἐπέρᾱνα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. πεπέρασμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐπεράνθην, vbls. περαντός, περαντέος.
πέρδ-οµαι (§ 193; πορδ-, περδ-, παρδ-, § 14, 1) pedo, fut. παρδήσομαι (§§ 190; 507), 2d aor. ἔπαρδον (§ 208), 2d pf. πέπορδα (§ 219, 3).
πετάν–νῡ–µι (§ 196, 5, for *πετασ–νῡµι), usually ἀνα–πετάννῡμι expand, fut. πετῶ (cf. § 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐπέτασα, pf. mid. πέπταµαι (reduplication contrary to § 178, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐπετάσθην (§ 189, note).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ιonic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
πέτ-οµαι (§ 193, 2; theme πετ-, πτ-, § 14) fly, fut. πτήσομαι (§ 38), 2d aor. ἑπτόμην (§ 208).
πέττω (§ 195, 1; πεπ-) cook, fut. πέψω, 1st aor. ἔπεψα, pf. mid. πέπεμμαν (§§ 27, 1; 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐπέφθην, vbl. πεπτός.
πήγ-νῡ-μι (§ 196, 5; theme πηγ-, παγ-, § 13), fix, fut. πήξω, 1st aor. ἔπηξα, 2d pf. πέπηγα be fixed (§ 494, 3), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (cf. § 514) ἐπάγην (§ 232, 1).
πιαίνω (§ 202, 8) fatten, fut. πιανῶ, st aor. ἐπίᾱνα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. πεπίασμαι (§ 247).
(ἐμ-)πί-μ-πλη-μι (§ 193, 3; for *πί-πλη-μι with sympathetic µ; theme πλη-, πλα-, § 13) fill, fut. (ἐμ-)πλήσω, 1st aor. (ἐν-)ἔπλησα, 1st pf. (ἐμ-)πέπληκα, pf. mid. (ἐμ-)πέπλησμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. (ἐν-)ἐπλήσθην (§ 180), vbl. (ἐμ-)πληστέος (§ 189).
(ἐμ-)πίμπρημι (§ 193, 3; for *πι–πρη–μι with sympathetic µ theme πρη-, πρα-, § 13) burn, fut. (ἐμ-)πρήσω, 1st aor. (ἐν-)ἔπρησα, pf. mid. (ἐμ-)πέπρημαι, 1st aor. pass. (ἐν-)ἐπρήσθην (§ 189).
πῑ́-ν-ω (§ 196, 1; theme πι– also related theme πο-, πω-, § 13) drink, fut. πίοµαι (§ 216), 2d aor. ἔπιον, 1st pf. πέπωκα, pf. mid. πέποµαι (§ 188, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐπόθην (§ 188, 1), vbls. πο-τός, ποτέος (§ 188,1).
πι-πρᾱ́-σκω (§ 197, 1; πρᾱ-) sell, 1st pf. πέπρᾱκα, pf. mid. πέπρᾱμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐπρᾱ́θην, other forms supplied by other verbs (§ 164).
πῑ́-πτ-ω (§ 193, 3; theme (ποτ-), πετ-, πτ-, § 14, and πτω– (πτη-), § 38,1) fall, fut. πεσοῦμαι (for *πετεομαι), 2d aor. ἔπεσον (for *ἐπεσον), 1st pf. πέ-πτω-κα (reduplication contrary to § 178, 1).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page].
Πλάττω (§ 195, 1; πλατ-) mold, form (fut. πλάσω), 1st aor. ἔπλασα, pf. mid. πέπλασμαι (§ 189, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐπλάσθην (5 189, note), vbl. πλαστός (§ 189, note).
πλέκ-ω (§ 193; theme πλοκ-, πλεκ-, πλακ– § 14, 1) plait, knit (fut. πλέξω), 1st aor. ἔπλεξα, 2d pf. πέπλοχα (§ 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. πέπλεγµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐπλέχθην, 2d aor. pass. ἐπλάκην (§ 232, 2).
πλέω (§§ 193, note; 199, 2; πλευ-; πλυ-; §§ 14, 2; 21) sail, fut. πλεύσομαι or πλευσοῦμαι (§ 214), 1st aor. ἔπλευσα, 1st pf. πέπλευκα, pf. mid. πέπλευσµαι (§ 189) (1st aor. pass. ἔπλεύσθην, § 189, late), vbl. πλευστέος (§ 189).
πλήττω (§ 195, note 2; theme πληγ-, πλαγ-, § 13) strike, fut. πλήξω, 1st aor. ἔπληξα, 2d pf. πέπληγα, pf. mid. πέπληγµαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐπλήγην (contrary to § 232, 1), but in composition regularly –επλάγην (§ 232, 1).
πλῡ́νω (§ 195, 4) wash, fut. πλυνῶ, 1st aor. ἔπλῡνα (§ 204), pf. mid. πέπλυµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐπλύθην.
πνέω (§§ 193, note; 199, 2; πνευ-, πνυ-, §§ 14, 2; 21) breathe, blow, fut. πνεύσομαι and πνευσοῦμαι (§ 214), 1st aor. ἔπνευσα, 1st pf. πέπνευκα.
πνῑ́γ-ω (§ 193; πνῑγ-, πνιγ-, § 18) choke, fut. πνίξω, 1st aor. ἔπνιξα, pf. mid. πέπνῑγμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐπνίγην (§ 232, 1).
ποθῶ(-έω) desire, has forms both with ε and η (cf. § 188), as fut. ποθήσω or ποθέσοµαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἐπόθησα or ἐπόθεσα.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
πρᾱ́ττω (§ 195, note 2; πρᾱγ-) do, fut. πρᾱ́ξω, 1st aor. ἔπρᾱξα, 2d pf. πέπρᾱγα, rarely πέπρᾱχα (§ 219, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐπρᾱ́χθην, vhl. πρᾱκ–τέος (§ 25).
[root πρια– (cf. πέρνημι)] buy, only 2d aor. ἐπριάμην (see § 257 and § 211, note).
πρῑ́ω (§ 193) saw, 1st aor. ἔπρῑσα, pf. mid. πέπρῑσμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐπρῑ́σθην (§ 189).
πτάρ-νυ-μαι (§ 196, 5) sneeze, 2d aor. ἕπταρον.
πτήσσω (§ 105, 1; theme πτηκ-, πτακ– § 13) cower, 1st aor. ἕπτηξα, 2d pf. ἕπτηχα (§ 219, 1).
πτύσσω (§ 195, 1; πτυχ-) fold, fut. πτύξω, 1st aor. ἕπτυξα, pf. mid. ἔπτυγμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐπτύχθην.
πυνθάνοµαι (§ 196, 2; theme πευθ, πυθ-, § 14, 2) learn, inquire, fut. πεύσομαι (for *πευθ–σομαι, § 30), 2d aor. ἐπυθόμην (§ 158, 3), pf. πέπυσμαι (§ 189, note), vbl. πενστέος.
ῥάπ-τω (§ 194; ῥαφ-) stitch, fut. ῥάψω, 1st aor. ἔρραψα, pf. mid. ἔρραμμαι (§ 97, 1), 2d aor. pass. ἐρράφην, vbl. ῥαπτός.
ῥάττω = ἀράττω q.v., fut. ῥάξῳ, 1st nor. ἔρραξα, 1st aor. pass. ἐρράχθην.
ῥέω (§ 193, note; theme ῥευ-, ῥυ-, §§ 14, 2; 21) flow, fut. ῥεύσομαι and ῥυήσομαι (§ 519, note 2), 1st pf. ἐρρύηκα (§ 190), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐρρύην, vbl. ῥυτός,
[Attic principal parts in full faced type. Ιonic and poetic forms at the ‘bottom of the page.]
[root ῥη– pf. εἴρηκα have said, pf. mid. εἴρημαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐρρήθην, see εἴρω.
ῥήγ-νῡ-μι (§ 196, 5; theme ῥηγ-, ῥαγ-, § 13, and a stronger form ῥωγ-) break, fut. ῥήξω, 1st aor. ἔρρηξα, 2d pf. ἔρρωγα am broken (§ 494, 3), pf. mid. (rare) ἔρρηγμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐρράγην (§ 232, 1).
ῥῑγῶ(-όω?) shiver, in pres. contracts to ω and ῳ instead of ου and οι; as opt. ῥῑγῴην, infin. ῥῑγῶν, cf. δηλῶ (§ 250), fut. ῥῑγώσω, 1st aor. ἐρρῑ́γωσα.
ῥῑ́πτ-ω (8 194; ῥῑπ-; ῥιπ-, § 13) and ῥιπτῶ (-έω, § 190) throw, fut. ῥίψω, 1st aor. ἔρρῑψα, 2d pf. ἔρρῑφα (§ 219, 1), pf. mid. ἔρρῑμμαι (§ 27, 1), 2d aor. pass. ἐρρίφην.
ῥών-νῡ-μι (§ 196, note) strengthen, 1st aor. ἔρρωσα, pf. mid. ἔρρωμαι (partic. ἐρρωμένος strong, as an adjective), st aor. pass. ἐρρώσθην (§ 189).
σαίρω (§ 195, 4; theme σηρ-, σαρ-; § 13) clean off; 2d pf. σέσηρα (§ 535) show the teeth, grin.
σαλπίζω (§ 195, note 1; σαλπιγγ-) sound a trumpet, 1st aor. ἐσάλπιγξα.
σάττω (§ 195, note 2; σαγ-) pack, load, 1st aor. ἔσαξα, pf. mid. σέσαγµαι.
σβέν-νῡ-μι (§ 196, note) extinguish, fut. σβέσω (§ 188), 1st aor. ἔσβεσα (§ 188), 1st pf. (ἀπ-)ἔσβηκα (§ 218, 2) intrans. have gone out (§ 494, 3), 1st aor. pass. ἐσβέσθην, and 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514), (ἀπ-)ἔσβην went out.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
σέβ-ω (§ 193) more often σέβομαι (§ 138, 3) revere, 1st aor. ἐσέφθην (§ 158, 3).
σεί-ω (§ 193) shake, fut. σείσῳ, etc., regular, but pf. mid. σέσεισμαι (§ 189) and 1st aor. pass. ἐσείσθην (§ 189).
onpatve (§ 202, 8; cf. σῆμα sign) show, fut. σημανῶ (§ 213), 1st aor. ἐσήμηνα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. σεσήµασμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐσημάνθην.
σήπ– (§ 198,1; theme σηπ-, σαπ-, § 13) rot (fut. σήψω), 2d pf. σέσηπα be rotten (8 494, 2), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐσάπην.
σκάπ-τω (§ 191: σκαφ-) dig, fut. σκάψω, 1st aor. ἔσκαψα, 2d Pf. ἔσκαφα (§ 219, 1), pf. mid. ἔσκαμμαι (§ 247), 2d aor. pass. (κατ-)ἐσκάφην.
σκδάν-νῡ-μι (§ 196, note) scatter, fut. σκεδῶ (cf. § 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐσκέδασα, pf. mid. ἐσκέδασμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐσκεδάσθην (§ 189).
σκέπ-τοµαι (§ 194; σκεπ-) view (in Attic prose the present is usually supplied (§ 104) by σκοπῶ(-έω), regular), fut. σκέψομαι, 1st aor. ἐσκεψάμην (§ 105, 3), pi. ἔσκεμμαι (§ 247), vbl. σκεπτέος.
σκήπ-τω (§ 191; σκηπ-) prop, fut. σκήψω, 1st aor. ἔσκηψα, pf. mid. ἔσκημμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐσκήφθην.
σκώπ-τω (§ 194; σκωπ-) jeer, fut. σκώψομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἔσκωψα. (pf. mid. ἔσκωμμαι, § 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐσκώφθην.
σμῶ (σμῇς, σμῇ, etc., § 199, 3) smear, otherwise regular, fut. σµήσω, etc.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
σπείρω (§ 195, 4; theme σπερ– σπαρ-, § 14, 1) sow, fut. σπερῶ, 1st aor. ἔσπειρα, pf. mid. ἔσπαρμαι (§ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐσπάρην (§ 232, 2), vbl. σπαρτός.
σπένδ-ω (§ 193), pour libation, fut. σπείσω (for *σπενδ–σω, § 34), 1st aor. ἔσπεισα, pi. mid. ἔσπεισμαι (§ 189, note).
σπῶ(-άω, § 188) draw, fut. σπάσω, 1st aor. ἕσπασα, 1st pf. ἕσπακα, pl. mid. ἕσπασμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐσπάσθην (§ 180), vbl. σπαστός (§ 189).
στέλλω (§ 195, 3; theme στελ-, σταλ-, § 14, 1) send, fut. στελῶ (§ 213), 1st aor. ἔστειλα (§ 204), 1st pf. ἕσταλκα (§ 218, 4), pf. mid. ἔσταλμαι (§ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐστάλην (§ 232, 2).
στενάζω (§ 195, 2; στεναγ-) groan, fut. στενάξω, 15 aor. ἐστέναξα.
στέργ–ω (§ 193, 2; theme στοργ-, στεργ-, § 14) love, fut. στέρξω, 1st aor. ἔστερξα, 2d pf. ἔστοργα (§ 219, 3).
(ἀπο-)στερῶ (-έω, § 292, 2) and στερ-ίσκω (§ 197) deprive, also a pres. mid. στέροµαι be deprived, be in want, fut. στερήσω, etc., regular.
στίζω (§ 195, 2; στιγ-) prick, fut. στίξω, 1st aor. ἔστιξα, pf. mid. ἔστιγμαι, vbl. στικτός (§ 25).
στόρ-νῡ-μι (§ 196, 5) spread, in prose usually στρώννῡμι (§ 38, 1) q.v., fut. στορῶ (for στορέσω, § 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐστόρεσα (§ 188).
στρέφ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme στροφ-, στρεφ-, στραφ-, § 14, 1) turn, fut. στρέψω, 1st aor. ἔστρεψα, 2d pf. ἔστροφα (§ 219, 3), pf. mid. ἔστραμμαι (§ 224, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐστρέφθην (mostly epic, rare in prose), usually 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐστράφην (§ 232, 2), vbl. στρεπτός.
στρών–νῡ-µι (§ 196, note) spread (cf. στόρνῡμι), fut. στρώσω, 1st aor. ἔστρωσα, pf. mid. ἔστρωμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐστρώθην.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
συρίττω whistle, see συρίζω below.
σύρ–ω (§ 193) draw (fut. συρῶ), 1st aor. ἔσῡρα, 1st pf. σέσυρκα, pf. mid. σέσυρµαι [2d aor. pass. ἐσύρην, late].
Σφάζω (§ 195, 2; aay), in prose commonly σφάττω (8 195, note 2) day, fut. σφάξω, st aor. ἔσφαξα, pf. mid. ἔσφαγμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐσφάγην, vbl. σφακτός.
σφάλλω (§ 195, 3; σφαλ-) trip, deceive, fut. σφαλῶ, 1st aor. ἔσφηλα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. ἔσφαλμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐσφάλην.
σῴζω (for *σω-ιζω, § 292, 6; cf. σῶς safe) save, fut. σώσω (contr. from σαώσω, see σαόω), 1st aor. ἔσῳσα (and ἔσωσα, contr. from ἐσάωσα, see σαόω), pf. σέσῳκα (and σέσωκα, from σαόω), pf. mid. σέσῳσµαι (§ 189, and σέσωμαι, contr. from σεσάωµαι, see σαόω), 1st aor. pass. ἐσώθην (contr. from ἐσαώθην, see σαόω), vbl. σῳστέος (§ 189).
ταράττω (§ 103, 1; ταραχ-) disturb, fut. ταράξω (fut. mid. often pass., § 515, 1), 1st aor. ἑτάραξα, pf. mid. τετάραγμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐταράχθην.
τάττω (§ 103, note 2; ταγ-) arrange, fut. τάξω, 1st aor. ἔταξα, 2d pf. τέταχα (§ 219, 1), pf. mid. τέταγµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐτάχθην, vbls. τακτός, τακτίος (§ 25).
τείνω (§ 105, 4; theme τεν-, τα– § 14, note) stretch, fut. τενῶ, 1st aor. ἔτεινα, 1st pl. τέτακα (§ 218, 4), pf. mid. τέταμαι (§ 224, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐτάθην (for *ἐ-τν-θην, § 14, note, contrary to § 231, 4), vbls. τατός, τατέος (§ 14, note).
τεκµαέροµαι judge, infer, fut. τεκμαροῦμαι, 1st aor. ἐτεκμηράμην (§ 158, 3).
(ἀνα-)τέλλω (§ 195, 3; theme τελ-, ταλ-, § 14, 1) cause to rise, rise, 1st aor. (ἀν-)ἔτειλα, pf. mid. (ἐν-)τέταλμαι (§ 224, note).
τελῶ (-έω for *τελεσ–ιω, cf. τέλος end) finish, fut. τελῶ (§ 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐτέλεσα (§ 188), pf. τετέλεκα (§ 155), pf. mid. τετέλεσμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐτελέσθην (5 189), vhL. τελεστέος (§ 189).
τέµ-νω (§ 196, 1; τεμ-, ταμ-, § 14, 1) cut, fut. τεμῶ, 2d aor. ἕτεμον, 1st pf. τέτµηκα (§ 218, 3), pf. mid. τέτμημαι (§ 224, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐτμήθην (§ 38, 1), vbL. τµη–τέος (§ 38, 1).
τέρπ–ω (§ 193, 2; τερπ-, ταρπ-, § 11, 1) delight, fut. τέρψω, 1st aor. ἕτερψα, 1st nor. pass. ἐτέρφθην.
τετραίνω (§ 195, 4, τετραν-) bore; also tenses from theme τερ-, τρη-, § 38, 1, 1st aor. ἐτέτρᾱνα (§ 204, note 2), also ἕτρησα, pf. mid. τέτρηµαι (τρη-).
τήκ-ω (§ 109, 1; theme τηκ-, τακ-, § 13) melt, fut. τήξω, 1st aor. ἔτηξα, 2d pf. τέτηκα am melted (§ 494, 2), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514), ἐτάκην (§ 232, 1) melted, vbl. τηκ–τός.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
τέ-θη-μι (§ 193,3; theme θη-, θε-, § 13) put (inflection § 251), fut. θήσω, aor. ἔθηκα (§ 211, 3, inflection § 255), 1st pf. τέθηκα, pf. mid. τέθειμαι, but usually supplied by κεῖμαι (§ 264), st aor. pass. ἐτέθην (§ 40), vbls. θετός, θετέος.
τίκτω (for *τι-τκ–ω, § 193, 3; theme τοκ-, τεκ-, τκ- § 14) beget, bring forth, fut. τέξω, θὰ aor. ἔτεκον, 2d pf. τέτοκα (§ 219, 3), 1st aor. pass. ἐτέχθην.
tί-νω (§ 196, 1; theme τει-, τι-, § 14, 2) pay, fut. τείσω, 1st aor. ἔτεισα, 1st pf. τέτεικα, pf. mid. τέτεισμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐτείσθην (§ 189), vbl. τωστέος (§ 189).
τι-τρώ-σκω (§ 197, 1; τρω-) wound, fut. τρώσω, lst aor. ἔτρωσα, pf. mid. τέτρωμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐτρώθην.
τρέπ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme τροπ-, τρεπ-, τραπ-, § 14, 1) turn, fut. τρέψω, 1st aor. ἔτρεψα, 2d aor. mid, ἐτραπόμην (§ 208) turned, fled, 2d pf. τέτροφα (sometimes possibly τέτραφα), pf. mid. τέτραμµαι (§ 224, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐτρέφθην and 2d aor. pass. usually as intrans. (§ 514) ἐτράπην (§ 232, 2) turned, vbl. tρεπτέος.
τρέφ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme τροφ-, τρεφ-, τραφ-, § 14, 1; for *θροφ-, etc., § 41) support, feed, rear, fut. θρέψω (§ 41), 1st aor. ἔθρεψα (§ 41), 2d pf. τέτροφα (§ 219, 3), pf. mid. τέθραμμαι (§ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐπράφην (§ 232, 2).
τρέχ-ω (§ 193; theme θρεχ-, § 41) run; other tenses supplied (§ 164) from theme δραμ-; fut. δραμοῦμαι, 2d aor. ἔδραμον, pf. δεδράµηκα (§ 190), pf. mid. διδράµηµαι (§ 190), but vbl. θρεκτέος.
τρέω (§ 199, 2) tremble, 1st aor. ἔτρεσα (§ 188).
τρῑ́βω (§ 193; τρῑβ-, τριβ rub, fut. τρίψω, lst aor. ἔτρῑψα, 2d pf. τέτριφα, pf. mid. τέτρῑμμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐτρῑφθην, but more often 2d aor. pass. ἐτρίβην.
τρύχ-ω, τρυχῶ(-όω), and τρύ–ω wear away, exhaust, all regular, but see § 164.
τρώγ-ω (§ 193; τρωγ-, τραγ-) gnaw, fut. τράξοµαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔτραγov, pf. mid. τέτρωγμαι, vbl. τρωκτός.
πνγχάνω (§ 196, 2; theme τευχ-, τυχ-, § 14, 2) hit, happen, fut. τεύξομαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔτυχον (§ 208), 1st pf. τετύχηκα (§ 190).
τύπ-τω (8 194; τυπ-) strike, fut. τυπτήσω (§§ 190; 519, note 2), other tenses usually supplied (§ 164) from παίω or πατάσσω; pass. supplied from πλήττω.
τόφ-ω (§193; theme θυφ-, § 41) raise smoke, smoke, pf. τέθυμμαι, 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐτύφην.
ὑπισχ-νοῦμαι (-έομαι, § 196, 4) promise (§ 508), fut. ὑποσχήσομαι, 2d aor. ὑπεσχόμην, fut. ὑπέσχημαι; of. ἔχω and ἴσχω.
ὑφαίνω (§ 195, 4; ὑφαν-) weare, fut. ὑφανῶ, 1st aor. ὕφηνα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. ὕφασμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ὑφάνθην, vbl ὑφαντός.
ὔ-ω (§ 193) rain, fut. ὔσω, 1st aor. ὖσα, pf. mid. ὖσμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ὖσθην (§ 189).
[Attic principal parts in fullfaced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page].
φαίνω (for *φανίω, § 195, 4; theme φαν-) show, fut. φανῶ, 1st aor. ἔφηνα (§ 204, note 2), 1st pf. πέφαγκα, 2d pf. πέφηνα have appeared (§ 494, 2), pf. mid. πέφασμαι (see § 247), 2d aor. pass. as intraus. (§ 514) ἐφάνην appeared.
φά-σκ-ω (§ 197) say, only pres. and impf.; see φημί.
φείδ-ομαι (§ 193, 2; theme φειδ-, φιδ-) spare, fut. φείσομαι (for *φειδσοµαι, § 30), 1st aor. ἐφεισάμην, vbl. φεισ–τέος (§ 26).
φέρ–ω (§ 193, 9) carry (see § 164), fut. supplied by οἴσω, aor. supplied by ἤνεγκα (§ 207, note 1) or 2d aor. ἤνεγκον (theme ἐνεγκ-), 2d pf. ἐν-ήνοχ-α (§§ 179; 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. ἐν-ήνεγ-μαι (§ 224, note), 1st aor. pass. ἠνέχθην, vbls. οἰστός, οἰστέος. Cf. [ἐνεκ-].
φεύγ-ω (§ 193, 2; φευς-, φυς-, § 14, 2), also rarely φυγγάνω (§ 196, 2) flee, fut. φεύξομαι or φευξοῦμαι (§ 214), 2d aor. ἔφυγον (5 208), 2d pf. πέφευγα (§ 219, note 1).
φη-μί (§ 193; φη-, φα-, § 13) say (inflection § 263), fut. φήσω, 1st aor. ἔφησα, vbls. φατός, φατέος.
φθά-νω (§ 196, 2; φθη-, φθα-, § 13) anticipate, fut. φθήσομαι (§ 507; doubtful is φθάσῳ), 1st nor. ἔφθασα, 2d aor. ἔφθην (like ἔστην, § 257).
φθείρω (§ 195, 4; theme φθορ-, φθερ-, φθαρ-, § 14, 1) corrupt, fut. φθερῶ, 1st aor. ἔφθειρα, 1st pf. ἕφθαρκα (§ 218, 4), but commonly 2d pf. δι-έφθορα (§ 219, 3), pf. mid. ἕφθαρμαι (§ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. (cf. § 514), ἐφθάρην (§ 232, 2).
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the bottom of the page.]
φθί-νω (§ 196, 1), waste, decay, fut. φθίσω, 1st aor. ἔφθισα, 2d aor. mid. ἐφθίμην. perished, pf. mid. ἄφθυμαι.
φιλῶ(-έω) love (inflection § 219), fut. φιλήσω, etc. regular.
φράγ-νῡ-μι (§ 196, 5) fence = φράττω, q.v.
φράξω (§ 195, 2; φραδ-) point out, declare, tell (mid. consider), fut. φράσω (§30), 1st aor. ἔφρασα, 1st pf. πέφρακα, pf. mid. πέφρασμαι (§ 189, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐφράσθην (§ 189, note), vbl. φραστέος (§ 189).
φράττω (§ 195, 1; theme φρακ– and φραγ-, § 195, note 2) fence [fut. φράξω or φάρξω (§ 38)], 1st aor. ἔφραξα or ἔφαρξα (§ 38), pf. mid. πέφραγµαι or πέφαργμαι (§ 38), 1st aor. pass. ἐφράχθην, vbl. φρακ–τός or φαρκ–τός (§ 38).
φρίττω (§ 195, 1; φρῑκ-) shudder [fut. φρίξω], 1st aor. ἔφριξα, 1st pf. πέφρῑκα am in a shudder (§ 535).
φρῡ́γ–ω (§ 193) roast, fut. φρῡ́ξω, 1st aor. ἔφρῡξα, pf. mid. πέφρῡγμαι, vbl. φρυκτός.
φνλάττω (§ 195, 1; φυλακ-) guard, fut. φυλάξω, 1st aor. ἐφύλαξα, 2d pf. πεφύλαχα, Df. mid. πεφύλαγμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐφυλάχθην, vbl. φυλακτέος.
φύρ-ω (§ 108) mix, pf. mid. πέφυρµαι; also φυρῶ(-άω) regular.
φῡ́-ω (§ 193 φῡ-, φυ-, § 13) produce, fut. φῡ́σω, 1st aor. ἔφῡσα, 2d aor. ἔφῡν grew, be by nature (§ 494, 1), 1st pf. πέφῡκα be (§ 494, 3), vbI. φυτός.
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetie forms at the ‘bottom of the page.]
(ἀνα)χάζω (§ 105, 2; χαδ-) withdraw (fut. χάσοµαι, § 507), 1st aor. ἔχασα. The verb is mostly poetic; cf. κέκαδον.
χαίρω (§ 195, 4; χαρ-) rejoice, fut. χαιρήσω (§ 190), 1st pf. κεχάρηκα (§ 190), pf. mid. κέχαρµαι and κεχάρηµαι (§ 190), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐχάρην rejoiced, vbl. χαρτός.
χαλῶ(-έω, § 188) loosen, lst aor. ἐχάλασα, lst aor. pass. ἐχαλάσθην (§ 189).
χέζω (§ 195, 2; theme χοδ-, χεδ-, § 14) caco, fut. χεσοῦμαι (for *χεδσοῦμαι, §§ 30; 214), 1st aor. ἔχεσα, rarely with variable vowel (cf. § 201 b) ἔχεσον, 2d pf. κέχοδα (§ 219, 3).
χέω (§ 193, note; § 199, 2; theme χευ-, χυ-, § 14,2) pour, fut. χέω (§ 216), aor. ἔχεα (§ 207, note 1), 1st pf. κέ-χυ-κα, pf. mid. κέχυµαι (§ 224, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐχύθην, vbl. χυτός.
χρή it is necessary, see § 267.
χρῑ́ω (§ 193) anoint, sting, fut. χρῑ́σω, 1st aor. ἔχρῑσα, pf. mid. κέχρῑμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐχρῑ́σθην (§ 189), vbl. χρῑστός (§ 189).
χρῴζω (for χρω-ίζω, § 292, 6, cf. χρώ-ς complexion) color, stain, pf. mid. κέχρῳσμαι (§ 189), 1st aor. pass. ἐχρῴσθην (§ 189).
χρῶ (§ 199, 3) give oracles, fut. χρήσω, 1st aor. ἔχρησα, 1st pf. κέχρηκα, pf. mid. κέχρηµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐχρήσθην (§ 189). ἀποχρῶ be sufiicient (usually impersonal ἀποχρῇ), like χρῶ.
χρῶμαι (χρῇ, χρῆται, etc., § 199, 3) use (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. χρήσομαι, 1st aor. ἐχρησάμην, Pf. κέχρηµαι, lst aor. pass. (§ 510) ἐχρήσθην (§ 189), vbls. χρηστός, χρηστέος (§ 189).
χῶ (-όω) heap up, fut. χώσω, lst aor. ἔχωσα, 1st pf. κέχωκα. pf. mid. κέχωσμαι (§ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐχώσθην (§ 189), vbl. χωστός (§ 189).
ψεύδ-ω (§ 193, 2) deceive (mid. lie), fut. ψεύσω (§ 30), Ist aor. ἕψευσα (§ 30), pf. mid. ἔψενσμαι (§ 189, note), 1st aor. pass. ἐψεύσθην (§ 189, note).
ψύχ-ω (§ 193) cool, fut. ψῡ́ξω, 1st aor. ἔψῡξα, pf. mid. ἔψῡγμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐψῡ́χθην and 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐψύχην cooled.
ψῶ (ψῇς, ψῇ, etc. § 199, 3) rub (usually in composition: as ἀπο–ψῶ), fut. ψήσω, etc., regular; pf. mid. usually supplied from ψήχω (regular), ἔψηγμαι.
ὡδῶ (-έω, § 190; theme ὠθ-, for *ϝωθ, § 2 a) push (inpf. ἑώθουν, § 172, 2), fut. ὥσω (for *ὠθ-σω, § 30), 1st aor. ἕωσα (§ 172, 2), pf. mid. ἔωσμαι (§§ 180; 189, note), 150 aor. pass. ἑώσθην (§§ 172, 2; 189, note), vbl. ὠστέος (§ 189).
ὠνοῦμαι (-έομαι) buy (impf. ἑωνούμην, § 172, 2), fut. ὠνήσομαι, aor. supplied (§ 164) by ἐπριάμην (§ 257), pf. ἐώνημαι (§ 180), Ist aor. pass. ἑωνήθην (§ 172, 2), vbls. ὠνητός, ὠνητέος.
12 a. Vau, although not written in the received text of the Homeric poems, must, from evidence of the metre and of early inscriptions, have been a live sound when these poems were composed. Thus, it appears to have been sounded at the beginning of about forty words, the most important of which are: ἄστν town, ἄναξ lord, ἁνδάνω please, εἴκοσι twenty (cf. Lat. viginti), ἕο, οἶ, ἕ himself, ἔξ six, root ἐπ– (ἔποσ word, εἶπον said), ἔργον work, root ἑσ– (ἔννυμι close, ἐσθής clothing; cf. Lat. vestis), ἔτοσ year (cf. Lat. vetus), ἠδύσ sweet (see § 36 a), root ἰδ– (ἰδεῐν see, oἶδα know; cf. Lat. vid-ere), οἶκοσ hause (cf. Lat. vicus), οἶνοσ wine (cf. Lat. vinum), ὅs, ἥ, ὅν his. See also § 36a and § 172, 2.
25 a. In Ionic (Herodotus) a diphthong ωυ occurs ; thus, ωὑτός for ό αὑτός the same. This diphthong ωυ is almost unknown in Attic Greek.
38 a. Ionic sometimes has a smooth breathing where Attic has the rough: thus, ἠέλιος sun, Attic ᾕλιος; οὖρος boundary, Attic ὅρος.
413 a. In Homer a long vowel or a diphthong sometimes stands for a short vowel, especially in words which would otherwise be excluded from the verse: thus, ἡγάθεος very holy for ἀγάθεος, οὐλόμενος accursed for ὀλόμενος.
515 a. Ionic regularly has η for original ᾱ even after ε, ι, and ρ: thus, , γενεή, σοφίη, πρῆγμα. Not so, however, in the cases covered by § 15, 1.
618 a. In Ionic, contraction is much less frequent than in Attic. Thus, we have πλόος for Attic πλοῡς, γένεα. for Attic γένη. Eo, εου, if contracted, give ευ (ποιεῡμεν we do for ποιέ-ομεν, ποιεῡσι they do for ποιέ-ουσι), but often remain uncontracted.
722 a. Doubled Consonants in Homer. In Homer we frequently find a doubled consonant where Attic would have a single consonant: thus, ἔλλαβε took (Attic ἔλαβε), ἀγάννιφος snowy, ἔδδειαε feared (Attic ἔδειβε). In many cases this doubling is to be explained by the assimilation of another consonant. Thus, ἀγάννιφος is for * ἀγα-(σ)νιφος and ἔδδεισε is for * ἐδ (φ) εισε.
In some words Homer has both the single and double forms: thus, ὀπίδδω and ὀπίδω backward, Ἀχιλλεύς and Ἀχιλεύς Achilles.
830 a. More properly a lingual mute before σ is first assimilated to the σ, and the two sigmas later become one. In Homer we often find the older form with σς: thus, ποσ-σί feet (dat.), Attic ποσί (from *ποδ-σι)
9In Homer the older form with σσ is frequently kept. Thus, ἔπεσ-σι words (dat.), Attic ἔπεσι.
10At the beginning of several of the words enumerated in § 2 a, σ as well as vau has been lost: thus, in ήδύς sweet, formerly *σFᾱδυς. (cf. English sweet, Latin sua (d) vis);ὄς his, formerly *σFος. (cf. Latin suus).
1141 a. In Ionic we sometimes find a transfer of aspiration: κιθών shirt, ένθῡτα there, for Attic χιτών, ένταῡθα.
1244 a. Final αι in the verb endings –μαι, – σαι, – ται, – σθαι are occasionally elided in Homer ; so also final οι in μοι and σοί.
1344, 2 a. Rarely Homer elides –ι in the dative singular of the third declension; oftener in the dative plural.
1444, 4 a. Herodotus retains the smooth mute: ἀπ’ ὧν, κατ-ίημι.
1553 a. In Homer even before a single liquid at the beginning of some words a syllable with a short vowel is long.
ἀπὸ μεγάροιο (ᴗ _ ᴗ ᴗ _ ᴗ) from the hall.
ὄρεї νιφόεντι (ᴗ ᴗ _ ᴗ ᴗ _ ᴗ) snowy mountain (dat.).
A good many of these instances are to be explained by the loss of another consonant. Thus, νιφόεντι stands for *(δ) νιφοεντι (cf. § 22 a).
b. In Homer one of the consonants that make the preceding syllable long may be the unwritten vau (F) (see § 2 a). So κακόν Fέπος evil word (ᴗ _ ᴗ ᴗ).
1654 a. In Homer a mute and a liquid almost always make the preceding syllable long: thus, τὰ πρῶτα (_ _ ᴗ) the first.
17In Homer (and lyric poetry) έν, εἰς, ἐξ, and ὡς, if they follow the words they modify, take an acute accent: thus, κακῶν ἔξ from the base, θεὸς as a god.
1876 a. Homer sometimes uses also -θεν as an ending of the genetive singular: thas: ἀπὸ Τροίηθεν from Troy, ἐξ ἁλόθεν out of the sea.
b. For the dative plural of the consonant declension Homer uses also ending -εσσι. (See § 99 a).
c. Epic Case ending φι(ν). – Epic portry has a peculiar case ending φι(ν), wich servers as genetive or dative either singular or plural: thas βίηφι with violence, ἀπ’ ὄχεσφι from the car, παρὰ ναῦ-φιν beside the ships.
19Моя версия разнесения столбцов в таблице. Согласуйте, пожалуйста.
2083 a. In Ionic long a of the singular of the first declension is always changed to η: e.g., χώρη, γενεή, σοφίη, μοίρης for Attic χώρᾱ, γερεᾱ́, σοφίᾱ, μοίρᾱς (see § 15 a).
21 84 a. In the genitive plural Homer has the older form –ᾱ́ων (πυλᾱ́ων) and rarely the Ionic –έων (πυλέων). Cf. § 17.
b. In the dative plural Ionic has –ῃσι (γλώσσῃσι); Homer uses also, though rarely, –ῃς (πέτρῃς to rocks).
2287 a. In the genitive singular masculine, Homer has the earlier (and proper) form –ᾱo (Ἀτρείδᾱo), and sometimes the Ionic form Ἀτρείδεω, the accent remaining as in the original form (see § 17).
2388 a. The Ionic generally has the uncontracted forms; thus, Βορέης, Ἑρμεᾷ for Attic Βορρᾶς, Ἑρμῇ.
2490 a. In the genetive singular Homer has οιο, -οο (rarely), and –ου: thas πολέμοιο, πολέμοο, πολέμου of war.
b. In the genetive and dative dual Homer has -οιιν for Attic οιν: thas ἵπποιιν, from ἴππος horse.
c. In thedative plural Homer usually has οισι; Herodotus always has it: thas ἀνθρώποισι to men.
2592 a. This form of declension is confined almost wholly to Attic. In Ionic most of these words follow the ordinary second declension. So, for Attic λεώς, νεώς, κάλως, λαγώς Ionic h λᾱός, νηός, κάλος, λαγωός or λαγός.
2699 a. In the dative plural Homer has –σι (ν) and –εσσι(ν), sometimes σσι(ν) after vowels. Thus, he has ποσσί (*ποσ-σί), ποσί and ποδεσσι with feet, νέκυ-σσι to corpses. Very rarely we find -εσι: χείρ-εσι with hands.
b. In the genitive and dative dual Homer has –οιιν for Attic –οιν. Thus, ποδοῖιν of or with two feet.
27102 a. In Ionic a few stems in –ωτ– have forms without τ (cf. § 103, 2 a). Thas χρώς skin, gen. sing. χροός, dat. χροῑ́, acc. χρόα; ἱδρώς sweat, dat. sing. ἱδρῷ.
28103, 2 a. In Ionic κέρας and τέρας have no forms with τ. Thus, Homer has dat. sing, κέραι, nom. plur. κέρᾱ, gen. plur. κεράων, dat. plur. κέρασι and κεράεσσι. Herodotus changes α to ε before a vowel (cf. § 106 c), but does not contract: thus, τέρεος, κέρεΐ, κέρεα, κερέων. Of φῶς light Homer uses only the uncontracted form φάος (sometimes wrongly written φόως), dat. φάει, plur φᾱ́εα.
29105 a. In Homer the form of the stem with ε is more frequently used than in Attic: thus, πατέρος, πατέρι; ᾱνέρα, ᾱνέρες, etc. (Attic πατρός, etc.). In θυγάτηρ, however, we sometimes find θύγατρα, θύγατρες and always θυγατρῶν. From ἀνήρ he has in the dative plural both ἀνδράσι and ἄνδρεδδι.
30106 a. Homer and Herodotus regularly have the uncontracted forms. Thus, θάρσεος of courage, θάρσεΐ with courage. The accusative plural κλέα, which sometimes occurs in Homer, is probably for κλέε’.
b. In the dative plural Homer has three different forms: thus, βελέεσσι (for *βελεσ-εσσι, § 76 b), βέλεσ-σι and βελεσι (§ 35) from βέλος missile.
c. In Homer and Herodotus words with stems in –ασ– are usually uncontracted: thus, γήραος of old age. A few words have ε instead of α in the stem, except in the nominative: thus, οὖδας ground, gen. sing. οῦδεος; κῶας fleece, dat. plur. κώεσι. In the nominative and accusative plural Homer has –α short: thus, δέπα cups. In the dative plural he has three forms, δεπά-εσσι (for *δεπασ-εσσι, § 37), δέπασ-σι and δέπασι (§ 35).
31108 a. In Homer proper names in –κλεης should probably have the uncontracted forms. Thus, Ἡρακλέεα gen. sing. Ἡρακλέεα acc. sing, of Ἡρακλέης Heracles, but these are usually written with η, Ἡρακλῆος, Ἡρακλῆα.
32109 a. In Ionic ἡώς dawn is declined like αἰδώς.
33110 a. In Homer stems in –ι– are, thus, declined: sing. nom. πόλις, gen. πόλιος, dat. πόλΐ, rarely πόλει (which doubtless stands for πόλιΐ), acc. πόλιν, voc. πόλι; plur. nom. πόλιες, gen. πόλίων, dat. πόλίεσσι (§ 76 b) or (rarely) πόλεσί (which perhaps stands for πόλίσι), acc. πόλῑς and πόλιας.
b. From πόλίς Homer has also four forms with η: sing. gen. πόληος, dat. πόληΐ; plur. nom. πόληες, acc. πόληας.
c. In Herodotus stems in –υ– are, thus, inflected: sing. πόλις, πόλιος, πόλι (rarely πόλει), πόλιν, πόλι; plur. πόλιες, πόλιων, πόλισι, πόλῑς (rarely πόλιας).
d. In Ionic, words with stems in –υ– regularly have the uncontracted forms: thus, ἄστεΐ, ἄστεα, πήχεες – except that Homer sometimes contracts the dative singular: thus, πληθυῖ to a multitude. In the genitive singular Ionic has always –ος (not –ως): thus, πήχε-ος, ἄστε-ος. The genitive plural has its regular accent (cf. § 110, 2): thus, πηχέων, ἀστέων.
e. In the accusative plural Homer has –ῡς or –υας, as the meter may demand: thus, ἰχθῦς or ἰχθύας.
34111 a. In Ionic, words with stems in -ευ- regularly have the uncontracted form. Homer has η instead of ε wherever υ has disappeared (§ 111 and note). Thas βασιλῆος, βασιλῆΐ etc. (but βασιλεύς, βασιλεῦσι). In proper names, hawever, he sometimes has ε, as in Πηλέος of Peleus (also Πηλῆος).
b. For γραῦς and ναῦς Homer has γρηῦς and νηῦς. The latter he thas declines: sing. nom. νηῦς, gen. νηός, or νεός, dat. νηΐ, acc. νῆα, νέα; plur. nom. νῆες or νέες, gen. νηῶν or νεῶν, dat. νηυσί, νήεσσι or νέεσσι, acc. νῆας or νέας. Herodotus has sing. νηῦς, νηός, or νεός, νηΐ, νέα; plur. νέες, νεῶν, νηυσί, νέας.
c. For the dative plural of βοῦς Homer has βουδί and βόεδδι, and for the accusative plural βοῦς and βόας (cf. § 110 a and e).
35113 a. Homer has only the uncontracted forms: thus, ἤρω-ΐ, ἤρωα, (ἤρω’), ἤρωες, ἤρωας.
36114, 2 a. So Homer has ὁ δεσμός bond, plur. οἱ δεσμοί and τὰ δέσματα. Πάτροκλος (gen. –ου, 2d decl.) has also forms from a stem Πατροκλες-:thus, gen Πατροκλέεος (Πατροκλῆος?) etc. (See § 108 a).
From ἡνίοχο-ς charioteer, declined regularly, Homer has also ἡνίοχῆα, ἡνίοχῆες (stem ἡνιοχευ-, § 111); cf. Αἰθίπας, and Αἰθίπῆας, acc. plur. of Αἰθίοψ.
37115, 1 a. Ἄρης: Homer has gen. Ἄρηος and 'Ἄρεος, dat. Ἄρηι and Ἄρεΐ, acc. Ἄρηα; Herodotus, Ἄρεος, Ἄρει, Ἄρεα.
115, 3 a. γόνυ: Ionic and poetic γούνατος, γούνατι, γούνατα, γουνάτων, γούνασι. Epic also γουνός, γουνί, γοῦνα, γούνων, γούνεσσι (§ 76 b).
115, 6 a. δόρυ: Ionic δούρατος, δούρατι, δούρατα, δουράτων, δούρασι. Epic also δούρός, δούρί, δοῦρε, δοῦρα, δούρων, δούρεσσι (§ 76 b).
115, 8 a. Ζεύς: poetic also Zηνός, Zηνί, Zηνός, Zῆνα.
115, 9 a. κάρᾱ: Homer has forms from four different stems, καρηατ-, καρητ- and κρᾱατ-, κρᾱτ.
Singular
Nom. Acc. κάρη also κάρ
Gen. καρήατος κάρητος κρᾱ́ατος κρᾱτός
Dat. καρήατι κάρητι κρᾱ́ατι κρᾱτί
Plural
Nom. Acc. καρήατα κάρᾱ κρᾱ́ατα κρᾶτα
Gen. κρᾱ́των
Dat. κρᾱσί
For the plural Homer usually has κάρηνα, κάρηνων, from another word, τὸ κάρηνον.
115, 11 a. In κόρυς (κορυθ-) helmet Homer sometimes has an accusative κόρυν (cf. § 115, 17).
115, 14 a. μάρτυς: Homer has always sing, μάρτυρος (2d decl.), plur. μάρτυροι.
115, 15 a. Οἰδίπους: Homer has a genitive Οἰδιπόδᾱο; Herodotus, Οἰδιπόδεω. Doric forms found in the lyrics of tragedy are gen. Οἰδιπόδᾱ, acc. Οἰδιπόδᾱν, voc. Οἰδιπόδᾱ.
115, 16 a. οἶς: Ionic usually leaves the stem uncontracted: thus, ὄϊς, ὄϊος, etc.
115, 18 a. οὖς: Homer has gen. sing, οὔατυς, plur. οὔατα, dat. οὔασι.
115, 25 a. υἱός: besides the stems υἱο– (2d decl.) and υἱυ– (3d decl.), Homer has also a stem υἱ– which gives the following forms: sing. gen. υἶος, dat. υἶι, acc. υἶα; dual υἶε; plur. nom. υἶες, dat. υἱάσι, acc. υἶας. Herodotus has only the forms from υἱός (2d decl.).
115, 26 a. χείρ: poetic χερός, χερί. Homer has dat. plur. χερσί, χείρεσσι, and (once) χείρεσι.
38117, 1 a. Ionic has η instead of α in the feminine (see § 83 a). In the genetive plural of the feminine Homer has –άων (sometimes –έων), Herodotus has –έων (cf. § 84 a).
39119 a. Homer has ἵλᾱος and πλεῖος for Attic ἵλεως and πλέως (see § 92, a).
40120 a. Homer rarely, if ever, contracts adjectives in –ης. Thus, δυσμενέες nom. plur. of δυσμενής hostile.
41123 a. For the feminine –eῖα, –είᾱς, etc., Herodotus has –έα, – έης, –έῃ, etc., and Homer sometimes has them: thus, βαθέα, βαθέης, etc. (Attic βαθεῖα). In the accusative singular Homer sometimes has –έα for Attic –ύν: thus, εὐρέα πόντον broad sea.
42127 a. Herodotus has πολλός, πολλή, πολλόν, declined like ἀγαθός Homer also frequently uses this form, as well as other 3d declension forms (not Attic), from the stem πολυ-: thus, gen. sing. πολέος, nom. plur. πολέες gen. πολέων, dat. πολέεσσι ( § 76 b), πολέσσι, and πολέσι, acc. πολέας.
43134 a. In Epic poetry the comparative ending –ιων has short ι.
b. In poetry the forms in –ιων, –ιστος occur much more frequently than in prose. Homer has several comparatives and superlatives that are not usual in Attic: thus, κῡ́διστος most glorious, φέρτερος more excellent, ὁπλότερος younger; all these will be found in the lexicon.
44137, 2 a. The local endings are naturally much more frequent in Homer: thus, οἴκοθι at home, οὐρανόθεν from heaven, ἡμετερόνδε to our (house), πόλινδε to the city, etc.
45139 a. Homer has the following forms of the personal pronouns:
Singular
Nom. ἐγώ, ἐγών σύ, τῡ́νη
ἐμεῖο, ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, σεῖο, σέο, σεῦ, εἷο, ἕο, ἑο (encl.)
Gen. (
μευ (encl.), ἐμέθεν σευ(encl.), σέθεν, εὗ, εὑ (encl.)
ἕθεν, ἑθέν (encl.)
Dat. ἐμοί, μοι (encl.) σοι, τοι (encl.), τεῑ́ν, ἐοῖ, οἷ, οί (encl.)
Acc. ἐμέ, με (encl.) σέ, σε (encl.) ἑέ, ἔ, μιν (encl.)
Dual
Nom., Acc. νῶϊ, νώ σφῶϊ, σφώ σφωέ (encl.)
Gen., Dat. νῶϊν, σφῶϊν, σφῷν (δ 62) σφωῑ́ν (encl.)
Plural
Nom. ἡμεῖς, ἄμμες ῡ́μεῖς, ὔμμες
ἡμείων, ἡμέων ῡ́μείων, ὑμέων, σφείων, σφέων
Gen. (
σφών (encl.), σφῶν
ἡμῖν, ἄμμι(ν) ῡ́μῖν, ὔμμι(ν) σφίσι(ν), σφισί(ν) (encl.)
Dat. (
σφιν (encl.)
ἡμέας, ἄμμε ῡ́μέας, ὔμμε σφέας, σφεάς (encl.)
Acc. (
σφέ (encl.)
The forms of the plural in ἀμμ– and ὐμμ– are Aeolic in origin.
b. In Herodotus the personal pronouns have the following inflection:
Singular
Nom. ἐγώ, σύ
Gen. ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ (encl.) σέο, σεῦ, σευ (encl.) εὑ (encl.)
Dat. ἐμοί, μοι (encl.) σοί, τοι (encl.), οί (encl.)
Acc. ἐμέ, με (encl.) σέ, σε (encl.) ἑ (encl.), μιν (encl.)
Plural
Nom. ἡμεῖς ῡ́μεῖς σφείς
Gen. ἡμέων ῡ́μέων σφείων, σφεων (encl.)
Dat. ἡμῖν, ῡ́μῖν, σφίσι, σφισι (encl.)
ἡμέας ῡ́μέας σφέας, σφεας (encl.)
Acc. (
neut. σφεα (encl.)
46140 a. Herodotus has αὐτέων for the genetive plural feminine of αὐτός (cf. § 84 a). For the crasis ωὑτός, see § 5 a.
47141 a. In Homer the personal pronouns alone are sometimes used reflexivele; often the reflexive meaning is made more clear by the addition of αὐτός, but the two pronouns have not yet combined, as in Attic, into one word. Thas Homer has ἐμέθεν αύτῆς myself (gen. fem.), οἷ αὐτῷ himself (dat.), αὐτόν μιν himself (acc.) etc.
48143 a. Beside the forms given above (§ 143) Homer has also τεός (Latin tuus) thy, ἑός his (her, its), ᾱ́μός our, your, σφός their; also, from the dual stems νω-, σφω-, νωῑ́τερος belonging to us two, and σφωῑ́τερος belonging to you two.
The possessive ὅς, ἐός in Homer appears sometimes to be used without referense to the third person, in sense of own: thas ἧς γαίης (my) own land (gen.), δώμασι οἶσι (your) own house (dat.).
49144 a. Homer almost always uses as demonstrative pronoun. Beside the forms given above (§ 144) Homer has also nom. sing. masc. ὅς (found also in Attic in the phrases καὶ ὅς ἔφη and he said, and ἧ, δ’, ὅς said he), gen. sing. masc. and neut. τοῖο (§ 90 a) gen. and dat. dual τοῖϊν (§ 90 b), nom. plur. masc. τοί, nom. plur fem. ταί, gen. plur. fem. τᾱ́ων (§ 84 a), dat. plur. masc. τοῖσι (§ 90 c), dat. pkur. fem. τῇσι or τῇς(§ 84 b).
144 b. Herodotus also uses ὁ, ἡ, τό, as demonstrative pronoun, but not so frequently as Homer does. In the dative plural he has τοῖσι and τῇσι.
50145 a. For the dative plural of ὅδε Homer sometimes has τοίσδεσι or τοίσδεσσι, Herodotus has τοισίδε.
51146 a. For ἐκεῖνος Homer and other poets often have κεῖνος; Herodotus also uses both forms.
52148 a. Of the interrogative and indefinite pronouns Homer and Herodotus have the following additional forms: gen. sing. τέο, τεῦ, τεο, τευ; dat. sing. , gen. plur. , dat. plur. , neut. plur. (Homer) (cf. § 148 note 1 and § 22).
53149 a. Beside the forms given above (§ 149) Homer has also gen. sing. masc. and neut. ὅο (§ 90 a), often wrongly written ὅου, and fem, ἓης (!)
In Homer the demonstrative pronoun ὁ (ἡ, τὸ) (§ 144 a), is often used as a relative referring to a definite antecedent (cf. English that). When so used the forms with τ– (τοί, ταί, § 144 a) are employed in the nominative plural.
b. Herodotus has from the relative the forms ὅς, ἥ, oi, and αἵ. For all other forms he employs the demonstrative [ὁ, ἡ] τό, τοῦ, τῆς, etc. (cf. § 149 a), except after certain prepositions (mostly prepositions of two syllables, of which the last syllable may suffer elision): thus, μετ’ ἧς with whom, ἀπ’ ὦν from which (§ 44, 4 a).
54150 a. Homer has several forms of the indefinite relative in which the stem ὁ – is not declined: thus, sing. nom. ὅτις, neut. ὅττι, gen. ὅττεο, ὅττευ and ὅτευ, dat. ὅτεῳ, acc. ὅτινα, neut. ὅττι; plur. gen. ὅτεων, dat. ὅτέοισι, acc. ὅτινας. For the neuter plural he uses ἅσσα nom. and acc.
b. Herodotus has gen. sing. ὅτευ, dat. sing. ὅτεῳ, gen. plur. ὅτεων, dat. plur. ὅτέοισι, neut. plur. nom. and acc. ἅσσα.
55152 a. Homer has for four τέσσαρες (§ 22) and πίσυρες (Aeolic), and for nine times εἰνάκις.
b. Herodotus has τέσσερες (4), δυώδεκα (12), τριήκοντα (30), ὀγδώκοντα (80), διηκόδιοι (200), τριηκόδιοι (300), and εἴνατος, εἰνάκις (Attic ἔνατος, ἐνάκις).
56155 a. Beside the feminine μία Homer has also ἴα, ἰῆς, ἰῇ, ἴαν and once the dat. sing. neut. ἰῷ. He uses δύο, or δύω, indeclinably, and he has also a longer adjective form, dual δοιώ, plur. δοιοί, –αί, –ά, declined like the plural of ἀγαθός (§ 117).
b. Herodotus often uses δύο indeclinably. If declined, he has gen. δυῶν, dat. δυοῖσι.
57160 a. Homer often forms the subjunctive with a short vo-wel (o or ε), especially in the aorist; never, however, in the present of –ω verbs (§ 169).
58167 a. In Homer –σθα is more frequent than in Attic: thus, τιθη–σθα, from τίθηµι put; φῆ-σθα, from φημί say; so sometimes in the subjunctive: ἐθέλη-σθα (Attic ἐθέλῃς), from ἐθέλῳ wish.
b. Homer sometimes has –τον for –γην and –σθον for –σθην in the third person dual of secondary tenses.
c. Homer often has –ν for –σαν as an ending of the third plural active, before which the preceding vowel is always short: thus, ἕβα-ν they went, ἔφα-ν they said, ἔγραφε–ν they were reared (Attic ἕβη-σαν, ἔφη-σαν, ἐτράφη-σαν).
d. Ionic often has the endings –αται, ατο, for –νται, –ντο (cf. § 14, 2, note). In the optative these endings are always found; often in the perfect and pluperfect indicative, and sometimes in the present and imperfect of –μι verbs: thus, βουλοί-ατο (Attic βούλοι-ντο), from βούλομαι wish; τετράφ-αται (§ 226 2), from τρέφω nourish ; τιθέ-αται (Attic τίθε-νται), from τίθηµι put.
e. For an ending of the infinitive Homer has also -μεναι or (usually before vowels) –μεν (for the accent see § 185, 1a): thus, πεμπέ-μεναι or πεμπέ-μεν, as well as πέμπειν to send.
59170 a. Homer often retains the endings –μι (1st per.) and –σι (3d per.) in the subjunctive: thus, ἐθέλωμι, ἐθέλησε (Attic ἐθέλω, ἐθέλῃ), from ἐθέλω wish.
b. In the third plural Homer often has –ν for –σαν (§ 167 c); the preceding vowel is always short: thus, ξύν-ιε-ν they gave heed, ἔφα-ν they said (Attic ξυν-ιε-σαν͵ ἔφη-σαν).
170, 4 a. In Ionic, –μι verbs follow the contract system of inflection in a few more forms than in Attic: thus, δεδοῖς, διδοῖ, τιθεῖ, ἵει.
170 c. (note 3). In Ionic the second person middle drops the σ of the ending, but the vowels usually remain uncontracted: thus, λύσεαι, ἐλῡ́εο, ἐλῡ́σαο, etc., from λῡ́ω loose. Herodotus contracts –ηαι to –ῃ, and sometimes –εο to –ευ: thus, πείθῃ (2d pers. subj. mid.), from πείθω persuade; ἀνέχεν (impy. mid.), from ἀνέχω hold up.
60171a. In Homer and in lyric poetry the augment is often omitted: thus, βῆν went, ἔλασε drove, ἔχε held (Attic ἔβην, ἤλασε, εῑχε).
b. In Herodotus the temporal augment is often omitted ; the syllabic augment only in the pluperfect and in iteratives (§ 191 b).
61172, 1a. In Homer other liquids besides ρ may be doubled aiter the syllabic augment: thus, ἕλλαβε took, ἔμμαθε learned (cf. § 22 a).
62176 a. In Herodotus the Attic reduplication is never augmented.
63179 а. In Homer the “Attic” reduplication is found in more verbs than in Attic, sometimes without lengthening the first vowel of the theme: thus, ἐρ-έριπτο, from ἐρείπω overthrow (§ 219, note 2). Cf. in Attic ἤγαγον (infin. ἀγ-αγεῖν), 2d aor. of ἄγω lead.
64185, 1a. The epic infinitive in –μεναι or –μεν (§ 167 e) always has its written accent on the syllable preceding the ending: thus, δόµεναι to give, ἀγέμεν to lead.
65191a. Θ in Tense Formation. – In Homer, and sometimes in the Attic poets (very rarely in prose), a few verbs have forms from a present (or aorist) stem made with the suffix –θ– (-εθο-/ε- or -αθο-/ε-): thus, ἐ-διώκ-αθο–ν (διώκω pursue), µετ-ε-κῑ́-αθο-ν (κίω go), φλεγ-έθω (φλέγω burn), ἔ-σχ-εθο-ν (ἔχω hold).
191 b. Iterative Forms.–In Homer and Herodotus iterative forms of the imperfect and aorist are found, to denote a repeated past action. They are formed by adding the iterative suffix –σκο-/ε– to the tense stem of the imperfect or aorist: thus, μένε-σκο-v kept remaining ( μένω remain), ποιέε–σκο-v kept doing (ποιῶ) (-έω) do), φύγε- σκο-v used to flee, aorist (φεύγω flee). These forms are inflected like the imperfect, and seldom have an augment (§ 171a-b).
66195, 2a. This form of the present in –ζ– sometimes gives rise to uncertainty about the aorist and future. In Homer verbs in –ζω not infrequently have ξ in the aorist and future: thus, πολεμίζω (πολεμιδ-), πολεμίξω, ἐπολέμιξα.
67199 a. Contract Verbs in Homer. – In Homer verbs in –έω and –άω are sometimes contracted as in Attic, but often remain uncontracted: thus, τελέει and τελεῖται, from τελῶ (-έω) finish, ναιετάω dwell, μενοινᾷς, from μενοινῶ (-άω) be eager. Rarely verbs in –ἄω have the inflection of verbs in -έω: thus, μενοίνεον (from μενοινῶ (-άω) be eager). Cf. § 199 e.
b. “Assimulation”. – Verbs in –άω, when uncontracted, not infrequently have the regular uncontracted form, as stated in § 199 a, but more often they show in the manuscripts a peculiar assimilation, an o sound prevailing over an adjacent α sound, and an α sound over an ε sound: thus, ὁρόω for ὁράω, ὁράᾳς for ὁράεις (ὁρῶ (-άω) see). A long syllable in the original form is represented by a long vowel (or improper dipbthong) in the assimilated form: thus, ὁρόωντες for ὁράοντες, ὁρόῳμι for ὁράοιμι, ὁρόωσα for ὁράουσα. Two long vowels in succession are regularly avoided, unless they are necessary to preserve the meter: thus, ἡβώοντες (not ἡβώωντες) for ἡβᾱ́οντες, ἡβώοιμι (not ἡβώφμι) for ἡβᾱ́οιμι; but μενοινώω for μενοινᾱ́ω, ἡβώωσα for ἡβᾱ́ουσα, since otherwise the original quantities would not be preserved.
199 c. Verbs in –όω hardly ever remain uncontracted, but if uncontracted they show an “assimilation” precisely as if they were verbs in –άω: thus, ἀρόωσι for ἀρόουσι (ἀρῶ (-όω) plow).
Note. –There can be little doubt that these “assimilated” forms are spurious forms dating from Alexandrine times, produced from the contracted forms ὁρῶ, ὁρᾷς, etc., which were the only forms of such verbs in use at the time. Observe that the “assimilated” form has exactly the same quantities as the uncontracted form, and the latter can be everywhere restored to the text.
d. Aeolic Forms. – Homer sometimes treats contract verbs in –έω as if they were -μι verbs like τίθημι: thus, φορῆ-ναι, φορή-μεναι (cf. § 200 a), infinitive from φορῶ (-έω) bear, ἀπειλή-την (cf. § 200 a), imperfect dual from άπειλῶ (-έω) threaten.
e. Contract Verbs in Herodotus. – Verbs in –άω in Herodotus are often contracted as in Attic, but sometimes when the α comes before an o sound it is changed to ε, and the form then remains uncontracted: thus, ὁρέω, ὁρέωσι, ὁρέοντες, Attic ὁρῶ (-άω), etc. see.
Verbs in –έω are usually uncontracted except when the ε is preceded by a vowel; then εο and εου usually contract into ευ (§ 18a): thus, ποιεῦσι, ἐποίευν (for Attic ποιοῦσι, ἐποίουν), from ποιῶ (-έω) do.
Verbs in –όω are regularly contracted as in Attic.
68200 a. Homer sometimes has the end vowel of –μι verbs long in forms other than those of the singular of the indicative active: thus, τιθή-μεναι, infinitive active of τίθημι put.
b. Homer and Herodotus have in the third plural τιθεῖσι, διδοῦσι, etc., for *τιθε-νσι, *διδο–νσι, etc. (the accent is irregular); but regular forms ζᾶσι, from εῑμι go (§ 261), and ἔᾱσι; from εἰμί be (§ 262 a).
c. Homer sometimes has –θι in the imperative: thus, δίδωθι give. Herodotus in the third plural of the middle has forms with –αται, –ατο (Attic –νται, –ντο, § 167 d): τιθέαται, ἐτιθέατο.
69201 a. In Homer the first aorist (and future, § 212) of a good many verbs has σσ, but in nearly all such cases the theme of the verb originally ended in σ or a lingual mute (cf. § 30 a): thus, ἐ-τέλεσ-σα, from τελῶ (έω) finish (theme τελεσ-, cf. τέλος end); ἐ-κόμισ-σα (for *έ-κομιδ- σα), from κομίζω carry (theme κομιδ-).
b. Homer has forms of the first aorist with a variable vowel ο-/ε- instead of α: thus, ἐβήσετο went, from βαίνω; ἷξον came, from ἴκω; ἄξετε lead (impv.), from ἄγω.
70204 a. Homer sometimes keeps σ in the aorist after a liquid: thus, ἧρ-σα, from ἀραρίσκω (ἀρ) fit; ἔ–κερ–σα, from κείρω (κερ-) shear.
71207a, In Homer the second aorist is found much more frequently than in Attic, and consonant themes are often inflected in the middle without the variable vowel: thus, ἐ-δέγ-μην, from δέχ-οµαι receive; ἕ-μικ-το, from μείγ-νῡ-µι mix. Liquid themes sometimes undergo metathesis (§ 38): thus, βλῆ-το was hit, from βάλλω (theme βαλ-).
72208, 1a. In Homer reduplicated second aorists are rather frequent: thus, ἐ-πέ-φραδ-ον, from φράζω declare, πέ-πιθ-ον, from πείθω persuade, πέ-φν-ον slew (cf. φόν-ος murder), etc.
73210 a. In Homer the same verb sometimes has forms with and without the variable vowel; thus, ἔκλυο-ν fieard, imperative κλῦ-θι.
74211 a. Properly, in the second aorist, as in the present, of –μι verbs, the long form should be found only in the singular of the indicative active (see § 200). So we should have sing. ἔβην, ἔβης, ἔβη, dual ἕβᾶτον, etc., plur. ἔβᾶμεν, etc. But in Attic the long vowel of the singular has crowded into the dual and plural, except in δίδωμι, ἴημι τίθηµι. In Homer, as might be expected, we sometimes find forms with the short vowel: thus, βάτην they (two) went, ἔ-χν-το was poured (ἔχενα).
211, 1a. In Homer the subjunctive of the second aorist of –μι form is usually uncontracted: thus, θέ-ωμεν, ἀφ-έ-ῃ. But in such case the root vowel usually appears in its long form: thus, θή-ῃ (Attic θῇς, for θέ-ῇς), δώ-η-σι or δώ-ῃ (Attic δῷ, for δό-ῃ). Before the endings –τον, –μεν, –τε of the active, and in most forms of the middle, the mode vowel is then short (§ 100 a): thus, στή-ε-τον, δώ-ο-μεν, βλή-ε-ται (from βάλλω throw), φθι-ό-μεσθα (from φθίνω waste away).
211, 1b. In Herodotus –αω and –εω remain uncontracted in the subjunctive, –αω as elsewhere becoming –εω (§ 199 e): thus, στέ-ω-μεν (for στά-ω-μεν, Attic στῶμεν).
211, 2 a. In Attic no second aorist optative of themes in –υ– or –ι– happens to occur. In Homer such an optative is sometimes found: thus, δῡ́η (for *δυιν), δῦμεν (for *δνιμεν), from δῡ́ω enter, φθίμην (for *φθιιμην), φθῖτο (for *φθιιτο) from φθίνω waste away, perish.
75213 a. A few liquid verbs in Homer and the Attic poets have a future in –σω (cf. § 204 a): thus, ὄρνῦμι rouse, fut. ὄρσω.
76218 a. In Homer the first perfect is found only in vowel verbs.
77219 a. Properly in the perfect system (which really belongs to the –μι– form of inflection) we should have in the singular of the indicative active the form of the theme with o, and elsewhere the form with no vowel or with a (§ 14). (Compare the inflection of οἶδα, § 250.) Many peculiar forms in Homer are made clear by this simple fact: thus, εἴκτην, from ἔοικα am like; ἐπέπιθμεν, from πέ-ποιθ-α trust; γεγάτην (for *ye-yv-rn, § 14, 1, note), from yé-yor-a have become ; πέ-πασθε (for *re-rad-re, § 90), from πέ-πονθ-α have suffered. So also πε-ϕυγ-μένος, perfect middle participle of φεύγω flee. So also in Attic τέ-τραµ-μαι, τέ-θραµ-μαι, ἕ-στραμ-μαι, ete. (§ 224, 1, note).
219, 1a. Homer never makes rough a labial or palatal mute in the perfect active.
78222 a. Ionic usually has the uncontracted forms –εα, –εα–ς, –εε in the singular of the pluperfect: thus, πεποίθεα trusted, ἤδεε(ν) knew.
79226 a. In Ionic the endings –ᾱται, –ατο (Attic –νται, –ντο, § 167 d), are employed in the third plural with consonant themes, and sometimes even with vowel themes; before these endings π, β, κ, γ are usually changed to the corresponding rough mutes: thus, τε-τάχ-αται, ἐ-τε-τάχ-ατο, from τάττω (ταγ-) arrange (Attic τεταγµένοι εἰσί, τεταγµένοι ἧσαν). So also βε-βλή-ατο, from βάλλω (βαλ-) throw. Herodotus is very fond of these endings, and uses them often with vowel verbs (the vowel before them being always made short): thus, οἰκέ-αται (Attic ᾤκη-νται), from οἰκῶ (-έω) inhabit.
80233 a. In the third plural indicative Homer often has the ending –ν for –σαν, always with a short vowel preceding (§ 167 c): thus, ἕ-τραφ-ε-ν were reared, Attic ἐ-τράφ-η-σαν.
233, 1a. In Homer the subjunctive of the second aorist passive has the same peculiar form as the second aorist active of the –μι form (see §211,1a): thus, φανή-ῃ (Attic φανῇ, for φανέ-η) from φαίνω show, δαµή-ετε (§ 160 a) from δάµνηµι subdue.
81259 a. Ionic occasionally has other (regular) forms from the stem οἰδα-: thus, οἶδας, οἴδαμεν, οἴδᾱσι.
b. Homer has perf. 1st plur. ἴδμεν; pluperf. ἤδεα, ᾔδησθα, (ἠείδης), ᾔδεε or ᾔδει (ἠείδει), 3d plur. ἴδαν: subj. 1st sing. εἰδέω, εἰδῶ, ἰδέω; plur. εἴδομεν (§ 160 a), εἴδετε (§ 160 a), εἰδῶσι: infin. ἴδμεναι, ἵδμεν (§ 167 e): fem. participle ἰδυῖα. Future εἴσομαι and εἰδήσομαι.
c. Herodotus has 1st plur. ἵδμεν: pluperf. 1st sing. ᾔδεα, 3d sing. ᾔδεε, 2d plur. ἠδέατε ; future εἰδήσω.
82260 a. Homer almost always has ἵημι with short ι. For ἵει (3d singular) and ἱεῖσι (3d plural) see §§ 170, 4 a, and 200 b. Τη the aorist indicative he has ἦκα and ἕηκα (with irregular augment). In the aorist subjunctive he has ἔῃ and ἤῃ (cf. § 211, 1a). For the imperfect indicative 1st singular the Mss. give ἴειν, but this must be a mistake for ἵην.
83261 a. Homer has also present indicative 2d sing. εἶσθα. Imperfect 1st sing. ἤϊα, ἤϊον; 3d sing. ἤϊε, ᾖε, ἴε; 3d dual ἴτην, 1st plur. ᾔομεν; 3d plur. ἠϊσαν, ἴσαν, ἤϊον. Subjunctive 2d sing. ἴῃσθα; 3d sing. ἴῃσι; 1st plur. ἴομεν (§ 160 a). Optative 3d sing. ἰείη. Infinitive ἴμεναι, ἵμεν (§ 167 e). Future εἴσομαι.
b. Herodotus has impf. 1st sing. ἤϊα; 3d sing. ἤϊε, 3d plur. ἤϊσαν,
84262 a. Homer has:
Present indicative 2d sing. ἐσσί, εἶς; 1st plur. εἰμέν; 3d plur. εἰσί, ἔᾱσι.
Imperfect 1st sing. ἦα, ἕα, ἕον (?); 2d sing. ἔησθα, ἧσθα; 3d sing. ἦεν, ἔην, ἥην, ἣν: 3d plur. ἧσαν, ἔσαν. Iterative ἔσκον (§ 191 b).
Subjunctive 1st sing. ἕω, -εἰω; 3d sing. ἔῃσι, ῃσι, ἔῃ, εἴῃ (?); 3d plur. ἕωσι.
Optative also ἔοις, ἔοι. Imperative ἔσσο (middle).
Infinitive also ἔμμεναι (for *ἐσ-μεναι), ἔμεναι, ἔμμεν, ἔμεν (§ 167 e).
Participle ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν, etc.
Future also ἔσ-σομαι, etc.; 3d sing. ἔσ-σεται, ἔσεται (§ 35), ἔσται (§ 20), and (Doric future, § 214) ἐσσεῖται.
b. Herodotus has
Present, indicative 2d sing. εἶς; 1st pl. εἶμέν.
Imperfect ἕα; 2d sing. ἕας; 2d plur. ἕατε. Iterative ἔσκον (191 b).
Subjunctive ἕω, ἕωσι. Optative (once) έν-έοι. Participle ἐών.
85263 a. Homer has subj. 3 sing. φήη (§ 211, 1a). For ἔφαν (imperfect 3d plural) see § 167 c. He often uses the middle forms of φημί, which are seldom or never found in Attic: thus, imperf. ἐφάμην, ἔφατο; impv. φάο, φάσθω, etc.; infin. φάσθαι; participle φάμενος.
b. Herodotus often uses the middle participle φάμενος.
86264 a. Homer has pres. indic. 3d plur. κεῖνται, κέαται (§ 167d), κείαται, κέονται; impf. 3d plur. ἔκειντο, κέατο (§ 167d), κείατο; subj. 3 sing. κῆται, iterative 3d sing. (§ 191 b) ἑκέ-σκετο.
b. Herodotus usually has –εε– for ει in the 3d sing. (κέεται); sometimes perhaps in ἔκειτο, κεῖσθαι (ἑκέετο, κάεσθαι). He always has κέαται (= κεῖνται) and ἑκέατο (= ἔκειντο). See § 167d.
87265 a. For the 3d plur. Homer has ἧσται (εἴαται in some editions), ἕαται, and ἧατο (εἴατο in some editions), ἔατο (Attic ἦνται, ᾖντο). Herodotus always has ἕαται, ἔατο. See § 167 d.
88292, 2a. From stems in –εσ– Homer often has the older form of the verb in –είω: thus, τελείω (for *τελεσ-ιω) finish.
292. 3a. Homer has ᾱ in some verbs in –ᾱω: thus, μενοινᾱ́ω be eager, ἠβᾱ́ω be in one’s prime (see § 199 b).
89298 a. In Homer, and often in other writers, this adverbial use of the prepositions can be clearly seen, for the preposition is often separated by one or more words from the verb which it modifies: thus, καὶ ἐπὶ κνέφας ἧλθε and darkness came on (A 475), ἀνὰ δὲ κρείων ᾿Αγαμέμνων | ἔστη and lordly Agamemnon stood up (B100). This is often improperly called Tmesis (cutting).
90299 a. The poets have also νη– not and ἀρι-, ἐρι-, ζα– intensive: thus, νή-ποινος unpunished, ἐρι–κῡδής very famous.
91317 a. In Homer the demonstrative ὃ (δὲ) at the beginning of a sentence is often explained by an appositive further on: thus, ἣ δ΄ ἀέκουσ’ ἄμα τοῖσι γυνὴ κίεν and she unwilling with them went, the woman A 348. τὸ δ’ὑπέρπτατο χάλκεον ἔγχος but it flew over (him), the brazen spear X 275.
92835 a. “Νους Axp Parr” Constructios. – In Homer (and sometimes also in other poets), an accusative of the part affected often follows an accusative of the direct object: as τὸν δ’ἄορι πλῆξ’ αὐχένα him, with his sword, he smote (in) the neck A 240. ἤ σε πόδας νίψει she shall wash (for) you your feet τ 356. This construction is often explained as “partitive apposition,” but, since the word denoting the part appears in the corresponding passive construction in the accusative case (while the other accusative becomes a nominative, § 511), it can hardly be an appositive (see § 512).
93339a. In Homer and other poets the accusative alone (without a preposition) is often used to denote the limit of motion: thus, κνῑ́ση δ' οὐρανὸν ἴκε and the fragrance came to the heavens A 317. μνηστῆρας ἀφῑ́κετο she came to the suitors a 332. πέµψει γὰρ «Aργος for he will take it to Argos E. Ι. T. 604.
94358 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the partitive genitive of place (without a preposition) is freely used: thus, ἧ οὐκ Ἄργεος ἧεν; was he not (anywhere) in Argos? γ 251. ἔρχονται πεδίοιο they are marching along (in) the plain B 801. ἷζεν… τοίχου τοῦ ἑτέροιο he sat (in a part of the space) by the other wall Ι 219. ἐστίᾱς µεσοµφάλου ἕστηκεν ἤδη μῆλα already stand the victims at earth's central shrine Aesch. Ag. 1056.
b. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the partitive genitive of place is occasionally found with adjectives: as ἐναντίοι ἔσταν Ἀχαιῶν they took their stand over against the Achaeans Λ 214. More commonly such words are found with a dative (§§ 376 and 392).
95362 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the genitive of separation (or source) is occasionally found (without a preposition) with simple verbs of motion: thus, παιδὸς ἐδέξατο… κύπελλον from her son she took the cup A 596. βάθρων ἵστασθε arise from the steps S. 0. T. 142.
96384 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the dative of place without a preposition is freely used: thus, τόξ' ὄμοισιν ἔχων with the bow on his shoulder A 45. εἶδε µυχῷ κλισίης he slept in a corner of the tent Ι 663. πεδίῳ πέσε he fell in the plain Ε 82. ἀλλ’ οὐκ Ἀτρείδῃ Ἀγαμέμνονι ἤνδανε θῡμῳ but it pleased not Agamemnon in his heart A 24. ὄο κράτος ἔσκε µέγιστον πᾶσι Κυκλώπεσσι whose power was the greatest among all the Cyclopes α 71. οὐτιδανοῖσι ἀνάσσεις you are lord among nobodies A 231. ναίειν ὄρεσι to dwell in the mountains S. OT. 1151.
97395 a. In poetry ἀνά up (on), ἀμφί about (also in Herodotus), and μετά with are also found with the dative.
98398 a. The adverbial use of the prepositions can be seen very clearly in Homer (see § 298 a), and in some phrases such as πρὸς δὲ and besides (found even in Attic prose), ἐν δέ and among the number, μετὰ δὲ and afterwards; so πέρι exceedingly in Homer is often an adverb.
99399 a. In poetry, ἀνά, ἀμφί, and μετά are also used with the dative; and ἀμφί is so used by Herodotus.
100400 a. In Ionic and in poetry ἀμφί is used also with the (locative, § 384) dative, meaning about, and so concerning, because of: ἀμφ’ ὤμοισιν ἔχει σάκος he has his shield about his shoulders A 527. ἀμφὶ δῑ́ναις about the eddies E. I.T. 6. ἀμφ’ ἐμοὶ στένεις; are you lamenting about me? S. El. 1180.
101401 a. In Epic and Lyric poetry ἀνά is sometimes found with, the (locative) dative: as χρῡσέῳ ἂν (§ 43, note 3) σκήττρῳ upon a golden staff A 15.
102405 a. In the earlier Attic prose ἐς is more common than εἰς; Herodotus regularly uses ἐς; the poets use either form at pleasure.
103406 a. Homeric and poetical forms are ἐνί (the older form of ἐν, cf. προτί, § 414 a), and (possibly) εἰνί.
104410 a. In Epic (and rarely in other) poetry μετά is found with the (Locative, § 384) dative: as θεδς ἔσκε μετ’ ἀνδράσι he was a god among men Ω 908.
105412 a. For πέρι exceedingly as an adverb, see § 398 a.
106414 a. Homer has also προτί (another form of πρός) and ποτί = πρός.
107415 a. The form ξύν occurs in the older Attic writers; the poets use either form; elsewhere σύν is regularly found.
108418 a. The following improper prepositions are seldom used except in poetry: ἀγχοῦ near, ἅτερ without, δέµας in the form of, like (cf. δίκην, § 418), δίχα apart from, ἑκάς far from, ἕκητι on account of, ἔνερθε(ν) beneath, νόσφι(ν) away from, πάρος before, τῆ far off from, and μίγα, μίγδα or σύμμιγα (in Herodotus) along with. The last three are used with the dative (cf. § 392, 3); all the rest with the genitive.
109436 a. In epic poetry κε (enclitic), an equivalent of ἄν, is also found.
110441a. In Epic poetry τε is freely used to indicate the connection of sentences and clauses where it cannot be rendered in English (it usually marks the sentence as general or indefinite): thus, ὄς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ’ ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ whosoever obeys the gods, him they most do hear A 218. The words οἷός τε able (lit. of such kind as to), ὥστε so that, ἐφ' ᾧτε on condition that, ἄτε inasmuch as, are the survivals in Attic Greek of the Epic usage.
b. Homer has also ἠμὲν… ἠδέ (= ἦ + μὲν or δέ) now… and now, and sometimes ἠδέ without a preceding ἡμέν (cf. δέ, § 411).
c . Homer has also αὕταρ (= ἄταρ) but; and ἄρ and ῤα (encl.) = ἄρα.
111442 a. In epic poetry are found a few conjunctions which do not occur in Attic. The most common are εὔτε when, as, ἧμος when (with indicative only), ὄφρα as long as, until, in order that (§ 590 a).
b. Homer often has αἴ ( αἴ κε) for Attic εἰ (ἐᾱ́ν), and ἦος (often wrongly written εἵως) for Attic ἕως, (The latter is formed by interchange of quantity (§ 17) from the Epic form.)
112443a. Tn Homer ὁ, ἧ, τό is generally used as a demonstrative or anaphoric pronoun (substantive or adjective): thus, ὄ γὰρ ἦλθε for he (lit. that man) came A 12. τὴν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὗ λῡ́σω and her Ishall not set free A 29. τοῦ δὲ κλύε Φοῖβος Ἀπόλλων and him Phoebus Apollo heard A 43. παῖδα δ᾽ἐμοὶ λῦσαί τε φίλην, τε τ’ ἄποινα δέχεσθαι but free my dear child, and accept this ransom A 20. ὣς ἔφατ', ἔδεισεν δ᾽ ὁ γέρων thus, he spoke, and that old man (before mentioned) feared A 33. Yet in Homer ὁ, ἧ, τό is sometimes used in a way that closely approaches the Attic usage: thus, ἡ πληθῡ́ς the (or this) multitude B 278. τὸν δεξιὸν ἵππον the (or that) right-hand horse Ψ 336. τὸ σὸν γέρας that prize of yours (or your prize) A185. τὸ πρίν the (or that) former time. Ἀργείων οί ἄριστοι the (or those) noblest of the Argives.
443, 1–3 a. Herodotus has also ὃ γὰρ… for he.., and καὶ τόν in other cases than the accusative.
113470 a. In Homer the personal pronouns alone are sometimes used reflexively; more often the reflexive meaning is made clearer by the addition of αὐτός in agreement with the pronoun: thus, ἐγὼν ἐμὲ λῡ́σομαι I will ransom myself K 378. ἑὲ δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἐποτρῡ́νει µαχέσασθαι he rouses himself to battle Γ 171.
114472 a. Homer uses ἔο, οἷ, etc., also as a direct reflexive; when so used it regularly has written accent (§ 139, 2).
115475,1 a. In Homer αὐτός without the article may mean the same: thus, αὐτὴν ὁδόν the same road K 263.
475,3 a. In Homer αὐτός seldom does duty as a personal pronoun, but is usually intensive (sometimes only by contrast): thus, αὐτοὺς δὲ ἑλώρια τεῦχε κύνεσσιν and made themselves (i.e. their bodies, in contrast with their souls) a prey for dogs A 4.
116477 a. In Ionic εὖ and σφέων may be used where Attic would use αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, or αὐτῶν (cf. § 468).
117478 a. In Homer ὅς (ἐός) usually refers to the subject, but sometimes to a more prominent word in the sentence (cf. § 470): as γόον Ἕκτορα ᾧ ἐνὶ οἴκῳ they mourned for Hector in his own house Ζ 500.
118504a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) some verbs are used in the middle voice (implying an interest on the part of the subject) which in Attic are regularly used only in the active: thus, ἀκούετο he heard (Attic ἤκουε), φάτο he said (Attic ἔφη), ἰδέσθαι to see (Attic ἰδεῖ»).
119515, 1a. In Homer, the future middle is (almost) always used also as passive, and the aorist middle not infrequently has the passive meaning: as παρ’ ἅμμι φιλήσεαι with us you shall be welcomed α 123. ἕβλητο was hit Π 753.
120516a. Tn Homer and sometimes in other poets (very rarely in prose with names of persons) the agent may be expressed by the dative with ὑπό: as Ἀχαιοὶ… ἐφόβηθεν ὑφ᾽ Ἔκτορι the Achacans were put to flight by Hector Ο 637.
121519 a (note 2). Homer occasionally forms a future directly from a second aorist (reduplicated) stem to emphasize the action as merely ‘brought to pass’: thus, πετιθήσω I will persuade him (i.e. convince his mind once for all) X 223.
122524 a. In Homer εἶμι has both the present and the future meaning.
123525 a. In Epic poetry the historical present is never found.
124530 a. Homer sometimes uses the (gnomic) aorist in similes: thus, ἤριπε δ᾽ ὡς ὅτε τις δρῦς ἤριπεν he fell as when an oak falls (lit. fell).
125548 a. In Epic poetry the future optative is never found.
126556 a. For the independent use of the (anticipatory) subjunctive in Homer see § 562 a.
127559 a. For the potential optative without κε or ἄν in Homer, see 563 a,
128562 a. In Homer the subjunctive is sometimes used like the future indicative (cf. § 555) in (anticipatory) statements of fact (negative οὐ): thus, οὐ γάρ πω τοίους ἴδον ᾱ́νέρας οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι for never yet did I see such men, nor shall I ever see them A 262.
129563 a. The epic language is very rich in forms of future statement, for besides the future indicative and the optative with ἄν (or κε) we have also the subjunctive alone, the optative alone, the subjunctive with κε (or ἄν), and even sometimes the future indicative with κε (or ἄν). By this variety many shades of meaning are expressed which have no equivalent in English. The subjunctive in this use comes very close to the future indicative (§ 562 a), but seems rather to anticipate the future possibility than to state the future fact. Examples are: (Fut. indic.) ὤς ποτέ τις ἐρέει thus, some one shall say Ζ 462. (Fut. indic. with κε) καὶ κέ τις ὦδ᾽ ἐρέει and thus, some one may say Δ 176. (Subjunctive) καί ποτέ τις εἴπησιν and some day some one may say Ζ 459. (Subjunctive with κε or ἄν) καὶ δὲ κέ τοι εἴπῃσι and he will tell to you δ 391. (Optative) οὐ μὲν γάρ τι κακώτερον ἄλλο πάθοιµε for nothing else more sad could I endure T 321. (Optative with κε or ἄν) ἐμοὶ δὲ τότ' ἄν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη but for me then ᾽twould be better far X 108.
563 b. The optative without ἄν in a potential use is rarely found in other poets besides Homer: see S. Ant. 605.
130565 a. In Homer the context sometimes shows that the potential optative, usually with the help of an adverb, may be used in stating a past possibility (which in Attic would be expressed by the potential indicative, § 565): as ἔνθ' οὐκ ἂν βρίζοντα ἴδοις᾽ Aγαμέμνονα δῖον then you could not see (i.e. would not have seen) god-like Agamemnon slumbering Δ 223. (Cf. § 606 b.)
131571a. In Homer the regular interrogative word in ‘yes’ or ‘nο’ questions is ἦ: thus, ἦ ἔτι καὶ χρῡσοῦ ἐπιδείεαι; Do you yet lack for gold besides B 229.
132574 a. Homer, in alternative questions (both direct and indirect) uses ἤ (ἠε)... ἦ (ἦε) (never πότερον... ἤ); and ἦ (ἦε) may also be used alone: thus, ἤ ῥά τι ἵδμεν ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ῆς καὶ οὐκί; Do we know at all, or do we not? δ 632. ψεύσομαι ἢ ἔτυμον ἐρέω; shall I speak falsely or speak the truth ? K 534.
133576.2. In Homer the anticipatory subjunctive is also found in questions (cf. §562 a): as ὥ μοι έγώ, τί πάθω; Alas! What will become of me? ε 465. μή τι χολωσάμενος ῥέξῃ κακὸν υἶας Ἀχαιῶν; may he not, perhaps, in anger, harm the sons of the Achaeans? B 195.
134579 a. In Homer, alternative indirect questions are introduced in the same way as direct alternative questions (see § 574 a).
135586 a. In Homer (and less often in other poets) wishes are sometimes preceded by ὡς: as ὡς ὤφελες αὐτόθ' ὀλέσθαι would you had perished there Γ 428.
136587 a. In poetry, wishes are sometimes introduced by εἰ alone (e.g. εἴ μοι γένοιτο I wish I might have E. Hec. 836). Tn Homer αἴθε and αἷ γάρ (cf. § 600, 1 a) are also found.
137588 a. In Homer a hopeless past wish is expressed only by ὤφελον (sometimes also the imperfect ὤφελον). A hopeless present wish is sometimes expressed also by the optative (cf. § 606 b): as εἴθ᾽ ὡς ἠβάοιμι, βin δὲ µοι ἔμπεδος εἴη I would that I were young again, and that wy strength were sound Η 157.
138590 a. Homer has also ὄφρα (sometimes also ἕως, § 626 a) in purpose clauses: as κατανεύσομαι ὄφρα πεποίθῃς I will bow my head so you shall not doubt A 524.
590 b (note 2). – In Homer ὄφρα κε (or ἄν) is not infrequently found in purpose clauses.
139593 a. Homer does not distinguish so closely as Attic between purpose and object clauses, and he often uses the subjunctive with ὡς or ὅπως (often with κε also) in object clauses: as φράσσεται ὥς Κε νέηται he will contrive (how) that he shall return α 205.
140598 a. Homer has also ὅ and ὅ τε (§ 441 a) in the sense of the Attic ὅτε because.
141600, 1a. Homer sometimes has αἱ for εἰ (cf. § 587 a).
142604 a. In Homer, and sometimes in the Attic poets, a future more vivid condition is expressed by the subjunctive with εἰ alone (without ἄν or κε, cf. §§ 623 a; 609 a): as οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν ye φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται οὐδ᾽’ εἴ πέρ ἑ σιδήρεα δέσµατ' ἔχῃδιν be sure that not for long will he be absent from his native land, no, not if bonds of iron restrain him α 204. So κεἴ τις ᾗ σοφός even if one be wise S. Ant. 710.
b. Homer uses in the apodosis also the other forms of future statement, (such as the subjunctive with or without ἄν or κε) described in § 563 a; as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δὲ kev αὐτὸς ἔλωμαι and if he do not give her, then Ι myself may seize her A 324.
143605 a. Homer sometimes uses εἴ κε (instead of εἰ) with the optative in the protasis of a future less vivid condition: as εἰ δὲ κεν Άργος ἰκοίμεθ'… and if ever we should come to Argos Ι 141.
144606 a. In Homer the imperfect in a condition contrary to fact refers always to past time.
b. In Homer a condition contrary to fact is sometimes thought of as still possible, and so is expressed as a future less vivid (opt. with εἰ, opt. with ἄν (§ 565 a); cf. the similar use of the present subjunctive in earlier Latin). Usually only the apodosis is expressed in this form: as οὔ κε θανόντι περ ὦδ᾽ ἀκαχοίμην, εἰ μετὰ οἷς ἑτάροισι δάµη Τρώων ἐνὶ δήμῳ Ι should not have been (lit. could not be) so distressed at his death, if he had perished with his companions amidst the people of the Trojans α 236 (cf. also § 588 a).
145609 a. In Homer, present general conditions usually have in the protasis the subjunctive with εἰ alone (without κε or ἄν, cf. § 604 a; 625 a): as οὗ δὲ τις ἡμῖν θαλπωρή, εἴ πέρ τις… φῆσιν ἐλεύσεσθαι and to us it is no joy if (ever) some one say that he will come α 167. This usage is sometimes found in other poets.
146610a. In Homer there is but one example of the optative in a past general condition, namely Ω 768 εἴ τις... ἐνίπτοι,... κατέρῡκες if ever any one spoke harshly... you restrained (him).
147618 a (note). ὄφρα in Homer (like ἕως in Attic, § 018 note) means both while and until. He has also εἰς ὅ κε = until.
148623 a. Often in Homer, and not infrequently in other poets, a relative clause of anticipation has the subjunctive alone (without κε or ἄν); cf. § 555, note, and §§ 604 a; 625 a.
149625 a. Usually in Homer, and not infrequently in other poets, general relative clauses (present) have the subjunctive alone (without κε or ἄν). Compare § 623 a and § 609 a: thus, τὰ φράζεαι ἄσσ’ ἐθέλῃσθα you consider whatsoever you desire A 554.
150626 a. In Homer ἕως (ἧος), like ὄφρα (§ 590 a) is sometimes used in a purpose clause where it is better translated “in order that”: as δῶκεν… ἔλαιον ἧος χυτλώσαιτο [her mother] gave her oil that she might bathe and anoint herself ζ 80.
151627a. In Homer πρίν (likewise πάρος before) is used regularly with the infinitive after both negative and affirmative sentences. Rarely πρὶν ὅτε (πρἰν γ΄ ὅτ' ἄν), literally before the time when, is found with the indicative (or subjunctive). Rarely also πρίν is found with the subjunctive (without κε or ἄν), but only after a negative clause.
152636.2. Homer never uses the article with the infinitive.
153656, 1a. In Herodotus ὥστε is used with participles meaning inasmuch as (like Attic ἄτε): as ὥστε δὲ ταῦτα νομίζων but inasmuch as he believed this Hdt. 1, 8.
656,2 a. In Homer (and sometimes in tragedy) καὶ and περ (cf. § 71 note) are often separated by the participle or other emphatic word: as of δὲκαὶ ἀχνύμενοί περ ἐπ’ αὐτῷ ἠδὺ γέλασσαν but they, though troubled, laughed joyously at him B 270; sometimes περ alone means although: as ἀχνύμενοί περ although distressed κ 174.
656, 3a. In Homer ὥς τε, ὡς εἰ, and ὡς εἴ τε are used with the participle with much the same meaning as ὥσπερ (or ὡς) in Attic: thus, Κίρκη ἐπήιξα ὥς τε κτάµεναι μενεαίνων I sprang upon Circe as if I meant to stay her κ 322. ὁλοφθρόμενοι ὡς εἰ θανατόνδε κίοντα bewailing him as though he were going to death Ω 327.
154669, 1a. Homer sometimes uses simple ὅ (Attic ὅτι) meaning that.
b. In poetry οὕνεκα and ὀθούνεκα (lit. wherefore) are sometimes used to mean that.
155673 a. In Homer the use of the optative in indirect discourse is practically unknown, except sometimes in indirect questions. See § 676a.
156676 a. In Homer, where the use of the optative in indirect discourse after a secondary tense is practically unknown (except sometimes in indirect questions), facts are regularly stated from the point of view of the speaker, and it is left to be inferred that they may have been at the same time the thought of another: as γίγνωσκον ὃ δὴ κακὰ μήδετο δαίµων I knew some power was planning ill (Attic ἐγίγνωσκον ὅτι κακὰ μήδοιτο, or μήδεται) γ 166. ᾔδεε γὰρ κατὰ θῡμὸν ἀδελφεὸν ὡς ἐπονεῖτο for he knew in his heart full well how his brother was toiling B 409.
157 Any optative with ἄν is unchanged from the direct discourse (in which it was originally independent, § 563).
158Rarely.
159For example: Proceleusmatic ◡ ◡ ◡ ◡, First Paeon _ ◡ ◡ ◡, Fourth Paeon ◡ ◡ ◡ _, Molossus _ _ _, etc.
160E. I.T. 1232.
161E. Or. 1526.
162Ar. Ran. 534–6.
163E. Med. 1–2.
164Ar. Nub. 2, 3, 6.
165Ar. Nub. 1038–9.
166A 1.
167a l.
168A 202.
169A 348.
170E. And. 103–104.
171E. Med. 759–763.
172Ar. Aves. 688–689.
173S. Aj. 626.
174S. Aj. 390.
175Aesch. Ag. 211.
176Aesch. Septem, 901.
177E. Bacchae, 123.
178E. Med. 847.
179S. Aj. 643.
180E. Med. 846.
181S. Aj. 606.
182E. Med. 865.
183Aesch. Ag. 477.
184S. Αj. 701.
185E. Med. 159.
186E. Alc. 966.
187E. Alc. 573.
188 Aesch. Ag. 459.
189E. Alc. 906.
190Scolium.
191S. Αj. 226.
192
193S. Ant. 582–5.
194Ar. Nub. 518,520.
195Alcaeus.
196E. I.T. 1123–7.
197E. Med. 990–5.
198E. Med. 410–11.
199S. Ο.Τ. 484.
200Aesch. Persians. 65–6.
201Aesch. Persians. 71.
202Aesch. Persians. 403.
203E. I.T. 872.
204E. I.T. 643.
205E. I.T. 830.
206E. I.T. 650.
207E. I.T. 829.
208E. I.T. 291.
209Ar. Ach. 835.
210See Bennett and Bristol, The Teaching of Latin and Greek, pp. 237–9.
211In Attica τετράς was commonly employed instead of τετάρτη fourth.
212Ιn Attica τετράς was commonly employed instead of τετάρτη fourth. [ἀάω] harm, infatuate (ἀα-), epic and poetic only, 1st aor. ἄασα and ἆσα, 1st aor. pass, ἀάσθην.
ἄγαμαι, epic fut. ἀγάσ(σ)ομαι, epic 1st aor. ἠγασ(σ)άμην.
ἀγάομαι (epic) = ἄγαμαι. Homer has also ἀγαίομαι envy.
ἀγείρω, Homer has 2d aor. 3d sing. ἤγρετο (Mss. ἔγρετο), 3d pl. ἤγροντο (Mss. ἀγέροντο), infin. ἀγρέσθαι (Mss. ἀγέρεσθαι), partic. ἀγρόμενος (§ 208), plpf. mid. 3d pl. ἀγηγέρατο (§ 226 a), 1st aor. pass. ἡγέρθην. For ἀγερέθονται (Mss. ἠγ-) and ἡγερέθοντο, see § 191 a.
ἄγω, Homer has 1st aor. impy. ἄξετε, infin. ἀξέμεναι.. See § 201 b.
[root ἀδε-] be sated, epic aor. opt. ᾱ́δήσεις, pf. partic. ἀδηκότες.
ᾄδω, Ιonic and poetic ἀείδω.
[root ἀε-], 1st aor. (epic) ἄεσα and ἆσα slept.
ἀέξω, see αὔξω.
ἄη-μι (§ 193; theme ἀε, ἀη-) blow (poetic, mostly epic), pres. 5d dual ἄητον (§ 200 a), 3d pl. ἀεῖσι (§ 200 b), imp. 3d sing. ἄη, infin. ἀήμεναι and ἀῆναι (§ 200 a), partic. ἀείς (-έντος), impf. mid. 3d sing. ἄητο (§ 200 a), partic. ἀήμενος (§ 200 a).
Αἴρω, ιonic and poetic ἀείρῳ, 1st aor. ἥειρα, 1st aor. pass. ἠέρθην, pipf. mid. 3d sing. ἄωρτο (or ἄορτο).
αἱρῶ, Herodotus has 1st pf. ἀρ-αίρηκα, and pt. mid. ἀρ-αίρημαι (§ 179).
ἀῑ́ω hear (Ιonic and poetic), impf. ἄϊον, 1st aor. ἐπ-ήϊσα.
ἀκ-αχ-ίζω (§ 292, 6; reduplicated (§ 179 a) theme from root ἀχ-) pain, distress. Other presents of similar meaning from the same root are ἀχ-εύῳ, ἀχ-έω, ἄχ–ομαι, ἄχ–νυ–μαι be distressed. All other tenses are formed from the theme ἀκαχ– or ἀκαχε– (§ 190) ; thus, fut. ἀκαχήσω (§ 519 a), 1st aor. (rare) ἀκάχησα, 2d aor. ἤκαχον, pf. mid. ἀκάχημαι be distressed (§ 535, doubtful is ἀκηχέδ-αται 3d pl), partic. as adj. ἀκαχήμενος distressed. (Doubtful is ἀκηχέμενος.)
ἀκ-αχ-μένος (epic pf. partic. from root ἀκ-) sharpened.
ἀλδαίνω and ἀλδάνω nourish (poetic only), impf. (or 2d aor. ?) ἤλδανον.
ἀλέξω, Ιonic and poetic are fut, ἀλεξήσω and ἀλεξήσομαι, 1st aor. ἠλέξησα, epic 2d aor. ἄλαλκον (§ 208).
ἁλεύω avert (poetic), mostly in mid. ἁλεύομαι and ἀλέομαι (§ 21) aroid, 1st aor. ἀλευάμην (§ 207, note 1) and ἁλεάμην (§ 21).
ἀλῆναι, see εἴλω.
ἄλθομαι be healed (Ionic and poetic), fut. ἀλθήσομαι (§ 190).
ἁλίσκομαι, Epic 2d aor. subj. ἁλώω, ἁλώῃς, etc.
ἁλιτ-αίνομαι (§§ 196, 2; 195, 4) sin (poetic, mostly epic), 2d aor. ἤλιτον, Df. partic. ἀλιτήμενος (§ 190).
ἄλλομαι, epic 2d aor. without vowel ο-/ε- (§ 207 a) ἄλσο, ἄλτο, partic. ἅλμενος, ἀλοῶ, poetic ἁλοιάω.
ἀλυκτῶ (-έω) and ἀλυκτάζω be troubled, pf. mid. ἁλαλύκτημαι (§ 179 a).
ἀλύ-σκω (§197) avoid (poetic), other tenses from ἀλύκ-, fut. ἀλύξω, 1st aor. ἤλυξα.
ἀλφ-άνω (§ 196, 2) acquire (poetic), epic 2d aor. ἤλφον.
ἀλῶμαι (-ἄομαι) wander, epic impv. 2d sing. ἁλάου (Mss. ἀλύω, § 199 b), pf. ἀλάλημαι (§170b and § 535). Otherwise regular, but mostly poetic. ἁμαρτάνω, epic 24 aor. ἤμβροτον (for ἡμ(β)ροτον, §§ 14; 38, with sympathetic β, as in βλίττω and βλώσκω).
ἀμείρω (for *ἀμερ–ιω, § 195, 4) and ἀμέρδω (cf. ἔρδω) deprive (poetic), 1st aor. ἥμερσα (§ 204 a), 1st aor. pass. ἡμέρθην.
ἀμπλακ-ίσκω (§ 197) err (poetic), 2d aor. ἥμπλακον, partic. ἀμπλακών (also written ’ἁπλακών metri gratia), pf. mid. ἠμπλάκημαι (§ 190).
ἀναίνομαι, 1st aor. ἡνηνάμην (poetic).
ἀνδάνω, impt. ἑάνδανον (§ 172, 2), ἄνδανον (§ 171 a), and ἤνδανον (Hdt). Homeric Mss. give (probably wrongly) ἐήνδανον for ἑάνδανον, and ἤνδαvov for ἄνδανον, fut. ἀδήσω (§ 190), 2d aor. ἔαδον (Hdt.), epic ἄδον (§ 171 a) and εὔαδον (for *ἐσϝαδον, *ἐϝϝαδον), 2d pf. ἔᾱδα (§ 180).
ἀνήνοθε grows or grew (epic 2d pf.).
ἀνύω, epic future ἁνύω (§ 216).
ἄνω (poetic) = ἀνύω.
ἄνωγα, epic 2d pf. command (§ 535), 1st pl. ἄνωγμεν, impy. ἄνωχθι and (with middle endings), 3d sing. ἀνόχθω, 2d pl. ἄνωχθε, plupf. ἠνώγεα. Also pres. ἀνώγω to which all forms with the variable vowel ο-/ε-, including the subj. ἀνόγω, and the opt. ἀνώγοιμι, are to be referred; fut. ἀνώξω, 1st aor. ἥνωξα.
ἀπ–αφ–ίσκω (§ 197) deceive (poetic), 2 aor. ἥπαφον (partic. ἀπαφών).
ἀπηύρων (contr. from –αον), epic impf. took away, partic. ἀπούρας are probably traditional Mss. readings embodying ἀπ–έρων and ἀπο–ϝράς § 2 a).
ἀρ-αρ-ίσκω (§§ 197, 1; 179 ; theme ἀρ-) fit (poetic), 1st aor. (trans. § 494, 1) ἦρσα (§ 204 a), 2d aor. (trans. and intrans.) ἤραρον, partic. mid. ἅρμεvos fitting (§ 210 a), 2d pf. ἄρᾱρα (§ 179) (Ionic ἄρηρα, § 15 a).
ᾱ́ρημένος (epic pf. mid. partic.) oppressed (derivation unknown).
άρνοῦμαι, also as middle deponent (5 108, 3), poetic and Ιonic.
ἄρ-νυ-μαι (8 190, 5; theme ἀρ-) win, fut. ἀροῦμαι, 2d aor. ἡρόμην (infin. ’ᾶρέσθαι).
ἁρπάζω, epic fut. ἁρπάξω (§195, 2a) and 1st aor. usually ἥρπαξα (§ 195, 2 a).
ἆσα, see [ἀάω]; ἄσαμεν, see [άε-].
αὔξω, epic and Ionic present also ἀέξω.
ἀφάσσω feel, 1st aor. ἥφασα (Ionic).
ἀφύσσω dip up (poetic), fut. ἀφύξω, 1st aor. ἥφυσα (from ἀφύω).
[root ᾱ᾽-] satiate, satiate one’s self (epic), pres. infin. ἅμεναι, fut. infin, ἄσειν, 1st aor, subj. ἄσῃ, 1st pl. ἔωμεν? sic), opt, ἄσαιμι, infin, ασαι.
βάζω speak (poetic), fut. βάξω.
βαινω, Homer has 1st aor. with variable vowel ἐβήσετο (§ 201 b); also a pres. βά-σκω (§ 197) = βαίνω.
βάλλω, epic 2d aor. forms βλή–την, βλῆ–το (§ 207 a).
βι-βά-ω, βί-βη-μι (§ 108, 3; βα-, epic = βαίνω go), pres. partic. βιβᾱ́ς.
βιβρώσκω, epic poetry has also 2d aor. ἔβρων, 1st aor. pass. ἐβρώθην.
βλώ-σκω (§ 197; for μ(β)λω–σκω, from theme µλω– (§ 88, 1) with sympathetic β, before which μ is lost; theme μολ– or μ(β)λω-) go (poetic), fut. μολοῦμαι, 2d aor. ἔμολον, ist pf. μέ-μβλω-κα (with sympathetic β).
βούλομαι, Homer has also βόλομαι and a 2d pf. act. προ-βέ-βουλ-α prefer.
βοῶ, epic and Ιonic fut. βώσομαι, 1st aor. ἔβωσα, pf. mid. βέβωμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐβώσθην (§ 189).
[root βραχ-] only 2d aor. ἔβραχε resounded (infin. βραχεῖν), epic. βρίζω slumber (epic), 1st aor. ἕβριξα (cf. § 195, 2 a).
[root βροχ] swallow (epic), 1st aor. ἕβροξα, 2d pf. βέβροχα, 2d aor. pass. partic. –βροχείς..
βρῡχῶμαι (-άομαι) roar (poetic), 1st aor. mid. ἑβρῡχησάμην, 1st aor. pass. partic. βρῡχηθείς, 2d pf. (from theme βρυχ-) βε–βρῡχ–α.
-γά-νυ-μαι (§ 196, 5) rejoice (poetic), the epic fut. γανύσσομαι (cf. § 201 a) retains –νυ– of present stem.
γέ-γων-α 2d pf. as pres. (§ 535) shout (poetic), only partic. γεγωνώς (cf. ἄνωγα). Other forms are from pres. γεγώνω or γεγωνέω, fut. γεγωνήσω, 1st aor. ἐγεγώνησα, Also a present γεγων–ίσκω (§ 197).
γείνομαι (§ 195, 4) be born (poetic), deponent, but 1st aor. ἐγεινάμην begat, bore (see § 508).
γέντο seized, epic 2d aor.
γηθῶ, in poetry also fut. γηθήσω, and 1st aor. ἐγήθησα.
γίγνομαι, Ιonic γίνομαι. For the forms of the 2d pf. (γε-γά-ᾱσι, γε-γά-την, γε-γα-υῖα, etc.) with the weak root γα– (for *γν-, § 14 note) see § 219 a. Ιonic has also an aor. pass. ἐγενήθην (§ 510).
γιγνώσκω, Ιonic γινώσκω, Herodotus has 1st aor. ἀνέγνωσα convinced.
γοάω bewail (epic), fut. γοήσομαι (§ 507), 2d aor. (from theme γο-) γόον (§ 171 a).
[root δα-] teach (poetic, cf. δ-δά-σκω), 2d aor. δέδαον (§ 208, 1 a) and ἔδαον (infin. δεδαέσθαι, §§ 208, 1a; 199 b), 1st pf. δεδάηκα (§ 190), and 2d pf. partic. δεδαώς (§ 220), pf. mid. δεδάηµαι (§ 190), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (see § 514) ἐδάην learned, fut. pass. as intrans. δαήσομαι shall learn (§ 514).
δαῑ́ζω (§ 195, 2; δαϊγ-) rend (epic and lyric), fut. δαῑ́ξω, 1st aor. ἐδάϊξα, pf. mid. δεδάϊγµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐδαῑ́χθην.
δαί-νῡ-μι ( 196, 5) entertain (poetic), mid. feast (for opt. δαινῦτο see § 211, 2 a), fut. δαίσω, 1st aor. ἔδαισα, 1st Aor. pass. partic. δαισθείς (§ 189).
δαίοµαι divide (epic, cf. δατέομαι), pres. subj. δά (ι)ηται, pf. mid. δέδαιμαι.
δαίω (for *δαϝ–ιω, §§ 2 a; 195, 4) kindle (poetic), 2d pf. δέδηα blaze (§ 494, 3).
δάµ-νη-μι (§ 196, 3) and (doubtful) δαμνάω subdue (poetic), pf. mid. δέ-δμη-μαι (§ 38, 1), 2d. aor. pass. ἐδάμην and rarely 1st ἐδμήθην (§ 38, 1). Other forms are supplied from δαμάζω; as fut. δαµάω or δαμῶ (§ 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐδάμασα or epic ἐδάμασσα (§ 201 a), etc.
δαρθάνω, Homer has 2d aor. ἔδραθον (§ 38).
δατέοµαι, Homer has also fut. δάσοµαι and 1st aor. ἐδασσάμην (§ 201 a).
δέαται appears (epic), 1st aor. ἐδοάσσατο.
δέδια (epic δείδια) fear. See [δίω].
δείκνῦμι, Ionic is fut. δέξω, 1st aor. ἔδεξα, etc.
δέµ-ω (§ 193) build (Ionic and poetic), 1st aor. ἔδειμα, Pf. mid. δέ-δμη-μαι (§ 38, 1).
δέρκ-οµαι (§ 193; theme δορκ-, δερκ-, δρακ-, §§ 14, 1; 38) look (poetic), 2d aor. ἔδρακον (§ 208), 24 pf. δέ-δορκ-α (§ 219, 3), aorists pass. with active meaning (1st) ἐδέρχθην, and (2d) ἐδράκην (§ 232, 2).
δέω need, epic usually δεύοµαι, fut. δευήσοµαι, 1st aor. ἐδεύησα.
δηριάομαι (active rare) contend. Other tenses from δηρῑ́οµαι, fut. δηρῑ́σομαι, 1st aor. ἐδηρῑσάμην, and 1st aor. pass. ἐδηρίνθην (as if from *δηρῑ́νω).
δήω, epic fut. (§ 216) shall learn; cf. [δα-]-
διδρᾱ́σκω, Ionic διδρήσκω, δρήσομαι, ἔδρην, etc. (§ 15 a).
δίδωμι, Homer has an unexplained fut. διδώσω.
δίζη-μαι seek (Ionic and poetic) keeps η throughout the present (cf. § 200 α), fut. διζήσοµαι, 1st aor. ἐδιζησάμην.
[δίη-μι]. make flee, act. only in impf. 3d pl. ἐν-δίεσαν set on; mid. flee, pres. 3d pl. δίενται, subj. δίωµαι (cf. § 200 note), opt. 3d sing. δίοιτο (§ 170, 4), infin. δίεσθαι.
[root δικ-], only 2d aor. ἔδικον threw.
[δίω] fear (epic), impf. δίον (§ 171, a), epic 1st aor. ἔδδεισα (§ 22 a), epic 1st pf. δείδοικα (for *δε-δϝοι-κα, § 16), 2d pf. δείδια (§ 16).
δοκῶ, poetic forms are fut. δοκήσω, 1st aor. ἑδόκησα, pf. mid. δεδόκημαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐδοκήθην (see § 190).
δουπῶ (-έω) sound (mostly poetic), fut. δουπήσω, etc. regular (§ 187), 2d pf. δέδουπα. (Originally *γδουπῶ, as shown by epic aor. ἐ–γδούπησαν.)
ἐάφθη, epic 1st aor. pass., probably from root ϝαπ– (§ 172, 2) was tumbled.
ἐγείρω, Homeric forms of 2d pf. are 3d pl. indic. ἐγρηγόρθᾶσι (?), 2d pl. impv. mid. ἐγρήγορθε (for *-γορσθε, § 35), infin. mid. ἐγρηγόρθαι (for *-γορσθαι, § 35).
ἔδω eat, poetic for ἐσθίω, q.v., 2d pf. partic. ἐδηδώς.
[root ἐδ] epic fut. infin. ἔσσεσθαι, 1st aor. εἶσα or ἔσσα (§ 201). See also ἴζω.
ἔθω, pres. only in partic. ἔθων being accustomed (epic). εἴωθα, epic and Ιonic also ἕωθα.
εἴδομαι seem (poetic), 1st aor. εἰσάμην and ἐεισάμην (§ 172, 2).
[root εἰκ-] fut. εἴξω (§ 519, note 2) shall resemble. For epic ἐῑ́κτην, ἠῑ́κτο, etc., see § 210 a. Herodotus has also οἶκα = ἔοικα.
εἰλῡ́-ω (§ 193) roll (poetic), fut. εἰλῡ́σω etc. regular, but 1st aor. pass. εἰλύσθην (§ 189).
εἰλῶ and εἴλω (poetic, mostly epic). Other tenses from root ϝελ– point to *ϝελλω as perhaps the proper epic form; 1st aor. ἔλσα (ἕελσα) (§ 204 a), pf. pass. ἔελμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἑάλην (§ 232, 2). Herodotus
has 1st aor. –είλησα, pf. mid. –είλημαι, 1st aor. pass. –ειλήθην.
εἵμαρται it is futed. See μείρομαι.
εἴργω, epic pres. always ἐέργω shut in or out, other tenses from stem έργ-, *ϝεργ-, § 2a). For pf. mid. ἔρχ-αται, plupf. (ἐ)έρχ-ατο, see § 226 a. For εἴργαθον, see § 191 a. Herodotus commonly has ἔργω,
εἴρομαι ask (Ionic), fut. εἰρήσομαι (§ 190) ; cf. ἐρέω.
εἴρω say (epic only), fut. ἐρέω, also 1st aor. pass. εἰρήθην (§ 172, 2).
εἴρω join, epic 1st aor. ἔρσα (§ 204 a), epic pf. mid. partic. ἐερμένος.
εἶσα. See [ἐδ-].
ἑλεῖν. See αἱρῶ.
ἐλελίζω turn round (poetic), 1st aor. ἑλέλιξα (§ 171 a), 1st aor. pass. ἐλελίχθην (§ 171 a).
ἑλίττῳ, Ιonic ἑλίσσω and ἑλίσσω (§ 22).
ἕλπω cause to hope (mid. hope) epic, 2d pf. ἔολπα (for *ϝε-ϝολπ-α, §§ 180; 219, 3), 2d plupf. ἑώλπεα (for *ϝε-ϝολπεα, § 17).
[root ἐλυθ-], poetic 2d aor. ἤλυθον (cf. § 20), epic 2d pf. εἰλήλουθα and ἐλήλουθα (§ 219 note 1), Ιonic and poetic fut. ἐλεύσομαι (§ 507, for *ἐλευθ-σομαι §§ 30; 186, 2).
ἑναίρω (§195, 4; ἑναρ-) kill (poetic), 2d aor. ἤναρον.
ἐν-έπω and ἐν-νέπω (§ 193: theme σεπ-, σπ-, § 14) tell, say (poetic), fut. ἑνί–σπήσω (§§ 406 a; 38, 1), 2d aor. ἔνι–σπον (§§ 406 a; 208; 171 a), subj. ἐνί–σπω, opt. ἐνί–σποιμι, impv. ἐνί–σπες (§ 170, note 1, ἔνιστε?), 2d pl. impv. ἔσπετε (for *ἐν-σπετε, § 34), infin. ἐνι–σπεῖν.
ἐν-ίσσω (§ 195, 1) also ἐν-ίπ-τω (§ 194) chide (epic), 2d aor. ἐν-έν-ῑπον (§ 208, 1a, cf. § 181) and ἠμίπαπον.
ἔννῡμι, epic fut. ἔσσω, 1st aor. ἔσσα (§ 171 a) and ἔεσα (for *έ-ϝεσσα, § 172, 2), pf. mid. ἔσμαι and εἶμαι (partic. εἰμένος also in Attic tragedy).
ἔπω be busy about, handle (Ionic and poetic), fut. ἔψω, 2d aor. ἕ-σπον (subj. σπῶ, etc., infin. σπεῖν, partic. σπών). For 2d aor. mid., subj., opt., etc., Homeric Mss. often have ἕσπωμαι, ἐσποίμην, etc., following an elided vowel, but these can always be read σπῶμαι, σποίµην, without the preceding elision; as ἄμα σπέσθαι for ἅμ' ἑσπέσθαι. Some editors contend for a reduplicated aorist without augment, *σε–σπ-, giving ἐσπ-. Homer has 2d sing. impy. σπεῖο(?). Herodotus has 1st aor. pass. περι–έφθησαν (§ 171 b).
ἔραμαι love (poetic), in poetry also aor. mid. ἠρασ(σ)άμην.
ἔργω. See εἴργω.
ἔρδω (§ 195, 2, for ϝεργ–ιω = *ϝερζω (i.e. ϝερσδω, § 11) = ϝέρδω, § 35) do (Ιonic and poetic, cf. ῥέζῳ), fut. ἔρξω, 1st aor. ἔρξα (§ 171 a), 2d pf. ἔοργα (for *ϝε–ϝοργ–α, § 180), 2d plupf. ἑώργεα (for *ἐ-ϝe-ϝοργεα, § 17).
ἐρείδ-ω (§ 193) support, prop (mostly poetic), regular, but pf. mid. ἐρ-ήρεισ-μαι (§§ 179, 189), Homeric 2d pl. ἐρ-ηρίδ-αται (§ 226 a), plupf. ἐρ-ηρίδ-ατο (Mss. ἐρηρέδαται, –έδατο;; see § 219 a).
ἐρείκ-ω (§ 193, 2) tear (Ιonic and poetic) 1st aor. ἦρειξα, also 2d aor. (both trans. and intrans., § 207 note 3) ἤρικον, pf. mid. ἐρ-ήριγ-μαι (§§ 179; 219 a).
ἐρείπω overthrow, epic 2d pf. ἐρ–ήριπα (§§ 170; 219, note 2), pf. mid. 3 d sing. ἐρ–έριπτο (§ 179 a).
ἐρέσσω (§ 195, 1; ἐρετ-) row (poetic) epic 1st aor. ἤρεσ(σ)α.
ἐρέω ask (epic).
ἐρίζω (§ 193, 2; ἐριδ-) contend, epic 1st aor. ἠρισ(σ)α (§ 201 a).
ἕρπω poetic also ἑρπύζω, 1st aor. εἴρπυσα (6 175, 2).
ἐρρυγ-άν-ω ( 196, 2) eruct, 2d aor. ἤρυγον.
ἐρῡ́κω (§ 108) and ἐρῡ́κ–άν–ω (§ 196, 2) hold back, epic 2d aor. ἠρῡ́καλον.
ἔρῡ-μαι. and εἴρι-μαι (for *έϝρυμαι) protect, watch (Ιonic and poetic), pres. 3d pl. εἰρύ–αται (§ 167 d), impf. εἰρύατο (§ 167 d), fut. ε(ἰ)ρύσ(σ)οµαι, 1st aor. ε(ἰ)ρυσ(σ)άμην. Forms often coincide with those of ἐρύω.
ἐρύ-ω (§ 193; theme ϝερυ-, § 2a) draw (Ιonic and poetic), fut. ἐρίω (§ 216), fut. mid. ἐρύσσομαι, 1st aor. εἴρυσα (§ 172, 2) and ἔρυσα (§ 171 a), pf. mid. εἴρῡμαι and εἴρυσμαι (§ 189), 3d pl. εἰρύ–αται (§ 226 a). Forms often coincide with those of ἔρῡμαι.
ἔσθω, poetic for ἐσθίω eat, epic 2d pf. partic. ἐδηδώς,
ἐῶ, pres. εἴω (doubtful) ocours in Homer according to the Mss.
ζεύγνῦμι, 1st aor. pass. (mostly poetic and Ιonic) ἐξεύχθην.
ἡβῶ (-άω) be vigorous. Homer has ἠβάῳ with long ᾱ. (See § 199 b.)
ἡττῶμαι. Herodotus has έσσοῦμαι (i.e. –όομαι), etc.
θάλλω (§ 195, 3), bloom (poetic), 2d pf. τέθηλα be in bloom (§ 535). For θαλ–έθω see § 191 a.
θάπτω, 1st aor. pass. ἐθάφθην, rarely in Herodotus.
θείνω (§ 195, 4; θεν-) smite (poetic), fut. θενῶ, 1st aor. ἔθεινα (epic), 2d aor. ἔθενον.
θέρομαι warm one’s self (poetic), fut. θέρσομαι (cf. § 213 a), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐθέρην (only subj. θερέω, § 233, 1 a).
[root θη-] milk, only pres. infin. θῆσθαι (§ 200 a) and 1st aor. ἐθησάμην.
θηέοµαι gaze at, admire (epic for θεῶμαι (-άομαι)), fut. θηήσοµαι, 1st aor. ἐθηησάμην.
θιγγ-άν-ω (§ 190, 2; θιγ-) touch (poetic, rare in prose), fut. θίξομαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔθιγον.
Ολῶ(-άῳ) bruise (Ιonic and poetic), 1st aor. ἔθλασα, pf. mid. τέθλασμαι (§189), 1st aor. pass. ἐθλάσθην (5 189).
θρύπτω, Homer has 2d aor. pass. ἐτρύφην (§ 41).
θῡ́ω and θύνω (§ 196, 1) rush (poetic).
ἰάλλω, Attic ἰάλλω (§ 195, 3) put forth, send (poetic), fut. ἰαλῶ, 1st aor. ἴηλα.
ἴεμαι (for *ϝῑεμαι) desire. In Homer always with long ε and almost always with initial ϝ (epic) 1st aor. (ἑ)εισάμην.
ἵημι (see § 260 a), for Ιonic µεµετιµένος see μεθίημι.
ἱκνοῦμαι, poetic are also ἴκω and ἰκ–ᾱ́νω (§ 196, 2), epic 1st aor. ἴξον (§ 201 b).
ῑ́λάσκομαι, epic is also pres. ἱλάομαι (and possibly ἴλαμαι), 1st aor. ῑ́λασσάμην (§201 a), 1st pf. ἴληκα (§ 494, 3) be propitious, 2d pf. impv. only ἴλη–θι (§ 220).
ἱμάσσω (§ 195, 1; ἱμαντ-) epic 1st aor. ἵμασα (§ 171, 2) and ἵμασσα (§ 201 a).
ἱμείρω (§ 195, 4; ἰμερ-) long for (Ιonic and poetic), also deponent, ἱμείρομαι, aor. ῑ́μειράμην (epic), aor. ῑ́μέρθην (Ιonic); see § 158, 3.
καί-νυ-μαι (§ 196, 5) excel (poetic), pf. κέκασµαι (§ 535).
καίω, epic 1st aor. ἕκηα (i.e. *ἐ-κηϝ, § 204) and 1st aor. partic. κέᾱς (poetic), also 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐκάην burned (epic and Ιonic).
κεάζω split (epic), fut. κεάσσω, 1st aor. ἐκέασ(σ)α.
κείρω, epic 1st aor. ἔκερσα (§ 204 a), also poetic 1st aor. pass. ἐκέρθην.
κέ-καδον, epic 2 aor. (§ 208, 1 a) only partic. act. κεκαδών depriving, and 3d pl. mid. as pass. (§ 515, 1 a) κεκάδοντο were made to retire. Fut. from aor. stem (§ 519 a) κε-καδή-σω (§ 190) shall deprive.
κέλλω (§ 195, 3) land (of ships); poetic for ὀκέλλῳ, fut. κέλσω (§ 213 a), 1st aor. ἔκελσα (§ 204 a).
κέλοµαι order (poetic = κελεύω), fut. κελήσοµαι (§ 190), 1st aor. ἐκελησάμην (§ 190), and epic 2d aor. ἐ-κε-κλ-όμην (§§ 208; 208, 1a).
κεντῶ(-έω) prick (with a goad) Ιonic and poetic; fut. κεντήσω, etc., regular, but Homer has 1st aor. infin. κάνσαι (for *κεντ-σαι, cf. § 204 a).
κεράννυµι, Ιonic and poetic also κίρ–νη–μι and κιρνῶ(-άω) and epic pres. impv. κέραιε.
κερδαίνω Ionic 1st aor. ἐκέρδηνα (cf. § 204, note 2). Herodotus has also forms from a stem κερδε-; as fut. κερδήσομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἑκέρδησα.
κεύθω (§ 193) hide (poetic), fut. κεύσω, 1st aor, ἔκευσα, 2d aor. ἔκυθον, with subj. κεκύθω (§ 208, 1 a), 2d pf. κέ-κευθ-α (§ 219, note 1) with pres. meaning (§ 535).
κήδω make concerned (poetic), mid. be concerned, fut. κηδήσω (§ 190) and κεκαδήσω (§ 519 a), 1st aor. ἕκηδησα (§ 190) and aor. mid. (once) ἐκηδεσάμην (§ 188), 2d pf. κέ-κηδ-α (§ 535) be concerned (§ 494, 3).
κιγχάνω (§ 196, 2 ; theme κιχ-), also epic κιχᾱ́νω come upon, reach (poetic), fat. κιχήσοµαι (§§ 190; 507), 2d aor. ἔκιχον, also 2 aor. pass. as intzans. (§ 514) ἐκίχην (subj. κιχήω, pl. κιχήσμεν, etc., § 233, 1 a; Mss. κιχείω, etc.). A mid. partic.
κιχήµενος is perhaps to be referred to a theoretical *κίχημι.
κίδνημι scatter = σκίδνηµι, q.v.
κίρνημι. See κεράννῡμι.
κλάζω, poetic 2d aor. ἔκλαγον, poetic 2d pf. κέκληγα (§ 219, 2).
κλέπτω, 1st aor. pass. ἐκλέφθην (Ionic and poetic).
κλῄζω (epic κληῑ́ζῳ) celebrate in song (poetic), fut. κλῄσω, 1st aor. ἔκλῃσα, rarely ἐκλήϊξα (§ 195, 2 a).
κλύω hear (poetic), 2d aor. ἔκλυον (impv. κλῦθι, κλῦτε; see § 210 a): also reduplicated aor. impv. (epic) κέκλυθι, κέκλυτε (§ 208, 1 α).
κορέν-νῡ-μι (§ 196, note) satiate (Ionic and poetic; rare in prose), fut. κορέσω (§ 188) and (epic) κορέω (§ 37), 1st aor. ἐκόρεσα (§ 188), epic 2d pf. partic. κεκορηώς satisfied (§ 494, 3), pf. mid. κεκόρεσµαι (§ 189) and (epic) κεκόρημαι (§ 188, 1).
κορύσσω (§ 193, 1; κορυθ-) equip (poetic), 1st aor. partic. mid. κορυσσάμενος (§ 201 a), pf. mid. partic. κεκορυθµένος.
κοτέω be angry (epic), 1st aor. ἑκότεσα (§ 188), and 2d pf. partic. κεκοτηώς.
κραίνω (§ 195, 4) and κρᾱαίνω (§ 195, 4, Mss. κραιαίνω) accomplish (poetic) are from theme κραν– and κρᾱαν– (see the declension of κάρη, § 115, 9a, and cf. § 909, 8 note) ; fut. κρανῶ, 1st aor. ἔκρᾱνα, epic ἔκρηνα and ἐκρᾱηνα (Mss. ἔκρηηνα), pf. mid. 3d sing. κέ–κραν–ται (§ 247) and epic κε–κρᾱ́αν–ται, 15t aor. pass. ἐκράνθην and ἐκρᾱάνθην.
κρεμάννῡμι, also κρίµνηµι (mid. κρίµναµαι be suspended), usually printed κρήμνημι.
κρίζω (§ 195, 95 κριγ-) creak, squeak, 24 aor. ἔκρικον (of. § 195, 2, note 2), 2d pf. κέκρῑγα (§ 219, 2).
κρύπτω, poetic 2d aor. pass. (rare) ἐκρύφην.
κτείνω, Ιonic fut. κτενέω (Mss. sometimes κτανέω), 2d aor. (poetic) ἔκτανον and ἔκταν (for *έ-κτν-v, § 14, note), ἕκτας, ete. (subj. Mss. κτέωµεν, § 211, 1 a-b, infin. κτάµεναι, partic. κτᾱ́ς), 1st aor. pass. (epic) ἐκτάθην (for *ἐ-κτν-θην, contrary to § 231, 4). Homer uses the fut. mid. and aor. mid. as passive also (§ 515, 1a).
κτέζω (§ 292, 6) found, epic 2d aor. partic. as pass. (§ 515, 1 a) εὐ–κτί–μενος.
κτυπῶ (-έω) resound (poetic), regular, but 2d aor. ἔκτυπον.
κτῶμαι, Ιonic perf. mid. ἕ-κτημαι (§ 178, 1).
κυνῶ (-έω) kiss, fut. κυνήσω, etc., regular, but poetic 1st aor. ἔκυσα.
κῡρω (§ 193) meet with, happen (poetic), fut. κύρσω (§ 213 a), 1st aor. ἔκυρσα (§ 204 α). κυρῶ (-έω) = κύρω, fut. κυρήσω, etc. is regular.
λαγχάνω, Ionic fut. λάξομαι, epic 2d aor. subj. λελάχω (§ 208, 1 a), Ionic and poetic 2d pf. λέλογχα (§ 219, 3).
λάζομαι (§ 195, 2; theme λαγ-, cf. λαβ-) and λάζυμαι = λαμβάνω take.
λαμβάνω, Ionic forms are fut. λάμψομαι (better λάψομαι), 1st pf. λελάβηκα (§190), pf. mid. λέ, 1st aor. pass. ἐλάμφθην. Epic 2d aor. mid. infin. λελαβέσθαι (§ 208, 1a). Poetic pf. mid. λέλημμαι.
λανθάνω, epic 24 aor. λέλαθον (§§ 208, 1a; 171 a) and pf. mid. λέλασμαι (§§ 27, 3; 219 a).
λάσκω (for *λακ–σκω, § 107) speak (poetic), fut. λακήσομαι (§§ 190; 507), 2d aor. ἕλακον (epic mid. λελακόμη», §§ 208, 1a; 171 a), 2d pf. λέ-ληκ–α (§ 219, 2) with fem. partic. λελακυῖα (§ 219 a).
[root λεχ-, cf. λέχος bed] only in epic poetry, 1st aor. ἕλεξα laid to rest, mid. ἐλεξάμην went to rest (impv. λέξεο, § 201 b), 2d. aor. ἐλέγμην (§ 207 a ) went to rest (impv. λέξο (i.e. *λεχ–σο), infin. λέχθαι (for «λεχ–σθαι, § 35), partic., λέγ–μενος, § 207 a).
λήθω (poetic) = λανθάνω escape notice.
λῄζω, Ιonic and poetic is ληίζω.
λίσσομαι (§ 105, 1; λιτ-) rarely λίτοµαι supplicate (mostly epic, rare in prose), epic 1st aor. ἑλλισάμην (§ 172, 1 α). An epic 2d aor. ἐλιτόμην is doubtful.
λούω, epic λόω (§ 21) and λοέω (§ 190), fut. λοέσσω (§ 201 a), 1st aor. ἐλόεσσα.
λῡ́ω, epic also with ῡ. Epic 2d aor. ἑλύμην (§ 209).
μαίομαι (theme μασ–?) seek, strive (poetic), fut. µάσσοµαι, 1st aor. ἐμασσάμην (§ 201 a).
μάρ–να–μαι (§ 196, 3) fight (poetic), only pres. and impf.; pres. subj. μάρνωμαι (cf. § 200, note).
μάρπ-τω (§ 194; μαρπ-) seize (poetic), fut. μάρψω, 1st aor. ἔμαρψα (epic 2d aor. ἔμαρπον), 2d pi. μέμαρπα.
μάχοµαι, epic is also µαχέοµαι (§ 190) and μαχείοµαι (§ 292, 2 a), fut. μαχέσσοµαι (Mss. also µαχήσομαι), 1st aor. ἐμαχεσσάμην (§ 201 a).
μεθ-ῑ́ηιμι send away, like ἴηιμι, but Herodotus has pf. mid. partic. μεµετιµένος (§ 181).
μείγνῡμι, epic 2d aor. 3d sing. ἕ-μικ-το (§ 207 a).
μείρομαι obtain part in (epic), 2d pf. ἔμμορε (§ 219, 3, for *ἐσμορε?, cf. § 178, 1) have a share in (§ 535).
μέλω epic 2d pf. μέ–μηλ–α (§ 219, 2). Homer has also pf. mid. 3d sing. μέμβλεται and plupl. μέμβλετο (for ἀμε-μλεται and *με-μλεται, with sympathetic β).
μενοινάω be eager (epic). See § 199 a-b.
μερμηρίζω ponder (poetic), epic fut. –ίξω and epic aor. –ιξα (§ 195, 2 a).
μήδομαι (§ 193), contrive (poetic), fut. μήσομαι, 1st aor. ἐμησάμην (§ 203).
[root µηκ-, µακ– (§ 13)] bleat. (A present μηκῶμαι is doubtful.) Epic 2d aor. partic. μακ–ών, epic 2d pf. partic. μεμηκώς (fem. με–μακ–υῖα, § 219 a), 2d plupf. with variable vowel (ἑ)μέμηκον.
μητιάω plan (poetic), other tenses from μητίομαι; as fut. μητίσομαι, 1st aor. ἐμητίσαμην.
μί-μν-ω (§ 193, 3) remain (poetic) = μένω,
μίσγω (for *μιγ–σκω, § 197; cf. πάσχω) mix (Ιonic) = μείγνῡμι.
μύζω suck, has epic 1st aor. ἐμύζησα (§ 190).
[root µυκ– (cf. μθκῶμαι)] bellow, epic 2d aor. μύκον (§ 171 a), epic 2d pf. μέ–μῡκ–α (§ 219, 2).
ναίω (for *νασ–ιω, §§ 195; 37) dwell (poetic), 1st aor. ἔνασσα (epic) setdled (trans. of. § 494, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐνάσθην (§ 189) was settled or dwelt (§ 514).
γάττῳ (§ 195, 1), Ιonic νάσσω (§ 99) stuff (mostly poetic and Ιonic), 1st aor. ἔναξα, pf. mid. νένασμαι (rarely νέναγμαι).
νεικέω or νεικείῳ (§ 292, 2 a; theme νεικεσ-) chide (Ιonic, mostly epic), fut. νεικόσω (§ 188), 1st aor. ἐνείκεσα (§ 188), or ἐνείκεσσα (§ 201 a).
νέομαι go, come (poetic), only pres. and impf. The present sometimes has future meaning (§ 524).
νίζω, Homer has a doubtful pres. mid. infin. ἀπονίπτεσθαι.
νῑ́σομαι (for *νι-νσ–ομαι, § 193, 3; theme νεσ-, νσ-, § 14) go (poetic), only pres. and impf. The present often has future meaning (§ 524).
νοῦ (-έω) think, perceive (regular in attic), in ionic contracts –oη– to ω; as 1st aor. ἔνωσα (attic ἐνόησα), 1st pf. νένωκα (attic νενόηκα), etc.
ξέω, epic 1st aor. ἕξεσσα (§ 201 a).
[root ὀδυ– (for ὀδυσ-)] enrage (poetic), only 1st aor. mid. ὠδυσάμην (ὠδυσσάμην, § 201 a) was enraged, and pf. mid. -- (§§ 179; 189).
ὄζω, poetic 2d pf. ὄδ–ωδ–α (§ 170), plupf. ὁδώδη (§ 171 a).
οἴγω, poetic fut. οἴξω, 1st aor. ὤϊξα and ᾧξα (or οἷξα, § 171 a).
οἰδ–άν–ω (§ 196, 2) swell (poetic) = οἰδῶ.
οἰνοχοῶ (-έω) pour wine, in Homer augments to ἐ–οιν– (for ἐ–ϝοιν-, § 172, 2. Mss. ἐῳν-).
οἴομαι, Homer often has 1st sing. ὀῑ́ω (ὀῑ́ω), and mid. ὀῑ́ομαι, 1st aor. ὀῑ́σά–μην (§ 171 a), 1st aor. pass. ὠῑ́σθην (§ 189).
ὄνο-μαι (§ 193; ὀνο-), inflected like δίδοµαι (§ 252) with pres. opt. ὄνοιτο (§ 170, 4) insult (Ionic and poetic), epic fut. ὀνόσσομαι (§ 201 a), 1st aor. ὠνοσάμην, also aor. pass. subj, in same sense, κατ–ονοσθῇς (Hdt.).
[root ὁπ-] 2d pf. (onic and poetic) ὄπ–ωπ–α (§ 179).
ὀπυίω take to wife (poetic), fut. ὀπῡ́σω.
ὀρέγω, epic also ὀρέγνῡμι (§ 196, 5), epic pf. mid. ὁρ–ώρεγ–μαι (§ 179) with 3d pl. ὁρωρέχ–αται, plupt. ὁρωρέχ–ατο (§ 226 a).
Ὄρ-νῦ-μι (§ 196, 5, ὀρ-) rouse (poetic). fut. ὄρσω (mid. ὀροῦμαι, § 213), 1st aor. ὦρσα (§ 204 a, with impv. ὄρσεο, § 201 b), 2d aor. (trans. and intrans.) ὤρορον (§ 208, 1a), 2d aor. mid. ὠρόμην (but several forms without variable vowel, § 207 a; as 3d sing. ὦρτο, impv. ὄρ-σο, infin. ὄρ-θαι for *ὀρ-σθαι, § 35, partic. ὄρ-μενος), 2d pf. ὄρ-ωρ-α (§ 179) am aroused (§ 494, 3), pf. mid. 3d sing. ὁρώρεται (epic).
ὀφείλῳ, epic pres. usually ὀφέλλῳ,
[root πα-] acquire (poetic, but used by Xenophon), fut. πάσοµαι, 1st aor. έπᾱσάμην (§ 158, 3), PI. πέπᾶμαι possess (§ 535).
παίω strike, regular, has poetic fut. παιήσω (§ 190; cf. § 519, note 9).
πάλλω (§ 195, 3; παλ-) brandish (mostly poetic), 1st aor. ἔπηλα (§ 204, note 2), 2d aor. partic. (epic) (ἀμ-)πε–παλών (§ 208, 1 a), 2d aor. mid. 3d sing. (epic) ἕ–παλτο ( 207 a), pf. mid. πέπαλµαι.
πάσχω, for epic 2d pf., 21 pl. πέπασθε (for *πε–παθ–τε, cf. πάσχω for *παθσκω), partic. fem. πεπαθυῖα, see § 219 a.
πατέοµαι (§ 193; πατ-, § 190) eat (Ιonic and poetic), fut. πάσοµαι, 1st aor. ἐπασάμην, epic plupf. πε–πάσ–μην (§§ 171a; 189, note).
πάττω (§195, 1, πατ.-), Ionic πάσσω (§ 22), sprinkle (mostly poetic), fut. πάσω, 1st aor. ἔπασα, 1st aor. pass. ἐπάσθην (§ 189, note).
Πείθω, poetic 2d aor. (ἕ)πιθον (mid, ἐπιθόμην) with subj. πεπίθω, opt. πεπίθοιμι, etc. (§ 208, 1a), fut. from aor. stem (§ 519 a) πε-πιθ-ήσω shall persuade, epic 2d plupf., 1st pl. ἐ-πέ-πιθ-μεν (§ 219 2), impv. πέ-πισ-θι (Aesch.). Alsoa fut. πιθήσω shall obey and aor. partic. πιθήσᾱς obeying, trusting, as if from a pres. *πιθέω obey.
πείκ-ω (§ 193; probably for *πεκϝ, § 16) comb, shear (poetic), also a denominative (§ 202, 2) πεκτῶ(-έω), 1st aor. ἔπεξα, 1st aor. pass. ἐπέχθην.
πείρω (§ 193, 4 ; theme περ-, παρ-, § 14, 1) pierce (Ιonic and poetic), 1st aor. ἔπειρα, pf. mid. πέ–παρ–μαι (§ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐπάρην (§ 232, 2).
πελάζω (§ 292, 6; cf. πέλας near) bring near (Ionic and poetic), fut. πελάσω and πελῶ (§ 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐπέλασα, also epic 2d aor. mid. 3d sing. ἔ-πλπ-το and 3d pl. ἕ-πλη-ντο (§ 207 a) approached, pf. mid. πέ-πλη–μαι (cf. § 38, 1), 1st aor. pass. ἐπελάσθην (§ 189) and ἐπλάδην (§ 38).
πέλ-ω (§ 193; πελ-, πλ-, § 14) and πέλοµαι (lit. go, come) be (poetic equivalent of εἰμί or γίγνομαι), 2d aor. ἔπλον, mid. ἐπλόμην (§ 208).
πέρθ-ω (§ 193; theme περθ-, πραθ-, §§ 14, 1; 38) sack (poetic), fut. πέρσω (with πέρσοµαι as pass., § 515, 1), 1st aor. ἔπερσα (for *ἐ-περθ-σα, §203), 2d aor. ἕπραθον (§ 38). (Doubtful is infin. πέρθαι, for *πέρθ–σαι? (§§ 80; 35).
πέρ–νηµι (§ 196, 3; περασ-?) sell (poetic), fut. περάω (cf. § 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐπέρασ(σ)α (§ 201 a), pf. mid. partic. πεπρηµένος (§ 38, Mss. πεπερηµένος).
πέτοµαι, poetic fut. πετήσοµαι (§ 190), 2d aor. ἕπτην (as if from stem πτα-, inflected like ἔστην, § 257) and mid. ἑπτάμην (like ἐπριάμην, § 257); poetic also are ποτάοµαι and ποτέοµαι (§ 202, 2 and 3), regular.
πεύθοµαι (§ 193, 2) learn (poetic) = πυνθάνοµαι.
πέφνον slew, see [φεν-].
πέφραδον indicated, see φράζω.
πήγνῡμι, epic 2d aor. 3d sing. κατ-έ-πηκ-το (§ 207 a), poetic is 1st aor. pass. ἐπήχθην.
πίλ-νη-μι (§ 196, 3) approach (epic), only pres. and imp. = πελάζω.
πινύ-σκω (§ 197; theme π(ι)νυ-, cf. πνέω) make wise, epic 1st aor. ἐπίνυσσα (§201 a), pf. mid. πόπνῡμαι am wise (§ 535) with partic. πεπνῡμένος wise.
πίπτω, epic 2d pf. partic. πε-πτη-ώς (§ 220), in Attic poetry contracted to πεπτώς.
πίτ-νη-μι (§ 196, 3) spread (poetic) = πετάννυμι.
πίτ-νω (§ 196, 1) fall (poetic) = πίπτω.
πλάζω (§ 195, note 1) cause to wander (Ιonic and poetic), fut. mid. πλάγἔομαι shall wander, 1st aor. ἔπλαγξα, 1st aor. pass. ἐπλάγχθην wandered (§ 138, 3).
πλάττω, Ιonic πλάσσω (§ 22), epic 1st aor. ἔπλασσα (§ 201 a).
πλέω, epic also πλείω. Ionic and poetic πλώω, fut. πλώσομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἔπλωσα, 2d aor. ἔπλων (§ 209), 1st pf. πόπλωκα, vbl. πλωτός.
πλήττω, epic plupf. with variable vowel (ἐ)πέπληγον, poetic and rare is 1st aor. pass. ἐπλήχθην.
πνέω, epic also πνείω, epic 2d aor. 3d sing. ἄμ–πνῡτο (§ 209) and impv. ἅμ-πνυο (Mss. ἄμπνυε).
ποιῶ(-έω) do, poetic is ποῶ (§ 21).
[root πορ-, πρω-, § 38, 1] gire. allot. (poetic), 2d aor. ἔπορον, pf. mid. 3d sing. πέτρωται it is fated, and partic. πεπρωμένος fated.
πρᾱ́ττω, Ιonic πρήσσω (§§ 15 a; 22).
πτήσσω (Ιonic and poetic also πτώσσω), poetic 2d aor. ἕπτακον (§ 208), Homer has also from theme πτα-, 2d aor. dual πτή–την (§ 209) and 2d pf. partic. πε–πτη–ώς (§ 220).
πτίσσω pound (Ιonic, poetic, and late), 1st aor. ἕπτισα, pf. mid. ἕπτισμαι (§ 189 note), 1st aor. pass. ἐπτίσθην (§ 189, note).
ῥαίνω (for *ῥαν–ιω, § 195, 4) sprinkle (Ιonic and poetic), fut. ῥανῶ, 1st aor. ἔρᾱνα (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. ἔρρασμαι (§ 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐρράνθην. Homer has also forms as if from root ῥαδ-: 1st aor. ἔρρασσα, and pf. δὰ pl. ἐρράδ–αται, plupk. ἐρράδατο (§ 226 a).
ῥαί-ω (§ 193) strike (poetic), fut. ῥαίσω, 1st aor. ἔρραισα, 1st aor. pass. ἐρραίσθην (§ 189).
ῥέζω (§ 195, 2; for *(ϝ)ρεγ–ιω, § 2 a, cf. ἔρδω and ἔργον work) do (poetic), fut. ῥέξω, 1st aor. ἔρρεξα and ἔρεξα, 1st aor. pass. partic. ῥεχθείς, vbl. ῥεκτός.
ῥῑγῶ(-έω) shudder (poetic), fut. ῥῑγήσω, 1st aor. ἐρρῑγησα, 2 pf. (§§ 190; 535).
ῥῑπτω, poetic 1st aor. pass. ἐρρῥῑφθην.
ῥῡ́ομαι (§ 193) defend, protect (poetic) = ἔρῡμαι, g.v., fut. ῥόσομαι, 1st zor. ἐρρῥῡσάμην, 24 aor. mid. 3d sing. ἐρ(ρ)ῡτο (§ 209), 3d pl. ῥῡ́–ατο (§§ 167 d; 171 a), pf. mid. εἴρῡμαι ? (referred also to ἔρῡμαι).
ῥυπόω soil, epic pf. mid. partic. ῥε–ρυπω–μένος (contrary to § 178, 1). Also a pres. ῥυπάω be dirty (cf. § 292, 1 and 3).
σαίνω (§ 105, 4; σαν-) fawn upon (poetic), 1st aor. ἔσηνα (§ 204, note 2).
σαόω (§292, 1; cf. σάος safe) save (poetic), fut. σαώσω, 1st aor. ἑσάωσα, 1st aor. pass. ἐσαώθην (epic. pres. subj. 2d sing. σαῷς (cf. § 170, 2; Mss. σόης, σόοις), 3d sing. σαῷ (cf. § 170, 2; Mss. σόω, σόῃ, σόοι), 3d pl. σαῶσι (Mss. σόωσι, cf. § 199 b), epic. impf. 3d sing. σάου (§ 171 a; Mss. σάω, cf. § 199 b), epic impv. 2d sing. σάου (for *σαοε; Mss. σάω, cf. § 199 b).
σεύω (§ 193; theme σευ-, συ-, § 14, 2) drive on, urge (poetic), aor. ἔσσευα (§§ 172, 1 a; 207, note 1), aor. mid. 2d sing. ἔσσυο, 3d sing. ἔσσυ–το (σύτο), and partic. σύ–μενος (§ 211 a), pf. mid. ἔσσυμαι be in haste (§ 535), 1st aor. pass. ἐσσύθην or ἐσύθην rushed (cf. § 514). Also a pres. σοῦμαι (from *σοέομαι ), etc., impv. σοῦ, σούσθω, infin. σοῦσθαι. (For σεῦ–ται, assumed to be a –μι form, perhaps σοῦται should be read).
σῑ́νοµαι (§ 195, 4; σιν-) injure, 1st aor. ἐσῑνάμην (Ιonic).
σκέλλω (§ 195, 3; σκελ-, σκλα-, §§ 14, 1; 38) dry up (Ιonic and poetic), epic 1st aor. ἔσκηλα (with η, § 204), 2d aor. intrans. (§ 294, 1), ἔσκλην (§§ 207 a; 209), 1st pf. ἕ–σκλη–κα (§ 218, 3).
σκευάζω make ready, regular, Herodotus has pf. 3d pl. ἐσκευάδ–αται, plupf. ἐσκευάδ–ατο (§ 226 a).
σκίδνη-μι (§ 193, 3) scatter (poetic) = σκεδάννυμι, q.v.
σμήχω (lonic and poetic, = σμῶ), 1st aor. ἔσμηξα, 1st aor. pass. ἐσμήχθην, σοῦμαι. See σεύω.
στάζω (§ 106, 2; σταγ-) drop (Ιonic and poetic, rare in prose), [fut. στάξω], 1st aor. ἔσταξα, pf. mid. ἕσταγμαι, aorists pass. ἐστάχθην (1st) and ἑστάγην (2d).
στείβω (§ 193, 2) tread (mostly poetic), fut. στείψω, etc., regular. Also στιβῶ (-έω), pf. mid. ἐστίβημαι.
στείχ-ω (§ 193, 2; στειχ-, στιχ-, § 14, 2) march, 1st aor. ἔστειξα, and epic 2d aor. intrans. ἔστεχον (§ 208).
στέροµαι, poetic 2d aor. pass. ἑστέρην (contrary to § 232, 2).
στεῦται, στεῦνται, and στεῦτο (poetic) set one’s self at, promise, threaten (only pres. and impt.).
στυγῶ (-έω, § 190) hate (Ionic and poetic), fut. mid. (as pass. § 515, 1) στυγήσοµαι, 1st aor. ἐστύγησα, and trans. ἔστυξα made hateful, 2d aor. (epic) ἔστυγον, 1st pL. ἐστύγηκα (§ 535), 1st aor. pass. ἐστυγήθην.
συρίζω (§ 195, note 1; συριγγ-), Attic συρίττω (§ 195, note 2) whistle, 1st aor. ἐσύριξα.
σφάζω, Ionic and poetic is the rare 1st aor. pass. ἐσφάχθην.
σχεθεῖν, ἔσχεθον, etc. See ἔχω.
[root ταγ-] only epic 2d aor. partic. τεταγών seizing (§ 208, 1 α).
Τα-νύ-ω (§ 196, 5, for *τν-νυ-ω, § 14, note; cf. τείνω) stretch (poetic and ionic), also pres. mid. τά-νυ-μαι (pres. theme is carried into the other tenses), fut. τανύω (§ 216), 1st aor. ἑτάνυσα and ἑτάνυσσα (§ 201 a), pf. mid. τετάνυσμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἑτανύσθην.
ταράττω, Ionic ταράσσω (§ 22), epic 2d pf. intrans. (§ 494, 3) τέ-τρηχ-α (§ 38) be disturbed.
[root ταφ– (for *θαφ, § 41), θηπ– (§ 13)] (poetic), only 2d aor. ἔταφον, 2d pf. τέθηπα (§ 219, 2), epic plupf. ἐ-τε-θήπεα (§ 222 a).
τεκµαίροµαι, act. τεκµαίρω set a mark is poetic.
[root τεµ-, τµ-] encounter, only epic 2d aor. ἕ-τε-τμ-ον (§ 208, 1 a) and τέ-τµ-ον (§ 171 a).
τέμνω, Ionic and poetic τάμνω, 2d aor. ἔταμον (§ 208). See also τµήγω.
τέρπω, epic 2d aor. mid. τε-ταρπ-όμην (§§ 208; 208, 1a; 171 a), subj. τετάρπωμαι and τάρπωµαι, 1st aor. pass. also ἐτάρφθην, and 2d aor. pass. (cf. § 514) ἑτάρπην, with subj. 1st pl. τραπήοµεν (88 38; 233, 1a; Mss. τραπείοµεν).
τερσαίνω (§ 195, 4) dry, epic 1st aor. τέρσηνα (§ 171 a).
τέρσοµαι (poetic) become dry, 21 aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἑτέρσην became dry.
τεταγών having seized. See [ταγ-].
τετίησθον, τετιηώς, τετιημένος. See [τιε-].
τέτµον… See [τεμ-].
τεύχ-ω (§193, 2; theme τευχ-, τυχ-, § 14, 2) make ready (poetic), fat. τεύξω, 1st aor. ἔτευξα, 20 aor. infin. (from theme τυκ-) τετυκεῖν, 3d pl. mid. τετύκοντο (§ 171 a), 2d pf. τέτευχα be ready (§ 494, 3), pf. mid. τέ–τυγ–µαι (§ 224, note; for 3d pl. τετύχ–αται, τετύχ–ατο, see § 226 a), epic 1st aor. pass. ἐπύχθην (contrary to § 231, 4). Cf. τυγχάνω.
τήκω, rare and mostly poetic is 1st aor. pass. ἐτήχθην was melted.
[root τιε-] only epic 2d pf. partic. τετιηώς troubled, dual. mid. τετίη-σθον, mid. partic. τετιηµένος troubled.
τίλλω (§.105, 3; τιλ-) pluck (mostly poetic) fut. τιλῶ, 1st aor. ἔτῑλα, pf. mid. τέτιλµαι, 1st aor. pass. ἐτίλθην.
τίνω, Homer has τῑνω (with long ι); in pres. and impf. τί-ω (§ 193) give what is due, honor (poetic), fut. τῑσω, 1st aor. ἔτῑσα, pf. mid. τετῑμένος..
τι-ταίνω (§ 195, 4; theme ταν– reduplicated; cf. τείνω) stretch (epic), st aor. ἐτίτηνα (§ 204).
[root τλη-, τλα-, ταλα-] endure (poetic), fut. τλήσοµαι, ist aor. ἑτάλασσα (ταλα-), 2d aor. ἔτλην (like ἔστην, § 257), 1st pf. τέ-τλη-κα, also 2d pf. without suffix (§§ 220; 258) τότλαµεν, opt. τετλαίην͵ imp. τέτλαθι, etc.
τµήγω (§ 193, 1; τµηγ-, τµαγ-) cut (poetic = τέμνω), fut. τµήξω, lst aor. ἔτμηξα, 2d aor. ἔτμαγον (§ 208), 2d aor. pass. ἑτμάγην (§ 232, 1).
τορῶ(-εω) pierce (poetic), fut. τορήσω, and from redup. aor. stem (§ 519, note 2) τετορήσω, 1st aor. ἑτόρησα, 2d aor. ἕτορον (cf. § 190).
τρέπω, Ιonic has sometimes τράπω, poetic 2d aor. act. ἔτραπον, Homer and Herodotus have 1st aor. pass. ἐτράφθην.
τρέφω, epic 2d aor. (intrans.) ἔτραφον grew up (§ 494, 1), poetic 1st aor. pass. ἐθρέφθην.
τρέχω, poetic fut. θρέξομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἔθρεξα (§ 41).
τρῡ́ζω (§ 195, 2, τρῑγ-) squeak (Ionic and poetic), 2d pf. τέ–τρῑγ–α (§ 535) with Epic partic. τετρῑγώς, –γῶτος, fem. τετρῑγυῖα.
τρώω wound (epic, rare) = τιτρώσκω.
τυγχάνω, epic also 1st aor. ἐτύχησα, Ιonic and late is 2d pf. τέτευχα. Homer often uses τέτυγµαι, ἐτύχθην (from τεύχω) in almost the sense of τετύχηκα, ἔτυχον.
τύπτω, epic and Ιonic 1st aor. ἔτυψα, poetic 2d aor. ἔτυπον, pf. mid. (Ιonic and poetic) τέτυμμαι (§ 27, 1), poetic 2d aor. pass. ἐτύπην.
ὑπισχνοῦμαι, Ιonic and poetic usually ὑπίσχομαι.
φαῖνω, epic also φαείνω appear, shine, 1st aor. pass. ἐφαένθην (Mss. ἐφαάνθην, cf. § 199 b). Homer has also from shorter root φα– 2d aor. φάε (§ 171 a) appeared, and fut. Df. πεφήσεται. For φάνεσκον see § 191 b.
φεῖδομαι, epic 2d aor. πεφιδόµην (§§ 208; 208, 1a; 171 a), fut. from aor. stem (§ 519 a) πεφιδήσομαι.
[root φεν-, φν-, φα (for φν-, § 14 note)] kill (epic), 2d aor. ἔ–πε–φν–ον (§§ 208; 208, 1 a) and πέφνον (§ 171 a) slew, pf. mid. πέ–φα–μαι (§ 224, note), fut. pf. πεφήσομαι (§ 228).
φέρω, epic 2d pl. impy. φέρτε (for φέρετε), for 1st aor. impy. οἷσε see § 501 b. (Herodotus has (once) 1st aor. infin. ἀν–οῖσαι.). Ιonic forms from theme ἐνεικ– are 1st aor. ἤνεικα (§ 207, note 1), 2 aor. ἤνεικον, pf. mid. ἐνήνειγμαι, 1st aor. pass. ἠνείχθην.
φεύγω, epic pf. mid. partic. πε–φυγ–μένος (§ 219 a), and pf. act. partic. πε–φυξ-ότες (as if from *φύξ–ω).
φθάνω, epic 2d aor. mid. partic. φθάμενος (§ 211 a).
φθίνω, Homer has φθίνω with long ῑ. (Two supposed occurrences of a pres. φθίω in Homer (φθίῃς, ἔφθιεν) are easily corrected to the corresponding forms (φθίεαι, ἔφθιτο) of the aor. mid.) For the epic 2d aor. opt. φθῑ́μην, etc. (for *φθι–ι-μην) see § 211, 2 a. For pf. 3d pl. ἕ-φθι-ατο see § 226 a. Epic 1st aor. pass. ἐφθίθην (3d pl. ἔφθι–θεν, § 233 a).
φιλῶ, epic 1st aor. mid., from stem φιλ– (cf. § 190), ἐ-φῑλ-άμην (§ 204). For epic pres. infin. φιλή-μεναι see § 199 d.
φλεγ-έθω (§ 191 a) burn (poetic) = φλέγω.
φράζω, epic 2d aor. ἐ-πέ-φραδ-ον (§ 208, 1 a) or πέφραδον (§ 171 a).
φρῡ́γω, aorists pass. (Ιonic and late) ἐφρύχθην 1st, ἐφρύγην 2d.
φῡ́ρω, epic 1st aor. ἔφυρσα (§ 204 a), poetic 1st aor. pass. ἐφύρθην.
φῡ́ω, in Homer usually with ὔ in epic also 2d pf. (§ 220) 3d pl. πε-ϕύ-ᾱσι, partic. πε-φυ-ώς (fem. ἐμ-πεφυνῖα), lst plupf. with variable vowel ἐ-πέ-φῡκ-ον.
χαίρω, epic 1st aor. mid. 3d sing. χήρατο (§§ 204; 171 a), epic 2d aor. mid. κεχαρόμην (§§ 208, 1a; 171 a).
χανδάνω (§ 196, 2; theme χονδ-, χενδ-, χαδ– (for χνδ-, § 14, note) contain (Ionic and poetic), fut. χείσεται (for *χενδσεται, § 34), 2d aor. ἔχαδον, 2d pf. κέχανδα Mss. (better κέχονδα, § 219, 3).
χάσκω (for *χαν–σκω?, § 197; theme χην-, χαν-, § 10) gape (Ionic and poetic), fut. χανοῦμαι, 2d aor. ἔχανον, 2d pf. κέχηνα be agape (§ 535).
χέω, epic pres. rarely χείω, epic aor. also ἔχευα; for epic 2d aor. mid. as pass. ἔχυτο see §§ 211 a; § 515, 1.
[root χραισμ-] help, avert (epic), only 2d aor. ἔχραισμον; also from χραισμε– (§ 190), fut. χραισμήσω, 1st aor. ἐχραίσμησα.
Χρῴζω, poetic χροῑ́ζω.
χρῶ, χρῶμαι, in Ιonic contract to ᾱ where Attic has η; as 3d sing. χρᾶται, infin. χρᾶσθαι, etc.; pres. subj. χρέωμαι, etc. (cf. § 199 c); partic. χρεώμενος (cf. § 199 c).
ὠθῶ, poetic fut. sometimes ὠθήσω (§ 190), Ιonic 1st aor. (contracted) ὦσα, pf. mid. ὦσμαι.